Winged Deer 1Specs

PROJECT MANUAL
WINGED DEER PARK

ATHLETIC COMPLEX EXPANSION
City of Johnson City, TN
ITB# 6590
Proposal Due Date/Time

March 9, 2022; 2:00PM (Eastern Time)
City of Johnson City

Purchasing Department
209 Water Street (37601)
P. O. Box 2150 (37605)
Johnson City, TN
Prepared by:
CHA
3008 Topside Business Park Drive
Louisville, TN 37777
(518) 453-4500
WINGED DEER PARK ATHLETIC COMPLEX EXPANSION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION SECTION
NUMBER TITLE PAGES
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
BIDDERS INSTRUCTIONS
INSURANCE CHECKLIST
GENERAL CONTRACT FORM
BID FORM
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF FORMS WITH IRAN DIVESTMENT ACT
DRUG FREE WORKPLACE
ESCROW AGREEMENT
BID ENVELOPE FORM
SUPPLEMENTAL BID PAGES:

Sealed Solicitation General Terms and Conditions, Requirements for Bids, Requests for Proposals, and Contracts
Between the City of Johnson City and Other Parties, and Statement of Solicitation Decline
CONSTRUCTION PAYMENT BOND
CONSTRUCTION PERFORMANCE BOND
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 1000 Summary ....................................................................................................................... 2

01 1400 Work Restrictions ......................................................................................................... 1
01 3000 Project Management and Coordination ......................................................................... 6
01 3200 Construction Progress Documentation .......................................................................... 7
01 3300 Submittal Procedures .................................................................................................... 8
01 4000 Quality Requirements ................................................................................................... 5
01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls ................................................................................ 11
01 7700 Closeout Procedures...................................................................................................... 6
01 7839 Project Record Documents ............................................................................................ 3
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 3000 Cast-in-Place Concrete ................................................................................................ 12

03 4816 Concrete Splash Blocks ................................................................................................ 1
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
04 0511 Mortar and Masonry Grout ........................................................................................... 5

04 2000 Unit Masonry ................................................................................................................ 12
DIVISION 05 - METALS
PAGE 1 OF 5
CHA PROJECT NO. 070605
TOC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION SECTION
NUMBER TITLE PAGES
05 1200 Structural Steel Framing ............................................................................................... 7

05 5000 Metal Fabrications......................................................................................................... 7
DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
06 1000 Rough Carpentry ........................................................................................................... 9

06 1733 Wood I-Joists ................................................................................................................ 4
06 1753 Shop Fabricated Wood Trusses ..................................................................................... 4
06 4100 Architectural Wood Casework ...................................................................................... 6
06 4600 Wood Trim .................................................................................................................... 3
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 2113 Board Insulation ............................................................................................................ 6

07 2115 Batt Insulation ............................................................................................................... 4
07 2600 Vapor Retarders ............................................................................................................ 4
07 2726 Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers .......................................................................... 6
07 3010 Roofing Underlayment.................................................................................................. 4
07 4113 Metal Roof Panels ......................................................................................................... 6
07 4610 Fiber Cement Siding ..................................................................................................... 7
07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ..................................................................................... 8
07 7200 Roof Accessories .......................................................................................................... 3
07 7253 Snow Guards ................................................................................................................. 3
07 7255 Roof Accessory Attachment System ............................................................................. 3
07 8400 Firestopping .................................................................................................................. 8
07 9200 Joint Sealers .................................................................................................................. 10
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames .................................................................................. 9

08 3110 Wall and Ceiling Access Panels .................................................................................... 3
08 3313 Coiling Counter Shutters ............................................................................................... 4
08 3323 Overhead Coiling Doors ............................................................................................... 5
08 5113 Aluminum Windows ..................................................................................................... 6
08 7100.1 Hardware Schedule ....................................................................................................... 7
08 7100 Door Hardware.............................................................................................................. 15
08 8000 Glazing .......................................................................................................................... 8
08 9100 Louvers ......................................................................................................................... 3
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 2216 Non-Structural Metal Framing ...................................................................................... 4

09 2900 Gypsum Board .............................................................................................................. 8
09 3000 Tiling ............................................................................................................................. 6
09 6500 Resilient Flooring.......................................................................................................... 6
09 8116 Acoustic Blanket Insulation .......................................................................................... 3
09 9100 Painting ......................................................................................................................... 7
PAGE 2 OF 5
TOC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION SECTION
NUMBER TITLE PAGES
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
10 1400 Signage.......................................................................................................................... 3
10 2100 Solid Polymer (HDPE) Toilet Compartments ............................................................... 5
10 2813 Toilet Accessories ......................................................................................................... 7
10 2814 Baby Changing Station ................................................................................................. 3
10 2819 Shower Enclosures ........................................................................................................ 4
10 4413 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets.................................................................................... 3
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
11 6833 Outdoor Sports Equipment............................................................................................ 4
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHING
12 3600 Countertops ................................................................................................................... 5
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
22 0500 Common Work for Plumbing........................................................................................ 7

22 0501 General Work for Plumbing .......................................................................................... 8
22 0529 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing ............................................................................. 6
22 0553 Identification for Plumbing ........................................................................................... 4
22 0719 Plumbing Piping Insulation ........................................................................................... 13
22 1116 Domestic Water Piping ................................................................................................. 3
22 1316 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping ................................................................................... 3
22 1423 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties ................................................................................ 2
22 3000 Plumbing Equipment..................................................................................................... 3
DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING
23 0500 Common Work for HVAC ............................................................................................ 7

23 0501 General Work for HVAC .............................................................................................. 8
23 0529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC ................................................................................. 5
23 0553 Identification for Piping and Equipment ....................................................................... 4
23 0593 Testing Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC ................................................................ 3
23 0713 Duct Insulation .............................................................................................................. 10
23 0719 HVAC Piping Insulation ............................................................................................... 10
23 3113 Metal Ductwork ............................................................................................................ 7
23 3300 Ductwork Accessories................................................................................................... 4
23 3700 Air Outlets & Inlets ....................................................................................................... 4
23 3723 Gravity Ventilator ......................................................................................................... 5
23 3813 Kitchen Hood and Make-Up Air Systems ..................................................................... 4
23 8143 Electric Heat Pump Split Systems................................................................................. 3
PAGE 3 OF 5
TOC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION SECTION
NUMBER TITLE PAGES
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 0000 General Electrical.......................................................................................................... 4

26 0300 Supporting Devices ....................................................................................................... 1
26 0519 600-Volt Conductors ..................................................................................................... 1
26 0526 Electrical Service and Grounding ................................................................................. 1
26 0533 Conduit.......................................................................................................................... 1
26 0534 Boxes ............................................................................................................................ 2
26 0535 Communications Terminal Spaces ................................................................................ 1
26 0553 Equipment Identification............................................................................................... 1
26 0923 Occupancy Sensors ....................................................................................................... 1
26 2213 Dry-Type Transformers ................................................................................................ 1
26 2416 Panelboards ................................................................................................................... 2
26 2726 Wiring Devices ............................................................................................................. 1
26 2816 Safety Switches ............................................................................................................. 1
26 2913 Manual Motor Starters .................................................................................................. 1
26 4313 Surge Protection Devices .............................................................................................. 3
26 5100 LED Interior Lighting ................................................................................................... 4
26 5400 LED Exterior Lighting .................................................................................................. 5
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
31 0519.3 Geotextiles .................................................................................................................... 4

31 2000 Earth Moving ................................................................................................................ 6
31 2305 Structure Excavation, Backfilling and Compaction ...................................................... 7
31 2316.26 Rock Removal ............................................................................................................... 6
31 2333 Trenching and Backfilling............................................................................................. 6
31 3116 Termite Control ............................................................................................................. 4
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 1116 Subbase Courses ........................................................................................................... 4

32 1216 Asphalt Paving .............................................................................................................. 3
32 1313 Concrete Paving ............................................................................................................ 6
32 1613.16 Cast-in-Place Concrete Curbing .................................................................................... 6
32 1630 Concrete Sidewalks ....................................................................................................... 5
32 1813 Synthetic Turf Playing Field System ............................................................................ 10
32 3113 Chain Link Fence and Gates ......................................................................................... 7
32 3223 Modular Block Retaining Walls.................................................................................... 8
32 8425 Automatic Sports Field Irrigation System ..................................................................... 13
32 9000 Planting ......................................................................................................................... 13
32 9110 Sand Capped Rootzone Mix for Athletic Fields ........................................................... 7
32 9113 Soil Preparation ............................................................................................................. 5
32 9200 Turf and Grasses ........................................................................................................... 5
32 9223.10 Sodded Athletic Fields .................................................................................................. 4
PAGE 4 OF 5
TOC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION SECTION
NUMBER TITLE PAGES
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
33 0500 Common Work Results for Utilities.............................................................................. 11

33 0513 Manholes and Structures ............................................................................................... 6
33 0514 Precast Sanitary Structures............................................................................................ 5
33 1112 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe and Fittings ................................................. 7
33 1216 Water Distribution Valves............................................................................................. 4
33 3110 Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping .................................................................................. 2
33 4100 Surface Drainage Systems............................................................................................. 5
33 4100.20 High Density Polyethylene Storm Utility Drainage Piping .......................................... 2
APPENDICES
Geotechnical Exploration Report – Bay View Village Apartments ....................................................... 78

Geotechnical Exploration Report ........................................................................................................... 55
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE 5 OF 5
TOC
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
WINGED DEER PARK – ATHLETIC COMPLEX IMPROVEMENTS
Sealed bids for Winged Deer Park – Athletic Complex Improvements (ITB #6590), will be received by the City of
Johnson City, Purchasing Director at 209 Water Street, Johnson City, Tennessee 37601 until 2:00pm local time, on
March 9, 2022 at which time they will be publicly opened and read aloud. Bids received after that time will not be
considered. An optional virtual pre-bid will be held 2/24 at 1:00 pm, local time.
Work shall include, but not be limited to: The construction of four softball fields, a multipurpose field, parking lot,
access road, concrete sidewalks, athletic support building, maintenance building, retaining walls, sports lighting,
pedestrian & parking lot lighting, concrete curbs, synthetic and natural turf, turf irrigation system, chain link fencing,
dugouts, bullpens, foul poles, backstops, concrete bleacher pads, storm drainage piping and SWM systems, water
service, electric service, sanitary service, site grading including rock removal, erosion and sedimentation controls,
landscaping and all work shown on the contract documents to complete the Athletic Complex Expansion of Winged
Deer Park. Project substantial completion shall be within 263 calendar days and final completion shall be within 284
calendar days of contract issue, otherwise penalties apply.
Copies of the bidding documents including drawings and specifications may be obtained from the Johnson City
Purchasing Office: 209 Water Street, Johnson City (423) 975-2716. Documents will also be available electronically
upon request. Please contact Daniel Deats of CHA via email at ddeats@chacompanies.com.
All Bidders must be licensed contractors as required by Contractor’s Licensing Act 1994 (TCA Title 62, Chapter 6) and
all requirements therein. The project requires a 5% Bid Bond, specific insurance and 100% Payment and Performance
Bond. Contractors must comply with all Drug Free Requirements.
The City reserves the right to reject any and all bids, to waive informalities, and to accept the bid or bids that are judged
to be in the best interest of the City. The City of Johnson City is an Equal Opportunity Employer.
ITB #6590 – ATHLETIC COMPLEX EXPANSION
BIDDERS INSTRUCTIONS
1. SCOPE OF WORK
Contractor shall provide all equipment, labor and materials and services as required for the construction of
four softball fields, a multipurpose field, parking lot, access road, concrete sidewalks, athletic support
building, maintenance building, retaining walls, sports lighting, pedestrian & parking lot lighting, concrete
curbs, synthetic and natural turf, turf irrigation system, chain link fencing, dugouts, bullpens, foul poles,
backstops, concrete bleacher pads, storm drainage piping and SWM systems, water service, electric service,
sanitary service, site grading including rock removal, erosion and sedimentation controls, landscaping and
all work shown on the contract documents to complete the Athletic Complex Expansion of Winged Deer
Park.
2. CONTACT PERSON
All technical questions and/or substitution requests for pre-approval shall be directed to Daniel Deats, CHA
at ddeats@chacompanies.com for bid submittal questions please contact Purchasing at 423-975-2715 or
purchasing@johnsoncitytn.org.
3. JOBSITE VISIT REQUIRED
All bidders MUST visit the jobsite to familiarize themselves with the project area. Contractor shall assume
all responsibility relating to all the requirements in submitting this bid. Vendor is responsible for any and
all costs associated with the design, certification, fabrication, and installation as per these specifications.
4. OPTIONAL PRE-BID WEB MEETING

An optional pre-bid conference will be held via Zoom video conference on February 24th at 1:00PM ET.
The purpose of the conference is to discuss the project scope of services. While questions will be
entertained, the response to any questions at the Pre-Proposal Conference shall be considered tentative and
non-binding with regard to the bid. The official response to questions will be issued by the Owner through
the Director of Purchasing. All questions shall be submitted, in writing to the City’s representative Daniel
Deats, no later than March 3rd.
Join Zoom Meeting

https://us02web.zoom.us/j/81934506578?pwd=NXdhcmIrdGMvdHdZWU00bDhqY3Yydz09
Meeting ID: 819 3450 6578

Passcode: 715063
If you do not have access to a webcam, or you have no audio with your system, you can call this number
to join: (646) 518-9805. Any issues accessing the zoom web meeting please call 423.975.2715 for direct
assistance
5. LICENSES, FEES, PERMITS

The Contractor is responsible for furnishing the proper licenses, fees, and permits required by law to do
business in the City of Johnson City in completion of the requirements stated herein. All work shall be
done in accordance with the latest building codes, state and federal laws as applicable.
6. STATE CONTRACTORS LICENSING
All bidders must be licensed contractors in the State of Tennessee, as required by the Contractor's Licensing
Act of 1994 (TCA Title 62, Chapter 6) State of Tennessee. The attached “Contractors Envelope Form”
must be completed and attached to the outermost proposal submittal envelope or it will not be opened. A
copy of State Contractor’s License shall be included with bid package.
7. BID SECURITIES
7.1 Bid Bond - Each bid shall be accompanied by a bid bond in the amount of not less than five percent (5%)
of the total amount proposed. Bond shall be issued by a surety company licensed to do business in the State
of Tennessee. This bond is required as a guarantee that, if the bid is accepted, a contract will be entered
into and the performance thereof duly secured by an approved performance bond. If the successful bidder
fails to execute required contracts, the bid security will be forfeited. Bid bonds submitted by unsuccessful
vendors will be returned upon award of the contract. In lieu of a bond, cashier’s checks are acceptable,
personal checks are not.
7.2 The successful bidder will be required to furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in the amount of one
hundred percent (100%) of the bid price. Bond shall be issued by a surety company licensed to do business
in the State of Tennessee. Performance bonds must be filed with the purchasing department within ten (10)
working days after the contract has been issued. In lieu of a bond, cashier’s checks are acceptable, personal
checks are not. An irrevocable letter of credit from a state or national bank or state or federal savings and
loan association having its principal office in Tennessee may be accepted instead of a performance bond,
subject to approval of the terms and conditions of said irrevocable letter of credit. In the event that the
successful bidder fails to furnish a performance bond and execute a contract within the time period allowed,
the bid deposit of the bidder shall be retained by the city as liquidated damages and not as a penalty.
8. ADDENDA
In the event it becomes necessary to revise any part of this bid, addenda will be provided from the City‘s
Purchasing Department, in writing, to all known interested bidders. Verbal responses shall not be binding.
It is the Proposer’s responsibility to assure receipt of all addenda. All Proposers should contact the City
prior to submitting a response to ascertain whether any addenda have been issued. Please check
www.johnsoncitytn.org/purchasing for any addendums issued.
9. PROJECT TIME FRAME
The contract time shall run on a calendar day basis and substantial completion of work shall be completed
within 263 calendar days from Date of Contract Issue with final completion of work being complete
within 284 calendar days from Date of Contract Issue. Date of Contract Issue shall be defined as the
date that a Purchase Order for this project is issued to the Contractor. This contract time includes days
necessary to design, fabricate and complete the project. It accounts for time to include bad weather and
holidays. If Contractor is delayed in the performance or progress of the Work by events beyond their control,
then a request to extend the deadline must be made to the City’s Representative, Daniel Deats. Any such
agreement must be in writing. Liquidated damages for delay of completion of this contract shall be assessed
at $1000 per day.
10. DRUG FREE WORKPLACE
10.1 All proposers must execute the enclosed Drug Free Workplace Affidavit to verify compliance with TCA
50-9-113 and return same with bid response. Failure to comply with this requirement will declare that
proposal non-responsive.
10.2 Purpose of the Drug & Alcohol Testing Program
The City of Johnson City recognizes its responsibility to provide safe and efficient operations for our
employees, our citizens and the general public. Our commitment to provide safe and efficient operations
is shown by the implementation of programs and procedures which ensure compliance with appropriate
safety measures, as well as the letter and intent of all applicable laws and regulations. There is sufficient
evidence to conclude that the use of illegal drug/alcohol; drug/alcohol dependence and drug/alcohol abuse
seriously impairs an employee’s performance and general physical and mental health. The illegal
possession and use of drugs, alcohol and/or narcotics by employees of the City is a crime in this jurisdiction
and is clearly unacceptable. Therefore, the City of Johnson City has adopted this written policy to ensure
an employee’s fitness for duty as a condition of employment; to ensure the drug tests and alcohol tests are
conducted on safety-sensitive positions in the categories of: pre-employment, random testing, suspicion
testing, and return-to-duty testing.
10.3 To comply with TCA Title 50 Chapter 9 Part 1, all bidders and/or proposers of service to the City must
have a testing program of the same or better than the requirements of the City of Johnson City.
11. PAYMENT TERMS
Progress payments will be made based on an agreed Schedule of Values. Successful contractors shall
submit a Schedule of Values to Owner’s Representative at least twenty (20) calendar days prior to
submitting first application for Payment. Approved Schedule of Values will be used as basis for reviewing
Vendor’s Application for Payment. Total of costs listed in Schedule of Values shall equal Contract Sum.
Payment Applications can be submitted monthly as work progresses, pending acceptance by the City. In
Application for Payment, list installed and completed value of component parts of work in sufficient detail
to serve as basis for computing values for progress payments. Final payment will be after satisfactory
completion, inspection and acceptance of the Complex by the City and issuance of warranty statements.
12. INSURANCE
The attached Insurance Checklist (which includes a section for the Insurance agent to fill- out) and General Contract
Form must be completed and returned with the bid package. If bidder currently does not meet these insurance
requirements but plans to obtain if awarded this project, then state so on the checklist. Successful vendor shall
provide certificate of insurance, as specified, prior to project release by Purchasing.
13. RETAINAGE ESCROW

State Law (TCA § 66-34-104) requires a separate escrow account for retainage withheld on construction
contracts and sub-contracts of $500,000 or greater. The attached Retainage Escrow Account Agreement
shall be executed by the successful contractor.
14. REQUIREMENTS FOR BIDS, REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS AND CONTRACTS
This Proposal, and any response to it, also includes the City’s “Requirements for Bids, Requests for
Proposals, and Contracts, etc.” and “Sealed Solicitation General Terms and Conditions: attached hereto and
set forth herein as if verbatim.
15. RIGHTS AND OPTIONS OF THE CITY OF JOHNSON CITY

The City reserves the following rights and options:
 Determine those bidders who are most qualified.
 Reject any or all submittals, for any reason, at its sole discretion.
 Supplement, amend, or otherwise modify this solicitation.
 Cancel this solicitation with or without submission of another solicitation.
 Reserve the right to request additional information as part of this selection process.
 Issue additional solicitations for information and proposals, and conduct investigations with respect
to the qualifications of each respondent.
16. BID WITHDRAWAL DUE TO ERROR
If within 24 hours after Bids are opened any Bidder files a duly signed written notice with Owner and
promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and
substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid, and the Bid Security will
be returned, Thereafter, if the work is rebid or negotiated, that Bidder will be disqualified from further
bidding on the Work. This provision to withdraw a Bid without forfeiting the Bid security does not apply to
Bidder's error in judgment in preparing the bid.
INSURANCE CHECKLIST
(Winged Deer Park Athletic Complex Improvements – ITB# 6590)
REQUIRED COVERAGE (marked by “x”) MINIMUM LIMITS

X 1. Worker’s Compensation (proprietor/partners/executive officers exclusion not allowed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Statutory limits of Tennessee
and Employer's Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $100,000/accident, $100,000/disease, $500,000/disease policy limit
X 2. Commercial General Liability (including Premises/Operations) . . . . . . . . . . . $1,000,000 CSL BI/PD each occurrence, $1 Million
annual aggregate
X 3. Automobile Liability & Owned/Hired/Non-Owned Vehicles . . . . . . . . . $1,000,000 BI/PD each accident, Uninsured Motorist
X 4. Independent Contractors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1,000,000 CSL BI/PD each occurrence, $1 Million annual aggregate
X 5. Products/Completed Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1,000,000 CSL BI/PD each occurrence, $1 Million annual aggregate
X 6. Contractual Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1,000,000 CSL BI/PD each occurrence, $1 Million annual aggregate
X 7. Personal and Advertising Injury Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1,000,000 each offense, $1 Million annual aggregate
X 8. Umbrella Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $5 Million Bodily Injury, Property Damage and Personal Injury
X 9. Per Project Aggregate
10. Professional Liability
a. Architects and Engineers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1 Million per occurrence/claim
b. Asbestos Removal Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $2 Million per occurrence/claim
c. Medical Malpractice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1 Million per occurrence/claim
d. Medical Professional Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1 Million per occurrence/claim
X 11. Miscellaneous E & O / Professional Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1 Million per occurrence/claim
12. Motor Carrier Act End. (MCS-90) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1 Million BI/PD each accident, Uninsured Motorist
13. Motor Cargo Insurance
14. Garage Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1 Million Bodily Injury, Property Damage per occurrence
15. Garagekeepers Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $500,000 Comprehensive, $500,000 Collision
16. Inland Marine-Bailee's Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $_______________
17. Moving and Rigging Floater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Endorsement to CGL
18. Dishonesty Bond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $_______________
X 19. Builder's Risk/Installation Floater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Provide coverage in the full amount of contract
X 20. XCU Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify included in CGL
X 21. Carrier Rating shall be Best's Rating of A- size 7 or better or its equivalent
X 22. Notice of cancellation, non-renewal or material change in coverage shall be provided to City at least 30 days prior to
action. Worker’s Compensation and/or non-payment of premium - notification may be 10 days prior to action.
X 23. The City of Johnson City shall be named as Additional Insured on all policies except Worker’s Compensation and
Professional Liability. Per Acord 25 (2009/01), policies must be endorsed to incl. on-going & completed operations;
must submit copy of endorsement(s). (Cert. Holder: City of Johnson City, Attn: Purchasing, P.O. Box 2150, Johnson
City, TN 37605. Email: purchasing@johnsoncitytn.org.)
X 24. Certificate of Insurance shall show project number or other contract identifier used by the City.
X 25. OTHER INSURANCE REQUIRED: Contractors Pollution Liability: $1 million per Occurrence/$2 million aggregate
INSURANCE AGENT'S/BROKER’S STATEMENT:

I have reviewed the above requirements with the bidder named below. The bidder has coverage with this agency for all of the
areas marked with the exception of the following numbers:
_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ Comments: _______________________________________________
Is Professional Liability excluded under General Liability? Yes_____ No_____
Is Contractual Liability excluded under Comm. General Liability? Yes_____ No_____
Is Independent Contractors excluded under Comm. General Liability? Yes_____ No_____
Carrier ratings: Insurer A________; Insurer B________; Insurer C________; Insurer D________
AGENCY NAME: ________________________________ AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE: ______________________________

Date: ______________________________
CONTRACTOR’S STATEMENT:
I have reviewed the above requirements with my insurance agent(s) and, if awarded a contract, will provide all coverage marked.
CONTRACTOR’S NAME: ______________________________ AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE: ___________________________

Date: _____________________________ AUTHORIZED (Printed):
Bid Number: ITB# 6590
Bid or Project Name: WINGED DEER PARK ATHLETIC COMPLEX EXPANSION
This form and the General Contract Form shall be signed and returned with the bid package. The
Certificate of Insurance must be provided to Purchasing prior to contract award.
GENERAL CONTRACT FORM
The General Contract Form is included in every solicitation requiring insurance. The
general requirements of the contract form are supplemented by items checked on the
Insurance Checklist that identify specific requirements for the bid or project.
INSURANCE
Review this section carefully with your insurance agent or broker prior to submitting a bid or
proposal. See Insurance Checklist (part of the Bid Forms) for specific coverage applicable to
this contract. The term “Contract” as used in this section shall mean the Agreement covering
the work that is entered into between the City of Johnson City, Tennessee and the Contractor.
1. General Insurance Requirements:
1.1 The Contractor shall not start work under this contract until the Contractor has obtained
at its own expense all of the insurance called for hereunder and such insurance has been
approved by the City; nor shall the Contractor allow any subcontractor to start work on any
subcontract until all insurance required of the subcontractor has been so obtained and
approved by the Contractor. Approval of insurance required of the Contractor will be granted
only after submission to the Director of Purchasing of original, signed Certificate(s) of
Insurance, General Contract Form, and Insurance Checklist or, alternately, at the City’s
request, certified copies of the required insurance policies.
1.2 No acceptance and/or approval of any insurance by the City shall be construed as
relieving or excusing the Contractor, or the surety, or its bond, from any liability or obligation
imposed upon either or both of them by the provisions of the Contract Documents.
1.3 The City of Johnson City (including its elected and appointed officials, agents, and
employees) is to be named as an additional insured under all coverage except
Worker’s Compensation, Automobile Liability, and Professional Liability and the
Certificate of Insurance or the certified policy, if requested, must so state. Coverage
afforded under this paragraph shall be primary and non-contributory as respects the City, its
elected and appointed officials, agents and employees. The following definition of the term
“City” applies to all policies issued under the contract:
“The City of Johnson City, Tennessee together with all of its various
departments, bureaus, and agencies, as well as any affiliated or subsidiary
board, committee, or authority, including but not limited to the City of Johnson
City, Dept. of Education (A.K.A “Johnson City Schools”).”
1.4 The contractor shall provide insurance as specified in the Insurance Checklist contained
in this document. In the event that Contractor maintains insurance coverage that is broader
than the minimum required by this Agreement, this Agreement shall be deemed to require
the broader coverage, including but not limited to any greater limits and any excess or
umbrella coverages.
Insurance Guide-Builders Risk
Revised 10/12/2020
1.5 The Contractor covenants to save, defend, hold harmless and indemnify the City of
Johnson City, Tennessee together with its various departments, elected or appointed officials,
employees, officers, counsel, agents, and any and all other persons or entities acting on
behalf of the same (collectively the City) from and against any and all claims of any sort based
upon any theory of liability whatsoever, for any and all harm, loss, damage, injury, cost
(including court cost and attorney fees) charges, or other liability of any nature whatsoever,
however caused, resulting from or arising out of or in any way connected with the contractors
performance or non-performance of the terms of the contract documents or its obligations
under the contract based upon any theory of liability whatsoever, including claims brought by
third persons, and further covenants to discharge all of the aforesaid persons and entities and
forever hold them harmless from the same. The foregoing obligation to indemnify and defend
shall continue in full force and effect after the aforesaid contractor completes all of the work
required under the contract, until such time as the applicable statutes of limitation or repose
have expired.
1.6 The Contractor shall be responsible for the work performed under the Contract
Documents and every part thereof, and for all materials, tools, equipment, appliances, and
property of any description used in connection with the work. The Contractor assumes all
risks for direct and indirect damage or injury to the property or persons used or employed on
or in connection with the work contracted for, and of all damage or injury to any person or
property wherever located, resulting from any action, omission, commission or operation
under the Contract, or in connection in any way whatsoever with the contracted work, until
final acceptance of the work by the City.
1.7 Insurance coverage required in these specifications shall be in force throughout the
Contract Term. If the Contractor fails to provide acceptable evidence of current insurance
within ten days of written notice at any time during the Contract Term, the City shall have
absolute right to terminate the Contract without any further obligation to the Contractor and
the Contractor shall be liable to the City for the entire additional cost of procuring
performance by another vendor and the cost of performing the incomplete portion of the
Contract at time of termination. Contractor is required to provide the City with notice of
cancellation, non-renewal, or material change in coverage at least thirty (30) days prior to
cancellation, non-renewal, or material change in coverage.”
1.8 Contractual and other liability insurance provided under this Contract shall not contain a
supervision, inspection or engineering services exclusion that would preclude the City from
supervising or inspecting the project as to the end result. The Contractor shall assume all
on-the-job responsibilities as to the control of persons directly employed by it and of the
subcontractors and any persons employed by the subcontractor.
1.9 Nothing contained in the specifications shall be construed as creating any contractual
relationship between any subcontractor and the City. The Contractor shall be as fully
responsible to the City for acts and omissions of the subcontractors and of persons employed
by them as it is for acts and omissions of persons directly employed by the Contractor.
1.10 Precaution shall be exercised by the Contractor at all times for the protection of persons
(including employees) and property. All existing structures, utilities, roads, services, trees
and shrubbery shall be protected against damage or interruption of service at all times by the
Contractor and its subcontractors during the term of the Contract, and the Contractor shall be

Revised 10/12/2020
held responsible for any damage to property occurring by reason of its operation on the
property.
1.11 If a Contractor can not meet the insurance requirements contained in a bid, proposal,
or project description, alternate insurance coverage may be considered. Written requests for
consideration of alternate coverage must be received by the Director of Purchasing at least
ten working days prior to the date set for receipt of bids or proposals. If the City denies the
request for alternate coverage, the specified coverage will be required to be submitted. If the
City permits alternate coverage, an amendment to the Insurance Requirement will be
prepared and distributed prior to the time and date set for receipt of bids or proposals.
1.12 All required insurance coverage must be acquired from insurers authorized to do
business in the State of Tennessee, and acceptable to the City. The insurers must also have
policyholders’ rating of “A“ or better, and a financial size of “Class VII” or better in the latest
edition of Best’s Insurance Reports, unless the City grants specific approval for an exception
in the same manner as described in 1.11 above.
1.13 The City may consider deductible amounts as part of its review of financial stability. The
Contractor shall assume all deductibles.
2. Contractor’s Insurance – Occurrence Basis:
2.1 The Contractor shall purchase the following insurance coverage, including the terms,
provisions and limits shown in the Checklist:
 Commercial General Liability – The Commercial General Liability policy shall include
any or all of the following as indicated on the Checklist:
i. General aggregate limit is to apply per project;
ii. Premises/Operations;
iii. Action of Independent Contractors;
iv. Contractual Liability including protection for the Contractor from

claims arising out of liability assumed under this contract;
v. Personal Injury Liability including coverage for offenses related

to employment;
vi. Explosion, Collapse, or Underground (XCU) hazards.
 Professional Liability/Miscellaneous Errors and Omissions insurance which will

pay for injuries arising out of errors or omissions in the rendering, or failure to render,
professional services under the contract, in the amount shown in the Checklist.
 Business Automobile Liability including coverage for any owned, hired, or non-owned
motor vehicles, Uninsured Motorists insurance, and Automobile Contractual Liability.

Revised 10/12/2020
 Worker’s Compensation – statutory benefits as required by the State of Tennessee, or
other laws as required by labor union agreements, including standard Other States
coverage; Employers’ Liability coverage.
 Railroad Protective Liability – Including coverage for third-party bodily injury and
property damage resulting from contractor’s work for which the railroad could be held
liable, physical damage to the railroad’s property, and defense expenses.
 Builder’s Risk Insurance

 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain Builder’s Risk Insurance with a limit equal to the initial
contract amount and any amendments to the contract that affect the project cost on a replacement
cost basis. Insurance shall be maintained until final payment under the contract has been made or
until no person or entity other than the City has an insurable interest in the covered property,
whichever is earlier. The Builder’s Risk Insurance shall include the City, Contractor, subcontractors
and sub-subcontractors as named insured.
 Insurance shall be on an all-risks policy form including the perils of fire, extended coverage, theft,
vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, and earthquake. Coverage is to apply for demolition
occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements and Architect’s fees. Coverage
for the peril of flood shall not be required unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
 The Contractor shall be responsible for payment of any deductibles applicable to the coverage.
 Unless otherwise provided in the contract documents, the Builder’s Risk Insurance shall cover
materials to be incorporated into the project, which are stored off the site.
 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain Boiler and Machinery insurance if required by the
contract documents or by law with a limit satisfactory to the City. The City shall be included as a
named insured.
 The City and Contractor waive all rights against each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-
subcontractors, agents, employees, and consultants for damages caused by perils covered by this
Builder’s Risk Insurance or other property insurance applicable to the project. The policies shall
provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.
 Any loss under Builder’s Risk Insurance shall be payable to the City as fiduciary for the insured as
their interests may appear, subject to any mortgagee clause. The Contractor shall pay
subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by
appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require subcontractors to
make payments to their sub-subcontractors in similar manner.
 The City, as fiduciary, shall have the right to adjust and settle a loss with insurers.
 The insurance company providing the Builder’s Risk coverage shall grant permission for the City
to partially occupy or use the premises under construction prior to final acceptance.
3. Commercial General or other Liability Insurance – Claims-made Basis:
If Commercial General or other liability insurance purchased by the Contractor has been
issued on a claims-made basis, the Contractor must comply with the following additional
conditions. The limits of liability and the extensions to be included as described in the
Checklist remain the same. The Contractor must either:
i. Agree to provide certificates of insurance evidencing the above

coverage for a period of three years for Professional Liability; two years
for CGL and other Liability, after final payment for the contract. Such
certificates shall evidence a retroactive date, no later than the beginning
of the Contractors or subcontractors’ work under this contract, or

Revised 10/12/2020
ii. Purchase an extended (minimum three years for Professional Liability;
two years for CGL and other Liability) reporting period endorsement for
the policy or policies in force during the term of this contract and
evidence the purchase of this extended reporting period endorsement
by means of a certificate of insurance or a copy of the endorsement
itself.
4. Alternative Coverage (Self Insurance)
Notwithstanding any of the above, the Contractor may satisfy its obligations under this section
by means of self-insurance for all or any part of the insurance required, provided that the
alternative coverage is acceptable to the City.
5. Limits of Liability Coverage
Specific limits of liability coverage on the Insurance Checklist may be adjusted according to
project risk if the adjustment is deemed appropriate and the amended amount is approved by
the City Manager.
6. Verification of Compliance
I have read this General Contract Form and agree to all the terms and conditions contained
therein.
Contractor’s Name: ____________________________________

EIN or SSN: ____________________________________
Authorized Representative (Printed):
Authorized Representative (Signature): __________________________________
Title: ____________________________________
Date: ____________________________________
This form and the Insurance Checklist must be completed and returned with Certificate
of Insurance, as specified, prior to contract award.

Revised 10/12/2020
INVITATION TO BID
CITY OF JOHNSON CITY, TENNESSEE
PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
WWW.JOHNSONCITYTN.ORG/PURCHASING 423/975-2715
Bid Name / Number WINGED DEER PARK - ATHLETIC COMPLEX EXPANSION - PROJECT / #6590
Due Day / Date / Time Wednesday March 9, 2022 / 2:00 PM ET
Bid Location / Mail Address Johnson City Purchasing Department, Debbie Dillon-Director,
209 Water Street (37601), P O Box 2150 (37605), Johnson City, TN
Bid Contact / Telephone Daniel Deats, CHA Companies;518-453-8217 or 423-975-2715; purchasing@johnsoncitytn.org
Bid Issue Date February 14, 2022
Project Location Winged Deer Park, 4137 Bristol Hwy. Johnson City, TN 37601
FOB Destination, freight prepaid and allowed - Johnson City, TN
Payment Terms Net 30
Complete all portions of this bid sheet. Pricing shall be on this form to be considered. Use additional sheets if necessary
DESCRIPTION
ITEM QTY TOTAL*
1. LUMP Provide all equipment, labor, materials, and services as required to complete
SUM the expansion of Winged Deer Park Athletic Complex as per attached $___________________
specifications and drawings.
5% Contingency $___________________
TOTAL WITH CONTINGENCY: $___________________
BID SUBMITTALS:
State Contractors Envelope form and copy of license
Insurance checklist & General contract form
Drug Free Workplace Affidavit
5% bid bond
Acknowledge of Forms
COVID-19 UPDATE: Solicitations will be opened publicly via a virtual conference only (in person attendance not permitted).
Information normally available in person at the Purchasing Department can be obtained through other methods. Please contact us by
phone or email for specific requests.
Join Zoom Meeting: ITB# 6590 - WINGED DEER PARK ATHLETIC COMPLEX IMPROVEMENTS VIRTUAL BID OPENING;
Meeting ID: 829 7082 9735 ; Passcode: 258482. If you do not have access to a webcam, or you have no audio with your
system, you can call this number to join: (646) 518-9805. Any issues accessing the zoom web meeting please call 423.975.2715 for
direct assistance
Bidder’s Reminder: ● Bid to be signed in ink by authorized company representative; ● Verify prices, extensions and total as correct
ADDENDA ACKNOWLEDGEMENT: __________, __________, __________, __________, __________, __________

By signing this document, the undersigned hereby agrees to the prices and all other terms and conditions, including the attached Sealed Solicitation
General Terms & Conditions and the City’s Requirements for Bids, Requests for Proposals, and Contracts Between the City of Johnson City and Other
Parties and the Requirements of the Iran Divestment Act (Sealed Solicitations General Terms & Conditions #20) contained in this bid and associated
documents relating to this bid and will furnish items as specified if this bid is accepted. Iran Divestment Act: By submission of this bid, each bidder and
each person signing on behalf of any bidder certifies, and in the case of a joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of
perjury, that to the best of its knowledge and belief that each bidder is not on the list created pursuant to T.C.A. § 12-12-106.
SUBMITTAL INSTRUCTIONS: Firm Name______________________________________________
Submit electronically per link below if allowable
or place signed bid response in a sealed By________________________________________________
envelope plainly identified on the outside with PRINTED & SIGNED
vendor name and bid name and number. Address_______________________________________________
Vendor responsible for delivery to Johnson City
Purchasing Dept., Debbie Dillon- Director, P. O. ________________________________________________
Box 2150 (37605), 209 Water Street (37601)
Johnson City, TN on or before the bid opening Telephone_____________________________________________
date and time.
Fax________________________________________________
ELECTRONIC RESPONSES ARE NOT
ACCEPTABLE E-Mail________________________________________________
BID SHEET MUST BE SIGNED TO BE VALID

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF REQUIREMENTS FOR BIDS,
REQUESTS FOR PROPOSALS, AND CONTRACTS BETWEEN
THE CITY OF JOHNSON CITY AND OTHER PARTIES AND
THE REQUIREMENTS OF IRAN DIVESTMENT ACT
Name of WINGED DEER PARK ATHLETIC COMPLEX EXPANSION

Solicitation:
Solicitation
Number: ITB# 6590
Name of
Bidder/Proposer:
The Undersigned hereby acknowledges that the Bidder/Proposer has carefully reviewed the
Requirements For Bids, Requests for Proposals, and Contracts between the City of Johnson
City and Other Parties and the requirements of the Iran Divestment Act (Sealed Solicitations
General Terms & Conditions #19), and understands that these documents are considered
part of the Contract Documents and all Bids/Proposals shall be conditioned by the document.
By submission of this bid/proposal, each bidder/proposer and each person signing on behalf
of any bidder/proposer certifies, and in the case of a joint bid/proposal each party thereto
certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of its knowledge
and belief that each bidder/proposer is not on the Iran investment activities list created
pursuant to T.C.A. § 12-12-106.
Name of & Title of Signer
(Print or Type):
Signature:
Date:
Revised January 2017
COMPLETE AND RETURN WITH SOLICITATION PACKAGE

DRUG FREE WORKPLACE
All vendors with five (5) or more employees must execute the attached Drug Free Workplace
Affidavit to verify compliance with TCA 50-9-113 and return same with response. Failure to
comply with this requirement will declare that submittal non-responsive.
City Of Johnson City, Tennessee - Policy No. HR-131

SECTION I – PURPOSE OF THE DRUG & ALCOHOL TESTING PROGRAM
The City of Johnson City recognizes its responsibility to provide safe and efficient operations for
our employees, our citizens and the general public. Our commitment to provide safe and
efficient operations is shown by the implementation of programs and procedures which ensure
compliance with appropriate safety measures, as well as the letter and intent of all applicable
laws and regulations. There is sufficient evidence to conclude that the use of illegal
drug/alcohol; drug/alcohol dependence and drug/alcohol abuse seriously impairs an employee’s
performance and general physical and mental health. The illegal possession and use of drugs,
alcohol and/or narcotics by employees of the City is a crime in this jurisdiction and is clearly
unacceptable. Therefore, the City of Johnson City has adopted this written policy to ensure an
employee’s fitness for duty as a condition of employment; to ensure the drug tests and alcohol
tests are conducted on safety-sensitive positions in the categories of: pre-employment, random
testing, suspicion testing, and return-to-duty testing.
To comply with TCA Title 50 Chapter 9 Part 1, all bidders and/or proposers of service to the
City must have a testing program of the same or better than the requirements of the City of
Johnson City.
DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE AFFIDAVIT
State of __________________________
County of _________________________
I, ________________________________, being duly sworn, depose, and say that:
1) I am a principal officer of ____________________________, the firm that has

submitted the attached or enclosed bid or proposal, my title being
_________________________ of the firm; and
2) I have personal knowledge of the policies of the above-named firm with respect to
the maintenance of a drug-free workplace; and
3) I certify that all provisions and requirements of the Tennessee Drug-Free Workplace
Program, as established by Tennessee Code Annotated §§ 50-9-113 have been
met and implemented.
(Signed) __________________________
(Title) ____________________________
Subscribed and sworn to before me this _____ day of __________________, _______.
_________________________________
_________________________________
Title
My Commission expires _____________________
Complete and return with response package

Escrow Agreement
THIS AGREEMENT is entered into this ____ day of ____________, 2022 by and between City of Johnson
City, Tennessee, a Tennessee Municipal Corporation ("Owner"), _______________________ ("Contractor")
and First Horizon Bank ("Bank") as escrow agent.
WITNESSETH:
WHEREAS, Owner and Contractor entered into a construction contract in the amount of
$_______________ (the "Contract"). The Contract provides that five percent (5.00%) of the progress payments
made under the Contract will be withheld as retainage ("Retainage") from the total of progress payments made
by Owner to Contractor; and
WHEREAS, pursuant to T.C.A. 66-34-104 (the "Statute"), the amount withheld as Retainage is to be
deposited in a separate escrow account maintained with a third party; and
WHEREAS, Owner and Contractor desire that all Retainage withheld under the Contract, be deposited
in an interest bearing escrow account pursuant to and in compliance with the Statute; and
WHEREAS, Bank has agreed to accept the Retainage and cause it to be placed in an interest bearing
escrow account and to act as escrow agent for said account.
NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the premises and mutual covenants and promises hereinafter
set forth, it is agreed, as follows:
1. This contract incorporates all of the recitals set forth above.

2. In accordance with the requirements of the Statute, Owner shall deposit, and the Bank shall hold in an
interest bearing escrow account, Account No. ________________ ("Escrow Account") all retainage held
pursuant to the Contract. The total Contract amount is $______________.
3. All Retainage withheld from payments to Contractor by Owner under the Contract, from this date
forward, shall be deposited in said Escrow Account.
4. The Bank, as escrow agent, shall hold and maintain the Retainage in the Escrow Account until the Bank is
presented with a release signed by Owner and Contractor, authorizing the disbursement of all or a
portion of the funds held on deposit in the Escrow Account, plus any accrued interest, provided that
notwithstanding this Section 3, the Bank may comply with the final order of any court of applicable
jurisdiction which affects the payment of all or any portion of the funds in the Escrow Account. The
account will use Contractor's tax identification number, and Contractor will furnish the Escrow Agent
with a W-9 form for this purpose.
5. To the extent allowed by Tennessee Law, in the event of any dispute regarding this Agreement, or in the
event that any of the parties hereto do not agree as to the disposition of the funds in the Escrow
Account, parties hereto agree that the Bank shall be released of any further obligation under this
Agreement by tendering the funds maintained in the Escrow Account into a court of competent
jurisdiction in an action in the nature of an interpleader, and the Bank shall have the right to recover its
reasonable attorney fees and costs from Owner and Contractor, each of whom shall be jointly and
severally liable therefore.
6. To the extent allowed by Tennessee law, the parties hereto agree to indemnify and hold Bank harmless
from any loss, damages, or liabilities of any kind whatsoever, whether foreseen or unforeseen, whether
direct or indirect arising out of or in connection with this Agreement, the Escrow Account and the funds
contained therein, or the performance of the Bank's obligations hereunder, except liability resulting
from Bank's gross negligence or willful misconduct. The Bank may rely upon the signatures of any
correspondence from either or both of Owner and/or Contractor as being the authentic signatures of
the Owner of Contractor or, if the Owner or Contractor are not natural persons, of person duly
authorized to act on behalf of the Owner or Contractor.
7. The Bank shall not be bound by any modification, amendment, termination, cancellations, rescission or
supersession of this Escrow Agreement unless the same shall be in writing and signed by all of the
parties hereto and hereunder are effected thereby, unless it shall be given prior written consent
thereto.
8. To the extent allowed by Tennessee Law, the Owner and Contractor agree, jointly and severally, to
reimburse the Bank for any costs, damages, expenses or claims, including attorney's fees, which the
Bank may incur or sustain as a result of or arising out of the Escrow Agreement or Bank's duties relating
thereto (except for Bank's willful misconduct or negligence); and the Bank is hereby given a lien upon,
and security interest in, the property deposited in the Escrow Account, to secure Bank's rights to
payments or reimbursement.
9. Lender shall receive no fee in connection with its rendering of services as escrow agent pursuant to the
terms of the Escrow Agreement.
10. This Escrow Agreement may be executed in three or more counterparts, each of which will be deemed
to be an original agreement, but all of which will constitute one and the same document. A counterpart
executed by a party and transmitted by facsimile to the other parties will have the same effect as
delivery of the original counterpart.
11. This Agreement shall be construed in accordance with the Laws of the State of Tennessee without regard
to its conflict of law principles.
ENTERED INTO as of the date first above written.

CONTRACTOR
_____________________________
By:___________________________
Title:_________________________
By:___________________________
Title:_________________________
First Horizon Bank
By:___________________________
Title:_________________________
STATE CONTRACTORS LICENSING INFORMATION
BID ENVELOPE FORM
THIS FORM MUST BE FIRMLY ATTACHED TO THE OUTSIDE OF THE

ENVELOPE CONTAINING THE BID. NO BID WILL BE CONSIDERED IF
THIS FORM IS INCOMPLETE OR NOT ATTACHED TO THE OUTSIDE OF
THE BID ENVELOPE. IF TOTAL BID IS LESS THAN $25,000- ATTACH AND
SPECIFY ON THIS FORM
PART 1
ALL BIDDERS MUST COMPLETE
City of Johnson City, Tennessee
TO:
ITB # 6590– WINGED DEER PARK ATHLETIC COMPLEX EXPANSION
DUE DATE & TIME: MARCH 9, 2022 AT 2:00 PM LOCAL TIME
LOCATION: OFFICE OF PURCHASING DIRECTOR,

209 WATER STREET
JOHNSON CITY, TN 37601
NAME OF BIDDER:
ADDRESS OF BIDDER:
FEDERAL ID # OF BIDDER:
LICENSE NO.: #
LICENSE CLASSIFICATION
OF BIDDER:
EXPIRATION DATE:
MONETARY LIMITS:
PART 2
(1) ELECTRICAL (2) PLUMBING (3) HVAC (4) GEOTHERMAL (5) MASONRY
A) Name of licensed A) Name of licensed A) Name of licensed A) Name of licensed A) Name of licensed
Electrical contractor: Plumbing contractor: HVAC contractor: Geothermal contractor: Masonry contractor:
B) License #: B) License #: B) License #: B) License #: B) License #:
C) License Classification C) License Classification C) License Classification C) License Classification C) License Classification
and Limits: and Limits: and Limits: and Limits: and Limits:
D) License expiration date: D) License expiration date: D) License expiration date: D) License expiration date: D) License expiration date:
Revised 12/2019
CITY OF JOHNSON CITY, TENNESSEE
http://www.johnsoncitytn.org/purchasing
SEALED SOLICITATION
GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Read Carefully – if applicable or unless specifically noted otherwise in the solicitation documents
1. ACCEPTANCE, REJECTION AND POSTPONEMENT
Issuance of a bid/rfp/rfq does not commit the City to make an award. The City reserves the right to postpone or reject any or all bids/rfps/rfqs, to
waive informalities and to accept the bid/rfp/rfq judged to be in the best interest of the City.
2. ADDENDA
Addenda will be issued to all known interested parties and posted on the City’s website (listed above). All addenda issued shall become part of
the solicitation documents. It is the vendor’s responsibility to determine and acknowledge all addenda issued for a solicitation. No addendum will
be issued less than two (2) working days prior to the solicitation opening as per TCA, Title 12, Chapter 4, Part 1, as amended
3. AWARD
An award, if made, shall be to the lowest responsible, responsive bidder(s) or best solicitation meeting quality and performance standards as
described in the solicitation documents and whose bid/rfp is determined to be in the best interest of the City. This includes value engineering with
the low bidder if cost is over budget. The City also reserves the right to award this product/service based on other contracts in-place (state or
cooperative contracts), as may be in our best interest.
4. AWARD PERIOD
The City shall have 60 days to issue a contract. Any contract past that period must be mutually agreed upon by both parties.
5. BID TABULATIONS/RFP/RFQ RESPONSES
Bid tabulations and RFP/RFQ respondent’s lists will be posted and available the next business day on our above website. Click on
“awarded/opened solicitations”.
6. BRAND NAMES
By referencing a product or service name as “or approved equal”, the City intends to establish a minimum level of quality by which alternate offers
can be judged. If an alternate is offered, the vendor must include complete descriptive literature and specifications that clearly describe the item
and how it differs from the referenced item. Vendor reference to literature previously submitted will not satisfy this provision. Unless specified
otherwise, it is understood that the referenced product will be furnished. The City alone will determine whether an alternate is equivalent and
meets the standards of quality and performance for the City’s use. A sample or demonstration may be required at the expense of the vendor.
7. CONDITION STANDARDS
It is understood and agreed that any item offered or shipped as a result of this solicitation shall be new and unused and the manufacturer’s latest
model unless otherwise called for in the solicitation.
8. CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
If a fee is required for bid documents then only those bidders of record with the issuing office are eligible to bid.
9. DEFAULT
In case of contractor default or failure to provide material or service according to the solicitation, the City may cancel this contract and acquire
from another source and may recover any excess cost by (1) invoice; (2) deduction from an unpaid balance due; (3) collection against the bid
and/or performance bond; or (4) a combination of the aforementioned remedies or other remedies provided by law. All costs associated with
default will be borne by the contractor. The City reserves the right to remove a company in default from the active vendor list for a time period to
be determined by the Director of Purchasing.
10. DELIVERY
Delivery/completion schedule must be clearly identified and realistically stated, as this may be a determining factor in the award.
11. DISCOUNT AND PAYMENT
Payment terms are Net 30 following receipt of the material or service and a correct invoice unless otherwise stated in the solicitation document.
Discounts for prompt payment will not be considered in the bid evaluation for award. Partial payment will be allowed only if addressed in the
solicitation.
12. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY
It is the policy of the City of Johnson City to ensure compliance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964; 49 CFR, Part 21; related statutes and
regulations to that end that no person shall be excluded from participation in or be denied benefits of, or be subjected to discrimination under any
program or activity receiving Federal financial assistance or any other funding source on the grounds of race, color, sex, national origin, or ancestry.
By virtue of submitting a response to this solicitation, vendors agree to comply with the same non-discrimination policy.
13. EVALUATION
Bids/RFPs/RFQs will be evaluated according to the criteria set forth in the document with the degree of importance determined by the City.
14. EXAMINATION OF BIDS/RFPS/RFQS
Bids and associated documents may be examined at the opening. Only the name of the respondent is read aloud for RFPS/RFQS. All solicitations
are closed for review and inspection during the evaluation period, prior to award.
15. FOB (FREE-ON-BOARD) POINT
All prices quoted shall be FOB destination, freight prepaid and allowed unless otherwise stated in the solicitation document. The seller pays and
bears the freight charges and owns the goods while they are in transit. Title passes at the designated City location.
16. INDEMNIFICATION
The vendor shall guarantee and certify by submitting a response to this solicitation that if successful, they shall indemnify and defend the City
against any and all claims or legal actions arising as a result of their performance of the contract, whether or not such claims relate to damages
or alleged damages sustained by physical injury to contractors personnel, subcontractors, city employees or other persons, or against any lawsuits
arising from alleged or actual patent infringements, and shall hold the City, its various departments, employees, and any and all persons or entities
acting on its behalf harmless from the same.
17. INSPECTION
All supplies or materials purchased as a result of this solicitation are subject to inspection and rejection by the City. Rejected materials will be
returned at the vendor’s expense.
18. INSURANCE
The contractor shall maintain, at their expense, such insurance as required by the solicitation. Such insurance shall protect the City for claims of
damages which may arise during operations under this contract whether such operations be by the Contractor or by any subcontractor or anyone
directly or indirectly employed by either of them. Any required insurances shall be maintained for the term of the contract and beyond the term of
the contract when so required in the solicitation.
19. IRAN DIVESTMENT ACT
Pursuant to the Iran Divestment Act Tenn. Code Ann. § 12-12-106 requires the State of Tennessee Chief Procurement Officer to publish, using
creditable information freely available to the public, a list of persons it determines engage in investment activities in Iran, as described in § 12-12-
105. Inclusion on this list makes a person ineligible to contract with the City of Johnson City; if a person ceases its engagement in investment
activities in Iran, it may be removed from the list. The State of Tennessee list is available here: http://tennessee.gov/generalservices/article/Public-
Information-library
20. LICENSES, FEES, PERMITS
The contractor is responsible for furnishing the proper licenses, fees, and permits required by law to do business with the City of Johnson City in
completion of the project. All work shall be done in accordance with the latest building codes, state and federal laws relative to the contract.
21. MULTIPLE ITEM BIDS
The City will determine the successful bidder(s) either on the basis of the individual line items or the total of all items. ALL OR NONE bids must
be clearly identified on the bid form and will be considered only if in the City’s best interest.
22. NON-COLLUSION AGREEMENT
By submitting this solicitation, the agent representing all officers, partners, owners, representatives, employees or interested parties of the vendor’s
firm certifies to the best of his/her knowledge and belief this bid/proposal to the City of Johnson City, Tennessee has not been prepared in collusion
with any other seller, proprietor, or manufacturer of similar products or services. The agent also certifies that the prices, terms and conditions of
said bid/proposal have been arrived at independently and have not been communicated by the submitter, nor by any of the aforementioned firm
associate to any other seller, proprietor, or manufacturer of similar products or services and will not be communicated prior to the official opening
of said solicitation. The agent further states that no official or employee of the City of Johnson City has promised any personal, financial or other
beneficial interest, either directly or indirectly, in order to influence award of this solicitation.
23. PARTS AND SERVICE
The successful vendor must be able to provide adequate parts and service for all items awarded. Service location and ability to perform may be
a consideration in the award.
24. PENALTIES
Vendors may be removed from our active vendor system for any of the following:
 Failure to respond to three consecutive solicitations
 Failure to meet delivery requirements
 Failure to furnish items as a result of a solicitation
 Failure to provide service or material as a result of the award
 Offers of gratuities or favors to any City employee
25. PRE-BID MEETING ATTENDANCE
If attendance is mandatory then only those firms whose names are listed on the pre-bid attendance roster are eligible to submit a solicitation.
26. PRICING
All pricing must appear in the spaces provided on the city’s form (if applicable) and be in ink or typed. Changes or corrections by the
bidder/proposer must be initialed in ink by the person signing. No corrections may be made in pencil. Unit prices will prevail in case of an
extension error. The City will correct math computation errors (unit price & totals). No bid may be altered or amended after bid opening time.
Obvious mistakes will be given special consideration upon receipt of written request and full disclosure or evidence regarding pricing error.
27. PROPRIETARY/CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION
Vendors are hereby notified that all information submitted as part of, or in support of, bids/proposals will be available for public inspection after
award, in compliance with Tennessee Statutes unless the vendor additionally identifies a specific area or scope of data or other materials to be
protected and details the reasons protection is necessary.
28. PROTEST PROCEDURE
Any protest to the award of a contract by the City of Johnson City shall be submitted in writing to the Director of Purchasing with a copy to the City
Manager and delivered not later than seven (7) calendar days from the date of the city's award decision. Such protest must include a protest bond
in the amount of $350 (cashier’s check payable to the City of Johnson City or Cash) submitted to the Purchasing Director before the City will
consider the protest. This protest bond will serve as a guarantee by the protester of the validity and accuracy of the protest. If the protest is denied
by the City Manager the bond will be retained to cover costs associated with the protest.
29. QUESTIONS
Questions must be received by the City at least four (4) working days prior to the scheduled opening. No oral interpretations or instructions given
by any city employee or any other person shall apply. Changes relative to any solicitation will be in writing, in the form of an addendum.
30. SAFETY STANDARDS
All manufactured items and fabricated assemblies shall comply with applicable requirements of OSHA/TOSHA and any related standards thereto.
31. SAMPLES
Samples will be furnished at no charge to the City. They will remain in the Purchasing Department for testing and evaluation until an award is
made. Vendors are responsible for picking up their samples within two (2) weeks after the award. Samples not collected after that time shall
become the property of the City. Samples from the successful vendor will be held until delivery is received and accepted as being equal to the
sample.
32. SEALED SOLICITATION OPENINGS
Bids will be read aloud at the specified date and time as stated in the document. RFP’s/RFQ’S respondent names will be read aloud. All openings
are public meetings. Bidders/proposers and interested persons are invited to attend. The City reserves the right to postpone any solicitation
opening under circumstances warranting such action, including but not limited to instances when the City receives fewer than two responses.
33. SIGNATURE ON BIDS
When submitting a bid, other than electronically, the bid form must contain the full name and address of the company and be signed in Ink by a
person authorized to bind that company to a contract. Submission of an electronic solicitation constitutes acceptance of all terms and conditions.
Unsigned paper bids will not be considered, read or tabulated. They may not be signed during or after the bid opening, even if a representative
is present.
34. SUBMITTAL OF SEALED BIDS/RFPS/RFQS
Any forms furnished by the city must be completed and returned as specified in the solicitation, otherwise response will be considered as non-
responsive. TELEPHONE, FACSIMILE OR E-MAIL RESPONSES WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED. Electronic receipt of bids/proposals is acceptable
for those eligible for online submittal at: https://vrapp.vendorregistry.com/Vendor/Register/Index/johnson-city-tn-vendor-registration. Paper
submittals shall be sealed in an envelope. No solicitation received after closing time shall be considered. The official time for paper submittals
will be that of the date and time clock in the Purchasing Department. For electronic bids the official time is that posted on the website. Late
submittals will not be accepted. The City of Johnson City shall not be responsible for technical difficulties experienced by vendors trying to register
or submit their bid/rfp response electronically less than one hour prior to the bid/rfp opening time. If not offering a solicitation response, the vendor
is encouraged to complete the ”Statement of Decline” form and return prior to the opening.
35. TAXES
The City is exempt from Federal excise tax, State, and city sales tax. Contractors are not exempt from the use tax on materials and supplies used
in the production of an item or in the performance of a repair or construction contract. Tax exemption certificates will be furnished upon request.
36. TERM OF CONTRACT
Unless otherwise stated, the City reserves the right to purchase like items at the same contract price for a period of one year from the award date
subject to agreement of both parties. The City may cancel any contract for cause, or non-appropriation of funds, following written notification of
intent.
37. WARRANTY
Unless otherwise specified by the City, all items shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of one (1) year against defects in material and
workmanship.
March 9, 2021
REQUIREMENTS FOR BIDS, REQUESTS FOR PROPOSALS, AND CONTRACTS
BETWEEN THE CITY OF JOHNSON CITY
AND OTHER PARTIES
The City of Johnson City has established the following requirements for use in all bids and
contracts between the City and any other person or entity. The following list is mandatory and modifies any
bid, contract, or request for proposal, or conditions applicable to, signed by, or let by the City,
notwithstanding anything contained in any particular conditions, contract, request for proposal, or bid to the
contrary.
In general, the following provisions apply to all such contracts, bids, requests for proposals,
contracts requiring bids, and bids containing contracts:
1. The City of Johnson City shall not answer to any contracting party for the
furnishing of public records to a person requesting such in accordance with Tennessee
law.
2. The City, while it may designate in writing a representative on a particular
project, shall only be bound by a majority vote of the Board of Commissioners or by the
limited authority delegated to the City Manager pursuant to City Ordinance. No personal
representative of the City assigned to a particular project may bind it in excess of the
dollar amounts granted to the City Manager by Ordinance, and no personal representative
assigned to a particular project may bind the City for an amount equal to or less than the
dollar amounts granted to the City Manager by Ordinance without the City Manager’s
approval.
3. The City shall not in any event waive or limit any claims for damages
including but not limited to consequential damages in any contract for any reason or
purpose.
4. No decision of an architect, engineer, or personal representative of the City
shall be final and binding on the City, unless the City so agrees in any dispute with any
1
party including but not limited to an architect, a contractor, a subcontractor, an engineer,
etc. If the City agrees to be bound pertaining to a dispute, then the monetary limits
contained in the City’s ordinances regarding the authority of the City Manager shall
prevail, and any amounts exceeding the authority of the City Manager shall be referred to
the Board of Commissioners for their consideration.
5. The City shall not participate in any mediation or arbitration regarding any
agreement to which it is a party, and all matters left unresolved between the City and any
other party, person, or entity shall be resolved in a court of competent jurisdiction in
either Washington County, Tennessee, or in Federal District Court in Greeneville,
Tennessee.
6. No party or other entity shall file a lien of any nature whatsoever against City
property, real, personal, or mixed, no matter where that property is located. Should a
party or entity contracting with the City or acting as a subcontractor or subsubcontractor
file a lien against any property, real, personal, or mixed, owned by the City, then that
party or entity shall take immediate steps at its own cost and expense to remove said lien,
or the City shall take such steps as it deems necessary and hold the other party or entity
liable for any costs and attorneys’ fees associated with the lifting of said lien.
7. The City shall exercise its sole discretion before agreeing to any assignments
of any contracts or subcontracts regarding any project in which the City is involved. No
contract with the City shall be assignable without the City’s sole, discretionary, absolute
consent.
8. The City shall not be required to supply any information regarding its title to
any property in which it has an interest for any purposes regarding the filing of liens.
9. The City shall not waive any claims it has in the making of final payment in
any project in which it is involved. The City shall have the right to terminate any
agreement to which this document is attached at any time in its sole discretion with or
2
without cause. In the event the City terminates with or without cause any agreement to
which this document is attached, then in such event the City shall be liable only for the
actual work and costs that have accrued at or before the date of the City’s termination. In
no event shall the City be liable for lost profits, consequential damages or incidental
damages in the event it terminates a contract with or without cause.
10. Except to the extent allowed by law, the City shall not indemnify and hold
harmless any other party, entity, person, their agents, employees, or anyone else in the
world for any reason whatsoever.
11. The City shall not waive the rights of subrogation of its insurers or itself for
any purpose whatsoever, and the City shall not cause any such endorsements to be placed
on any policies to which it is a party.
12. Unless the City elects otherwise, the City shall not provide any “builders’
risk” or an “all-risk” or equivalent policy for any reason whatsoever for any project in
which the City has an interest, and the contractor or other such party shall assume this
responsibility. That builder’s risk policy provided by the contractor or other such
interested party shall name the City as an additional insured. The City shall not provide
boiler and machinery insurance, but shall require such insurance as applicable, depending
on the parameters of whatever project is involved. The cost of boiler and machinery
insurance shall be borne by the appropriate contractor, subcontractor, or other interested
party. The City shall not insure the interests of any other person or entity, nor shall the
City add any other person or entity as an additional insured to any of its policies.
13. The City shall not waive any rights regarding the loss of use of the City’s
property.
14. As to acts or failures to act or any causes of action by any party to a
contract, whether that party be the architect, owner, contractor, City, etc., a cause of
action shall accrue according to Tennessee law. No contract provision shall shorten the
3
statutes of limitations, statutes of repose, or the accrual of any causes of action which the
City might have against another party or entity. No contract provision shall waive any
warranties, express or implied, nor shall any contract limit the standard of care for any
particular service or undertaking to that of the locality where those services or
undertakings are performed.
15. Any interest to be paid by the City of Johnson City for late payments shall
be at the rate of interest at which the City pays on its most recently issued bonds.
16. The City reserves to itself the right to approve the use of any tests, including
but not limited to any borings, test pits, geotechnical work, environmental tests, and the
like in its own sole discretion. All design professionals, consultants, subcontractors, or
the like shall be duly licensed in the State of Tennessee, if licensure in the State of
Tennessee is required for the work to be performed by such design professional,
consultants, or subcontractors.
17. Notwithstanding any applicable choice of law or conflict of law provisions
or decisions, the law of the State of Tennessee shall govern all contracts to which this
document is attached.
18. The City of Johnson City shall not provide any legal advice, legal services,
surveys, or procure the same for any other party.
19. Upon payment for services as rendered, all design documents and all
instruments of service created by design professionals, including but not limited to
architects, landscape architects, engineers, etc., shall become the property of the City of
Johnson City, Tennessee. The City of Johnson City shall be allowed to use all design
documents and instruments of service, including but not limited to bid drawings, shop
drawings, reports, specifications, cost estimates, schematic designs, construction designs,
and the like for future additions or alterations to the current project or for use in other
projects. Any use of the aforementioned designs and construction documents shall be at
4
the City’s sole risk and without liability to the design professional. The design
professional’s name and seal will be removed from all such design documents prior to the
City’s use thereof.
20. The City, as the owner of real property that is the subject of or in any way
connected to any bid, request for proposal, or contract, hereby grants to the successful
bidder/proposer/contractor the general management of the real property during the time
that work is being performed, and the City agrees to transfer information specified in
OSHA regulations at 29 CFR §1926.1203(h)(1), so that TOSHA/OSHA shall treat the
successful bidder/proposer/contractor as the host employer when working in confined
spaces. This paragraph applies only to those areas where the successful
bidder/proposer/contractor has access to and performs work within confined spaces as
defined in federal OSHA regulations. The successful bidder shall comply with all federal
OSHA and state TOSHA regulations, including those regarding confined spaces.
September, 2017
5
STATEMENT OF SOLICITATION DECLINE
City of Johnson City, Tennessee
NOTE: If you do not intend to respond to this solicitation, please complete and return
this form on or before the stated deadline to Purchasing Department, P. O. Box
2150, Johnson City, TN 37605 or via e-mail: purchasing@johnsoncitytn.org
We value your feedback and ask that you complete the following:
Solicitation No.: # ____________

Solicitation Name: __________________________________________________
We, the undersigned, decline to submit on the above solicitation for the following
reason(s):
Insufficient time to adequately prepare a response
Our company does not offer this product or service. Remove us from
the vendor list
Our schedule will not permit us to perform in a timely manner
We are unable to meet bond requirements
We are unable to meet insurance requirements
We are unable to offer comparable product or service
We are unable to meet specifications (explain below)
We understand that if this statement is not completed and returned, our company
may be deleted from the City’s solicitation list for this commodity or service.
Company Name: ________________________________

Address: ________________________________
________________________________
Signature: ________________________________
Telephone: ________________________________
E-mail: ________________________________
Date: ________________________________
Revised April 2020

CONSTRUCTION PAYMENT BOND
Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
CONTRACTOR (Name and Address) SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business):
OWNER (Name and Address)
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
Date: Amount:
Description (Name and Location):
BOND
Date (not earlier than Construction Contract Date): Amount:
Modifications to this Bond Form:
CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY

Company (Corp Seal) Company (Corp Seal)
Signature: Signature:
Name and Title: Name and Title:

EJCDC No. 1910-28B (1984 Edition)

Prepared through the joint efforts of The Surety Association of America, Engineers’ Joint Contract Documents Committee, The Associated General Contractors
of America, and the American Institute of Architects.
\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 0\0013 Payment Bond.doc

Bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this
1. The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the
their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to the performance of the Construction Contract area dedicated to satisfy
Owner to pay for labor, materials, and equipment furnished for use in obligations of the Contractor and the Surety under this Bond, subject to
the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated the Owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion of the work.
herein by reference.
9. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants, or others for
2. With respect to the Owner, this obligation shall be null and void if the obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction
Contractor: Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs or
expenses of any claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this
2.1 Promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due Bond no obligations to make payments to give notices on behalf of, or
Claimants, and otherwise have obligations to make payments to, give notices on behalf
of, or otherwise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond.
2.2 Defends, indemnifies and hold harmless the Owner from all claims,
demands, liens or suits by any person or entity who furnished labor, 10. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of
materials, or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase
Contract, provided the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and orders and other obligations.
the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) of any claims,
demands, liens or suits and tendered defense of such claims, demands 11. No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond
liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety, and provided there is not other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which
Owner Default. the work or part of the work is located or after the expiration of one
year from the date (1)on which the Claimant gave the notice required
3. With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if the by Subparagraph 4.1 or Clause 4.2 (iii), or (2) on which the last labor or
Contractor promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment
due. were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever
of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or
4. The Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until: prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to
sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.
4.1 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the
Contractor have given notice to the Surety (at the address described in 12. Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or
Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating delivered to the address shown on the signature page. Actual receipt of
that a claim is being made under this Bond and, with substantial notice by Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor, however accomplished,
accuracy, the amount of the claim. shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received at the address
shown on the signature page.
4.2 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor:
13. When this bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other
1. Have furnished written notice to the Contractor and sent a copy, legal requirements in the location where the construction was to be
or notice thereof, to the Owner, within 90 days after having last performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or
performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment legal requirements shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions
included in the claim stating, with substantial accuracy, the conforming to such statutory or other legal requirements shall be
amount of the claim and the name of the party to whom the deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be
materials were furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.
done or performed; and
2. Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from the 14. Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential
Contractor, or not received within 30 days of furnishing the beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy
above notice any communication from the Contractor by which of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made.
the Contractor has indicated the claim will be paid directly or
indirectly; and 15. Definitions.
3. Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have sent a
written notice to the Surety (at the address described in 15.1 Claimant: An individual or entity have a direct contract with
Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish
stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and enclosing labor, materials, or equipment for use in the performance of the
a copy of the previous written notice furnished to the Contractor. Contract. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation
in the terms “labor, materials, or equipment” that part of water, gas,
5. If a notice required by Paragraph 4 is given to the Contractor to the power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment
Surety, that is sufficient compliance. used in the Construction, architectural and engineering services
required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the
6. When the Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 4, the Contractor’s subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic’s
Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take the following lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials, or
actions: equipment were furnished.
6.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within 45 15.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the
days after receipt of the claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed Contractor identified on the signature page, including all Contract
and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed. Documents and changes thereto.
6.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts. 15.3 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which as neither been remedied
nor waived, to pay the Contractor as required by the Construction
7. The Surety’s total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, Contract or to perform and complete or comply with other terms
and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in thereof.
good faith by the Surety.
8. Amount owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction

Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract
and to satisfy claims, if any , under any Construction Performance
(FOR INFORMATION ONLY - Name, Address and Telephone)

AGENT or BROKER: OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or other party):
\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 0\0013 Payment Bond.doc

CONSTRUCTION PERFORMANCE BOND
Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
CONTRACTOR (Name and Address) SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business):
OWNER (Name and Address)
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
Date: Amount:
Description (Name and Location):
BOND
Date (not earlier than Construction Contract Date): Amount:
Modifications to this Bond Form:


EJCDC No. 1910-28B (1984 Edition)

Prepared through the joint efforts of The Surety Association of America, Engineers’ Joint Contract Documents Committee, The Associated General Contractors
of America, and the American Institute of Architects.
\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 0\0014 Performance Bond.doc

1. The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Construction
their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to the Contract, the Surety is obligated without duplication for:
Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is
incorporated herein by reference. 6.1 The responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective
work and completion of the Construction Contract:
2. If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the 6.2 Additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting
Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except to from the Contractor’s Default, and resulting from the actions or
participate in conferences as provided in Subparagraph 3.1. failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 4; and
6.3 Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in
3. If there is no Owner Default, the Surety’s obligation under this Bond the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed
shall arise after: performance or non-performance of he Contractor.
3.1 The Owner has notified the Contractor and the Surety at its address 7. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for
described in Paragraph 10 below, that the Owner is considering obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction
declaring a Contractor Default and has requested and attempted to Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be
arrange a conference with the Contractor and the Surety to be held not reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations.
later than fifteen days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or
performing the Construction Contract. If the Owner and the Contractor entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators,
and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time or successors.
to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not
waive the Owner’s right, if any subsequently to declare a Contractor 8. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, include changes
Default; and of time to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts,
3.2 The Owner has declared a Contractor Default and formally terminated purchase orders and other obligations.
the Contractor’s right to complete the contract. Such Contractor
Default shall not be declared earlier than twenty days after the 9. Any proceeding, legal, or equitable, under this Bond may be
Contractor and the Surety have received notice as provided in instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in
Subparagraph 3.1; and which the work or part of the work is located and shall be
3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to the instituted within two years after Contractor Default or within two
Surety in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract or to a years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years
contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract in accordance after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under
with the terms of the contract with the Owner. this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this
Paragraph are void or prohibited by the law, the minimum period
4. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the Surety of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of
shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take one of the following the suit shall be applicable.
actions:
10. Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed
4.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with Consent of the Owner, to perform and or delivered to the address shown on the signature page.
complete the Construction Contract; or
4.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, 11. When this bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or
through its agents or through independent contractors; or other legal requirements in the location where the construction
4.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with
acceptable to the Owner for Contract or performance and completion of said statutory or legal requirements shall be deemed deleted
the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other
execution by the Owner and the Contractor selected with the Owners’s legal requirements shall be deemed incorporated herein. The
concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and
executed by qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the not as a common law bond.
Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as
described in Paragraph 6 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price 12. Definitions.
incurred by the Owner resulting from the Contractor’s default; or
4.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or 12.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the
obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all
circumstances. proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the
Contractor of any amount received or to be received by the Owner
1. After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which
liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount the Contractor is entitled, reduce by all valid and proper
is determined, tender payment therefore to the Owner; or payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the
2. Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner citing Construction Contract.
reasons therefor. 12.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and
the Contractor identified on the signature page, including all
5. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 4 with Contract Documents and changes thereto.
reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on 12.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which has neither
this bond fifteen days after receipt of an additional written notice from been remedied nor waived, to perform or otherwise to comply
the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its with the terms of the Construction Contract.
obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce 12.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which as neither been
any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided remedied nor waived, to pay the Contractor as required by the
in Subparagraph 4.4, and the Owner refuses the payment tendered or Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with
the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further other terms thereof.
notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to
the Owner.
6. After the Owner has terminated the Contractor’s right to complete the
Construction Contract, and if the Surety elects to act under
Subparagraph 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the responsibilities of the
Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor
under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner
to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the
Construction Contract. To the limit of the amount of this Bond, but
subject to commitment by the Owner of the Balance of the Contract
\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 0\0014 Performance Bond.doc
SECTION 011000 – SUMMARY
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: Project consists of the construction of four softball fields, a multipurpose field,
parking lot, access road, concrete sidewalks, athletic support building, maintenance building,
retaining walls, sports lighting, parking lot & pedestrian lighting, concrete curbs, synthetic and
natural turf, turf irrigation system, chain link fencing, dugouts, bullpens, foul poles, backstops,
concrete bleacher pads, storm drainage piping and SWM systems, water service, electric service,
sanitary service, site grading including rock removal, erosion and sedimentation controls, landscaping
and all work shown on the contract documents. .
1. Project Location: Winged Deer Park; 4137 Bristol Hwy; Johnson City, TN 37601
2. Owner: The City of Johnson City
B. Engineer Identification: The Contract Documents, dated FEBRUARY 14, 2022, were prepared for
this project by CHA Consulting.
1.2 CONTRACT
A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract.
1.3 WORK SEQUENCE
A. The Work shall be conducted in one phase.

1. Work shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy within 263 days of the Notice to
Proceed.
1.4 USE OF PREMISES
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of
Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right
to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
1.5 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 48-
division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
1. Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross-
referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric
sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning
of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents.
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the
intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These
conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is
abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not
stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and
plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract
Documents indicates.
SUMMARY PAGE 1 OF 2
\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Final\100% Submittal-Current\011000 Summary.doc SECTION 011000
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to
describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so
noted.
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are
implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
SUMMARY PAGE 2 OF 2
\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Final\100% Submittal-Current\011000 Summary.doc SECTION 011000
SECTION 011400 – WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 USE OF PREMISES
A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond
areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to areas within the contract limits indicated.
2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of site.
3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available
to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for
parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and
equipment on site.
1.2 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing buildings during entire construction
period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate
Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in
completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not
interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not
constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1. A Certificate of Substantial Completion will be prepared for each specific portion of the Work
to be occupied before Owner occupancy.
2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner
occupancy.
3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational,
and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will
provide, operate, and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of
building.
4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for
occupied portions of building.
PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
WORK RESTRICTIONS PAGE 1 OF 1

\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 1\011400 Work Restrictions.doc SECTION 011400
SECTION 013000 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Coordination.
2. Submittals.
3. Administrative and supervisory personnel.
4. Project meetings.
5. General installation provisions.
6. Cleaning and protection.
B. Where applicable, each prime Contractor shall participate in these coordination requirements, even
though certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific prime Contractor.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction activities included under various Sections of these

Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations included under different Sections of these Specifications that are dependent
upon each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved outlining special
procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance
at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate Contractors where coordination of their
Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures

with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure
orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Pre-installation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated
into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated
as Owner’s property.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PAGE 1 OF 6

\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 1\013000 Project Management and Coordination.doc SECTION 013000
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare and submit coordination Drawings where close and careful
coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated off-site by separate
entities, and where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient
installation of different components.
1. Show the interrelationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
2. Indicate required installation sequences.
3. Comply with requirements contained in Section “Submittals Procedures.”
4. Refer to Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods,” Section “Coordinated Shop
Drawings,” and Section “Basic Electrical Requirements” for specific coordination Drawing
requirements for mechanical and electrical installations.
B. Staff Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of principal staff
assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify
individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including
home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary
telephone.
1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Engineer of scheduled meeting
dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting
minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Engineer, within 3 days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference and organizational meeting at

the Project site or other convenient site prior to commencement of construction activities. Conduct
the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, the Engineer, Engineer and their consultants;
the Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers and other
concerned parties shall each be represented at the conference. All participants at the conference
shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Phasing.
c. Critical work sequencing.
d. Designation of responsible personnel.
e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
f. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
g. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
h. Submittal procedures.
i. Preparation of Record Documents.
j. Use of the premises.
k. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.

l. Parking availability.
m. Office, work, and storage areas.
n. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
o. Safety procedures.
p. First aid.
q. Security.
r. Progress cleaning.
s. Working hours.
t. Housekeeping.
u. Subcontractors.
v. Preliminary Schedule of Shop Drawings and Samples.
w. Minority Business Enterprise Goals.
x. Co-ordination with other contractors.
y. Insurance in Force.
z. Contractor's Schedule of Values.
C. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at the Project Site at regularly scheduled intervals.
Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and Engineer, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other
items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to
the current status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine
whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to
Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will
be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether
schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be
completed within the Contract Time.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Time.
3) Sequence of operations.
4) Status of submittals.
5) Deliveries.
6) Off-site fabrication.
7) Access.
8) Site utilization.
9) Temporary facilities and controls.
10) Work hours.
11) Hazards and risks.
12) Progress cleaning.
13) Quality and work standards.
14) Change Orders.
15) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Reporting: No later than 3 days after each progress meeting date, distribute copies of minutes
of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a
brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised
schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
D. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at regularly scheduled intervals.

Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as
progress meetings and pre-installation conferences.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and Engineer, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting.
Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last
coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or
behind schedule, in relation to Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine
how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties
involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current
and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
b. Schedule Updating: Revise Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule after each
coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized.
Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.
c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Time.
3) Sequence of operations.
4) Status of submittals.
5) Deliveries.
6) Off-site fabrication.
7) Access.
8) Site utilization.
9) Temporary facilities and controls.
10) Work hours.
11) Hazards and risks.
12) Progress cleaning.
13) Quality and work standards.
14) Change Orders.
3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to
others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS
A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate
and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
B. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions and

recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or
stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents.
C. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject
damaged and defective items.
D. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work. Secure Work
true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement.
E. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints in exposed Work to
obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Engineer for final decision.
F. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation.
G. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure the best possible
results. Isolate each part of the completed construction from incompatible material as necessary to
prevent deterioration.
H. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to minimize the necessity of
uncovering completed construction for that purpose.
I. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individual components at
standard mounting heights recognized within the industry for the particular application indicated.
Refer questionable mounting height decisions to the Engineer for final decision.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials
in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or
deterioration at Substantial Completion.
B. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the
construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without
damaging effects.
C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of the construction
completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious
exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Excessive static or dynamic loading.
2. Excessive internal or external pressures.

3. Excessively high or low temperatures.
4. Thermal shock.
5. Excessively high or low humidity.
6. Air contamination or pollution.
7. Water or ice.
8. Solvents.
9. Chemicals.
10. Light.
11. Radiation.
12. Puncture.
13. Abrasion.
14. Heavy traffic.
15. Soiling, staining and corrosion.
16. Bacteria.
17. Rodent and insect infestation.
18. Combustion.
19. Electrical current.
20. High speed operation.
21. Improper lubrication.
22. Unusual wear or other misuse.
23. Contact between incompatible materials.
24. Destructive testing.
25. Misalignment.
26. Excessive weathering.
27. Unprotected storage.
28. Improper shipping or handling.
29. Theft.
30. Vandalism.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 013200 – CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Preliminary Construction Schedule.
2. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
3. Submittals Schedule.
4. Field condition reports.
5. Construction photographs.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and
controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and
resources.
1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned
early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor activity is an activity that must be completed before a given activity can be started.
B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project
where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when
activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
C. Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of activities through the network schedule that
establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly
owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule
milestones and Contract completion date.
2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early
start of the following activity.
3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely
affecting the planned Project completion date.
F. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for
greater detail.
G. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction

element.
H. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.
I. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity
relationships.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PAGE 1 OF 7

\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 1\013200 Construction Progress Documentation.doc SECTION 013200
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
B. Submittals Schedule: Submit 2 copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular
format:
1. Scheduled date for first submittal.
2. Specification Section number and title.
3. Submittal category (action or informational).
4. Name of subcontractor.
5. Description of the Work covered.
6. Scheduled date for Engineer's final release or approval.
C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit 2 printed copies; one a single sheet of reproducible
media, and one a print.
D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit 2 printed copies of initial schedule, one a reproducible
print and one a blue- or black-line print, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction
period.
E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit 2 printed copies of each of the following
computer-generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number,
activity description, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start
date, late finish date, and total float.
1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or
actual start date if known.
2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending
order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.
3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
F. Daily Construction Reports: Submit 2 copies at weekly intervals.
G. Material Location Reports: Submit 2 copies at weekly intervals.
H. Field Condition Reports: Submit 2 copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.
I. Special Reports: Submit 2 copies at time of unusual event.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting.
B. Photographer Qualifications: An individual of established reputation who has been regularly

engaged as a professional photographer for not less than three years.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction
activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts,
Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in
proper sequence.
C. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested, including
access to Project site and use of temporary facilities including temporary lighting.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by

construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule. Include submittals
required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly
progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or
fabrication.
a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule,
instead of tabulating them separately.
3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling."
B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to proceed to date of Final
Completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early
completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically
allowed by Engineer.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major
items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement
cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication,
and delivery.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section "Submittal
Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction
Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial
Completion, and allow time for Engineer's administrative procedures necessary for certification
of Substantial Completion.

D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as
follows in schedule and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.
3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner.
4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery
date indicated in Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible
delivery date.
5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date
indicated in Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible
delivery date.
6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Coordination with existing construction.
b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
c. Uninterruptible services.
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
e. Use of premises restrictions.
f. Provisions for future construction.
g. Seasonal variations.
h. Environmental control.
7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work,
including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Subcontract awards.
b. Submittals.
c. Purchases.
d. Mockups.
e. Fabrication.
f. Sample testing.
g. Deliveries.
h. Installation.
i. Tests and inspections.
j. Adjusting.
k. Curing.
l. Startup and placement into final use and operation.
8. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work.
Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated
with other construction activities to provide for the following:
a. Structural completion.
b. Permanent space enclosure.
c. Completion of mechanical installation.
d. Completion of electrical installation.
e. Substantial Completion.
E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not
limited to the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.

F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and
actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation
of payment requests.
1. Refer to Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures.
G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission,
prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the
overall project schedule.
2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within 7

days of date established for Notice to Proceed.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each
week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 30 days of
construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement
prediction based on indicated activities.
2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)
A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type,

Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for Notice to Proceed. Base
schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was
received since the start of Project.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each
week with a continuous vertical line.
1. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated
completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.
C. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total
float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:
1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.
2. Description of activity.
3. Principal events of activity.
4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
5. Early and late start dates.
6. Early and late finish dates.
7. Activity duration in workdays.
8. Total float or slack time.
9. Average size of workforce.
10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the Schedule of Values).
D. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports
showing the following:
1. Identification of activities that have changed.
2. Changes in early and late start dates.
3. Changes in early and late finish dates.
4. Changes in activity durations in workdays.
5. Changes in the critical path.

6. Changes in total float or slack time.
7. Changes in the Contract Time.
E. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates.
1. In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar
value.
2. In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar
value.
3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list
date.
4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress
meetings.
a. In both value summary lists, tabulate “actual percent complete” and “cumulative value
completed” with total at bottom.
b. Submit value summary printouts usually one week before each regularly scheduled
progress meeting.
2.5 REPORTS
A. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the
Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information on CSI Form
13.2A. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for
changing the Contract Documents.
2.6 SPECIAL REPORTS
A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute
copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site,
whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events,
persons participating, response by Contractor’s personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar
pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using
CPM scheduling.
1. In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor
employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques.
Submit qualifications.
2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged
delays, and time impact.
B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At weekly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual
construction progress and activities. Issue schedule 1 week before each regularly scheduled progress
meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been
recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited
to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Engineer, Owner, separate contractors,

testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same
locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of
the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 013300 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings,
Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Engineer's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Engineer's approval. Submittals
may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for
representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout
document format.
1.3 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS:
A. Engineer's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided
by Engineer for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1. Engineer will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings
for use in preparing Shop Drawings.
a. Engineer makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data
drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCAD
Release 2015.
c. Contractor shall execute data licensing agreement.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction

activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and
related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial
submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification
Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with
other submittals until related submittals are received.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PAGE 1 OF 8

\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 1\013300 Submittal Procedures.doc SECTION 013300
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time
for review shall commence on Engineer's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time
will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit
processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Engineer will advise Contractor when a
submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as
initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 days for review of each resubmittal.
4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Engineer's consultants, Owner,
or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.
D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as
follows:
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling
navigation to each item.
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall
include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).
3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings
and action taken by Engineer.
4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner,
containing the following information:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Engineer.
d. Name of Construction Manager.
e. Name of Contractor.
f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
h. Category and type of submittal.
i. Submittal purpose and description.
j. Specification Section number and title.
k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of
multiple items.
l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
n. Related physical samples submitted directly.
o. Indication of full or partial submittal.
p. Transmittal number.
q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
r. Other necessary identification.
s. Remarks.
5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file
metadata:
a. Project name.

b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
c. Manufacturer name.
d. Product name.
E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Engineer.
F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's

letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by
Engineer on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents,
including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related
submittal.
G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Engineer's action
stamp.
H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action
submittals that are marked with approval notation from Engineer's action stamp.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual
Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.
1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.
a. Engineer will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic
Project record document file.
2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity
responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an
officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates
and certifications where indicated.
b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where
indicated.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type
of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not
suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.

c. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
b. Printed performance curves.
c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
6. Submit Product Data in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop
Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following
information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
2. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal
and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one
submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic
submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and
identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control
comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to
determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification
Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property,
are the property of Contractor.
5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections
of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit 1 set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or
similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line.
Engineer will return submittal with options selected.
6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from
same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically
identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and
texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial
sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials;
complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern;
color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit 3 sets of Samples. Engineer will retain 1 Sample sets;
remainder will be returned.
1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be
demonstrated.
2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material
or product represented by a Sample, submit at least 3 sets of paired units that show
approximate limits of variations.
E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary

indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following
information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract
Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.
2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
3. Number and name of room or space.
4. Location within room or space.
5. Submit product schedule in the following format:
F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section

"Project Management and Coordination."
G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section

"Construction Progress Documentation."
H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in
Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."
I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with
requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in
Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm
or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information
of Engineers and owners, and other information specified.
M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply
with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification
and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by
manufacturer for this specific Project.
O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in
the Contract Documents.
S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of
tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive
tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include
the following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization.
2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers' names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
7. Limitations of use.
U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of
product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation
of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for
adhesion.
W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed
either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance
with requirements in the Contract Documents.
X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include
list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load
diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include
page numbers.
2.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT HEALTH & SAFETY PLAN
A. No later than the Pre-construction meeting, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a written
Project Health & Safety Plan, which states the Contractor’s company policy relative to safety. The
plan must also address specific health and safety concerns, which are expected to be encountered on
the project. As a minimum this plan shall include:
1. Listing of project and company safety officers.
2. Specific company safety policies.
3. Employee Safety Training Program.
4. Administrative procedures to handle employee health & safety concerns.
5. Procedures for insuring worker compliance with health and safety requirements.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that each Subcontractor employed on the project
complies with the requirements of this section either by submitting a copy of the subcontractor’s
Project Health & Safety Plan or by submitting a letter from the Subcontractor stating that they will
comply with the provisions of the Contractor’s Project Health & Safety Plan.
C. Submission of the required Project Health & Safety Plan by the Contractor is primarily for
information or record purposes and shall not be construed to imply approval by the Engineer or to
relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to adequately protect the health & safety of all workers
involved in the project.
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and
field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Engineer.
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and
location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of
Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and
approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ENGINEER'S ACTION
A. General: Engineer will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will
return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Engineer will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Engineer will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and
will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
1. Final Unrestricted Release: Where submittals are marked “No Exceptions Taken,” that part of
the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the
Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that compliance.
2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittals are marked “Make Corrections Noted,” that
part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or
corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will
depend on that compliance.
3. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked “Revise and Resubmit,” “Rejected,” or
“Submit Specified Item,” do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal,
including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal
in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary, to obtain a
different action mark.
a. Do not permit submittals marked “Revise and Resubmit,” “Rejected,” or “Submit
Specified Item” to be used at the Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
4. Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information or record purposes, special
processing or other activity, the submittal will be returned, marked “Action Not Required.”
C. Informational Submittals: Engineer will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject
and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Engineer will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.
D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 014000 – QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract
Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the
Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover
production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control
procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Engineer, Owner,
or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed
construction complies with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. Services
do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Engineer.
C. Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups are
used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or
operation; they are not Samples.
D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the
inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each
product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design
professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design
criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
C. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1. Specification Section number and title.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PAGE 1 OF 5

\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 1\014000 Quality Requirements.doc SECTION 014000
2. Description of test and inspection.
3. Identification of applicable standards.
4. Identification of test and inspection methods.
5. Number of tests and inspections required.
6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
8. Requirements for obtaining samples.
9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
D. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the
Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
E. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance
with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for
this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production
capacity to produce required units.
B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's
products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to

those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in

jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the
kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system,

assembly, or products that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and
extent.
F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be
performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy
qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations
governing the Work, nor interfere with local trade-union jurisdictional settlements and similar
conventions.
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and
inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E548, and that specializes in types of tests and
inspections to be performed. Each testing agency shall be authorized by the authorities having
jurisdiction in the state in which the project is located.
H. Preconstruction Testing: Testing agency shall perform preconstruction testing for compliance with
specified requirements for performance and test methods.
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a. Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and
construction. Provide sizes and configurations of assemblies to adequately demonstrate
capability of product to comply with performance requirements.
b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
c. Fabricate and install test assemblies using installers who will perform the same tasks for
Project.
d. When testing is complete, remove assemblies; do not reuse materials on Project.
2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and
similar quality-assurance service to Engineer, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and
inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or
deviates from the Contract Documents.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,

Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to
perform.
2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized
by Change Orders.
3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that
failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract
Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified

and required by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to
perform these quality-control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or
inspecting will be performed.
3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified
written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents
are Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when
they so direct.
C. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests and
inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner.
1. Testing agency will notify Engineer and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies
observed in the Work during performance of its services.
2. Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service to Engineer with copy to Contractor and to authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial
Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
4. Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
5. Testing agency will retest and reinspect corrected work.
D. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative

to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections.
Report results in writing.
E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction
that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract
Documents.
F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in performance of duties.
Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Engineer and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work
during performance of its services.
2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from requirements.
3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-
control service through Contractor.
4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or
accept any portion of the Work.
5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar
quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency
sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting.
Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples.

5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.
H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and

quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-
control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date
established for Notice to Proceed.
1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Engineer, testing agencies, and each party
involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.
3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged
construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these
Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a manner
that eliminates evidence of patching.
2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and
Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility
for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 015000 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary services, facilities, and controls including
temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Sewers and drainage.
2. Water service and distribution.
3. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water facilities.
4. Heating and cooling facilities.
5. Ventilation.
6. Electric power.
7. Lighting.
C. Temporary construction and support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Temporary roads and paving.
2. Dewatering facilities and drains.
3. Project identification and temporary signs.
4. Waste disposal facilities.
5. Field offices.
6. Storage and fabrication sheds.
7. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.
8. Temporary enclosures.
9. Temporary heat.
D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Environmental protection.
2. Stormwater control.
3. Tree and plant protection.
4. Pest control.
5. Sidewalk bridge and/or site enclosure fence.
6. Security enclosure and lockup.
7. Barricades, warning signs, and lights.
8. Fire protection.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Engineer, permanent or temporary roofing is complete,

insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed
with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
1.3 USE CHARGES
A. General: The cost of all use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Engineer
and shall be included in the Contract Sum. The contractor shall be responsible for paying all use
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PAGE 1 OF 10

\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Final\100% Submittal-Current\015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls.docx SECTION 015000
charges until the project is substantially complete. Allow other entities to use temporary services and
facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Owner's construction forces.
2. Occupants of Project.
3. Engineer.
4. Testing agencies.
5. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Water Service: Pay water service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for water used by all
entities engaged in construction activities at Project site.
C. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for
electricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, utility billings, and similar
procedures performed on temporary utilities.
B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for submittal of
Contractor's Construction Schedule, submit a schedule indicating implementation and termination of
each temporary utility.
A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241.
1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary
utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions.
2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
3. Refer to Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services, prepared
jointly by AGC and ASC, for industry recommendations.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary
utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
C. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction, including but not limited to:
1. Building Code requirements.
2. Health and safety regulations.
3. Utility company regulations.
4. Police, Fire Department and Rescue Squad rules.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of
temporary service to use of permanent service. Prepare a schedule indicating date for implementation
and terminations of each temporary facility.
1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its

use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all
parties engaged in the Work:
1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat.
2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work.
3. Operate in a safe and efficient manner.
4. Take necessary fire prevention measures.
5. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress.
6. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or
persist on the site.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition
may be used if approved by Engineer. Provide materials suitable for use intended.
B. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.76-mm-) thick, galvanized steel,
chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum
2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts[, with
1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails]
Or
C. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm) 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric
fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-
mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-)
OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete or galvanized steel bases for supporting posts.
D. Lumber and Plywood:

1. For job-built temporary offices, shops and sheds within the construction area, provide UL
labeled, fire treated lumber and plywood for framing, sheathing and siding.
2. For signs and directory boards, provide exterior type, Grade B-B High Density Concrete Form
Overlay Plywood conforming to PS-1, of sizes and thickness indicated.
3. For fences and vision barriers, provide exterior type, minimum 3/8-inch thick plywood.
4. For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8-inch thick exterior
plywood.
E. Roofing: Provide UL Class, A standard weight asphalt shingles complying with ASTM D3018, or
UL Class "C mineral surfaced roll roofing complying with ASTM D249 on roofs of job-built
temporary offices, shops and sheds.
F. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick by 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by maximum
available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C36.
G. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively.

H. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting."
1. For job-built temporary offices, shops, sheds, fences and other exposed lumber and plywood,
provide exterior grade acrylic-latex emulsion over exterior primer.
2. For sign panels and applying graphics, provide exterior grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior
primer.
3. For interior walls of temporary offices, provide two coats interior latex flat wall paint.
I. Tarpaulins: Provide waterproof, fire-resistant, UL labeled tarpaulins with flame-spread rating of

15 or less. For temporary enclosures provide translucent nylon reinforced laminated polyethylene or
polyvinyl chloride fire retardant tarpaulins.
J. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide new equipment; if acceptable to the Engineer, undamaged, previously used
equipment in serviceable condition may be used. Provide equipment suitable for use intended.
B. Field Offices: Prefabricated, or Mobile units with lockable entrances, operable windows, and
serviceable finishes; heated and air conditioned; on foundations adequate for normal loading.
C. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable UL-rated, class "A fire extinguishers for
temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated,
class "ABC dry chemical extinguishers, or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA recommended
classes for the exposures.
1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required
by location and class of fire exposure.
D. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion

type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent
material.
E. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Drinking-water fountains or Containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water

drinking-water units, including paper cup supply.
1. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water
temperature at 45 to 55 DegF (7.2 to 12.7 DegC).
F. Heating Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide vented, self-
contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is
prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use for type of fuel being consumed.
G. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to

120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button,
and pilot light.
H. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for surveillance,
wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic
sheathed cable.

I. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for
adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered glass enclosures, where exposed to
breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture.
J. Water Hoses: Provide 3/4 inch heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 feet long
with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system; provide
adjustable shut-off nozzles at hose discharge.
K. First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations.
L. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Install storage and fabrication sheds, sized, furnished, and equipped
to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility service. Sheds may
be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within the building or elsewhere on the site.
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve
Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and
modify facilities as required.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required.
Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed
permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing
service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with
matching, compatible materials, and equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available,
provide trucked-in services.
3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's easements cannot
be used for that purpose.
B. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent that
can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage ditches,
dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be
lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off-site
in a lawful manner.
1. Filter out excessive soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants that
might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge.
2. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system or private system indicated as directed by
sewer department officials.
3. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. After heavy
use, restore normal conditions promptly.
4. Provide temporary filter beds, settlement tanks, separators, and similar devices to purify
effluent to levels acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping before use.
1. Provide rubber hoses as necessary to serve Project site.
D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply
with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures
and facilities.
1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable
materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for
disposal of used material.
2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy.
3. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide bottled-water, drinking-water units.
a. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water
temperature at 45 to 55 DegF (7.2 to 12.7 DegC).
4. Locate toilets and drinking-water fixtures so personnel need not walk more than two stories
vertically or 200 feet (60 m) horizontally to facilities.
E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for
curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse
effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have
a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
1. Before building is considered enclosed, each Contractor shall provide temporary heat and
enclosure for purposes as follows:
a. To heat materials and maintain proper temperatures in connection with the installation
and curing of concrete, mortar and masonry.
b. To provide sufficient heat and protection so the Work can be accomplished to the
standards set forth in the Contract Documents.
2. After building is considered enclosed, the Construction Contractor shall provide temporary heat
to maintain temperature of at least 40 DegF for the period of the working hours of the day or as
required by the Engineer. Heat may be provided at this time by mobile oil or gas fired
temporary units equipped with proper controls and safety devices approved by the Underwriters
Laboratories.
3. The building shall be considered enclosed when the exterior construction is completed
sufficiently to exclude the elements and retain heat.
4. After building is considered permanently enclosed the Construction Contractor shall maintain
temperature of at least 50 DegF throughout the spaces for 24 hours a day. Provide higher
temperatures if required to perform or protect the work. At this time, heat shall be provided by
semi-permanently installed gas or oil-fired space heaters which are thermostatically controlled,
vented properly to the outside and provided with piped fuel.
5. The building is considered permanently enclosed when:
a. All exterior walls are insulated with permanent or temporary insulation.
b. Permanent glazed windows are in place.
c. Roof is permanently insulated.
d. Door openings are provided with permanent doors or temporary plywood panels.
6. The permanent heating system may be used with approval of the Engineer, to provide
temporary heat provided that all equipment is left in proper and acceptable condition on
completion of the Work and all equipment construction filters have been replaced. Operating
of heating plant during this temporary heating period shall be under the supervision of the
Heating Contractor.

7. The period of the guarantee of the system will commence at the time of the Owners occupancy
of the structure.
8. The costs of temporary heat shall be paid by the Construction Contractor until the Owners
occupancy of the structure.
F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse
effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce
ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
G. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution
system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include
meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnecting means, automatic ground-fault interrupters,
and main distribution switchgear.
1. Install electric power service underground, unless overhead service must be used.
2. Install power distribution wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage.
3. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source as directed by electric company
officials.
H. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and
equipment.
1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if single
lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe
length-voltage ratio.
2. Provide metal conduit, tubing, or metallic cable for wiring exposed to possible damage.
Provide rigid steel conduits for wiring exposed on grades, floors, decks, or other traffic areas.
3. Provide metal conduit enclosures or boxes for wiring devices.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and
support facilities for easy access.
2. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction
area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.
3. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas
adequate to support loads and to withstand exposure to traffic during construction period. Locate
temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Extend
temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction
operations.
1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved
areas.
2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according
to Division 31 Section "Earthwork."
3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading,
proofrolling, compacting, and testing.

4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately
before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before
installation of final course according to Division 2 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving."
C. Traffic Controls: Provide temporary traffic controls at junction of temporary roads with public roads.
Include warning signs for public traffic and "STOP" signs for entrance onto public roads. Comply
with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements in applicable Specification Sections for
temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction
activities included in individual Sections. Where feasible, use same facilities. Maintain Project site,
excavations, and construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining
property nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2. Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system, provide temporary
drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is completed.
3. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily. Provide
waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations.
Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from
other waste. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning
requirements.
1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, for
each type of waste material to be deposited.
2. Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate types of waste
materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide detailed
information for on-site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials. Provide
information on destination of each type of waste material and means to be used to dispose of all
waste materials.
3. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car
and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage
elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return
items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire
unit, or provide new units as required.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction
in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air,
waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and
equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that
will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site.
B. Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations
and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.
C. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of
trees to protect vegetation from construction damage. Protect tree root systems from damage,
flooding, and erosion.
D. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, install chain-link or portable chain-link
enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates. Locate where indicated, or enclose entire Project site

or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that
will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.
1. Set fence posts in compacted mixture of gravel and earth.
2. Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and other
construction operations.
3. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys.
E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed
areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft,
and similar violations of security.
1. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for theft,
provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of
material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism.
F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting
structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform
personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including
flashing red or amber lights.
1. For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8 inch (16 mm)
thick exterior plywood.
G. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and
completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities.
Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated
temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing
requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.
2. Vertical Openings: Close openings of 25 square feet (2.3 sq. m) or less with plywood or
similar materials.
3. Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load-
bearing, wood-framed construction.
4. Install tarpaulins securely using fire-retardant-treated wood framing and other materials.
5. Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 square feet (9.2 sq. m) in area, use
fire-retardant-treated material for framing and main sheathing.
H. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install
and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably
predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241.
1. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible from
space being served, with sign mounted above.
a. Field Offices: Class A stored-pressure water-type extinguishers.
b. Other Locations: Class ABC dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of
extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures.
c. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose;
provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell.
2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.
3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection
facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous
fire-exposure areas.

4. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of
fire ignition.
5. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete
installation of permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place into
operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.
6. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and first-aid fire-protection program for
personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to
be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
7. Provide hoses for fire protection of sufficient length to reach construction areas. Hang hoses
with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be
removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse,
limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage
caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation,
and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid
possibility of damage.
2. Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect
from damage during excavation operations.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as available, do
not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until
Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Unless the Engineer requests that it be maintained longer, remove each
temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use
of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore
permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility.
Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily
repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving.
Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not
comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil,
asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of
plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary
entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction
period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION

SECTION 017700 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but
not limited to, the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Project Record Documents.
3. Operation and maintenance manuals.
4. Warranties.
5. Instruction of Owner's personnel.
6. Final cleaning.
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial

Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list,
and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final
Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and
similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner.
Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction
tools, and similar elements.
11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Engineer will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify
Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Engineer, that must be
completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PAGE 1 OF 6

\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 1\017700 Closeout Procedures.doc SECTION 017700
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
1.3 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion,
complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Engineer's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Engineer. The certified copy of the
list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment,
and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Engineer will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of
construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record
Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Engineer's
reference during normal working hours.
B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract
Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown
originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity
is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily
identified and recorded later.
b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before
enclosing concealed installations.
d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual
physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show
cross-reference on Contract Drawings.
2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between
changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from
original Drawings.
4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and
similar identification where applicable.
5. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with
durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract
modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from
that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment
furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings where applicable.
D. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one set to indicate the
actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings where applicable.
E. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification

Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the
Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance
of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and
maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows:
1. Operation Data:
a. Emergency instructions and procedures.
b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards.
c. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend operations.
d. Description of controls and sequence of operations.
e. Piping diagrams.
2. Maintenance Data:
a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts.
b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier.
c. Maintenance procedures.
d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance.
e. Maintenance record forms.
f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials.
g. Copies of maintenance service agreements.
h. Copies of warranties and bonds.
B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index
data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate
contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on
front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project
name, and subject matter of contents.

1.6 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Engineer for designated portions of the
Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.
B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated
portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period
by separate agreement with Contractor.
C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project
Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness
as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to
identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation,
including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of
the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or
property or that might damage finished surfaces.
3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and
equipment not part of a system.
1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures.
2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal
operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season.
3. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days advance notice.
4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction,
and course content.
B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for
each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.
For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for
the following:
1. System design and operational philosophy.
2. Review of documentation.
3. Operations.
4. Adjustments.

5. Troubleshooting.
6. Maintenance.
7. Repair.
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with
local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance
program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of
Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign
deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of
stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of
exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums,
shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if
visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove
glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or
broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking
care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that
already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical
nameplates.
m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove
excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.
n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting
from water exposure.
p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of
diffusers, registers, and grills.
q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction.

r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective
and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements
for new fixtures.
s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid
Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials
into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 017839 – PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents,
including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
4. Record Samples.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit 2 set of marked-up Record Prints.
B. Record Specifications: Submit 2 copies of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract
modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit 1 copies of each approved Product Data submittal.
1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit
marked-up Product Data as an insert in the manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and
Shop Drawings.
1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from
that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether
individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up
Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to
identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before
enclosing concealed installations.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Depths of foundations below first floor.
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
g. Actual equipment locations.
h. Duct size and routing.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PAGE 1 OF 3

\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 1\017839 Project Record Documents.docx SECTION 017839
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
j. Changes made by Change Order or Work Change Directive.
k. Changes made following Engineer's written orders.
l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual
physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-
reference on the Contract Drawings.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between
changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from
original Drawings.
6. Note Work Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar
identification, where applicable.
B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable
sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
2. Record CAD Drawings: Organize CAD information into separate electronic files that
correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet
identification. Include identification in each CAD file.
3. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Engineer and Construction Manager.
e. Name of Contractor.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies
from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment
furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of the manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.
5. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data where applicable.
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies
substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data where applicable.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record
keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
2.5 RECORD SAMPLE SUBMITTAL
A. Immediately prior to date of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall meet with the Engineer
and, if desired, the Owner's personnel at the site to determine which of the Samples maintained
during the construction period shall be transmitted to Owner for record purposes. Comply with the
Engineer's instructions for packaging, identification marking, and delivery to Owner's Sample storage
space. Dispose of other Samples in manner specified for disposal of surplus and waste materials.
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record
Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do
not wait until the end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field
office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record
Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry,
legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents
for Engineer's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete floors and slabs on grade.
2. Concrete foundations and anchor bolts for structure.
3. Joint devices associated with concrete work.
4. Miscellaneous concrete elements including equipment pads.
5. Concrete curing.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements.
2. Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealing.
3. Section 32 1313 – Concrete Paving.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials;
American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
2. 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002).
3. 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
4. 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute
International; 2004 (Errata 2007).
5. 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete
Institute International; 2000.
6. 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
7. 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
8. 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001 (Reapproved
2008).
9. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American
Concrete Institute International; 2011.
10. 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2004.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM):

1. A185 / A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete; 2007.
2. A497 / A497M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for
Concrete; 2007.
3. A615 /A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2012.
4. C33 / C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011a.
5. C39 / C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 2012a.
6. C94 / C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2012.
7. C109 / C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
(Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens); 2012.
8. C143 / C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2012.
9. C150 / C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PAGE 1 OF 12

SECTION 033000
10. C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007.
11. C173 / C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method; 2012.
12. C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a.
13. C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete;
2011.
14. C494 / C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2012.
15. C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use
in Concrete; 2012.
16. C685 / C685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and
Continuous Mixing; 2011.
17. C881 / C881M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete;
2010.
18. C1059 / C1059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened
Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2008).
19. C1107 / C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout
(Nonshrink); 2011.
20. C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures; 2012.
21. D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and
Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004 (Reapproved
2008).
22. D2103 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting; 2010.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming
accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, water-stops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-
shake finish materials, and others as requested by the Architect.
B. Shop Drawings, Reinforcement: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of
concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced
Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of
concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete
structures.
C. Samples: Submit samples of materials as specified and as otherwise requested by Designer, including
names, source and descriptions.
D. Laboratory Test Reports: Submit laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test as
specified.
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
1. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Mix and deliver concrete to project ready mixed in accordance with ASTM C94.

SECTION 033000
B. Schedule delivery so that pours will not be interrupted for over fifteen [15] minutes.
C. Place concrete on site within ninety [90] minutes after proportioning materials at batch plant.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMWORK
A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise indicated, construct formwork for exposed
concrete surfaces with acceptable panel-type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth,
exposed surfaces.
B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished
structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least
two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond with,
stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete
surfaces.
2.2 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade [60], deformed.
B. Supports for Steel Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs,
spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars in place. Use wire bar
type supports complying with CRSI specifications, unless otherwise acceptable.
C. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not
support chair legs.
D. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide
supports with legs which are plastic protected (CRSI, Class [1]) or stainless steel protected (CRSI,
Class [2]).
E. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, Welded steel wire fabric.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type [I] - Normal Portland type.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33.
C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class [C] or [F] (15% max.),
D. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Class [N].
E. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240, proportioned in accordance with ACI 211.1.
F. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.

SECTION 033000
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of [0.1] percent by weight of
cement.
B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260.

1. "Perma-Air" by Euclid Chemical Co.; "Sika Air" by Sika Chemical Corp.; "MB-VR or MB-
AE" by Master Builders; or approved equal.
C. High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type [G] and ASTM
C494/C494M Type [F] containing not more than [0.1] % chloride ions.
1. "Sikament" by Sika Chemical Corp.; "Eucon Super 37" by Euclid Chemical Co.; "Pozzolith" by
Master Builders; or approved equal.
D. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type [E].
E. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type [D].
F. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type [C].
G. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type [B].
H. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type [A] and containing not more than [0.1] %
chloride ions.
1. "Eucon WR-75" by Euclid Chemical Co.; "Pozzolith 344" by Master Builders; "Plastocrete
160" by Sika Chemical Corp.; or approved equal.
2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement,

water reducing and plasticizing agents.
1. Minimum Compressive Strength at [28] Days: [7,000] psi.
2. "Masterflow 713" by Master Builders; "Sonogrout" by Sonneborn-Contech; "Euco-NS" by
Euclid Chemical Co.; or approved equal.
2.6 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS
A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C1059 Type [II].
B. Epoxy Bonding System: Complying with ASTM C881 / C881M and of Type required for specific
application.
C. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: [1/2] inch thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top section
that will form [1/2] inch deep sealant pocket after removal.
2.7 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Reducer: Liquid thin-film-forming compound that reduces rapid moisture loss caused by
high temperature, low humidity, and high winds; intended for application immediately after concrete
placement.
B. Curing Compound, Naturally Dissipating: Clear, water-based, liquid membrane-forming compound,

that dissipates within [3] to [5] weeks; complying with ASTM C309.

SECTION 033000
1. "RezSeal" by Euclid Chemical Co.; "MB-429" by Master Builders; "Kure-n-Seal" by
Sonneborn Building Products; or approved equal.
C. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately [9] oz. per yd2,
complying with AASHTO M 182, Class [2].
D. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171.

1. Waterproof paper.
2. Polyethylene film.
3. Polyethylene-coated burlap.
E. Epoxy Resin Grout: FS MMM-G-650.
F. Dissipating Sealer: "Kurez DR", Euclid Chemical Company, equivalent products by Master Builders
or Sika, or approved equal.
G. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.
2.8 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.

1. Replace as much Portland cement as possible with fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag,
silica fume, or rice hull ash as is consistent with ACI recommendations.
B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field
experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.
1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
C. Normal Weight Concrete:

1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at [28] days: As
indicated on drawings.
2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum [20] percent of cementitious materials by weight.
Schedule for Utilization of Design Mix
Compressive Water / Cement

Location Air Content
Strength Ratio
Exterior Sidewalks, Slabs, Curbs [4,000] psi [0.48] Max [6] % (+/- 1%)
Interior Footings, Perimeter Wall Footings [3,000] psi [0.54] Max [4] % (+/- 1%)
Interior Slab on Grade [4,000] psi [0.52] Max [4] % (+/- 1%)
Filled CMU – [3/8] inch Max Aggregate [4,000] psi [0.44] Max [0] %
D. Adjustments to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when
characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant; at no
additional cost to Owner and as accepted by Designer. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and
strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Designer before using in work.
E. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by
manufacturer.

SECTION 033000
1. Use water-reducing admixture or high range water-reducing admixture (super plasticizer) in
concrete as required to enhance placement and workability.
2. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated. Add air
entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement
having total air content with a tolerance of plus-or-minus [1]%.
3. Use admixtures for water-reducing and set-control in strict compliance with manufacturer's
directions.
F. Slump limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as
follows:
1. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than [4] inch.
2. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than [2] inch and not more than [4] inch.
3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): Not more than [7] inch after addition
of HRWR to verified [2] inch – [4] inch slump concrete.
4. Other concrete: Not more than [4] inch.
2.9 MIXING
A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.
B. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing
time than specified in ASTM C 94 may be required.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied
loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete.
1. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast-in-place
concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.
2. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that
might be applied until such loads can be supported by concrete structure.
B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown, and to obtain accurate alignment,
location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages,
keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages
and inserts, and other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes.
Solidly butt joints and provide back-up at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste.
C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide
crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms
for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to lace concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood
inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal.
D. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form
accessories.
E. Verify that forms are clean before applying release agent.

SECTION 033000
F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap off metal form ties, designed to
prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. Provide ties so
portion remaining within concrete after removal is [1] inch inside concrete and will not leave holes
larger than [1] inch diameter in concrete surface.
G. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips
fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.
H. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other
trades.
I. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove
chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms and bracing
after concrete placement as required to eliminate mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
J. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by
cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load-bearing
applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required.
2. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications.
K. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert
steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.
L. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum [6]
inches. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and
follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering.
3.3 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT
A. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing
Bar", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified.
B. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh
and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either
direction.
C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork,

construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs,
runners, bolster, spacers, and hangers, as required.
D. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or
destroy bond with concrete.
E. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection. Set wire ties so
ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

SECTION 033000
3.4 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work
that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams,
instructions and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto.
B. Edge forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips
for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure units
sufficiently strong to support types of screed strips by use of strike-off templates or accepted
compacting type screeds.
3.5 SLAB JOINTING
A. Locate joints as indicated on the drawings.
B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.
C. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated or, if not indicated, locate so as
not to impair strength tolerances and appearance of the concrete floor slab or structure, as acceptable
to the Architect.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-ground at points of contact

between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade
beams and elsewhere as indicated.
E. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Saw contraction joints in slabs-on-ground as

detailed to form panels of patterns as shown. Fill joints with non-track polyurethane sealant as soon as
joint is complete. Install contraction joints at spacing not to exceed [12] feet [0] inches o.c. each way
unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
F. Joint filler and sealant materials are specified in Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealers.
3.6 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES
A. Clean re-used forms of concrete matrix residue, repair and patch as required to return forms to
acceptable surface condition.
B. Coat contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Apply
form-coating compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.7 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.
C. General: Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed
on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If
a section cannot be place continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit
concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation.

SECTION 033000
D. Wetting of drainage course: Crushed stone drainage course is to be thoroughly wetted prior to
concrete being placed over drainage course. Wetting is required only when drainage course is in direct
contact with concrete.
E. Preplacement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation,
reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast-in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their
work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work.
F. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement of forms and
reinforcing steel.
G. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than [24] inch
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers,
place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.
H. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading,

rodding or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with
ACI recommended practices. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Consolidate
concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and
other embedded items and into corners.
I. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within
limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed.
J. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike-off. Use bull floats or darbies to
smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing
operations.
K. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement operations.
L. Cold Weather Placing: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could
be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein
specified. Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. Do not use frozen materials or
materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing
frozen materials.
M. Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of
concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified.
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below
[90] degrees F ([32] degrees C). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to
control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing
water.
2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature
will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete.
3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel and subgrade just before concrete is placed.
4. Use water-reducing retarding admixture (Type D) when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placing conditions.
3.8 FINISH OR FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work or by other
construction, unless otherwise indicated. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form

SECTION 033000
facing materials used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other
projections exceeding [1/4] inch in height rubbed down or chipped off.
B. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have
received smooth form finish treatment, not later than one day after form removal. Moisten concrete
surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is
produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.
3.9 MONOLITHLIC SLAB FINISHES
A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork.
B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas [1/4] inch or more in height.
C. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:

1. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other
finishes as hereinafter specified. Check and level surface plane so that concrete tolerance is
within [1/4] inch within a radius of [10] foot straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low
spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a
uniform, smooth, granular texture.
2. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed-to-view, and slab
surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, wood, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile. Check and
level surface plane so that concrete tolerance is within [1/8] inch within the radius of a [10] foot
straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor
covering system.
3.10 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and
finishing.
C. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried.
Continue final curing for at least [7] days in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying
at end of final curing period.
D. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by applying curing and sealing compound, by moisture
curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, or by combinations thereof.
E. Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material
applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, damp-proofing, membrane roofing,
flooring (such as ceramic or quarry tile, glue-down carpet), painting, and other coatings and finish
materials, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect.
F. Cure freshly placed concrete by apply curing and sealing compound as soon as possible after finishing
operations and/or immediately after the disappearance of the "sheen" of surface moisture. Application
should be made with sprayer, lambs wool applicator or short nap roller. DO NOT cover more area
than can be worked in [10] minutes as the curing membrane will start to dry. After compound has
dried, cover concrete surface with polyethylene as outlined above.

SECTION 033000
3.11 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, wall, columns, and similar parts
of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than [50] degrees F ([10] degrees
C) for [24] hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by
form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.
B. Form facing material may be removed [4] days after placement, only if shores and other vertical
supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or
disturbing shores and supports.
3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling-In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage or work by other trades
after said work is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in place
construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work.
B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as shown
on drawings.
C. Grout base plates and foundations as indicated, using specified non-shrink grout. Use non-metallic
grout for exposed conditions, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry where indicated on drawings and
as scheduled. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during concrete placement.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field quality control tests to be provided by independent testing agency as specified in Section 01
4000.
B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to
commencement of concrete operations.
D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with
specified requirements.
E. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete will include the following:
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C
94.
a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of
concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.
b. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight
concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of
each type of air-entrained concrete.
c. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is [40] degrees F ([4] degrees
C) and below, and when [80] degrees F ([27] degrees C) and above; and each time a set
of compression test specimens made.
d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of [5] standard cylinders for each
compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold, store, and transport cylinders

SECTION 033000
for laboratory cured test specimens except when field-cure test specimens are required, to
the satisfaction of testing laboratory.
e. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; [1] set for each day's pour exceeding [5] yds3
plus additional sets for each [50] yd3. over and above the first [25] yd3 of each concrete
class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at [7] days, two specimens tested of [28]
days, the average of two constituting the [28] days test, and two specimens retained in
reserve for later testing if required; total of five specimens required.
f. When frequency of testing will provide less than [5] compressive strength tests for a
given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least [5] randomly selected batches or
from each batch if fewer than [5] are used.
2. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect and Contractor on same day that tests are
made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and
number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class,
location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at [28] days, concrete mix
proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both [7] day test
and [28] day tests.
3. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted to verify tests of in-place concrete but shall not be used as the sole basis for
acceptance or rejection.
4. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test
results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in
the structure. Testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored
cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other acceptable methods. Contractor shall pay for
such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable
concrete is verified.
3.14 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to the Architect and Contractor
within [24] hours of the test.
B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or
specified requirements.
C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of
additional testing shall be borne by the Contractor when defective concrete is identified.
3.15 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 033000
SECTION 034816 - PRECAST CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Precast concrete splash blocks for downspouts spilling onto grade.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals for Review:

1. Product Data: Provide unit configuration and dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Mix:
1. Minimum [5000] psi compressive strength at [28] days, air entrained to [5] to [7] percent.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Use rigid molds, constructed to maintain precast units uniform in shape, size and finish. Maintain
consistent quality during manufacture.
B. Cure units to develop concrete quality, and to minimize appearance blemishes including non-
uniformity, staining, and surface cracking.
C. Minor patching in plant is acceptable, providing appearance of units is not impaired.
D. Nominal Size: [4] inches high x [16] inches wide x [30] inches long.
E. Provide raised lip at sides and rear edge.
F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Place splash blocks under each downspout.
B. Set level, on firm bearing.
END OF SECTION
PRECAST CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCKS PAGE 1 OF 1

SECTION 034816
SECTION 040511 - MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Mortar for masonry.
2. Grout for Masonry.
2. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry.
3. Section 04 0516 – Masonry Grouting.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM):

1. C5 - Standard Specification for Quicklime for Structural Purposes.
2. C91 / C91M – Standard Specification for Masonry Cement.
3. C94 / C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
4. C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
5. C150 C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
6. C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
7. C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
8. C387 / C387M – Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Concrete
and High Strength Mortar.
9. C404 – Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout.
10. C476 – Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry.
11. C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for
Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry.
12. C979 / C979M – Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.
13. C1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout for Masonry.
14. C1072 – Standard Test Methods for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength.
15. C1142 – Standard Specification for Extended Life Mortar for Unit Masonry.
16. C1148 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Drying Shrinkage of Masonry Mortar.
17. C1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms.
18. E514 / E514M - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry.
19. E18 / E518M - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry.
B. The Masonry Society (TMS):

1. 402 - Building Code for Masonry Structures.
2. 602 - Specification for Masonry Structures.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include design mix and indicate whether the Proportion or Property specification of
ASTM C270 is to be used. Also include required environmental conditions and admixture limitations.
B. Samples: Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range.
C. Reports: Submit reports on mortar indicating compliance of mortar to property requirements of ASTM
C270 and test and evaluation reports per ASTM C780.
MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT PAGE 1 OF 5

SECTION 040511
D. Reports: Submit reports on grout indicating compliance of component grout materials to requirements
of ASTM C476 and test and evaluation reports to requirements of ASTM C1019.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit packaged dry mortar manufacturer's installation

instructions.
A. Perform Work in accordance with TMS 402 and 602.
B. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, per ASTM C 780.
1.5 PRE-CONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Testing will be conducted by an independent test agency, in accordance with provisions of Section 01
4000 - Quality Requirements.
B. Mortar Mixes: Test mortars prebatched by weight in accordance with ASTM C780 recommendations
for preconstruction testing.
1. Test results will be used to establish optimum mortar proportions and establish quality control
values for construction testing.
C. Grout Mixes: Test grout batches in accordance with ASTM C1019 procedures.
1. Test results will be used to establish optimum grout proportions and establish quality control
values for construction testing.
A. Deliver cement and lime in manufacturer's original, unopened packages or containers.
B. Protect materials from moisture absorption and damage; reject damaged containers.
C. Store aggregate to prevent inclusion of foreign matter.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of TMS 402/602 or applicable
building code, whichever is more stringent.
B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum [40] degrees F ([5] degrees C) prior
to, during, and [48] hours after completion of masonry work.
C. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum [90] degrees F ([32] degrees C) prior
to, during, and [48] hours after completion of masonry work.

SECTION 040511
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MORTAR AND GROUT APPLICATIONS
A. Use only factory premixed packaged dry materials for mortar and grout, with addition of water only at
project site.
1. Exception: If a specified mix design is not available in a premixed dry package, provide
equivalent mix design using standard non-premixed materials.
B. Mortar Color: Natural gray unless otherwise indicated.
C. Mortar Mix Designs: ASTM C270, Property Specification.

1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type S.
2. Exterior Masonry Veneer: Type N.
3. Exterior Cavity Walls: Type S mortar with Type N pointing mortar.
4. Exterior, Loadbearing Masonry: Type N.
5. Exterior, Non-loadbearing Masonry: Type N.
6. Exterior Repointing Mortar: Type N with maximum [2] percent ammonium stearate or calcium
stearate per cement weight.
7. Interior, Loadbearing Masonry: Type N.
8. Interior, Non-loadbearing Masonry: Type N.
D. Grout Mix Designs:

1. Bond Beams and Lintels: [4,000] psi ([21] MPa) strength at 28 days; [8] – [10] inches ([200] -
[250] mm) slump; provide premixed type in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
a. Fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of [2] inches ([50] mm) or less.
b. Coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than [2] inches ([50]
mm).
2. Engineered Masonry: [4,000] psi ([21] MPa) strength at 28 days; [8] – [10] inches ([200] –
[250] mm) slump; provide premixed type in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
a. Fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of [2] inches ([50] mm) or less.
b. Coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than [2] inches
([50]mm).
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Packaged Dry Material for Mortar for Unit Masonry: Premixed masonry cement and mason's sand;
complying with ASTM C387/C387M and capable of producing mortar of the specified strength in
accordance with ASTM C270 with the addition of water only.
1. Type: Type N.
2. Color: Standard gray.
3. Water repellent mortar for use with water repellent masonry units.
4. Manufacturers:
a. The QUIKRETE Companies: www.quikrete.com/#sle.
b. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
B. Packaged Dry Material for Mortar for Repointing: Premixed Portland cement, hydrated lime, and
graded sand; capable of producing Type O mortar in accordance with ASTM C270 with the addition
of water only.
1. Color: Standard gray.

SECTION 040511
C. Packaged Dry Material for Grout for Masonry: Premixed cementitious materials and dried aggregates;
capable of producing grout of the specified strength in accordance with ASTM C476 with the addition
of water only.
1. Type: Fine.
D. Water: Clean and potable.
E. Bonding Agent: Latex type.
2.3 MORTAR MIXING
A. Ready Mixed Mortar: ASTM C1142, Type equivalent to that specified according to ASTM C270.
B. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM C270
and in quantities needed for immediate use.
C. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process.
D. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
E. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.
F. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing.
2.4 GROUT MIXING
A. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M.
B. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM
C476 for fine and coarse grout.
C. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
D. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout.
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces.
B. Plug clean-out holes for grouted masonry with brick masonry units. Brace masonry to resist wet grout
pressure.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of section(s) in which masonry is specified.
B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids.
C. Do not install grout in lifts greater than [16] inches ([400] mm) without consolidating grout by
rodding.

SECTION 040511
D. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout.
E. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces.
3.3 GROUTING
A. Use either high-lift or low-lift grouting techniques, at Contractor's option, subject to other limitations
of Contract Documents.
B. Perform all grouting by means of low-lift technique. Do not employ high-lift grouting.
C. Perform grouting by means of high-lift technique, except in locations that mandate use of low-lift
grouting technique.
1. Do not use high-lift grouting where size of cavities mandates use of fine grout.
D. Low-Lift Grouting:
1. Limit height of pours to [12] inches ([300] mm).
2. Limit height of masonry to [16] inches ([400] mm) above each pour.
3. Pour grout only after vertical reinforcing is in place; place horizontal reinforcing as grout is
poured. Prevent displacement of bars as grout is poured.
4. Place grout for each pour continuously and consolidate immediately; do not interrupt pours for
more than 1[-1/2] hours.
E. High-Lift Grouting:
1. Verify that horizontal and vertical reinforcement is in proper position and adequately secured
before beginning pours.
2. Brick: Limit pours to maximum [12] feet ([3.66] m) in height and [25] feet ([7.6] m)
horizontally.
3. Hollow Masonry: Limit lifts to maximum [4] feet ([1.2] m) and pours to maximum height of
[24] feet ([7.3] m).
4. Place grout for spanning elements in single, continuous pour.
A. An independent testing agency will perform field tests, in accordance with provisions of Section 01
4000-Quality Requirements.
B. Test and evaluate mortar in accordance with ASTM C780 procedures.

1. Test with same frequency as specified for masonry units.
C. Test and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C1019 procedures.

1. Test with same frequency as specified for masonry units.
D. Prism Tests: Test masonry and mortar panels for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM
C1314, and for flexural bond strength in accordance with ASTM C1072 or ASTM E518/E518M;
perform tests and evaluate results as specified in individual masonry sections.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 040511
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
2. Masonry Accessories.
2. Section 04 0513 - Masonry Mortaring.
3. Section 04 0516 - Masonry Grouting.
4. Section 04 7323 – Calcium Silicate Manufactured Building Stone Masonry.
5. Section 07 2800 – Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barrier.
6. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)

1. A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
2. A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip.
3. A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
4. A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
5. A951 - Standard Specification for Masonry Joint Reinforcement.
6. B370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction.
7. C67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile.
8. C90 - Standard Specification for Hollow Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.
9. C129 - Standard Specification for Hollow Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.
10. C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Units Made from Clay or Shale).
11. C652 - Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or
Shale).
12. C744 - Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units.
13. C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for
Plain and Reinforced Concrete.
14. C1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout.
15. C1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms.
B. The Masonry Society (TMS):

1. 402 - Building Code for Masonry Structures.
2. 602 - Specification for Masonry Structures.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide information on reinforcing and anchors including sizes, profiles, materials, and
finishes.
UNIT MASONRY PAGE 1 OF 12

SECTION 042000
B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of
reinforced walls.
C. Samples: Brick samples in quantities showing full color and texture range.
D. Material Certificates: For each type of product indicated. Include statements of material properties
indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations
within standards.
1. For masonry units include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Documented experience in work of this Section.
B. Perform Work in accordance with TMS 402 and 602.
C. Preconstruction Testing Service: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing agency to
perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by
Contractor.
1. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 67.
2. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 140.
D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of
assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting
agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
E. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects.
1. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes approximately
[48] inches ([1200] mm) long by [48] inches ([1200] mm) high.
A. Store masonry off ground; prevent contact with materials that could cause staining or damage.
B. Protect reinforcement and anchors from corrosion.
A. Wall Protection:
1. During erection, cover tops of partially completed walls with strong waterproof membrane at
end of each day or work stoppage.
2. Extend cover minimum of [24] inches down both sides; hold securely in place.
B. Load Application:
1. Do not apply uniform loads for at least [12] hours after building masonry columns or walls.
2. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least [3] days after building masonry columns or walls.
C. Environmental Requirements:
1. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

SECTION 042000
2. Cold weather requirements: Do not use frozen materials or build on frozen work.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Design Basis – Standard Concrete Masonry Units: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. General Shale
3015 Bristol Highway
Johnson City, Tennessee 37601
Telephone: 423-282-4661
Website: (www.generalshale.com)
B. Design Basis – Masonry Accessories: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU)
A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:

1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of [16] inches by [8] inches ([400] mm by
[200] mm) and nominal depths as indicated on drawings for specific locations.
2. Special Shapes: Provide nonstandard blocks configured for corners.
3. Provide bullnose units for outside corners.
B. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight.
1. Hollow block, as indicated.
2. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture where indicated.
C. Non-Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C129, light weight.
1. Hollow block, as indicated.
2. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture where indicated.
3. Pattern: Split Face.
2.3 BRICK UNITS
A. Building (Common) Brick: ASTM C62, Grade SW; solid units.

1. Nominal Size: Modular; [2-1/4] inches high x [7-5/8] inches long x [3-5/8] inches thick.
2. Compressive Stength: As indicated on drawings, measured in accordance with ASTM
C67/C67M.
3. Provide special shapes where indicated on Drawings.
2.4 CONCRETE LINTELS
A. General: Provide either concrete or masonry lintels, as indicated in Structural Drawings, complying
with requirements below.
B. Concrete Lintels: Pre-cast units matching concrete masonry units and with reinforcing bars indicated
or required to support loads indicated.

SECTION 042000
C. Concrete Lintels: Pre-cast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with requirements in
Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
D. Masonry Lintels: Made from bond beam concrete masonry units with reinforcing bars placed as
indicated and filled with coarse grout.
2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Mortar and Masonry Grout: Specified in Section 04 0511 – Mortar and Masonry Grouting.
2.6 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade [60] Grade
420.
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 951 or UBC Standard 21-10; mill galvanized, carbon-steel
wire for interior walls and hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for exterior walls.
1. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or [0.148] inch ([3.8] mm), W2.8 or [0.188] inch ([4.8] mm)
diameter.
2. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or [0.148] inch ([3.8] mm), W2.8 or [0.188] inch ([4.8] mm)
diameter.
3. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: W1.7 or [0.148] inch ([3.8] mm), W2.8 or [0.188] inch ([4.8] mm)
diameter.
4. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than [16] inches ([407] mm) o.c.
5. Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods.
6. Multi-wythe Masonry:
7. Ladder type with [1] side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than [4] inches
([100] mm) in width, plus [1] side rod at each wythe of masonry [4] inches ([100] mm) or less
in width.
a. Tab type, with [1] side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with rectangular tabs
sized to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least [5/8] inch ([16]
mm) cover on outside face.
b. Adjustable (two-piece) type, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and
with ties that extend into facing wythe. Ties engage eyes or slots in reinforcement and
extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least [5/8] inch ([16] mm) cover
on outside face. Ties have hooks or clips to engage a continuous wire in the facing wythe.
2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2
coating.
2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Wire Ties - General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through
veneer but with at least [5/8] inch ([16] mm) cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent [90]
degrees and extend [2] inches ([50] mm) parallel to face of veneer.
C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than [4] inches ([100] mm)
wide, as indicated in Structural Drawings.

SECTION 042000
1. Wire: Fabricate from [3/16] inch ([4.8] mm) or [1/4] inch ([6.4] mm) diameter, hot-dip
galvanized steel wire, as indicated in Structural Drawings.
D. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors:

1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression
forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and
as follows:
a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a [100] lbf ([445] N)
load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of
[0.05] inch ([1.3] mm).
2. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor
section.
a. Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom, and
slotted holes for inserting wire tie.
b. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections from [0.067] inch ([1.7] mm), [0.097] inch ([2.5]
mm) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.
c. Wire Ties: Triangular, rectangular, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from [0.188] inch
([4.8] mm), [0.25] inch ([6.4] mm) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
d. Products:
1) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 213 or D/A 210 with D/A
700-708.
2) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; 315-D with [316].
3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; DW-10, DW-10HS or DW-10-X.
4) Wire-Bond; [1004], Type [III] or RJ-711.
2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where
indicated, complying with Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
1. Metal Drip Edges: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least [3] inches ([75] mm) into wall
and [1/2] inch ([13] mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down [30] degrees and hemmed.
2. Metal Flashing Terminations: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least [3] inches ([75]
mm) into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on
itself for [3/4] inch ([19] mm) and down into joint [3/8] inch ([10] mm) to form a stop for
retaining sealant backer rod.
3. Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel to shapes indicated.
B. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive
rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to
produce an overall thickness of not less than [0.030] inch ([0.8] mm), [0.040] inch ([1.0] mm).
2. Products:
a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Peel-N-Seal.
b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing.
c. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Dur-O-Barrier-44.
d. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm-ABarrier Wall
Flashing.
e. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing.
f. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash.
g. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300.
h. Polytite Manufacturing Corp.; Poly-Barrier Self-Adhering Wall Flashing. 9) Williams
Products, Inc.; Everlastic MF-40.

SECTION 042000
C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or
products recommended by flashing manufacturer.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible
up to [35] percent; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with

ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406
and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type [I]
(No. [15] asphalt felt).
D. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, [3/8] inches by [1-1/2] inches by [3-1/2]
inches ([9] mm by [38] mm by [89] mm) long.
2. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant
polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth [1/8] inch ([3] mm) less
than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.
a. Products:
1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent.
2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents.
3) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent.
4) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent.
5) Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.
3. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and width
of head joint and depth [1/8] inch ([3] mm) less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected
from manufacturer's standard.
a. Products:
1) Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net Weep Vents.
E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade
within the wall cavity.
1. Provide one of the following configurations:
a. Strips, full-depth of cavity and [10] inches ([250] mm) wide, with dovetail shaped
notches [7] inches ([175] mm) deep.
b. Strips, not less than [1-1/2] inches ([38] mm) thick and [10] inches ([250] mm) wide,
with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from
being clogged with mortar.
c. Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity.
2. Products:
a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break, Mortar Break II.
b. Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat.
c. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop.
d. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.

SECTION 042000
2.10 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing

mortar/grout stains from new masonry without damaging masonry. Use product approved for intended
use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
b. EaCo Chem, Inc.
c. ProSoCo, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required, cut units with motor-driven saws;
provide clean, sharp, un-chipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is
specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.
C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds [30] g / [30] square
inches ([30] g / [194] square cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water
so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.
D. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:
1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and
control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than [1/8] inch in [10] feet ([3] mm in [3] m),
[1/4] inch in [20] feet ([6] mm in [6] m), or [1/2] inch ([12] mm) maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from
level by more than [1/8] inch in [10] feet ([3] mm in [3] m), [1/4] inch in [20] feet ([6] mm in
[6] m), or [1/2] inch ([12] mm) maximum.
3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses
and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-
than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running
bond; do not use units with less than nominal [4] inch ([100] mm) horizontal face dimensions at
corners or jambs.
C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in
solidly with masonry around built-in items.
D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout [24] inches ([600] mm) under bearing plates,
beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.

SECTION 042000
3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on
footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar
to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness,
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than
paint), unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 COMPOSITE MASONRY
A. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one of the following methods:
1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less than one
metal tie for [4.5] square feet ([0.42] sq. m), [2.67] square feet ([0.25] square m), as indicated in
Structural Drawings, of wall area spaced not to exceed [36] inches ([914] mm), [24] inches
([610] mm), as indicated in Structural Drawings, o.c. horizontally and [16] inches ([406] mm)
o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within [12] inches ([305]
mm) of openings and space not more than [36] inches ([915] mm) apart around perimeter of
openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than [24] inches ([610]
mm) o.c. vertically.
2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.
a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending across
both wythes or tab-type reinforcement.
b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement
with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties.
B. Collar Joints: Solidly fill collar joints by parging face of first wythe that is laid and shoving units of
other wythe into place.
C. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners, unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture,
bond walls together as follows:
1. Provide individual metal ties not more than [8] inches ([203] mm) o.c.
2. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
3. Provide rigid metal anchors not more than [24] inches ([610] mm) o.c. If used with hollow
masonry units, embed ends in mortar-filled cores.
3.5 CAVITY WALLS
A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods:
1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less than one
metal tie for [2.67] square feet ([0.25] square m) of wall area spaced not to exceed [24] inches

SECTION 042000
([610] mm) o.c. horizontally and [16] inches ([406] mm) o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate
courses. Provide additional ties within [12] inches ([305] mm) of openings and space not more
than [36] inches ([915] mm) apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting
walls, provide ties at no more than [24] inches ([610] mm) o.c. vertically.
2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.
a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending across
both wythes or tab-type reinforcement.
b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement
with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties.
c. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use adjustable
(two-piece) type reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached
to ties to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align.
3. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers.
B. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away
from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or
remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.
C. Parge cavity face of backup wythe in a single coat approximately [3/8] inch ([10] mm) thick. Trowel
face of parge coat smooth.
D. Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with 07 2800 – Fluid Applied Moisture Barrier.
E. Installing Cavity-Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately [12] inches
([300] mm) o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners
designed for this purpose. Fit insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions, with
edges butted tightly. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry.
3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install in mortar with a minimum cover of [5/8] inch ([16] mm) on exterior side of walls,
[1/2] inch ([13] mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of [6] inches ([150] mm).
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply
with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than [1/2] inch ([13] mm) in width between masonry and
structural member, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached
to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than [24] inches ([610] mm) o.c. vertically and [36]
inches ([915] mm) o.c. horizontally.
4. Refer to Structural Drawings for lintel anchorage to masonry.

SECTION 042000
3.8 MASONRY VENEER ANCHORS
A. Anchor masonry veneers to concrete and masonry backup with seismic masonry-veneer anchors to
comply with the following requirements:
1. Fasten screw-attached and seismic anchors to concrete and masonry backup with metal
fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners.
2. Embed tie sections, connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not less
than [2] inches ([50] mm) of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.
3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down.
4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than [16] inches ([406] mm) o.c. vertically and [24]
inches ([610] mm) o.c. horizontally with not less than [1] anchor for each [2.67] square feet
([0.25] square m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within [12] inches ([305] mm) of
openings and at intervals, not exceeding [36] inches ([914] mm), around perimeter.
3.9 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE AND VENTS
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other
obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf angles,
ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated.
B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture
flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of
mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing as
recommended by flashing manufacturer.
2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of [6] inches ([150] mm) into masonry at
each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing [6] inches ([150] mm) at ends and turn up not less
than [2] inches ([50] mm) to form end dams.
3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing
[1/2] inch ([13] mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal
drip edge.
4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible
flashing [1/2] inch ([13] mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top
of metal flashing termination.
C. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above
embedded flashing and as follows:
1. Use specified weep / vent products or open head joints to form weep holes.
2. Space weep holes [24] inches ([600] mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
3. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with loose-fill
insulation.
D. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity
drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.
E. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/vent products
or open head joints to form vents.
1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through-
wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.

SECTION 042000
3.10 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATIONS
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced
masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated.
Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support
forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently
to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during
construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength
to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than [60] inches ([1520] mm).
A. Inspectors: Engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and prepare reports. Allow
inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform inspections.
1. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades, sizes, and
locations of reinforcement.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests
and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports:
1. Payment for these services will be made by Allowance.
C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each [5,000] square feet ([465] square m) of wall area or
portion thereof.
D. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 140.
3.12 PARGING
A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in [2] uniform coats to a total
thickness of [3/4] inch ([19] mm) with a steel-trowel finish. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove
at bottom. Damp-cure parging for at least [24] hours and protect parging until cured.
3.13 CLEANING
A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins
and smears before tooling joints.
B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel un-cleaned for comparison
purposes.
2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner.
3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing
surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
4. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20.

SECTION 042000
5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type
of stain on exposed surfaces.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 042000
SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Structural steel.
2. Grouting base plates.
2. Section 04 0511 – Mortar and Masonry Grouting.
3. Section 04 2000 – Unit Masonry.
4. Section 05 5000 – Metal Fabrications.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

1. Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings.
B. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
C. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM):

1. A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2. A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless.
3. A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality.
4. A307 - Standard Specification for Low-Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded
Standard Fasteners.
5. A325 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints, Including
Suitable Nuts and Plain Hardened Washers.
6. A490 - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts for Structural
Steel Joints.
7. A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural
Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
8. A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural
Tubing.
9. A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High Strength Low Alloy Columbium-Vanadium
Steels of Structural Quality.
10. A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes.
11. C109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using
2-In. or 50-mm Cube Specimens).
12. E164 - Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments.
D. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):

1. Painting Manual.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PAGE 1 OF 7

SECTION 051200
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and
coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are
compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without

delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for
installation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other
anchorages to be installed as work of other sections.
3. Include embedment Drawings.
4. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
5. Include embedment Drawings.
6. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and
show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and
supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.
7. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify
pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.
B. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide
according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint whether
prequalified or qualified by testing, including the following:
1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage).
2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads,
include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
D. Informational Submittals:
1. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.
2. Welding certificates.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification
Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category BU.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification
Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303.
2. AISC 360.

SECTION 051200
3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
E. Design Requirements: Design connections not detailed on Drawings under supervision of a

Professional Structural Engineer experienced in this work and registered in the State in which the
project is located.
A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground
and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and
packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload
to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as
directed.
B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.
1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Special Inspector observes repackaging and seals
containers.
2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F
1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.
1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear, braced frame, and full penetration welded moment
frame connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel
fabricator, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, to
withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.
1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360.
2. Use Allowable Stress Design; data are given at service-load level.
B. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained.
C. Construction: Side Plate bolted Moment frames and Braced frames.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL MATERIALS
A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M, Grade [50].
B. Channels, Angles: ASTM A 36/A 36M, Grade [36].
C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M, Grade [36].
D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade C, structural tubing.
E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

SECTION 051200
2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS AND ANCHORS
A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type [1], heavy-hex steel structural bolts;
ASTM A 563, Grade [C], heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type [1], hardened
carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.
B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490, Type [1], heavy-hex steel structural bolts or
tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A 563, Grade DH, heavy-hex
carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type [1], hardened carbon-steel washers with plain finish.
C. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade [36], weldable, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.
2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
3. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type [1], hardened carbon steel.
4. Finish: Plain.
2.3 PRIMER
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M.
2.4 GROUT
A. Grout specified in 04 0511 – Mortar and Masonry Grouting.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to
AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.
1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.
2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.
3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings
until structural steel has been erected.
4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shoppriming
operations.
B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.
E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPCSP 2,
"Hand Tool Cleaning."
F. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass
through steel members.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or
enlarge holes by burning.
2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.
3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

SECTION 051200
2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened or pretensioned, as indicated.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure
specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without
exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.
2.7 GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep
holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
2. Galvanize lintels, lintel assemblies and shelf angles located in exterior walls.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and
locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.
1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing
plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel
secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to
design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing
are in place unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-inplace
concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and
AISC 360.
B. Baseplates and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing
materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.
1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.
3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not
remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with
grout.

SECTION 051200
4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly
finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written
installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges."
D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently
fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact
with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and
alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.
2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature
when structure is completed and in service.
E. Splice members only where indicated.
F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections
within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be
enlarged to admit bolts.
3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened or pretensioned, as indicated.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure
specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary
connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without
exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges," for mill material.
3.5 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
A. Special Inspections and tests will be performed by the Special Inspector or Special Inspection Agency.
1. Welding: Welding inspection shall be in compliance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. In addition to
visual inspection, welds may be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the
following inspection procedures, at Special Inspector’s option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished
weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
2. Details: Perform periodic inspections of the erected structural steel framing to verify
compliance with the details shown on the construction documents and approved shop drawings
such as member locations, spacing, bolted and welded connection details and bracing.
3. High Strength Bolts: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

SECTION 051200
a. General: While Work is in progress, determine that the requirements for bolts, nuts,
washers, paint, bolted parts and installation and tightening in such standards are met. For
bolts requiring pre-tensioning, observe the preinstallation testing and calibration
procedures when such procedures are required by the installation method or by project
plans or specifications; determine that all plies of connected materials have been drawn
together and properly snugged and monitor the installation of bolts to verify that the
selected procedure for installation is properly used to tighten bolts. For joints required to
be tightened only to snug-tight condition, verify that the connected materials have been
drawn together and properly snugged.
b. Periodic monitoring: Monitoring of bolt installation for pre-tensioning is permitted to be
performed on a periodic basis when using the turn-of-nut method with matchmarking
techniques, the direct tension indicator method or the alternate design fastener (twist-off
bolt) method. Joints designated as sung tight need be inspected only on a periodic basis.
c. Continuous monitoring: Monitoring of bolt installation for pre-tensioning using the
calibrated wrench method or the turn-of-nut method without matchmarking shall be
performed on a continuous basis.
B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the
Contract Documents.
C. Additional testing performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements
shall be at Contractor’s expense.
3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to
comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 051200
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Miscellaneous steel framing, supporting angles, plates, brackets, clips, anchors and bolts for
equipment, and other work which is not specifically included in Section 05 1200 - Structural
Steel Framing, but which is required to complete the Project.
2. Steel railings, guardrails, handrails, brackets, and sockets.
3. Embedding edge angles in concrete.
4. Bollards.
2. Section 03 3000 – Cast In Place Concrete.
4. Section 05 1200 – Structural Steel Framing.
5. Section 09 9100 – Painting.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):

1. 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.
2. 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented
Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels.
3. 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High
Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels.
4. 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior
Performing Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels.
B. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
2. D1.2 - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.
3. D1.6 - Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel.

1. A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2. A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.
3. A48/A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
4. A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality.
5. A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products.
6. A283 - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates,
Shapes and Bars.
7. A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
8. A354 - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other
Externally Threaded Fasteners.
9. A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural
Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
10. A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural
Tubing.
METAL FABRICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 7

SECTION 055000
11. A510 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round
Wire, Galvanized Steel.
12. A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,
Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
13. A780 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized
Coatings.
14. A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
15. A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength, Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability.
16. B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
17. B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,
Profiles, and Tubes.
18. B241 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded
Tube.
19. E985 - Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings.
D. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):

1. AMP 503 - Finishes for Stainless Steel.
2. MBG 531 - Metal Bar Grating Manual.
E. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):

1. Painting Manual.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for each product specified.
B. Calculations: Submit calculations for guardrails signed by a, Professional Structural Engineer

experienced in this work and registered in the State in which the project is located and shop drawings
of fabricated items for review before fabrication and installation.
C. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and
accessories.
D. Certifications: Submit certification that manufactured products (including bolts, nuts and washers)
meet or exceed specified requirements. Certification numbers must appear on product containers for
bolts, nuts and washers and the numbers shall correspond to the identification numbers on the
Manufacturer's Certificate. The Manufacturer's symbol and grade markings must appear on bolts, nuts
and washers.
A. Structural Performance: Shop-engineer, fabricate, and install guardrails to meet IBC requirements to
withstand a live load of at least [200] lbf ([0.89] kN) applied in any direction to the top of rail.
B. Structural Performance:
1. Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and
stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
2. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of [50] lbf/ ft. ([0.73] kN/m) applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of [200] lbf ([0.89] kN) applied in any direction.

SECTION 055000
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
3. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of [50] lbf ([0.22] kN) applied horizontally on an area of [1] square
feet ([0.093] square m).
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
C. Make field measurements as required prior to fabrication and installation.
D. Coordinate with other trades to ensure proper sequencing and fitting of construction.
E. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.
Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for
reassembly and coordination of installation.
A. Store steel materials, either plain or fabricated, above ground on platforms, pallets, skids, or other
supports. Keep material free from dirt, grease, and other foreign matter and protect from corrosion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sections: ASTM A992, hot-dip galvanized for exterior use.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type [S], Grade [B], Schedule [40] typical unless otherwise noted.
1. Pipe used for handrails and railings shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication] for exterior
use, [1-1/2] ([32] mm) ID, unless otherwise noted.
C. Steel Steel Tubing: Cold formed, ASTM A500; or hot rolled, ASTM A501; seamless.
D. Cold-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets: ASTM A653. Provide "Commercial" galvanizing, for exterior use.
E. Stainless Steel: Steel: ASTM A240 for plate or sheet, A269 for tubing and A312 for pipe.
1. Interior Use: Type 304, [18] – [8] grade, USS gauge, # [4] finish.
2. Exterior Use: Type 316L, [18] – [8] grade, USS gauge, # [4] finish.
F. Chain: [3/8] inch ([8] mm], System 7 “Transport” welded steel chain.
1. Provide required connecting links, snap hooks and other standard fittings as indicated on the
drawings.
G. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307. Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built
into exterior walls.
H. Drilled Anchors for Use in Concrete: Use anchors with a current ICC evaluation report appropriate to
the application.
I. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
J. Primers: Prime paint for ferrous metal shall be Tnemec Series [4] or an approved equal free of
chromate or lead.
K. Nonshrink Grout: Master Builders "Embeco," Sonneborn "Ferrolith G Redi-Mixed Grout," or equal.

SECTION 055000
2.2 FABRICATION – GENERAL
A. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. Coordinate metalwork with adjoining work for
details of attachment and fit. Be responsible for fabrication detailing and correct fitting of steel
members to each other and to their supports.
B. Use materials of size and thickness shown or, if not shown, of size and thickness to produce strength
and durability in the finished product for the utility intended.
C. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and
hairline.
D. Grind exposed welds flush and smooth with adjacent finished surface. Ease exposed edges to small
uniform radius.
E. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site and handling through building
openings.
F. Provide components required for anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate anchorage and related
components of same material and finish as metal fabrication, except where specifically noted
otherwise.
2.3 FABRICATION ASSEMBLIES
A. Rails:
1. Form rails and posts from steel pipe and shapes as shown on Drawings, with welded jointing.
Fabricate right-angle and [45] degree bends of rail with [3] inches ([75] mm) radius to center
line of pipe without flattening the rail member noticeably.
2. For fittings, elbows, wall brackets, and escutcheons provide machined steel. Provide splice
connectors of steel as shown.
3. Provide return at free ends of handrails to [1] inch ([25] mm) from face of wall. Provide end cap
for free ends of tube handrails and railings. Weld joints, end caps, returns, and transitions.
Grind smooth and make flush.
4. Provide extension for handrails and railings at edges of stairs and ramp to comply with ADA
requirements for the physically handicapped.
5. Provide mounting brackets and flanges, for secure anchorage of handrails and railings.
6. Fabricate guardrails to comply with the specified loading requirements.
7. Paint as specified in 09 9100 – Painting.
B. Edge Angles: Provide anchors welded to angle for embedding in concrete construction, spaced no
more than [6] inches ([150] mm) from each end and [24] inches ([600] mm) on center, unless
otherwise shown.
C. Bollards:
1. Fabricate from steel pipe of sizes indicated.
2. Set into concrete footing.
3. Fill pipe with concrete; rod to consolidate. Dome top to shed water.
4. Paint as specified in 09 9100 – Painting.

SECTION 055000
2.4 WELDING
A. All surfaces shall be clean, free of rust, paint, and foreign matter of any kind. Burned edges to be
welded shall be chipped clean and wire brushed before welding. Clamp members as required, space
and alternate welds, as may be necessary to prevent warping or misalignment.
B. Weld Metal: Weld metal shall be thoroughly fused with the base metal along surfaces and edges of the
union. Penetration shall be [1/8] inch ([4] mm) minimum and shall be into the root of the joint.
C. Weld Quality: Welds shall present a uniform surface, free of imperfections, without undercutting or
overlapping, and free from excessive oxides, gas pockets, and nonmetallic inclusions. Welds shall be
made with the proper number of beads or passes to secure sound, thoroughly fused joints. Provide
backup bars, temporary backup bars, or backup welds for full-penetration butt welds. Each deposit
shall not exceed [1/2] inch ([12] mm) of weld for each pass of bead. Preceding layers shall be cleaned
by wire brushing or preening to remove scale and slag before placing new weld material.
D. Faulty and Defective Welding: Welding showing cracks, slag inclusion, lack of fusion, bad undercut,
or other defects ascertained by visual or other means of inspection, shall be chipped out and properly
replaced.
2.5 FINISH
A. Cleaning: Thoroughly clean mill scale, rust, dirt, grease, and other foreign matter from ferrous metal
prior to galvanizing, hot-phosphate treatment, powder coating or painting.
1. Remove scale, rust, and other deleterious materials before applying shop coat. Clean off heavy
rust and loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC SP-6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." This is
required for Tnemec primer.
B. Shop Priming: Shop-paint metal work except members or portions of members to be embedded in
concrete, surfaces and edges to be field welded, and galvanized surfaces.
1. Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on primer in accordance with the paint
manufacturer's instructions and as specified in Section 09 9100 - Painting. Use painting
methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
2. Apply one shop coat to metal items, except apply two coats to surfaces inaccessible after
assembly or erection. Change color of the second coat to distinguish it from the first.
C. Galvanizing Provide a zinc coating for exposed exterior items (unless specified to be powder coated)
and items to be embedded in concrete, complying with the following:
1. For galvanizing iron and steel hardware, ASTM A153.
2. For galvanizing rolled, pressed, and forged steel shapes, plates, bars, and strips [3] mm thick
and heavier, ASTM A123.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the substrate and conditions in which the work is to be installed. Correct unsatisfactory
substrate and conditions prior to start of installation.

SECTION 055000
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of
anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchor,
which are to be embedded in concrete construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.
B. Coordinate metalwork with adjoining work. Do cutting, shearing, drilling, punching, threading,
tapping, etc., required for metal work and for attachment of adjacent work. Drill or punch holes; do
not use cutting torch. Shearing and punching shall leave true lines and surfaces.
C. Obtain Architect - Engineer's review prior to site cutting or making adjustments to structural members
not indicated to be cut or adjusted.
D. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is to be done.
E. Make provision for erection loads with temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners for securing metal work
to in-place construction, including threaded fasteners for concrete inserts, through bolts, lag bolts,
screws, and other connectors as required.
1. Conceal fastenings where practical. Thickness of metal and details of assembly and supports
shall give ample strength and stiffness. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of metal
work. Set work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, plumb, level, true, and free of rack,
measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing anchors in formwork for items
which are to be built into concrete or similar construction.
1. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections
which are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size
limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut, or
abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and
are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work.
D. Corrosion Protection: Protect dissimilar metals from galvanic corrosion by pressure tapes, coating, or
isolators as acceptable to Architect - Engineer.
E. Grouting: Do grouting of frames, plates, sills, bolts, and similar items with non-shrink grout.
F. Alignment: : Verify alignment of items with adjacent construction. Coordinate related work.
G. Handrails: Secure steel handrails with bracket. Unless otherwise noted, locate brackets [6] inches
([150] mm) from ends of handrail, [6] feet ([1.8] m) on center maximum, and space brackets
equidistant at each handrail. Where bracket is fastened to stud wall, provide steel plate backing
securely fastened to studs; toggle bolt secured to gypsum wallboard is not acceptable.

SECTION 055000
3.4 CLEAN AND TOUCH UP
A. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and paint exposed
areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum
dry-film thickness of [2.0] mils.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 055000
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Rough carpentry includes carpentry, wood blocking, framing, sheathing, furring,
nailers, rough hardware, and light wood construction.
2. Section 06 1753 – Shop Fabricated Wood Trusses.
3. Section 06 1733 – Wood I-Joists.
4. Section 06 4100 – Architectural Wood Casework.
5. Section 06 4600 – Wood Trim.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

1. A208.1 – American National Standard for Particleboard; 2018.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM).

1. A153 / A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
2. A653 / 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
3. C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.
4. C557 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood
Framing.
5. C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
6. C1396 / C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.
7. D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior
Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.
8. D3498 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Field-Gluing Wood Structural Panels
(Plywood or Oriented Strand Board) to Wood Based Floor System Framing.
9. E2178 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate and Calculation of Air
Permeance of Building Materials.
10. E2357 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate of Air Barrier Assemblies.
11. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
12. E96 / E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
13. E136 - Standard Test Method for Assessing Combustibility of Materials Using a Vertical Tube
Furnace at 750°C.
C. American Wood Council (AWC).

1. 2018 Wood Frame Construction Manual.
D. ICC Evaluation Service (ICC ES).

1. IBC - International Building Code.
2. IECC - International Energy Conservation Code.
E. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association (NELMA).

1. Standard Grading Rules for Northeastern Lumber; 2017.
ROUGH CARPENTRY PAGE 1 OF 9

SECTION 061000
F. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
1. PS-1 – Structural Plywood; 2009 (Revised 2019).
2. PS-2 – Performance Standard for Wood Based Structural Use Panels; 2010.
3. PS-20 – American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2020.
G. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB).

1. Grading Rules; 2014.
H. Western Wood Product Association (WWPA).

1. Western Lumber Grading Rules; 2017.
I. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide technical data on insulated sheathing, wood preservative materials, and
application instructions.
B. Structural Composite Lumber: Submit manufacturer's published structural data including span tables,
marked to indicate which sizes and grades are being used; if structural composite lumber is being
substituted for dimension lumber or timbers, submit grading agency structural tables marked for
comparison.
C. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed
in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
A. Installer: A firm with a minimum of three [3] years’ experience in the type of work required by this
section.
B. Inspection: Prior to work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of other trades and
verify that such work is completed to the point where this installation may properly commence.
C. Discrepancies: In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. Do not proceed with
installation in areas of discrepancy until such discrepancies have been fully resolved.
D. Lumber may be rejected by the Architect, whether or not it has been installed, for excessive warp,
twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus, or mold, as well as for improper cutting and fitting.
A. Protect lumber and other products from dampness both during and after delivery at site.
B. Pile lumber in stacks in such manner as to provide air circulation around surfaces of each piece.
C. Stack plywood and other board products so as to prevent warping. Protect edges and corners of sheet
materials from damage.
D. Locate stacks on well drained areas, supported at least [6] inches ([152] mm) above grade and cover
with well-ventilated sheds having firmly constructed over hanging roof with sufficient end wall to
protect lumber from driving rain.

SECTION 061000
E. Damaged or deteriorated materials or assemblies shall not be used in the work and shall be replaced at
no extra cost to the Owner.
A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate
location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIRMENTS
A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.

1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch, unless otherwise indicated.
2. If no species is specified, provide species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency
is specified, provide lumber graded by grading agency meeting the specified requirements.
3. Grading Agency: Grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American
Lumber Standard Committee at www.alsc.org, and who provides grading service for the species
and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated.
4. Lumber of other species or grades is acceptable provided structural and appearance
characteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified.
2.2 DIMENSIONAL LUMBER FOR CONCEALED LOCATIONS
A. Grading Agency: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; NELMA (SGR).
B. Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc; SPIB (GR).
C. Grading Agency: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; WCLIB (GR).
D. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association; WWPA G-5.
E. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
F. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.
G. Stud Framing ([2] by [2] inches through [2] by [6] inches ([50] by [50] mm through [50] by [150]
mm) ):
1. Species: Allowed under referenced grading rules.
2. Grade: No. [2].
H. Joist, Rafter, and Small Beam Framing ([2] by [6] inches through [4] by [16] inches ([50] by [150]
mm through [100] by [400] mm):
1. Machine stress-rated (MSR) as follows:
2. Fb-single; minimum extreme fiber stress in bending: [1350] psi ([9,300] kPa).
3. E; minimum modulus of elasticity: [1,300,000] psi ([8960] MPa).
4. Species: Allowed under grading rules.
5. Grade: No. [1] and Better.
6. Species and Grades: As indicated on drawings for various locations.
I. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:

1. Lumber: S4S, No. [2] or Standard Grade.

SECTION 061000
2. Boards: Standard or No. [3].
2.3 STRUCTURAL COMPOSITE LUMBER
A. Structural Composite Lumber: Factory fabricated beams, headers, and columns, of sizes and types
indicated on drawings; structural capacity as published by manufacturer.
1. Beams: Use laminated veneer lumber, laminated strand lumber, or parallel strand lumber with
manufacturer's published modulus of elasticity, E: [1,800,000] psi ([12,410] MPa), minimum.
2. Headers Not Longer Than [48] inches ([1220] mm): Use laminated veneer lumber, laminated
strand lumber, or parallel strand lumber.
3. Manufacturers:
a. Boise Cascade Company: www.bc.com/#sle.
b. RedBuilt LLC; Redbuilt Laminated Veneer Lumber: www.redbuilt.com//#sle.
c. Weyerhaeuser Company: www.weyerhaeuser.com/#sle.
2.4 EXPOSED BOARDS
A. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements, in lieu of grade
stamping.
B. Moisture Content: Kiln-dry ([15] percent maximum).
C. Surfacing: S4S.
D. Species: Douglas Fir.
E. Grade: No. [2], [2] Common, or Construction.
2.5 CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. Subfloor / Underlayment Combination: PS 2 type, rated Single Floor.

1. Bond Classification: Exterior.
2. Span Rating: [24].
3. Performance Category: [19/32] PERF CAT.
4. Edges: Tongue and groove.
B. Subfloor / Underlayment Combination: Oriented strand board wood structural panel; PS 2, rated
Single Floor.
4. Edges: Tongue and groove.
5. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face.
6. Exposure Time: Sheathing will not delaminate or require sanding due to moisture absorption
from exposure to weather for up to [200] days.
7. Provide fastening guide on top panel surface with separate markings indicating fastener spacing
for [16] inches ([406] mm), [19.2] inches ([488] mm) and [24] inches ([610] mm) on center,
respectively.
8. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard lifetime limited warranty against manufacturing defects and
that panels will not delaminate or require sanding due to moisture absorption damage from
exposure to weather for up to the stated period.
9. Manufacturers:
a. Georgia-Pacific LLC; DryGuard Enhanced OSB Sub-Floor: www.buildgp.com/#sle.

SECTION 061000
b. Huber Engineered Woods, LLC; AdvanTech Flooring with AdvanTech Subfloor
Adhesive: www.huberwood.com/#sle.
c. Weyerhaeuser Company: www.weyerhaeuser.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
C. Roof Sheathing: PS 2 type, rated Structural [I] Sheathing.

D. Roof Sheathing: Particleboard, ANSI A208.1, Grade M-3 EXTERIOR GLUE; square edges, with
panel clips.
E. Roof Sheathing: Oriented strand board wood structural panel; PS 2.

1. Grade: Structural [1] Sheathing.
2. Bond Classification: Exposure [1].
4. Span Rating: [32/16].
5. Edges: Square.
6. Exposure Time: Sheathing will not delaminate or require sanding due to moisture absorption
from exposure to weather for up to [500] days.
7. Provide fastening guide on top panel surface with separate markings indicating fastener spacing
for [16] inches ([406] mm) and [24] inches ([610] mm) on center, respectively.
8. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard lifetime limited warranty against manufacturing defects and
that panels will not delaminate or require sanding due to moisture absorption damage from
exposure to weather for up to the stated period.
9. Manufacturers:
a. Huber Engineered Woods, LLC; AdvanTech Sheathing: www.huberwood.com/#sle.
F. Wall Sheathing: PS 2 type.

2. Grade: Structural [I] Sheathing.
5. Edge Profile: Square edge.
G. Wall Sheathing: Plywood, PS 1, Grade C-D, Exposure [I].
H. Wall Sheathing: Particleboard, ANSI A208.1, Grade M-3 EXTERIOR GLUE.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors:

1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A153/A153M for high
humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of
sheathing.
3. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry.
B. Die-Stamped Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions.
1. For contact with preservative treated wood in exposed locations, provide minimum G185
(Z550) galvanizing complying with ASTM A653/A653M.

SECTION 061000
C. Joist Hangers: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions.
1. For contact with preservative treated wood in exposed locations, provide minimum G185
(Z550) galvanizing complying with ASTM A653/A653M.
D. Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: [1/4] inch ([6] mm) thick, plate width, closed cell plastic foam
from continuous rolls.
E. Termite-Resistant Sill Plate Barrier: Self-adhesive, film-backed barrier with release sheet; adheres to
concrete substrates and blocks termite access.
1. Thickness: [68] mil, [0.068] inch ([1.7] mm).
2. Termite Resistance: [100] percent when tested in accordance with ICC-ES AC380.
3. Water Vapor Permeance: [0.035] perm ([2] ng/(Pa s sq m)), maximum, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
F. Sill Flashing: See Section 07 6200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
G. Subfloor Adhesives: Waterproof, air cure type, cartridge dispensed; adhesives designed for subfloor
applications and complying with either ASTM C557 or ASTM D3498.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Franklin International, Inc; Titebond PROvantage Weatherproof Subfloor Adhesive:
www.titebond.com/#sle.
b. Huber Engineered Woods, LLC; AdvanTech Subfloor Adhesive:
www.huberwood.com/#sle.
c. Liquid Nails, a brand of PPG Architectural Coatings: www.liquidnails.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
H. Construction Adhesives: Adhesives complying with ASTM C557 or ASTM D3498.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Franklin International, Inc; Titebond Fast Set Polyurethane Construction Adhesive:
www.titebond.com/#sle.
I. General Purpose Construction Adhesives:

1. Manufacturers:
a. ADFAST Corporation; ADBOND EX 5690: www.adfastcorp.com/#sle.
J. Water-Resistive Barrier: See Section 07 2726 – Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers.
2.7 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for
wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Where wood framing bears on cementitious foundations, install full width sill flashing continuous
over top of foundation, lap ends of flashing minimum of [4] inches ([100] mm) and seal.

SECTION 061000
B. Install sill gasket under sill plate of framed walls bearing on foundations; puncture gasket cleanly to fit
tightly around protruding anchor bolts.
C. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.
A. Select material sizes to minimize waste.
B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory
components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after
installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.
3.3 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower
required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members.
B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to
maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of
permanent bracing.
C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed.
D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing
indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes, AWC (WFCM) Wood Frame Construction
Manual.
E. Install horizontal spanning members with crown edge up and not less than [1-1/2] inches ([38] mm) of
bearing at each end.
F. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that are
parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed.
G. Provide bridging at joists in excess of [8] feet ([2.3] m) span as detailed. Fit solid blocking at ends of
members.
H. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs.
I. Advanced framing techniques for LEED v4 for Homes Credit:

1. In exterior walls and common walls:
a. Install no more than one horizontal 2x top plate on walls by aligning studs with joists and
roof rafters.
b. Place window and door headers in the rim joist.
c. Install raised, directly beneath the top plate, single-ply headers not more than [2] inches
nominal thickness in a 2 x 4 wall or [4] inches nominal thickness in a 2 x 6 wall, in
accordance with local International Residential Code.
d. Install structural insulated panels (SIPs) for walls.
2. For interior and exterior walls:
a. Size headers for actual loads.
b. Use ladder blocking or drywall clips.
c. Use two-stud corners or California corners.

SECTION 061000
3. Space interior wall studs greater than [16] inches o.c. ([400] mm o.c.).
4. Space floor joists greater than [16] inches o.c. ([400] mm o.c.) or SIPs.
5. Space roof rafters greater than [16] inches o.c. ([400] mm o.c.) or SIPs.
3.4 BLOCKING, NAILERS AND SUPPORT
A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by
applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and
roof/attic space; other material acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction may be used in lieu of
solid wood blocking.
C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of
frames, securely attached to stud framing.
D. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless
item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated.
E. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling,
unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.
F. Provide the following specific nonstructural framing and blocking:

1. Cabinets and shelf supports.
2. Wall brackets.
3. Handrails.
4. Grab bars.
5. Towel and bath accessories.
6. Wall-mounted door stops.
7. Chalkboards and marker boards.
8. Wall paneling and trim.
9. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs.
3.5 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY
A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and
roofing assembly installation.
B. Provide wood curb at each roof opening except where prefabricated curbs are specified and where
specifically indicated otherwise; form corners by alternating lapping side members.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. Subflooring/Underlayment Combination: Glue and nail to framing; staples are not permitted.
B. Roof Sheathing: Secure panels with long dimension perpendicular to framing members, with ends
staggered and over firm bearing.
1. At long edges use sheathing clips where joints occur between roof framing members.
2. At long edges provide solid edge blocking where joints occur between roof framing members.
3. Nail panels to framing; staples are not permitted.

SECTION 061000
C. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing
and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples.
1. Use plywood or other acceptable structural panels at building corners, for not less than [96]
inches ([2440] mm), measured horizontally.
2. Provide inlet diagonal bracing at corners.
3. Place water-resistive barrier horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lapping edges and ends.
D. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over
firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum [24] inches ([610] mm) on center on all edges and into
studs in field of board.
1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly.
2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board
parallel to studs.
3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.
4. Size and Location: As indicated on drawings.
3.7 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts, complying
with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.
3.8 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members: [1/4] inch ([6] mm) from true position, maximum.
B. Surface Flatness of Floor: [1/8] inch in [10] feet ([1] mm/m) maximum, and [1/4] inch in [30] feet ([7]
mm in [10] m) maximum.
C. Variation from Plane, Other than Floors: [1/4] inch in [10] feet ([2] mm/m) maximum, and [1/4] inch
in [30] feet ([7] mm in [10] m) maximum.
3.9 CLEANUP
A. At the end of each shift and upon completion of the work, remove debris, rubbish and surplus
materials from the site which resulted from work under this section. Do not leave wood, shavings,
sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 061000
SECTION 061733 - WOOD I-JOISTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Wood I-joists for floor framing.
2. Bridging, bracing, and anchorage.
3. Framing for openings.
2. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. D2559 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Bonded Structural Wood Products for Use
Under Exterior Exposure Conditions.
2. D5055 - Standard Specification for Establishing and Monitoring Structural Capacities of
Prefabricated Wood I-Joists.
B. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST):

1. PS-1 - Structural Plywood, 2009 (Revised 2019).
2. PS-2 - Performance Standard for Wood Based Structural Use Panels; 2010.
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design Requirements:
1. Provide engineered wood products and installed systems which have been engineered,
manufactured, fabricated and installed to meet the specified performance requirements.
2. Regulatory Requirements and Approvals: Provide engineered wood products meeting the
requirements of the referenced building code compliance reports.
B. Design Floor Live and Dead Load: [50] lbs/sq ft ([2.39] kPa) with deflection limited to [1/480] of
span.
C. Minimum Joist Depth: [16] inch ([406] mm).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's literature describing materials, dimensions, allowable spans and
spacings, bearing and anchor details, bridging and bracing requirements, and installation instructions;
identify independent inspection agency.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes and spacing of joists, bracing and bridging, bearing stiffeners, holes to
be cut (if any), and framed openings between joists.
C. Certificate: Certification by joist manufacturer that products delivered are of the same design and
construction as those evaluated by the independent inspection agency.
WOOD I-JOISTS PAGE 1 OF 4

SECTION 061733
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this

section with minimum [5] years of documented experience.
A. Deliver products to site in manufacturer's original packaging with manufacturer's name and product
identification intact and legible.
B. Protect products from damage due to weather and breakage.
C. Protect joists from warping or other distortion by stacking in upright position, braced to resist
movement, with air circulation under coverings and around stacks.
D. Handle individual joists in the upright position.
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental
conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.8 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer’s material warranty:

1. Warranty Period: Lifetime Limited Warranty beginning with date of substantial completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis – Pre-Fabricated Structural Wood: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. L P Building Products
414 Union Street, suite 2000
Nashville, Tennessee 37219
Telephone: 888-820-0325
Website: (www.LPCorp.com).
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
2.2 WOOD JOISTS
A. Wood I-Joists: Solid lumber top and bottom flanges and oriented strand board (OSB) webs bonded
together with structural adhesive, with published span rating to meet project requirements.
1. Span Rating: Established and monitored in accordance with ASTM D5055 by independent
inspection agency.
2. Oriented Strand Board: Comply with PS 2.
3. Plywood: Comply with PS 1.
4. Adhesive: Tested for wet/exterior service in accordance with ASTM D2559.
5. Depth: As indicated on drawings.
6. Fabrication Tolerances:
7. Flange Width: Plus/minus [1/32] inch ([0.8] mm).

SECTION 061733
8. Flange Thickness: Minus [1/16] inch ([1.6] mm).
9. Joist Depth: Plus 0, minus [1/8] inch ([3.2] mm).
10. Marking: Mark each piece with depth, joist spacing, and allowable span for joist spacing.
11. Provide bearing stiffeners if required by span rating or joist hanger manufacturer.
B. Joist Hangers: Engineered specifically designed for connection type and application.
C. Joist Bridging: Type, size and spacing recommended by joist manufacturer.
D. Wood Blocking, Plates, and Miscellaneous Framing: Softwood lumber, any species, construction
grade, maximum moisture content of [19] percent.
E. Wood Blocking, Plates, and Miscellaneous Framing: As specified in Section 06 1000 – Rough
Carpentry.
F. Fasteners: Electrogalvanized steel, type to suit application.
G. Bearing Plates: Electrogalvanized steel, unfinished.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive joists.
B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate placement of bearing items.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Install joists in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct position.
C. Make provisions for erection loads and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb
and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.
D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect.
E. Install permanent bridging and bracing.
F. Install headers and supports to frame openings required.
G. Frame openings between joists with lumber in accordance with Section 06 1000 – Rough Carpentry.
H. Coordinate installation of sheathing / decking with work of this section.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members: [1/2] inch ([12] mm) maximum, from true position.

SECTION 061733
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 061733
SECTION 061753 - SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Shop fabricated wood trusses for roof framing.
2. Bridging and bracing.
3. Framing for openings.
2. Section 06 1000 – Rough Carpentry.
3. Section 06 1733 – Wood I-Joists.
1.2 REFERENCES

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
3. D2898 - Standard Practice for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire
Testing.
B. Engineered Wood Association (APA):

1. PRP-108 - Performance Standards and Qualification Policy for Structural-Use Panels.
C. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST):

1. Product Standard PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.
D. Truss Plate Institute (TPI):

1. BCSI-1 – Building Component Safety Information Booklet: The Guide to Good Practice For
Handling, Installing and Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses, 2018.
2. DSB-89 – Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate
Connected Wood Trusses; 1989.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on plate connectors, bearing plates, and metal bracing
components.
B. Shop Drawings: Show truss configurations, sizes, spacing, size and type of plate connectors, cambers,
framed openings, bearing and anchor details, and bridging and bracing.
1. Include identification of engineering software used for design.
2. Provide shop drawings stamped or sealed by design engineer.
3. Submit design calculations.
C. Designer's Qualification Statement.
D. Fabricator's Qualification Statement.
SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES PAGE 1 OF 4

SECTION 061753
A. Designer Qualifications: Perform design by or under direct supervision of a Professional Structural

Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this

section with minimum [5] years of documented experience.
A. Handle and erect trusses in accordance with TPI BCSI 1.
B. Store trusses in vertical position resting on bearing ends.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Truss Plate Connectors:

1. Alpine, an ITW Company: www.alpineitw.com/#sle.
2. MiTek Industries, Inc: www.mii.com/#sle.
B. Truss Fabricators:
1. RedBuilt LLC; Open Web Trusses: www.redbuilt.com/#sle.
2.2 TRUSSES
A. Wood Trusses: Designed and fabricated in accordance with ANSI/TPI 1 and TPI DSB-89 to achieve
structural requirements indicated.
1. Species and Grade: Southern Pine, SPIB (GR) Grade [1].
2. Species and Grade: Douglas Fir, WWPA G-5 Grade [1].
3. Connectors: Steel plate.
4. Structural Design: Comply with applicable code for structural loading criteria.
5. Design Roof Live and Dead Load: [30] lbs/sq ft ([1.43] kPa).
6. Roof Deflection: [1/240], maximum.
7. Decay Resistance: Provide factory preservative pressure treated wood.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Lumber:
1. Moisture Content: Between [7] and [9] percent.
B. Steel Connectors: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M Structural Steel (SS)
Grade 33/230, with G90/Z275 coating; die stamped with integral teeth; thickness as indicated.
C. Truss Bridging: Type, size and spacing recommended by truss manufacturer.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Wood Blocking, Bridging, Plates, and Miscellaneous Framing: As specified in Section 06 1000 –
Rough Carpentry.

SECTION 061753
B. Fasteners: Electrogalvanized steel, type to suit application.
C. Bearing Plates: Electrogalvanized steel.
2.5 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for
wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive trusses.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate placement of bearing items.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Install trusses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and TPI DSB-89 and TPI BCSI 1;
maintain a copy of each TPI document on site until installation is complete.
B. Set members level and plumb, in correct position.
C. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb,
and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.
D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect.
E. Install permanent bridging and bracing.
F. Install headers and supports to frame openings required.
G. Frame openings between trusses with lumber in accordance with Section 06 1000 – Rough Carpentry.
H. Coordinate placement of decking with work of this section.
I. After erection, touch-up primed surfaces with primer consistent with shop coat.
3.4 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A. Treat all site-sawn cuts of pressure-treated wood using same type of treatment (i.e. preservative or
fire-retardant).
B. Apply preservative treatment to non-pressure-treated wood wherever it will come into contact with
cementitious materials, roofing, asphaltic materials, or metals.
C. Apply treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

SECTION 061753
D. Allow field-applied treatment to dry prior to erecting members.
3.5 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members: [1/2] inch ([12] mm) maximum, from true position.
3.6 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION

SECTION 061753
SECTION 064100 - ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Plastic laminate casework and accessories as shown and listed on drawings and specified
herein. Includes all countertops, sink cutouts, splashes, supports, shelving, and filler panels
necessary for a complete casework installation.
4. Section 09 6513 – Resilient Wall Base.
5. Section 12 3600 – Countertops.
6. Division 22 – Plumbing.
7. Division 26 – Electrical.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI):

1. Architectural Woodwork Standards.
B. North American Architectural Woodwork Standards (NAWWS):

1. North American Architectural Woodwork Standards; US Version 4.0.
C. Association of Electrical and Medical Imaging Equipment Manufacturers (NEMA)

1. NEMA -3 LD- 2005 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association

(BHMA):
1. ANSI-A135: for all hardboard.
2. ANSI-A161.2-1998 for performance of fabricated high-pressure decorative laminate
countertops.
3. ANSI-A208.1-2009 for grade [M-3] mat-formed wood particleboard.
4. BHMA A156.9 American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Surfaces: Visible surfaces of units when doors, drawers, or other closures are in closed
position; visible exterior and interior surfaces of units without closures; visible surfaces behind clear
glass doors; bottoms of units more than four feet above floor; closure fronts and edges; and counter
tops and splashes including their edges. Exterior surfaces of modular casework sides shall be
considered exposed surfaces, even when they are not visible. Exterior surface of backs of overhead
cabinets of modular casework shall be considered exposed, even when not visible.
B. Semi- Exposed Surfaces: Visible interior surfaces of units when closures are in open position; surfaces
and edges of shelves; interior surfaces of doors and drawers; bottoms of wall hung units four feet or
less above floor; and tops of units six feet six inches or more above floor.
C. Concealed Surfaces: Surfaces other than exposed or semi-exposed as defined above.
ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK PAGE 1 OF 6

SECTION 064100
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and
accessories.
1. Scale of Drawings: [1-1/2] inch to [1] foot ([125] mm to [1] m), minimum.
2. Provide information as required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS).
3. Include certification program label.
C. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum [12] inches ([300]
mm) square, illustrating proposed cabinet, countertop, and shelf unit substrate and finish.
D. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets,
demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish.
E. Certificate: Submit labels and certificates required by quality assurance and quality control programs.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section
with minimum [5] years of documented experience.
1. Company with at least one project in the past [5] years with value of woodwork within 20
percent of cost of woodwork for this Project.
2. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of
fabrication and throughout the duration of the project.
3. Single Source Responsibility: Provide and install this work from single fabricator.
B. Quality Certification:
1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the installed work complies with
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade or grades
specified.
2. Submit certifications upon completion of installation that verifies this work is in compliance
with specified requirements.
3. Replace, repair, or rework all work for which certification is refused.
A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:

1. Deliver casework once painting, and similar requirements have been completed that will not
damage casework. This includes ensuring spaces are enclosed and weather tight.
2. All casework shall be blanket wrapped for protection during shipping.
B. Storage and Handling:

1. Casework must be protected from dust, dirt and/or other trades.
2. Countertops are stacked, properly supported and spaced evenly to avoid warping. Large pieces
are stacked first on the pallets with shorter pieces stacked on top.
C. Provide temporary protective covers for items during delivery, installation, and until final acceptance
of Project.

SECTION 064100
A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain following conditions in building for minimum [7] days prior
to, during, and after installation of casework:
1. Do not deliver or install the casework until concrete, masonry, and drywall/plaster work is dry;
ambient relative humidity is maintained between [25] % – [55] % prior to delivery and
throughout the life of installation; and the temperature is controlled above [55] deg F.
2. Casework shall not be stored or installed in non-climate controlled conditions.
B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work with plumbing and electrical rough-in and finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI

(NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.
B. Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade.

1. Door and Drawer Front Edge Profiles: Square edge with thin applied band.
2. Door and Drawer Front Retention Profiles: Fixed panel.
3. Casework Construction Type: Type [A] - Frameless.
4. Interface Style for Cabinet and Door: Style [2] - Finish Inset; reveal overlay.
5. Grained Face Layout for Cabinet and Door Fronts: Flush panel.
a. Custom Grade: Doors, drawer fronts and false fronts wood grain to run and match
vertically within each cabinet unit.
6. Cabinet Design Series: As indicated on the Drawings.
7. Adjustable Shelf Loading: [40] psf ([19.5] gm/sq cm).
a. Deflection: L / [144].
8. Casework Integrity: Duty Level [2].
9. Cabinet Style: Flush overlay.
10. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style.
11. Drawer Side Construction: Multiple-dovetailed.
12. Drawer Construction Technique: Dovetail joints.
2.2 LAMINATE MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Wilsonart LLC; www.wilsonart.com/#sle.
2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
B. Thermally Fused Laminate (TFL): Melamine resin, NEMA LD 3, Type VGL laminate panels.
C. Thermally Fused Laminate (TFL): Melamine resin, NEMA LD 3, Type VGL laminate panels.

SECTION 064100
D. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific
applications.
E. Provide specific types as indicated.

1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, [0.048] inch ([1.22] mm) nominal thickness, color noted on
Drawings, finish as indicated.
2. Horizontal Surfaces: HGL, [0.039] inch ([1.0] mm) nominal thickness, color noted on Drawings
, finish as indicated.
3. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, [0.028] inch ([0.71] mm) nominal thickness, color noted on Drawings,
finish as indicated.
4. Vertical Surfaces: VGL, [0.020] inch ([0.51] mm) nominal thickness, color noted on Drawings,
5. Cabinet Liner: CLS, [0.020] inch ([0.51] mm) nominal thickness, color noted on Drawings,
6. Laminate Backer: BKL, [0.020] inch ([0.51] mm) nominal thickness, undecorated; for
application to concealed backside of panels faced with high pressure decorative laminate.
2.3 COUNTERTOPS
A. Countertops: See Section 12 3600 – Countertops.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Franklin International, Inc; Titebond Original Wood Glue: www.titebond.com/#sle.
B. Vinyl Countertop Edge: PVC anchor type tee-molding edging in width to match thickness of
countertop, color as indicated, used at locations as indicated.
C. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.
D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized or
chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome-plated finish in exposed
locations.
E. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
F. Grommets: Standard plastic, painted metal, or rubber grommets for cut-outs, in color to match
adjacent surface.
2.5 HARDWARE
A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified.
B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf standards or
multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish, for nominal [1] inch
([25] mm) spacing adjustments.
C. Fixed Specialty Workstation and Countertop Brackets:

1. Material: Steel.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied powder coat.

SECTION 064100
3. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
D. Manufacturers:
1. A&M Hardware, Inc; Heavy-Duty Hybrid Brackets: www.aandmhardware.com/#sle.
E. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, [4] inch centers ("U" shaped
wire pull, steel with chrome finish, [100] mm centers).
F. Drawer Slides:
1. Extension types as indicated.
2. Static Load Capacity: Commercial grade.
3. Mounting: Side mounted.
4. Stops: Integral type.
5. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type.
6. Manufacturers:
a. Accuride International, Inc; Heavy-Duty Drawer Slides: www.accuride.com/#sle.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage
through building openings.
B. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece
for any single length.
C. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.
Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.
D. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel
arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum [2] feet from sink cut-outs. (Locate counter butt joints
minimum [600] mm from sink cut-outs.)
E. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.
F. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern.
G. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops as recommended by laminate manufacturer at [16]

inches ([400] mm) on center.
H. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime
paint cut edges.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

SECTION 064100
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements

for grade indicated.
B. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.
C. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.
D. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.
E. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of [1/32] inch
([0.79] mm). Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
F. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.
G. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to
match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.
H. Configure the casework arrangements to dimensions requiring [2-1/2] inch or less of filler at each end
of wall-to-wall elevations, and to ensure a complete and satisfactory installation.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust all moving and operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
B. Fill and re-touch all nicks, chips and scratches. Replace all un-repairable damaged items.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings and fixture.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 064100
SECTION 064600 - WOOD TRIM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Interior running wood trim.
4. Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealers.
5. Section 09 2900 – Gypsum Board.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Architectural Woodwork Institute/Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers of Canada/Woodwork

Institute (AWI/AWMAC/WI):
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for all millwork items and related accessories. Indicate anchorage methods.
B. Samples: Submit [6] inch long samples of each profile.
A. Millwork shall be manufactured in accordance with the AWI Standards in the grades hereinafter
specified. In event of a dispute as to the quality grades, all parties will call upon an inspection under
AWI’s inspection procedures and agree to abide by the decision of AWI.
A. Store flat in a dry, well ventilated space protected from inclement weather. Use care in handling and
storing materials to assure proper ventilation and to protect edges and avoid any disfigurement,
scratches or corner bruises. Damaged or warped material shall be immediately replaced with new,
undamaged material.
B. Make no deliveries of millwork until areas are completely enclosed and wet work completed.
A. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior wood trim until
building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining
temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
WOOD TRIM PAGE 1 OF 3

SECTION 064600
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the 'Architectural Woodwork Standards"
for grades of wood trim indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
B. Interior Trim: Graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards,

Section [3] requirements for quality grade specified, average moisture content of [6] percent.
1. Species: White Birch.
2. Cut: Plain Sliced.
2.2 FABRICATION GRADE
A. Grade: Custom.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Type and size as required by conditions of use; plain steel for interior use; hot dip
galvanized steel for exterior use.
B. Adhesives:
1. Waterproof, water based solvent release type, compatible with trim and substrate materials.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Surfacing: Wood items shall be smoothly machines and sanded on exposed surfaces as required by
grade.
B. Where field fitting is required, provide ample allowance for cutting.
C. Groove back of trim applied to flat substrate, except do not groove exposed ends.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONDITION OF SURFACES
A. Inspect materials and surfaces prior to installation and report all defects. Proceeding with installation
implies acceptance of surfaces as satisfactory.
B. Clean materials as required.
C. Do not attempt to install equipment which is missing parts which will require disassembly or removal
at a later time in order to install parts necessary for a functional operation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate work under this Section with other trades whose work adjoins, combines or aligns with
same.
B. Take such field measurements as may be required. Report any major discrepancy between Drawings
and field dimensions to the Architect and secure directions before proceeding.

SECTION 064600
C. Prior to installation, condition wood to average humidity that will prevail after installation.
D. Back prime wood installed against masonry or cementitious materials exterior wood prior to
installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Set work in place, scribe plumb, square and level and secure in position indicated with required
fastenings, clips, braces, anchors, blocking, shimming and other fittings required to properly
secure.
2. Ease exposed edges.
3. Blind nail items where possible; where not possible, use finish nails set for putty. Staples,
T-nails and similar fastenings are not permitted for exposed surfaces.
4. Make standing trim single lengths, running trim in longest lengths possible.
5. Miter cut running joints tight and flush on exposed faces and edges.
6. Miter or cope inside corner joints; miter outside corners.
7. Miter and return exposed ends, returns less than [1] inch longer than thickness, drilled, glued
and nailed.
8. Scribe to adjacent construction with maximum [1/4] inch gaps.
9. Wood millwork not shop finished shall be back-primed as specified in Section 09 9100 -
Painting prior to setting in place.
10. Hammer marks and other defects caused by installation procures may result in rejection of the
particular item damaged.
3.4 CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of the work, remove all debris, rubbish and surplus materials from the site, resulting
from work under this Section.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 064600
SECTION 072113 - BOARD INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board.
4. Section 05 4000 – Cold Formed Metal Framing.
6. Section 07 2726 – Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barrier.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. A272: Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Structural Sandwich
Constructions.
2. C518: Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of
Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
3. C578: Standard Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
4. D1621: Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
5. E84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
6. E96: Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
7. E119: Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Constructions and Materials.
8. E331: Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and
Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
9. E2357: Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 285: Standard Fire Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior
Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components.
C. International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES)

1. Evaluation Report AC 71: Acceptance Criteria for Foam Plastic Sheathing Panels Used as
Water Resistive Barriers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified agency.
C. Evaulation Reports: For foam plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Provide Manufacturer’s installation instructions for each product

specified.
E. Warranty: Submit sample warranty.
BOARD INSULATION PAGE 1 OF 6

SECTION 072113
A. Source Limitation: Obtain exterior building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Each insulation board must be labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name, ASTM material
specification reference, and identification of the third party inspection agency used for building code
qualification.
C. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Insulation systems shall be manufactured and marketed by a firm with
a minimum of [20] years’ experience in the production and sales of insulation materials.
D. Installers’ Qualifications: The installation work of this section shall be performed an experienced
contractor that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and authorized by manufacturer,
with a minimum [2] years’ record of successful installations on projects of similar scope.
A. Deliver and store products in Manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Store in a dry area and
protect from water, direct sunlight, flame, and ignition sources.
C. Remove and replace materials that are damaged.
D. In the event the extruded polystyrene insulation board becomes wet, wipe dry prior to installation.
A. Apply products within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect insulation performance.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Product Warranty: Provide Manufacturer’s standard limited warranty against manufacturing defects.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis – Board Insulation: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. Owens Corning Insulating Systems, LLC
One Owens Corning Parkway
Toledo, Ohio 43659
Telephone: 800-438-7469
Website: (www.owenscorning.com)

SECTION 072113
2. Dupont Performance Building Innovatoins
Chestnut Run Plaza, Bldg 370
974 Center Road
Wilmington, Delaware 19805
Telephone: 800-448-9835
Website: (www.building.dupont.com)
2.2 APPLICATION
A. Insulation Under Concrete Slabs: Extruded polystyrene (XPS) board.
B. Insulation at Perimeter of Foundation: Extruded polystyrene (XPS) board.
C. Insulation Inside Masonry Cavity Walls: Extruded polystyrene (XPS) carbon black board.
2.3 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Board Insulation: Complies with ASTM C578 with either natural skin or
cut cell surfaces.
1. Type and Compressive Resistance: Type [IV], [25] psi ([173] kPa), minimum.
2. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class [A] – [0] to [25], when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): [450] or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. Type and Thermal Resistance, R-value (RSI-value): Type [IV], [5.0] ([0.88]), minimum, per [1]
inch ([25.4] mm) thickness at [75] degrees F ([24] degrees C) mean temperature.
5. Complies with fire resistance requirements indicated on drawings as part of an exterior non-
load-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285.
6. Board Thickness: [1] inch ([25.4] mm).
7. Board Edges: Tongue and Groove.
8. Type and Water Absorption: Type [IV], [0.3] percent by volume, maximum, by total
immersion.
9. Products:
a. Owens Corning Corporation; FOAMULAR Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Insulation:
www.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle.
B. Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Cavity Wall Insulation Board: Complies with ASTM C578, and
manufactured using carbon black technology.
1. Type and Compressive Resistance: Type [IV], 25 psi ([173] kPa), minimum.
2. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class [A] – [0] to [25], when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): [450] or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. Type and Thermal Resistance, R-value (RSI-value): Type [IV], [5.6] ([0.98]), minimum, per [1]
inch ([25.4] mm) thickness at [75] degrees F ([24] degrees C) mean temperature.
5. Complies with fire resistance requirements indicated on drawings as part of an exterior non-
load-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285.
6. Board Size: [15-3/4] inch by [96] inch ([400] mm by [2440] mm).
7. Board Thickness: [2] inch (50.8 mm).
8. Board Edges: Tongue and Groove.
9. Type and Water Absorption: Type [IV], [0.3] percent by volume, maximum, by total
immersion.
10. Products:
a. DuPont de Nemours, Inc; Styrofoam Brand Cavitymate Ultra: building.dupont.com/#sle.

SECTION 072113
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type [II], loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of [5], per ASTM E 84.
2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type [II], closed cell, with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of [75] and [450], respectively, per ASTM E 84.
B. Anchor Installation: Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-
type insulation anchors as follows:
1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to
anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application.
2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated on Drawings
between concrete substrate and insulation.
3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over
spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to
compress insulation.
4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips
of spindles.
C. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier
materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without
damaging insulation and substrates.
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of [70] g/L or less.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready
to receive insulation.
B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances
that may impede adhesive bond.
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain,
or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids
with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and
lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required
to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.

SECTION 072113
3.3 INSTALLATION OF SLAB INSULATION
A. On vertical slab edge and foundation surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended
adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of [24] inches below exterior grade
line.
B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of [16] inches in from exterior walls.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION
A. Butt panels together for tight fit.
B. Anchor Installation: Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-
type insulation anchors as follows:
1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to
anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application.
2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated on Drawings
between concrete substrate and insulation.
3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over
spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to
compress insulation.
4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips
of spindles.
C. Adhesive Installation: Install with adhesive or press into tacky waterproofing or damp proofing
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY WALLS INSULATION
A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
both ways on inside face and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall
ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against
inside substrates.
B. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed
for this purpose and specified in Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Prior to project closeout, remove all related rubbish, excess material, tools, and equipment from the
site. Dispose of waste material in a manner approved by applicable jurisdictions.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect insulation from damage due to weather and physical abuse until protected by permanent
construction.
B. If black tape or coatings are installed over the XPS insulation board, cover the black surfaces as soon
as possible to avoid damage due to potential solar heat build-up on the black surface.

SECTION 072113
C. Do not permit extruded polystyrene insulation board to come in contact with surfaces or temperatures
in excess of [165] deg F.
D. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 072113
SECTION 072115 - BATT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Glass fiber blanket.
2. Foam sealant and accessories
1.2 REFERENCES

1. C423 Test Method for Sound Absorption Coefficient by the Reverberation Room Method.
2. C518 Test Method for Steady State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat
Flow Meter.
3. C665 Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction
and Manufactured Housing.
4. C1320 Standard Practice for Installation of Mineral Fiber Batt and Blanket Thermal Insulation
for Light Frame Construction.
5. E136 Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750°C.
6. ASTM E84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
7. ASTM E119 Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 285: Standard Fire Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior
Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified agency.
C. Evaluation Reports: For foam plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Provide Manufacturer’s installation instructions for each product

specified.
E. Warranty: Submit sample warranty.
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Insulation systems shall be manufactured and marketed by a firm with
a minimum of [20] years’ experience in the production and sales of insulation materials.
B. Installers’ Qualifications: The installation work of this section shall be performed an experienced
contractor that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and authorized by manufacturer,
with a minimum [2] years’ record of successful installations on projects of similar scope.
BATT INSULATION PAGE 1 OF 4

SECTION 072115
C. Source Limitation: Obtain exterior building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Thermal Conductivity: Thicknesses shown are for thermal conductivity (R-value at 75 degrees F or 24
degrees C) specified for each material. Provide adjusted thicknesses as directed for equivalent use of
material having a different thermal conductivity. Where insulation is identified by "R" value, provide
thickness required to achieve indicated value.
E. Fire and Insurance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance, flammability and insurance ratings indicated,
and comply with regulations as interpreted by governing authorities.
F. Federal Specifications (FS): Where compliance with FS standard is indicated, specified requirements
for marking individual boards/batts/blankets are waived, provided packages of units are labeled to
show compliance.
A. Deliver and store products in Manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Store in a dry area and
protect from water, direct sunlight, flame, and ignition sources.
C. Remove and replace materials that are damaged.
D. In the event the extruded polystyrene insulation board becomes wet, wipe dry prior to installation.
A. Apply products within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect insulation performance.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Product Warranty: Provide Manufacturer’s standard limited warranty against manufacturing defects.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis – Batt Insulation: Contract Documents are based on products by:
Toledo, Ohio 43659
Telephone: 800-438-7469
2.2 APPLICATION
A. Insulation in Wood Framed Walls: Batt insulation with integral vapor retarder.

SECTION 072115
B. Insulation in Wood Framed Ceiling Structure: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder.
2.3 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction
fit.
1. Flame Spread Index: [75] or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: [450] or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for
facing, if any.
4. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.
5. Thickness at 2 x 4 wood framing: [3-1/2] inch ([89] mm).
a. Thermal Resistance: R-value (RSI-value) of [15].
6. Thickness at 2 x 6 wood framing: [5-1/2] inch ([139] mm).
7. Thickness at Roof / Floor Ceiling: [12-1/4] inch ([305] mm).
8. Facing
a. At Framed Wall Assemblies: Aluminum foil, one side.
b. At Roof / Floor Assemblies: Unfaced.
9. Products:
a. Owens Corning Corporation; EcoTouch PINK FIBERGLAS Insulation:
www.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, [2] inch ([50] mm) wide.
B. Nails or Staples: Steel wire; electroplated or galvanized; type and size to suit application.
C. Wire Mesh: Galvanized steel, hexagonal wire mesh.

1. Provide support netting attached to underside of Floor / Ceiling and/or Roof / Ceiling structure
to retain ceiling batts in plane with structure.
D. Protection Board for Below Grade Insulation: Cementitious, [1/4] inch ([6] mm) thick.
E. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.
F. Adhesive: Gun grade, interior and exterior, and compatible with insulation and substrates; complies
with ASTM C557.
1. Application Temperature: [40] to [100] degrees F ([5] to [38] degrees C) at contact surfaces.
2. Volatile Organic Content (VOC): Less than [7] percent by weight.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable
of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.

SECTION 072115
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain,
or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids
with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and
lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required
to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BATT INSULATION
A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.
C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.
D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within
the plane of the insulation.
E. Install with factory-applied vapor retarder membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap ends
and side flanges of membrane over framing members.
F. Staple or nail facing flanges in place at maximum [6] inches ([152] mm) on center.
G. Retain insulation batts in place with wire mesh secured to framing members.
H. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane.
I. At wood framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at [6] inches ([152] mm)
on center. Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over face of member.
J. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder.
K. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other items
interrupting the plane of the membrane; tape seal in place.
L. Coordinate work of this section with Section 07 2726 – Fluid Applied Air Barriers.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to weather and physical abuse until protected by
permanent construction. Clean unintended sealant materials, equipment, and fixtures.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 072115
SECTION 072600 - VAPOR RETARDERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Surface preparation.
2. Application of under-slab vapor retarder.
2. Section 03 3000 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.
3. Section 07 2113 – Board Insulation.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. D1709 - 09 Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the Free-Falling
Dart Method.
2. E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
3. E154 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under
Concrete Slabs.
4. E1643 - Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth
or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
5. E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or
Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
6. F1249-01 Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through Plastic Film and
Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer's product data and application instructions.
A. Use an experienced installer and adequate number of skilled personnel who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the application of the vapor retarder.
B. Obtain vapor retarder materials from a single manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing the
product.
C. Provide products which comply with all state and local regulations controlling use of volatile organic
compounds (VOCs).
A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels
clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
B. Store materials in a clean, dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
VAPOR RETARDERS PAGE 1 OF 3

SECTION 072600
C. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination.
D. Ensure membrane is stamped with manufacturer’s name, product name, and membrane thickness at
intervals of no more than [85] inches (220 cm).
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Product not intended for uses subject to abuse or permanent exposure to the elements.
B. Do not apply on frozen ground.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis – Vapor Retarders: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. W R Meadows, Inc.
P O Box 338
Hampshire, Illinois 60140-0338
Telephone: 800-34-5976
Website: (www.wrmeadows.com)
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: Perminator ([10] mm).

1. Performance-Based Specification: Vapor retarder membrane shall be manufactured from virgin
polyolefin resins and shall meet or exceed all requirements of ASTM E1745, Class [A].
a. Maximum Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E154 Sections [7], [8], [11], [12], [13], by
ASTM E96, Method [B] or ASTM F1249).
1) As received: [0.0183] perms.
2) After Wetting and Drying: [0.0219] perms.
3) Resistance to Plastic Flow and Temperature: [0.0197] perms.
4) Effect Low Temperature and Flexibility: [0.0212] perms.
5) Resistance to Deterioration from Organisms and Substances in Contacting Soil:
[0.0198] perms.
b. Puncture Resistance (ASTM D1709): > [3,500] grams.
c. Tensile Strength ASTM E154, Section [9], [52] LB. Force / inch.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Seam Tape: High Density Polyethylene Tape with pressure sensitive adhesive.
1. Type: Perminator Tape.
2. Minimum width [4] inch ([100] mm).
B. Pipe Collars: Construct pipe collars from vapor retarder material and pressure sensitive tape per
manufacturer’s instructions.
PART 3 EXECUTION

SECTION 072600
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Level, tamp, or roll earth or granular material beneath the slab base.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive membrane. Notify architect if surfaces are not acceptable. Do not begin
surface preparation or application until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Install the vapor retarder membrane in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM E
1643–98.
B. Unroll vapor retarder with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the pour.
C. Lap vapor retarder over footings and seal to foundation walls.
D. Overlap joints [6] inches ([152] mm) and seal with manufacturer’s tape.
E. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) with manufacturer’s pipe boot.
F. No penetration of the vapor retarder is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities.
A. Inspect vapor retarder for damage just prior to covering.
B. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged area [6] inches ([152]
mm) and taping all four sides with tape.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 072600
SECTION 072726 - FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Application of liquid-applied asphalt emulsion air/vapor barrier.
B. Application of materials to provide bridge and seal air leakage pathways in:
1. Wall and roof connections and penetrations.
2. Connections to foundation walls.
3. Walls, windows, curtain walls, storefronts, louvers or doors.
4. Expansion and control joints.
5. Masonry ties.
6. All other penetrations through the wall assembly.
C. Related Sections:
4. Section 07 2113 – Board Insulation.
5. Section 07 4610 – Fiber Cement Siding.
6. Section 07 6200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
7. Section 08 1113 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
8. Section 08 5113 – Aluminum Windows.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. D146-97 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Bitumen-Saturated Felts and
Fabrics Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
2. D412-98a (2002) e1 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers-Tension.
3. E96-00e1 (Method B) - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
4. E283-91 (1999) - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen.
5. E783 - Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage Through Installed Exterior
Windows and Doors.
6. E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed
Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air
Pressure Difference.
7. E2178-01 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials.
8. E2357 - 05 Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's data sheets and safety sheets for all products and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Show locations and extent of air barrier and details of all conditions.
FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER PAGE 1 OF 6

SECTION 072726
2. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
4. Installation instructions.
C. Manufacturer’s Certificate:
1. Certification of compatibility by Manufacturer, listing all materials on the project with which
the product and accessories will come in contact.
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Air Barrier Installer shall be currently accredited under the Air Barrier Association of America
(ABAA) and ensure applicators are certified in accordance with the ABAA Quality Assurance
Program.
2. Use an experienced installer and adequate number of skilled personnel who are thoroughly
trained and experienced in the application of the air barrier.
3. Air Barrier Installer performing Work shall be approved by air barrier membrane manufacturer.
B. Obtain air/vapor barrier materials from a single manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing the
product.
C. Provide products which comply with all state and local regulations controlling use of volatile organic
compounds (VOCs).
A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels
clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
B. Store materials in a clean, dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Store at temperatures above [32] 0 F ([0] 0 C), free from contact with cold or frozen surfaces.
D. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product not intended for uses subject to abuse or permanent exposure to the elements.
B. Do not proceed with product application during rain or inclement weather.
C. Do not apply membrane when air or surface temperatures are below [30] 0 F (- [1] 0 C).
D. Do not apply to frozen substrate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers: Contract Documents are based on
products by:

SECTION 072726
1. W R Meadows, Inc.
P O Box 338
Hampshire, Illinois, 60140
Telephone: 800-342-5976
Website: (www.wrmeadows.com)
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Liquid Air Vapor Barrier System: One-component, polymer-modified, cold-applied, liquid air/vapor
barrier membrane: AIR-SHIELD LM.
1. Performance Based Specification: Air/vapor barrier membrane shall be an elastomeric asphalt
emulsion having the following characteristics:
a. Air Leakage ASTM E2357: [0.04] cfm / ft.2 @ [75] Pa ([1.57] lb./ft.2).
b. Air Permeability ASTM E2178: [0.004] cfm /ft.2 @ [75] Pa ([1.57] lb./ft.2).
c. Water Vapor Permeance ASTM E96 (Method B): ≤ [0.1] perms.
d. Elongation ASTM D412: [1500] %.
e. Tensile Strength ASTM D412: [15] psi.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Flashing and Transition Membrane: Self-adhesive polymeric sheet membrane having a thickness of
[40] mils ([1] mm).:
1. AIR-SHIELD THRU-WALL FLASHING.
B. Liquid Flashing and Joint Sealant for exterior sheathing panels: Fluid -applied, single-component,
flashing membrane for rough openings and detailing:
1. Air-Shield Liquid Flashing.
C. Joint Tape: Self-adhesive polymeric membrane for joints of plywood and oriented strand board
(OSB):
1. AIR-SHIELD.
D. Membrane Adhesive:
1. Temperatures above 40o F (4o C): Water-Based Adhesive.
a. MEL-PRIME W / B Water-Based Adhesive.
2. Temperatures below 30o F (-1o C): Solvent-Based Adhesive.
a. MEL-PRIME Solvent-Based Adhesive.
E. Pointing Mastic: mastic for sealing penetrations and terminations of membrane:

1. POINTING MASTIC.
F. Detailing Membrane: non-slump waterproofing material for joint detailing:

1. BEM.
G. Concrete Repair Materials: General purpose patching materials:

1. MEADOW-PATCH [5] and [20] Concrete Repair Mortars.

SECTION 072726
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive membrane. Notify Architect if surfaces are not acceptable. Do not begin
surface preparation or application until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive air/vapor barrier.
B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive air/vapor barrier membrane in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
C. Do not apply membrane to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.
D. Concrete surfaces must be clean, free of standing water, ice, snow, frost, dust, dirt, oil, curing
compounds or any other foreign material that could prevent proper adhesion of the membrane.
E. Patch all holes and voids and smooth out any surface misalignments.
F. Patch all cracks, protrusions, small voids, offsets, details, irregularities, and small deformities with
cementitious patching mortar at least two hours before application.
G. Ensure joints between dissimilar building materials are sealed with a strip of self-adhesive membrane
[6] inch ([150] mm) wide, centered over the joint.
H. Exterior Sheathing Panels:

1. Install and fasten exterior sheathing panels according to the sheathing manufacturer’s
instructions.
2. Treat all countersunk and removed fasteners with joint filler or liquid flashing material.
3. Inspect the joint to ensure that all areas to receive joint treatment are clean, dry, smooth, and
free from all bond-breaking contaminants.
4. Remove and replace any damaged structural wall components.
5. Joint Treatment with self-adhesive membrane:
a. Prime either side of the joint extending [3] inch from the center with adhesive
recommended by the manufacturer.
b. Install a [4] inch ([25.4] mm) strip of self-adhesive membrane centered over the joint and
roll press firmly into place.
c. Fill all joints wider than [1/4] inch ([6.4] mm) with detailing membrane prior to
application of self-adhesive membrane.
I. Plywood and Oriented Strand Board (OSB):

1. Install and fasten boards according to board manufacturer.
2. Apply membrane adhesive on either side of the joint extending [3] inch from the center.
3. Install a [4] inch ([25.4] mm) strip of self-adhesive membrane centered over the joint and roll
press firmly into place.
4. For joints width more than [1/4] inch ([6.4] mm), fill with detailing membrane prior to
application of self-adhesive membrane.

SECTION 072726
3.3 APPLICATION OF AIR BARRIER SYSTEM
A. Transition Membrane:
1. Condition surfaces to be covered in one working day with applicable adhesive.
2. Apply transition membrane with a minimum overlap of [3] inch onto primed surface at all
joints, columns, beams, and dissimilar materials.
3. Roll membrane firmly into place.
4. Ensure membrane is fully adhered and remove all wrinkles and fish mouths.
5. Overlap subsequent courses of membrane a minimum of [2] inch and ensure joints are fully
adhered.
6. Seal top edge of transition membrane with pointing mastic.
B. Rough Opening Transition Membrane:

1. Self-Adhesive Transition Membrane:
a. Condition the area to be detailed using adhesive recommended by the membrane
manufacturer according to the substrate.
b. Pre-cut the self-adhesive membrane for each area of the rough opening to ensure ease of
handling.
c. Apply the first pre-cut strip at the base of the rough opening by removing the release
paper and rolling firmly into place, ensuring that there is a minimum of [3] inch ([75]
mm) of membrane extending onto the wall and a minimum of [3] inch ([75] mm) of
membrane extending into the rough opening.
d. Repeat this procedure for the vertical areas of the rough opening and the header portion
of the opening.
e. Ensure all edge overlaps are a minimum of [2] inch ([50] mm) and end to end overlaps
are [4] inch ([100] mm).
f. Seal all terminations with mastic recommended by membrane manufacturer.
C. Through Wall Flashing:

1. Condition surfaces to be covered in one working day with applicable adhesive.
2. Remove release paper prior to application.
3. Apply though wall flashing at based of masonry walls as indicated on drawings.
4. Recess through wall flashing [1/2] inch ([13] mm) from the face of the masonry.
5. Apply a bead of pointing mastic if through wall flashing is not embedded into masonry.
D. Air Barrier Membrane:

1. Apply air/vapor barrier membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Thoroughly mechanically mix membrane prior to application.
3. Apply membrane by spray or roller at a minimum coverage rate of [20] – [25] ft.2 / gal. ([60]
mils wet, [45] mils dry). Two coats ([30] mils wet) may be necessary.
4. Frequently inspect surface area with a wet mil gauge to ensure consistent thickness.
5. Work material into any fluted rib forming indentations.
6. Cured thickness of membrane should be [45] mils dry.
7. Avoid use of products which contain tars, solvents, pitches, polysulfide polymers, or PVC
materials that may come into contact with air/vapor barrier system.
A. Protect from damage during application and remainder of construction period.
B. Inspect and make necessary repairs before covering. Repair or replace damaged material according to
manufacturer’s literature.

SECTION 072726
C. Product and accessories are not designed for permanent exposure. Cover with insulation or exterior
cladding as soon as schedule allows.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 072726
SECTION 073010 - ROOFING UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Cold-applied, self-adhering membrane to protect metal roof panels from leaks caused by
ice dams and wind-blown rain.
3. Section 07 2726 – Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers.
4. Section 07 4113 – Metal Roof Panels.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. D 146 – Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Bitumen-Saturated Felts and
Woven Fabrics for Roofing and Waterproofing.
2. ASTM 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers-Tension.
3. ASTM D882 – Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s descriptive data including product description and performance
characteristics.
3. Installation methods.
B. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, representing actual product.
1. Submit [6] inch X [6] inch (152 mm by 152 mm) square, representing actual product, color and
patterns.
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction and
applicable codes at the location of the project.
B. Manufacturer: Minimum [10] years’ experience producing roofing underlayment.
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging,
with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
B. Storage:
1. Store products in a dry space at temperatures between [40]-[90] degrees F ([5] and [32]
degrees C).
ROOFING UNDERLAYMENT PAGE 1 OF 4

SECTION 073010
2. Do not store in direct sunlight.
3. Optimum adhesion to substrates when used within one year from the date of manufacture.
C. Handling:
1. Do not remove from box until ready to use.
2. Do not double stack pallets.
3. Do not store rolls on end.
1.6 WARRANTIES
A. Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard warranty against defects in materials and manufacturing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers – Roofing Underlayment: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. Protecto Wrap Company
1955 S. Cherokee Street
Denver, Colorado 80223
Telephone: 800-759-9297
Website: (www.protectowrap.com).
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhering Sheet Membrane Roof Underlayment: Protecto Wrap Jiffy Seal Ice & Water
Guard HT with the following characteristics.
1. Composition: Jiffy Seal Ice and Water Guard HT is a proprietary slip resistant, tri- layer,
woven polyolefin fabric coated on one side with a layer of high temperature aggressive
rubberized asphalt adhesive.
2. Thickness: [40] mil (1.02 mm).
3. Roll size [36] inch x[66’ foot (198 sq.ft/roll) & [36] inch x [75] foot (225 sq.ft/roll).
4. Weight: [82] lb./ [400] sq. ft. (37.2kg/ 44.4 sq. m).
5. Puncture Resistance: >[250] psi (1723 kpa) when tested in accordance with ASTM E154.
6. Color: Green.
7. Low Temp Flex: No cracks or delamination when tested in accordance to ASTM D1970.
8. Adhesion to Plywood: [4.5] lb. / in width (unprimed) when tested in accordance to ASTM
D903.
9. Permeance (Perm), also known as Moisture vapor transmission rate: < [0.05] Perms when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 96.
10. Tensile Strength: > [1600] psi (11,031 kPa), when tested in accordance with ASTM D 412.
11. Elongation: Over [500]%, when tested in accordance with ASTM D412.
12. Maximum UV Exposure time: [6] months.
13. Usable Temperature Range: Up to [250] F (up to [121] C).
14. Application(s):
a. Use on new or retrofit roofs.
b. Use on most roof coverings.
c. Use on slopes of [2] : [12] and higher, hip, ridge, valleys, rake edges, confined rake
edges, around skylights, and chimneys.

SECTION 073010
B. Limitations:
1. Not recommended for roofs that exceed [250] degrees F ([121] C) operating temperature.
2. Not recommended for use on roof slopes less than [2] : [12] (without approval).
3. Not recommended for use over granulated surfaces or existing roof coverings.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Primer can be used to enhance bond when applying underlayment to concrete, metal or
other hard to bond to surfaces.
B. Select either of the following Protecto Wrap Primers as may be needed for the application:
1. Protecto Wrap # [100] VOC Primer.
2. Protecto Wrap Water Based Universal Primer
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and areas to receive Water Guard. Notify Architect in writing of defects of
work and other unsatisfactory site conditions that would cause defective installation of Water
Guard. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
B. Verify site dimensions.
C. Commencement of work will imply acceptance of substrate.
D. Roof deck surface shall be clean, dry and free of any foreign materials. The roof deck surface
shall be free of gaps, sharp edges and protrusions. Do not walk on surface when wet or covered
with frost, as there is an increased risk of injury.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install Water Guard to comply with Manufacturer’s recommendations, specifications and details.
B. Apply only in fair weather conditions when air, roof deck and membrane temperatures are at [40]
degrees F ([5] degrees C) or higher.
C. Install membrane such that all laps shed water in both vertical and horizontal installations.
D. Valleys require a minimum [18] inch wide roll of JS Ice & Water Guard HT centered down the
full length of the valley.
E. Install membrane at lowest point of roof slope and work up the slope.
F. Position the roll into the desired location, roll out the membrane and cut to length as needed.
G. Align the roll with edge of eave or overlap of preceding roll, pull membrane tight, start by
removing a portion of the release liner and adhere to roof deck.
1. Reposition as needed prior to removing the remaining release liner.
H. Lift the opposing end of the membrane and remove or strip the release liner, pulling it to one
side, keep membrane aligned and tight, adhere membrane to the roof deck while another person
brooms the sheet flat.

SECTION 073010
I. Edge laps are [3] inch minimum and end laps are [6] inch minimum.
J. All laps should be firmly pressed or rolled to ensure a positive seal.
K. Cleanup:
1. Dispose of waste in accordance to local requirements.
2. Control worksite so that boxes and release liner to not present a hazard.
3. Packaging materials and release liner can be recycled.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect Ice & Water Guard HT from damage until covered by roofing.
B. Do not expose to direct contact with solvent based products, polysulfides, plasticized PVC
roofing materials or high concentrations of resins (pitch).
C. Jiffy Seal Ice & Water Guard HT incorporates a slip resistant surface; however, Protecto Wrap
Company recommends the use of appropriate fall protection when installing roof underlayments.
D. Jiffy Seal Ice & Water Guard HT is a moisture, air/vapor barrier; spaces under the area covered
must be properly vented.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 073010
SECTION 074113 - METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Prefinished, prefabricated standing seam roof system with continuous seams.
3. Section 07 3010 – Roofing Underlayment.
4. Section 07 6200 – Sheet Metal Flashings and Trim.
5. Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealants.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):

1. 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

1. A653/A653M - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process.
2. A792: Steel Sheet, [55] % Aluminum Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot Dip Process.
3. C1371 - Determination of Emittance of Materials Near Room Temperature Using Portable
Emissometers.
4. C1549 - Determination of Solar Reflectance Near Ambient Temperature Using a Portable Solar
Reflectometer.
5. D523 - Specular Gloss.
6. E1592 - Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference.
7. E283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under
Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
8. E331 - Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
9. E1918 - Measuring Solar Reflectance of Horizontal and Low Sloped Surfaces in the Field.
10. E1980 - Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low Sloped Opaque Surfaces.
C. Cool Roof Rating Council (CRRC):

1. Method # [1] - Measuring Solar Reflectance of a Flat, Opaque, and Heterogeneous Surface
Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer.
D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association, Inc. (SMACMA):
1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. 580 - Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
METAL ROOF PANELS PAGE 1 OF 6

SECTION 074113
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate thickness and dimensions of parts, fastenings and anchoring methods, details and
locations of joints, transitions and other provisions necessary for thermal expansion and
contraction.
2. Indicate locations of field- and factory-applied sealant.
C. Samples:
1. Submit two samples, [12] inches long by full panel width, showing proposed metal thickness
and seam profile.
2. Submit standard color samples of metal for selection.
D. Manufacturer’s Qualifications.
E. Installer Qualifications: Submit list of completed projects, with names and contact information for
architects and contractors.
F. Test Reports: Indicating compliance of products with project requirements.
G. Warranty Documentation.
H. Insurance Documentation.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Minimum [10] years’ documented experience in work of this Section.
2. Manufacturer shall carry $[2,000,000] liability insurance, minimum, for metal panel system.
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. Minimum [5] years' experience, minimum, in application of metal roof or wall panels.
2. Minimum [5] satisfactory projects with metal panel work of similar scope and complexity to
Work of this Project.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications:

1. Agency compliant with ISO/IEC Standard 17025, or an accredited independent agency
recognized by the International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation Mutual Recognition
Arrangement or ANSI.
A. Storage and Handling Requirements:

1. Keep panels and accessory items dry.
2. Protect against damage and discoloration.
3. Handle panels with non-marring slings.
4. Support panels to prevent permanent deformation.
5. Store panels above ground, with one end elevated for drainage.
6. Protect panels against standing water and condensation between adjacent surfaces.
7. If panels become wet, immediately separate sheets, wipe dry with clean cloth, and keep sheets
separate for air-drying.
8. Painted panels shall be shipped with protective plastic sheeting or a strippable film coating
between panels. Remove strippable film coating prior to installation. Do not allow strippable
film coating to remain on panels in extreme heat, cold, or direct sunlight or other UV source.
9. Do not allow panels to contact treated lumber.

SECTION 074113
1.6 WARRANTIES
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard [25] year performance warranty, stating the
following:
1. Architectural Fluorocarbon Finish:
a. Will be free of fading or color change in excess of [5] Hunter delta-E units as determined
by ASTM D2244-02.
b. Will not chalk in excess of numerical rating of [8] when measured in accordance with
standard procedures specified in ASTM D4214-98 method D659.
c. Will not peel, crack, chip, or delaminate.
B. Installer’s Warranty: Warrant panels, flashings, sealants, fasteners and accessories against defective
materials and/or workmanship, covering repairs required to maintain roof panels watertight and
weatherproof with normal usage for two years following Project Substantial Completion date.
1. Furnish written warranty, signed by Installer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers – Metal Roof Panels: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. AEP-Span
10905 Beech Avenue.
Fontana, California 92337.
Telephone: 800-733-4955.
Website:(www.aep-span.com).
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Products: Provide the following:

1. Select Seam Narrow Batten.
B. Performance Criteria:
1. Wind Uplift: Class [90] per UL 580:
a. UL Construction #397, minimum [24] gauge panels, when installed over minimum [5/8]
inch nominal plywood decking, with roof panel fastener clips spaced [24] inch on center
maximum.
b. UL Construction#397A, minimum [24] gauge panels, when installed over [22] gauge
minimum steel decking, with roof panel fastener clips spaced [24] inch on center
maximum.
c. Deflection Limits: Withstand wind loads with deflections no greater than [1/180] of the
span.
2. Air Infiltration: < [0.02] cfm per linear foot of joint when tested in accordance with ASTM E
283 at static test pressure differential of [20.0] psf.
3. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: No leakage through panel joints when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 331 at static test pressure differential of [25.0] psf.
4. Thermal Movements: Accommodate thermal movement without buckling, joint opening,
overstressing components, failure of connections, or other detrimental effects, through the
following temperature changes:
a. [120] degrees F, ambient.
b. [180] degrees F, material surface.

SECTION 074113
2.3 PANELS
A. Panels: Preformed Metal Standing Seam Roofing: Select Seam Narrow Batten.
1. Material: Steel conforming to ASTM A792.
a. 24 Gauge: Yield strength 50,000 psi; with aluminum-zinc alloy coating conforming to
ASTM A792, Class AZ50.
b. Thickness and yield strength as required for performance indicated; with aluminum-zinc
alloy coating conforming to ASTM A792; Class AZ50 for projects with multiple profiles
or varied combinations of profiles, rib patterns and finishes, show on Drawings.
2. Panel Width and Pattern:
a. [16] inch panel width, with striated pattern.
3. Panel Rib Height:
a. Narrow batten cap [1] inch high x [3/8] inch wide.
4. Panel Finish: Provide primer and top finish coat on exposed faces; provide primer and backer
coat on concealed faces of panels.
a. DuraTech 5000: Polyvinylidine Fluoride, full [70] percent Kynar 500or Hylar 5000,
consisting of a baked-on [0.15] – [0.20] mil corrosion resistant primer and a baked-on
[0.70] – [0.80] mil finish coat with a specular gloss of [8] to [15] when tested in
accordance with ASTM D523 at [60] degrees.
b. Panel Color: Forest Green. Match existing.
5. Seam Sealant: Factory apply high-grade butyl mastic sealant within the confines of narrow
batten, designed to seal against adjacent male panel legs.
2.4 FRAMING AND SUBSTRATES
A. Rough Carpentry: As specified in Section 06 1000 – Rough Carpentry.
B. Sheathing: As specified in Section 06 1100 – Framing and Sheathing.
C. Roofing Underlayment: As specified in Section 07 3010 - Roofing Underlayment.
2.5 CLIPS AND FASTENERS
A. UL-90 assembly rated clip: [24] gauge coated with minimum AZ-50 Zinc-Aluminum coating per
ASTM A792.
B. Bearing Plate: [22] gauge, minimum. Refer to Metal Construction Association Technical Bulletin –
Fasteners Selection.
C. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer for performance indicated.

1. Minimum: Manufacturer’s standard #[10] X [1] inch long self-drilling, pancake head screws for
metal; noncorrosive base material.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Trim and Flashings: Material, metal thickness, and finish to match panels. Profiles indicated in
Drawings.
1. Provide Manufacturer’s standard accessories and other items essential to completeness of
standing seam roof installation.
B. Panel Penetration Flashings: As recommended by panel manufacturer; designed to provide sufficient

movement to prevent creation of points of fixity at penetrations.

SECTION 074113
C. Joint Sealers for Field Application: Specified in Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealers.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication: General:
1. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings or specified herein, fabricate panels in continuous lengths
and fabricate flashings and accessories in longest practical lengths.
2. Panels shall be factory correctively leveled.
B. Panels:
1. Provide panels in full length from ridge to eave when possible.
2. Where single length panels are not practical, provide mated swaged panels for positive joint end
laps, shingled to accommodate water run-off (fabricated with overlap in direction of water
flow).
3. Roof panels shall have flush horizontal and vertical surfaces to facilitate sealing at terminations.
Panel configurations which create voids and requiring supplemental closure devices shall not be
considered acceptable.
4. Engineer panels to use concealed anchors that permit expansion and contraction, except at
eaves, end laps, ridges, valleys, hips and gables.
C. Fabrication Tolerance:
1. Flat metal surfaces will display waviness commonly referred to as “oil canning”. This is caused by
steel mill tolerances and is a characteristic, not a defect, of panels manufactured from light gauge
metal. Panels are factory correctively-leveled to minimize the occurrence of “oil canning”. As such,
“oil canning” will not be accepted as cause for rejection.
D. Roll form panels and trim to required profiles in longest practical lengths.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: With Installer present:

1. Examine conditions and substrates on which metal panels are to be installed. Structural support
or substrate shall be flat and plumb to avoid panel stresses and distortion.
2. Prior to starting Work, correct defects.
B. Field Measurements:
1. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress.
2. Field measure prior to fabrication. Show recorded dimensions on shop drawings, including
locations of shop-fabricated openings.
3. If field measurements differ from drawing dimensions, notify Architect prior to fabrication.
C. Substrate Tolerances: Deviations from flat plane shall not exceed the following.
1. [1/4] inch in [20] feet.
2. [1/2] inch across building elevation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Substrate and Underlayment: Install according to approved shop drawings and metal panel
Manufacturer’s recommendations.

SECTION 074113
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Panel and Trim: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for assembly, installation and erection for
weather tight installation.
1. Install according to approved shop drawings.
2. Install panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Anchor
securely in place using clips and fasteners spaced in accordance with manufacturer’s recom-
mendations for design wind load criteria.
3. Comply with methods and recommendations of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual
for flashing configurations required.
4. Discrepancies between job site conditions and shop drawings shall be brought to the attention of
the Architect for resolution.
5. Cutting and Fitting:
a. Cut panels neat, square, and true with shearing action cutters. Torch or power saw cutting
is prohibited.
b. Openings [6] inches and larger: Shop fabricate and reinforce to maintain original load
capacity.
c. Openings less than [6] inches: Field cutting is acceptable.
6. Dissimilar Metals and Materials:
a. Where panel or trim may come in contact with dissimilar metals or treated lumber,
fabricate transition to facilitate drainage and minimize possibility of galvanic action.
Galvanic action can cause panels and trim to fail prematurely.
b. At points of contact with dissimilar metal or treated lumber, coat panel and trim with
protective paint or separate materials with a weatherproof underlayment.
c. Direct contact or run-off from CCA, ACQ, CA, or other treated lumber (outdoor wood)
or fire retardant impregnated or treated wood shakes or siding can cause panels and trim
to fail prematurely. Avoid contact with these materials.
B. Accessories: Install trims, flashings, and roofing specialties according to Drawings and manufacturer's
recommended details.
C. Sealant Installation: Apply according to approved shop drawings and SMACNA Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual recommendations.
1. Provide airtight and waterproof installation.
D. Installation Tolerances: Match dimensional tolerances of framing or substrate.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Repairs:
1. Touch up paint is not required for panels with scratches that do not expose metal.
2. Panels or flashings with finish damage exposing metal or with substrate damage shall be
replaced.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect Work as required to ensure that roofing will be without damage at Final Completion.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 074113
SECTION 074610 - FIBER CEMENT SIDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Lap siding.
2. Panel siding, typically [4] feet by [8] feet, installed horizontally.
3. Soffit panels.
4. Section 07 2726 – Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. A653 / A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
2. B221 / B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
3. C1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Fiber-Cement Sheets.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Provide detailed drawings of atypical non-standard applications of cementitious siding materials
which are outside the scope of the standard details and specifications provided by the
manufacturer.
B. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used.
C. Selection Samples:
1. For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's
full range of available colors and patterns.
D. Verification Samples:
1. For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size [4] by [6] inches ([100] mm by
[150] mm), representing actual product, color, and patterns.
1. Having minimum [5] years’ experience manufacturing components comparable to or exceeding
requirements of project.
FIBER CEMENT SIDING PAGE 1 OF 7

SECTION 074610
2. Having sufficient capacity to produce and deliver required materials without causing delays in
the Work.
1. Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity.
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store siding on edge or lay flat on a smooth level surface. Protect edges and corners from chipping.
Store sheets under cover and keep dry prior to installing.
C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in
accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 WARRANTIES
A. Product Warranty: Limited, non-pro-rated product warranty.

1. HardiePanel HZ5 panels for [30] years.
2. HardieSoffit HZ5 panels for [30] years.
B. Warranty: Limited, product warranty.

1. HardieTrim HZ and HZ5 boards for [15] years.
C. Finish Warranty: Limited product warranty against manufacturing finish defects.

1. When used for its intended purpose, properly installed and maintained according to
Manufacturer’s published installation instructions, finish will not peel, crack; and chip for a
period of [15] years from the date of Substantial Completion.
2. Finish warranty includes the coverage for labor and material.
D. Workmanship Warranty: Application limited warranty for [5] years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis – Fiber Cement Siding: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. James Hardie Building Products, Inc.
26300 La Alameda Suite 400
Mission Viejo, California 92691
Telephone: 866-274-3464
Website: (www.jameshardiecommercial.com).

SECTION 074610
2.2 FIBER CEMENT SIDING
A. Product: HardiePanel HZ5 vertical siding panels and HardieSoffit HZ5 panels requirement for
Materials:
1. Fiber-cement Siding - complies with ASTM C 1186 Type A Grade [II].
2. Fiber-cement Siding - complies with ASTM E 136 as a noncombustible material.
3. Fiber-cement Siding - complies with ASTM E 84 Flame Spread Index = [0], Smoke Developed
Index = [5].
4. National Evaluation Report No. NER 405 (BOCA, ICBO, SBCCI, IBC, IRC).
5. U S Department of Housing and Urban Development Materials Release 1263d.
B. Vertical Panel Siding: HardiePanel HZ5 siding.

1. Type: Cedarmill Vertical siding panel [4] feet by [8] feet ([1219] mm by [2438] mm).
C. Lap Siding: Artisan HZ5 Lap Siding as manufactured by James Hardie Building Products, Inc.
1. Type: Texture [7-1/4] inches (184 mm) with [6] inches (152 mm) exposure.
D. Soffit Panels: HardieSoffit HZ5 Non-Vented Soffit Panel.

1. Factory sealed on [5] sides.
2. Thickness: [1/4] inch ([6] mm).
3. Type: Textured Cedarmill, [12] inches ([305] mm) by [12] feet ([3658] mm).
E. Soffit Panels: HardieSoffit HZ5 Vented Soffit Panel.

1. Factory sealed on [5] sides.
3. Type: Textured Cedarmill, [12] inches ([305] mm) by [12] feet ([3658] mm).
F. Trim:
1. HardieTrim HZ5 boards and HardieTrim HZ boards.
2. HardiTrim HZ5 Fascia boards.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. Wood Framing Fasteners:

1. Wood Framing: [4]d common corrosion resistant nails.
2. Wood Framing: [6]d common corrosion resistant nails.
3. Wood Framing: [8]d box ring common corrosion resistant nails.
4. Wood Framing: [0.089] inch (2.2 mm) shank by [0.221] inch (5.6 mm) head by [2] inches (51
mm) corrosion resistant siding nails.
5. Wood Framing: [0.093] inch (2.4 mm) shank by [0.222] inch (5.6 mm) head by [2] inches (51
mm) corrosion resistant siding nails.
6. Wood Framing: [0.093] inch (2.4 mm) shank by [0.222] inch (5.6 mm) head by [2-1/2] inches
(64 mm) corrosion resistant siding nails.
9. Wood Framing: [0.121] inch (3 mm) shank by [0.371] inch (9.4 mm) head by 1[-1/4] inches (32
mm) corrosion resistant roofing nails.
10. Wood Framing: No. [11] gauge [1-1/4] inches (32 mm) corrosion resistant roofing nails.

SECTION 074610
B. Masonry Walls (CMU):
1. Masonry Walls: Aerico Stud Nail, ET&F ASM No.-144-125, [0.14] inch (3.6 mm) shank by
[0.30] inch (7.6 mm) head by [2] inches (51 mm) long corrosion resistant nails.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Factory Finish:
1. Product: ColorPlus Technology by James Hardie.
2. Definition: Factory applied finish; defined as a finish applied in the same facility and company
that manufactures the siding substrate.
3. Process:
a. Factory applied finish by fiber cement manufacturer in a controlled environment within
the fiber cement manufacturer's own facility utilizing a multi-coat, heat cured finish
within one manufacturing process.
b. Each finish color must have documented color match to delta E of [0.5] or better between
product lines, manufacturing lots or production runs as measured by photospectrometer
and verified by third party.
4. Protection: Factory applied finish protection such as plastic laminate that is removed once
siding is installed.
5. Accessories: Complete finishing system includes pre-packaged touch-up kit provided by fiber
cement manufacturer. Provide quantities as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Factory Finish Color for Trim, Soffit and Siding Colors:

1. As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range of available colors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until supporting work has been properly prepared.
B. If framing preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.
C. Nominal [2] inch by [4] inch (51 m by 102 mm) wood framing selected for minimal shrinkage and
complying with local building codes, including the use of water-resistive barriers or vapor barriers
where required. Minimum [1-1/2] inches (38 mm) face and straight, true, of uniform dimensions and
properly aligned.
1. Install water-resistive barriers and claddings to dry surfaces.
2. Repair any punctures or tears in the water-resistive barrier prior to the installation of the siding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for
the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Moisture Barrier: Specified in 07 2800 – Moisture Barrier.
3.3 INSTALLATION - HARDIEPLANK HZ5 LAP SIDING
A. Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

SECTION 074610
B. Starting: Install a minimum [1/4] inch (6 mm) thick lath starter strip at the bottom course of the wall.
Apply planks horizontally with minimum [1-1/4] inches (32 mm) wide laps at the top. The bottom
edge of the first plank overlaps the starter strip.
C. Allow minimum vertical clearance between the edge of siding and any other material in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Align vertical joints of the planks over framing members.
E. Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finished grade.
F. Locate splices at least [12] inches (305 mm) away from window and door openings.
G. Wind Resistance: Where a specified level of wind resistance is required Hardieplank lap siding is
installed to framing members and secured with fasteners described in Table No. [2] in National
Evaluation Service Report No. NER-405.
3.4 INSTALLATION - HARDIEPLANK HZ5 HORIZONTAL SIDING
B. Block framing between studs where HardiePanel siding horizontal joints occur.
C. Install metal Z flashing and provide a [1/4] inch ([6] mm) gap at horizontal panel joints.
D. Place fasteners no closer than [3/8] inch ([9.5] mm) from panel edges and [2] inches ([51] mm) from
panel corners.
E. Allow minimum vertical clearance between the edge of siding and any other material in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
F. Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finished grade.
G. Specific framing and fastener requirements refer to Tables 2 and 3 in National Evaluation Service
Report No. NER-405.
H. Factory Finish Touch Up: Apply touch up paint to cut edges in accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions.
1. Touch-up nicks, scrapes, and nail heads in pre-finished siding using the manufacturer's touch-up
kit pen.
2. Touch-up of nails shall be performed after application, but before plastic protection wrap is
removed to prevent spotting of touch-up finish.
3. Use touch-up paint sparingly. If large areas require touch-up, replace the damaged area with
new pre-finished siding. Match touch up color to siding color through use of manufacturer's
branded touch-up kits.
3.5 INSTALLATION – HARDIESOFFIT HZ5 PANELS

1. Panels may be installed as soffit or ceiling over wood or steel framing; [20] gauge ([33] mils)
minimum to [16] gauge ([54] mils), complying with local building code. Install soffits to
nominal [2] x [4] framing members spaced a maximum of [24] inches ([610] mm) on center
with the long dimension perpendicular to the rafter or joist framing.

SECTION 074610
2. Support edges by framing.
3. Install water barriers and air barriers as specified in 07 2500 – Weather Barrier.
4. Ensure gutters have end caps. Maintain a minimum [1] inch ([25] mm) gap between end caps
and siding and trim.
5. Install kickout flashing at roof-wall junctions per manufacturer's instructions.
6. Additional framing may be needed to ensure proper fastening.
7. Position vent holes toward outside of eave for optimal airflow.
8. Vents can be installed into non-vented soffit.
9. Insect screen can be installed using construction adhesive.
10. Fastener Positioning: Position fasteners [3/8] inches ([9.5] mm) from panel edges and no closer
than [2] inches ([51] mm) away from corners when using soffit greater than [12] inch ([305]
mm) wide and no closer than [1] inch ([25] mm) away from corners when using soffit that is
less than or equal to [12] inch ([305] mm) wide.
11. Jointing Methods: Install panels in moderate contact at ends, provide PVC or metal jointers,
battens or leave appropriate gap and caulk.
12. Drive fasteners perpendicular to siding and framing.
13. Fastener heads should fit snug against siding; no air space.
3.6 INSTALLATION – HARDITRIM HZ5 BOARDS
A. Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install flashing
around all wall openings.
B. Fasten through trim into structural framing or code complying sheathing. Fasteners must penetrate
minimum [3/4] inch (19 mm) or full thickness of sheathing. Additional fasteners may be required to
ensure adequate security.
C. Place fasteners no closer than [3/4] inch (19 mm) and no further than [2] inches (51 mm) from side
edge of trim board and no closer than [1] inch (25 mm) from end. Fasten maximum [16] inches (406
mm) on center.
D. Maintain clearance between trim and adjacent finished grade.
E. Trim inside corner with a single board trim both side of corner.
F. Outside Corner Board: Attach Trim on both sides of corner with [16] gage corrosion resistant finish
nail [1/2] inch (13 mm) from edge spaced [16] inches (406 mm) apart, weather cut each end spaced
minimum [12] inches (305 mm) apart.
G. Allow [1/8] inch gap between trim and siding.
H. Seal gap with high quality, paint-able caulk.
I. Shim frieze board as required to align with corner trim.
J. Fasten through overlapping boards. Do not nail between lap joints.
K. Overlay siding with single board of outside corner board then align second corner board to outside
edge of first corner board. Do not fasten HardieTrim boards to HardieTrim boards.
L. Shim frieze board as required to align with corner trim.
M. Install HardieTrim Fascia boards to rafter tails or to sub fascia.

SECTION 074610
3.7 FINISHING
A. Finish factory primed siding with a minimum of one coat of high quality [100] percent acrylic or latex
or oil based exterior grade paint within [180] days of installation. Follow paint manufacturer's written
product recommendation and written application instructions.
3.8 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION

SECTION 074610
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Miscellaneous flashing and trim.
2. Edge flashing.
3. Gutters and brackets.
4. Downspouts.
4. Section 07 4646 – Mineral Fiber Cement Siding.
1.2 REFERENCES

2. A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless-Steel Sheet,
3. A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by
the Hot-Dip Process.
4. B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
5. B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
6. B749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products.
B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):

2. 621 - Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated
Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates.
C. American National Standards Institute/Single Ply Roofing Institute (ANSI/SPRI):

1. ES-1 - Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems.
D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Manufacturer’s Association International (SMACNA):

1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PAGE 1 OF 8

SECTION 076200
B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details.
Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.
3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in
Project.
4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.
5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners,
cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
6. Include details of termination points and assemblies.
7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of
expansion and contraction from fixed points.
8. Include details of roof-penetration flashing.
9. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counter
flashings as applicable.
10. Include details of typical and non-typical conditions and special conditions.
11. Include details of connections to adjoining work.
12. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches (1:5).
C. Samples – For Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory applied
finishes.
D. Samples – For Verification: For each type of exposed finish.

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: [12] inches ([300] mm) long by actual width of unit, including finished
seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.
2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications:
[12] inches ([300] mm) long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed
accessories.
3. Unit-Type Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample.
4. Anodized Aluminum Samples: [3] inch by [4] inch samples to show full range to be expected
for each color required.
E. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
F. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance
manuals.
G. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
A. Provide sheet metal flashing and trim conforming with the following:
1. Recommended practices contained in Sheet Metal and Air Conditions Contractors National
Association, Inc., (SMACNA). the Aluminum Association and Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual, Aluminum Construction Manual. Specifications for Aluminum Sheet Metal Work in
Building Construction, current editions.
2. Specified requirements of the manufacturer of the metal.
3. Provide welding complying with American Welding Society Structural Welding Code for Steel,
AWS D1.1.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing
and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project with a record of
successful in-service performance as evidenced but not less than [5] consecutive years’ experience in

SECTION 076200
sheet metal fabrication and installation. Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal
flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance.
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause
staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from
uncured concrete and masonry.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and
high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.
A. Coordinate work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each
installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials
and finishes.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows
evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than [5] Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. [8] rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, blister, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: [20] years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture,
fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall
not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual"
and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown
unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to
prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of
connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due
to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change: [120] deg F ([67] deg C), ambient; [180] deg F ([100] deg C), material
surfaces.
2.2 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying
strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

SECTION 076200
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish
required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth,
flat surface.
1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than
[70] percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to
exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
instructions.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors
3. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or
polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film
thickness of [0.5] mil ([0.013] mm).
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as
recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and
other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of
primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or
factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under
heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being
fastened.
2. Fasteners: Stainless steel screw-type fasteners. Nail-in or driven type fasteners shall not be
allowed.
C. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by

aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.
D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.
E. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
2.4 FABRICATION - GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and
recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal
thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to
greatest extent possible.
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible.

SECTION 076200
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a
tolerance of [1/4] inch in [20] feet ([6] mm in [6] m) on slope and location lines indicated on
Drawings and within [1/8] inch ([3] mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching
profiles.
C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than [1] inch ([25] mm) deep,
filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for
proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.
E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from
compatible, noncorrosive metal.
F. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric
sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where
necessary for strength.
G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
2.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other
accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections. Furnish flat-stock
gutter brackets and flat-stock gutter spacers and straps fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size
recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with thickness not less than twice the gutter thickness.
Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories
from same metal as gutters. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.
1. Gutter Profile: Style [A] according to cited sheet metal standard.
2. Expansion Joints: Butt type with cover plate.
3. Accessories: Continuous, removable leaf screen with sheet metal frame and hardware cloth
screen.
4. Gutter Girth up to [15] Inches ([380] mm): Fabricate from the following materials:
a. Aluminum: [0.032] inch ([0.812] mm) thick.
B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with mitered

elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anchors. Shop fabricate
elbows.
1. Manufactured Hanger Style: [Fig 1-35B] according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual."
2. Fabricate from the following materials:
a. Aluminum: [0.024] inch ([0.61] mm)] thick.
2.6 STEEP-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Aluminum: [0.032] inch ([0.81] mm) thick.
B. Eave and Rake Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:


SECTION 076200
C. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Aluminum: [0.032] inch (0.81 mm) thick.
D. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.
3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing
substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place,
with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators,
sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams
with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than [12] inches ([300] mm) apart. Attach each cleat with at least two
fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and
tool marks.
5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated
wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact
surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal
manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim
with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious
construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement
joints at maximum of [10] feet (3 m) with no joints within [24] inches ([600] mm) of corner or
intersection.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than [1] inch ([25] mm) deep,
filled with sealant concealed within joints.
2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

SECTION 076200
D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than [1-1/4] inches
([32] mm) for nails and not less than [3/4] inch ([19] mm) for wood screws substrate not less than
recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize
possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.
F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.

1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members
not less than [1] inch ([25] mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When
ambient temperature at time of installation is between [40] and [70] deg F ([4] and [21] deg C),
set joint members for [50] percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for
installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures
below [40] deg F ([4] deg C).
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 9200 - Joint
Sealers.
G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.
3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system according
to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter
flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.
B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach
gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. Provide end closures and seal watertight
with sealant. Slope to downspouts.
1. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter.
2. Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to continuous eave or apron flashing.
3. Anchor gutter with gutter brackets spaced not more than [36] inches apart to roof deck, unless
otherwise indicated, and loosely lock to front gutter bead.
4. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, [50] feet apart.
Install expansion-joint caps.
5. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, removable for cleaning
gutters.
C. Downspouts: Join sections with [1-1/2] inch ([38] mm) telescoping joints.
1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers
at top and bottom and at approximately [60] inches ([1500] mm) o.c.
2. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building.
3. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system.
3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal
manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed
fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints,
and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.
B. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert

counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing [4]
inches ([100] mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of [4] inches ([100] mm).

SECTION 076200
Secure in waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant
unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4
inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch
(3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
A. Remove all scrapes and dirt immediately upon completion of work.
B. Clean all fabrications of surface dirt, oils, grease, weld or solder residue and other surface
contaminates that would affect the application of finish primers and paints.
C. After installation cover and protect exposed portions of the fabrications from damage.
D. Just prior to final acceptance, remove protective coverings and clean surfaces with plain water, or if
required with a solution of water and mild household detergent as recommended by manufacturer of
finish coating system.
E. Touch-up finish coat system of all imperfection as recommended by manufacturer of finish coating
system. Remove and replace any component that cannot be successfully repaired at no additional cost
to the Owner.
F. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
G. Clean off excess sealants.
H. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are
installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion
of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as
recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim
in clean condition during construction.
I. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 076200
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Ridge vents for metal roof panels.
3. Section 07 3010 – Roofing Underlayment.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIRMENTS
A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced
movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture,
fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

3. Installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to other work.
Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.
C. Sample: Submit actual product specified or sample representing actual product for Architect’s approval.
Actual sample, if approved, may be used in the finished work.
D. Warranty: Sample of warranty.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company having a minimum of five [5] years’ experience manufacturing
similar products.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company having a minimum of three [3] years’ experience installing similar
products.
1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Convene minimum two weeks prior to starting work of this Section.
A. Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging bearing the brand name and
manufacturer's identification until ready for installation.
ROOF ACCESSORIES PAGE 1 OF 3

SECTION 077200
B. Handling: Handle materials to avoid damage.
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by
manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside
manufacturer's recommended limits.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND COORDINATION
A. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of
construction progress.
B. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing installation and interfacing and
adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.9 WARRANTIES
A. Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roof
accessories that fail in materials or workmanship.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers – Roof Accessories: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. Custom Metal Components, Inc.
10617 U S Highway 377
Dublin, Texas 76446
Telephone: (855) 918-5001
Website:(www.ezventclosure.com).
2.2 RIDGE VENT
A. Model: EZ Vent-N-Closure.
B. Type: Water tight Two-In-One Vent & Closure Ridge Vent.
C. Material: [26] gauge Galvalume SS Grade [50], AZ55 Acrylic.
D. Size / Profile: [3/4] inch profile.
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous
items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
B. Foam Closure: Type recommended by manufacturer to suit application.
C. Fasteners: Type recommended by manufacturer to suit application.
D. Joint Sealant: Type recommended by manufacturer to suit application.
E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

SECTION 077200
F. Other Materials: Provide other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper
installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the
substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements to provide performance as
designed and to maintain warranties offered including water-tightness.
B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with
each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
3.4 PROTECTION AND REPAIR
C. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup
or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 077200
SECTION 077253 - SNOW GUARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Snow guards for metal roofs.
2. Non-penetrating attachment system.
3. Color-matched metal strips.
2. Section 07 4113 - Metal Roof Panels
3. Section 07 7255 - Roof Accessory Attachment System.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Aluminum Association (AA):

1. Aluminum Standards and Data, 2003 Edition.

1. B85-03 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings.
2. B221-04a - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
A. Attachment system to provide attachment to standing seam metal roofs:

1. With only minor dimpling of panel seams.
2. Without penetrations through roof seams or panels.
3. Without use of sealers or adhesives.
4. Without voiding roof warranty.
B. Loading: Design snow guard system to resist minimum in-service vector load determined in
accordance with Section [7] of ASCE 7.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include product description and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of snow guards on roof and attachment spacing.
C. Samples: Clamp samples.

1. [24] inch long cross member samples including color-matched metal strip, splice connector, and
other hardware.
D. Test results: Results of product load testing, issued by a recognized independent testing laboratory,
showing load-to-failure of clamp.
E. Certification: Installer's certification that snow guard system was installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings.
SNOW GUARDS PAGE 1 OF 3

SECTION 077253
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty providing coverage against defects in materials and
workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis – Snow Guards: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. S-5 Attachment Solutions
8655 Table Butte Road
Colorado Springs, Colorado 80908
Telephone: 888-825-3432
Website:(www.s-5.com).
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Clamps:
1. Manufactured from 6061-T6 aluminum extrusions conforming to ASTM B221 or aluminum
castings conforming to ASTM B85 and to AA Aluminum Standards and Data.
2. Model: No. S-5-U.
3. Clamp: Standard two screw.
4. Set crews: [300] Series stainless steel, [18] - [8] alloy, [3/8] inch diameter, with round nose
point.
5. Attachment Bolts: [300] Series stainless steel, [18] - [8] alloy, [10] mm diameter, with flat
washers.
B. Cross Members:
1. Manufactured from 6061-T6 alloy and temper aluminum extrusions conforming to ASTM B221
and AA Aluminum Standards and Data.
2. Receptacle in face to receive color-matched metal strips.
3. Provide splice connectors ensuring alignment and structural continuity at end joints.
C. Color Strips: Same material and finish as roof panels; obtained from roof panel manufacturer.
D. Snow and Ice Clips:

1. Aluminum, with rubber foot, [3] inches wide, snap-locking to cross members.
2. Model: SnoClip [II].
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to beginning installation, verify that:

1. Panel seaming is complete.
2. Panel attachment is sufficient to withstand loads applied by snow guard system.
3. Installation will not impede roof drainage.

SECTION 077253
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean areas to receive attachments; remove loose and foreign matter that could interfere with
installation or performance.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings.
B. Place clamps at maximum [32] inches on center or as required by in-service loads.
C. Place clamps in straight, aligned rows.
D. Place both setscrews on same side of clamp.
E. Tighten setscrews to manufacturer's recommended torque.
F. Insert color-matched metal strips into cross members.
G. Attach cross members to clamps; tighten bolts to manufacturer's recommended torque.
H. Install splice connectors at cross member end joints.
I. Do not cantilever cross members more than 3 inches beyond last clamp at ends.
J. Install one snow and ice clip per panel between panel seams.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 077253
SECTION 077255 - ROOF ACCESSORY ATTACHMENT SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Roof accessory attachment system for standing seam metal roofs.
2. Section 07 4113 - Metal Roof Panels
3. Section 07 7253 - Snow Guards
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Aluminum Association (AA):

1. Aluminum Standards and Data, 2003 Edition.

1. B85-03 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings.
2. B221-04a - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
A. Roof accessory attachment system to provide attachment to standing seam metal roofs:
1. With only minor dimpling of panel seams.
2. With only round point setscrews.
3. Without penetrations through roof seams or panels.
4. Without use of sealers or adhesives.
5. Without voiding roof warranty.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include product description and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of snow guards on roof and attachment spacing.
C. Samples: Clamp samples.

1. [24] inch long cross member samples including color-matched metal strip, splice connector, and
other hardware.
D. Test results: Results of product load testing, issued by a recognized independent testing laboratory,
showing load-to-failure of clamp.
E. Certification: Installer's certification that snow guard system was installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings.
A. Load Testing:
1. Provide product tensile load testing performed by a recognized independent testing laboratory.
ROOF ACCESSORY ATTACHMENT SYSTEM PAGE 1 OF 3

SECTION 077255
2. Test loading to failure on mockup of specific panel proposed for this Project, performed in
direction normal to seams. Perform three tensile tests for each specimen; report average of three
test.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty providing coverage against defects in materials and
workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis: Contract Documents are based on products by:

1. S-5 Attachment Solutions
8655 Table Butte Road
Colorado Springs, Colorado 80908
Telephone: 888-825-3432
Website:(www.s-5.com).
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Standard Two Screw Clamps:

1. Manufactured from 6061-T6 aluminum extrusions conforming to ASTM B221 or aluminum
castings conforming to ASTM B85 and to AA Aluminum Standards and Data.
2. Clamp Model: No. S-5-U.
3. Set Screws: [300] Series stainless steel, [18] - [8] alloy, [3/8] inch diameter, with round nose
point, two per clamp.
4. Attachment Bolts: [300] Series stainless steel, [18] - [8] alloy, [10] mm diameter, with flat
washers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to beginning installation, verify that:

1. Panel seaming is complete.
2. Panel attachment is sufficient to withstand loads transferred from clamps.
3. Installation will not impede roof drainage.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean seam areas to receive clamps; remove loose and foreign matter that could interfere with
installation or performance.
3.3 CLAMP INSTALLATION - STANDING SEAM ROOFS
A. Install clamps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings.
B. Place clamps in neat, straight rows, evenly spaced.

SECTION 077255
C. Tighten setscrews to manufacturer's recommended torque.
D. Randomly test setscrew torque using calibrated torque wrench.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 077255
SECTION 078400 - FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Penetration Firestopping:

1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.
2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.
4. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.
5. Joints in smoke barriers.
2. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
5. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants.
6. Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board.
7. Section 22 0000 – Plumbing.
8. Section 23 0000 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC).
9. Section 26 0000 – Electrical.
10. Section 27 0000 – Communications.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. E 814, - Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops.
2. E 2307 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems
Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test Apparatus.
3. E 2174 - Standard Practice for On-site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops.
4. D6904 – Standard Practice for Resistance to Wind Driven Rain for Exterior Coatings
Applied on Masonry.
5. C679 - Standard Test Method for Tack-Free Time of Elastomeric Sealants.
6. E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint System
B. Underwriters Laboratory (UL):

1. 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
2. 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
3. UL Fire Resistance Directory:
a. Firestop Devices (XHJI).
b. Fire Resistance Ratings (BXRH).
c. Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ).
d. Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW).
e. Forming Materials (XHKU).
f. Joint Systems (XHBN).
g. Perimeter Fire Containment Systems (XHDG).
h. Alternate Systems: “Omega Point Laboratories Directory” (updated annually).
B. International Firestop Council (IFC):

1. Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgments.
FIRESTOPPING PAGE 1 OF 8
SECTION 078400
C. International Building Code (IBC 2012).
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 101 - Life Safety Code.
2. 70 - National Electric Code.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Schedule: For each penetration and joint firestopping system. Include location, illustration of
firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1. Provide a "use matrix" indicating manufacturer and UL label system for each condition on the
drawings or in the specification.
2. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing
and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration or joint firestopping system,
submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration or joint firestopping
system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-
resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal.
C. Product Test Reports: For each penetration or joint firestopping system, for tests performed by a
qualified testing agency.
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified
Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."
B. Provide products for penetration or joint firestopping systems for a single manufacturer throughout the
project.
C. For those firestop applications that exist for which no qualified tested system is available through a
manufacturer, an engineering judgment derived from similar qualified tested system designs or other
tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to
installation. Engineering judgment documents must follow requirements set forth by the International
Firestop Council.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration or joint firestopping system when ambient or
substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration or joint firestopping system
manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Install and cure penetration and joint firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings, penetrating items and joints to ensure that penetration and joint
firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate

penetration firestopping systems.
SECTION 078400
C. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate joint firestopping systems.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1. Perform penetration and joint firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" and "Joint
Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following
requirements: a. Penetration and joint firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a
qualified testing agency.
a. UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
2.2 PENETERATION FIRE STOPPING SYSTEMS
A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other
gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping
systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with
penetrating items if any.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. 3M Fire Protection Products.
b. Hilti, Inc.
c. Nelson Firestop Products.
d. Specified Technologies, Inc.
B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined

per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of [0.01] inch wg
([2.49] Pa).
1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per
ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of [0.01] inch wg ([2.49]
Pa).
1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
D. W-ratings are not required by the IBC but may be needed if water leakage is a concern.
1. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping systems showing no evidence of water leakage
when tested according to UL 1479.
E. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per UL
1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of [0.30] inch wg ([74.7] Pa).
1. L-Rating: Not exceeding [5.0] cfm/sq. ft. ([0.025] cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration opening at
and no more than [50] cfm ([0.024] cu. m/s) cumulative total for any [100] sq. ft. ([9.3] sq. m)
at both ambient and elevated temperatures.
F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than
[25] and [450], respectively, per ASTM E 84.
SECTION 078400
G. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following
limits for VOC content:
1. Sealants: [250] g/L.
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: [250] g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: [775] g/L.
H. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install
fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration
firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for
conditions indicated.
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials.
2. Substrate primers.
3. Collars.
4. Steel sleeves.
2.3 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A. Joint Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and
maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which joint firestopping systems
are installed. Joint firestopping systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing
their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.
B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide joint firestopping systems with

ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079.
following:
b. Hilti, Inc. c. Nelson Firestop Products.
c. Specified Technologies, Inc.
2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor, or
roof in or between which it is installed.
C. Joints at Exterior Curtain Wall / Floor Intersections: Provide joint firestopping systems with rating
determined per ASTM E 2307.
following:
b. Hilti, Inc.
2. F-Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floor assembly.
D. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per UL 2079
based on testing at a positive pressure differential of [0.30] inch wg ([74.7] Pa).
following:
b. Hilti, Inc.
2. L-Rating: Not exceeding [5.0] cfm/ft. ([0.00775] cu. m/s x m) of joint at both ambient and
elevated temperatures.
E. Exposed Joint Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and
450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
SECTION 078400
F. VOC Content: Fire-resistive joint system sealants shall comply with the following limits for VOC
content:
1. Architectural Sealants: [250] g/L.
G. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming
materials, that are needed to install elastomeric fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use
only components specified by joint firestopping system manufacturer and approved by the qualified
testing agency for conditions indicated.
2.4 FILL MATERIALS
A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and
consisting of an outer sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a flange attached to one end of the sleeve
for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.
B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during
exposure to moisture.
C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent
material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent

elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.
E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or

inorganic fibers.
F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on
one side.
G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers
and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking,
homogeneous mortar.
H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a
combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where
exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily
removed.
I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure
in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam.
J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants.
2.5 MIXING
A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply
with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of
materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers,
SECTION 078400
mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with
optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, joint configuration, substrates, and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration and joint firestopping systems, clean out openings and
joints immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following
requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that
could interfere with adhesion of penetration and joint firestopping materials.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of
developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles
remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond
with elastomeric fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
4. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's

recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and
migration onto exposed surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install penetration and joint firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written
installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their
application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to
achieve fire ratings.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming
materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping.
C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and penetrating items
to achieve required fire-resistance ratings.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed joints, by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth,
uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
SECTION 078400
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the
words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less
than [3] inches ([76] mm) high and with minimum [0.375] inch ([9.5] mm) strokes.
1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at [15] feet ([4.57] m) from
end of wall and at intervals not exceeding [30] feet ([9.14] m).
2. Coordinate with Life Safety Plans.
3. Paint: As specified in Section 09 9100 - Painting.
B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or plastic
labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within [6] inches ([150] mm) of
penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating
items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives
capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following
information on labels:
1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping”.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Product Name / Catalog Number,
4. [F] rating and [T] rating (if available).
C. Joint Identification: Identify joint firestopping systems with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach
labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within [6] inches ([150] mm) of joint edge so labels are
visible to anyone seeking to remove or joint firestopping system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-
adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels
are placed. Include the following information on labels:
1. The words "Warning - Joint Firestopping - Do Not Disturb”.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Product Name / Catalog Number,
4. [F] rating and [T] rating (if available).
A. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Contractor to ensure a manufacturer’s direct representative is on-site

during initial installation of firestop systems to train appropriate contractor personnel in proper selection
and installation procedures. Training will be done per manufacturer’s written recommendations
published in their literature and drawing details. During installation, contractor shall have
manufacturer’s representative provide periodic visual observations and written documentation of the
results.
B. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E
2174 for penetrations and ASTM E 2393 for joints.
C. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or penetrating of
existing firestop systems already installed by other trades.
D. Where deficiencies are found or penetration or joint firestopping system is damaged or removed
because of testing, repair or replace penetration and joint firestopping system to comply with
requirements.
E. Proceed with enclosing penetration and joint firestopping systems with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
SECTION 078400
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings and joints as the Work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by firestopping system manufacturers and that do
not damage materials in which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that
penetration and joint firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and
remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems
complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 078400
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Silicone joint sealants.
2. Urethane joint sealants.
3. Latex joint sealants.
4. Solvent-release-curing joint sealants.
5. Acoustical joint sealants.
6. Preformed seals.
10. Section 32 1313 – Concrete Paving.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. C510 - Standard Test Method for Staining and Color Change of Single- or Multicomponent
Joint Sealants.
2. C 661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric Type Sealants by Means
of a Durometer.
3. C 719 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under
Cyclic Movement (Hockman Cycle).
4. C 794 - Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
5. C 834 - Specification for Latex Sealants.
6. C 920 - Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
7. C 1087 - Test Method for Determining Compatibility of Liquid-Applied Sealants with
Accessories Used in Structural Glazing Systems.
8. C 1193 - Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
9. C 1247 - Standard Test Method for Durability of Sealants Exposed to Continuous Immersion in
Liquids.
10. C 1248 - Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants.
11. C 1311 - Specification for Solvent Release Sealants.
12. C 1330 - Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid Applied Sealants.
13. D 412 - Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers—Tension.
14. D 624 - Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers.
15. D 2203 - Standard Test Method for Staining from Sealants.
16. D 2240 - Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness.
JOINT SEALERS PAGE 1 OF 10

SECTION 079200
B. National Science Foundation International (NSF):
1. Standard 51 - Food Equipment Materials.
C. Waterproofing and Restoration Institute (SWRI):

1. SWRI Validation Program.
D. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):

1. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
E. U. S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA):

1. 21 CFR 177.2600 - Title 21 Part 177 Indirect Food Additives: Polymers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of joint sealant product specified, including:
2. Standard drawings illustrating manufacturer's recommended sealant joint profiles and
dimensions applicable to Project.
B. Joint Sealant Schedule:

1. Indicate joint sealant location, joint sealant type, manufacturer and product name, and color, for
each application. Utilize joint sealant designations included in this Section.
C. Samples for Color Selection: For each joint sealant type.
D. Samples for Verification: For each exterior joint sealant product, for each color selected.
E. Warranty: Sample of unexecuted manufacturer and installer special warranties.
F. Field quality control adhesion test reports.
A. Installer Qualifications: Company with minimum of three years’ experience specializing in work of
this section, employing applicators trained for application of joint sealants required for this project,
with record of successful completion of projects of similar scope, and approved by manufacturer.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide exterior joint sealants by a single manufacturer responsible for
testing of Project substrates to verify compatibility and adhesion of joint sealants.
C. Pre-construction Manufacturer Laboratory Compatibility, Staining, and Adhesion Testing: Submit

samples of each substrate or adjacent material that will be in contact with or affect joint sealants.
Current manufacturer test data of products on matching substrates will be acceptable.
1. Adhesion: Use ASTM C 719 and ASTM C 794 to determine requirements for joint preparation,
including cleaning and priming.
2. Compatibility: Use ASTM C 1087 to determine materials forming joints and adjacent materials
do not adversely affect sealant materials and do not affect sealant color.
3. Stain Testing: Use ASTM C 510, ASTM C 1248, or ASTM D 2203 to verify non-staining
characteristics of proposed sealants on specified substrates.
4. Pre-construction manufacturer laboratory testing is not required when sealant manufacturer can
furnish data acceptable to Architect based on previous testing for materials matching those of
the Work.

SECTION 079200
D. Pre-construction Field-Adhesion Testing: Prior to installing joint sealants, field test adhesion to joint
substrates using ASTM C 1193 Method [A]. Verify adhesion is adequate. Modify joint preparation
recommendations for failed joints and re-test. Submit written test report.
A. Accept materials on site in manufacturer's unopened original packaging.
B. Store primers and sealants in dry location with ambient temperature range of [60] to [80] deg. F ([15]
deg. to [27] deg. C).
A. Do not install primers or sealants when atmospheric temperatures or joint surface temperatures are
less than [40] deg. F ([4] deg. C).
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule work so waterproofing, water repellents and preservative finishes are installed after sealants,
unless sealant manufacturer approves otherwise in writing.
B. Ensure sealants are cured before covering with other materials.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint sealant manufacturer
agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that demonstrate deterioration or adhesive or
cohesive failure under normal use within warranty period specified.
1. Warranty Period for Silicone Sealants: [5] years date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Installer’s Warranty: Original statement on Installer's letterhead in which Installer agrees to
repair or replace joint sealants that demonstrate deterioration or failure within warranty period
specified.
1. Warranty Period: [2] years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design – Joint Sealers: Contract documents are based on products by:
1. Tremco
3735 Green Road
Beachwood, Ohio 44122
Telephone: 800-321-7906
Website: (www.tremcosealants.com).
2.2 MATERIALS – GENERAL
A. VOC Content for Interior Applications: Provide sealants and sealant primers complying with the
following VOC content limits per [40] CFR [59], Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1. Architectural Sealants: [250] g/L.

SECTION 079200
B. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants and accessory materials that are compatible with one another,
and with adjacent materials, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer using ASTM C 1087 testing and
related experience.
C. Joint Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other specified requirements for each joint
sealant.
D. Stain Test Characteristics: Where sealants are required to be non-staining, provide sealants tested per
ASTM C 1248 as non-staining on porous joint substrates specified.
E. Food Contact Suitability: Where sealants are required to be suitable for contact with food provide
sealants complying with [21] CFR 177.2600.
2.3 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single-Component, Non-sag, Non-Staining, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920,

Type [S], Grade [NS], Class [100] / [50], Use NT; SWRI validated.
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc., Spectrem 1.
2. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: [1] g/L maximum.
3. Volatile Organic Emissions (VOE): Not greater than Greenguard Children & Schools
Certification emissions levels.
4. Staining, ASTM C 1248: None on concrete, marble, granite, limestone, and brick.
5. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard line of not less than [12] colors.
B. Single-Component, Non-sag, Non-Staining, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920,

Type [S], Grade [NS], Class [50], Use NT; SWRI validated.
2. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 50 g/L maximum.
C. Single-Component, Non-sag, Non-Staining, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920,

Type [S], Grade [NS], Class [50], Use NT.
2. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 20 g/L maximum.
D. Multi-Component, Non-sag, Non-Staining, Field-Tintable Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant:

ASTM C 920, Type [S], Grade [NS], Class [50], Use NT.
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc., Spectrem 4-TS.

SECTION 079200
E. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type [S],
Grade [NS], Class [25], Use NT.
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc., Tremsil 200 Sanitary.
4. Color: Clear.
2.4 URETHANE SEALANTS
A. Single-Component, Non-sag, Moisture-Cure, Polyurethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type [S],
Grade [NS], Class [50], Use [NT]; Greenguard certified.
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc., Dymonic 100.
4. Tensile Strength ASTM D412: [350] to [450] psi.
5. Percent Elongation ASTM D412: [800] to [900] %
6. Modulus at 100% ASTM D412: [75] to [85] psi.
7. Tear Strength ASTM D412: [65] to [75] psi.
8. Smoke Development ASTM E84: [5].
B. Single-Component, Non-sag, Moisture-Cure, Polyurethane Hybrid Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920,

Type [S], Grade [NS], Class [35], Use NT; Greenguard certified.
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc., Dymonic FC.
2. Extrusion Rate ASTM C1183: [93.1] mL/min.
3. Weight Loss ASTM C1246: Pass.
4. Tack Free Time ASTM C679: [3] to [4] hr.
C. Single-Component, Nonsag, Polyurethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type [S], Grade [NS],
Class [25], Use NT.
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc., Vulkem 116.
D. Immersible, Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic Grade Polyurethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920,
Type [S], Grade [P], Class [50], Use [T] and [I].
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc., Vulkem 45 SSL.
E. Immersible, Multi-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade Polyurethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920,

Type [M], Grade [P], Class [35], Use [T], [O], and [I].
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc., Vulkem 445SSL.
2. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 412: [250] psi ([1.7] MPa), at [100] percent elongation.
3. Tear Strength, ASTM D 412: [35] pli ([6.1] kN/m).

SECTION 079200
4. Adhesion to Concrete, After Water, ASTM C 794: [28] pli ([4.4] kN/m).
5. Hardness, ASTM C 661: [40] durometer Shore [A], minimum.
6. Accelerated Weathering, ASTM C 793: Pass.
8. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard line of [70] colors.
F. Multi-Component, Non-sag, Polyurethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type [M], Grade [NS],
Class [50], Use [I].
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc., Dymeric 240 FC.
2.5 LATEX SEALANTS
A. Latex Joint Sealant: Siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type [OP], Grade [NF].
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc., Tremflex 834.
4. Color: White, paintable.
2.6 SOLVENT RELEASE CURING JOINT SEALANTS
A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealant: ASTM C 1311.

1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc., Tremco Butyl Sealant.
3. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANTS
A. Acoustical / Curtainwall Sealant: Single-component, non-hardening, non-sag, paintable synthetic

rubber-tested to reduce airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building
construction as demonstrated by testing of similar assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc., Tremco Acoustical/Curtainwall Sealant.
3. Color: White, paintable.
2.8 PRE-FORMED SEALS
A. Pre-Formed Silicone Joint Seals: Manufacturer's standard seal consisting of precured low-modulus
silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit applications indicated on Drawings, combined with a neutral-curing
liquid silicone sealant for bonding seals to substrates.
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, Inc.; Spectrem SimpleSeal.
B. Pre-Formed Foam Joint Seals: Manufacturer's standard preformed, pre-compressed, open-cell foam
seal manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of [10] lb/cu. ft. ([160] kg/cu. m),
impregnated with water-repellent agent. Provide factory-produced pre-compressed sizes selected to fit
joint widths; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive.
1. Basis of Design Product: Tremco, illmod 600.
2. Thermal conductivity ASTM C 518: [.28] – [0.30] BTU-in/hr-°F-ft2.
3. Thermal resistance ASTM C 518: [3.3] – [3.6] hr-°F-ft2/BTU.

SECTION 079200
4. Flame spread ASTM E84: [0].
5. Smoke development ASTM E84: [5].
8. Color: Black or Grey.
2.9 JOINT SEALANT ACCESSORIES
A. Cylindrical Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type [B] non-absorbent, bi-cellular material with
surface skin, or Type [O] open-cell polyurethane, as recommended by sealant manufacturer for
application.
B. Bond Breaker Tape: Polymer tape compatible with joint sealant and adjacent materials and
recommended by sealant manufacturer.
C. Joint Substrate Primers: Substrate primer recommended by sealant manufacturer for application.
D. Cleaners: Chemical cleaners acceptable to joint sealant manufacturer.
E. Masking tape: Non-staining, non-absorbent tape product compatible with joint sealants and adjacent
joint surfaces.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joint profiles and surfaces to determine if work is ready to receive joint sealants. Verify joint
dimensions are adequate for development of sealant movement capability. Verify joint surfaces are
clean, dry, and adequately cured. Proceed with joint sealant work once conditions meet sealant
manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Joint Surface Cleaning: Clean joints prior to installing joint sealants using materials and methods
recommended by sealant manufacturer. Comply with ASTM C 1193.
1. Remove curing compounds, laitance, form-release agents, dust, and other contaminants.
2. Clean nonporous and porous surfaces utilizing chemical cleaners acceptable to sealant
manufacturer.
3. Protect elements surrounding the Work of this section from damage or disfiguration. Apply
masking tape to adjacent surfaces when required to prevent damage to finishes from sealant
installation.
3.3 SEALANT APPLICATION
A. Sealant and Primer Installation Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1193 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Joint Backing: Select joint backing materials recommended by sealant manufacturer as compatible
with sealant and adjacent materials. Install backing material at depth required to produce profile of
joint sealant allowing optimal sealant movement.
1. Install joint backing to maintain the following joint ratios:
a. Joints up to [1/2] inch ([13] mm) wide: [1] : [1] width to depth ratio.

SECTION 079200
b. Joints greater than [1/2] inch ([13] mm) wide: [2] : [1] width to depth ratio; maximum
[1/2] inch ([13] mm) joint depth.
2. Install bond breaker tape over substrates when sealant backings are not used.
C. Masking: Mask adjacent surfaces to prevent staining or damage by contact with sealant or primer.
D. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates when recommended by sealant manufacturer or when indicated
by preconstruction testing or experience. Apply recommended primer using sealant manufacturer's
recommended application techniques.
E. Liquid Sealant Application: Install sealants using methods recommended by sealant manufacturer, in
depths recommended for application. Apply in continuous operation from bottom to top of joint
vertically and horizontally in a single direction. Apply using adequate pressure to fill and seal joint
width.
1. Tool sealants immediately with appropriately shaped tool to force sealants against joint backing
and joint substrates, eliminating voids and ensuring full contact.
2. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
3. Tool exposed joint surface concave using tooling agents approved by sealant manufacturer for
application.
F. Cleaning: Remove excess sealant using materials and methods approved by sealant manufacturer that
will not damage joint substrate materials.
1. Remove masking tape immediately after tooling joint without disturbing seal.
2. Remove excess sealant from surfaces while still uncured.
G. Installation of Acoustical Sealant: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal

construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations on both sides of
assemblies with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with
manufacturer's written recommendations.
H. Installation of Preformed Seals: Install seals immediately after removing protective wrapping. Do not
stretch or misshape material. Place seals to provide continuity at ends, turns, and intersections. Apply
heat to sealant when recommended by sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Perform adhesion tests in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and
with ASTM C 1193, Method [A].
1. Perform [5] tests for the first [1000] feet ([300] m)] of joint length for each kind of sealant and
joint substrate, and one test for each [1000] feet ([300] m)] of joint length thereafter or [1] test
per each floor per building elevation, minimum.
2. For sealant applied between dissimilar materials, test both sides of joint.
B. Remove sealants failing adhesion test, clean substrates, reapply sealants, and re-test. Test adjacent
sealants to failed sealants.
C. Submit report of field adhesion testing to Architect indicating tests, locations, dates, results, and
remedial actions taken.
3.5 EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Exterior concealed transition joints in air barrier.

1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing low-modulus silicone sealant.
2. Joint Sealant: Single-component non-sag urethane sealant.

SECTION 079200
3. Compatibility: Compatible with air barrier components specified in Section 07 2726 – Fluid
Applied Membrane Air Barrier.
B. Exterior construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.

1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing non-staining silicone sealant.
2. Joint Sealant: Multi-component neutral-curing non-staining field tintable silicone sealant.
4. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
C. Exterior movement joints in concrete unit masonry.

D. Exterior movement joints in brick masonry.

4. Joint-Sealant Color, Vertical Joints: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
5. Joint-Sealant Color, Horizontal Joints: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
E. Exterior joints within exterior insulation finish systems (EIFS).

F. Exterior joints between different materials listed above.

4. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. Multiple colors required
to match several conditions.
G. Exterior perimeter joints at frames of doors, windows, storefront frames, curtain wall frames, and
louvers.
H. Exterior joints within aluminum storefront framing, curtain walls, and window systems:
I. All other exterior non-traffic joints.


SECTION 079200
J. Exterior horizontal traffic and traffic isolation joints.
1. Joint Sealant: Single-component pourable urethane sealant.
3.6 INTERIOR JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Interior vertical movement joints in exterior concrete and unit masonry.

2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
B. Interior movement joints in interior unit masonry.

C. Interior perimeter joints of exterior aluminum frames.

D. Interior perimeter joints of interior frames.

a. Joint Sealant: Single-component non-sag urethane sealant.
b. Joint Sealant: Siliconized acrylic latex.
c. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
E. Interior sanitary joints between plumbing fixtures, food preparation fixtures, and casework and
adjacent walls, floors, and counters.
1. Joint Sealant: Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, non-sag, acid-curing silicone joint sealant.
F. Interior traffic joints in floor and between floor and wall construction.
1. Joint Sealant: Single-component pourable urethane sealant.
G. Interior non-moving joints between interior painted surfaces and adjacent materials.
1. Joint Sealant: Siliconized acrylic latex.
2. Joint-Sealant Color: Paintable.
H. Interior concealed sealants at thresholds and sills.

1. Joint Sealant: Butyl-rubber-based joint sealant.
I. Interior exposed and non-exposed acoustical applications:

1. Joint Sealant: Acoustical joint sealant.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 079200
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:
1. The work under this section shall include the furnishing of all items shown on the drawings and as
specified herein, as needed for a complete and proper installation, including, but not limited to the
following:
1. Hollow Metal Doors.
2. Hollow Metal Door Frames.
B. Related Work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, Sections in
Division 1 of these Specifications, and the following:
3. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications.
8. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.
9. Section 08 8000 - Glazing.
10 Section 09 9100 - Painting.
11 Division 23 - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. A 653 / A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
2. A 924 - Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot Dip
Process.
3. A 1008 / A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, High Strength
Low-Alloy, High Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake
Hardenable.
4. E 90 - Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions.
5. E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. DHI A115 - Specifications for Hardware Preparations in Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
2. DHI A115.IG - Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware.
3. A156.7 - Hinge Template Dimensions.
4. A 250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
5. A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors and
Hardware Reinforcing.
6. A 250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
7. A 250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel
Doors and Frames.
8. SDI 250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.
C. Steel Door Institute (SDI):

1. 105 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PAGE 1 OF 9

SECTION 081113
2. 111 - Recommended Details and Guidelines for Standard Steel Doors and Frames and Accessories.
3. 112 - Zinc-Coated (Galvanized / Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
4. 117 - Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
5. 118 - Basic Fire Door Requirements.
6. 122 - Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
7. 124 - Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
D. Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (NAAMM / HMMA):

1. 840 - Guide Specification for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
2. 820 TN01 - Grouting Hollow Metal Frames.
3. H820 TN03 - Guidelines for Glazing of Hollow Metal Transoms, Sidelights, and Windows.
E. Building Code References:

1. ANSI / UL 10C - Standard for Safety for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
2. International Building Code (2012 Edition).
3. International Electrical Code (2012 Edition).
4. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code (2012 Edition).
5. NFPA 105 - Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening
Protectives.
6. NFPA 252 - Standard Method of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
7. UL - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
8. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies.
9. WH - Certification Listings; Warnock Hersey International, Inc.
1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Doors and Frames: Conform to applicable codes for fire ratings. It is the intent of this specification that
door hardware and its application comply or exceed the standards for labeled openings. In case of
conflicts in required fire protection ratings, provide fire ratings as required by NFPA and UL.
1. Fire Door Assemblies in Exit Enclosures and Exit Passageways: Maximum transmitted
temperature end point of not more than [250°] F [121°] C above ambient at the end of 30 minutes
of the standard fire test exposure.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specifications, Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures; for submittal procedures.
B. Coordinate approved shop drawings with all other trades and manufacturers whose products are used in
conjunction with the Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, as listed under Section 08 1113.
C. The door hardware supplier is to furnish all required templates, template reference numbers and / or
physical hardware to the hollow metal door and frame supplier in order to cut, reinforce, or otherwise
prepare the frames to receive the door hardware items.
D. The hollow metal door and frame supplier shall furnish, to the Architect, complete copies of the
proposed hollow metal doors and frames schedule and / or shop drawings, as described in Section
01 3300, using the same reference number for details and openings as those on the contract drawings.
These shall be submitted to the Architect for approval.
E. Upon request of the Architect or for any substitution to this specification, six [6] copies of the hollow
metal door and frame manufacturer’s catalog cut sheets are to be submitted to the Architect for approval,
before any material is placed on the jobsite.

SECTION 081113
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary
crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for the
proper performance of the work to be performed in this Section.
B. Select a qualified hollow metal door and frame distributor who is a direct account of the manufacturer of
the products furnished. In addition, that distributor must have in their regular employment an
Architectural Hardware Consultant [AHC], a Certified Door Consultant [CDC], or an Architectural
Openings Consultant [AOC], who will be available to consult with the Architect and Contractor
regarding matters affecting the door and frame openings.
C. Provide hollow metal doors and frames as manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production
of this type of work.
D. Provide hollow metal doors and frames complying with the Steel Door Institute recommended
specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames ANSI / SDI 100 [Latest Edition] and as herein
specified.
E. Fire Ratings Compliance: Fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames shall comply with building code
standards having local jurisdiction. All doors and frames shall be installed in accordance with NFPA-
80.
1. Positive Pressure Testing - UBC-7-2-97 or UL10C.
2. Only smoke gasketing applied around the perimeter of the frames to meet the “S” rating is
permissible.
1.6 SAMPLES
A. If requested by the Architect, submit an [18] inch by [24] inch cut-away sample door and frame with
provisions for hinge, lockset, and corner section.
1. Construct door sample to show vertical edge construction, top and bottom construction, insulation,
face stiffeners, hinge, and other applied hardware reinforcements. Include louver sections and
glazing stop where applicable.
2. Construct frame sample to show frame profile, welded corner joint, welded hinge reinforcement,
dust cover boxes, floor anchors, and wall anchors. Include panel and louver sections and glazing
stops where applicable.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with the pertinent provisions of Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. All hollow metal doors and frames must be properly marked with a door opening mark number to
correspond with the door and frame schedule.
C. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage is to be repaired, provided the finish
items are equal in all respects to the new work and acceptable to the Architect.
D. Deliver all steel doors in cartons and palletized to provide protection during transit and job storage.
E. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage is to be repaired, provided the finish
items are equal in all respects to the new work and acceptable to the Architect.
F. Store doors and frames, at the building site, under cover. Place units on wood sills or on the floor in a
manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid the use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which
could create a humidity chamber. If the wrapper on the door becomes wet, remove the carton

SECTION 081113
immediately. Provide a 4” space between stacked doors to promote air circulation. Proper storage is
required to comply with the requirements of ANSI / SDI A250.11 and HMMA 840.
1.8 JOB CONDITIONS
A. The installer must examine the conditions under which hollow metal doors and frames will be installed
and notify the contractor in writing of any condition detrimental to the proper and timely completion of
the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:

1. CECO Door Products; An ASSA ABLOY Group company (www.cecodoor.com).
2. Concept Frames, Inc. (www.conceptframes.com)
3. CURRIES®; An ASSA ABLOY Group company (www.curries.com)
4. Republic Doors and Frames; Division of Allegion, PLC (www.republicdoor.com)
5. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company; Division of Allegion, PLC(www.steelcraft.com)
2.2 HARDWARE LOCATIONS AND GENERAL REINFORCEMENTS
A. Locate hardware on doors and frames in accordance with the manufacturer’s standard locations.
B. When hollow metal frames are used with wood doors or FRP doors, the hardware preparation on the
doors is governed by its location on the frames. If the doors are to be factory mortised, the door supplier
is responsible for coordinating hardware locations.
C. Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum standard gauges as listed in ANSI /
SDI-100; or as specified under Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.
D. Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, and function holes provided, at the factory, in accordance with the
hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. All through-bolt holes, attachment
holes, or drilling and tapping for surface hardware, shall be performed by others.
2.3 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. Material - Exterior Frames:

1. Shall be fabricated of a commercial quality [16] gauge [0.053] inch ([1.3] mm)], hot dipped, zinc
coated, galvannealed, steel that complies with ASTM Designations A653 and A924 (Coating Class
A60).
2. All frames are to be assembled so that the face miter seam is “closed and tight”. Weld the face
miter seam, grind with a minimal [100] grit sandpaper for a higher gloss paint application and dress
the welded area smooth. Stitch weld in the throat of the frame corner or intersection. Apply a zinc
rich primer over the grinding area, and finish with a matching prime paint.
3. Hinge reinforcements shall be not less than a [7] gauge [0.180] inch ([4.7] mm)] universal plate,
[1-1/4] inch by [9] inch height, to receive heavy weight [0.180] hinges; or as specified under
Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. Strike reinforcements shall be not less than a [16] gauge [0.053]
inch ([1.3] mm)] plate, and closer reinforcements shall be not less than a [14] gauge [0.067] inch
([1.7] mm)] plate. Adequate reinforcements shall be provided for other door hardware items, as
required. Steel plaster guards shall be furnished for all mortised cutouts. All required

SECTION 081113
reinforcements, for door hardware items, shall be welded to the door frames and fabricated of hot
dipped, zinc coated, galvannealed steel.
B. Material - Interior Frames:

1. Shall be fabricated of a commercial quality [16] gauge [0.053] inch ([1.3] mm)], cold rolled steel
that complies with ASTM Designations A366 or A568.
2. All frames are to be assembled so that the face miter seam is “closed and tight”. Weld the face
miter seam, grind with a minimal [100]-grit sandpaper for a higher gloss paint application and
dress the welded area smooth. Stitch weld in the throat of the frame corner or intersection. Apply a
zinc rich primer over the grinding area, and finish with a matching prime paint.
3. Hinge reinforcements shall be not less than a [7] gauge [0.180] inch ([4.7] mm)] universal plate,
[1-1/4] inch by [9] inch height, to receive heavy weight [0.180] hinges; or as specified under
Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. Strike reinforcements shall be not less than a [16] gauge [0.053]
inch ([1.3] mm)] plate, and closer reinforcements shall be not less than a [14] gauge [0.067] inch
([1.7] mm)] plate. Adequate reinforcements shall be provided for other door hardware items, as
required. Steel plaster guards shall be furnished for all mortised cutouts. All required
reinforcements, for door hardware items, shall be welded to the door frames and fabricated of cold
rolled steel.
C. Fabrication:
1. General Design and Construction:
a. Provide hollow metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lites and other
openings to the size and design as shown on the architectural drawings.
b. All finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true, and free of
defects, warp or buckle.
c. Jamb depths, trim, profile, and backbends shall be as scheduled by the Architect and shown
on approved shop drawings.
d. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings shall be fabricated in sections
designed for splicing or splining in the field by others.
e. Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum standard gauges as listed
in ANSI / SDI-100.
f. Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled, and tapped at the factory for template mortised
hardware only, in accordance with an approved hardware schedule and templates; provided
by the hardware contractor. Where surface mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall
have reinforcing plates only; all drilling and tapping shall be performed by others.
g. Hinge reinforcements shall be no less than [7] gauge [0.180] inch ([4.7] mm) steel.
D. Anchors:
1. Floor anchors shall be provided, loose or welded to the frame and punched with [3/8] inch ([9.6]
mm) holes, for anchoring to the floor; at each jamb.
2. Anchors for installation in masonry walls shall be of the wire type. Provide not less than three [3]
anchors for each jamb. Anchors shall be not less than [0.156] inch diameter steel wire.
3. Anchors for installation in stud partitions shall be steel of a suitable design, not less than the gauge
of the frame thickness. Provide not less than three [3] anchors for each jamb with anchors loose or
welded to the frame.
4. Dust boxes or mortar guards shall be no less than [26] gauge [0.0179] inch ([0.455] mm)] on
frames to be set in masonry or on strike mortises in drywall or plaster partitions.
5. All frames, that are to be welded, shall be provided with a steel spreader temporarily attached to
the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for
bracing only and shall not be used to size the frame opening. Installers are not to assume that just
because frames are shipped with spreader bars, that the frames are already square. Spreader bars
are to be removed immediately prior to setting frames accurately in position.
6. Loose glazing stops shall be of galvanized steel, not less than [16] gauge [0.05] inch ([1.3] mm),
butted at corner joints and secured to the frame with countersunk cadmium or zinc-plated screws.
7. Except on weather-stripped doors, drill the stop to receive three [3] silencers on single door frames,
four [4] silencers on single “Dutch” door frames, and two [2] silencers on double door frames.

SECTION 081113
E. Protective Coatings:
1. Protect the inside of all frames, where frames are being utilized in grout filled wall conditions or
when an anti-freeze agent is being used. Where frames are being utilized in grout filled wall
conditions, the total inside area of all frames shall be fully grouted and shall be coated with an
asphaltic or flexible rubberized epoxy-fortified coating prior to grouting. This coating shall be field
applied, by the General Contractor, to a minimum [1/16] inch ([1.6] mm) thickness.
2.4 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. Material - Exterior Doors:

1 Doors shall be full-flush seamless construction, with face sheets fabricated of a commercial quality
[16] gauge [0.053] inch ([1.3] mm), hot-dipped, zinc coated, galvannealed, steel, that complies
with ASTM Designations A653 and A924 (Coating Class A60).
2. Doors shall have continuous vertical mechanical interlocking joints at the lock and hinge edges
with edge seams filled and ground smooth. Vertical edges shall join the face sheets by a weld
extending the full height of the door. Welds are to be ground, filled, and dressed smooth to make
them invisible, and to provide a smooth flush surface. The internal portion of the seam shall be
sealed with an epoxy. The lock edges shall be beveled [1/8] inch ([3] mm) in [2] inch ([51] mm]) /
[3] degrees.
An intermittent fastening along the seam shall not be permitted.
3. Hinge reinforcements shall be not less than a [7] gauge [0.180] inch ([4.7] mm) plate, [1-1/4] inch
by [9] inch height, to receive heavy weight [0.180] hinges; or as specified under Section 08 7100 -
Door Hardware. Lock reinforcements shall be not less than a [16] gauge [0.053] inch ([1.3] mm)
plate, and closer reinforcements shall be not less than a [14] gauge [0.067] inch ([1.7 mm) plate.
Adequate reinforcements shall be provided for other door hardware items, as required. All required
reinforcements, for door hardware items, shall be welded to both face sheets and fabricated of
galvannealed steel.
4. Reinforce, and seal against moisture intrusion, tops and bottoms of all doors with a continuous
galvannealed steel channel not less than [14] gauge [0.067] inch ([1.7] mm), extending the full
width of the door and welded to the face sheets. Doors with an inverted top channel shall have a
steel closure channel, so that the web of the channel is flush with the top of the face sheets of the
door.
Plastic fillers shall not be permitted.
5. Door Cores: Doors shall be reinforced, stiffened, sound deadened, and insulated with a rigid
polystyrene core bonded to the inside faces of both panels with contact adhesive. Voids around the
perimeter of the door shall be filled with kraft-fibre honeycomb.
B. Material - Interior Doors:

1 Doors shall be full-flush seamless construction, with face sheets fabricated of a commercial quality
[16] gauge [0.053] inch ([1.3] mm), cold rolled steel that complies with ASTM Designations A366
or A568.
2. Doors shall have continuous vertical mechanical interlocking joints at the lock and hinge edges
with edge seams filled and ground smooth. Vertical edges shall join the face sheets by a weld
extending the full height of the door. Welds are to be ground, filled, and dressed smooth to make
them invisible, and to provide a smooth flush surface. The internal portion of the seam shall be
sealed with an epoxy. The lock edges shall be beveled [1/8] inch ([3] mm) in [2] inch ([51] mm) /
[3] degrees.
An intermittent fastening along the seam shall not be permitted.
3. Hinge reinforcements shall be not less than a [7] gauge [0.180] inch ([4.7] mm) plate, [1-1/4] inch
by [9] inch height, to receive heavy weight [0.180] inch ([4.7] mm) hinges; or as specified under

SECTION 081113
Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. Lock reinforcements shall be not less than a [16] gauge [0.053]
inch ([1.3] mm) plate, and closer reinforcements shall be not less than a [14] gauge [0.067] inch
([1.7] mm) plate. Adequate reinforcements shall be provided for other door hardware items, as
required. All required reinforcements, for door hardware items, shall be welded to both face sheets
and fabricated of galvannealed steel.
4. Reinforce, and seal against moisture intrusion, tops and bottoms of all doors with a continuous
galvannealed steel channel not less than [14] gauge [0.067] inch ([1.7] mm), extending the full
width of the door and welded to the face sheets. Doors with an inverted top channel shall have a
steel closure channel, so that the web of the channel is flush with the top of the face sheets of the
door.
Plastic fillers shall not be permitted.
5. Door Cores: Doors shall be reinforced, stiffened, sound deadened, insulated and completely filled
with a one piece, chemically-treated, [99] lb., [1] inch wide hexagonal cell, kraft-fibre honeycomb
core, sanded edges, securely bonded to both face sheets, under pressure, with a waterproof, contact
adhesive, and with a minimum insulation value of [R-2.44], [U-0.37], and a STC Rating of [32].
2.6 LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct and install doors and frames to comply with the current issue of the National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) Standard Number [80], as herein specified.
B. Labeled doors and frames shall comply with the procedures of the labeling agencies and the codes of the
Authority Having Jurisdiction.
C. Labeled doors and frames shall be provided for those openings requiring fire protection rating as
determined and scheduled.
D. All labeled fire doors and frames shall be of a type which has been investigated and tested in accordance
with either UL-10(b), ASTM E-152, NFPA 252, ANSI A2.2, or UL-10(c), UBC 7-2-1997.
E. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL) labeled doors and frames shall be manufactured under the UL
factory inspection program and in strict compliance to UL procedures, and shall provide a degree of fire
protection, heat transmission, and panic loading capability indicated by the opening class.
F. Intertek Testing Services - Warnock Hersey (ITS-WH) labeled doors and frames shall be manufactured
to meet the specific requirements of that labeling agency’s current procedure for the tested hourly rating
designated and shall be subject to inspection by representatives of the labeling agency.
G. A physical label or approved marking shall be affixed to the fire door and/or fire door frame, at an
authorized facility as evidence of compliance with procedures of the labeling agency.
2.7 STEEL FINISHES
A. Doors and frames are to be thoroughly cleaned and chemically treated to insure a maximum finish paint
adhesion. All surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view shall receive a factory applied coat of rust
inhibiting primer. The finish shall meet the requirements for acceptance stated in ANSI A224.1 “Test
Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces”. The prime finish is not intended to
be the final layer of protection from the elements. Field painting using a good grade of oil-based paints
shall be provided in accordance with the recommendations of the door and frame manufacturer. For
specialty types of finished coatings, the paint supplier should also be consulted.

SECTION 081113
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Steel Door Grille:

1. Manufacturer: Titus, 605 Shiloh Road, Plano, Texas 75074. Telephone: (972) 212-4800.
Website: (www.titus-hvac.com).
2. Type: Sight Proof.
3. Model: T-700L.
4. Size: [22] inch x [6] inch.
5. Construction: The border and blades shall be of [20] gauge steel.
a. Steel with a [1-1/4] inch border width.
b. Inverted V-blades with a deflection angle of [77] ° shall be used to create a sight proof
design and provide additional stiffness to the grille.
c. Corners shall be welded with full penetration resistance welds with a reinforcing patch
for extra strength.
d. Screw holes shall be countersunk for a neat appearance.
6. Frame: Auxiliary Frame.
7. Finish: Anodic acrylic paint, baked at [315] ° F for [30] minutes.
a. The pencil hardness must be HB to H.
b. The paint must pass a [100] hour ASTM B117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test
without creepage, blistering or deterioration of film.
c. The paint must pass a [250] hour ASTM D870 Water Immersion Test.
d. The paint must also pass the ASTM D2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a [50]
inch pound force applied.
e. Color: # [26] white.
8. The manufacturer shall provide published performance data for the grille. The grille shall be
tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-1991.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to make sure that all dimensions for existing openings
or exiting frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge backset, etc.), given to the hollow metal door and
frame manufacturer, are accurate.
B. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to assure that scratches or disfigurements, caused in
shipping or handling, are properly cleaned and touched up with a rust inhibiting primer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Door Frames:
1. Prior to installation, all frames must be checked for rack, twist, and out of square conditions.
2. Place frames prior to enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, and
braced securely until permanent anchors are set. Remove shipping spreader bars and insert, a
minimum of three [3], wooden spreaders cut to the opening width and notched to clear the stops of
the frame.
3. Fill frames in masonry walls solid with mortar.
4. When temperature conditions necessitate an additive to be used in plaster or mortar to prevent
freezing, the contractor installing the frames shall coat the inside of the frames, in the field, with an
asphaltic or flexible rubberized epoxy-fortified coating, prior to grouting, to a minimum [1/16] inch
[1.6mm] thickness.
5. SDI-105, “Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames” and SDI-110 “Standard Steel
Doors and Frames for Modular Masonry Construction” shall indicate the proper installation
procedures.
6. Install fire rated frames in accordance with NFPA 80.

SECTION 081113
7. Field splice only at approved locations indicated on the shop drawings. Weld, grind, and finish as
required to conceal evidence of splicing on exposed surfaces.
8. General Contractor shall provide full height [3/8] inch to [1-1/2] inch strips of polystyrene
insulation at frames requiring grouting where continuous hinges are specified. Apply the strips to
the back of the frames, where the hinges are to be installed, to allow for field drilling and/or
tapping.
9. Where grouting is required in masonry, provide and install temporary bottom and intermediate
wood spreaders to maintain proper width and avoid bowing or deforming of frame members. Refer
to ANSI A250.11-2001, Standard.
a. Hollow Metal Frames to Receive Grouting: Comply with a current copy of ANSI / SDI
Standard A250.8, paragraph 4.2.2, whereby grout will be mixed to provide a [4] inch
maximum slump consistency and hand troweled into place. Do not use grout mixed to a
thinner, pumpable consistency; this practice is not recommended and not permissible. Refer
to HMMA 820 TN01 Grouting Hollow Metal Frames.
B. Doors:
1. Install doors plumb and in true alignment in a prepared opening and fasten them to achieve the
maximum operational effectiveness and appearance.
2. Proper door clearance must be maintained in accordance with SDI-110.
3. Where necessary, metal hinge shims are acceptable to maintain clearances.
4. “Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware”, published by DHI, is recommended for further
details.
C. Hardware must be applied in accordance with the hardware manufacturer’s templates and instructions.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Final Adjustments:
1. Check and readjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final
inspection.
2. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition.
3. Remove defective work and replace with work complying with the specified requirements.
B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth all rusted and damaged areas of prime coat and apply a touch
up of a compatible air-drying primer.
3.4 SCHEDULES
A. After installation, copies of the door and frame schedules shall be placed in a file folder, along with a
copy of all door and frame submittals, turn over to the Owner when the building is accepted.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 081113
SECTION 083110 - WALL AND CEILING ACCESS PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Access doors and frames for wall and ceiling surfaces.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Standard for Testing and Materials International (ASTM):

2. A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Door and panel units: Show types, thickness of metals, full size profiles of door members.
2. Hardware: Show materials, finishes, locations of fasteners, types of fasteners, locations and
types of operating hardware, and details of installation.
3. General: Show connections of units and hardware to other Work.
C. Warranty: Submit executed copy of manufacturer’s standard warranty.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A minimum of [5] years’ experience manufacturing similar products.
B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum of [2] years’ experience installing similar products.
C. Materials: For each type of material required to complete the work of this section, provide primary
materials which are the products of a single manufacturer.
A. Deliver products in manufacturer’s original unopened packaging.
B. Store materials in a dry, protected, well-vented area.
WALL AND CEILING ACCESS PANELS PAGE 1 OF 3

SECTION 083110
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard warranty against defects in materials and
workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis – Wall and Ceiling Access Panels: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. Milcore
5030 Corporate Exchange Blvd, SE
Grand Rapids, Michigan 49512
Telephone: 800-624-6842
Website: (www.milcorinc.com)
2.2 ACCESS DOOR
A. Architectural Grade Flush Steel Access Door - Series M.

1. Door: [16] gauge cold rolled steel.
2. Frame: [16] gauge cold rolled steel. Frame to be provided with pre-formed mounting holes
[3/16] inch diameter at [4] inch spacing. Inner frame included to allow latching.
3. Hinge: Concealed spring hinges open to [175] degrees for complete access without allowing the
door to impact the wall. Quantity varies per door panel size. Extracting pin from hinge leaf
attached to panel permits panel removal.
4. Latch: Cylinder lock (replaces one cam latch) furnished with two keys.
5. Finish: Powder coat - White.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that the substrate is dry, clean, and free of foreign matter and in compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Report and correct any defects
prior to any installation.
A. Refer to manufacturer’s product literature for surface preparation requirements.

1. Surfaces should be structurally sound, free of voids, spalls, loose aggregate and sharp ridges.
2. Remove dust, dirt, debris or any other foreign materials.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Position units where indicated or where required to provide convenient access to concealed work
requiring maintenance.

SECTION 083110
B. Install units in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals.
1. Test units for proper function and adjust until proper operation is achieved.
A. Protect from damage during application and remainder of construction period.
B. Inspect and make necessary repairs before covering. Repair or replace damaged material according to
manufacturer’s literature.
C. Product and accessories are not designed for permanent exposure. Cover with insulation or exterior
cladding as soon as schedule allows.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 083110
SECTION 083313 - COILING COUNTER SHUTTERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Manually operated steel overhead coiling counter shutters.
2. Operating hardware, controls, and supports.
4. Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealers
6. Section 07 7100 – Hardware.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):


1. A480/A480M-04 - Standard Specification for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel
Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
2. A653/A653M-03 - Standard Specification for Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
3. A666-00 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
4. B209-04 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
5. B221-02 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wires, Shapes and
Tubes.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components,
profiles for slats, and finishes.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
accessories.
3. Include description of automatic closing device and testing and resetting instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer’s product data.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.
2. Include details of equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances, and
components.
3. Show controls, locking devices and other accessories.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Upon request, provide manufacturer’s finish charts showing full range
of colors and textures available for units with factory applied finishes.
1. Include similar samples of accessories involving color selection.
COILING COUNTER SHUTTERS PAGE 1 OF 4

SECTION 083313
D. Samples for Verification: Upon request, provide for each type of exposed finish on the following
components in manufacturer’s standard sizes.
1. Curtain slats.
2. Bottom bar.
E. Closeout Submittal:
1. Operation and maintenance data.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer specializing in the manufacturing of products specified in

this section and with a minimum of [5] years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be authorized and qualified to install overhead door systems on
the type and scope of project specified.
A. Store products in Manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store and dispose of all materials in accordance with federal, state and local laws.
A. Maintain conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation) within limits recommended by

manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other operations and installation of adjacent materials to avoid damage to installed
materials.
1.8 WARRANTIES
A. Warranty: Manufacturer’s warranty that all parts and components are to be free from defects in
materials and workmanship for [1] year.
B. Warranty: Manufacturer’s warranty that all parts and components, except counterbalance spring and
finish, are to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for [5] years. Counterbalance springs
to be warrantied for [1] year.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis - Coiling Counter Shutters: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. CHI Overhead Doors, Inc.
1485 Sunrise Drive
Arthur, Illinois 61911
Telephone: 217-543-2135
Website: (www.chiohd.com)

SECTION 083313
A. Overhead Coiling Counter Doors:

1. Seismic Performance: Overhead coiling doors shall be evaluated for seismic performance to
withstand the effect of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
2. Operation: Design complete door assembly including operator for usage of up to 20 cycles per
day.
B. Source Limitations: Provide overhead coiling doors from one manufacturer for each type of door.
Provide operators and other accessories from source acceptable to overhead coiling door
manufacturer.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel Sheet:

1. Galvanized commercial steel, (CS type) per ASTM A653/A653M, G90 and G60 coating class.
2.4 DOOR ASSEMBLY

1. Basis of Design: CHI Overhead Doors, Model 6522.
B. Curtain:
1. Material: [22] gage galvanized steel.
2. Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 and with baked on enamel
primer coat and polyester finish coat.
3. Polyester Finish: [Galvanized].
C. Profile:
1. Flat, non-insulated, [1-1/2] inches high by [1/2] inch deep.
D. End Locks:
1. Nylon, attached to every other slat to act as wearing surface and prevent lateral movement.
F. Bottom Bar:
1. Extruded aluminum tube type bottom bar.
2. Bottom Bar Finish: Clear anodized aluminum.
G. Guides:
1. [2] formed steel, bolted together to form guide channel and mounting surface with soft brush
guide runners full height to prevent metal-to-metal contact.
2. Guide Material: Aluminum.
3. Guide Finish: Clear anodized aluminum.
H. Head Plate:
1. Rectangular steel plate, with precision sealed ball bearings supporting drive side axle.
I. Barrel Assembly:
1. Steel pipe sized for maximum deflection under loading of [0.03] inch per foot of span, with
threaded rings or lugs welded to barrel assembly for curtain attachment.

SECTION 083313
J. Springs:
1. Spring tension assembly supported within barrel by precision ball bearings. Curtain weight
counterbalanced by oil tempered, helically wound torsion springs; grease packed and mounted
on steel torsion shafts with cast spring plug.
2. Designed for usage up to [20] cycles per day.
K. Hood: Shaped to fit within the head plates and with intermediate supports as required.
1. Hood Material: Minimum [24] gauge galvanized steel.
2. Hood Finish: Polyester Finish: [Galvanized].
3. Provide head plate covers to match hood.
L. Weather Seal:
1. Tubular vinyl bottom seal.
M. Locking Mechanism:
1. Interior mounted plated steel slide bolt locks with padlock provisions.
N. Mounting:
1. Face of wall and above lintel.
O. Operation:
1. Manual Push Up.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for substrate construction
and other conditions affecting performance of the work.
B. Examine locations of electrical connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install shutter assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Anchor to adjacent construction without distortion or stress.
C. Fit and align shutter assembly including hardware, level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware and moving parts so that doors operate smoothly throughout full operating range.
B. Adjust seals to provide a tight fit around the entire perimeter.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate proper operation to Owner.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 083313
SECTION 083323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Manually Operated Overhead Coiling Service Door.
2. Operating hardware, controls, and supports.
4. Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealers
6. Section 08 7100 – Door Hardware.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. A480/A480M-04; 2004 - Standard Specification for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
2. A653/A653M-03; 2003 - Standard Specification for Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components,
profiles for slats, and finishes.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
accessories.
3. Include description of automatic closing device and testing and resetting instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer’s product data.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.
2. Include details of equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances, and
components.
3. Show controls, locking devices and other accessories.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Upon request, provide manufacturer’s finish charts showing full range
of colors and textures available for units with factory applied finishes.
1. Include similar samples of accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: Upon request, provide for each type of exposed finish on the following
components in manufacturer’s standard sizes.
1. Curtain slats.
2. Bottom bar.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PAGE 1 OF 5

SECTION 083323
E. Closeout Submittal:
1. Operation and maintenance data.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer specializing in the manufacturing of products specified in

this section and with a minimum of [5] years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be authorized and qualified to install overhead door systems on
the type and scope of project specified.
A. Store products in Manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store and dispose of all materials in accordance with federal, state and local laws.
A. Maintain conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation) within limits recommended by

manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with other operations and installation of adjacent materials to avoid damage to installed
materials.
1.8 WARRANTIES
A. Warranty: Manufacturer’s warranty that all parts and components are to be free from defects in
materials and workmanship for [1] year.
B. Warranty: Manufacturer’s warranty that all parts and components, except counterbalance spring and
finish, are to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for [5] years. Counterbalance springs
to be warrantied for [1] year.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis - Coiling Counter Shutters: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. CHI Overhead Doors, Inc.
1485 Sunrise Drive
Arthur, Illinois 61911
Telephone: 217-543-2135
Website: (www.chiohd.com)

SECTION 083323

1. Wind Loads: Design door assembly to withstand a minimum of 20 psf in accordance with
ASTM E330 using a 1.0 factor of safety.
2. Seismic Performance: Overhead coiling doors shall be evaluated for seismic performance to
withstand the effect of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
3. Operation: Design complete door assembly including operator for use of not less than [20,000]
cycles.
B. Source Limitations: Provide overhead coiling doors from one manufacturer for each type of door.
Provide operators and other accessories from source acceptable to overhead coiling door
manufacturer.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel Sheet:

1. Galvanized commercial steel, (CS type) per ASTM A653/A653M, G90 and G60 coating class.
2.4 DOOR ASSEMBLY
A. Insulated Overhead Coiling Service Doors:

1. Basis of Design: CHI Overhead Doors, Model 6182.
B. Curtain: Constructed from interlocking slats formed from the following:

1. Front Slat Material: [18] gage galvanized steel.
a. Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 and with baked on
enamel primer coat and polyester finish coat.
b. Polyester Finish: [Galvanized].
2. Back Slat Material: [24] gage galvanized steel.
a. Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 and with baked on
enamel primer coat and polyester finish coat.
b. Polyester Finish: [Galvanized].
C. Insulation:
1. Fill slats with laid in place polyurethane insulation board complying with maximum flame
spread and smoke developed indexes of [75] and [450] respectively, according to ASTM E84 or
UL [723]. Enclose and bond insulation within slat faces.
D. Profile:
1. Flat, non-insulated, [1-1/2] inches high by [13/16] inch deep.
E. End Locks:
1. Nylon, attached to every other slat to act as wearing surface and prevent lateral movement.
G. Wind Locks: Per design and wind load requirements.
H. Bottom Bar:
1. Extruded aluminum tube type bottom bar.
2. Bottom Bar Finish: Clear anodized aluminum.
I. Guides: Structural angles bolted together to form guide and mounting surface.
1. Guide Material: Steel.

SECTION 083323
2. Guide Finish: Hot Dippped Galvanized.
J. Head Plate:
1. Rectangular steel plate, with precision sealed ball bearings supporting drive side axle.
K. Barrel Assembly:
1. Steel pipe sized for maximum deflection under loading of [0.03] inch per foot of span, with
threaded rings or lugs welded to barrel assembly for curtain attachment.
L. Springs:
1. Spring tension assembly supported within barrel by precision ball bearings. Curtain weight
counterbalanced by oil tempered, helically wound torsion springs; grease packed and mounted
on steel torsion shafts with cast spring plug.
2. Designed for minimum [20,000] cycles.
M. Hood: Shaped to fit within the head plates and with intermediate supports as required.
1. Hood Material: Minimum [24] gauge galvanized steel.
2. Hood Finish: Polyester Finish: [Galvanized].
3. Provide head plate covers to match hood.
N. Weather Seal:
1. Tubular vinyl bottom seal.
2. Vinyl guide seal with rubber hood baffle.
3. Guide brush seal.
4. Header brush seal.
O. Locking Mechanism:
1. Two plated steel slide bolt locks with padlock provisions.
2. Interlock Switches: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage
power supply when door is locked.
P. Mounting:
1. Face of wall and above lintel.
Q. Manual Operation:
1. Chain Hoist.
R. Wind Load Design: Design door assembly to withstand a minimum of [20] psf in accordance with
ASTM E330 using a [1.0] factor of safety.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for substrate construction
and other conditions affecting performance of the work.
B. Examine locations of electrical connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

SECTION 083323
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install shutter assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Anchor to adjacent construction without distortion or stress.
C. Fit and align shutter assembly including hardware, level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware and moving parts so that doors operate smoothly throughout full operating range.
B. Adjust seals to provide a tight fit around the entire perimeter.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate proper operation to Owner.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 083323
SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Architectural aluminum fixed and horizontal sliding windows including perimeter trims, stools,
accessories, shims and anchors, and perimeter sealing of window units.
3. Section 06 1100 – Framing and Sheathing.
4. Section 07 2800 – Moisture Barriers.
7. Section 08 8000 - Glazing.

A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed window system shall withstand the effects of the following
performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other
defects in construction.
B. Window Performance Requirements:
1. Performance Requirements: Provide aluminum windows of performance indicated that comply
with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 (NAFS).
a. Performance Class and Grade: AW-PG100-60” x 90” (1524 mm x 2515 mm) – FW.
2. Air Leakage: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. The air leakage
rate shall not exceed [0.10] cfm/ft2 (0.5 L/s·m2) at a static air pressure differential of [6.2] psf
(300 Pa).
3. Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 and ASTM
E 547. There shall be no leakage as defined in the test method at a static air pressure differential
of [12] psf (574 Pa).
4. Uniform Load Deflection: A minimum static air pressure difference of [100] psf (4788 Pa) shall
be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be
no deflection in excess of L/[175] of the span of any framing member.
5. Uniform Load Structural Test: A minimum static air pressure difference of [150] psf (7182 Pa)
shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. The unit
shall be evaluated after each load.
6. Component Testing: Window components shall be tested in accordance with procedures described
in AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 (NAFS).
7. Energy Efficiency:
a. Thermal Transmittance Test (U-Factor): When tested in accordance with AAMA 1503, the
conductive thermal transmittance (U-Factor) shall not be more than:
1) U-Factor not more than [.48] BTU/hr/sf/°F or NFRC [100] when using project
specified glass.
b. Condensation Resistance Test (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the
condensation resistance factor shall not be less than (CRF) [67]frame and [66]glass.
8. Thermal Barrier Tests: Testing shall be in general accordance with AAMA 505 Dry Shrinkage
and Composite Thermal Cycling test procedure, AAMA TIR-A8, Structural Performance of
Composite Thermal Barrier systems.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS PAGE 1 OF 6

SECTION 085113
9. Environmental Product Declarations (EPD): Shall have a Type [III] Product Specific EPD created
from a Product Category Rule specific to North America.
C. Environmental Product Declarations (EPD): Shall have a Type [III] Product-Specific EPD created from a
Product Category Rule.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of
individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of
aluminum window indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work,
operational clearances and installation details.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes including samples of
hardware and accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For aluminum windows and components required.
E. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing
agency for each type, class, grade, and size of aluminum window. Test results based on use of
downsized test units will not be accepted.
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer which has had successful experiences with installation of the
same or similar units required for this project and other projects of similar size and scope.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows that meet or

exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion of test
reports, and calculations.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum
windows and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section “Product
Requirements.” Do not modify size and dimensional requirements.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's
approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for
review.
A. Field Measurements: Verify aluminum window openings by field measurements before fabrication
and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty.

SECTION 085113
B. Warranty Period: Two [2] years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however
that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six [6] months from date of shipment by
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis: Contract Documents are based on products by:

1. Kawneer North America, Inc.
555 Guthridge Court
Technology Park Atlanta
Norcross, Georgia 30092
Telephone: 770-449-5555
Website: (www.kawneer.com)
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum window manufacturer for
strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish and not less than [0.070] inch [1.8]
mm wall thickness at any location for the main frame and sash members.
B. Thermal Barrier: The thermal barrier shall be Kawneer consisting of two parallel glass fiber-
reinforced nylon strips installed continuously and mechanically bonded to the aluminum.
C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials to be non-corrosive and

compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.
D. Anchors Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron
complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to
withstand design pressure indicated.
E. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel

complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron
complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to
withstand design pressure indicated.
F. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated windows, provide window manufacturer's standard,
permanently elastic, non-shrinking, and non-migrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for
joint size and movement.
2.3 WINDOW SYSTEM
A. Series 8400 TL Thermal Windows – Fixed Window.
B. Series 8400 TL Thermal Windows – Horizontal Sliding Window [XO].
2.4 GLAZING
A. Glass Glazing Materials: Specified in Section 08 8000 – Glazing.

SECTION 085113
B. Glazing System: Glazing method shall be a dry type in accordance with manufacturer’s standards.
Exterior glazing shall be TPE gasket. Interior glazing shall be snap-in type glazing beads with an
interior TPE gasket in accordance with AAMA 702 or ASTM C864.
2.5 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, or other
corrosion-resistant material compatible with aluminum; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close,
and securely lock aluminum windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions.
B. Horizontal Sliding Window Typical Hardware:

1. Continuous Integral Pulls.
2. Stainless Steel Ball Bearing Rollers.
3. Stainless Steel Roller Track.
4. Plunger Lock.
C. Exterior Panning and Interior Trims: Extruded aluminum, 6063-T6 alloy and temper, extruded to
profiles and details indicated. Seal exterior joints with manufacturer's standard sealant to assure water-
tight joints.
1. Exterior Panning and Trims: All panning profiles shall be a minimum thickness of [0.062] inch
(1.57 mm) to match the profiles as shown the drawings. Any profile variations shall be
submitted to the architect and/or owner for approval [10] days prior to bid date. All panning
shall be factory fabricated for field assembly. All corner joinery shall be factory cut. Joinery at
the sill shall be coped and butt-type construction. All preparations for assembly shall be
completed by the window manufacturer. Upon assembly, panning frame joints shall be back-
sealed to prevent moisture penetration.
2. Interior Trims: The interior face trim minimum wall thickness shall be 0.062" (1.57 mm). The
face trim shall snap-fit onto concealed mounting clip. Exposed fasteners shall not be accepted.
The mounting clip shall be extruded aluminum of 6063-T6 alloy and temper. The minimum
wall thickness shall be [0.062] inch (1.57 mm). The trim clips shall be provided in [4] inch
(101.6 mm) lengths and spaced a maximum of [18] inch (457.2 mm) center to center.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Insect Screens: Extruded aluminum frames, 6063-T6 alloy and temper, joined at corners.
1. Screen Cloth: Mesh Aluminum [18] x [16].
2. Frames: Finished to match aluminum windows.
3. Splines: Extruded vinyl. Removable to permit rescreening.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fit joints; make joints flush, hairline and weatherproof.
3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture
migrating within the system to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain
required glazing edge clearances.
6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing.
7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent
possible.

SECTION 085113
B. Window Frame Joinery: Screw spline, factory sealed frame corner joints.
C. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling
components and anchoring windows.
D. Fabricate aluminum windows that are re-glazable without dismantling sash or framing.
E. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors
for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for
movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide
mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units.
F. Sub-Frames: Provide sub frames with anchors for window units as shown, of profile and dimensions
indicated but not less than [0.093] inch (2.4 mm) thick extruded aluminum. Miter or cope corners, and
join with concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Finish to match window units. Provide sub frames
capable of withstanding design loads of window units.
G. Factory Glazed Fabrication: Glaze aluminum windows in the factory where practical and possible for
applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section “Glazing” and with
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-08 (NAFS).
H. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 08 8000 - Glazing and
glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match frame.
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Superior Performing Organic Coatings System: Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) multi-coat superior
performing organic coatings system complying with AAMA 2605, including at least 70 percent PVDF
resin, and at least 80 percent of aluminum extrusion and panels surfaces having minimum total dry
film thickness (DFT) of 1.2 mils, 0.0012 inch (0.030 mm).
1. Manufacturers:
a. PPG; Duranar: www.ppgmetalcoatings.com/#sle.
2. Finish Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate and operational clearances. Examine
wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a
coordinated, weather tight window installation.
1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris.
2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints.
Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within [3] inches [76.2]
mm of opening.
3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without
sharp edges or offsets at joints.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

SECTION 085113
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing
windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.
B. Install aluminum framed window system level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or
impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation
to wall flashing and other adjacent construction.
C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weather tight construction.
D. Install aluminum framed window system and components to drain condensation, water penetrating
joints, and moisture migrating within system to the exterior.
E. Separate aluminum from dissimilar materials to prevent corrosion or electrolytic action at points of
contact.
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust operating sashes, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather
stripping for smooth operation and weather tight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
B. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings
and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
C. Clean glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written
recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean
surfaces.
D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
construction period.
E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and
masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other
contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants
immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 085113
SECTION 087100.1 - HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR NUMBER HARDWARE SET NUMBER
A101A 5
A102A 14
A102B 14
A104A 14
A104B 14
A105A 4
A105B 10
A106 1
A107 6
A108 1
A109 4
A110 3
A111 12
A202 8
A203 9
A204 8
A205 9
A206 8
A207 9
A208 8
A209 9
B101A 5
B101B 14
B101C 14
B101D 5
B101E 14
B102 12
B103 7
B104 11
B105A 4
B105B 13
B106 2
B107 2
HARDWARE SCHEDULE PAGE 1 OF 7

SECTION 087100.1
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 1
FOR USE ON DOOR #(S):

A106 A108
PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224XY US28 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM DEADLOCK L463T 630 SCH
1 EA PERMANENT 23-030 626 SCH
INTERCHANGEABLE CORE
1 EA DOOR PULL 8103EZHD-2 X TYPE "STANDARD" US32D- IVE
MOUNTING 316
1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 8" X 16" US32D IVE
1 EA DOOR CLOSER 4040XP SRI SPRING 689 LCN
H-CUSH-N-STOP TBWMS
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1-1/2" LDW B-CS US32D IVE
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8197AA 628 ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 655A - E X 226 ANCHORS 719 ZER
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GREY IVE

B106 B107

1 EA ENTRANCE LOCKSET L9453T 03A X L583-363 630 SCH
1 EA DOOR CLOSER 4040XP SRI REGULAR TBWMS 689 LCN
1 EA MOP PLATE 8400 4" X 1" LDW B-CS US32D IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP & HOLDER FS446 US26D IVE
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM DRIP STRIP 11AA 628 ZER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 381A 719 ZER

SECTION 087100.1

A110

1 EA ENTRANCE LOCKSET L9453T 03A X L583-363 630 SCH
1 EA LOCK GUARD LG12 US32D IVE
1 EA DOOR CLOSER 4040XP SRI SPRING CUSH-N-STOP 689 LCN
TBWMS

A105A A109 B105A

1 EA STOREROOM LOCKSET L9480T 03A X L583-363 630 SCH
H-CUSH-N-STOP TBWMS

SECTION 087100.1

A101A B101A B101D

1 EA STOREROOM LOCKSET L9480T 03A X L583-363 630 SCH
H-CUSH-N-STOP TBWMS

A107

1 EA PRIVACY LOCKSET L9496T 03A X L583-363 X XL11-986 630 SCH
W/OCCUPANCY INDICATOR
H-CUSH-N-STOP TBWMS

SECTION 087100.1

B103

3 EA BUTT HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 630 IVE
1 EA PRIVACY LOCKSET L9040 03A X L583-363 X L283-722 630 SCH
W/OCCUPANCY INDICATOR
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 90S US32D GLY

A202 A204 A206 A208

1 EA OFFICE LOCKSET L9050T 03A X L583-363 630 SCH
1 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX US26D IVE

A203 A205 A207 A209

1 EA STOREROOM LOCKSET L9080T 03A 630 SCH

SECTION 087100.1

A105B

1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 450S - J US32D GLY
INSTALL OVERHEAD STOP ON "PULL SIDE" OF DOOR.

B104

3 EA BUTT HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE

A111 B102

3 EA BUTT HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 450S US32D GLY

SECTION 087100.1

B105B

1 EA DOOR CLOSER 4040XP REGULAR TBWMS 689 LCN

A102A A102B A104A A104B B101B B101C
B101E
PROVIDE EACH RU DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:

1 EA RIM / MORTISE CYLINDER / 20-057 / 20-062 / KS43F3200 ICX 626 / SCH
PADLOCK 606
1 EA PERMANENT 23-030 626 / SCH
INTERCHANGEABLE CORE 606
ALL OTHER REQUIRED HARDWARE ITEMS SHALL BE PROVIDED BY MANUFACTURER(S) /

SUPPLIER(S) OF OVERHEAD ROLLING COUNTER SHUTTER AND OVERHEAD COILING SERVICE
DOOR.
SUPPLIER SHALL VERIFY TYPE OF KEY-OPERATED HARDWARE REQUIRED WITH

MANUFACTURER(S) / SUPPLIER(S) OF OVERHEAD ROLLING COUNTER SHUTTER AND OVERHEAD
COILING SERVICE DOOR.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 087100.1
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Installation of all electrified and mechanical door hardware items is described and required to be
provided in other related Sections of these Specifications.
Hardware supplier must be an authorized, direct factory distributor of all door hardware and
access control products specified herein to ensure compliance and service of these products.
C. Unless otherwise approved by the Architect / Engineer, furnish all door hardware items as described in
the door hardware schedule.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing,
sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the
doors and door frames on which they are installed.
B. This Section includes the following:

1. Butt Hinges
2. Continuous Geared Hinges
3. Cylinders and Keys
4. Mortise Latchsets and Locksets
5. Mortise Deadlocks
6. Padlocks
7. Door Closers
8. Overhead Door Stops and Holders
9. Wall and Floor Stops
10. Door Pulls
11. Push Plates
12. Mop and Kick Plates
13. Lock Guards
14. Thresholds
15. Door Sweeps
16. Drip Strips
17. Door Silencers
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications
2. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry
3. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers
4. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors And Frames
5. Section 08 3313 - Coiling Counter Shutters
6. Section 08 3323 - Overhead Coiling Doors
7. Hardware specified under other Sections is excluded from this Section.
DOOR HARDWARE PAGE 1 OF 15

SECTION 087100
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Standards of the following as referenced:

1. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design
2. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI)
3. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI)
4. International Building Code (2012 Edition)
5. International Code Council - Electrical Code (2012 Edition)
6. Intertek Testing Services - Warnock Hersey (ITS-WH)
7. Life Safety Code (NFPA 101, 2012 Edition)
8. National Electrical Code (NFPA 70, 2017 Edition)
9. North Carolina State Building Code (2002 Edition with 2004 Amendments)
10. Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives (NFPA 80, 2010 Edition)
11. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
B. Regulatory standards of the following as referenced:

1. Department of Justice, Office of the Attorney General, Americans with Disabilities Act, Public
Law 101-336 (ADA)
2. ICC/ANSI A117.1: Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, 2009 Edition.
A. Refer to applicable headings for system description for electric hardware products.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification, Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures; for submittal procedures.
B. Product data including manufacturers’ technical product data for each item of door hardware,
installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to
show compliance with requirements. Clearly highlight each submitted item and data applicable to this
project on manufacturer’s cut sheets. Arrange cut sheets in an order in which each item appears in the
hardware sets.
C. Final hardware / access control systems schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to
ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Door Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into vertical
format “hardware sets” indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or
opening. Use specification Set Numbers with any variations suffixed with A, B, etc.. Do not
deviate or rename from originally specified Set Numbers. Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.
b. Name and manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on drawings both on floor plans
and in door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
f. Mounting locations for hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
h. Keying information.
i. Provide a complete and detailed system of operating and elevation diagrams specifically
developed for each opening requiring electrified hardware, except openings where only
electromagnetic door holders and/or door position switches are specified. Provide these
diagrams with the hardware schedule submittals, for approval. The following shall be
included:
(1) Point-To-Point wiring diagram.

SECTION 087100
(2) Elevation of each door.
(3) Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems.
j. Cross reference numbers used within schedule deviating from those specified.
(1) Column 1: State specified item and manufacturer.
(2) Column 2: State prior approved substituted item and its manufacturer.
2. Submittal Sequence: Submit schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of
hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work (e.g.: hollow metal frames) which is
critical in the project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop
drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the
coordinated review of hardware schedule.
3. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner’s final
instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.
D. Samples of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated and tagged with full description for
coordination with schedule. Submit samples prior to submission of final hardware schedule.
1. Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through
submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be
incorporated in the work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements.
E. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door
hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating
and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
1. This is a requirement of the door hardware supplier to furnish all templates of each required door
hardware item to the suppliers of the hollow metal doors and frames. No templates shall be sent
until all door hardware items have been approved.
F. Contract closeout submittals: At the completion of this project, furnish to the Owner two [2] copies of
an Owner’s Operation and Maintenance Manual. This manual shall consist of a labeled, hardcover,
three-ring binder with the following technical information.
1. Maintenance instructions for each door hardware item.
2. Manufacturers’ catalog cut sheets for each of their respective products.
3. Parts list for each of the manufacturers’ respective products.
4. Final “Approved” Door Hardware Schedule.
5. Final “Approved” Keying Schedule.
6. Warranty: Completed and executed warranty forms.
A. General Contractor’s Investigation: Prior to Contract Execution, the General Contractor shall have
thoroughly investigated the entities such as employees, consultants, sub-contractors, manufacturers,
suppliers, etc., and other entities that will be performing work or supplying materials, products,
equipment, or systems for this project, to ensure that they comply with all of the qualifications and
requirements mentioned or implied in the Contract Documents. If it is later determined that any of the
previously mentioned entities do not comply with the qualifications and requirements specified in the
Contract Documents, the General Contractor will be required to replace that entity with a qualified entity
at no increase in Contract Sum or Contract Time.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers,
security equipment, etc.) from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering
products complying with requirements.
C. Qualifications of Supplier: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing

facilities, who has been furnishing hardware and installation in the Project’s vicinity for a period of not
less than [5] years. The supplier shall be, or shall employ, a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant
(AHC) who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation about the

SECTION 087100
Project’s hardware requirements, to the Owner, Architect, and Contractor. A certified Architectural
Hardware Consultant (AHC) shall prepare all door hardware schedules. Supplier shall be responsible
for proper coordination of all door hardware items and access control items with related sections, to
insure compatibility of products.
1. Hardware supplier must be an authorized, direct factory distributor of all door hardware products
specified herein to ensure compliance and service of these products.
2. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final
instructions in writing.
D. Qualifications of Installer: The hardware installer shall have no less than five [5] years of documented
experience in the installation of hardware of similar quantities and types as required for this project.
The installer’s qualifications shall be submitted to the architect, in writing, for approval by the
architect before any work shall commence.
E. Fire-Rated Openings: Furnish door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard
No. 80 and requirements of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Furnish only items, of door hardware,
that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, ITS-WH, FM, or other testing and inspecting
organization acceptable to the Authorities Having Jurisdiction, for use on types and sizes of doors
indicated, in compliance with the requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.
Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and [S] Label
requirements. Specifications must be cross-referenced and coordinated with door and frame
manufacturers to ensure that total door opening engineering is compatible with UL10C Standard for
Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
F. Product Qualifications: Manufacturers names and numbers are used to indicate the standards of design
and quality. Submittals should include a sheet listing grade of item, duty rating (if applicable) and
finish.
G. Substitutions: All substitution requests are required to be submitted prior to the bid date and complying
with the procedures and time frame as outlined in Division 01, General Requirements. Approval of
submitted products is at the discretion of the architect and his hardware consultant.
H. General Contractor, hardware distributor, and installers shall count, coordinate, and store all door
hardware items herein, verifying complete counts of all items scheduled and furnished. The
manufacturer’s and Owner’s representatives will inspect the installation of the door hardware items
during that phase of construction. Any deficiencies in installation of all materials included herein shall
be corrected before installation continues.
I. At the project’s completion, the Owner’s representative shall accompany the architect and General
Contractor during the door hardware items punch list phase of the project close-out, ensuring the
Owner’s representative is familiar with all applications and systems, as installed. Refer to additional
requirements under 3.0 EXECUTION.
J. Pre-Installation Meeting: Prior to door hardware installation, the General Contractor / Construction
Manager shall request a hardware installation meeting to be held at the project’s location. This meeting
shall convene no later than one month prior to the hardware’s installation. The types of hardware this
meeting shall include are: locksets, exit devices, and door closers. The manufacturer’s representatives
of the above listed products, in conjunction with the hardware supplier for this project, shall conduct the
installation training. All hardware installers shall be required to attend this meeting to receive certificate
of authorized training. This meeting shall serve as door openings coordination and review of all shop
drawings from related trades prior to the hardware installation.
1. The hardware supplier shall include any related meeting costs in their proposal.

SECTION 087100
1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule and include
basic installation instructions with each item or package.
B. Packaging of door hardware is the responsibility of the supplier. As material is received by the
hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with
appropriate hardware set numbers to match the set numbers of the approved hardware schedule. Two or
more identical sets may be packed in the same container.
C. Door hardware supplier shall deliver all individually packaged hardware items promptly to the place of
installation (Shop or Project Site); direct factory shipments are not acceptable unless agreed upon
beforehand. Hardware supplier shall coordinate delivery times and schedules with the contractor.
D. Inventory door hardware jointly with General Contractor, representatives of hardware supplier, and
hardware installer, until each is satisfied that the count is correct.
E. At time of hardware delivery, door hardware supplier in conjunction with contractor shall verify and
check in all hardware items. Contractor must report all shortages (discrepancies with shipping
documents) within five (5) working days.
F. General Contractor shall provide a secure lock-up for the door hardware and security equipment
delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of the hardware items
that are not immediately replaceable, so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware
losses, both before and after installation.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. All materials must be warranted against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one [1]
year from date of acceptance of this project, unless otherwise noted. Any evidence of misuse or abuse
voids all warranties. These warranties shall be each manufacturer’s standard written warranty.
B. Special Warranties:
1. Continuous Geared Hinges: Limited Lifetime.
2. Mortise Cylinders, Rim Cylinders, and Interchangeable Core Cylinders: Three [3] Year Period.
3. Mortise Latchsets and Locksets: Three [3] Year Period.
4. Mortise Deadbolts: Three [3] Year Period.
5. Padlocks: Three [3] Year Period.
6. Door Closers: Thirty [30] Year Period.
7. Thresholds, Door Sweeps, and Drip Strips: Three [3] Year Period.
C. Any manufacturer whose standard written warranty does not equal or exceed the requirements listed
above must provide a letter stating that they will extend their warranty to comply with the requirements
of this specification.
D. All of the manufacturer’s fasteners and attachments supplied with each hardware item must be installed
to maintain the manufacturer’s fire listing and/or warranty.
E. Refer to Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures; for additional warranty requirements.
1.9 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: General Contractor shall furnish a complete set of specialized tools
and maintenance instructions as needed for the Owner’s continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.

SECTION 087100
B. Parts Kits: Furnish manufacturers’ standard parts kits for locksets, exit devices, and door closers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
Substitutions: Where specific manufacturers and their products are listed as “acceptable
manufacturers”, provide those products from specified manufacturers; subject to
compliance with specified requirements stated herein.
Any request for substitutions shall be submitted prior to the bid date and complying
with the procedures and time frame as outlined in Division 01 - Instructions To
Bidders. Approved substitutions will be provided by addendum only.
Substitutions will not be allowed where only one manufacturer and their products are
listed.
A. BUTT HINGES
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Bommer Industries, Inc. - BB5002.
b. Hager Companies - BB1191.
c. IVES; Division of Allegion, PLC (IVE) - 5BB1.
2. Characteristics:
a. Tested to be in accordance with ANSI / BHMA A156.1.
b. Type: Five [5] knuckle, full mortise, ball bearing.
c. Templates: Furnish only template-produced units.
d. Fasteners: Furnish Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements.
(1) For metal doors and frames, install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes.
(2) For wood doors and frames, install threaded-to-the-head wood screws.
(3) For fire-rated wood doors, install #[12] x [1-1/4] inch, threaded-to-the-head steel wood
screws.
(4) Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.
e. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, furnish hinge pins as follows:
(1) Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins.
(2) Out-Swing Interior Doors: Non-rising pins with Non-removable pins.
(3) In-Swing Exterior / Interior Doors: Non-rising pins.
(4) Tips: Flat button and matching plug. Finished to match leaves.
f. Size: Size hinges in accordance with the specified manufacturer’s published
recommendations.
g. Quantity: Furnish one pair of hinges for all doors up to [5] feet [0] inch high. Furnish one
additional hinge for each additional [2-1/2] feet or fraction thereof.
B. CONTINUOUS GEARED HINGES

a. Hager Companies - 780-224HD.
b. IVES; Division of Allegion, PLC (IVE) - 224XY.
c. Select Products Limited - SL24 HD.
2. Characteristics:
a. Tested to be in accordance with ANSI / BHMA A156.26, Grade [1].
b. Templates: Furnish only template-produced units.
c. All hinges are to be “Concealed Surface Mount”.
d. Hinges to be manufactured of extruded 6063-T6 aluminum alloy with an anodized finish.
e. All hinge profiles to be manufactured to template bearing locations at [2-9/16] inch spacing.
f. All hinges are to be furnished factory cut for each door size.

SECTION 087100
g. Provide split nylon bearings at each hinge knuckle for quiet, smooth, self-lubricating
operation.
h. Provide hinges capable of supporting door weights up to [450] pounds, and successfully
tested for [1,500,000] cycles.
i. Fasteners: Furnish manufacturer’s standard fasteners based upon recommendations for each
installation.
C. CYLINDERS AND KEYS

a. BEST®; A Division of dormakaba Holding, Inc.
b. Sargent Manufacturing Company; An ASSA ABLOY Group company.
c. Schlage Lock Company, LLC; Division of Allegion, PLC (SCH).
2. Characteristics:
b. New Key System: Furnish all interchangeable core cylinders keyed into a New Key System
for this project.
c. Equip all cylinders and locksets with, a minimum of, [6] pin, interchangeable core, tumbler
cylinders.
d. Furnish cylinders and locksets with temporary, brass / keyed, “construction” interchangeable
cores for the duration of the time of construction. Construction cores, master keys, and
control keys shall not be part of the Owner’s permanent key system or furnished on the same
keyway (or key section) as the Owner’s permanent key system. Construction cores, master
keys, and control keys are the property of the manufacturer and shall be returned when the
permanent cores and keys are installed. Remove these “construction” interchangeable cores
Only when directed by the Architect and / or Owner.
e. Furnish final permanent interchangeable cores and keys, for installation by the Owner.
f. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
g. Comply with the Owner’s instructions for keying requirements and, except as otherwise
indicated, furnish individual change keys for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike
with a group of related locks.
(1) Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies the cylinder
manufacturer’s key symbol, and notation, “DO NOT DUPLICATE”.
h. A keying meeting between the Owner and a representative of the successful door hardware
distributor shall be arranged subsequent to the return of the Approved Door Hardware
Schedule. A keying schedule will be established by the door hardware’s representative and
submitted to the Owner, for approval. After the Owner’s review, the keying schedule shall be
returned to the distributor’s representative such that the permanent cores and keys can be
prepared on a timely basis.
i. Permanent cores and keys will be transmitted directly to the Owner by the door hardware
distributor. The Owner shall be responsible for the installation of the permanent cores and the
return of the construction cores and keys.
j. Key Material: Furnish keys of nickel silver only.
k. Key Quantities: Furnish the following quantities of keys for the entire project.
(1) Ten [10] Each - Construction Master Keys
(2) Two [2] Each - Construction Control Keys
(3) Five [5] Each - Permanent Grand Master Keys
(4) Five [5] Each - Permanent Master Keys (for each area)
(5) Two [2] Each - Permanent Control Keys
(6) Four [4] Each - Permanent Change Keys
(for each keyed door opening)
Deliver all construction interchangeable cores and keys to the General

Contractor.
Deliver all permanent interchangeable cores and keys to the Owner, via
Registered Mail.

SECTION 087100
D. MORTISE LATCHSETS AND LOCKSETS
a. BEST®; A Division of dormakaba Holding, Inc. - 45H Series x “3H” Trim Design.
b. Sargent Manufacturing Company; An ASSA ABLOY Group company - 8200 Series x “LNJ”
Trim Design.
c. Schlage Lock Company, LLC; Division of Allegion, PLC (SCH) - L Series x “03A” Trim
Design.
2. Characteristics:
a. Conforms to and/or exceeds all ANSI / BHMA A156.13, Series [1000], Grade [1]
Operational, Grade [2] Security. ANSI / ASTM F476-84 Grade [30], U.L. Listed. Conform
to and/or exceed [800,000] cycle ANSI Grade [1] requirements.
b. Latchsets and locksets shall have all functions available in a one size case, fabricated from
heavy wrought steel, zinc dichromate plated for corrosion resistance and lubricity of internal
parts. Cases shall be closed on all sides to protect internal parts.
c. Handing of all latchsets and locksets shall be reversible without disassembly of lockcase.
d. Latchsets and locksets shall have adjustable, beveled and armored fronts, with standard [2-
3/4] inch (70mm) backsets, with full [3/4] inch ([19] mm) throw two or three-piece
mechanical stainless steel anti-friction latchbolts, one-piece stainless steel 1” throw deadbolts,
and stainless steel auxiliary bolts.
e. All latchsets and locksets with latchbolts, regardless of trim design, shall be listed by
Underwriters Laboratories for [3] hour fire rated and lesser classified doors.
f. Lock trim (knobs, levers, sectional or escutcheon) shall be throughbolted through the lockcase
to assure correct alignment and proper operation.
g. Latchsets and locksets shall be furnished with replaceable breakaway spindles, designed to
resist excessive force from vandalism, preventing damage to lever trim and internal lock case
components.
h. Lever handles shall be one-piece, solid, brass, bronze, or stainless steel.
i. Armor fronts, escutcheons, and roses shall be fabricated from brass, bronze, or stainless steel.
j. Strikes shall be [16] gauge, curved, brass, bronze or stainless steel, with [1] inch deep strike
boxes, and furnished with lips of sufficient lengths to clear trim and protect clothing.
E. MORTISE DEADLOCKS
a. BEST®; A Division of dormakaba Holding, Inc. - 48H Series.
b. Sargent Manufacturing Company; An ASSA ABLOY Group company - 4870 Series.
c. Schlage Lock Company, LLC; Division of Allegion, PLC (SCH) - L400 Series.
2. Characteristics:
a. Tested to be in accordance with ANSI / BHMA A156.5, Series [1000], Grade [1] Operational,
Grade [2] Security, U.L. / cU.L. Listed. Conform to and/or exceed [800,000] cycle ANSI
Grade [1] requirements.
b. Deadlocks shall have all functions available in a one size case, fabricated from heavy wrought
steel, zinc dichromate plated for corrosion resistance and lubricity of internal parts. Cases
shall be closed on all sides to protect internal parts.
c. Deadlocks shall be non-handed, completely reversible.
d. Deadlocks shall have adjustable, beveled and armored fronts, with standard [2-3/4] inch ([70]
mm) backsets and one-piece stainless steel [1] inch throw deadbolts.
e. All deadlocks shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories for [3] hour fire rated and lesser
classified doors.
f. Armor fronts shall be fabricated from brass, bronze, or stainless steel.
g. Strikes shall be brass, bronze or stainless steel, [1-1/8] inch x [3-1/2] inch, lipless, and
furnished with a dust box.
F. PADLOCKS
a. BEST®; A Division of dormakaba Holding, Inc. - 41B Series.
b. Sargent Manufacturing Company; An ASSA ABLOY Group company - 758 Series.

SECTION 087100
c. Schlage Lock Company, LLC; Division of Allegion, PLC - KS Series.
2. Characteristics:
a. Padlock’s case shall be, a minimum of, [1-3/4] inch Width, [2] inch Height, [7/8] inch
Thickness, machined from solid one piece brass, with a capacity of accepting a [6] Pin
interchangeable core cylinder.
b. Shackle shall be, a minimum of, [5/16] inch diameter, [2] inch clearance height, [3/4] inch
opening width, made of a special alloy steel, through-hardened for added resistance to
forcible entry, and multiple-plated for corrosion resistance.
c. Shackle shall lock at both the heel and toe, through the aid of two hardened steel balls,
providing extra security against physical attack.
G. DOOR CLOSERS
a. Corbin Russwin, Inc.; An ASSA ABLOY Group company - DC8000 Series.
b. LCN; Division of Allegion, PLC (LCN) - 4040XP Series.
c. Sargent Manufacturing Company; An ASSA ABLOY Group company - 281 Series.
2. Characteristics:
a. Door closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with a high strength cast
iron cylinder; which have been tested and certified under ANSI Standard A156.4, Grade [1].
b. Hydraulic fluid shall be of an all weather type, requiring no seasonal closer adjustment.
c. Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and allowing
for reduced opening force for the physically handicapped. Hydraulic regulations shall be by
tamper-proof, non-critical valves. Closers shall have separate adjustment for latch speed,
general speed and back check.
Pressure Relief Valves (PRV) shall not be acceptable.
d. All closers shall have solid forged steel main arms and where specified shall have a spring
loaded stop in the soffit shoe; as indicated in Door Hardware Sets. Where door travel on out-
swing doors must be limited, use spring loaded stop in the soffit shoe type closers. Auxiliary
stops are not required when spring loaded stop in the soffit shoe type closers are used.
e. Closers shall have non-metallic full, plastic, covers, which provides complete enclosure.
f. All closers shall be certified to exceed Ten Million [10,000,000] full load cycles by a
recognized independent testing laboratory. All closers shall be of one manufacturer and shall
maintain the manufacturer’s thirty [30] year warranty.
g. Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be
accessible to the physically handicapped, provide adjustable units complying with ADA and
ANSI A117.1 provisions for door opening force.
h. Closers shall be attached utilizing through bolts with wood and machine screws.
i. Closers to be installed to allow door swing as shown on plans. Doors swinging into exit
corridors shall provide for corridor clear width as required by code. Where possible, mount
closers inside rooms.
j. Powder coating finish to be certified to exceed [100] hours salt spray testing by ETL, an
independent testing laboratory used by BHMA for ANSI certification.
Lacquer or painted finish on metal components shall not be acceptable.
k. Where indicated in Door Hardware Sets, door closers shall be furnished with a Special Rust
Inhibitor Pre-Treatment.
H. OVERHEAD DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

a. Glynn-Johnson; Division of Allegion, PLC (GLY) - 90 / 450 Series.
b. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; An ASSA ABLOY Group company - 9 / 10 Series.
c. Sargent Manufacturing Company; An ASSA ABLOY Group company - 590 / 1540 Series.

SECTION 087100
2. Characteristics:
b. Furnish medium and heavy duty door stops and holders, non-handed / reversible, of a, where
detailed, carbon steel base substrate material or 300 Series stainless steel substrate material.
c. Furnish units with a shock absorbing mechanism for added durability.
d. All units are to be installed with the jamb bracket mounted on the stop, unless as indicated in
Door Hardware Sets, “Angle Jamb Brackets” are specified to be utilized. Overhead door
stops / holders specified with “Angle Jamb Brackets” are used to convert the installation of
the units to hinge side mounting.
I. WALL AND FLOOR STOPS

a. Burns Manufacturing, Inc. - 560 / 536.
b. IVES; Division of Allegion, PLC (IVE) - WS401CVX / FS446.
c. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. - 1270CX / 1224.
2. Characteristics:
b. Wall stops shall have a solid forged brass housing with a concealed, in the convex bumper,
attachment. Furnish with wood screw and plastic anchors.
c. Floor stops shall be fabricated from solid cast brass or bronze. Furnish with wood screws and
plastic anchors / machine screws and lead expansion shield anchors.
d. Install floor stops in such a position that they permit maximum door swing, but do not present
a hazard or obstruction.
J. DOOR PULLS
a. Burns Manufacturing, Inc. - 26D x HCP.
b. IVES; Division of Allegion, PLC (IVE) - 8103EZHD-2.
c. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. - 1195-3.
2. Characteristics:
b. Door pulls shall be fabricated of [1] inch diameter, solid material, [12] inch center-to-center
length, and shall comply with the recommendations of the Americans with Disabilities Act
(A.D.A.).
c. Fasteners: Furnish manufacturer’s standard fasteners; as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.
K. PUSH PLATES
a. Burns Manufacturing, Inc. - 50 Series.
b. IVES; Division of Allegion, PLC (IVE) - 8200 Series.
c. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. - 1001 Series.
2. Characteristics:
b. Push plates shall be fabricated of [.050] inch wrought material with four beveled edges.
c. Furnish an [8] inch x [16] inch plate size.
d. Fasteners: Furnish exposed, Phillips oval head sheet metal screw mounting fasteners.
L. MOP AND KICK PLATES

a. Burns Manufacturing, Inc. - MP50 / KP50 Series.
b. IVES; Division of Allegion, PLC (IVE) - 8400 Series.
c. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. - KM050 / KO050 Series.
2. Characteristics:
b. All kick plates shall be US [18] gauge [.050] inch thick of stainless steel material.

SECTION 087100
c. Fabricate mop plates not more than [1] inch less than door width on “Pull” side and kick
plates not more than [1-1/2] inches less than door width on “Push” side; or as indicated in
Door Hardware Sets.
d. Heights:
(1) Mop Plates shall be [4] inches in height.
(2) Kick Plates shall be [10] inches in height.
e. Bevel all four [4] edges.
f. Fabricate mop and kick plates with countersunk screw holes.
g. Furnish mop and kick plates with #[6] x [5/8] inch flat head, stainless steel, sheet metal
screws.
M. LOCK GUARDS
a. Burns Manufacturing, Inc. - 623.
b. IVES; Division of Allegion, PLC (IVE) - LG12.
c. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. - 5001.
2. Characteristics:
b. Lock guards shall be fabricated of [13] gauge, minimum, stainless steel.
c. Units shall be non-handed.
d. These units shall cover the latchbolt area of the door and lock, thereby providing added
protection from burglars, vandals, or normal abuse.
e. Furnish lock guards with two [2] carriage bolts and hex nuts or socket head sex nuts fasteners,
without any exposed fasteners on the face of the units.
N. THRESHOLDS
a. National Guard Products, Inc.
b. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
c. Zero International, Inc.; Division of Allegion, PLC (ZER).
2. Characteristics:
a. Thresholds shall be certified by an independent testing laboratory to meet the requirements of
ANSI / BHMA A156.21 and in accordance with the requirements of A.D.A.A.G. and ICC /
ANSI A117.1.
b. Thresholds shall be furnished in an aluminum extrusion that is of alloy 6063 hardness T-5.
c. Furnish thresholds with a rugged abrasive “non-skid” finish of a nickel-aluminum composite,
which is bonded by a heat-fusion process to the metal surface, by an exothermic reaction, at
high temperatures.
d. Thresholds shall be furnished with [1/4] inch – [20] x [3] inch stainless steel sleeve anchors.
O DOOR SWEEPS
2. Characteristics:
b. Door sweeps shall be furnished encased in a high quality aluminum extrusion that is of alloy
6063 hardness T-5.
c. Furnish all door sweeps with neoprene / vinyl seals, rain drip strips, and #[6] x [1] inch
stainless steel, pan Phillips head, sheet metal screw fasteners.
P. DRIP STRIPS

SECTION 087100
2. Characteristics:
a. Drip strips shall be furnished in an aluminum extrusion that is of alloy 6063 hardness T-5.
b. Furnish all drip strips with #[6] x [1] inch stainless steel, pan Phillips head, sheet metal screw
fasteners.
Q. DOOR SILENCERS
a. Burns Manufacturing, Inc. - 500.
b. IVES; Division of Allegion, PLC (IVE) - SR64.
c. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. - 1229A.
2. Characteristics:
b. Silencers shall be fabricated from a gray, opaque, rubber material, and featuring a pneumatic
design that, once installed, forms an air pocket to absorb shock, reduce noise of door closing,
eliminate door rattle, and provide constant tension for door latches or locks.
c. Silencers shall be installed into pre-drilled hollow metal door frames, which if installed
properly, shall become Tamper-Proof.
d. Silencers shall be installed into pre-drilled wood door frames. To prevent removal, a small
brad shall be driven into the stop strips of the wood frames and through the stems of the
silencers.
e. Furnish three [3] for each single door, four [4] for each single “Dutch” door, and two [2] for
each pair of doors.
2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer’s Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers’ products that have manufacturer’s name or
trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with
required fire-rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect.
1. Manufacturer’s identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using
manufacturer’s standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser
(commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI /
BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI / BHMA A156.18 for
finish designations indicated. Do not furnish “optional” materials or forming methods for those
indicated, except as otherwise specified.
C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for
machine screw installation.
1. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as
specifically indicated.
2. Provide screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except
as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware
finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as
possible, including “prepared for paint” surfaces to receive painted finish.
3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the
extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-
bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their
use is the only means of adequately fastening the hardware. Coordinate with wood doors and
metal doors and frames where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide
sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.

SECTION 087100
2.3 HARDWARE FINISHES
A. Match items to the manufacturer’s standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets (or push-
pull units if no latch of lock sets).
B. Provide finishes that match those established by ANSI or, if none established, match the Architect’s
sample.
C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and
other qualities complying with the manufacturer’s standards, but in no case less than specified by the
referenced standards, for the applicable units of hardware.
D. The designations used to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI / BHMA A156.18,
“Materials and Finishes”, including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes, shown by certain
manufacturers for their products.
1. Butt Hinges US32D (630) Satin Stainless Steel
2. Continuous Geared Hinges US28 (628) Satin Aluminum, Clear Anodized
3. Mortise Cylinders and Rim Cylinders US26D (626) Satin Chromium
4. Interchangeable Core Cylinders US4 (606) Satin Brass

US26D (626) Satin Chromium
5. Mortise Latchsets and Locksets US32D (630) Satin Stainless Steel
6. Mortise Deadlocks US32D (630) Satin Stainless Steel
7. Padlocks US4 (606) Satin Brass
8. Door Closers AL (689) Powder Coated Aluminum
9. Overhead Door Stops and Holders US32D (630) Satin Stainless Steel
10. Wall and Floor Stops US26D (626) Satin Chromium
11. Door Pulls US32D-316 (630-316) Satin Stainless Steel
12. Push Plates US32D (630) Satin Stainless Steel
13. Mop and Kick Plates US32D (630) Satin Stainless Steel
14. Lock Guards US32D (630) Satin Stainless Steel
15. Thresholds US27 (719) Mill Finish Aluminum, Uncoated
16. Door Sweeps US27 (719) Mill Finish Aluminum, Uncoated

US28 (628) Satin Aluminum, Clear Anodized
17. Drip Strips US28 (628) Satin Aluminum, Clear Anodized
18. Door Silencers GREY (Rubber)

SECTION 087100
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following applicable publications, except as
specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and, except as otherwise
indicated, by the Architect.
1. “Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames” by the
Door and Hardware Institute.
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted
or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface
protection with finishing work specified in the Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted
items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.
C. Sets units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as
necessary for proper installation and operation.
D. Where scheduled, door pulls shall be through-bolted with bolt heads concealed behind push plates.
E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and
anchors in accordance with industry standards.
F. Set thresholds, for exterior and interior doors, in a full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic
sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07, Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers.
G. Gasketing and Seals: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations to the extent
installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.
H. Hardware installer shall be responsible for installation of all mechanical and electromechanical hardware
items contained within this specification, in accordance with the manufacturer’s technical installation
guidance, and in addition to all applicable code requirements.
3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function
of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the
application made.
1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space
or area, the hardware installers shall return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance
or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area.
Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors.
Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
C. Door Hardware Supplier’s Field Service:

1. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware
finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware.
D. Architect’s Hardware Consultant’s Field Service:

1. Inspect door hardware items for correct installation and adjustment after complete installation of
the door hardware.
2. File a written report of this inspection directly to the Architect.

SECTION 087100
E. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six [6] months after the acceptance of hardware in
each area, the Installer shall return to the project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper
function of doors and hardware. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions
to the maintenance procedures. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty
design, materials or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of any current or predictable
problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware and furnish copy to the Owner’s
Agent / Representative.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 087100
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Insulating Glass.
2. Glass for windows, doors and interior borrowed lites.
3. Glazing sealants and accessories.
4. Section 08 5113 – Aluminum Windows.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):

1. GDSG-1-2019: Glass Design for Sloped Glazing.
2. TIR-A7-2011: Sloped Glazing Guidelines.

1. ANSI Z 97.1 - Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications
and Methods of Test.

1. C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
2. C 1048- Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and
Uncoated Glass.
3. C 1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass.
4. C 1376 - Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Glass.
5. E 1886 - Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors and Storm
Shutters Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials.
6. E 1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors
and Storm Shutters Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes.
7. E 2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation.
D. Glass Association of North America (GANA):

1. FGMA Glazing Manual.
2. FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America.
3. LGDG - Laminated Glass Design Guide; Glass Association of North America.
E. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC):

1. 16CFR-1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and
design criteria, including analysis data and calculations signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
GLAZING PAGE 1 OF 8
SECTION 088000
B. Product Data on Insulating Glass Unit, Glazing Unit Glazing Types: Provide structural, physical and
environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling and installation requirements.
C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and
environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements, and identify available
colors.
D. Fabricator's Certification: Submit fabricator's certification acceptable to manufacturer.
E. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a
schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.
G. Samples: For each glass product specified except clear uncoated glass.
1. Flat Glass Materials: Two [4] inch by [4] inch ([102] mm by [102] mm) samples of each glass
type specified.
2. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Two [12] inch by [12] inch ([305] mm by [305] mm) samples
representative of unit construction.
H. Warranty documents specified herein.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum [5] years documented experience producing glass products
specified this section.
B. Fabricator Qualifications, Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Certified by AGC Glass Company to
fabricate solar control coated, heat strengthened and tempered glass products.
1. Minimum of [5] years’ experience manufacturing sealed insulating glass units meeting ASTM
E 2190.
C. Installer Qualifications: Minimum [5] years’ documented experience installing products specified in
this section and approved by fabricator.
D. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain all glass products from a single manufacturer for each glass type:
clear float glass, coated float glass and insulating glass.
E. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one
component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following testing and inspecting
agency:
1. Insulating Glass Certification Council.
2. Associated Laboratories, Inc.
F. Fire Resistance Rated Glass: Each lite shall bear permanent, non-removable label of UL certifying it
for use in tested and rated fire resistive assemblies.
A. Delivery: Deliver glass in manufacturer's or fabricator's original containers and packaging, with
labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
GLAZING PAGE 2 OF 8
SECTION 088000
B. Storage: Store glass in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Store glass in manufacturer's or fabricator's original containers and packaging, with labels
clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. Protect from damage.
2. Store products in manufacturer's labeled packaging until ready for installation.
3. Store glass in clean, dry area indoors.
4. Protect from exposure to direct sunlight and freezing temperatures.
5. Apply temporary coverings loosely to allow adequate ventilation.
6. Protect from contact with corrosive chemicals.
7. Avoid placement of glass edge on concrete, metal, and other hard objects.
8. Rest glass on clean, cushioned pads at [1/4] points.
C. Handling: Handle glass in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Protect glass from damage during handling and installation.
2. Do not slide one lite of glass against another.
3. Do not use sharp objects near unprotected glass.

B. Field Measurements: When construction schedule permits, verify field measurements with drawing
dimensions prior to fabrication of glass products.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Conference: Convene a pre-installation conference to establish procedures to maintain optimum

working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Coated Glass:

1. Manufacturer’s standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated glass
units that deteriorate within specified warranty period.
2. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as failure of coating, including discoloration or
de-lamination, under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and
cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass:

1. Manufacturer’s standard form in which insulating glass manufacturer agrees to replace
insulating glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period.
2. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is
not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to
manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of
glass.
C. Provide the manufacturer's [10] year limited warranty.
GLAZING PAGE 3 OF 8
SECTION 088000
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis - Glazing: Contract Documents are based on products by:

1. AGC Glass Company, North America
11175 Cicero Drive, Suite 400
Alpharetta, Georgia 30022
Telephone: 800-251-0441
Website: (www.agcglass.com)
A. General Performance: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and impact
loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following:
defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects
in construction.
B. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201
for Category [II] materials.
C. Delegated Design: Design glass installed adjacent to walking surfaces, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
1. Differential deflection of adjacent unsupported edges shall not exceed glass thickness when
subjected to 50 lbf/ft (730 n/m) applied horizontally to one panel at any point up to 42 inches
(1067 mm) above the adjacent walking surface.
2. Base design on thickness at thinnest part of the glass.
2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as
needed to comply with requirements indicated.
B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat strengthened float
glass, or Kind FT fully tempered treated float glass as needed to comply with requirements indicated.
Where heat treated glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat strengthened float glass or Kind FT fully
tempered float glass as needed to comply with requirements indicated. Where fully tempered glass is
indicated, provide Kind FT fully tempered float glass
C. Heat Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, ASTM C 1036; Type [I]; Quality-Q3; Class [I] (clear)
unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to
bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Glass Fabrication - General:

1. Edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written
instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications; and to comply with
system performance requirements.
GLAZING PAGE 4 OF 8
SECTION 088000
2. Free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets.
B. Clear Float Glass:

1. Compliance: ASTM C 1036, Type [I], Quality q3, Class [1].
C. Uncoated, Tinted Float Glass:

1. Compliance: ASTM C 1036; Type [I]; Quality q3; Class [2].
2. Provide AGC Glass - Solarshield.
3. Tint Color: Solarshield Majestic Grey.
D. Heat Treatment for Float Glass:

1. Heat Treatment: As scheduled and indicated on Drawings.
2. Heat Treatment: Kind FT, fully tempered.
E. Sputtered Coated Low-Emissivity Tinted Vision Glass:

1. Compliance: ASTM C 1376, coated by sputtered process, ASTM C 1036, Type [I], Quality-Q3,
Class [2] (Tinted) unless otherwise indicated, and complying with other requirements specified.
2. Tint Color: Solarshield Majestic Grey.
F. Pyrolytic Coated Low-Emissivity Clear Vision Glass:

1. Compliance: ASTM C 1376, coated by pyrolytic process, ASTM C 1036, Type [I], Quality-Q3,
Class [I] (clear) unless otherwise indicated, and complying with other requirements specified.
2. Provide AGC Glass: Energy Select 73P.
2.5 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain
watertight seal, made from one of the following:
1. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.
2.6 GLAZING SEALANT
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other
materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing
channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting
glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of
installation.
B. Glazing Sealant: Specified in Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealers.
2.7 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, [100] percent solids elastomeric tape;
non-staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as
recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying
with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.
2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.
3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.
GLAZING PAGE 5 OF 8
SECTION 088000
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on
both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. AAMA 810.1, Type [1], for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. AAMA 810.1, Type [2], for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a
full bead of liquid sealant.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard,
requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with
a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type [A] durometer hardness of [85], plus or
minus [5].
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to

maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: Specified in Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealers.
G. Extruded Silicone Sound Gasket for Butt Glazed Panels: C R Laurence CRL EZ Glaze Soundstrip.
1. Size: For [1/2] inch ([12] mil) glass.
2. Gap Between Lites of Glass: [1/4] inch ([6] mil).
3. Color: Clear.
2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.
B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with
slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
2.10 MONOLITHIC GLASS UNITS
A. Fabrication: Provide monolithic glass units in glass types and sizes required to fit openings as
scheduled and indicated on Drawings.
B. Float Glass:
1. Glass Types: As scheduled or indicated on Drawings.
a. Glass Type: Clear float glass.
b. Glass Type: Tinted float glass.
2. Heat Treatment: As scheduled or indicated on Drawings.
a. Heat Treatment: Kind FT, fully tempered.
GLAZING PAGE 6 OF 8
SECTION 088000
2.11 TINTED SOLAR CONTROL INSULATING GLASS UNITS
A. Fabrication: Provide tinted solar control insulating glass units in glass types and sizes required to fit
openings as scheduled and indicated on Drawings.
B. Tinted Solar Control Insulating Glass Units Assembly:

1. Overall Unit Thickness: [25] mm ([1] inch).
2. Outboard Lites: Tinted float glass.
a. Heat Treatment: As scheduled or indicated on Drawings.
b. Heat TrKind FT, fully tempered.
3. Glass Thickness: [6] mm ([1/4] inch).
4. Interspace Content: Argon.
5. Inboard Lites: Clear float glass.
a. Heat Treatment: As scheduled or indicated on Drawings.
b. Heat Treatment: Kind FT, fully tempered.
6. Glass Thickness: [6] mm ([1/4] inch).
7. Performance Attributes:
a. Transmittance:
1) Visible: [54] percent.
2) Solar: [37] percent.
3) UV: [20] percent.
b. Reflectance:
1) Out: [11] percent.
2) In: [13] percent.
3) Solar: [10] percent.
c. Winter U-Value Argon: [0.30].
d. Shading Coefficient: [0.57].
e. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: [0.50] ([100] % Air).
f. LSG: [1.08].
g. DW Index: [0.43].
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive glass.

1. Verify glazing openings are correct size and within tolerance.
2. Verify glazing channels, recesses, and weeps are clean and free of obstructions.
B. Field Quality Control:

1. Coated glass, when viewed from minimum of 10 feet (3 m), exhibiting slightly different hue or
color not apparent in hand samples, will not be cause of rejection of glass units, as determined
by Architect.
2. Verify glass is free of chips, cracks, and other inclusions that could inhibit structural or
aesthetic integrity.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare openings and substrates using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving
the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
GLAZING PAGE 7 OF 8
SECTION 088000
B. Do not proceed with installation until openings and substrates have been prepared using the methods
recommended by the manufacturer and deviations from manufacturer's recommended tolerances are
corrected.
C. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of deviations from
manufacturer's recommended installation tolerances and conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install glass in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals, except where
local codes or GANA Glazing Manual indicate more stringent requirements.
B. Install sealants in accordance with Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers.
C. Installation of glazing in steel doors and borrowed-lite partitions is specified in Section 08 1113 -
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
D. Installation of glazing in flush wood doors is specified in Section 08 1513 – Laminated Plastic Doors.
E. Installation of glazing in aluminum storefront framing is specified in Section 08 4113 – Aluminum

Framed Entrances and Storefronts.
F. Installation of glazing in glazed aluminum curtain wall is specified in Section 08 4413 – Glazed
Aluminum Curtain Wall.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean glass promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Remove labels from glass surface.
C. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage glass.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed glass from damage during construction.
B. Protect installed glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations.
C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. Remove and replace
glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in other ways during construction period,
including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism.
END OF SECTION
GLAZING PAGE 8 OF 8
SECTION 088000
SECTION 089100 - LOUVERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Fixed louvers and frames.
2. Insect screens.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA):

1. Standard 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):

2. 621 - Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated
Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates.
C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures.
D. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM):

3. E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
and Doors under the Influence of Wind Loads.
A. Design Requirements: Design louvers to withstand:

1. A wind force of not less than [25] pounds per square foot. Louver blades, frames, mullions, and
anchorages shall be demonstrated to withstand the specified wind design load.
2. Movement caused by an ambient temperature range of [120] degrees F and a surface
temperature range of [160] degrees F.
3. Louvers [120] inches x [84] inches or larger will be fabricated and installed in multiple sections.
B. Performance Requirements: Bear AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for air performance.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer’s standard product data.
LOUVERS PAGE 1 OF 3
SECTION 089100
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include locations, elevations, sections, dimensions, materials, finishes, attachment, and
relationship to adjacent construction.
C. Samples:
1. Submit: [3] inch x [3] inch coating samples showing available colors.
2. Submit: [6] inch long blade samples.
D. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Certificates of Compliance: AMCA licensed test data.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis - Louvers: Contract Documents are based on products by:

1. The Airolite Company, LLC
PO Box 410
Schofield, Wisconsin 54476
Telephone: 715-841-8757
Website: (www.airolite.com)
B. Equivalent products by following manufacturers are acceptable:

1. Construction Specialties, Inc. (www.c-sgroup.com)
2. Industrial Louvers. (www.industriallouvers.com)
3. Nystrom, Inc. (www.nystrom.com)
4. Ruskin Co. (www.ruskin.com)
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum:
1. ASTM B221, 6063-T5 or T6 alloy and temper.
B. Screen: Mesh aluminum.

1. Size to specified louver dimensions.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Metal Louvers:
1. Source: Airolite K609HP or approved substitute.
2. Type: [Fixed blade.]
3. Depth: [4] inches.
4. Blade angle: [45] degrees.
5. Blade spacing: [4.125] inches on center.
6. Blade profile: [Straight.]
7. Performance requirements:
a. Minimum Free Area Velocity: [963] fpm.
b. Minimum Air Volume Flow Rate: [400] cfm per gross sq. ft. area.
c. Maximum State Pressure: [0.104] in. H20.
8. Linkage: Concealed in frame.
9. Gutters: Drain gutters in head and jamb members
LOUVERS PAGE 2 OF 3
SECTION 089100
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchors: Hot-dip galvanized steel, type best suited to application.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate frame from minimum [0.081] inch thick aluminum.
B. Fabricate blades from minimum [0.081] inch thick aluminum.
C. Fit components to hairline joints. Weld connections, with welds ground smooth and filled.
D. Join vertical mullions with I-shaped slip connection.
E. Fabricate horizontal mullions to appear as single louver.
F. Mount screen in rewireable U-shaped frame.
G. Provide metal sheeting of same material and finish as frame to blank out unused portions of louvers.
2.6 FINISHES
A. To be selected from manufacturer’s full range.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings.
B. Set plumb, level, and rigid, with flush hairline joints.
C. Anchor to supporting construction.
D. Prevent contact of aluminum and dissimilar metals by use of zinc rich paint, bituminous coating, or
non-absorptive gaskets.
E. Install screen on inside face.
F. Install blank out sheeting over unused portions of louver.
G. Install wiring between power supply and operator and between operator and controls.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Touch up minor scratches and abrasions in [prime] [finish] coat to match factory finish.
B. Adjust operable louvers for proper operation.
END OF SECTION
LOUVERS PAGE 3 OF 3
SECTION 089100
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Suspended metal channel soffit framing.
2. Suspended metal channel ceiling framing.
5. Section 09 8116 – Acoustic Blanket Insulation.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. A591/A591M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, for Light
Coating Weight (Mass) Applications.
2. A641 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
4. A1003/A1003M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and
Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members.
5. C635 - Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In
Panel Ceilings.
6. C636 - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical
Tile and Lay-In Panels.
7. C645 - Standard Specification for Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and
Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
8. C754 - Standard Practice for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached
Gypsum Wall board, Backing Board, or Water-Resistant Backing Board.
9. E90 - Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions.
10. E413 - Standard Test Method for Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.
B. Gypsum Association (GA):

1. GA-600 – Fire Resistive Design Manual.
C. Steel Stud Manufacturer’s Association (SSMA):

1. Member Directory.
D. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL):

1. Fire Resistance Directory.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Illustrate framing types, gages, and locations.

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PAGE 1 OF 4

SECTION 092216
4. Typical installation methods.
B. Shop Drawings: Framing layout, components, connections, fastenings, and pertinent details.
C. Verification Samples: Two representative units of each type, size, pattern and color.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Current member of SSMA.
B. The following paragraph specifies a minimum level of experience required of the parties performing
the work of this section. Retain if required and edit to suit project requirements.
C. Installer Qualifications: Minimum [5] years documented experience in work of this Section.
1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene a conference approximately two weeks before scheduled commencement of the Work.
Attendees shall include Architect, Contractor and trades involved. Agenda shall include schedule,
responsibilities, critical path items and approvals.
A. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
B. Protect from damage due to weather, excessive temperature, and construction operations.

conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's standard limited warranty unless indicated otherwise.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design – Metal Support Assemblies: Contract documents are based on products by:
1. Cemco
13191 Crossroads Parkway, North, Suite 325
City of Industry, California 91746
Telephone: 800-775-2362
Website: (www.cemcosteel.com).

SECTION 092216
A. Fire Resistance Ratings:

1. Construct assemblies to achieve fire resistance ratings indicated on Drawings.
a. Conform with applicable GA or UL design number.
b. Conform with referenced design number.
2. If requirements of assembly numbers referenced conflict with Contract Document
requirements, conform to assembly requirements.
B. Acoustic Ratings: Construct assemblies to achieve acoustic ratings indicated on Drawings, tested to
ASTM E90 and classified in accordance with ASTM E413.
C. Deflection Limits:
1. Limit deflection of partitions based on [5] psf ([239.4] Pa) uniform design load.
a. Partitions receiving tile, plaster, or cut stone: L/240.
b. Other partitions: L/120.
2. If partition height exceeds stud manufacturer's limiting height for applicable loading and
deflection, install bracing above ceiling, decrease stud spacing, or increase stud gage.
3. Limit deflection of ceilings: L/360.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Steel: A653/A653M or ASTM A1003/1003M.

1. Class: G40 hot dip galvanized.
2.4 COMPONENTS
A. Provide components in accordance with ASTM C645.
B. Suspended Ceiling Framing per ASTM C635: Manufactured specifically for suspended gypsum board
ceiling applications.
1. Tees: Double web design; [1-1/2] inches ([38] mm) high with [1-3/8] inch ([35] mm) wide
knurled faces, with interlocking ends and punched holes for cross tees and hanger wires.
2. Material: Galvanized steel.
C. Suspended Soffit Framing:

1. Runner Channels. Cold roll formed steel.
a. Channel Depth: [1-1/2] inches [(38] mm).
b. Galvanized Steel Thickness: [16] gage.
2. Furring Channels: Cold roll formed steel.
a. Channel Depth: [3/4] inches ([19] mm).
b. Galvanized Steel Thickness: [16] gage.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners:
1. Pan Head Screws: [3/8] inch ([9] mm) long pan head screws.
B. Wire: ASTM A 641, galvanized steel.

1. Hanger Wire: [8] gage base steel thickness.
2. Tie Wire: [18] gage base steel thickness, soft annealed.
C. Furring Channel Clips: Galvanized steel.

SECTION 092216
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF CEILING FRAMING
A. Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Hanger Wire Spacing:

1. On Center Maximum Along Runner Channels: [36] inches ([914] mm).
2. Within [6] inches ([152] mm) of ends of channels; secure to structure above.
C. Runner Channels Spacing:

1. On Center Maximum: [48] inches ([1219] mm).
2. Within [6] inches ([152] mm) of abutting construction.
3. Position channels for ceiling height; level and saddle tie along channels.
4. Clearance Between Channels and Abutting Construction: [1] inch ([25] mm).
5. Overlap channels ends [12] inches ([305] mm) at splices. Secure each end with double loop tie
wire.
D. Furring Channels Spacing:

1. On Center Maximum: [16] inches ([406] mm).
2. Perpendicular to Runners and Within [6] inches ([152] mm) of abutting construction.
3. Clearance Between Channels and Abutting Construction: [1] inch ([25] mm).
4. Secure to runners with clips on alternate sides of runners; saddle tie if clips cannot be
alternated.
5. Overlap channel ends [8] inches ([203] mm) at splices. Secure each end with double loop tie
wire.
E. Where openings interrupt furring or runner channels, install reinforcing to restore stability.
F. Provide double runner or furring channels side by side where expansion and control joints occur; do
not continue channels over joints.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Clean and touch up galvanized coatings at welded and abraded surfaces in accordance with:
1. ASTM A780, Annex A2. Repair Using Paints Containing Zinc Dust.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 092216
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Standard gypsum board wall systems.
2. Acoustically enhanced gypsum board wall systems.
3. Cement Board.
4. Trim accessories, joint compound, control joints, fasteners and sealants.
5. Schedule – Level of Finish for gypsum board surfaces.
3. Section 07 2000 – Acoustic Insulation.
5. Section 09 2200 – Metal Support Assemblies.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. C 473 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products.
2. C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
3. C 919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.
4. C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
5. C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of
Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.
6. C 1177 - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing.
7. C 1178 - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel.
8. C 1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing.
9. C 1325 - Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cementitious Backer
Units.
10. C 1396 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.
11. C 1629 - Standard Classification for Abuse Resistant Nondecorated Interior Gypsum Panel
Products and Fiber reinforced Cement Panels.
12. C 1658 - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels.
13. D 3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior
Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.
14. E 72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building
Construction.
15. E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
16. E 90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission
Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.
17. E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
18. E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
19. E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 176;
C.
20. G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi.
GYPSUM BOARD PAGE 1 OF 8

SECTION 092900
B. Gypsum Association (GA):
1. 201 - Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings.
2. 214 - Recommended Levels of Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.
3. 216 - Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
4. 226 - Application of Gypsum Board to Curved Surfaces.
5. 235 - Gypsum Board Typical Mechanical and Physical Properties.
6. 236 - Joint Treatment under Extreme Weather Conditions.
7. 238 - Guidelines for Prevention of Mold Growth on Gypsum Board.
8. 600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual. 9.
9. 801 - Handling and Storage of Gypsum Panel Products: A Guide for Distributors, Retailers, and
Contractors.
C. Wall and Ceiling Bureau. (WCB):

1. TB-52010 - Control Joints for Gypsum Board.
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. Fire Resistance Directory.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's published descriptive literature for gypsum board types, trim accessories, and
control joints pertinent to this Section.
2. Recycled Content: Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and
postconsumer recycled content per unit of product.
3. Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate distance between manufacturing facility
and the project site.
B. Test Data:
1. ASTM E 119 Certified testing lab Design for each proprietary fire-resistive wall and ceiling
assembly listing manufacturers and products.
2. Unlisted manufacturers and products not accepted.
1. Company with minimum [5] years documented experience.
2. Able to supply complete and tested systems conforming to code.
1. Company specializing in work of this section with documented experience in commercial
quality work of comparable scope.
A. Conform to Section 016510, GA-238, GA-801, and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Deliver materials in original unbroken containers or bundles bearing name of manufacturer and brand.
C. Verify products undamaged before acceptance at Project Site. Do not use products with visible signs
of mold growth and damage.

SECTION 092900
A. Temperature, Ventilation and Moisture: Conform to GA-216 and manufacturer’s instructions.

Maintain temporary controls to regulate heating, ventilating, moisture, and humidity levels. Do not
begin taping and finishing until following conditions are achieved.
1. Building: Fully enclosed and free of standing water. Watertight roofing and wall envelope
systems in place, except where Architect accepts water and mold resistant gypsum board.
2. Temperature: Between [50] and [95] degrees F for minimum [48] hours.
3. Gypsum Board Moisture Content: [0.4] percent on gypsum scale ([12] percent on wood scale).
4. Wood Substrate Moisture Content: Maximum [16] percent.
B. Lighting: Sufficient temporary lighting to perform work to achieve specified finishes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS – GYPSUM PANELS
A. Basis of Design – Gypsum Panels: Contract documents are based on products by:
1. National Gypsum Company Headquarters
2001 Rexford Road
Charlotte, North Carolina 28211
Phone: 704-365-7300
E-Mail: (ng@nationalgypsum.com)
2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements for tested fire rated assemblies.

1. GA 600, Fire Resistance Design Manual.
2. UL, Fire Resistance Directory, or Intertek Testing Services (WHi).
3. IBC Chapter 25, including Section 2506, 2508, 2509 and related tables.
4. ICC Evaluation Reports and Standards.
2.3 MATERIALS – GYPSUM PANELS
A. Standard Gypsum Panels: Gold Bond® BRAND Gypsum Board

1. Panel Physical Characteristics:
a. Core: Regular gypsum core
b. Surface Paper: [100] percent recycled content paper on front, back and long edges
c. Long Edges: [Tapered].
d. Overall thickness: [1/2] inch.
e. Panel complies with requirements of ASTM C 1396.
C. Lightweight Gypsum Panels: Gold Bond® BRAND High Strength LITE™ Gypsum Board
a. Core: Regular gypsum core.
b. Surface paper: [100] percent recycled content paper on front, back and long edges.
c. Long Edges: [Tapered].
d. Overall thickness: [1/2] inch.
e. Panel complies with requirements of ASTM C 1396.
E. Acoustically Enhanced Gypsum Panels: Gold Bond® BRAND SoundBreak® XP® Gypsum Board:
1. Performance Criteria: Wall Assembly STC: (metal stud construction) [55] and [57].

SECTION 092900
a. Core:
1) Inner Layer: Viscoelastic damping polymer.
2) Outer Layers: Enhanced, high density mold-resistant gypsum core.
b. Overall thickness: [1/2] inch, Standard.
c. Overall Thickness: [5/8] inch, Type [X].
d. Long Edges: Tapered.
e. Mold Resistance:
1) [10] when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273.
2) [0] when tested in accordance with ASTM G 21.
f. Surface Abrasion Resistance: Classification Level [3] in accordance with ASTM C 1629.
g. Indentation Resistance: Classification Level [1] in accordance with ASTM C 1629.
h. Soft Body Impact Resistance: Classification Level [2] in accordance with ASTM C
1629.
i. Hard Body Impact Resistance: Level [1] in accordance with ASTM C 1629.
F. Cement Backerboard Basis of Design: PermaBase® BRAND Cement Board.

1. Panel Physical Characteristics.
2. Core: Cementitious, water-durable.
3. Surface: Fiberglass mesh on front and back.
4. Long Edges: Tapered.
5. Overall Thickness: [5/8] inch.
6. Panel complies with requirements of ASTM C 1325 and ANSI A 118.9.
7. Density: [72] lbs. per cu. ft.
8. Water Absorption: Not greater than [8] percent when tested for [24] hours in accordance with
ASTM C 473.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Treatment for Gypsum Panels: As recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for intended
purpose.
1. Tape: Manufacturer’s standard paper tape. Fiberglass tape not accepted.
2. Compound: Manufacturer’s standard.
3. Conform to GA-201 and GA-216 for reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water.
4. Do not use topping compounds for embedding tape or as first coat over trims and fasteners.
B. Primer/Surfacer for Level [5] Finish: USG Tuff-Hide Primer-Surfacer.
C. Texture Finishes:
1. Primer.
2. Wall Texture: Fine.
3. Ceiling Texture: Fine.
D. Sound attenuation insulation: Specified in Section 07 2000 – Acoustic Insulation.
E. Joint Sealant at Exposed Joints: Paintable, Non-setting, non-staining: Specified Section 07 9200 –
Joint Sealers.
F. Acoustical Sealant at Exposed Joints: Non-sag, paintable, non-staining, latex sealant conforming to
ASTM C834. Tested to ASTM E90 for reduction of airborne sound transmission through perimeter
joints and openings in building construction at representative assemblies: Specified Section 07 9200 –
Joint Sealers.

SECTION 092900
G. Acoustical Sealant at Concealed Joints:
1. Synthetic Rubber Joint Sealant: Single component, non-skinning, non-hardening, [90] percent
solids, acoustical properties conforming to ASTM C919 and to ASTM E90.
2. Water Based Siliconized Acrylic Latex:
3. Install 2 beads under steel stud framing channel and wood plates and into [1/2] inch space
between top of floor and bottom of gypsum board and plaster systems.
H. Firestopping and Smoke Sealants: Specified Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.
2.6 TRIM
A. Provide trim shapes as required to cover and make neat edges.
B. Paper Faced Metal Bead and Trim: ASTM C1047, electro-galvanized steel with paper face and
flanges.
1. Outside corner beads.
2. Inside corners.
3. L-type edge trims.
4. J-shaped edge trim.
C. Metal Trim Shapes: ASTM C1047:

1. Galvanized steel Expanded Flange Corner Bead, L-Trim, and J-Trim.
2. Galvanized one-piece L-Trim, and J-Stop.
3. Zinc Control Joint No. [093].
2.7 FASTENERS
A. Fasteners for Gypsum Panels: Conforming to ASTM C1002. Bugle or pan head, and lengths as
required for securing materials in place.
1. Light Gauge Metal Framing: Type [S].
2. [18] Gauge or Heavier Metal Framing: Type S-12.
B. Fasteners for Cement Board: Conforming to ASTM C1002. Bugle or pan head, and lengths as
required for securing materials in place.
1. Light Gauge Metal Framing: [1-1/4] inch minimum corrosion resistant sharp point or drill point
bugle head screw.
2. As required in specified fire-rated assembly.
C. Pneumatic Fasteners:
1. Minimum [0.100] inch diameter.
2. Length to penetrate minimum [1/4] inch beyond steel stud framing.
3. Aericote [1000] corrosion-resistant coating.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.6 EXAMINATION
A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section before beginning.
B. Verify framing systems, including backing, insulation, vapor barriers, work of Division 15 and 16, and
other systems ready for work of this Section.

SECTION 092900
C. Verify work of Section 05 4000, Section 07 2116, Section 09 2216, and Section 09120 for metal
framing, insulation installation, and vapor barrier requirements prior to beginning work of this
Section.
D. Building Envelope: Except where moisture and mold-resistant gypsum board panels are installed and
accepted by Architect, conform to following:
1. Do not begin work until building envelope is fully enclosed and temperature, ventilation, and
humidity are controlled.
2. Do not begin work under conditions that gypsum board installation may be exposed to contact
with water.
3.7 PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage.

B. Avoid soiling, spatter, and damage to work of other trades. Use cover cloths, or other means of
protection. Remove, clean, and repair soiled or damaged work.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM PANELS
A. Conform to ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Corner Trim: Reinforce external corners with specified corner beads.
C. Edge Trim: Install square edged metal trim bead at exposed edges and boundaries of areas and where
abutting dissimilar materials.
D. Control Joints: Conform to WCB Tech Bulletin Control Joints and GA-234, except as otherwise
indicated. Verify that required double framing is in place before installing control joints.
1. Door and Other Openings: Install control joints at each side of wall opening and at both sides of
wall, except alcoves and similar wall configurations.
2. Continuous Wall Planes: Install control joints floor to ceiling at each [30] lineal foot of wall.
3. Ceilings: Install across ceiling at each [50] lineal foot distance and each [2500] square foot of
ceiling area.
4. Joints with Other Materials: Install where gypsum board meets masonry, concrete, and other
materials, except where joints are concealed under horizontal chair rails or other trim.
E. Other Trim: Install as indicated or required for complete and finished installation.
F. Panel Joints:
1. Layout: Design to reduce joints to minimum.
2. Install board in maximum lengths to minimize horizontal and vertical joints.
3. Start installation of panels at exterior wall to position butt joints as far away from exterior wall
as possible.
4. Place edges in contact and fit neatly, without forcing into place.
5. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions and on same side of wall surface at adjacent joints.
6. Maintain [1/2] inch clearance from bottom of wall panel and top of floor. Seal with acoustical
sealant.
7. In order to prevent wicking of moisture, do not let gypsum board rest on floor after installation.
G. Single Layer Systems: Install in accordance with ASTM C840. Where modified, amended, or required
by fire resistive or sound isolation system, conform to the requirements of the manufacturer's tests, as
approved.

SECTION 092900
H. Double Layer Systems: Install in accordance with ASTM C840, including System VIII for double
layer gypsum wallboard installations applied with screws. Conform to required fire resistance
standards.
I. Moisture and Mold Resistant Gypsum Board: Install at restrooms, kitchen, janitorial closets, and areas
where moisture is present. Do not install as backer board for ceramic tile.
J. Joint Sealant and Acoustical Sealant: Install to completely fill void between wallboard edges and
adjacent surface.
K. Firestopping and Smoke Sealants: Install in accordance with Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.
L. Plumbing, HVAC, and Electrical: Coordinate with Division 22, Division 23 and Division 26. Provide
for installations and penetrations of ductwork, equipment, receptacles, and other work.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL PARTITIONS
A. Extend acoustical partitions past intersecting non-acoustical partitions.
B. Install acoustical insulation:

1. Butt to framing members and adjacent construction.
2. Carry around pipes, wiring, outlets, and other construction without voids.
3. Press against one gypsum board surface to form slight air space on opposite side.
C. Seal acoustical partitions at perimeter and around penetrations:

1. Apply continuous bead of sealer between gypsum panel edges and adjacent construction.
2. Seal space between gypsum panels at control joints, prior to installing metal control joint.
3. Apply sealer to penetrations through partitions.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL INSULATION ABOVE CEILINGS
A. Install acoustical insulation in continuous layer. Butt tightly to adjacent insulation and to other
construction.
B. Carry over pipes, wiring, boxes, and other construction without voids.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF CEMENT BOARD
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and ANSI A 108.11.
3.7 TRIM AND JOINT FINISHING
A. Joints and Interior Angles: Embed tape in joint compound and apply three separate coats of joint
compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Tool joint compound smooth and free
of tool marks and rides.
1. Center reinforcing tape over joint and coat into compound leaving approximately [1/64] inch to
[1/32] inch under tape to provide proper bond.
2. Follow with skim coat to embed tape, but not to function as second coat.
3. Allow embedding coat to thoroughly dry prior to application of second coat.
4. Allow second coat to thoroughly dry.
5. Apply third coat evenly over and extending beyond second coat on joints, feathering to smooth
uniform finish.

SECTION 092900
B. Beads, Trim, Fastener and Joint Depressions:
1. Cover with three coats of taping and joint compound. Apply in different directions making
smooth transitions with adjacent surfaces.
2. Allow sufficient drying time between coats.
3. Leave depressions flush with surface plane.
3.8 TOLERANCES
A. Shim panels as necessary to conform to tolerances.
B. Between Board Faces: [1/16] inch offset.
3.9 ADJUSTING
A. Remove and replace following gypsum board installations:

1. Board in contact with water for over [18] hour time period.
2. Gypsum core exhibiting dampness or water intrusion.
3. Facing paper exhibiting delamination.
4. Facing or core exhibiting mold growth or turning black.
5. Board sagging or warped.
6. Board directly exposed to water determined to be contaminated.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean beads, screeds, metal base, metal trim, mechanical and electrical items, and other work.
B. Wipe clean, leaving work ready for finish specified under other Sections.
C. As work is completed in each space, clean all rubbish, utensils, and surplus materials from the space.
Leave floors broom-clean.
3.11 SCHEDULE - LEVEL OF FINISH FOR GYPSUM BOARD SURFACES
A. Conform to GA-214, ASTM C840, manufactures instructions, and provisions of Contract Documents.
1. Level 1: Plenums, service corridors; above ceilings.
2. Level 2: Areas of water resistant gypsum backing board under tile; exposed areas where
appearance is not critical.
3. Level 3: Areas to receive heavy or medium textured coatings; heavy-grade wallcoverings.
4. Level 4: Areas to receive flat sheen paint finish; light textured coatings; lightweight
wallcoverings.
5. Level 5: Areas to receive gloss, semi-gloss sheen paints; critical lighting conditions.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 092900
SECTION 093000 - TILING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Porcelain wall finishes.
2. Finishing and edge protection profiles for walls.
7. Section 10 2819 – Shower Enclosures.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. A108/A118/A136.1 - American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile.
2. A137.1 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile.

1. A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
2. A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Welded Steel Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete.
3. C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
4. C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
5. C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
6. C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath.
7. C1028 - Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like
Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.
8. D226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing.
9. D227 - Standard Specification for Coal-Tar Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing.
10. D4263 - Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet
Method.
11. D4397 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial and
Agricultural Applications.
C. Tile Council of North America (TCNA):

1. Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
D. Resilient Floor Covering Institute (RFCI):

1. Floor Score Certification Program.
TILING PAGE 1 OF 6
SECTION 093000
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include
instructions for using grouts and adhesives.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with
dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details.
C. Samples:
1. Tile: [1] inch x [1] inch samples in each specified color.
2. Grout: [1/2] inch x [1/2] inch x [3] inch long samples in each specified color.
D. Certificates:
1. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
2. Master Grade Certificate: Submit for each type of tile, signed by the tile manufacturer and tile
installer.
E. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stain removal
methods.
A. Maintain one copy of and ANSI A108/A118/A136 and TCNA (HB) on site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified

in this section, with minimum [5] years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of [5]
years of documented experience.
A. Deliver mortar, adhesive, and grout containers bearing hallmark certifying compliance with reference
standards.
B. Protect adhesive containers from freezing and overheating according to manufacturer's instructions.
A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment.
B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature above [50] degrees F ([10] degrees C) and below [100]
degrees F ([38] degrees C) during installation and curing of setting materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis – Porcelain Tile: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. Florida Tile, Inc.
988 Govenors Lane, Suite 250
Lexington, Kentucky 40513
Telephone: 800-352-8453
Website: (www.floridatile.com)
TILING PAGE 2 OF 6
SECTION 093000
B. Acceptable Manufacturers – Setting and Grouting: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. TEC / H.B. Fuller Construction Products, Inc.
1105 S. Frontenac Road
Aurora, Illinois 60504
Telephone: 800-832-9002
Website: (www.tecspecialty.com)
2.2 MATERIALS – CERAMIC TILE
A. Porcelain Tile, Type [CT-1]: ANSI A137.1 Standard Grade.

1. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373.
2. DCOF: ASTM 137.1 / ANSI: [>/-0.42].
3. Size: [3] inch x [6] inch ([76.2] cm x [156.4] cm).
4. Thickness: [1/4] inch ([7.3] mm).
5. Edges: Rectified.
6. Surface Finish: Glossy.
7. Color: 310 Artic.
8. Pattern: Brick Offset.
9. Product: Florida Tile – Streamline.
B. Porcelain Tile, Type [CT-2]: ANSI A137.1 Standard Grade.

1. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373.
2. DCOF: ASTM 137.1 / ANSI: [>/-0.42].
3. Size: [3] inch x [6] inch ([76.2] cm x [156.4] cm).
5. Edges: Rectified.
6. Surface Finish: Glossy.
7. Color: 310 Artic.
8. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove shapes in sizes
coordinated with field tile.
9. Product: Florida Tile – Streamline.
2.3 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes in sizes
coordinated with field tile.
1. Applications:
a. Open Edges: Bullnose.
b. Inside Corners: Jointed.
c. Floor to Wall Joints: Cove base.
2. Manufacturers: Same as for tile.
2.4 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.4.

1. Applications: Use this type of bond coat where Large and Heavy Tile (LHT) mortar is indicated
.
2. Products:
a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX N 23 MICROTEC:
www.ardexamericas.com/#sle.
TILING PAGE 3 OF 6
SECTION 093000
b. Custom Building Products; ProLite Premium Rapid Setting Large Format Tile Mortar,
with Multi-Surface Bonding Primer: www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle.
c. LATICRETE International, Inc; 257 TITANIUM: www.laticrete.com/#sle.
d. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete 735 Premium Flex: www.merkrete.com/#sle.
e. H.B. Fuller Construction Products Brand; TEC Ultimate Large Tile Mortar:
www.tecspecialty.com/#sle.
2.5 GROUTS
A. High Performance Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout.
1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is
indicated.
2. Use sanded grout for joints [1/8] inch ([3.2] mm) wide and larger.
3. Use un-sanded grout for joints less than [1/8] inch ([3.2] mm) wide.
4. Color(s):
a. Shower Walls – 910 Bright White.
b. Break Room Backsplash - As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
5. Products:
a. TEC, an H.B. Fuller Construction Products Brand; TEC Power Grout 550:
www.tecspecialty.com/#sle.
2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Joint Sealers: Specified in Section 07 9200.
B. Backer Board: Specified in Section 09 2900 – Gypsum Board.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Clean surfaces to remove loose and foreign matter that could impair adhesion. Verify that subfloor
surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to
receive tile.
B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are
dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.
C. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tiling material manufacturer
and setting material manufacturer.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding work from damage.
B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.
C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness
tolerances.
D. Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape
joints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge.
TILING PAGE 4 OF 6
SECTION 093000
E. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's
instructions.
A. Install tile, thresholds and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1a through
ANSI A108.19, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations.
B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly.
Align floor joints.
D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout
joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.
E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.
F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings.
G. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
H. Install thresholds where indicated.
I. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
J. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive.
K. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.
L. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.
M. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with either bond
breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding.
3.4 INSTALLATION – WALL TILE
A. On exterior walls install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W244, thin-set over cementitious
backer units, with waterproofing membrane.
B. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W244, using
membrane at toilet rooms.
C. Over coated glass mat backer board on studs, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W245.
D. Where mortar bed is indicated, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W222, one coat method.
E. Over wood studs without backer install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W231, mortar bed,
with membrane where indicated.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.
TILING PAGE 5 OF 6
SECTION 093000
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide protection for completed work using non-staining sheet coverings.
B. Prohibit traffic on tile floors for minimum [4] days after installation.
END OF SECTION
TILING PAGE 6 OF 6
SECTION 093000
SECTION 096500 - RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Resilient tile flooring.
2. Resilient base.
3. Resilient stair accessories.
4. Installation accessories.
2. Section 03 3000 – Cast in Place Concrete.
3. Section 09 3000 – Tiling.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. D2047 - Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Flooring
Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine.
2. E648 - Standard Test Method for Flooring Radiant Panel Test.
3. F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring.
4. F970 - Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit.
5. F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Tile.
6. F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete
Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.
B. Resilient Floor Covering Institute (RFCI):

1. Floor Score Certification Program.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics;
including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Showing installation details and locations of borders, patterns, locations of any floor
inserts and any seams.
C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial
selection.
D. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, [4] inch by [4] inch ([100] mm by [100] mm) in size
illustrating color and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified.
E. Concrete Subfloor Test Report: Submit a copy of the moisture and alkalinity (pH) test reports.
F. Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring manufacturer

and adhesive manufacturer that condition of subfloor is acceptable.
G. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and

suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.
RESILIENT FLOORING PAGE 1 OF 6

SECTION 096500
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified flooring with

minimum [5] years’ documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing specified flooring with minimum [5] years
documented experience.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing concrete slab moisture
testing and inspections of the type specified in this section.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANLDING
A. Upon receipt, immediately remove any shrink-wrap and check materials for damage and that the
material is of the correct style, color, quantity and run number(s).
B. Store all materials off of the floor in an acclimatized, weather-tight space.
C. Maintain temperature in storage area between [55] degrees F ([13] degrees C) and [90] degrees F ([72]
degrees C).
D. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.
E. Do not double stack pallets.
A. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of
[70] degrees F ([21] degrees C) to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above
[55] degrees F ([13] degrees C).
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard warranty against defects in materials and manufacturing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis – Resilient Tile - Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. Tarkett North America
30000 Aurora Road
Solon, Ohio 44139
Telephone: 800-899-8916
Website: (www.tarkettna.com)
A. Design Basis – Resilient Wall Base: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. Tarkett
30000 Aurora Road
Solon, Ohio 44139
Telephone: 800-889-8916
Website: (www.tarkettna.com).

SECTION 096500
2.2 TILE FLOORING
A. Vinyl Composition Tile - Type Excelon SDT. Homogeneous, with color extending throughout
thickness.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Armstrong Flooring, Inc; : www.armstrongflooring.com/#sle.
2. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1066, of Class corresponding to type specified.
3. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum [0.45] watt per square centimeter, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253.
4. Size: [12] inch by [12] inch ([305] mm by [305] mm).
5. Thickness: [0.125] inch ([3.2] mm).
6. Pattern: Monolothic.
7. Color: 51904 Sterling.
2.3 STAIR COVERING
A. Stair Treads: Rubber; full width and depth of stair tread in one piece; tapered thickness.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company: www.johnsonite.com/#sle.
2. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F2169, Type [TV], vinyl, thermoplastic.
3. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum [0.45] watt per square centimeter, when tested in
4. Nominal Thickness: [0.1875] inch ([4.75] mm).
5. Nosing: Square.
6. Striping: [2] inch ([24] mm) wide contrasting color abrasive strips.
a. Color: Black Grit Tape.
7. Texture: Smooth.
8. Pattern: Raised Round.
9. Color: [48] Gray.
B. Stair Risers: Full height and width of tread in one piece, matching treads in material and color.
1. Manufacturers:
2. Thickness: [0.080] inch ([2.0] mm).
C. Stair Stringers: Full height in one piece and in maximum available lengths, matching treads in
material and color.
1. Manufacturers:
D. Stair Nosings: [1-1/2] inch ([38] mm) horizontal return, [1-1/8] inch ([28.5] mm) vertical return, full
width of stair tread in one piece.
1. Manufacturers:

SECTION 096500
2. Material: Rubber.
4. Striping: [2] inch ([24] mm) wide contrasting color abrasive strips.
5. Texture: Smooth.
2.4 RESILIENT BASE
A. Resilient Wall Base – RB-2: ASTM F1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Thermoplastic Rubber
Wall Base, Type [TP], Group [1].
1. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in
2. Height: [4] inch ([10.16] cm).
4. Finish: Satin.
5. Length: Roll.
6. Product: Traditional Wall Base.
a. Color: [48] Gray.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.
B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seam Sealer: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
C. Adhesive: Tarkett 906 Conductive Adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.
E. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might
telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other
chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.
B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are
dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.
C. Cementitious Subfloor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are ready for resilient flooring installation by
testing for moisture and alkalinity (pH).
1. Test as Follows:
a. Alkalinity (pH): ASTM F710.
b. Internal Relative Humidity: ASTM F2170.
c. Moisture Vapor Emission: ASTM F1869.
d. Conduct tests by an independent testing agency acceptable to Owner.
D. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer
and adhesive materials manufacturer.

SECTION 096500
E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare floor substrates for installation of flooring in accordance with Manufacturer’s

recommendations.
B. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer
and adhesive materials manufacturer.
A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of subfloor conditions.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Adhesive-Applied Installation:
1. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
2. Place copper grounding strip in conductive adhesive and apply additional adhesive to top side
of strip before installing static control flooring. Allow strip to extend beyond flooring in
accordance with static control flooring manufacturer's instructions. Refer to Electrical
Specifications for grounding and bonding to building grounding system.
3. Fit joints and butt seams tightly.
4. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
D. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring
under centerline of door.
E. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated.
1. Metal Strips: Attach to substrate before installation of flooring using stainless steel screws.
2. Resilient Strips: Attach to substrate using adhesive.
F. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight
joints.
G. Install flooring in recessed floor access covers, maintaining floor pattern.
H. Install feature strips where indicated.
3.4 INSTALLATION – TILE FLOORING
A. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless otherwise
indicated in manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical pattern.
C. Install square tile to Monolithic pattern. Allow minimum [1/2] full size tile width at room or area
perimeter.
3.5 INSTALLATION – RESILIENT BASE
A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of [18] inches ([45] mm) between
joints.

SECTION 096500
B. Miter external corners. Score back of Product to create clean install at [90] degree corners.
C. Miter internal corners.
D. At exposed ends, use premolded units.
E. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
F. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
3.6 INSTALLATION – STAIR COVERINGS
A. Install stair coverings in one piece for full width and depth of tread.
B. Install stringers configured tightly to stair profile.
C. Adhere over entire surface. Fit accurately and securely.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 096500
SECTION 098116 - ACOUSTIC BLANKET INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Glass fiber acoustical insulation for interior partitions.
3. Section 07 2100 – Batt Insulation
4. Section 09 2200 – Metal Support Assemblies.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. C423 - Test Method for Sound Absorption Coefficient by the Reverberation Room Method.
2. C518 - Test Method for Steady State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat
Flow Meter.
3. C665 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
Construction and Manufactured Housing.
4. E36 - Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750°C.
5. E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
6. E119 - Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations, including
the following:
1. General installation/application instructions.
2. Environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques.
3. Safety requirements for application of products.
A. Installers / Applicator’s Qualifications: Company with a minimum of [5] years in performing work of
this section and certified by manufacturer as an approved Installer / Applicator.
B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Emissions: Provide products complying with GREENGUARD
Product Emission Standard for Children and Schools.
C. Recycled Content: Fiberglass insulation shall contain minimum [50] percent recycled content.
D. Fire Hazard Classification:

1. Noncombustible, tested to ASTM E136.
2. Flame spread/smoke developed rating of [25] / [50] or less, tested to ASTM E84.
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original packaging.
ACOUSTIC BLANKET INSULATION PAGE 1 OF 3

SECTION 098116
B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Store in a dry indoors
location. Protect insulation materials from moisture and soiling.
C. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are
undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
D. Do not install insulation that has been damaged or wet. Remove it from jobsite.
1. An exception may be allowed in cases where the contractor is able to demonstrate that wet
insulation when fully dried out (either before installation or afterward following exposure to
system operating temperatures) will provide installed performance that is equivalent in respects
to new, completely dry insulation. In such cases, consult the insulation manufacturer for
technical assistance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis – Acoustic Batt Insulation: Contract Documents are based on products by:
Toledo, Ohio 43659
Telephone: 800-438-7469
2.2 ACOUSTIC BLANKET INSULATION (SOUND ATTENUATION BATTS), FIRE-RATED
A. Type: Unfaced glass fiber acoustical insulation complying with ASTM C 665, Type [I].
1. Thickness: [3-1/2] inches.
2. Width: [16] inches.
3. Length: [96] inches.
B. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84

1. Maximum flame spread: [10].
2. Maximum smoke developed: [10].
C. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136.
D. Fire Resistance Ratings: Part of ASTM E 119 as part of a complete fire tested wall assembly.
E. Sound Transmission Class: ASTM C 423, STC: [52].
F. Dimensional Stability: Linear Shrinkage less than [0.1] %.
2.3 ACOUSTIC BLANKET INSULATION (SOUND ATTENUATION BATTS), NON-FIRE-RATED
A. Type: Kraft faced glass fiber acoustical insulation complying with ASTM C 665, Type [II], Class [C].
1. Thickness: [3-1/2] inches.

SECTION 098116
B. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
1. Maximum flame spread: Not Rated.
2. Maximum smoke developed: Not Rated.
C. Fire Resistance Ratings: Part of ASTM E 119 as part of a complete fire tested wall assembly.
D. Sound Transmission Class: ASTM C 423, STC: [52].
E. Dimensional Stability: Linear Shrinkage less than [0.1] %.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which the work of this Section is to be performed. Notify the
Architect in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Verify mechanical and electrical services within the partition have been tested and inspected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation.
B. Friction-fit in place until the interior finish is applied. Install batts to fill entire stud cavity. If stud
cavity is less than [96] inches in height, cut lengths to friction-fit against floor and ceiling tracks.
Walls with penetrations require that insulation be carefully cut to fit around outlets, junction boxes
and other irregularities.
C. Where walls are not finished on both sides or insulation does not fill the cavity depth, supplementary
support must be provided to hold product in place.
D. Where insulation must extend higher than [8] feet, temporary support can be provided to hold product
in place until the finish material is applied.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation as recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 098116
SECTION 099100 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Interior paint and coating commercial systems including surface preparation.
2. Exterior paint and coating systems including surface preparation.
B. Scope: Finish surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated,
1. Exterior:
a. Masonry: Concrete masonry units (CMU), cinder or concrete block.
b. Metal: Aluminum, galvanized.
c. Metal, Miscellaneous: Iron, ornamental iron, structural iron and steel, ferrous metal.
2. Interior:
a. Metal: Aluminum and galvanized.
b. Metal, Exposed Galvanized: Exposed Ceilings, ductwork and conduit.
c. Metal: Exposed Structural steel columns, joists, trusses, beams, miscellaneous and
ornamental iron, structural iron, and ferrous metal.
d. Drywall: Walls, ceilings, gypsum board, and similar items.
3. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and
labels unless indicated.
C. Related Sections:
3. Section 05 1200 – Structural Steel Framing.
4. Section 05 5000 – Metal Fabrications.
7. Section 08 3100 – Access Doors and Panels.
9. Division 23 - Common Work Results for HVAC.
10. Division 26 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Master Painters Institute (MPI):

1. Architectural Painting Specification Manual.
B. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):

1. Painting Manual.
2. SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning.
3. SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning.
4. SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning.
5. SP5/NACE No. 1, White Metal Blast Cleaning.
6. SP6/NACE No. 3, Commercial Blast Cleaning.
7. SP7/NACE No. 4, Brush-Off Blast Cleaning.
8. SP10/NACE No. 2, Near-White Blast Cleaning.
9. SP11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal.
PAINTING PAGE 1 OF 7
SECTION 099100
10. SP12/NACE No. 5, Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Metals by Waterjetting Prior to
Recoating.
11. SP 13 / NACE No. 6 Surface Preparation for Concrete.
C. Material Safety Data Sheets / Environmental Data Sheets: Per manufacturer's MSDS/EDS for
specific VOCs (calculated per 40 CFR 59.406). VOCs may vary by base and sheen.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated, including.

1. Product characteristics.
2. Surface preparation instructions and recommendations.
3. Primer requirements and finish specification.
5. Application methods.
6. Cautions for storage, handling and installation.
B. Selection Samples: Submit four paper draw down samples, [8-1/2] inches by [11] inches ([216] mm
by [279] mm) in size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit coating maintenance manual including finish schedule showing where each
product/color/finish was used, product technical data sheets, safety data sheets (SDS), care and
cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, repair of painted and finished surfaces, and color samples
of each color and finish used.
A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with
minimum [5] years’ experience and approved by manufacturer.
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, product name, product code, color
designation, VOC content, batch date, environmental handling, surface preparation, application, and
use instructions.
C. Paint Materials: Store at a minimum of [45] degrees F ([7] degrees C) and a maximum of [90] degrees
F ([32] degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
D. Handling: Maintain a clean, dry storage area to prevent contamination or damage to materials.
A. Do not apply materials when environmental conditions are outside the ranges required by
manufacturer.
B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing the best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
SECTION 099100
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design – Painting: Contract documents are based on products by:

1. Sherwin Williams
101 Prospect Avenue, NW
Cleveland, Ohio 44115
Telephone: 800-474-3784
Website: (www.sherwin-williams.com)
2.2 PAINTINGS AND COATINGS
A. General:
1. Provide factory-mixed coatings unless otherwise indicated.
2. When required, mix coatings to correct consistency in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions before application.
3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless specifically indicated
in manufacturer's instructions.
B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:

1. Architectural coatings VOC limits of State in which the project is located.
C. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and
clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces.
2.3 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR
A. Masonry: Concrete masonry units (CMU), cinder or concrete block.

1. Latex Systems - Satin Finish:
a. 1st Coat: Sherwin-Williams PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25:
www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. [75] to [125] sq ft/gal ([1.8] to [3.1] sq m/L).
b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Sherwin-Williams A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A82 Series:
www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. [4] mils wet, [1.5] mils dry per coat.
B. Concrete: Cementitious Siding:

1. Latex Systems:
a. Satin Finish:
1) 1st Coat: Sherwin-Williams Loxon Concrete and Masonry Primer Sealer,
LX02W50: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. []5.3 ] – [8.0] mils wet, [2.1] – [3.2]
dry.
2) 2nd and 3rd Coat: Sherwin-Williams A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A82 Series:
www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. [4.0] mils wet, [1.5] mils dry per coat).
C. Metal: Aluminum, galvanized.

1. Latex Systems - Satin Finish:
a. 1st and 2nd Coats: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic Eg-Shel, B66-660 Series:
www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. [2] to [4] mils dry per coat.
SECTION 099100
D. Metal: Miscellaneous. Iron, Ornamental Iron, Structural Iron and Steel, Ferrous Metal, Exposed Gas
Piping.
1. Latex Systems - Semi-Gloss Finish:
a. 1st Coat: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-1310 Series:
www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. [5] to [10] mils wet, [1.8] to [3.6] mils dry per coat.
b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 Series:
2.4 PAINT SYSTEMS – INTERIOR
A. Masonry CMU: Concrete, Split Face, Scored, Smooth, High Density, Low Density, and Fluted.
1. Epoxy Systems; Waterbased:
a. Semi-Gloss Finish:
1) 1st Coat: Sherwin-Williams Loxon Block Surfacer, LX01W200:
www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle . ([50] – [100] sq ft/gal).
2) 2nd and 3rd Coat: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased
Epoxy K46- Series: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. ([4] mils wet, [1.5] mils dry
per coat).
B. Metal: Aluminum and Galvanized.

1. Latex Systems: Semi-Gloss Finish High Performance:
www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. [5] mils wet, [2] mils dry per coat.
C. Metal; Galvanized: Exposed Duct work.

1. Multi-Surface Acrylic Coating System - Gloss Finish High Performance:
a. 1st and 2nd Coat: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Multi-Surface Acrylic, B66-1500
Series: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. [5] mils wet, [2] mils dry per coat.
D. Metal: Exposed Structural Steel Columns, Joists, Trusses, Beams, Miscellaneous and Ornamental
Iron, Structural Iron, and Ferrous Metal.
1. Latex Systems - Semi-Gloss Finish High Performance:
www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. [5] mils wet, [2] mils dry per coat.
E. Drywall: Walls, Ceilings, Gypsum Board and similar items.

1. Latex Systems - Flat Finish:
a. 1st Coat: Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28W2600:
b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Flat, B30-2600
Series: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.
c. [4] mils wet, [1.6] mils dry per coat.
F. Drywall: Walls, Ceilings, Gypsum Board and similar items.

1. Latex Systems – Eg-Shel / Satin Finish:
b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Eg-Shel, B20-2600 Series:
SECTION 099100
G. Drywall: Walls, Ceilings, Gypsum Board and similar items.
1. Epoxy Systems; Waterbased – Semi-Gloss Finish:
b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy,
K46 Series: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. [4] mils wet, [1.5] mils dry per coat.
H. Wood: Trim.
1. Latex Systems:
a. Semi-Gloss Finish:
1) 1st Coat: S-W Premium Wall and Wood Primer, B28W8111 ([4] mils wet, [1.8]
mils dry).
2) 2nd and 3rd Coat: Sherwin-Williams ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss,
B31 Series: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. ([4] mils wet, [1.3] mils dry per
coat).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that
may potentially affect proper application.
C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application.
C. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of water and bleach. Rinse with
clean water and allow surface to dry.
D. Concrete:
1. Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.
2. Fill bug holes, air pockets, and other voids with cement patching compound.
3. Prepare concrete according to SSPC-SP 13.
E. Masonry: Remove efflorescence and chalk.
F. Cementitious Siding: Remove dirt, dust and other foreign matter. Pressure clean, if needed, to remove
grease, oil, and loose particles.
G. Gypsum Board: Fill minor defects with filler compound; sand smooth and remove dust prior to
painting.
H. Plaster: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with patching plaster. Make smooth and
flush with adjacent surfaces. Treat textured, soft, porous, or powdery surfaces in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
SECTION 099100
I. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: Prepare concrete according to SSPC-SP 13.
J. Aluminum: Remove surface contamination and oil; wash with solvent according to SSPC-SP 1.
K. Galvanized Surfaces:
1. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent according to SSPC-SP 1.
2. Prepare surface according to SSPC-SP 2.
L. Ferrous Metal:
1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1.
2. Shop-Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make
touch-up patches inconspicuous. Prime bare steel surfaces.
3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using methods recommended by
paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP 6.
4. Protect from corrosion until coated.
M. Wood: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Scrape, sand, and spot prime knots and pitch streaks.
Fill nail holes and imperfections with wood filler and sand smooth.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components and paint separately.
B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Apply coatings at spread rate required to achieve manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness.
D. Regardless of number of coats specified, apply additional coats until complete hide is achieved.
3.3 PRIMING
A. Apply primer to all surfaces unless specifically not required by coating manufacturer. Apply in
accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions.
B. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory
finished if acceptable to top coat manufacturers.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove
daily from site.
B. Clean surfaces immediately of overspray, splatter, and excess material.
C. After coating has cured, clean and replace finish hardware, fixtures, and fittings previously removed.
SECTION 099100
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished coatings from damage until completion of project.
B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 099100
SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Precision tooled metal way finding signage.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. D 635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of
Plastics in a Horizontal Position.
B. Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL):

1. 746c - Standard for Safety of Polymeric Materials -- Use in Electrical Equipment Evaluations.
2. 94 and 94v-0 - Standard for Safety of Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and
Appliances.
C. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADAAG).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's illustrated product literature and specifications to be used, including:
a. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
b. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
c. Installation methods.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include sign locations, sizes, mounting heights, and content.
1. For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size [6] inches ([150] mm) square
representing actual product, color, and patterns.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer to have a minimum of [5] year experience in

manufacturing letters.
B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum [2] year experience installing similar products.
C. Sourcing: All signage shall be manufactured by one manufacturer.
SIGNAGE PAGE 1 OF 3
SECTION 101400
A. Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging bearing the brand name and
manufacturer's identification until ready for installation.
B. Handle materials to avoid damage.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard warranty against defects in materials and
workmanship. Letters shall be guaranteed for the life of the business against defects.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design – Exterior Signage - Contract documents are based on products by:
1. Gemini, Inc.
103 Mensing Way
Cannon Falls, Minnesota 55009
Telephone: (800) 538-8377
Website: (www.geminisignproducts.com)
2.2 PANEL PLAQUES FOR WAYFINDING
A. Panel Plaques for Wayfinding.

1. Material: Aluminum # [5052].
B. Design: Standard ADA Plaque.

1. ADA with raised copy, emblems and Braille shall be integral to the body of the wayfinding
plaque (one-piece construction).
C. Fabrication:
1. Size: [7] inches wide x [8-1/4] inches high.
2. Material Thickness: [1/4] inch ([6] mm).
3. Edges: No border.
4. Raised Copy, Emblems and Braille Finish:
a. Texture: Stipple.
b. Oxidized: Light Oxidized.
5. Background Colors:
a. Color: Standard Black.
6. Surface Finish: Stroke sanding (standard).
D. Mounting:
1. Hardware and instructions are provided for selected mounting methods.
SIGNAGE PAGE 2 OF 3
SECTION 101400
2. Mounting Method: Blind Mount.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in proper relationship to adjacent

construction.
3.4 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION
SIGNAGE PAGE 3 OF 3
SECTION 101400
SECTION 102100 - SOLID POLYMER (HDPE) TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Solid polymer (HDPE) toilet partitions for the following applications:
a. Toilet enclosures.
b. Urinal screens.
4. Section 10 2813 - Toilet Accessories.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
2. D 1735 - Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings Using Water Fog
Apparatus.
3. D 2247 - Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in [100] percent Relative
Humidity.
B. International Code Council (ICC) / American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ICC/ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, as applicable to toilet
compartments designated as accessible.
C. United States Department of Justice:

1. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act, Excerpt from 28 CFR Part 36 - ADA Standards for
Accessible Design.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit plan, section, elevation and perspective drawings showing layout, door swings, fixture
clearance, hardware, and methods of anchoring.
SOLID POLYMER (HDPE) TOILET COMPARTMENTS PAGE 1 OF 5

SECTION 102100
1. For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size [6] inches (150 mm) square
E. Close Out Submittal:

1. Maintenance and Cleaning instructions.
F. Warranty:
1. Sample of special warranty.
1. All primary products specified in this section will be supplied by a single manufacturer with a
minimum of [5] years’ experience.
1. All products listed in this section are to be installed by a single installer with a minimum of [1]
year demonstrated experience in installing products of the same type and scope as specified.
C. Source Limitations:
1. Obtain toilet compartment components and accessories from single manufacturer.
A. Deliver, store and handle materials and products in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions
and recommendations and industry standards.
B. Store products indoors in manufacturer's or fabricator's original containers and packaging, with labels
clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. Protect from damage.
C. Lay cartons flat, with adequate support to ensure flatness and to prevent damage to pre-finished
surfaces.
D. Do not store where ambient temperature exceeds [120] degrees F ([49] degrees C).

B. Do not deliver materials or begin installation until building is enclosed, with complete protection from
outside weather, and building temperature maintained at a minimum of [60] degrees F ([15.6] degrees
C).
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturers Standard Warranty: Provide warranty for Solid polymer HDPE Material: Against
breakage, corrosion, and delamination for [25] years.

SECTION 102100
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis – Metal Toilet Compartments: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. ASI Global Partitions
900 Clary Connector
Eastanollee, Georgia 30538
Telephone: (706) 827-2700
Website: (www.asi-globalpartitions.com)
2.2 COMPARTMENTS AND SCREENS
A. Toilet Compartments: Floor anchored/overhead braced solid polymer.

1. Compartment Depth and Width: As scheduled and indicated on Drawings.
2. Door Width: [24] inches ([610] mm), minimum; at ADA accessible compartments [36] inches
([915] mm) minimum.
3. Height Above Floor: [14] inches ([356] mm).
4. Door/Panel Height: [55] inches ([1397] mm).
5. Pilaster Height: [82] inches ([2083] mm).
B. Urinal Screens: Wall hung.

1. Screen Panel Size: [24] inches ([610] mm) wide by [48] inches ([1219] mm) high.
2.3 SOLID POLYMER (HDPE) TOILET PARTITIONS
A. Doors, Panels, Screens, and Pilasters: Single sheet solid, homogenous HDPE plastic material formed
from waterproof, non-absorbent, high-density polyethylene resins; mark-resistant self-lubricating
surface; edges finished smooth.
1. Material: Solid, homogenous HDPE; [1] inch ([25] mm) thick.
2. Rating: Class [B] Fire Rated per ASTM E 84.
3. Material shall be compliant with IBC 2012 or later and must be solid HDPE; foamed material is
not allowed. Material shall be NFPA 286 compliant.
4. Edges: [1/4] inch ([6] mm) radius machined edges.
5. Heat Sink: Aluminum heat sink, to dissipate heat from incendiary devices used by vandals,
attached to bottom of doors and panels.
B. Finish: Pebble-textured homogenous color throughout material.

1. Color: Charcoal [9327] Pebble Grained.
C. Door Hardware: [8] inch ([203] mm) aluminum wrap-around hinge.

1. Hinges: Hinges shall be [8] inches ([203] mm) and fabricated from heavy-duty extruded
aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) with a brushed anodized finish with wrap-around flanges, surface
mounted and through bolted to doors and pilasters. Hinges operate and are field set with
adjustable nylon cams. Cams can be set in [30] degree increments.
2. Latch: Anodized extruded aluminum, with housing, slide bolt and button.
3. Strike and Keeper: [6] inch ([152] mm) wrap-around flanges fabricated from heavy-duty
extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) with a brushed anodized finish.
4. Coat Hook and Bumper: Non-ferrous, chrome-plated, with black rubber tip for doorstop.

SECTION 102100
5. Fastening Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, Type [304] stainless steel, No. [4] satin finish,
theft-resistant barrel nuts and machine screws.
6. Door Pulls: Non-ferrous, chrome-plated. Standard on ADA compartments. Two per ADA door.
D. Mounting Brackets: Provide optional aluminum continuous brackets with theft resistant barrel nuts
and shoulder screws.
E. Pilaster Shoes: Type [304] Stainless Steel No. [4] satin finish. Easy Stall shoe shall be of a one piece
design and integral to the mounting system and formed from [304] stainless steel [3] inch ([76] mm)
high with a No. [4] satin finish. Pilaster shoes are anchored to the pilaster with No. [10] stainless steel,
vandal-resistant screws.
F. Headrail: Manufacture's standard anodized aluminum rail with anti-grip profile.
G. Pilaster Anchors: Floor Anchored/Overhead Braced.

1. Easy Stall shoe system. [1/4] by [2] inch ([6] mm by [51] mm) steel screws attach Easy Stall
shoe to floor.
2. Pilaster to be inserted into shoe and secured after height adjusted. Leveling adjustment to be
concealed by pilaster shoe.
3. Height/leveling adjustment to be made via machine thread bolts inserted into factory installed
threaded insert in bottom of pilaster.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Inspect and prepare substrates using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving
best result for the substrates under project conditions. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Do not proceed with installation until substrates have been prepared using the methods recommended
by the manufacturer and deviations from manufacturer's recommended tolerances are corrected.
Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions.
C. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of deviations from
manufacturer's recommended installation tolerances and conditions.
1. Verify dimensions of areas to receive compartments.
2. Verify locations of built-in framing, anchorage, bracing, and plumbing fixtures.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Fasten components to adjacent materials and to other components using purpose-designed fastening
devices.
C. Adjust pilaster anchors for substrate variations; conceal anchors with pilaster shoes.
D. Equip each compartment door with hinges and door latch.
E. Install door strike keeper on pilasters in alignment with door latch.
F. Equip each compartment door with one coat hook and bumper.

SECTION 102100
G. Installation Tolerances:
1. Maximum variations from plumb or level: [1/8] inch ([3] mm).
2. Clearance between wall surface and panels or pilasters: [1-1/2] inch ([38] mm) maximum.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written
instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately
[15] degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors
to fully closed position.
B. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors.
C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane.
3.4 PROTECTION
3.5 FINAL CLEANING
A. Clean partition and screen surfaces with materials and cleansers in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 102100
SECTION 102813 - TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Toilet accessories.
5. Section 10 2100 – Solid Polymer (HDPE) Toilet Compartments.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. A 240/A 240M - Standard Specification for Heat- Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels.
2. A 554 - Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing.
3. C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
4. F 446 - Standard Consumer Safety Specification for Grab bars and Accessories Installed in the
Bathing Area.
B. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADAAG).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit Manufacturer's product data for products specified, indicating selected options and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Plans: Locate each specified unit in project.
2. Elevations: Indicate mounting height of each specified unit in project.
3. Details: Indicate anchoring and fastening details, required locations and types of anchors and
reinforcement, and materials required for correct installation of specified products not supplied
by manufacturer of products of this Section.
C. Verification Samples:
1. Submit [2] sample chips of each specified color and finish.
D. Quality Assurance:
1. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for each specified product.
E. Close Out Submittals:

1. Warranty documents, issued and executed by manufacturer of products of this Section, and
countersigned by Contractor.
TOILET ACCESSORIES PAGE 1 OF 7

SECTION 102813
A. Manufacturer: Provide products manufactured by a company with a minimum of [10] years successful
experience manufacturing similar products.
B. Single Source Requirements: To the greatest extent possible provide products from a single
manufacturer.
C. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with requirements applicable in the jurisdiction of the project,
including but not limited to ADA and ICC/ANSI A117.1 requirements as applicable.
D. Hazardous Materials: Comply with EU Directive “Restrictions of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)

requirements.”
A. Factory-apply strippable protective vinyl coating to sight-exposed surfaces after finishing of products;
ship products in manufacturer's standard protective packaging.
B. Storage and Protection: Store products in manufacturer's protective packaging until installation.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty for Washroom Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard [1] year warranty for
materials and workmanship.
B. Manufacturer’s Warranty for Electric Hand Dryers: Manufacturer’s standard [5] year warranty on
parts, except [3] year warranty on motor brushes from date of purchase.
C. Manufacturer's [15] year warranty against silver spoilage of mirrors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS – TOILET ACCESSORIES
A. Basis of Design – Toilet Accessories: Contract documents are based on products by:
1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
6901 Tuijunga Avenue
North Hollywood, California 91605
Telephone: 818-764-1000
Website: (www.bobrick.com).
2. Excel Dryer, Inc.

357 Chestnut Street
P O Box 365
East Longview, Massachusetts 01028
Telephone: 413-525-4531
Website: (www.exceldryer.com).
A. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

SECTION 102813
2.2 AUTOMATIC HAND DRYERS
A. Surface-Mounted ADA QuietDry Series Dryers:

1. Basis of Design: XLERATOR Model XL-SB, [115] V.
a. Cover: Stainless Steel, brushed finish.
b. Power: [115] V AC, [15] amp, [1725] watts, [50] / [60] Hz, single phase, cULus Listed.
2. Compliance:
a. Dryer cover projects [4] inches ([100] mm) from wall to comply with
universal/accessibility design, including ADA-ABA and ICC/ANSI.
b. Comply with EU Directive “Restrictions of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)
requirements.”
3. Air Inlet/Outlet: Vandal-resistant grilles.
4. Air Outlets: Dual air outlets that provide a swirling circulation of airflow.
5. Motor: [5/8] hp; universal type on resilient mounting with sealed ball bearing at drive-shaft end;
self-lubricating sleeve bearing at non-drive end; equipped with automatic thermal-overload
switch.
6. Heating Elements: Located on outlet side of fan, heats air without hot spots, is inaccessible to
vandals, and is protected by an automatic thermal-overload switch.
7. Automatic Function: Infrared sensor.
a. Turns off automatically if an inanimate object is placed over sensor.
b. After inanimate object is removed, electronic sensor resets itself and dryer automatically
resumes normal operation.
2.3 SOAP DISPENSERS
A. Automatic Surface-Mounted Vertical Soap Dispensers:

1. Basis of Design: Bobrick Classic Series Model B-2012.
2. Operation: When hand is placed under spout for approximately [1/2] second, soap is dispensed.
Dispenser is filled from top through built-in funnel that is unlocked with special provided key
and rotating lid 180 degrees.
3. Container:
a. Materials: [18] – [8], Type [304], [22] gauge ([0.8] mm) stainless steel with satin finish.
b. Construction: Body is drawn, one-piece, seamless construction.
4. Valve: Corrosion-resistant, black molded plastic push button and spout, antibacterial-soap-
resistant plastic cylinder; soap head-holding mushroom valve, stainless steel spring, U-packing
seal and duckbill. Valve dispenses commercially marketed all-purpose hand soaps.
5. Mounting: Vandal-resistant, concealed wall plate; back plate with mounting bracket.
6. Filling: Locked, hinged stainless steel lid for top filling opens with key provided. To prevent
corrosion of tank, use only chloride-free pH-neutral liquid soaps.
7. Refill Indication: Clear acrylic refill-indicator window.
8. Capacity: [30] fl oz ([850] mL).
2.4 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS
A. Surface-Mounted Paper Towel Dispensers:

a. Latching: Knob latch.
b. Capacity: [200] C-fold or [275] multifold towels [3-1/8] inches to [3-13/16] inches
([79] mm to [97] mm) deep.
2. Door: [18] – [8], Type 304, [22] gauge ([0.8] mm) stainless steel with satin finish.
3. Cabinet: All-welded, [18] – [8], Type [304], heavy gauge stainless steel with satin finish on
exposed surfaces.
4. Hinge: Full-length stainless steel piano-hinge.

SECTION 102813
5. Towel Dispensing: Hemmed towel tray opening dispenses towels without tearing.
6. Filling: Door swings down for loading towels into cabinet.
7. Refill Indication: Two slots on each side of cabinet indicate refill time.
2.5 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL UNITS
A. Surface-Mounted Sanitary Napkin Disposal Units:

2. Cabinet: All-welded, [18] – [8], Type [304], heavy gauge stainless steel with satin finish on
exposed surfaces.
3. Door: [18] – []8, Type [304], [22] gauge ([0.8] mm) stainless steel with satin finish; equipped
with a tumbler lock keyed like other washroom accessories.
4. Door Hinge: Full-length stainless steel piano-hinge.
5. Disposal Panel: [18] – [8], Type [304], [22] gauge ([0.8] mm) stainless steel with satin finish;
hemmed bottom edge hemmed.
6. Disposal Panel Hinge: Spring-loaded, full-length stainless steel piano-hinge; with an
international graphic symbol identifying sanitary napkin disposal.
7. Waste Receptacle: Removable, leak-proof, rigid molded polyethylene.
8. Capacity: [1.2] gallons ([4.6] L).
2.6 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS
A. Surface-Mounted Multi-Roll Toilet Tissue Dispensers:

2. Cabinet: [18] – [8], Type [304], [22] gauge ([0.8] mm) stainless steel. All-welded construction;
with satin finish on exposed surfaces.
3. Door Front of door is drawn, one-piece, seamless, [18] – [8], Type [304], [22] gauge ([0.8] mm)
stainless steel, [18] gauge ([1.2] mm) door frame, secured to cabinet with two rivets; with satin
finish on exposed surfaces and equipped with a tumbler lock keyed like other washroom
accessories.
4. Dispensing Mechanism, Inner Housing and Cam: [18] – [8], Type [304], [18] gauge ([1.2] mm)
stainless steel.
5. Spindles: Theft-resistant, heavy-duty, one-piece, molded ABS plastic; retained in dispensing
mechanism when door is locked.
6. Toilet Tissue Dispensing: Unit holds two standard-core toilet tissue rolls up to [5-1/4] inches
([133] mm) in diameter ([1800] sheets). Roll held in reserve automatically drops into place
after bottom roll is depleted. Depleted rolls can only be removed after unlocking door.
2.7 MIRRORS
A. Stainless Steel, Welded, Angle Frame Mirrors:

1. Basis of Design: Bobrick Model B-290 1830.
a. Overall Size: [18] inches ([457] mm) W x [30] inches ([762] mm) H.
2. Basis of Design: Bobrick Model B-290 2460.
a. Overall Size: [24] inches ([610] mm) W x [60] inches ([1524] mm) H.
3. Angle Frame:
a. Materials: Type [304] stainless steel angle [3/4] inch x [3/4] inch ([19] mm x [19] mm),
with satin finish with vertical grain on exposed surfaces.
b. Construction: One-piece, roll-formed construction with continuous integral stiffener.
c. Design: Beveled design on front of angle to hold mirror tightly against frame; prevents
exposure to sharp edges.
d. Corners: Heliarc welded, ground, and polished smooth.

SECTION 102813
4. Mirror:
a. No. [1] quality, [1/4] inch ([6] mm) float/plate glass.
b. Edges: Protected with plastic filler strips.
c. Back of Mirror: Protected by full-size, shock-absorbing, water-resistant, non-abrasive
[3/16] inch ([5] mm) thick polyethylene padding.
5. Mounting: Removable, galvanized steel back with integral horizontal hanging brackets located
at top and bottom for mounting on Concealed one-piece rectangular wall hanger(s); galvanized
steel back fastened to frame with Concealed screws to permit glass replacement; attachment by
rivets or tabs is not acceptable; Concealed Phillips head locking setscrews secure mirror to wall
hanger in bottom of frame.
2.8 GRAB BARS
A. Stainless Steel Grab Bars: With snap flange covers.

1. Satin Finish with Peened Grip:
a. Basis of Design: Bobrick Model B-6806.99 x 36.
b. Length: [36] inches ([914] mm).
c. Basis of Design: Bobrick Model B-6806.99 x 42.
d. Length: [42] inches (1067mm).
2. Compliance: Universal/accessibility design, including ADA-ABA and ICC/ANSI. for structural
strength.
a. Capacity: Designed to support [900] lbs ([408] kg) in compliant installations.
3. Description: Grab bar with [90] degree return to flange. Clearance between grab bar and
finished wall is [1-1/2] inches ([38] mm).
4. Grab Bar Materials: [18] – [8], Type [304], [18] gauge ([1.2] mm) stainless steel tubing with
satin finish, ends of grab bar pass through flanges and are heliarc welded to flanges to form one
structural unit, outside diameter [1-1/2] inches ([38] mm).
5. Mounting Flanges: Concealed, [18] – [8], Type [304], [1/8] inch ([3] mm) thick, stainless steel
plate.
a. End Flanges: [2] inches x [3-1/8] inches ([50] mm x [80] mm) with two holes for
attachment to wall.
b. Intermediate Flanges: [2-5/8] inches x [3-1/8] inches ([65] mm x [80] mm) wide x [3-
1/8] inch ([80] mm) diameter.
6. Snap Flange Covers: [18] – [8], Type [304], [22] gauge ([0.8] mm) drawn stainless steel with
satin finish, [3-1/4] inch ([85] mm) diameter x [1/2] inches ([13] mm) deep; snap over
mounting flange to conceal mounting screws.
7. Mounting Accessories: Provide the following optional mounting accessories as scheduled and
indicated on the Drawings and as required for complete installation.
a. Mounting Kits: Provide optional Bobrick Part No. 252-30 Mounting Kit; [3] Type [304]
stainless steel, Phillips round-head, sheet-metal screws for each flange.
b. Grab Bar Fasteners: Provide optional Bobrick Part No. 251-4 WingIt Grab Bar Fastener;
round-head, Phillips [18] / [8] stainless steel screws and grab bar fastener for each flange.
c. Anchor Devices: Provide optional Bobrick Part No. 2586 Optional Mounting Kit; for
[1/2] inch ([13] mm) panels for each flange.
2.9 FOLDING SHOWER SEATS
A. Reversible Folding Shower Seats:

1. Basis of Design: Bobrick Model B-5191.
2. Compliance: Universal/accessibility design, including ADA-ABA and ICC/ANSI for structural
strength; clearance between back of shower seat and wall is [1-1/2] inches ([38] mm).
a. Capacity: Designed to support [450] lbs ([204] kg) in compliant installations.

SECTION 102813
3. Seat: One-piece, [1/2] inch ([13] mm) thick, solid phenolic with matte-finish, ivory-colored,
melamine surfaces and black phenolic-resin core, integral slots for water drainage; secured to
frame with stainless steel carriage bolts and acorn nuts. Folds against wall when not in use.
4. Seat Supports: Do not come into contact with floor.
5. Frame: [18] – [8], Type [304] stainless steel with satin finish; [16] gauge ([1.6] mm), [1-1/4]
inch (32mm) square members, [18] gauge ([1.2] mm), [1] inch ([25] mm) diameter tubing.
6. Mounting Flanges: [18] – [8], Type [304], [3/16] inch ([5] mm) thick stainless steel with satin
finish; [3] inch ([76] mm) diameter with three mounting screw holes.
7. Baseplate: [18] – [8], Type [304], heavy gauge stainless steel. Holds seat against wall.
8. Spring: [17] – [7], Type [301], [24] gauge ([0.6] mm) stainless steel, spot-welded to baseplate.
Holds seat against wall.
9. Guide Bracket: [18] – [8], Type [304], [16] gauge ([1.6] mm) stainless steel with satin finish.
2.10 SHOWER RODS AND CURTAINS
A. Shower Curtain Hooks:

1. Basis of Design: Bobrick Part No. [204] – [1] Shower Curtain Hook.
2. Materials: [18] – [8], Type [304], [0.09] inch ([2] mm) diameter stainless steel.
B. Vinyl Shower Curtains:

1. Basis of Design: Bobrick Model 204.
a. Width: To fit location.
2. Basis of Design: Bobrick Model 204-3.
3. Curtain: Opaque, matte white, [0.008] inch ([0.2] mm) thick vinyl containing antibacterial and
flame-retardant agents; hemmed bottom and sides.
4. Grommets: Nickel-plated brass, along top edge every [6] inches ([150] mm).
5. Height: [72] inch ([1830] mm).
C. Shower Curtain Rods With Concealed Mounting:

a. Length: To fit location.
2. Curtain Rod: [18] – [8], Type [304], [20] gauge ([1.0] mm) stainless steel tubing with satin
finish.
3. Outside Diameter: [1] inch ([25] mm).
4. Flanges: [1-3/8] inch ([35] mm) in diameter, chrome-plated plastic with bright polished finish,
mount on concealed wall brackets.
5. Mounting: Concealed aluminum brackets.
2.11 HOOKS
B. Vandal Resistant Clothes Hooks.

a. Finish: Bright polish.
b. Configuration: Double hook.
2. Projection from Wall: [2] inch ([50] mm).
3. Flange and Support Arm: All-welded, [18] – [8], Type [304], [22] gauge ([0.8] mm) stainless
steel.
4. Mounting: Concealed bracket, [18] – [8], Type [304], [16] gauge ([1.6] mm) stainless steel;
secured to wall plate with a stainless steel setscrew.
5. Concealed Wall Plate: [18] – [8], Type [304], [16] gauge ([1.6] mm) stainless steel.
6. Cap: [18] – [8], Type [304], [10] gauge ([3.6] mm) stainless steel; welded to support arm.

SECTION 102813
2.12 SHELVES
A. Surface-Mounted Stainless Steel Shelves:

1. Basis of Design: Bobrick Model B-683 x 24.
a. Length: [24] inches ([610] mm).
b. Width: [4-3/4] inches ([120] mm).
c. Projection from Wall: [5-3/4] inch ([145] mm).
2. Flanges and Support Arms: All-welded, [18] – [8], Type [304], [22] gauge ([0.8] mm) stainless
steel.
3. Mounting: Concealed bracket, all-welded, [16] gauge ([1.6] mm) stainless steel; secured to wall
plates with stainless steel setscrews.
4. Concealed Wall Plate: [18] – [8], Type [304], [16] gauge ([1.6] mm) stainless steel.
5. Shelf: [18] – [8], Type [304], [22] gauge ([0.8] mm) stainless steel with roll-formed edges.
2.13 CUSTODIAL / JANITORIAL ACCESSORIES
B. Utility Shelf With Mop and Broom Holders and Rag Hooks:
1. Basis of Design: Bobrick Model B-224 x 36 with [4] mop/broom holders and [3] rag hooks.
2. Shelf: [18] – [8], Type [304], [18] gauge ([1.2] mm) stainless steel with satin finish; [8] inches
([203] mm) deep, [1-1/2] inch ([38] mm) return edge.
3. Length: [36] inches ([915] mm).
4. Mounting Brackets: Welded to shelf, [18] – [8], Type [304], [18] gauge ([1.2] mm) stainless
steel with satin finish.
5. Mop and Broom Holders: Replaceable, spring-loaded rubber cams with anti-slip coating;
accommodates handles from [7/8] inch to [1-1/4] inch ([20] mm to [30]mm) in diameter; with
plated steel retainers.
6. Rag Hooks: [18] – [8], Type [304], [16] gauge ([1.6] mm) stainless steel with satin finish;
secured to shelf with rivets.
7. Drying Rod: [18] – [8], Type [304], [1/4] inch ([6] mm) diameter stainless steel with satin
finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in strict compliance with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations,
1. Verify blocking has been installed properly.
2. Verify location does not interfere with door swings or use of fixtures.
3. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for backing and proper support.
4. Use fasteners and anchors suitable for substrate and project conditions.
5. Install units rigid, straight, plumb, and level, in accordance with manufacturer’s installation
instructions and approved shop drawings.
6. Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting, and fitting to room finish.
7. Test for proper operation.
A. Clean exposed surfaces of compartments, hardware, and fittings using methods acceptable to the
manufacturer.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 102813
SECTION 102814 - BABY CHANGING STATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Surface mounted, horizontal design baby changing station.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. F 2285 - Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Diaper Changing Tables for
Commercial Use.
2. G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi.

1. A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Building and Facilities.
2. Z535.4 - Product Safety Signs and Labels.
C. Consumer Product Safety Improvement Act (CPSIA):
D. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADAAG).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit Manufacturer's product data for products specified, indicating selected options and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Plans: Locate each specified unit in project.
2. Elevations: Indicate mounting height of each specified unit in project.
3. Details: Indicate anchoring and fastening details, required locations and types of anchors and
reinforcement, and materials required for correct installation of specified products not supplied
by manufacturer of products of this Section.
C. Verification Samples:
1. Submit [2] sample chips of each specified color and finish.
D. Quality Assurance:
1. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for each specified product.
E. Close Out Submittals:

1. Warranty documents, issued and executed by manufacturer of products of this Section, and
countersigned by Contractor.
BABY CHANGING STATION PAGE 1 OF 3

SECTION 102814
A. Manufacturer: Provide products manufactured by a company with a minimum of [5] years successful
experience manufacturing similar products.
B. Single Source Requirements: To the greatest extent possible provide products from a single
manufacturer.
C. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with requirements applicable in the jurisdiction of the project,
including but not limited to ADA and ICC/ANSI A117.1 requirements as applicable.
D. Hazardous Materials: Comply with EU Directive “Restrictions of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)

requirements.”
A. Factory-apply strippable protective vinyl coating to sight-exposed surfaces after finishing of products;
ship products in manufacturer's standard protective packaging.
B. Storage and Protection: Store products in manufacturer's protective packaging until installation.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty for Baby Changing Stations: Manufacturer’s standard [5] year warranty for
materials and workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS – TOILET ACCESSORIES
A. Basis of Design – Toilet Accessories: Contract documents are based on products by:
1. Koala Kare Products (a division of Bobrick)
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
6901 Tuijunga Avenue
North Hollywood, California 91605
Telephone: 818-764-1000
Website: (www.bobrick.com).
A. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
2.2 BABY CHANGING STATIONS
A. Surface-Mounted Horizontal Design Baby Changing Stations.

1. Basis of Design: Model KB200-00, cream color, as manufactured by Koala Kare Products, a
Division of Bobrick.
2. Materials. FDA approved injection-molded polypropylene.
3. Operation: Concealed pneumatic cylinder providing controlled, slow opening and closing of the
changing station bed.
4. Hinge Mechanism: Reinforced full length steel-on-steel hinge.
5. Changing Surface: Contoured, concave and smooth, [450] square inches.
6. Safety Straps: Replaceable, snap-lock, nylon protective holding straps.

SECTION 102814
7. Performance: When mounted to specification, unit has been tested to [300] lbs and will deflect
less than [1] degree from [90] degrees with a [200] lb static load placed in the center of the
changing surface.
8. Mounting: Concealed [11] gauge plated steel mounting chassis with [16] inch centers and [6]
mounting points the top [2] mounting points feature keyholes for ease of installation units
include mounting hardware.
9. Features: No hinge structure exposed on interior or exterior surfaces; two bag hooks; locking
built-in dual cavity liner dispenser with [50] liner capacity supplied with [2] keys that are keyed
alike to Bobrick Washroom Accessories.
10. Instruction Graphics: Universal instruction graphics and safety messages in multiple languages.
11. Braille Label.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in strict compliance with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations,
1. Verify blocking has been installed properly.
2. Verify location does not interfere with door swings or use of fixtures.
3. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for backing and proper support.
4. Use fasteners and anchors suitable for substrate and project conditions.
5. Install units rigid, straight, plumb, and level, in accordance with manufacturer’s installation
instructions and approved shop drawings.
6. Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting, and fitting to room finish.
7. Test for proper operation.
A. Clean exposed surfaces of compartments, hardware, and fittings using methods acceptable to the
manufacturer.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 102814
SECTION 102819 - SHOWER ENCLOSURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Transfer acrylic shower stall.
2. Shower faucet.
5. Section 09 2200 – Metal Support Systems.
1.2 REFERENCES

B. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):

1. AMP 503 - Finishes for Stainless Steel.
C. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned enclosure plans and elevations, attachment, and
relationship to adjacent construction.
2. Product Data: Include [metal framing system profiles and dimensions, glazing, hardware, and
accessories.
3. Samples: [6] inch long metal framing system samples.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS – INDIVIDUAL SHOWERS
A. Design Basis - Shower Enclosures: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. Aqua Bath
921 Cherokee Avenue
Nashville, Tennessee 37207
Telephone: 800-232-2284
Website: (www.liddledesign.com).
SHOWER ENCLOSURES PAGE 1 OF 4

SECTION 102819
2.2 MANUFACTURERS – SHOWER FAUCETS
A. Design Basis - Shower Faucets: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. Zurn Industries, LLC
511 West Freshwater Way
Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53204
Telephone: 855-663-9876
Website: (www.zurn.com).
2.3 INDIVIDUAL SHOWERS
A. Individual Acrylic Transfer Shower: Model C41368BF-OT-FUS-2.

1. General: Acrylic accessible shower enclosure with faucet and receptor.
2. Standard: ANSI Z124.1.2.
3. Type: One piece without top.
4. Style: Handicapped accessible.
5. Nominal Shape and Size: [36] inch x [36] inch x [84] inch high.
6. Color: White.
7. Bathing Surface: Slip resistant according to ASTM F 462.
8. Outlet: Grid drain. [2] inch outlet.
9. Seat: Fold up type.
2.4 SHOWER FAUCETS
A. Faucet: Zurn Z7301-SSC-MT-59.
B. Shower Unit: TempGuard [3]. Chrome plated.
C. Shower Head: Pressure Compensating. Water Saver. [1.5] GPM.
D. Furnish the Handicap shower unit with a Handwall shower unit, 60” metal hose, standard handset,
supply elbow and flange, 24” slide bar and vacuum breaker
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
B. Joint Sealers: Specified in Section 07 9200.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Stainless Steel: NAAMM AMP 503; No. 4 satin.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual
locations of piping connections before shower installation.

SECTION 102819
B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where showers will be installed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Assemble shower components according to manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Install showers level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
C. Fit and adjust to adjacent construction with maximum [1/4] inch gaps.
D. Anchor to supporting construction in concealed locations.
E. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each shower faucet.
1. Use ball or gate valves if supply stops are not specified with shower.
2. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
F. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.
G. Set shower in leveling bed of cement grout.
H. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use
deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
I. Seal joints between showers and floors and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant
silicone sealant.
1. Match sealant color to fixture color.
2. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping.
Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Division 22.
C. Comply with traps and soil and waste piping requirements specified in Division 22.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust showers and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning showers, fittings, and
controls.
B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.
A. After completing installation of showers, inspect and repair damaged finishes.
B. Clean showers, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and
materials.

SECTION 102819
C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
D. Do not allow use of showers for temporary facilities.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 102819
SECTION 104413 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Fire extinguishers.
2. Accessories.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. E814-11a - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
B. International Code Council (ICC):

1. International Building Code; 2012 edition.
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 10-2010, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers: For criteria covering installations for Class
A, B, C, D, and K hazards as well as the selection, inspection, maintenance, recharging, and
testing of portable fire extinguishing equipment.
2. 70-2011, National Electric Code.
D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. 299 - Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers.
2. 711 - Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers.
E. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA):

1. Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, as amended by the ADA Amendments Act of 2008:
For restrictions relating to cabinet projections in corridors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Materials description for fire extinguishers; include ratings and classifications.
1. Installation instructions for each product specified.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Small-scale plans showing locations of individual fire extinguishers.
2. Schedules showing each type of extinguisher to ensure proper fit and function.
3. Indicate installation procedures and accessories required for a complete installation.
C. Warranty: Sample of warranty.
A. Provide fire extinguishers complying with UL 711 and NFPA 10.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PAGE 1 OF 3

SECTION 104413
B. Provide fire extinguishers of type approved by UL, State Fire Marshal's Office, and local regulatory
agencies, if any.
C. Provide fire extinguishers, cabinets and accessories produced by a single manufacturer.
D. Conform to applicable accessibility code for locating extinguishers.
A. Deliver, store, and handle fire protection specialties and related materials using means and methods
that will prevent damage, deterioration, or loss.
1. Deliver components in manufacturer's original packaging, properly labeled for identification.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty to repair or replace fire protection specialties that fail in
materials or workmanship within [6] years from date of Substantial Completion
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis – Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group
9702 Newton Avenue South
Bloomington, Minnesota 55431
Telephone: (800) 554-6077
Website: (www.activarcpg.com)
2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Multi-Purpose Chemical Type: Extinguisher unit containing a fluidized and siliconized mono
ammonium phosphate powder; nonconductive and nontoxic.
1. Construction: Heavy duty steel cylinder with metal valve and siphon tube, O-ring seal,
replaceable valve stem seal, visual pressure gage, pull pin and upright squeeze grip.
2. Finish: Factory powder-coated; Red.
3. Effectiveness (Rating): Class [A], [B], and [C] fires.
4. Model Identification and UL Rating: [10] lb, multi-purpose, UL listed, dry chemical fire
extinguisher with rating based on spacing and hazard.
B. Accessories:
1. Standard Mounting Brackets: Provide manufacturer's standard steel bracket, designed to secure
fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire
extinguishers indicated.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Ship extinguishers to the Project site fully charged, EXCEPT those which contain water as an
extinguishing agent, if any.

SECTION 104413
B. Obtain Fire Extinguishers and Fire Extinguisher Brackets from same manufacturer to ensure
compatibility.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semi-
recessed cabinets are to be installed. Verify that rough openings for cabinets are correctly sized and
located.
B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged, defective,
or undercharged units.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for installing fire extinguishers and mounting
brackets.
B. Mounting Height: Install extinguishers at heights indicated below:

1. Install fire extinguishers mounted on hangers or brackets attached to a wall so that the top of the
fire extinguisher is not more than [3] feet [6] inch above the floor.
2. In no case shall the clearance between the bottom of the fire extinguisher and the floor be less
than [4] inches.
C. Install extinguishers at locations indicated below.

1. Install fire extinguishers at locations specified on the drawings or as directed by the authority
2. Fire extinguishers shall be conspicuously located, along normal paths of travel, including exits
from areas. Extinguishers shall not be obstructed or obscured from view.
D. Install portable fire extinguishers on the hanger or in the bracket supplied, or place in the fire
extinguisher cabinets provided. Verify that the extinguisher operating instructions face outward.
A. Ensure that each extinguisher is fully charged, and that inspection of each extinguisher has been
performed, as evidenced by the National Association of Fire Equipment Distributors certification tag,
just prior to turnover.
3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire extinguishers are installed
unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Provide protection and maintain conditions that ensure that fire extinguishers are without damage or
deterioration at the time of Construction Completion.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 104413
SECTION 11 6833
OUTDOOR SPORTS EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide equipment and materials and do work necessary and construct or provide the following as
indicated on the Drawings and as specified. Work shall include but shall not be limited to:
1. Baseball/Softball Equipment:
a. Foul Ball Poles.
b. Bases, Pitching Rubber, Home Plate.
c. Fence Top Rail Guard.
d. Helmet and Bat Racks.
e. Dugout Benches.
2. Soccer Equipment:
a. Field Corner Flags/Markers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Show application to project.
2. Show fabrication and installation of backstop assembly and foul ball poles. Include plans,
elevations, component details, and attachments to other Work.
B. Provide sealed structural drawings by the qualified professional engineer for backstops and
windscreen and goal post footings.
C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and samples as noted for the following:
1. Foul Ball Poles:
2. Bases, Pitching Rubber Homeplate:
a. Verify quantities which may include bullpens and batting tunnels.
3. Helmet and Bat Racks.
4. Dugout Benches.
5. Field Corner Markers.
A. Inline Ball Net and Barrier Systems: Contractor to submit sealed shop drawings by a State Licensed
Engineer for the upright post diameter and footing design.
A. Installer of outdoor sports equipment the playing field shall be the same Contractor. All installed
equipment shall be under the supervision of Owner’s groundskeeper.
B. Inline Ball Net System Installer: Contractor to restretch/tighten netting if necessary 60 days after
substantial completion.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code-
Steel,” and AWS D1.3, “Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel.”
1.5 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Section shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
TWA #019-007.1 11 6833-1 Outdoor Sports Equipment

addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of
the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranties:
1. Equipment: Written warranties, executed by the manufacturer of each piece of equipment
specified agreeing to repair or replace equipment or components that fail in materials or
workmanship with specified warranty period.
2. Impact and Barrier Netting: Installed netting shall prevent passage of kicked, struck or thrown
balls or implements per designed sport use. If netting fails to do so, installer shall adjust netting
to appropriate tension.
a. Warranty Period: Per the manufacturer.
3. Windscreen Warranty: Minimum of 3 years.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 BASEBALL/SOFTBALL EQUIPMENT
A. Foul Ball Poles:

1. Provide the following: High School
a. Pole: Heavy-wall 4-inch OD aluminum pipe, 20-foot high above ground.
b. Panel: 11 gauge, knuckled selvage chain link panel frames with heavy duty steel
supports, 18 inches wide by 12 feet high.
c. Finish: Electrostatically powder coated optical yellow.
d. Product:
1) FPW420 (Sportsfield Specialties).
2) Or approved equal.
e. Supplier:
1) Sportsfield Specialties, Inc., www.sportsfieldspecialties.com.
2) C and H Baseball (941) 727-1533, www.chbaseball.com.
3) Mid America Sports Advantage (800) 264-4519, www.masa.com.
B. Bases, Plates and Rubbers:

1. Acceptable Products:
a. Bases:
1) Quantity: 12.
2) Schutt Hollywood Original Jack Corbett Bases with anchors and plugs.
3) 24 Base anchors and plugs
b. Homeplate:
1) Quantity: 16.
2) Schutt Bury All Rubber Homeplate.
c. Pitching Rubber (permanent):
1) Quantity: 12.
2) Schutt Regulation Hollywood 4 Way Official Size Pitching Plate.
3) Rubber with aluminum insert.
d. Pitching Rubber (removable):
1) Quantity: 8.
2) Schutt Hollywood official size dual stanchion pithing rubber, 6" x 24".
3) Removable with plug.

2. Suppliers:
a. Sportsfield Specialties, Inc., www.sportsfieldspecialties.com.
b. Beacon Ballfields, (800) 747-5985.
c. Schutt Sports, (800) 426-9784.
d. Mid America Sports Advantage (800) 264-4519, www.masa.com.
e. Partac Peat, (800) 247-BEAM.
C. Dugout Benches:
1. General:
a. Single-Tier.
b. Semi-Permanent aluminum plank bench with backrest.
c. Length per plan and details.
2. Product:
a. ATBBRSP.
3. Color: Standard color as approved by Owner.
4. Supplier:
a. Sportsfield Specialties, Inc. (www.sportsfieldspecialties.com).
b. Or approved equal.
D. Fence Top Rail Guard:

1. To be installed on all diamond field foul line and outfield fencing.
2. Exterior grade UV resistant polyethylene construction.
3. Professional teardrop shaped profile.
4. Predrilled every 24" and attached to fence top rail with heavy duty zip ties.
5. Dimensions: 2 5/8"W x 4"H x 0.07"T in 8' lengths.
6. Color as approved by Owner.
7. Suppliers:
b. C and H Baseball (941) 727-1533, www.chbaseball.com.
c. Burbank Sports Nets, (866) 349-0057, www.burbanksportsnets.com.
E. Helmet and Bat Rack:

1. Pre-assembled all-weather aluminum storage unit with helmet cubby, bat bin and side storage.
2. Overall dimensions:
a. 7’-6”H x 4’W x 3’-5/16”D.
3. Constructed with Formed .090” 5052 Aluminum Sheet and Stainless Steel Domed Rivets
4. Durable Powder Coated Finish
a. Weather Resistant and Unsusceptible to Rust.
5. Helmet Cubbies: Sixteen (16) 10-3/8” x 10-3/8” x 18”D.
6. Bat Bins: Eight (8) 10-3/8” x 10-3/8” x +/- 3’D.
7. Side Storage: Lockable Access Doors with Recessed Pull Handle.
8. Bolt-on Powder Coated Steel Understructure Assembly with ½” Galvanized Steel Wedge
Anchors for Optional Surface Mounting to Concrete Slab.
9. 5-Year Manufacturer’s Limited Product Warranty.
10. Color as approved by Owner.
11. Suppliers:
b. C and H Baseball (941) 727-1533, www.chbaseball.com.
c. Burbank Sports Nets, (866) 349-0057, www.burbanksportsnets.com.

2.2 SOCCER EQUIPMENT
A. Field Corner Marker Stakes (In ground staking system):

1. General:
a. Plastic staking package system.
2. Products:
a. #02407 Ground socket with plug.
3. Suppliers:
a. Mid-America Sports Advantage.
b. Or approved equal.
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and approved shop drawings.
1. Foul Ball Poles and Appurtenances:
a. Install as recommended by the manufacturer or as shown on the Drawings.
b. The Contractor shall verify and install homeplate so that the back corner of the plate is at
a 90-degree angle and lined up on the outside edge of the foul ball pole. This location
shall be verified by the Contractor at the beginning of playing field construction.
2. Bases, Plates and Rubbers:

a. Install pitcher’s plates, full depth homeplates, and bases as per the manufacturer’s
instructions.
b. These operations to be done under the observance of the Team or Owner’s Head
Groundskeeper.
B. Soccer Equipment:
1. Field Corner Marker Stakes:
a. The Contractor shall locate and install field markers at the corners, midpoint and other
locations as indicated on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 123600 - COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Countertops for architectural cabinet work.
2. Countertop sill at counter shutters.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI):

B. North American Architectural Woodwork Standards (NAWWS):

1. North American Architectural Woodwork Standards; US Version 4.0.
C. Association of Electrical and Medical Imaging Equipment Manufacturers (NEMA)

1. NEMA -3 LD- 2005 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association

(BHMA):
1. ANSI-A135: for all hardboard.
2. ANSI-A161.2-1998 for performance of fabricated high-pressure decorative laminate
countertops.
3. ANSI-A208.1-2009 for grade [M-3] mat-formed wood particleboard.
4. BHMA A156.9 American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

3. Specimen warranty.
B. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation ; combine with shop drawings of
cabinets and casework specified in other sections.
C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's full
range of available colors and patterns.
D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size [6] inches ([150] mm) square,
E. Installer's qualification statement.
COUNTERTOPS PAGE 1 OF 5
SECTION 123600
F. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.
G. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and repair of
countertop surfaces.
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this
section, with not less than [5] years of documented experience.
B. Quality Certification:
1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the installed work complies with
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade or grades
specified.
2. Submit certifications upon completion of installation that verifies this work is in compliance
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in
accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COUNTERTOPS
A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI

(NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.
B. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High-pressure decorative laminate (HPDL) sheet bonded to substrate.
1. Laminate Sheet: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS, [0.048] inch ([1.2] mm) nominal thickness.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Wilsonart: www.wilsonart.com/#sle.
2) Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
b. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of [25], maximum; smoke
developed index of [450], maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
c. Wear Resistance: In addition to specified grade, comply with NEMA LD 3 High Wear
Grade requirements for wear resistance.
d. Laminate Core Color: Same as decorative surface.
e. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating of [5] to [20].
f. Surface Color and Pattern: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Exposed Edge Treatment: Square, substrate built up to minimum [1-1/4] inch ([32] mm) thick;
covered with matching laminate.
3. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction.
SECTION 123600
4. Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section
11 - Countertops, Custom Grade.
C. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous substrate.
1. Flat Sheet Thickness: [1/2] inch ([12] mm), minimum.
2. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISFA 2-01 and NEMA LD
3; acrylic or polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and capable
of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and
pattern consistent throughout thickness.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Wilsonart: www.wilsonart.com/#sle.
2) Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.
b. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of [25], maximum; smoke developed
index of [450], maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
c. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of [5] to [20].
d. Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings.
e. Other Components Thickness: [1/2] inch ([12] mm), minimum.
f. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) thick; square edge; use
marine edge at sinks.
g. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches (102 mm) high.
h. Skirts: As indicated on drawings.
i. Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section
11 - Countertops, Premium Grade.
j. Fabricate in accordance with manufacturer's standard requirements.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum [5] ply;
minimum [3/4] inch ([19] mm) thick; join lengths using metal splines.
B. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials

being joined.
C. Joint Sealant: See Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealers.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.
1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.
2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets [1] inch ([25] mm) except where top butts
against cabinet or wall.
a. Rout a [1/8] inch (3 mm) drip groove at underside of exposed overlapping edges, set back
[1/2] inch (13 mm) from face of edge.
3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or
unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.
B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated.
1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue.
2. Height: [4] inches ([102] mm), unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops and wall panels up to [144] inches (3[,657] mm) long in one piece;
join pieces with adhesive sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
instructions.
SECTION 123600
D. Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, brackets, and braces as indicated on drawings,
finished to match.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are
installed in proper locations.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim
where required.
B. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board of
[5/8] inch ([16] mm).
C. Attach epoxy resin countertops using compatible adhesive.
D. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.

1. Where applied cove molding is not indicated use specified sealant.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Variation From Horizontal: [1/8] inch in [10] feet ([3] mm in [3] m), maximum.
B. Offset From Wall, Countertops: [1/8] inch ([3] mm) maximum; [1/16] inch ([1.5] mm) minimum.
C. Field Joints: [1/8] inch ([3] mm) wide, maximum.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.
SECTION 123600
3.6 PROTECTION
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 123600
SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work required under this section of the specifications consists of basic materials and methods
and is applicable to all work under Division 22.
B. The work of this section is subject to the requirements of the 22 0501 General Work for Plumbing
section of the specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTORS
A. Furnish and install (or arrange for installation) all electric motors for all equipment specified
under this section requiring same in accordance with the following:
1. All motors shall be NEMA standard designed for ample size to operate at their proper
load and full speed continuously without causing noise or vibration or temperature rise in
excess of their rating.
2. Motors [1/2] HP and less shall be designed & nameplated for [120] volt, [1] phase, [60]
cycle operation; shall be permanent split capacitor type, [40] degrees Celsius continuous
rise, open dripproof type; and shall be equipped with ball bearings.
3. All motors [3/4] HP and larger (unless specified otherwise) shall be designed and
nameplated for [3] phase, [60] cycle operation, shall be single speed squirrel-cage type,
NEMA Design [B], normal starting torque, open dripproof type, quiet operating, [40]
degrees Celsius continuous rise and shall be equipped with ball bearings.
4. All three phase motors one horsepower and larger shall comply with NEMA MG-1 Table
12-11 Energy Efficient standards or Table 12-12 Premium Efficient Standards as
applicable to meet the Energy Independent Security Act of 2007.
B. The above shall apply to all motors unless otherwise specified with equipment.
2.2 STARTERS
A. Provide motor starters for all equipment under this division of the specifications. Installation shall
be as specified in Division 26 of these specifications. Unless built-in as an integral part of the
equipment or of custom design for specific application, all starters shall be the product of a single
manufacturer. Starters shall meet requirements of current National Electric Codes.
B. All starters shall have overload protection. Starters shall have phase failure and undervoltage relay
similar to Square D Type MPS, with built-in adjustable time delay response (3 second minimum).
Undervoltage setting is adjustable from [75]% to [100]%. Starters shall have all necessary
auxiliary interlocks required for operation of the respective systems, plus one spare auxiliary
interlock. Starters shall have NEMA [1] general purpose enclosures.
COMMON WORK FOR PLUMBING PAGE 1 OF 7

SECTION 220500
C. All starters shall be manufactured by Cutler-Hammer; equal by General Electric, Square D, or
Westinghouse are acceptable.
1. Single pole, [120] volt, [1] phase, [60] cycle manual (unless noted otherwise) starter for
motors 1/2 HP and less. Note: Where motors have built-in thermal overload protection
and starter is not required to accomplish control scheme, manual starter may be omitted.
2. Full voltage, three-pole, combination magnetic starter with fused disconnect with
Bussman Low-Peak or Fusetron dual element fuses for all [3] phase motors. Fuses shall
be sized in accordance with N.E.C. for all [3] phase motors.
3. For motors larger than [25] HP, the starting equipment of the resistance type, increment
start, induction type or a combination of resistance and induction starting shall be used to
limit the first step of the starting voltage, to not more than 65% of the line voltage or as
required by the local electrical utility.
D. In addition to the features described above, the starters furnished shall include the following
features:
1. All starters for [3] phase motors shall have 3 phase thermal overload protection. Size the
heater overload elements to properly protect the motor being served. Heaters shall not be
sized to be any larger than [115]% of full-load amps, heater element furnished, and rating
range of heater element in tabulate form.
2. Starters on all, [3] phase, [60] cycle electrical service shall have a [120] volt control
circuit obtained from a fused control transformer built into the starter. Transformer shall
be fused on each of the two lines. Fuses and transformers shall be sized to carry the
holding coil circuits and any miscellaneous devices included plus [50] VA.
E. All starters shall have maintained contact hand-off-automatic switch & reset button in cover. All
motors shall automatically restart after power loss is restored when set in automatic setting.
2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT
A. Isolation shall conform to seismic requirements of Section 22 0529 Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing." Unless otherwise noted, equipment over [1] horsepower shall be isolated from the
structure with resilient vibration and noise isolators supplied by Kinetics or Mason Industries to
the Mechanical Installer. Where isolator type and required deflection are not shown, equipment
shall be isolated in accordance with the ASHRAE systems book. Submittal shall include the
complete design for the supplementary bases; a tabulation of the design data on the isolators
including O.D., free operating and solid heights of the springs, free and operating heights of the
neoprene or fiberglass isolators. Mounts and bases shall be manufactured by Peabody Noise
Control or Mason Industries.
B. Model KIP-Q shall be pre-compressed molded fiberglass isolation pads, neoprene-jacketed and
stabilized during manufacture. Pads shall be sized for [40] to [60] psi loading and shall be made
of glass fibers produced by a multiple flame attenuation process which generates nominal fiber
diameters not to exceed [.00018] inches. Where the equipment base does not provide a uniform
load surface, steel plates shall be bonded to the top of the pads. Model RD neoprene mounts shall
incorporate completely enclosed metal inserts to permit bolting to the supported unit.
C. Model FDS shall be freestanding, unhoused, laterally stable spring mounts, incorporating leveling
bolts and [1/4] inch thick noise isolation pads. To assure stability, the outside spring diameter
shall be equal to or greater than the designed spring operating heights, and the horizontal stiffness.
Springs shall have a minimum additional travel of [50]% between the designed operating height
and the solid height.

SECTION 220500
D. Model SFH shall be combination spring and fiberglass hangers, incorporating [2] inch thick
neoprene-jacketed pre-compressed molded fiberglass inserts in series with springs, all encased in
welded steel bracket. The outside spring diameter shall be a minimum of [0.8] times the designed
spring operating height, and shall have a minimum additional travel of [50]% between the design
height and solid height.
E. Model FLS shall be freestanding, stable spring mounts, similar to Type FDS. They shall
incorporate vertical limit stops to assure a constant height if the supported weight is removed, and
to reduce movement due to wind load. The limit stops shall be isolated.
F. Model FYS spring isolators shall be seismic control restrained spring isolators, shall incorporate a
single vibration isolator, having all of the characteristics of Model FDS springs as previously
specified. Springs shall be assembled into a welded steel housing assembly engineered to limit
movement of supported equipment during an earthquake without degrading the vibration isolation
of the spring during normal equipment operating conditions. Vibration isolators shall incorporate
a steel angle and plate motion limit assembly, and steel spring isolator, engineered as a system to
accept a force in any direction equal to a minimum of [1.0] times the rated load capacity of the
spring isolator without yield or failure, and shall limit movement of the point of level bolt
connection to supported equipment to less than [1/2] inch in any direction, relative to any fixed
point on the isolator assembly, while subjected to the rated force specified. The motion limit
assembly shall be welded to a steel base plate having a [1/4] inch thick ribbed neoprene noise stop
pad, and drilled holes for bolting to the supporting structures. A spring isolator, drilled and tapped
load plate and leveling bolt assembly shall be positioned on the base plate, and shall carry all
normal equipment operating loads.
G. All piping and electrical conduit in the mechanical equipment room and piping three supports
away from other mechanical equipment shall be isolated from the structure by means of vibration
and noise isolators. Suspended piping shall be isolated with Model SFH Hangers as described
above. Floor mounted piping shall be isolated with FDS Spring Mounts as described above.
H. Flexible pipe connectors shall be incorporated in all piping connections to chillers, pumps and air
handling units. Flexible pipe connectors shall be equal to Mason Industries, Inc. Type MFTNC,
Neoprene-twin-sphere with floating flanges and control cables. Installation of the flexible
connector and anchoring of the piping shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
directions.
I. Flexible connections shall be incorporated in the ductwork adjacent to all air-moving units. The
connections shall be neoprene or canvas of approved construction.
2.4 ACCESS PANELS
A. Provide access panels not less than [24] inch x [24] inch for access to all concealed valves,
unions, dampers, etc., where no other means of access is provided. Access panels shall be all steel
construction with a [16] gauge ceiling frame and [16] gauge panel door. Doors shall be secured
with concealed hinge and flush locks of either the cylinder type of screwdriver-operated type.
Outside of door and frame shall be flush with finished wall or ceiling. Panels shall be painted with
a rust-inhibitive primer at the factory. Panels shall be installed in openings provided under the
construction sections of the specifications, and the work of the trades involved shall be
coordinated as necessary. Access panels shall be so located and of sufficient size to permit service
of components. Panels located in fire rated walls or ceilings shall be U.L. listed for rating equal to
or greater than where they are installed.

SECTION 220500
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR PIPE
A. Do all excavating and backfilling required for installation of underground work required by the
mechanical work.
B. Excavating and backfilling shall comply with all applicable provisions of Section for Earthwork,
including the provisions therein concerning classification of excavated materials. Any backfill in
the area of the building shall conform to the requirements for engineered fill as specified in
Section for Earthwork.
C. Unless otherwise shown or required, by the State Department of Health, provide separate trenches
for sewer and water lines, respectively, with a minimum of [5] feet between lines and a minimum
of 3 feet of undisturbed earth between trenches. In locations, such as close to a building where
separate trenches for sewers and water lines are not practical, lay the water pipe on a solid shelf at
least [12] inches above the top of the sewer.
D. Sheeting, Bracing, Water Removal

1. Sheet and brace trenches, and remove water, as necessary to fully protect workmen and
adjacent structures and permit proper installation of the work. Comply with local
regulations or, in the absence thereof, with the provisions of the "Manual of Accident
Prevention in Construction", of the AGC. Under no circumstances lay pipe or install
appurtenances in water; keep the trench free from water until pipe joint material has
hardened. The presence of ground water in the soil or the necessity of sheeting or bracing
trenches shall not constitute a condition for which an increase may be made in the
Contract Price.
2. Sheeting left in place shall be cut off not less than [2] feet below finished grade. Sheeting
shall not be removed until the trench is substantially backfilled.
E. Grading Trench Bottoms

1. Grade the bottom of trenches evenly to ensure uniform bearing for the full length of all
pipes. Cut holes as necessary for joints and joint making. Excavate all the rock, cemented
gravel, old masonry, or other material to at least [6] inch below the pipe at all points.
Refill all cuts below grade with sand or fine gravel firmly compacted; the necessity of
refill material shall not constitute a condition for which an increase may be made in the
Contract Price.
F. Piping Inverts
1. All piping outside of building footprint shall have a minimum cover of 18" unless noted
otherwise.
G. Bedding of Pipe
1. All pipe shall be installed on a minimum bedding of [6] inch of Class [1] embedment
materials ([1/4] inch to [1-1/2] inch graded stone).
2. Embedment material shall be placed in the trench to a sufficient height so that upon
completion of compaction as required in the specifications that entire upper surface of the
gravel shall be no lower than the bottom of the barrel of the pipe. Bell holes shall be
made in the embedment so that the pipe shall be supported on its barrel portion only and
the pipe laid to line and grade in the manner described in the specifications.

SECTION 220500
H. Special Supports
1. Should latent soil conditions, other than hard material as referred to above necessitate
special supports for piping and appurtenances, including the removal of unsuitable
material and refilling with gravel or other material, perform such work as directed by the
Architect.
I. Backfilling
1. Notify architect and local inspecting authority before backfilling trenches. Tests and
locations of pipe and appurtenances shall be recorded. Backfill by hand around pipe and
for a depth of [12] inch above the pipe. Use Class [1] angular [1/4] inch to [1-1/2] inch
graded stone and tamp firmly in layers not exceeding [6] inch in thickness, taking care
not to disturb the pipe or injure the pipe coating. Compact to [95]% density under
building, sidewalks, and paved areas.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. In general, install all piping as neatly as practicable as indicated and detailed on the drawings.
Arrange and install piping straight, level, plumb, and as direct as possible. Form right angles and
parallel lines with the structures. Keep pipes close to walls, partitions, ceilings, and slabs where
possible. Where two or more pipes are located together, run parallel to each other and space at
distances which will permit application of full insulation and access for servicing.
B. Unless noted otherwise, connect all apparatus and equipment in accordance with the
manufacturer's standard details as approved. Provide necessary piping, such as vent, relief, etc.,
wherever equipment is provided with connections for such piping. Unions or flanged connection
shall be placed where necessary to permit easy dismantling of piping and apparatus and in
connections to all equipment between shutoffs and the equipment. Each control valve shall have
union or flanged connection immediately adjacent or be flare connected. All piping and apparatus
connections shall be so installed as to avoid interference with tube or electrode removal from
domestic water heater, etc., and to allow for removal of an item of equipment without disturbing
other items of equipment. Ream all pipe ends after cutting. All blow-off piping shall be
permanently installed to indirect wastes. All pipe size changes shall be made with pipe reducer
fittings or, if applicable, with reducing fittings. Piping shall be carefully installed to provide for
expansion and for proper alignment. Pipe lines shall be guided and pipe shall be supported in such
a manner that it will not creep, sway, or buckle. Anchors and supports shall be provided wherever
necessary to prevent misalignment. Wherever possible, long radius elbows shall be used and not
short radius. Eccentric reducers shall be used wherever necessary or indicated; concentric
reducers and reducing fittings shall not be used where air trapping may occur. All pipe fittings
shall be factory fittings.
C. Joints:
1. Sweat joints in copper tubing shall be with approved alloys. Lead free solders and fluxes
that contain not more than [0.2] percent lead (per the Safe Water Act Amendments of
1986, Public Law 99-339) shall be used when joining copper to copper. Silver solders
([95] tin – [5] silver) shall be used when joining copper with bronze or steel, and when
joining Type K copper to copper, and for any copper joint below floor slab. The filler
metal shall conform to AWS A5.8.
2. Dielectric brass adapters, brass unions, or brass bushing shall be used wherever dissimilar
metals subject to galvanic activity are joined together, such as equipment connections,
tank connection, etc.
3. Piping installer shall use neoprene gasketed compression joints on cast iron pipe.

SECTION 220500
D. Nipples:
1. All steel pipe nipples shall be threaded steel nipples, galvanized or black to match pipe.
2. All nipples used in conjunction with copper pipe shall be brass.
E. Pipe Sleeves:
1. Fabricate from steel pipe having internal diameter not less than [1] inch larger than
outside diameter of pipe. Length of sleeve shall extend full depth of construction pierced,
and in the case of floor slabs, additionally extend [2] inch above top of slab.
2. Insert sleeves in forms before pour of floor & roof slabs, install sleeves as wall goes up
for concrete block walls. Securely fasten sleeves to structure.
F. Protection of Floor or Wall Penetrations by Piping:

1. Provide ProSet Systems U.L. fire rated sleeve coupling Penetrators for each pipe
penetration or fixture opening passing through fire rated walls or partitions. All
Penetrators shall comply with ASTM E-814 or U.L. 1479 fire test standards.
2. Sleeve Penetrators shall have a built in anchor ring for waterproofing and anchoring into
concrete pours or use the special fit Cored hole Penetrator for cored holes.
3. Copper and Steel piping shall have ProSeal Plugs on both sides of the penetrator to
reduce noise and waterproof.
a. Copper and Steel insulated pipe - Use Systems "A".
b. PVC waste and vent piping - Use System "C".
4. All above systems to be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
5. Alternate Firestopping Systems are acceptable if approved as "an approved substitute."
However, any deviation from the above specification requires the Contractor to be
responsible for determining the suitability of the proposed products and their intended
use, and the Contractor shall assume all risks and liabilities whatsoever in connection
therewith.
G. Valves: Install valves and hosecocks as shown on the drawings, and specifically in the cold
water main entering the building, at runouts from mains to risers and or all branch lines feeding
from mains on domestic cold water, and at entering and leaving sides of all equipment as
necessary to isolate and service this equipment.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Do not install any water piping over electrical switchgear. Provide galvanized sheet metal gutter,
having [1-1/2] inch pipe drain to floor away from affected areas, for any water or drain piping
having to cross the switchgear.
B. Electrical Ground: Notify electrical installer regarding location of any valves whose future
removal for service will break the electrical grounding system.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Exercise care to keep all piping clear and free from foreign matter at all times.
B. After reaming, if cutting is required, clean each piece of all loose scale, dirt, etc.
C. Keep installed piping free from dirt and scale and protect open ends to prevent foreign matter
entering. Use temporary plugs, caps, or other approved method of open and closure.

SECTION 220500
D. Defective, leaking, or otherwise unsatisfactory joints or material shall be remade or replaced.
Peening, caulking, doping, etc., will not be permitted.
3.5 PAINTING OF MECHANICAL PIPING & METAL SURFACES
A. All finish will be performed under Division 9.
B. The equipment installer shall touch up all scratches, abrasions, etc., in either the prime or finish
coats of all equipment and material furnished and installed by him. All rust and corrosion shall be
removed from pipe, fittings, and other metal surfaces. All surfaces shall be left in a clean "factory-
new" condition.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 220500
SECTION 220501 - GENERAL WORK FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 OTHER CONDITIONS
A. Related Documents
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
B. The contract scope as set forth in the first division of this specification shall govern requirements
of this division. The Contractor shall examine the various other divisions of the specifications
and examine the existing conditions at the building site and familiarize himself with the
provisions therein affecting the mechanical work.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all materials, labor and tools to construct a complete plumbing system as herein specified
or as shown on the drawings, or both.
B. Provide water and drains for all mechanical and all other equipment requiring these services.
C. Provide everything necessary for a complete and satisfactory installation whether or not
specifically shown or specified. This is not intended to cover major items of equipment; but, it is
intended to include all miscellaneous parts, devices, accessories, controls, and appurtenances
which are required to complete the work in proper and safe operating condition and so that the
performance characteristics and capacities specified will be obtained.
D. Notify, well in advance, all trades affected of any chases, recesses, etc., which may be required for
the installation of the work under this division. If the Contractor neglects to do this, any cutting
and/or patching required for such chases, recesses, etc., shall be done by the trade concerned at his
expense.
E. Do all excavating, backfilling, and cutting of holes necessary for the installation of work specified
under this division.
F. Furnish ceiling and wall access panels and deliver them to site for installation as specified under
another section of these specifications.
G. Flash and counter flash all pipes where they penetrate roofs and outside walls.
I. Provide structural steel stands, primed and finish painted, for equipment so noted requiring same.
J. Furnish and install all mechanical exterior louvers and screens where called out on drawings.
1.3 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THIS DIVISION
A. Installation of ceiling and wall access doors.
B. Field painting, except such painting as is required to maintain shop coat painting and factory
finish painting. All other field painting is specified in Finish Painting, Division 9.
GENERAL WORK FOR PLUMBING PAGE 1 OF 8

SECTION 220501
C. Provision and patching of all holes required for installation of pipes and ducts, however, furnish a
shop drawing showing the location and sizes of all required holes prior to construction of affected
areas.
D. All power wiring to HVAC equipment.
1.4 CODES, PERMITS & FEES
A. Secure and pay for all permits, licenses, connection fees, and inspections required for work under
this division. Give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations
applicable to the work.
B. Applicable codes include but are not limited to the State and Local Building Codes, Plumbing
Codes, and Electric Codes,, and State Department of Public Health Regulations.
C. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratories seal or
ASME Code stamp. Certificates to this effect shall be furnished to the engineer upon request.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Division 1, submit to the Architect for approval a complete list of materials,
equipment, and accessories proposed for use, listing the item and the manufacturer's name only.
B. Based on aforementioned approved listing, submit to the Architect for approval digital copies in
pdf format of shop drawings or data sheets for materials, equipment and accessories, giving the
name of the manufacturer, trade name and catalog number, rating data, and performance features,
all in the terms specified hereinafter.
C. Submittals shall be stamped or noted by the Contractor to indicate that he has examined them and
found the information contained to be in accordance with the contract requirements. Any
deviations from contract requirements shall be called to the Architect's attention. The Contractor
shall specifically check to see that the equipment proposed will fit into the available space, with
proper clearance for coil or tube removal, filter servicing, and other maintenance operations.
D. All submittals shall be submitted at one time, in one folder for plumbing. Submittals shall be
submitted in time to allow four weeks from receipt by Architect to time final approval is required
to meet the construction schedule.
E. Submittals shall include affidavits from manufacturers of pipe, pipe coating, fittings, valves,
meters, insulation and duct materials furnished and installed under this section certifying that such
materials delivered to the project conform to the requirements of this specification.
F. Submittals, drawings and data are required on all items specified by manufacturer's name,
including but not limited to the following:
PLUMBING
Plumbing fixtures,
Service valves,
Water heaters,
Pipe material
Insulation
Floor drains and sinks
Clean outs

SECTION 220501
Carriers
Shock absorbers
Wall hydrants
Support & Anchor Data
Wall and Ceiling Access Panels
1.6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Provide a competent, experienced person for a total of [8] hours to instruct Owner's operating
personnel in operation of equipment and control systems at the completion of the work.
B. Provide three [3] complete sets of a compilation of catalog data of each manufactured item of
equipment used in the mechanical work. In addition to the catalog data, installation, operating,
and maintenance data and bill of materials for fans, controls, motors and all other operating
equipment shall be submitted. Each of the three [3] sets of data shall be bound in loose leaf
binders and submitted to the engineer before final payment is made. A complete double index
shall be provided as follows:
1. Listing the products alphabetically by name.
2. Listing the names of manufacturers alphabetically by name together with their addresses
and the names and addresses of local sales representatives.
C. It is the intent of this catalog, operation and maintenance data to provide the Owner with complete
instruction on the proper operation and use, lubrication and periodic maintenance, together with
the source of replacement parts and service for the items of equipment covered. Instructions shall
be submitted to the Architect for approval at least one month in advance of initial start up.
D. In addition to the three printed sets of information required in paragraphs B and C, provide the
above required information in digital pdf format.
1.7 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Upon completion of the work, deliver to the Architect reproducible drawings, prepared by a
qualified draftsman, to the same scale as the contract drawings, showing the actual Installed
locations of all underground cleanouts and valves.
B. Make all necessary field measurements as the work progresses and keep accurate records of the
measurements. Show locations by dimensions from permanent, readily identifiable referenced
points, such as building walls and columns. Show depths by dimensions below finished floors or
finished grades.
C. Keep at the building site one set of the plumbing drawings for sole purpose of daily recording any
changes in the routing of piping and ducts, relocation of any equipment or valves, and similar
changes made in the work as it is installed. Note on the prints with red pencil all changes at the
time they are made. Upon completion of the plumbing work, the marked-up prints reflecting the
work as installed shall be delivered to the Architect. The Architect shall prepare the as-builts from
these drawings
1.8 COORDINATION & INTERFERENCES
A. A competent superintendent shall represent the Contractor at all times. All instructions and
coordinating problems given to or worked out with the superintendent shall be as binding as if
given to the Contractor.

SECTION 220501
B. The plumbing drawings are generally diagrammatic and, except where specifically dimensioned
or detailed, indicate the approximate location and general arrangement of the plumbing work. The
Contractor shall examine all contract drawings and documents, as well as the mechanical ones,
and shall install his work to conform as nearly as possible to the locations and arrangements
shown, with only such minor adjustments as necessary to coordinate the plumbing work with the
structural, architectural, HVAC, and all other work and to avoid interferences. All offsets, rises,
and fittings are not necessarily shown on the drawings but shall be provided as required.
C. All plumbing work which interferes with the structural or other work or which deviates from the
drawings and specifications without prior approval of the Architect shall be altered at the
Contractor's expense. Plumbing interferences which may be discovered or anticipated shall be
reported promptly to the Architect for decision before proceeding with the work. The Architect
shall have the privilege of making minor changes without additional cost, provided that such
changes are made prior to commencing work on the item involved.
D. All building dimensions shall be taken from the architectural and structural drawings or from
actual site measurements. Do not scale dimensions from the mechanical drawings. Rough in and
install all equipment and fixtures provided under the general contract in accordance with the
manufacturer's approved shop drawings.
E. All equipment, apparatus, piping, and similar work shall fit into the available spaces in the
building and shall be introduced into the building at such times and in such manner as not to cause
damage to the structure. All piping shall be installed to provide the maximum clear height
underneath. All equipment requiring servicing shall be made easily accessible.
1.9 MATERIALS & WORKMANSHIP
A. Equipment and materials used in the work shall be in accordance with the contract requirements,
the approved equipment lists, and shop drawings. After an item has been approved, no
substitution will be permitted unless it is considered by the Architect to be in the Owner's best
interest. All equipment and materials shall be new and unused.
B. All electrical materials shall be UL approved where such approval is applicable and shall bear the
UL label where such labeling is customary.
C. Work shall be under the constant supervision of a competent superintendent and shall be
performed by skilled journeymen.
D. All equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Any conflicts between these recommendations and the plans and specifications shall be promptly
reported to the Architect for decision before proceeding. All auxiliary piping, valves, accessories,
electrical connections, etc., recommended by the manufacturer or required for proper and safe
operation shall be furnished and installed complete whether or not such auxiliaries are shown.
E. Piping shall be run concealed above ceilings throughout all finished spaces except where
specifically noted otherwise. Run exposed piping in a neat and workmanlike manner and parallel
to the principal parts of the building.
1.10 PROTECTION
A. Work shall be protected at all times. Pipe openings shall be closed with temporary caps or plugs
during construction until system and fixture connections are completed. Equipment shall be
covered and protected against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical injury. The installation of

SECTION 220501
equipment liable to damage by subsequent construction operations shall be deferred until
authorized by the Architect.
1.11 TESTING
A. All testing may be witnessed by the Architect, his representative or local authorities having
jurisdiction. All testing shall be completed and approved before insulation, concealment by
furring, ceiling work, or backfilling is started. All equipment required for tests shall be furnished
by this Contractor.
B. Should inspection or tests show defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced and
inspected and tests repeated. All repairs to piping shall be made with new material. No caulking
or screwed joints or holes will be acceptable.
C. Plumbing Systems:
1. If inspections or tests show that work is in any way defective or at variance with contract
requirements, make all changes necessary to correct and remedy all defects and to
complete the work in accordance with contract requirements. Defective work or material
shall be replaced and inspected and tests repeated. Make all repairs to piping with new
material; caulking of screwed joints or holes will not be acceptable.
2. Upon completion of the roughing-in and before setting fixtures, test the entire hot and
cold domestic water piping systems at a hydrostatic pressure of not less than [150] psig.
3. The drainage and venting system shall have all the necessary openings plugged to permit
the system to be filled with water and subjected to a water pressure of not less than [10]
feet head. The system shall hold this water for [30] minutes without a water level drop
greater than [4] inch in a [4] inch standpipe and shall be without visible leakage. Smoke
tests shall be performed, if required by authorities or by the Architect. The system shall
be tested in sections if the minimum head can be maintained in each section.
4. Test for stability of supports and proper operation of plumbing fittings.
5. At the completion of the plumbing work adjust: the hot water system for uniform
circulation, all flush valves and other parts of the work for quiet operation, and all
automatic control devices for correct and proper operation.
6. All testing shall be completed and approved before insulation is applied and before work
is concealed by furring, ceilings, or backfilling.
1.12 TEST REPORT RECORD
Test of all sewer and water lines shall be recorded on a form with the data and format as listed below.
When the form(s) is completed, it shall be turned over to the Architect.
1. Job Name___________________________________________________
2. Section or Area of Pipe being tested_______________________________

________________________________________________________
3. Type System (Sewer, Water, etc.)_________________________________
_________________________________________________________
4. Test Pressure__________________________________________________
5. Length of Time for test___________________________________________
6. I certify that the above test was performed in my presence and that all leaks observed
were fixed prior to backfilling.

SECTION 220501
Signed:
___________________________________________________
Contractor's Superintendent
Signed:
___________________________________________________
Plumbing Installer Superintendent
1.13 CLEANING AND STERILIZATION
A. General:
1. Upon completion of the contract and progressively as the work proceeds, clean up all dirt,
debris, oil, materials, etc., and remove it from the site, keeping premises in a neat and
clean condition to the satisfaction of the Architect. See General Conditions.
2. All factory applied finishes, if not to be repainted, shall be touched-up, covering all bare
places, scratches, etc.
3. Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to parts of the building, its finish, or
furnishings due to the Contractor's failure to properly clean the piping system shall be
repaired by the Contractor without cost to the Owner.
B. Domestic Water Supply Systems:

1. At the completion of the work and before final inspection, thoroughly clean all parts of
the plumbing installation, making sure that equipment, pipe, valves, fixtures and fittings
are cleaned free of grease, metal cuttings, plaster, concrete and similar foreign material.
2. Repair and remedy, without cost to the Owner, any stoppage, discoloration, or other
damage to parts of building, its finish or furnishings resulting from failure to properly
clean the piping system.
3. After pipe cleaning is complete, remove, clean, and replace strainer baskets. Clean dirt
legs.
4. Flush out domestic water system progressively by opening building outlets and
permitting the flow to continue from each outlet until the water runs clear. Sterilize the
system in accordance with the requirements of the State Department of Public Health by
the following method or other method acceptable to local authorities.
a. Introduce chlorine or a solution of calcium or sodium hypochlorite, filling the
lines slowly and applying the sterilizing agent at a rate of [50] ppm of chlorine,
as determined by residual chlorine tests at the ends of lines. Open and close all
valves while the system is being chlorinated.
b. After sterilizing agent has been applied and left standing for [24] hours,test for
residual chlorine at the ends of lines. If less than [25] ppm is indicated, repeat the
sterilizing process.
c. After standing for [24] hours and tests show at least [25] ppm of residual
chlorine flush out system until the chlorine content is less than [1] ppm. The
sterilization shall be performed in the presence of an authorized representative of
the local utility.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the authority having jurisdiction or to a
department of health and welfare approved testing laboratory. Repeat the
procedure if the biological examination made by the lab shows evidence of
contamination.
5. Prepare reports and submit same to the architect for all purging and disinfecting
activities.
6. Submit to the architect, a letter of certification for water quality from the testing
laboratory.

SECTION 220501
1.14 OBSERVATIONS
A. The Architect's office may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress and quality of
the construction work and to determine, in general, if the results of the construction work are in
accordance with the drawings and specifications. The Architect's office will also observe certain
tests required of the mechanical installer as are called for in other portions of the specifications.
B. It should be understood that the plans and specifications represent the work to be done by the
Contractor in view of the total project requirements. The final routing of piping, ductwork, etc., to
eliminate conflict with other trades is his responsibility. The Contractor is to furnish all necessary
supervision required for his personnel, as well as his mechanical installer, to ensure that the
installation is made in accordance with plans and specifications and that all safety rules and
regulations are observed. In the event of conflicts of work on the job with other trades affecting
this Contractor and/or his mechanical installers, he shall make every reasonable effort to resolve
the conflict through meetings and discussions with the other parties involved by preparation of
drawings or by other appropriate action. Only after this has been done shall the Architect's
assistance be requested.
C. When the Architect is requested to visit the job to aid in the resolution of conflicts or for
witnessing tests, he shall be given a minimum of [24] hours’ notice prior to the time his presence
is required at the job site.
1.15 WARRANTY & SERVICE
A. In addition to manufacturer's warranty of each item of equipment, the Contractor shall warrant the
equipment for one year after acceptance and make good any defect of material or workmanship
occurring during this period without expense to the Owner.
B. Upon final acceptance of work, Owner will assume responsibility of supervising, operating, and
maintaining equipment. He will lubricate motors and other operating components, clean strainers,
make minor adjustments for proper operating conditions and report defective materials or
workmanship to Contractor. Owner will make emergency repairs only if Contractor is
unavailable, and such repairs will in no case void a warranty or guarantee.
C. Contractor is to replace defective material, parts, and equipment. He will also correct defective
workmanship without delay and without cost upon being notified of such defect.
D. Upon expiration of each of these limits noted herein, the maintenance will be at the Owner's
expense, including labor and materials costs.
1.16 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor assumes responsibility for proper arrangements of pipes, changes in electrical
requirements, etc., or changes in layout to connect "approved substitute" equipment in a proper
approved manner. The contractor shall pay all cost associated with these changes without
additional cost to the owner.

SECTION 220501
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS
A. Equipment, fixtures & materials furnished shall be new & unused, fabricated by manufacturers
regularly engaged in their production and shall be their standard and current offering for which
replacement parts are available. Mechanical equipment shall be substantially the same equipment
of a given manufacturer which has been in successful commercial use and operation for at least
one year.
B. Equipment & materials are shown or specified by a single or by multiple manufacturers, to

indicate quality, material and type of construction desired. When one manufacturer's product is
shown or specified and has been used as basis for design, it is the Contractor's responsibility to
ascertain that alternate manufacturer's products meet detailed specifications, size, and
arrangement to that used for design, and that the alternate is suitable for installation and
compatible with other system components.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Before requesting final inspection, the following items must be completed in accordance with
appropriate sections of Division 1 and 22:
1. Complete all work required under this division of the specifications except as may be
permitted hereinafter.
2. Submit test report records of all storm sewer, sanitary sewer, and domestic water lines.
3. Submit letter of certification from testing laboratory for domestic water system
sterilization.
4. Submit test and balance report for all air and water systems.
5. Submit letter from an authorized representative of each equipment manufacturer stating
that he has observed the installation and that his equipment is installed and operating per
the manufacturer's requirements.
6. Submit specific warranties and any maintenance agreements.
7. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.
8. Install all items of identification on all piping and equipment.
B. Before requesting final payment, the following items must be completed:

1. Submit operating instructions and maintenance manuals.
2. Demonstrate to owner's representative the proper operation of all equipment and systems.
A minimum of [24] hours of training time will be provided. The owner may video tape
all training sessions for use in educating future maintenance personnel. The contractor
shall conduct the training sessions in a manner that will be easily video taped and
informative when use in the future.
3. Submit as-built drawings.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 220501
SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes hangers and supports for plumbing systems piping and equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contract and Division 1
specification sections.
B. Product data, including installation instructions for each type of support and anchor. Submit pipe
hanger and support schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features
for each required pipe hanger and support.
C. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer of hangers and supports certifying that their
products meet the specified requirements.
D. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements
specified under "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Assembly-type shop drawings for each type of support and anchor, indicating dimensions,
weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.
A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS Dl.l "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone re-certification.
B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable plumbing

codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports and anchors.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PAGE 1 OF 6

SECTION 220529
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Hangers and support components shall be factory fabricated of materials, design, and
manufacturer complying with MSS SP-58.
1. Components shall have galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that
will not have field-applied finish.
2. Pipe attachments shall have nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where
attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
B. Thermal Hanger Shield Inserts: [100] psi average compressive strength, waterproofed calcium
silicate, encased with a sheet metal shield. Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of the
pipe and shall be of length indicated by manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation.
A. Steel Plates. Shapes. and Bars: ASTM A 36.
B. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type [I] or Type [III]) and clean uniformly
graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. [2]). Mix ratio shall be [1.0] part cement to [3.0]
parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration.
C. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting
of bolted two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider that bolts tightly to
pipe. Length of guides shall be as recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substates and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not
proceed with installing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from
building structure; comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of
horizontal piping supported together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers where
possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of
various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe as specified above for individual pipe
hangers.
B. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Space attachments within
maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at
concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in
direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert to forms.
Where concrete with compressive strength less than [2,500] psi is indicated, install reinforcing
bars through openings at top of inserts.
C. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other
accessories.

SECTION 220529
D. Field-Fabricated, Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes. Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads
required; weld steel in accordance with AWS D-l.l.
E. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, to permit freedom
of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops,
expansion bends and similar units.
F. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
G. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping Code is not exceeded.
H Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements.
1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting
through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9.
2. Saddles: Install protection saddles MSS Type [39] where insulation without vapor barrier
is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe
insulation.
3. Shields: Install protective shields MSS Type [40] on cold water piping that has vapor
barrier. Shields shall span an arc of [180] degrees and shall have dimensions in inches not
less than the following:
PIPE SIZE LENGTH THICKNESS
1/4 THROUGH 3-1/2 12 0.048

4 12 0.060
5&6 18 0.060
4. Pipes [3] inches and larger shall have calcium silicate inserts.
5. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield.
6. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated, with insulation of same thickness as
piping.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS
A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME
B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
B. Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to structure.
Comply with ASME B31.9 and with AWS Standards Dl.l.
C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion unit
manufacturer's written instructions to control movement to compensators.
D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe runs, at
intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset
of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A. Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins expansion joints and elsewhere as indicated.

SECTION 220529
B. Anchor to building substrate.
3.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment
above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for piping and equipment.
3.6 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe anchors and equipment supports.
Install and align fabricated anchors in indicated locations.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Dl.l for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the
following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing, and so
that contours welded surfaces to match adjacent contours.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection of anchors and supports, clean field welds and
abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting
to comply with SSPC-PA-l requirements for touch-up of field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of [2.0] mils.
C. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing
repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF PIPING FOR SEISMIC RESTRAINT
A. All piping shall be provided with seismic restraints in accordance with state and local codes.
B. Bracing of Pipes: Brace pipes as outlined in SMACNA guide and as listed below:
1. Bracing details, support details, schedule and notes apply to all types of pipe and all types
of joints.
a. Brace all pipes [2-1/2] inch diameter and larger:
b. Exceptions:
(1) Brace all piping [1-1/4] inch and larger located in boiler rooms,
mechanical equipment rooms and refrigeration machinery rooms.
Bracing requirements for pipes less than [2-1/2] in diameter shall be the
same as for [2-1/2] pipes in all other locations.

SECTION 220529
(2) Brace all fuel gas and oil piping, medical gas piping and compressed air
piping [1] inch and larger.
(3) Seismic braces may be omitted. (1) when the top of the pipe is
suspended [12] inch or less from the supporting structure member and
the pipe is suspended by an individual hanger. (2) on all piping [3/4]
inch and smaller.
2. Details shown in guide provide a lateral bracing system. A vertical support system must
also be used.
a. Vertical Piping
(1) Attachment - Vertical piping shall be secured at sufficiently close
intervals to keep the pipe in alignment and carry the weight of the pipe
and contents. Stacks shall be supported at their bases and if over [2]
stories in height at each floor by approved metal floor clamps.
(2) Screwed pipe - Screwed pipe (I.P.S.) shall be supported at not - less than
every other story height.
(3) Copper tubing - Copper tubing shall be supported at each story for
piping [1-1/2] inch and larger diameter, at not more than [6] foot
intervals for piping [1-1/2] inch and smaller in diameter.
(4) Pipes of other approved material shall be supported in accordance with
their approved installation standards.
(5) Vertical risers shall be supported with a riser clamp at each floor. Where
thermal expansion occurs, anchor the riser at the midpoint or at the next
floor above the midpoint with additional supports adjacent to the top and
bottom of the riser; install guides on the riser at each immediate floor.
Risers in high rise buildings (six stories and above) shall be designed
individually.
(6) For risers in hubless piping systems where the riser joints are
unsupported between floors see guide, page 9.11 for brace.
b. Horizontal Piping
(1) Supports - Horizontal piping shall be supported at sufficiently close
intervals to keep it in alignment and prevent sagging.
(2) Screwed pipe - Screwed pipe (I.P.S.) or flanged pipe shall be supported
at approximately [10] foot intervals.
(3) Copper tubing - Copper tubing shall be supported at approximately [6]
foot intervals for tubing [1-1/2] inch and smaller in diameter and [10]
foot intervals for tubing [2] inch and larger in diameter.
(4) Pipes of other approved materials shall be supported in accordance with
their approved installation standards.
3. Transverse bracing at [40] feet [0] inch o.c. maximum unless otherwise noted.
4. Longitudinal bracing at [80] feet [0] inch o.c. maximum unless otherwise noted. When
thermal expansion or contraction is involved, provide longitudinal bracings at anchor
points. The longitudinal braces and the connections must be capable of resisting the force
induced by expansion and contraction.
5. Transverse bracing for one piping section may also act as longitudinal bracing for the
piping section connected perpendicular to it, if the bracing is installed within [24] inch of
the elbow or tee of similar size.
6. For threaded piping the flexibility may be provided by the installation of swing joints. In
welded or solder joint piping the flexibility shall be provided by expansion loops or
manufactured flexible connectors. For piping with manufactured ball joints select length
of piping offset using "Seismic Drift" in places of "Expansion Per Joint Manufacturers"
selection table. Seismic Drift = [0.015] feet per foot of height.
7. Do not use branch lines to brace main lines.

SECTION 220529
8. Trapeze hangers may be used. Provide flexibility in joints where pipes pass through
building seismic or expansion joints, or where rigidly supported pipes connect to
equipment with vibration isolators.
9. A rigid piping system shall not be braced to dissimilar parts of a building or two
dissimilar building systems that may respond in a different mode during an earthquake.
Examples: Wall and a roof; solid concrete wall and a metal deck with lightweight
concrete fill.
10. Provide large enough pipe sleeves through walls or floors to allow for anticipated
differential movements.
11. At vertical pipe risers, wherever possible, support the weight of the riser at a point or
points above the center of gravity of the riser. Provide lateral guides at the top and bottom
of the riser, and at intermediate points not to exceed [30] feet [0] inch on center.
12. Cast iron pipe of all types, glass pipe and any other pipe joined with a shield and clamp
assembly where the top of the pipe is [12] inch or more from supporting structure shall be
braced on each side of a change in direction of 90 or more. Riser joints shall be braced
or stabilized between floors.
13. For gas piping, the bracing details, schedules and notes in the SMACNA guide may be
used except that transverse bracing shall be at [20] feet [0] inch o.c. maximum and
longitudinal bracing at [40]feet [0] inch o.c. maximum. Also [1] inch, [1-1/4] inch, [1-
1/2] inch, and [2] inch diameter pipes shall be braced the same as [2-1/2"] inch diameter
pipe in the SMACNA guide. (No bracing is required for pipes [3/4] inch diameter and
smaller).
14. Proprietary bracing systems approved by the OSA may be used in lieu of the braces in the
details.
D. Equipment Restraints: Mechanical Equipment Anchorages such as bolts, expansion anchors,

screws, etc., shall comply with the force level requirements of the local and state code
requirements for seismic design.
1. Restraining Devices shall be designed to conform with the force level requirements of
listed above. The following companies, in the past, have met these requirements on a job
submittal. The names are listed for convenience only with no intention of excluding other
companies.
California Dynamics Corporation

Mason Industries, Inc.
M. W. Sausse and Company, Inc.
2. Restraining Devices must be placed on all sides of the equipment base.

3. It is the entire responsibility of the Equipment Manufacturer to design his equipment so
that the strength and anchorage of the internal components of the equipment exceeds the
force level used to restrain and anchor the unit itself to the supporting structure.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 220529
SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of plumbing identification work required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or as
listed below:
1. Domestic cold water, hot water, and hot water recirculating piping.
2. Sanitary sewer and vent piping.
3. Air unit condensate piping.
B. Type of identification devices specified in this section include the following:

1. Plastic Pipe Markers.
2. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of identification devices of types and

sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than [5]
years.
B. Codes and Standards:

1. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field,
colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each
identification material and device required.
B. Maintenance Data: Include product data and schedules in maintenance manuals; in accordance
with requirements of Division-1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification

materials of one of the following:
1. Allen Systems, Inc.
2. Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div.
3. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.
4. Seton Name Plate Corp.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PAGE 1 OF 4

SECTION 220553
2.2 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each
application as referenced in other Division-22 sections. Where more than single type is specified
for application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product
category.
2.3 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS
A. Snap-On-Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap-on, color-coded pipe

markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.
B. Insulation: Furnish [1] inch thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe
marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of [125] deg F ([52]
deg C) or greater. Cut length to extend [2] inch beyond each end of plastic pipe marker.
C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than [6] inch including insulation if any), provide full-
band pipe markers, extending [360] deg around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the
following methods:
1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.
2. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation).
D. Large Pipes: For external diameters of [6 inch and larger (including insulation if any), provide
either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than [3] times letter height (and of
required length), fastened by one of the following methods:
2. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's
standard stainless steel bands.
E. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping system
in each instance, as selected by Designer in cases of variance with names as shown or specified.
1. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally
with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit
of plastic.
2.4 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS
A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with ASTM Standard
No. D 709 (grades ES-1, ES-2, ES-3) in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with
engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter
color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive
mounting is necessary because of substrate.
1. Thickness: [1/16] inch for units up to [20] square inch or [8] inch length; [1/8] inch for
larger units.
2. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive
where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.
2.5 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS
A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical

identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide
numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by

SECTION 220553
manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical
systems and equipment.
1. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and
specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as
service (as examples; Water Heater WH-1; Backflow Preventor RPBP-1).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting

or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install
identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation
of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.
3.2 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated to receive
identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow:
1. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this
section. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated pipes.
B. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied
spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior
non-concealed locations.
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each
pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.
3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non-accessible
enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of [50] feet along each piping run, except
reduce spacing to [25] feet in congested areas of piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced
markers.
3.3 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or near each major
item of mechanical equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not otherwise
specified for each item or device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment
and operational devices:
1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as
gas outlets.
2. Meters, gauges, thermometers and similar units.
3. Pumps and similar motor-driven units.
4. Strainers, filters, and similar equipment.
B. Lettering Size: Minimum [1/4] inch high lettering for name of unit where viewing distance is less
than [2] feet [0] inch, [1/] inch high for distances up to [6] feet [0] inch, and proportionately larger

SECTION 220553
lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering of [2/3] to [3/4] the size of principal
lettering.
C. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between
multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency
precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visually blocked by
work of this division or other divisions.
B. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices, and glass frames of valve charts.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 220553
SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic cold-water piping.
2. Domestic hot-water piping.
3. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping.
4. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor
permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied, if any).
POLYISOCYANURATE INSULATION SHALL NOT BE USED ON ANY PIPING THAT
PENETRATES RATED WALLS.
B. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing
product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: [12] inches long by NPS 2.
2. Jacket Materials for Pipe: [12] inches long by NPS 2.
3. Sheet Jacket Materials: [12] inches square.
4. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range
of colors available for each type of finish material.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates
of tests and test methods employed.
E. Field quality-control reports.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing

identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement
material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of [25] or less, and smoke-developed
index of [50] or less.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PAGE 1 OF 13

SECTION 220719
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of [75] or less, and smoke-developed
C. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
B. Store insulation materials in a dry location. Wet materials shall not be installed.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division
22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before
preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of
insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing
and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test
results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," and "Indoor Piping
Insulation Schedule," articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than [50] ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation (for Chilled/Cold Surface Applications): Closed-cell, sponge or

expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type [I] for tubular materials.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Rubatex, Corp.
E. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type [I]. Factory-applied jacket
requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements.

SECTION 220719
F. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
a. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
b. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.
c. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
2. Type [I], [850] Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type [I], Grade [A], with factory-applied ASJ-SSL.
Factory applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of insulation manufacturer.
B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.

C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type [II], Class [I].
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of [50] g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers,"
including current Addenda.
C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class [2], Grade [A].

D. ASJ Adhesive Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class [2], Grade [A] for bonding
insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.


SECTION 220719
2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-
PRF-19565C, Type [II].
1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of [50] g/L or less when
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
3. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure [B], [0.013] perm at [43] mil
dry film thickness.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus [20] to plus [180] deg F.
5. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and [70] percent by weight.
6. Color: White.
C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.
3. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, [1.8] perms at [0.0625] inch dry film thickness.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus [20] to plus [180] deg F).
5. Solids Content: [60] percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.
6. Color: White.
2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class [I], Grade [A], and shall be compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of [50] g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire
resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.
4. Service Temperature Range: [0] to plus [180] deg F.
5. Color: White.
2.6 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Color: White or gray.
5. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of [420] g/L or less when

SECTION 220719
6. Use sealants that comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
B. Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
5. Color: Aluminum.
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
5. Color: White.
2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type [I].
2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type [I].
2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type [I], unless otherwise indicated.
B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class
16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness
is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
3. Color: White.

SECTION 220719
4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.
a. Shapes: [45] and [90] degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves,
flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and
P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.
C. Metal Jacket:
2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy [3003], [3005], [3105], or [5005],
Temper [H-14].
a. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
b. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: [1] mil- thick, heat-bonded
polyethylene and kraft paper.
c. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: [3] mil- thick, heat-bonded
d. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
2) Preformed [2] piece or gore, [45] and [90] degree, short and long-radius
elbows.
3) Tee covers.
4) Flange and union covers.
5) End caps.
6) Beveled collars.
7) Valve covers.
8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are
not available.
2.9 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
3. Thickness: [11.5] mils.
4. Adhesion: [90] ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: [2] percent.
6. Tensile Strength: [40] lbf/inch in width.
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive;
suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
3. Thickness: [6] mils.
C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.


SECTION 220719
2.10 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS
A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:

following:
a. McGuire Manufacturing.
b. Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation.
c. Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.
2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold
water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA) requirements.
B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures:

following:
a. Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation.
b. Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.
2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-
water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
A. Insulation shall be installed in accordance with the National Commercial and Industrial Insulation
Standards Manual, latest edition.
B. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free
of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
C. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for
each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

SECTION 220719
D. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry
state.
E. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
F. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
G. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
J. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
K. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
L. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and
dry film thicknesses.
M. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with [3] inch wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced [4] inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least [1-1/2] inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at [4] inches o.c.
a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
N. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than [75] percent of its nominal
thickness.
O. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due
to thermal movement.

SECTION 220719
P. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend
patches at least [4] inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt
joints.
Q. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Cleanouts.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,
install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal
joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least [2] inches below top of
roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously

through wall penetrations.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at
least [2] inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for
firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07
Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific
requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

SECTION 220719
B. Insulation shall be installed in accordance with the National Commercial and Industrial Insulation
Standards Manual, latest edition.
C. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve
stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for
above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation
facing using PVC tape.
D. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test
connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation
at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish
with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
E. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe

SECTION 220719
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless
steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide
the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least [2] inches over adjacent
pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied
in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION (For Chilled/Cold Surface

Applications Only)
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as
pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

SECTION 220719
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at [6] inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least
[1] inch and seal joints with flashing sealant.

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.
1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with [2] inch overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two [0.062] inch thick coats of lagging adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.
B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with [1] inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along seam and joint edge.
C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with [2] inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof
sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands [12]
inches o.c. and at end joints.

SECTION 220719
3.9 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each
piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
2. Underground piping.
3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.10 INDOOR PIPING ABOVE GROUND INSULATION SCHEDULE
INDOOR ABOVE GROUND INSULATION SCHEDULE
SERVICE INSULATION PIPE SIZE Thermal THICKNESS

MATERIALS Conductivity (inches)
(Btu$in/hr$ft5$F)
Domestic Cold Water Mineral Fiber All Sizes 0.23 1

Preformed, Type I
Domestic Hot and Mineral Fiber 2" and 0.23 1

Recirculating Hot Water Preformed, Type I smaller
Domestic Hot and Mineral Fiber 2-1/2" and 0.23 1-1/2

Recirculating Hot Water Preformed, Type I larger
Hot Service Drains or Vents Mineral Fiber All Sizes 0.23 1

Preformed, Type I
3.11 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-
applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Pipe Fittings, Valves, Strainers, etc:

1. Encase with Glass Fabric and Vapor Barrier Mastic
2. PVC Cover for Fittings
D. Piping, Fitting, Valves,, Etc.:Exposed within [7] feet of the floor or work surfaces
1. Encase with Aluminum, Smooth Jacket , [0.016] inch thick metal.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 220719
SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Refer to Section 22 0501 General Work for Plumbing which shall also govern plumbing work.
This section shall include all domestic water piping inside the building and to a point five feet
outside the building.
1.2 CONNECTIONS TO ITEMS NOT IN CONTRACT
A. This plumbing installer shall carefully examine all architectural, heating, ventilating and air
conditioning, electrical or other drawings, and all other parts of the specifications for items not a
part of this plumbing contract which may require plumbing connections. Unless explicitly
indicated to the contrary, this plumbing installer shall furnish and install all necessary supply
lines, etc., and shall make final connections to all such items.
B. It shall be the responsibility of this plumbing installer to locate the supply lines, etc., to such items
in conformity with the manufacturer's rough-in drawings.
C. Air conditioning equipment, etc., will be provided under other sections of the specifications or by
the Owner, but the plumbing installer shall run service lines (water and drain) to and from all
connections to all this equipment which requires plumbing and/or drain connections. No
roughing-in for equipment shall be begun until the equipment has been purchased and approved
and manufacturer's shop drawings are available for final layout.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLUMBING SYSTEMS
A. The work included under this section of the specifications consists of all plumbing work, the
principal systems of which are as follows:
1. Water Supply System: Extend and connect hot and cold water to all fixtures provided
under this and other sections of the specifications.
2.2 VALVES
A. Ball valves shall be full port, two-piece body construction with solder end connections in sizes to
and including [2] inch size. Valves shall have full post and Teflon seats. Valves shall be
Hammond 8604, Watts, Apollo or approved substitute.
B. Valves [2-1/2] inch and larger shall be butterfly valves Hammond [5200] or approved substitute,
with bronze disc, EPT seat, lug type cast iron body, extended neck, and Auto-lok handle. They
shall be rated "bubbletight" at [200] psig WP. Provide lever handles with infinite throttling and
memory stops for valves [6] inch and smaller. Valves [8] inch and larger shall have worm gear
operator with hand wheel and indicator. Where gear operator is greater than [8] feet above the
floor or work surface, the hand wheel shall be replaced with a chain wheel, chain and guides.
C. Swing Check Valves, [2] Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class [125], cast-bronze body and cap
conforming to ASTM B 62; with horizontal swing, Y-pattern, and bronze disc; and having
threaded or solder ends. Provide valves capable of being reground while the valve remains in the
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PAGE 1 OF 3

SECTION 221116
line. Provide Class [150] valves meeting the above specifications, with threaded end connections,
where system pressure requires or where Class [125] valves are not available.
D. Swing Check Valves, [2-1/2] Inch and Larger: MSS SP-71; Class [125], cast iron body and bolted
cap conforming to ASTM A 126, Class [B]; horizontal swing, and bronze disc or cast-iron disc
with bronze disc ring; and flanged ends. Provide valves capable of being refitted while the valve
remains in the line.
E. Globe Valves, [2] Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class [125]; body and screwed bonnet of ASTM
B 62 cast bronze; with threaded or solder ends, brass or replaceable composition disc, copper-
silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, "Teflon" impregnated packing, and malleable iron
handwheel. Provide Class [150] valves meeting the above where pressure requires.
2.3 PIPE & FITTINGS - PLUMBING - DOMESTIC WATER
A. General: Make connections to the water service five feet outside building and extend and
connect cold water to all systems requiring same.
B. Pipe: Pipe shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the following:
1. All water lines below grade shall be Type "K" soft copper tubing and wrought copper
fittings.
2. All water piping above grade shall be Type "L" hard copper tubing with wrought copper
fittings.
2.4 ACCESS PANELS
unions, etc., where no other means of access is provided. Access panels shall be all steel
construction with a [16] gauge or ceiling frame and [16] gauge panel door. Doors shall be secured
2.5 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. Water hammer arrestors shall be certified to meet ASSE 1010. Arrestors shall be factory tested to
at least [10,000] shock cycles without failure and shall be able to be installed at any angle.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. Pitch all water mains toward the drain valves & arrange so that the entire system can be drained
through accessible valves at low points.
3.2 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS:
A. Install water hammer arrestors in water lines which supply solenoid valves and branch lines with
flush valves. The installation shall comply with the manufacturer=s installation and application

SECTION 221116
instructions. Arrestors shall not be installed in a plumbing chase but extended to above the
ceiling and/or out of the plumbing chase wall. Provide access doors where located above a solid
ceiling.
B. The top ends of all hot and cold water risers not covered above shall be provided with capped air
chambers which shall be the full size of the main and not less than [12] inch in length.
3.3 CLEANING & TESTING
A. Test plumbing systems in accordance with test procedures and pressure as specified in Section 22
0501.
B. Clean and sterilize domestic water supply in accordance with test procedures as specified in
Section 22 0501.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 221116
SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
This section shall include all sanitary waste and vent piping inside the building and to a point five
feet outside the building.
1.2 CONNECTIONS TO ITEMS NOT IN CONTRACT
A. This plumbing installer shall carefully examine all architectural, heating, ventilating and air
conditioning, electrical or other drawings, and all other parts of the specifications for items not a
part of this plumbing contract which may require plumbing connections. Unless explicitly
indicated to the contrary, this plumbing installer shall furnish and install all necessary supply,
waste, and vent lines, etc., and shall make final connections to all such items.
B. It shall be the responsibility of this plumbing installer to locate the supply, waste, and vent lines,
etc., to such items in conformity with the manufacturer's rough-in drawings.
C. Air conditioning equipment, etc., will be provided under sections of the specifications or by
Owner, but the plumbing installer shall run service lines (water and drain) to and from all
connections to all this equipment which requires plumbing and/or drain connections. No
roughing-in for equipment shall be begun until the equipment has been purchased and approved
and manufacturer's shop drawings are available for final layout.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Waste Piping System: Provide sanitary waste drainage and vent piping as shown on the
drawings, including connecting all fixtures provided under this and other sections of the
specifications.
B. Cleanouts:
1. This contractor shall provide and install cleanouts of line size in sanitary sewer.
Cleanouts shall be located at the base of each soil and waste stack; at each change in
direction greater than [45] degrees in soil, waste and drain lines, and in underground
sewers.
2. Cleanouts not accessible, which cannot be made easily accessible otherwise, shall be
extended up through the floor or wall and shall be as follows: Josam, Wade, and Zurn
numbers are listed in order.
a. Exterior: 58310, W-7100-Z, Z-1420-27 or approved equal cast iron cutoff
ferrule with round cast iron scoriated frame and cover.
b. Finished Concrete Floors: 56050-1-F, W-7100-XC, Z-1420-24 or approved
equal, cast iron cutoff ferrule with membrane flange and with round Nikaloy
scoriated frame and cover.
c. Ceramic Tile Floors: 58220, W-7010-S, Z-1405-3, or approved equal, cast iron
inside caulk cleanout ferrule with square Nikaloy scoriate frame and cover.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PAGE 1 OF 3

SECTION 221316
d. Vinyl Tile Floors: 58020-12, W-7010-TS, Z-1405-7 , or approved equal, cast
iron inside caulk cleanout ferrule with square Nikaloy scoriated frame and cover.
e. Carpeted Floors: 58000(-14), W-7010-72, Z-1405-14 or approved equal, cast
iron cut-off ferrule with membrane flange and round cover and carpet marker.
f. Note: Use clamping device on all cleanouts that occur in floors having
waterproofing membrane.
g. Wall: 58710, W-8550-R with 8480, Z-1440-5, or approved equal, cast iron
caulking ferrule with Nikaloy smooth, round frame and cover.
3. Spacing for cleanouts in sanitary sewer lines shall not exceed [100] feet inside the
building.
2.2 SANITARY SEWERS
A. Soil, waste and vent piping shall be Schedule [40] PVC.
B. Join piping in accordance with ASTM D2665 and comply with procedures in ASTM F402 for
safe handling of solvent cements, primers, and cleaners during joining of plastic pipe and fittings.
C. Soil, waste and vent piping above ground shall be run concealed in walls, chases, pipe shafts and
ceiling spaces, except in equipment rooms and similar unfinished areas and elsewhere as
specifically indicated otherwise. All soil and waste piping inside the building shall be run with a
uniform drop of not less than [1/8] inch per foot, using [1/4] inch per foot where possible.
D. Vertical vent lines shall be carried through the roof or connected to adjacent vent lines as
indicated. Vents shall terminate approximately [12] inch above finished roof line and shall be
flashed per the requirements of the roof system warranty. Collect vents where possible to
minimize the number of vents extending through roof.
2.3 CONDENSATE DRAINS
A. Condensate drains shall be Type "L" copper.
2.4 PLATES
A. Provide escutcheon plates for all exposed uninsulated piping projecting thru wall and floor.
Use brass chromium plated escutcheons on chromium plated pipe; escutcheons on other pipes
may be cast iron or sheet steel. Provide ceiling escutcheons with set screws. Integral pipe clips
may be used for wall and floor plates. Hinged plates are acceptable except for plumbing fixture
outlets.
2.5 FLASHING
A. Flashing shall be sheet aluminum weighing not less than 4 lbs. per square foot. Alternate vent
caps made of EDPM materials will be considered. Provide flashing hubs for all vents.
2.6 ACCESS PANELS
unions, etc., where no other means of access is provided. Access panels shall be all steel

SECTION 221316
or greater than where it is installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF DRAINAGE PIPING
A. Uniformly grade all lines to the elevations shown on the drawings. If elevations are not given,
drains and sewers shall be pitched not less than [1/4] inch per foot for piping [2] inch and smaller
and [1/8] inch per foot for piping [3] inch and larger.
B. Each vent line extending thru roof shall be flashed with sheet aluminum. A vertical sleeve of like
material shall extend up and be turned into the vent pipe at least [2] inch. Other methods will be
considered for approval by engineer upon receipt of submittal.
C. Provide excavation and backfilling in accordance with section 22 0500 Common Work for
Plumbing.
D. All piping outside the building footprint shall have a minimum cover of [18] inch unless noted
otherwise.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF TRAPS
A. Each fixture, floor drain, or other equipment requiring connection to the drainage system shall
have separate traps installed as close to the fixture as possible.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CLEANOUTS
A. Locate line size cleanouts at the base of each soil and waste stack; at each change in direction
greater than [45] degrees in soil, waste, and drain lines; and in underground sewers, with spacing
not to exceed [100] feet.
B. Cleanouts not accessible, which cannot be made easily accessible otherwise, shall be extended up
thru the floor or wall.
3.4 CLEANING & TESTING
A. Test plumbing systems in accordance with test procedures and pressure as specified in Section
22 0501.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 221316
SECTION 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Storm drainage piping, fittings, and accessories.
2. Connection of drainage system to municipal sewers.
3. Division 33 – Site Utilities.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. ASTM A 48 / A48 M – Standard Specification for Gary Iron.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Shop Drawings: Show locations, dimensions, supports, and relationship to adjacent
construction.
2. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive data.
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp and other markings of specified testing agency.
1. Drawings: Show locations, dimensions, supports, and relationship to adjacent construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis - Downspout Boots: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. J R Hoe and Sons
101 Ironwood Road
Middlesboro, Kentucky 40965
Telephone: (800) 245-5521
Website: (www.downspoutboots.com).
2.2 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Downspout Boots: Contoured interior flow design with no boxed corners, weld seams or choke points;
include integral lug slots and stainless steel fasteners.
1. Configuration: Angular/A-Series.
2. Size: [3] inches by [5] inches.
4. Outlet: [4.875] inches.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES PAGE 1 OF 2

SECTION 221423
5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard powder coat finish.
a. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's standard range.
6. Accessories:
a. Manufacturer's standard stainless steel fasteners for mounting onto building wall.
b. Flexible rubber adapter for connection to drainage pipe.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TRENCHING
A. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then complete
backfilling.
3.2 INSTALLATION - PIPE
A. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on layout drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of
[1/8] inch ([3] mm) in [10] feet ([3] m).
B. Connect to building storm drainage system, foundation drainage system, and utility/municipal sewer
system.
3.3 INSTALLATION – DOWNSPOUT BOOT
A. Install Downspout boots at grade with top [20] inches above grade.
B. Set plumb, level and rigid.
C. Secure to supporting construction using fasteners best suited to substrate.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect pipe and bedding cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress.
END OF SECTION
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES PAGE 2 OF 2

SECTION 221423
SECTION 223000 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
This section shall include all plumbing equipment inside the building and to a point five feet
outside the building.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Provide plumbing fixtures, trim and related items such as supplies,
traps, drains, cleanouts, water closet seats and covers, fixture supports, and all other
accessory items.
2.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES DRAIN LIST
A. This plumbing installer shall furnish and install plumbing fixtures and drains as indicated on the
drawings. These fixtures by American Standard, Zurn, or Kohler will be considered. Unless noted
otherwise, model numbers taken from Zurn. All china or enamel fixtures shall be white.
2.3 FLOOR DRAINS AND FLOOR SINKS
A. Floor drains shall be Zurn, or approved substitute. Drains in finished areas shall have nickel
bronze strainers and tops, and when cleanout plugs are required they shall be nickel bronze.
Drains in unfinished areas, store rooms, areaways, and similar locations shall be black cast iron,
with brass cleanout plug if required. Floor drains subject to evaporation and/or where required by
code shall have trap seals.
B. Sanitary sewer system floor drains shall be Z-415V with back water valve, Type [B] strainer
installed with [4] inch deep seal P-trap. Floor drains installed in single story structures or above
ground level in multi-story structures will not require backwater valves unless noted on drawings.
C. Floor sinks shall be Zurn ZN-1901 or approved substitute installed with [4] inch deep seal p-trap.
Drains shall be [12] x [12] x [8] cast iron square floor sink with A.R.E. interior, seepage flange,
aluminum dome strainer, and satin nickel bronze top. Floor sinks in the Kitchen Areas shall
have half grates.
2.4 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
A. The electric hot water heater shall be fully automatic type with glass lined tank designed for not
less than [150] lbs. working pressure, insulated jacket, magnesium anode, drain valve, vacuum
breaker, insertion type high limit thermostat, insertion type control thermostat for each heater,
ASME Code temperature and pressure relief valve installed in the top of the tank with discharge
line to suitable drain. All heater elements shall be insertion type for the electric power service
noted on the drawings. The tank size and number of elements shall be as called for on the
drawings. Verify voltage.
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PAGE 1 OF 3

SECTION 223000
B. All heaters shall meet the latest edition ASHRAE 90.1
2.5 HOSE BIBBS
A. Hose bibbs located on the exterior walls shall be Zurn Z-1320-XL anti-siphon, automatic
draining, non-freeze wall hydrants complete with integral backflow preventer, copper casing, all
bronze interior parts, non-turning operating rod with free-floating compression closure valve, and
[3/4] inch female solder and [3/4] inch male pipe thread inlet connection, [3/4] inch hose
connection complete with rough cast bronze box and stainless steel hinged lockable cover with
AWATER@ stamped on the cover. Furnish with operating key. The system shall meet ASSE
1019-A for backflow prevention.
B. Hose bibbs located in machine rooms, equipment rooms, and toilets shall be Zurn Z1341-BFP
exposed anti-siphon wall faucets complete with Z1399-BFP external backflow preventer, all
bronze interior components, vandal-resistant operating stem, rough bronze exterior, and [3/4] inch
hose connection. Provide with HBL24 Hose bibb lock system and operating key. The unit shall
conform to ASME B1.20.7 and meet ASSE 1052 for backflow preventer requirements.
2.6 ACCESS PANELS
unions, dampers, etc., where no other means of access is provided. Access panels shall be all steel
2.7 SHOCK ABSORBERS
A. Shock absorbers shall be sealed air chamber type as manufactured by Wade, Josam, or Zurn.
Provide where shown on drawings, indicated by P.D.I. rating symbol.
2.8 HOT WATER CIRCULATORS
A. Hot water circulators shall be all bronze, equal to Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, or approved
substitute, with [115] volt motor and strap-on aquastat.
B. Circulating pumps for domestic hot water recirculation shall be wired to the building automation
system (BAS) and programmed to stop whenever the building is unoccupied. If a BAS is not
available, the contractor shall provide a seven day time clock with battery backup and program to
stop operation of the circulating pump during unoccupied hours.
2.9 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
A. Contractor to provide and install water pressure reducing valve in location as shown on plans.
Valve shall be Wilkins, 500YSBR for dead-end service, or equal by Watts or A.W. Cash self-
contained, spring loaded, all bronze construction. Each pressure reducing valve shall have a
strainer installed in the line ahead of the PRV and pressure gauges as manufactured by Marshall

SECTION 223000
Town Fig. #37K, [2-1/2] inch dial, all rust resistant material with brass gauge cock. Locate one
gauge upstream and one gauge down stream of the valve. Valve to be line size or as indicated.
2.10 REDUCED PRESSURE BACK FLOW PREVENTERS
A. Contractor to provide and install Lead Free Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers in locations as
shown on plans. Valves shall be Wilkins or approved equal Model 975XL2 for sizes [3/4] inch
through [2] inch and Model 375 for sizes [2] inch and above. Valves shall be corrosion resistant
with two spring loaded check valves made of brass and independently operated with stainless
steel springs. An external pressure differential relief valve will be located between the two check
valves. The assembly shall include two full port valves for shut off, four test cocks, inlet AY@
type strainer, and air gap fitting. The systems shall be U.L. listed, be NSF certified, have ASSE
listed [1013] approval, and be certified as Alead free@.
2.11 MIXING VALVES
A. The contractor shall provide and install hot water mixing valves with the capacities as scheduled
on the drawings. The valves shall be thermostatic water mixing valve type with solid bi-metal
thermostat with seven year limited warranty. The system shall be factory pre-assembled and
tested. The finish on the valves shall be rough bronze. The system shall provide full time standby
service should one of the mixing valves require maintenance. The system shall be piped according
to the manufacturer’s required piping arrangement. The valve assembly shall be ASSE 1017
listed. Each system shall include the following:
1. Color coded dials
2. Locking temperature regulator handles
3. Adjustable limit stops set for [110] degrees
4. Intergral hot and cold supply checkstops
5. Outlet ball valve shutoffs
6. Color coded dial thermometer
7. Inlet piping manifold
8. Recessed/Painted surface mounted steel cabinet with hinged door and lock
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES
A. Connect to all fixtures and equipment under this and other sections of the specifications and
provide rough-in connections where called for on the drawings.
3.2 SHOCK ABSORBERS:
A. Install shock absorbers in water lines which supply solenoid valves and branch lines with flush
valves.
B. The top ends of all hot and cold water risers not covered above shall be provided with capped air
chambers which shall be the full size of the main and not less than [12] inch in length.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 223000
SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work required under this section of the specifications consists of basic materials and methods
and is applicable to all work under Division 23.
B. The work of this section is subject to the requirements of the Mechanical General Provisions
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE
A. Black steel pipe: Welded or seamless Schedule [40] or [80], ASTM A-53.
B. Copper pipe: Hard or soft drawn, ASTM 88 Type "K", "L", or "M". Joints with lead free solder
above ground. Joints with silver solder or phos-copper below floor.
2.2 VALVES
A. Ball valves shall be two piece construction with solder end connections in sizes to and including
[2] inch size. Valves shall have full post and Teflon seats. Valves shall be Hammond [8604],
Watts, Apollo or approved substitute.
B. Valves [2-1/2] inch and larger shall be butterfly valves Hammond [5200] or approved substitute,
with bronze disc, EPT seat, lug type cast iron body, extended neck, and Auto-lok handle. They
shall be rated "bubbletight" at [200] psig WP. Provide lever handles with infinite throttling and
memory stops for valves [6] inch and smaller. Valves [8] inch and larger shall have worm gear
operator with hand wheel and indicator. Where gear operator is greater than 8 feet above the floor
or work surface, the hand wheel shall be replaced with a chain wheel, chain and guides.
C. Swing Check Valves, [2] inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class [125], cast-bronze body and cap
conforming to ASTM B 62; with horizontal swing, Y-pattern, and bronze disc; and having
threaded or solder ends. Provide valves capable of being reground while the valve remains in the
line. Provide Class [150] valves meeting the above specifications, with threaded end connections,
where system pressure requires or where Class [125] valves are not available.
D. Swing Check Valves, [2-1/2] Inch and Larger: MSS SP-71; Class [125], cast iron body and bolted
cap conforming to ASTM A 126, Class [B]; horizontal swing, and bronze disc or cast-iron disc
with bronze disc ring; and flanged ends. Provide valves capable of being refitted while the valve
remains in the line.
COMMON WORK FOR HVAC PAGE 1 OF 7

SECTION 230500
2.3 MOTORS
A. Furnish and install (or arrange for installation) all electric motors for all equipment specified
under this section requiring same in accordance with the following:
1. All motors shall be NEMA standard designed for ample size to operate at their proper
load and full speed continuously without causing noise or vibration or temperature rise in
excess of their rating.
2. Motors [1/2] HP and less shall be designed & nameplated for [120] volt, [1] phase, [60]
cycle operation; shall be permanent split capacitor type, [40] degrees Celsius continuous
rise, open dripproof type; and shall be equipped with ball bearings.
3. All motors [3/4] HP and larger (unless specified otherwise) shall be designed and
nameplated for [3] phase, [60] cycle operation, shall be single speed squirrel-cage type,
NEMA Design B, normal starting torque, open dripproof type, quiet operating, [40]
degrees Celsius continuous rise and shall be equipped with ball bearings.
4. All three phase motors one horsepower and larger shall comply with NEMA MG-1 Table
12-11 Energy Efficient standards or Table 12-12 Premium Efficient Standards as
applicable to meet the Energy Independent Security Act of 2007.
B. The above shall apply to all motors unless otherwise specified with equipment.
2.4 STARTERS
A. Provide motor starters for all equipment under this division of the specifications. Installation shall
be as specified in Division 26 of these specifications. Unless built-in as an integral part of the
equipment or of custom design for specific application, all starters shall be the product of a single
manufacturer. Starters shall meet requirements of current National Electric Codes.
B. All starters shall have overload protection. Starters shall have phase failure and undervoltage relay
similar to Square D Type MPS, with built-in adjustable time delay response (3 second minimum).
Undervoltage setting is adjustable from [75]% to [100]%. Starters shall have all necessary
auxiliary interlocks required for operation of the respective systems, plus one spare auxiliary
interlock. Starters shall have NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures.
C. All starters shall be manufactured by Cutler-Hammer; equal by General Electric, Square D, or

Westinghouse are acceptable.
1. Single pole, [120] volt, [1] phase, [60] cycle manual (unless noted otherwise) starter for
motors [2] HP and less. Note: Where motors have built-in thermal overload protection
and starter is not required to accomplish control scheme, manual starter may be omitted.
2. Full voltage, three-pole, combination magnetic starter with fused disconnect with
Bussman Low-Peak or Fusetron dual element fuses for all [3] phase motors. Fuses shall
be sized in accordance with N.E.C. for all [3] phase motors.
3. For motors larger than [25] HP, the starting equipment of the resistance type, increment
start, induction type or a combination of resistance and induction starting shall be used to
limit the first step of the starting voltage, to not more than [65]% of the line voltage or as
required by the local electrical utility.
D. In addition to the features described above, the starters furnished shall include the following
features:
PAGE 2 OF 7
SECTION 23 0500
1. All starters for [3] phase motors shall have 3 phase thermal overload protection. Size the
heater overload elements to properly protect the motor being served. Heaters shall not be
sized to be any larger than [115]% of full-load amps, heater element furnished, and rating
range of heater element in tabulate form.
2. Starters on all, [3] phase, [60] cycle electrical service shall have a [120] volt control
circuit obtained from a fused control transformer built into the starter. Transformer shall
be fused on each of the two lines. Fuses and transformers shall be sized to carry the
holding coil circuits and any miscellaneous devices included plus [50] VA.
E. All starters shall have maintained contact hand-off-automatic switch & reset button in cover. All
motors shall automatically restart after power loss is restored when set in automatic setting.
2.5 BELT GUARDS
A. Provide for each belt drive guard shielding the perimeter and face of the drive. Guard shall meet
OSHA standards and be rigidly attached to equipment. Openings shall be provided opposite the
driver and driven sheaves to permit use of a revolution counter.
2.6 BELT DRIVES
A. All fan drives shall be vari-pitch with adjustable pitch motor sheave and a matched set of V-belts.
All drives shall be designed for [150]% of rated motor horsepower.
2.7 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT
A. Isolation shall conform to seismic requirements of Section 23 AHangers and Supports for
HVAC.@ Unless otherwise noted, mechanical equipment over [1] horsepower shall be isolated
from the structure with resilient vibration and noise isolators supplied by Kinetics or Mason
Industries to the Mechanical Installer. Where isolator type and required deflection are not shown,
equipment shall be isolated in accordance with the ASHRAE systems book. Submittal shall
include the complete design for the supplementary bases; a tabulation of the design data on the
isolators including O.D., free operating and solid heights of the springs, free and operating heights
of the neoprene or fiberglass isolators. Mounts and bases shall be manufactured by Peabody Noise
Control or Mason Industries.
B. Model KIP-Q shall be pre-compressed molded fiberglass isolation pads, neoprene-jacketed and
stabilized during manufacture. Pads shall be sized for [40] to [60] psi loading and shall be made
of glass fibers produced by a multiple flame attenuation process which generates nominal fiber
diameters not to exceed [.00018] inches. Where the equipment base does not provide a uniform
load surface, steel plates shall be bonded to the top of the pads. Model RD neoprene mounts shall
incorporate completely enclosed metal inserts to permit bolting to the supported unit.
C. Model FDS shall be freestanding, unhoused, laterally stable spring mounts, incorporating leveling
bolts and [1/4] inch thick noise isolation pads. To assure stability, the outside spring diameter
shall be equal to or greater than the designed spring operating heights, and the horizontal stiffness.
Springs shall have a minimum additional travel of [50]% between the designed operating height
and the solid height.
PAGE 3 OF 7
SECTION 23 0500
D. Model SFH shall be combination spring and fiberglass hangers, incorporating [2] inch thick
neoprene-jacketed pre-compressed molded fiberglass inserts in series with springs, all encased in
welded steel bracket. The outside spring diameter shall be a minimum of [0.8] times the designed
spring operating height, and shall have a minimum additional travel of [50]% between the design
height and solid height.
E. Model FLS shall be freestanding, stable spring mounts, similar to Type FDS. They shall
incorporate vertical limit stops to assure a constant height if the supported weight is removed, and
to reduce movement due to wind load. The limit stops shall be isolated.
F. Model FYS spring isolators shall be seismic control restrained spring isolators, shall incorporate a
single vibration isolator, having all of the characteristics of Model FDS springs as previously
specified. Springs shall be assembled into a welded steel housing assembly engineered to limit
movement of supported equipment during an earthquake without degrading the vibration isolation
of the spring during normal equipment operating conditions. Vibration isolators shall incorporate
a steel angle and plate motion limit assembly, and steel spring isolator, engineered as a system to
accept a force in any direction equal to a minimum of [1.0] times the rated load capacity of the
spring isolator without yield or failure, and shall limit movement of the point of level bolt
connection to supported equipment to less than [1/2] inch in any direction, relative to any fixed
point on the isolator assembly, while subjected to the rated force specified. The motion limit
assembly shall be welded to a steel base plate having a [1/4] inch thick ribbed neoprene noise stop
pad, and drilled holes for bolting to the supporting structures. A spring isolator, drilled and tapped
load plate and leveling bolt assembly shall be positioned on the base plate, and shall carry all
normal equipment operating loads.
G. All piping and electrical conduit in the mechanical equipment room and piping three supports
away from other mechanical equipment shall be isolated from the structure by means of vibration
and noise isolators. Suspended piping shall be isolated with Model SFH Hangers as described
above.
H.I. Flexible connections shall be incorporated in the ductwork adjacent to all air-moving units. The
connections shall be neoprene or canvas of approved construction.
2.8 ACCESS PANELS
A. Provide access panels not less than [24] inch x [2] inch for access to all concealed valves, unions,
dampers, etc., where no other means of access is provided. Access panels shall be all steel
construction with a [16] gauge ceiling frame and [16] gauge panel door. Doors shall be secured with
concealed hinge and flush locks of either the cylinder type of screwdriver-operated type. Outside of
door and frame shall be flush with finished wall or ceiling. Panels shall be painted with a rust-
inhibitive primer at the factory. Panels shall be installed in openings provided under the construction
sections of the specifications, and the work of the trades involved shall be coordinated as necessary.
Access panels shall be so located and of sufficient size to permit service of components. Panels
located in fire rated walls or ceilings shall be U.L. listed for rating equal to or greater than where they
are installed.
PAGE 4 OF 7
SECTION 23 0500
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. In general, install all piping as neatly as practicable as indicated and detailed on the drawings.
Arrange and install piping straight, level, plumb, and as direct as possible. Form right angles and
parallel lines with the structures. Keep pipes close to walls, partitions, ceilings, and slabs where
possible. Where two or more pipes are located together, run parallel to each other and space at
distances which will permit application of full insulation and access for servicing.
B. Unless noted otherwise, connect all apparatus and equipment in accordance with the
manufacturer's standard details as approved. Provide necessary piping, such as vent, relief, etc.,
wherever equipment is provided with connections for such piping. Unions or flanged connection
shall be placed where necessary to permit easy dismantling of piping and apparatus and in
connections to all equipment between shut-offs and the equipment. Each control valve shall have
union or flanged connection immediately adjacent or be flare connected. All piping and apparatus
connections shall be so installed as to avoid interference with tube or electrode removal from hot-
water boilers, air-handling units, and domestic water heater, etc., and to allow for removal of an
item of equipment without disturbing other items of equipment. Ream all pipe ends after cutting.
All blow-off piping shall be permanently installed to indirect wastes. All pipe size changes shall
be made with pipe reducer fittings or, if applicable, with reducing fittings. Piping shall be
carefully installed to provide for expansion and for proper alignment. Pipe lines shall be guided
and pipe shall be supported in such a manner that it will not creep, sway, or buckle. Anchors and
supports shall be provided wherever necessary to prevent misalignment. Wherever possible, long
radius elbows shall be used and not short radius. Eccentric reducers shall be used wherever
necessary or indicated; concentric reducers and reducing fittings shall not be used where air
trapping may occur. All pipe fittings shall be factory fittings.
C. Joints:
1. Sweat joints in copper tubing shall be with approved alloys. Lead free solders and fluxes
that contain not more than [0.2] percent lead (per the Safe Water Act Amendments of
1986, Public Law 99-339) shall be used when joining copper to copper. Silver solders
([95] tin – [5] silver) shall be used when joining copper with bronze or steel, and when
joining Type K copper to copper, and for any copper joint below floor slab.
2. Dielectric brass adapters, brass unions, or brass bushing shall be used wherever dissimilar
metals subject to galvanic activity are joined together, such as equipment connections,
tank connection, etc.
D. Nipples:
1. All steel pipe nipples shall be threaded steel nipples, galvanized or black to match pipe.
2. All nipples used in conjunction with copper pipe shall be brass.
E. Pipe Sleeves:
1. Fabricate from steel pipe having internal diameter not less than [1] inch larger than
outside diameter of pipe and insulation (if required). Length of sleeve shall extend full
PAGE 5 OF 7
SECTION 23 0500
depth of construction pierced, and in the case of floor slabs, additionally extend [2] inch
above top of slab.
2. Insert sleeves in forms before pour of floor & roof slabs, install sleeves as wall goes up
for concrete block walls. Securely fasten sleeves to structure.
F. Protection of Wall Penetrations by Piping:

1. Provide ProSet Systems U.L. fire rated sleeve coupling Penetrators for each pipe
penetration or fixture opening passing through fire rated walls or partitions. All
Penetrators shall comply with ASTM E-814 or U.L. 1479 fire test standards.
2. Copper and Steel piping shall have ProSeal Plugs on both sides of the penetrator to
reduce noise and waterproof.
a. Copper and Steel insulated pipe - Use Systems "A".
b. PVC waste and vent piping - Use System "C".
3. All above systems to be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
4. Alternate Firestopping Systems are acceptable if approved as "an approved substitute."
However, any deviation from the above specification requires the Contractor to be
responsible for determining the suitability of the proposed products and their intended
use, and the Contractor shall assume all risks and liabilities whatsoever in connection
therewith.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Do not install any water piping over electrical switchgear. Provide galvanized sheet metal gutter,
having [1-1/2] inch pipe drain to floor away from affected areas, for any water or drain piping
having to cross the switchgear.
B. Electrical Ground: Notify electrical installer regarding location of any valves whose future
removal for service will break the electrical grounding system.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Exercise care to keep all piping clear and free from foreign matter at all times.
B. After reaming, if cutting is required, clean each piece of all loose scale, dirt, etc.
C. Keep installed piping free from dirt and scale and protect open ends to prevent foreign matter
entering. Use temporary plugs, caps, or other approved method of open and closure.
D. Defective, leaking, or otherwise unsatisfactory joints or material shall be remade or replaced.

Peening, caulking, doping, etc., will not be permitted.
3.5 PAINTING OF MECHANICAL PIPING & METAL SURFACES
A. All finish will be performed under Division 9.
PAGE 6 OF 7
SECTION 23 0500
B. The equipment installer shall touch up all scratches, abrasions, etc., in either the prime or finish
coats of all equipment and material furnished and installed by him. All rust and corrosion shall be
removed from pipe, fittings, and other metal surfaces. All surfaces shall be left in a clean "factory-
new" condition.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 7 OF 7
SECTION 23 0500
SECTION 230501 - GENERAL WORK FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Related Documents
B. The contract scope as set forth in the first division of this specification shall govern requirements
of this division. The Contractor shall examine the various other divisions of the specifications
and examine the existing conditions at the building site and familiarize himself with the
provisions therein affecting the mechanical work.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all materials, labor, and tools to construct a complete heating, ventilating, and air
conditioning system as herein specified or as shown on the drawings, or both.
B. Provide water and drains for all mechanical and all other equipment requiring these services.
C. Provide everything necessary for a complete and satisfactory installation whether or not
specifically shown or specified. This is not intended to cover major items of equipment; but it is
intended to include all miscellaneous parts, devices, accessories, controls, and appurtenances
which are required to complete the work in proper and safe operating condition and so that the
performance characteristics and capacities specified will be obtained.
D. Notify, well in advance, all trades affected of any chases, recesses, etc., which may be required for
the installation of the work under this division. If the Contractor neglects to do this, any cutting
and/or patching required for such chases, recesses, etc., shall be done by the trade concerned at his
expense.
E. Do all cutting of holes necessary for the installation of work specified under this division.
F. Furnish and install ceiling and wall access panels where required for access to valves, equipment,
etc. and as specified under other sections of these specifications.
G. Flash and counter flash all ducts and pipes where they penetrate roofs and outside walls.
H. Provide structural steel stands, primed and finish painted, for equipment so noted requiring same.
I. Furnish and install all mechanical exterior louvers and screens where called out on drawings.
J. All electrical interlock and control wiring is specified to be furnished and installed under
Division 23. The electrical control components shall be furnished and installed by the
mechanical installer or his controls installer. The mechanical installer shall be responsible
GENERAL WORK FOR HVAC PAGE 1 OF 8

SECTION 230501
for the wiring and connecting the controls complete and in working order in accordance
with manufacturer's approved wiring diagram.
1.3 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THIS DIVISION
A. Installation of ceiling and wall access doors.
B. Field painting, except such painting as is required to maintain shop coat painting and factory
finish painting. All other field painting is specified in Finish Painting, Division 9.
C. Provision and patching of all holes required for installation of pipes and ducts, however, furnish a
shop drawing showing the location and sizes of all required holes prior to construction of affected
areas.
1.4 CODES, PERMITS & FEES
A. Secure and pay for all permits, licenses, connection fees, and inspections required for work under
this division. Give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations
applicable to the work.
B. Applicable codes include but are not limited to the State Fire Prevention & Fire Safety Codes;
Local Building Codes, Plumbing Codes, and Electric Codes, National Fire Protection Association
Standard NFPA No. 90A, and State Department of Public Health Regulations.
C. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratories seal or
ASME Code stamp. Certificates to this effect shall be furnished to the engineer upon request.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Division 1, submit to the Architect for approval a complete list of materials,
equipment, and accessories proposed for use, listing the item and the manufacturer's name only.
B. Based on aforementioned approved listing, submit to the Engineer for approval electronic copies
in pdf format of shop drawings or data sheets for materials, equipment and accessories, giving
the name of the manufacturer, trade name and catalog number, rating data, and performance
features, all in the terms specified hereinafter.
C. Submittals shall be stamped or noted by the Contractor to indicate that he has examined them and
found the information contained to be in accordance with the contract requirements. Any
deviations from contract requirements shall be called to the Architect's attention. The Contractor
shall specifically check to see that the equipment proposed will fit into the available space, with
proper clearance for coil or tube removal, filter servicing, and other maintenance operations.
D. All submittals shall be submitted at one time, in one folder for HVAC. Submittals shall be
submitted in time to allow four weeks from receipt by Architect to time final approval is required
to meet the construction schedule.

SECTION 230501
E. Submittals shall include affidavits from manufacturers of pipe, pipe coating, fittings, valves,
meters, insulation and duct materials furnished and installed under this section certifying that such
materials delivered to the project conform to the requirements of this specification.
F. Submittals, drawings and data are required on all items specified by manufacturer's name,
including but not limited to the following:
HVAC
Starters,
Filters,
Air distribution,
Air conditioning units,
Pipe material,
Insulation,
Valves,
Fire dampers
Louvers
Automatic louver dampers
Dampers
Exhaust Fans
Support & Anchor Data
G. Control diagrams, control panel layouts, description of control operation, wiring diagram for
safety devices and interlocks, composite wiring diagram for safety devices and interlocks,
composite wiring diagram showing safety devices and interlocks between starters and controls
shall be submitted, and included in a separate HVAC submittal binder.
1.6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Provide a competent, experienced person for a total of [8] hours to instruct Owner's operating
personnel in operation of equipment and control systems at the completion of the work.
B. Provide three [3] complete sets of a compilation of catalog data of each manufactured item of
equipment used in the mechanical work. In addition to the catalog data, installation, operating,
and maintenance data and bill of materials for fans, controls, motors and all other operating
equipment shall be submitted. Each of the three [3] sets of data shall be bound in loose-leaf
binders and submitted to the engineer before final payment is made. A complete double index
shall be provided as follows:
1. Listing the products alphabetically by name.
2. Listing the names of manufacturers alphabetically by name together with their addresses
and the names and addresses of local sales representatives.
C. It is the intent of this catalog, operation and maintenance data to provide the Owner with complete
instruction on the proper operation and use, lubrication and periodic maintenance, together with
the source of replacement parts and service for the items of equipment covered. Instructions shall
be submitted to the Architect for approval at least one month in advance of initial start up.
D. In addition to the three printed sets of information required in paragraphs B and C, provide the
above required information in digital pdf format.

SECTION 230501
1.7 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Upon completion of the work, deliver to the Architect reproducible drawings in pdf format,
prepared by a qualified draftsman, to the same scale as the contract drawings, showing the actual
Installed locations of all ductwork, manual dampers, VAV boxes, valves, fire dampers, etc.
B. Make all necessary field measurements as the work progresses and keep accurate records of the
measurements. Show locations by dimensions from permanent, readily identifiable referenced
points, such as building walls and columns. Show depths by dimensions below finished floors or
finished grades.
C. Keep at the building site one set of the mechanical drawings for sole purpose of daily recording
any changes in the routing of piping and ducts, relocation of any equipment or valves, and similar
changes made in the work as it is installed. Note on the prints with red pencil all changes at the
time they are made. Upon completion of the mechanical work, the marked-up prints reflecting the
work as installed shall be delivered to the Architect.
1.8 COORDINATION & INTERFERENCES
A. A competent superintendent shall represent the Contractor at all times. All instructions and
coordinating problems given to or worked out with the superintendent shall be as binding as if
given to the Contractor.
B. The mechanical drawings are generally diagrammatic and, except where specifically dimensioned
or detailed, indicate the approximate location and general arrangement of the mechanical work.
The Contractor shall examine all contract drawings and documents, as well as the mechanical
ones, and shall install his work to conform as nearly as possible to the locations and arrangements
shown, with only such minor adjustments as necessary to coordinate the mechanical work with
the structural, architectural, and all other work and to avoid interferences. All offsets, rises, and
fittings are not necessarily shown on the drawings but shall be provided as required.
C. All mechanical work which interferes with the structural or other work or which deviates from the
drawings and specifications without prior approval of the Architect shall be altered at the
Contractor's expense. Mechanical interferences which may be discovered or anticipated shall be
reported promptly to the Architect for decision before proceeding with the work. The Architect
shall have the privilege of making minor changes without additional cost, provided that such
changes are made prior to commencing work on the item involved.
D. All building dimensions shall be taken from the architectural and structural drawings or from
actual site measurements. Do not scale dimensions from the mechanical drawings. Rough in and
install all equipment and fixtures provided under the general contract in accordance with the
manufacturer's approved shop drawings.
E. All equipment, apparatus, piping, ducts, and similar work shall fit into the available spaces in the
building and shall be introduced into the building at such times and in such manner as not to cause
damage to the structure. All piping and ductwork shall be installed to provide the maximum clear
height underneath. All equipment requiring servicing shall be made easily accessible.

SECTION 230501
1.9 MATERIALS & WORKMANSHIP
A. Equipment and materials used in the work shall be in accordance with the contract requirements,
the approved equipment lists, and shop drawings. After an item has been approved, no
substitution will be permitted unless it is considered by the Architect to be in the Owner's best
interest. All equipment and materials shall be new and unused.
B. All electrical materials shall be UL approved where such approval is applicable and shall bear the
UL label where such labeling is customary.
C. Work shall be under the constant supervision of a competent superintendent and shall be
performed by skilled journeymen.
D. All equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Any conflicts between these recommendations and the plans and specifications shall be promptly
reported to the Architect for decision before proceeding. All auxiliary piping, valves, accessories,
electrical connections, etc., recommended by the manufacturer or required for proper and safe
operation shall be furnished and installed complete whether or not such auxiliaries are shown.
E. Ducts and piping shall be run concealed above ceilings throughout all finished spaces except
where specifically noted otherwise. Run exposed piping in a neat and workmanlike manner and
parallel to the principal parts of the building.
1.10 PROTECTION
A. Work shall be protected at all times. Pipe and duct openings shall be closed with temporary caps
or plugs during construction until system and fixture connections are completed. Equipment shall
be covered and protected against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical injury. The installation of
equipment liable to damage by subsequent construction operations shall be deferred until
authorized by the Architect.
B. No air handling equipment shall be operated, even on a temporary basis, without installation of a
"construction" set of filters. The construction set of filters shall be equal in performance to the
specified filters.
1.11 TESTING
A. All testing may be witnessed by the Architect, his representative or local authorities having
jurisdiction. All testing shall be completed and approved before insulation, concealment by
furring, ceiling work, or backfilling is started. All equipment required for tests shall be furnished
by this Contractor.
B. Should inspection or tests show defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced and
inspected and tests repeated. All repairs to piping shall be made with new material. No caulking
or screwed joints or holes will be acceptable.

SECTION 230501
1.12 CLEANING
A. General:
1. Upon completion of the contract and progressively as the work proceeds, clean up all dirt,
debris, oil, materials, etc., and remove it from the site, keeping premises in a neat and
clean condition to the satisfaction of the Architect. See General Conditions.
2. Thoroughly clean all ducts, air distribution devices and apparatus casings before fans and
filters are operated. Replace all filters equal to those specified after the equipment has
been tested before turning the area over to the owner for his use.
3. All factory applied finishes, if not to be repainted, shall be touched-up, covering all bare
places, scratches, etc.
4. Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to parts of the building, its finish, or
furnishings due to the Contractor's failure to properly clean the piping system shall be
repaired by the Contractor without cost to the Owner.
1.13 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT
A. After the heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems have been placed in operation, the
mechanical installer shall:
1. Balance air as described in Section 23 05 93.
2. Check the systems for proper operation of equipment, controls, interlocks, and safeties on
both the cooling and heating cycles.
3. Correct all vibration and/or noise deficiencies.
4. Take sling psychrometer readings or by approved electronic measuring equipment,
recording both dry bulb and wet bulb at [20] locations to be designated by the Architect.
Outside conditions, unit discharge conditions, air entering room conditions, and
thermostat settings shall be recorded for each location. These readings shall be taken
twice, once on the cooling cycle and once during the heating season.
B. Furnish the Architect a written report on the operational checkout, including rpm, volts, and
amperes on each motor, entering and leaving temperatures and pressures on each coil, temperature
readings in space, airside readings as described under Section 23 0593, and a report on the
procedure followed in the operational checkout. This report shall be submitted in triplicate.
1.14 OBSERVATIONS
A. The Architect’s office may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress and quality of
the construction work and to determine, in general, if the results of the construction work are in
accordance with the drawings and specifications. The Architect's office may also observe certain
tests required of the mechanical installer as are called for in other portions of the specifications.
B. It should be understood that the plans and specifications represent the work to be done by the
Contractor in view of the total project requirements. The final routing of piping, ductwork, etc.,
to eliminate conflict with other trades or existing conditions is his responsibility. The Contractor
is to furnish all necessary supervision required for his personnel, as well as his mechanical
installer, to ensure that the installation is made in accordance with plans and specifications and
that all safety rules and regulations are observed. In the event of conflicts of work on the job with
other trades affecting this Contractor and/or his mechanical installers, he shall make every
reasonable effort to resolve the conflict through meetings and discussions with the other parties

SECTION 230501
involved by preparation of drawings or by other appropriate action. Only after this has been done
shall the Architect's assistance be requested.
C. When the Architect is requested to visit the job to aid in the resolution of conflicts or for
witnessing tests, he shall be given a minimum of [24] hour notice prior to the time his presence is
required at the job site.
1.15 WARRANTY & SERVICE
A. In addition to manufacturer's warranty of each item of equipment, the Contractor shall warrant the
equipment for one year after acceptance and make good any defect of material or workmanship
occurring during this period without expense to the Owner.
B. Upon final acceptance of work, Owner will assume responsibility of supervising, operating, and
maintaining equipment. He will lubricate motors and other operating components, clean strainers,
make minor adjustments for proper operating conditions and report defective materials or
workmanship to Contractor. Owner will make emergency repairs only if Contractor is
unavailable, and such repairs will in no case void a warranty or guarantee. The owner shall be
reimbursed for the expense of making the repairs.
C. Contractor is to replace defective material, parts, and equipment. He will also correct defective
workmanship without delay and without cost upon being notified of such defect.
D. Upon expiration of each of these limits noted herein, the maintenance will be at the Owner's
expense, including labor and materials costs.
E. The Contractor is to provide for his test and balance representative and the controls representative
to return to the job at the change of seasons (Summer to winter or winter to summer) for the first
year only, to adjust the air conditioning system and recheck or recalibrate cooling to heating or
vice versa at no additional cost to the owner.
1.16 AIR SYSTEM, AIR DISTRIBUTION TEST & BALANCE
A. Perform testing and balancing in complete accordance with current standards of the Associated
Air Balance Council (AABC).
B. Submit to the Architect for approval digital copies in pdf format of complete test reports.
1.18 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor assumes responsibility for proper arrangements of pipes, ducts, changes in
electrical requirements, etc., or changes in layout to connect "approved substitute" equipment in a
proper approved manner. The contractor shall pay all cost associated with these changes without
additional cost to the owner.

SECTION 230501
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS
A. Equipment, fixtures & materials furnished shall be new & unused, fabricated by manufacturers
regularly engaged in their production and shall be their standard and current offering for which
replacement parts are available. Mechanical equipment shall be substantially the same equipment
of a given manufacturer which has been in successful commercial use and operation for at least
one year.
B. Equipment & materials are shown or specified by a single manufacturer, to indicate quality,
material and type of construction desired. When one manufacturer's product is shown or specified,
it has been used as the basis for design. Where substitutions are allowed, it is the Contractor's
responsibility to ascertain that alternate manufacturer's products meet detailed specifications, size,
and arrangement to that used for design, and that the alternate is suitable for installation and
compatible with other system components.
2.2 EQUIPMENT CURBS AND SUPPORTS
A. Roof mounted equipment including exhaust fans, relief vents, etc. located on the roof shall be
installed level. The contractor shall provide curbs that are manufactured to accommodate for the
slope of the roof and are approved by the metal roof manufacturer for use with the metal roof.
Provide angle supports around roof openings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Before requesting final inspection, the following items must be completed in accordance with
appropriate sections of Division 1 and 23:
1. Complete all work required under this division of the specifications except as may be
permitted hereinafter.
2. Submit test and balance report for all air systems.
3. Submit letter from an authorized representative of each equipment manufacturer stating
that he has observed the installation and that his equipment is installed and operating per
the manufacturer's requirements.
4. Submit specific warranties and any maintenance agreements.
5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.
6. Install all items of identification on all ductwork, piping, and equipment.
B. Before requesting final payment, the following items must be completed:

1. Submit operating instructions and maintenance manuals.
2. Demonstrate to owner's representative the proper operation of all equipment and systems.
A minimum of [24] hours of training time will be provided. The owner may video tape
all training sessions for use in educating future maintenance personnel. The contractor
shall conduct the training sessions in a manner that will be easily videotaped and
informative when use in the future.
3. Submit as-built drawings.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 230501
SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes hangers and supports for mechanical systems piping and equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contract and Division 1
specification sections.
B. Product data, including installation instructions for each type of support and anchor. Submit pipe
hanger and support schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features
for each required pipe hanger and support.
C. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer of hangers and supports certifying that their
products meet the specified requirements.
D. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements
specified under "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Assembly-type shop drawings for each type of support and anchor, indicating dimensions,
weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.
F. Seismic calculations shall be provided for all new equipment, duct, and piping by the isolation
manufacturer for all seismically restrained equipment, piping and duct. These calculations shall be
stamped by an engineer licensed in the state where project is located. The engineer shall have five
or more years of experience in the seismic field.
A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS Dl.l "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PAGE 1 OF 5

SECTION 230529
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Hangers and support components shall be factory fabricated of materials, design, and
manufacturer complying with MSS SP-58.
1. Components shall have galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that
will not have field-applied finish.
2. Pipe attachments shall have nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where
attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
B. Thermal Hanger Shield Inserts: [100] psi average compressive strength, waterproofed calcium
silicate, encased with a sheet metal shield. Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of the
pipe and shall be of length indicated by manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation.
A. Steel Plates. Shapes. and Bars: ASTM A 36.
B. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type [I] or Type [III]) and clean uniformly
graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. [2]). Mix ratio shall be [1.0] part cement to [3.0]
parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration.
C. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel,
consisting of bolted two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider that bolts
tightly to pipe. Length of guides shall be as recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated
travel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substates and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not
proceed with installing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from
building structure; comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of
horizontal piping supported together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers where
possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of
various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe as specified above for individual pipe
hangers.
B. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Space attachments within
maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at
concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in
direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert to forms. Where

SECTION 230529
concrete with compressive strength less than [2,500] psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars
through openings at top of inserts.
C. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other
accessories.
D. Field-Fabricated, Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes. Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads
required; weld steel in accordance with AWS D-l.l.
E. Support HVAC piping systems independently from other piping systems.
F. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, to permit freedom
of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops,
expansion bends and similar units.
G. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
H. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping Code is not exceeded.
I. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements.

1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting
through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9.
2. Saddles: Install protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe
insulation.
3. Shields: Install protective shields MSS Type [40] on cold piping that has vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of [180] degrees and shall have dimensions in inches not less
than the following:
PIPE SIZE LENGTH THICKNESS
[1/4] THROUGH [3-1/2] [12] [0.048]

[4] [12] [0.060]
4. Pipes [3] inches and larger shall have calcium silicate inserts.
5. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield.
6. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated, with insulation of same thickness as
piping.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS
A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME
B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
B. Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to structure.
Comply with ASME B31.9 and with AWS Standards Dl.l.

SECTION 230529
C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion unit
manufacturer's written instructions to control movement to compensators.
D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe runs, at
intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset
of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A. Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins expansion joints and elsewhere as indicated.
B. Anchor to building substrate.
3.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment
above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for piping and equipment.
3.6 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe anchors and equipment supports.
Install and align fabricated anchors in indicated locations.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Dl.l for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the
following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing, and so
that contours welded surfaces to match adjacent contours.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection of anchors and supports, clean field welds and
abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting
to comply with SSPC-PA-l requirements for touch-up of field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of [2.0] mils.
C. Touch-Up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections, and

SECTION 230529
abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 section
"Painting" of these specifications.
D. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing
repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 230529
SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Extent of mechanical identification work required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or
as listed below:
1. Supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ductwork.
B. Type of identification devices specified in this section include the following:

1. Plastic Pipe Markers.
2. Plastic Duct Markers.
3. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs.
C. Mechanical identification furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, is specified as part of

the equipment assembly in other Division-23 sections.
D. Refer to Division-26 for sections for identification requirements of electrical work; not work of
this section.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of identification devices of types and

sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5
years.

1. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field,
colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each
identification material and device required.
B. Maintenance Data: Include product data and schedules in maintenance manuals; in accordance
with requirements of Division-1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification

materials of one of the following:
1. Allen Systems, Inc.
2. Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div.
3. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PAGE 1 OF 4

SECTION 230553
4. Seton Name Plate Corp.
2.2 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each
application as referenced in other Division-23 sections. Where more than single type is specified
for application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product
category.
2.3 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS
A. Snap-On-Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap-on, color-coded pipe

markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.
B. Insulation: Furnish [1] inch thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe
marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of [125] deg F ([52]
deg C) or greater. Cut length to extend [2] inch beyond each end of plastic pipe marker.
C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than [6] inch including insulation if any), provide full-
band pipe markers, extending [360] deg around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the
following methods:
1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.
D. Large Pipes: For external diameters of [6] inch and larger (including insulation if any), provide
either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than [3] times letter height (and of
required length), fastened by one of the following methods:
2. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's
standard stainless steel bands.
E. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping system
in each instance, as selected by Designer in cases of variance with names as shown or specified.
1. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally
with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit
of plastic.
2.4 PLASTIC DUCT MARKERS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color coded duct markers. Conform to
the following color code:
1. Green: Cold air.
2. Yellow: Hot air.
3. Yellow/Green: Supply air.
4. Blue: Exhaust, Return air.
B. Nomenclature: Include the following:

1. Direction of air flow.
2. Duct service (supply, return, exhaust, etc.).
3. Duct origin (from).
4. Duct destination (to).
5. Design cfm.

SECTION 230553
2.5 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS
A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with

ASTM Standard No. D 709 (grades ES-1, ES-2, ES-3) in the sizes and thicknesses indicated,
engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, black with white
core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where
adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate.
1. Thickness: [1/16] inch for units up to [20] square inch or [8] inch length; [1/8] inch for
larger units.
2. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive
where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.
2.6 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS
A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical

identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide
numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by
manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical
systems and equipment.
1. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and
specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as
service (as examples; Ductless Split unit DS-1, Heat Pump hp-1 ) etc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting

or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install
identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation
of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.
3.2 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake and relief ductwork with duct markers;
showing ductwork service and direction of flow, in black or white (whichever provides most
contrast with ductwork color).
B. Location: In each space where ductwork is exposed, or concealed only by removable ceiling
system, locate signs near points where ductwork originates or continues into concealed enclosures
(shaft, underground or similar concealment), and at [50] foot spacings along exposed runs.
C. Access Doors: Provide duct markers or stenciled signs on each access door in ductwork and
housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment) and other maintenance and operating
instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information.
D. Concealed Doors: Where access doors are concealed above acoustical ceilings or similar
concealment, plasticized tags may be installed for identification in lieu of specified signs, at
Installer's option.

SECTION 230553
3.3 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated to receive
identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow:
1. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this
section. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated pipes.
B. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied
spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior
non-concealed locations.
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each
pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.
3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non-accessible
enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of [50] feet along each piping run, except
reduce spacing to [25] feet in congested areas of piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced
markers.
3.4 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or near each major
item of mechanical equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not otherwise
specified for each item or device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment
and operational devices:
1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as
gas outlets.
2. Meters, gauges, thermometers and similar units.
3. Heat Pump Air Unit Equipment
4. Condensing Units
5. Exhaust fans
B. Lettering Size: Minimum [1/4] inch high lettering for name of unit where viewing distance is less
than [2] feet [0] inch, [1/2] inch high for distances up to [6] feet [0] inch, and proportionately
larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering of [2/3] to [3/4] the size of
principal lettering.
C. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between
multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency
precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visually blocked by
work of this division or other divisions.
B. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices, and glass frames of valve charts.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 230553
SECTION 230593 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The contractor shall obtain the services of a qualified independent testing organization to perform
the testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) work required. The testing organization may be an
independent TAB firm or may be any organization submitting satisfactory and acceptable proof of
qualifications for doing the work. All work performed shall be done in accordance with NEBB or
other recognized testing agency. The organization must have at least [5] years’ experience in
performing testing and balancing work of similar scope and complexity.
1.2 JOB CONDITIONS
A. The heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment shall be completely installed and in
continuous operation before the initial work specified herein shall begin. TAB work shall begin
whenever suitable outside conditions exist for the season or cycle in effect (cooling or heating
mode).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. The contractor shall submit for approval a detailed proposal containing the following:
1. Qualifications of supervisory and TAB personnel. Included should be special training and
number of years experience in this field which qualifies the employee for this work.
2. List of test instruments to be used.
3. Examples of test reports or report forms which will be used to produce the final report.
4. List of five most recent TAB jobs of comparable complexity.
B. Before the start of any work, the TAB contractor shall submit for approval an outline for the
proposed method of accomplishment and schedule for doing the work.
C. After the work is complete, a final report, on approved forms, shall be submitted.
1.4 INSTRUMENTS
A. The TAB Contractor shall use instruments which are normally used for this type of work. Each
instrument shall be properly maintained and frequently checked for calibration. Calibration dates
of instruments used to be shown on test report forms.
1.5 PRIOR TO TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Before any testing or balancing is started, an inspection of all HVAC equipment and systems shall
be performed jointly by the TAB Contractor and the Contractor. The inspection shall establish
that all systems are ready for testing and balancing and have been operated for a minimum period
of [24] hours.
B. The TAB Contractor shall familiarize himself with all systems to be tested and balanced and the
test points required. Any test openings tests wells, or other items required for the tests, as
proposed by the TAB Contractor, shall be furnished at no additional cost to the Owner.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PAGE 1 OF 3

SECTION 230593
1.6 BALANCING OBJECTIVES
A. Balance all air outlet terminals to plus or minus [5]% of design flows for systems with total
external static pressures of [2] inches or less and [1]% for systems over [2] inches.
B. Adjust systems for design outside air quantity.
C. Adjust systems for design recirculating air quantity.
D. Adjust systems for design exhaust air quantity.
E. Test and record heating and cooling apparatus entering and leaving air and refrigerant
temperatures.
F. Adjust flow patterns from air distribution devices to minimize drafts.
G. Verify that all controls are functioning as intended.
1.7 PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. General: Conduct capacity tests on all equipment. Tests shall be made during a period of stable
operations and minimum load fluctuation. A performance report shall be submitted for each item
tested which includes a comparison of installed capacity and design capacity. Guidelines for the
required tests and reports are as follows:
B. Heat Pump or Ductless Split Unit: After air outlets have been balanced, determine total air flow.
Then:
1. Adjust fan speed to give design air flow. Contractor shall provide and install any and all
parts required including new pulleys, belts, etc. to adjust the system to the design air
flow.
2. Record static pressure entering and leaving unit.
3. Record air temperatures entering and leaving each coil.
4. Complete approved report forms required to describe performance.
C. Motors: Observe and record the following:

1. Voltage - nameplate vs measured.
2. Amperage - nameplate vs measured.
3. Motor Speed.
4. Frame Number.
5. Overload Heater Size.
D. Exhaust Fan Systems:

1. Adjust exhaust air inlets to design air flow. Adjust fan speed to give design air flow.
Contractor shall provide and install any and all parts required including new pulleys,
belts, etc. to adjust the system to the design air flow.
2. Record total air flow produced by each exhaust fan
3. Record static pressure at each exhaust fan
1.8 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM
A. In cooperation with the representative of the mechanical control manufacturer installer, verify the
setting of automatically operated devices to achieve the required sequence of operation and

SECTION 230593
operate each device through its full range. Record and report temperature and humidity on a
continuous recorder for a minimum of seven days. Make minor adjustments as required.
1.9 PROJECT PERFORMANCE REPORT
A. The completed Project Performance Report shall be submitted upon the conclusion of the
balancing and testing work. The report shall contain but not be limited to the following:
1. Table of Contents.
2. Summary Report of all systems for mode tested (heating or cooling).
3. Summary Report of all systems upon re-verification of ensuing season operation.
4. Comparison of installed equipment capacity to design capacity.
5. Records of all reading taken.
6. List of test equipment used for each test with calibration dates.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 230593
SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
2. Indoor, concealed return air located in unconditioned space or above ceilings.
3. Indoor, exposed in mech. room return air.
4. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper or ceiling exhaust fan and penetration
of building exterior.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each
type of insulation.
3. Detail application of field-applied jackets.
4. Detail application at linkages of control devices.

Apprenticeship and Training.

identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement
material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
DUCT INSULATION PAGE 1 OF 10

SECTION 230713

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature
.
1.6 COORDINATION
23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before
preparing ductwork insulation Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for
installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for
maintenance.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin
on segments that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of materials as rapidly as possible in each area of

construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General "and" Indoor Duct and Plenum
Insulation Schedule," articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
D. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type [II] and ASTM C 1290, with factory-applied all service jacket
manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film. The installed R
(RSI) Value shall be a minimum of [6.0].
a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.
b. Johns Manville; Microlite.
c. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap.
d. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.
E. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type [IB] with all service jacket manufactured from kraft paper,
reinforced scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.

SECTION 230713
b. Johns Manville; [800] Series Spin-Glas.
c. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas [700] Series.
2.2 ADHESIVES
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class [2], Grade [A].

including 2004 Addenda.
2.3 MASTICS
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
dry film thickness.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, [58] percent by volume and [70] percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.
1 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of insulation.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, [0.05] perm at [30] mil dry film thickness.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, [33] percent by volume and [46] percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
D. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
5. Color: White.
A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class [I], Grade [A] and shall be compatible with

SECTION 230713
resistant lagging cloths over duct insulation.
5. Color: White.
2.5 SEALANTS
A. Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

5. Color: Aluminum.
2.6 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.
b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type [304]; [0.20] inch thick,
[2] inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003; Temper H-14, [0.007] inch thick, [1/2] inch wide
with wing seal or closed seal.
4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept
metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for
capacitor-discharge welding, [0.106] inch - diameter shank, length to suit depth of
insulation indicated.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.
2) GEMCO; CD.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD.
4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.
2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully
annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, [0.106] inch - diameter shank, length to suit
depth of insulation indicated with integral [1-1/2] inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.
following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CHP-1.
2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head.
4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.

SECTION 230713
3. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from [0.016] inch thick,
galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in
place but not less than [1-1/2] inches in diameter.
following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.
2) GEMCO; R-150.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.
4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.
b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert
to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal [3/4] inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.
D. Wire: [0.062] inch soft-annealed, galvanized steel.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a. C & F Wire.
2.7 CORNER ANGLES
A. Aluminum Corner Angles: [0.040] inch thick, minimum [1] by [1] inch, aluminum according to
ASTM B 209, Alloy [3003]; Temper [H-14].
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
3.2 PREPARATION
A Insulation shall be installed in accordance with SMACNA "The National Commercial and
Industrial Insulation Standards Manual" B Latest Edition.
B. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free
of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
C. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each
item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.

SECTION 230713
D. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
state.
E. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
F. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing in onsite storage.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and
L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due
N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend
patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt
joints.
O. Insulate the necks and bells of all supply diffusers.
3.5 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least [2] inches below top of
roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

SECTION 230713
B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through wall penetrations.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at
least [2] inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to
match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least [2] inches.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" firestopping
and fire-resistive joint sealers.
E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper
sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct
insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least [2] inches.
2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07
Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for [100] percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor
discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions [18] inches and smaller, place pins along
longitudinal centerline of duct. Space [3] inches maximum from insulation end
joints, and [16] inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than [18] inches, place pins [16] inches o.c.
each way, and [3] inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins
to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not over compress insulation during installation.
e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching
insulation facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing [2] inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.

SECTION 230713
Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with [1/2] inch outward-clinching staples, [1]
inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor
barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor
barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below [50] deg F at [18]
foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-
shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the
surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two
times the insulation thickness, but not less than [3] inches.
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of [2] inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.
At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of [18] inches o.c.
6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
[6] inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced [6] inches o.c.
B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for [100] percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor
discharge- weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts
as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions [18] inches and smaller, place pins along
longitudinal centerline of duct. Space [3] inches maximum from insulation end
joints, and [16] inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than [18] inches, space pins [16] inches
o.c. each way, and [3] inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional
pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not over compress insulation during installation.
e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching
insulation facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing [2] inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with [1/2] inch outward-clinching staples, [1]
inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive,
vapor barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor
barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below [50] deg F at [18]
foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-
shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the
surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two
times the insulation thickness, but not less than [3] inches.

SECTION 230713
5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and
inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with
individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
[6] inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced [6] inches o.c.
3.7 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
2. Indoor, mechanical room exposed supply and outdoor air.
3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space and above ceiling.
4. Indoor, mechanical room exposed return.
5. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
2. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
3. Flexible connectors.
5. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
6. Supply air ducts in conditioned space.
7. Supply and/or return duct that has an internal liner of [1] inch or greater thickness unless
ductwork is located outside or unless noted otherwise on the drawings. See section A23
31 13 Metal Ductwork@ and duct construction schedule on drawings for locations of
lined ductwork.
3.8 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
INSULATION SCHEDULE
LOCATION TYPE DUCT SERVICE INSULATION DENSITY THICKNESS

MATERIALS (Lbs/cuft) (inches)
Concealed Round Supply Air Mineral Fiber 0.75 2.2

above ceiling Blanket
or in attic
Concealed Rectangular Supply Air Mineral Fiber 0.75 2.2

or in attic
Concealed Round Return Air Mineral Fiber 0.75 2.2

or in attic
Concealed Rectangular Return Air Mineral Fiber 0.75 2.2

or in attic

SECTION 230713
Exposed in Duct between Exhaust Air or Mineral Fiber 3.0 1.0
Mech. Rm. Isolation Outside Air Board
Damper &
Bldg. Exterior
Hood Makeup Rectangular or Kitchen hood Mineral Fiber 0.75 2.2

air round Make up air Blanket
END OF SECTION

SECTION 230713
SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems:

1. Refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping, indoors and outdoors.
1. Division 23 Section "Duct Insulation."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
3. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each
type of insulation.
4. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties.
5. Detail application of field-applied jackets.
6. Detail application at linkages of control devices.

Apprenticeship and T
identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic,
tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION PAGE 1 OF 10

SECTION 230719

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
B. Insulation materials shall be stored in a dry location, damaged and/or wet materials shall not be
installed.
1.6 COORDINATION
23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC ".
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before
preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of
insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin
on segments that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of materials as rapidly as possible in each area of

construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation
Schedule," articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
D. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
E. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials for surface

temperatures at and below ambient conditions only. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type [I] for
tubular materials.
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Rubatex Corp.
PAGE 2 OF 10
SECTION 23 0719
2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.
2.3 ADHESIVES
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type [II], Class [I].
C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class [2], Grade [A].

D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class [2], Grade [A] for bonding
insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
2.4 MASTICS
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
dry film thickness.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and [70] percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
PAGE 3 OF 10
SECTION 23 0719
C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.
5. Color: White.
A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class [I], Grade [A] and shall be compatible with
resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.
5. Color: White.
2.6 SEALANTS
A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

5. Color: Aluminum.
B. ASJ Flashing Sealants:

5. Color: White.
2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type [I].
PAGE 4 OF 10
SECTION 23 0719
2. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type [II].
2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Jacket:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of jacket manufacturer.

2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy [3003], Temper [H-14].
a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing or Factory cut and rolled to
size.
b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: [1] mil- thick, heat-bonded
d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: [3] mil-thick, heat-bonded
e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
2) Preformed [2] piece or gore, [45] and [90] degree, short- and long-radius
elbows.
3) Tee covers.
4) Flange and union covers.
5) End caps.
6) Beveled collars.
7) Valve covers.
8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are
not available.
2.9 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
2.10 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.
b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.
c. Childers Products; Bands.
2. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy [3003], [3005], [3105], or [5005]; Temper [H-14],
[0.020] inch thick, [3/4] inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept
metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
PAGE 5 OF 10
SECTION 23 0719
B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.
C. Wire: [0.062] inch soft-annealed, stainless steel

following:
a. ASC Industries.
b. C & F Wire.
c. Childers Products
d. Pabco Metals Corp.
e. RPR Products, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements
for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free
of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for
each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
PAGE 6 OF 10
SECTION 23 0719
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with [3] inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced [4] inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1[-1/2] inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at [4] inches o.c.
a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than [75] percent of its nominal
thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend
patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt
joints.
P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
7. Valves, control valves, strainers, unions, and balancing valves that need access and do
not condensate.
PAGE 7 OF 10
SECTION 23 0719
Q. Insulation shall be installed in accordance with SMACNA "National Commercial and Industrial
Standards Manual" B Latest Edition.
3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific
requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate elbows with preformed fitting insulation. When preformed insulation elbows are
not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining
pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. Each piece shall be butted
tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and
irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour
that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation. When preformed insulation tees are
not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining
pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. Cut sectional pipe
insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire.
Bond pieces with adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation. When preformed insulation is not
available, use sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used
for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves,
insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill
joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for
above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match
size and color of pipe labels.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test
connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation
at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish
with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
PAGE 8 OF 10
SECTION 23 0719
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless
steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide
the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least [2] inches over adjacent
pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied
in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION (For Surfaces at or Below Ambient

Conditions)
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as
pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

1. Install factory premolded insulation fittings.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties (Cold Surfaces Only):

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
PAGE 9 OF 10
SECTION 23 0719
3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with [2] inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof
sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands [12]
inches o.c. and at end joints.
3.8 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each
piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury, then
insulate per ADA Standards and Requirements.
3.9 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
INDOOR INSULATION SCHEDULE

SERVICE INSULATION PIPE SIZE Thermal THICKNESS
MATERIALS Conductivity (inches)
(Btu$in/hr$ft5$F)
Refrigerant Suction & Hot Flexible All sizes 0.27 @ 75 F 1"

Gas Elastomeric
END OF SECTION
PAGE 10 OF 10
SECTION 23 0719
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution systems.
Metal ducts include the following:
B. Types of ductwork required for this project include the following:

1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.
2. Round snaplock duct
3. Duct liner.
C. Construct all other supply, return, and exhaust ductwork for [2] @ w.g. pressure class, except as
noted, per SMACNA requirements.
A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and
distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of
duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout
modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results
without increasing system total pressure.
A. Extent of metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this
section.
B. Refer to other Division-23 sections for exterior insulation of metal ductwork and support of
ductwork to meet seismic requirements, not work of this section.
C. Refer to other Division-23 sections for ductwork accessories; not work of this section.
D. Duct Construction
1. Refer to the Duct Construction Schedule on the drawings for the types of materials to be
used for each type of service.
METAL DUCTWORK PAGE 1 OF 7

SECTION 233113
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductwork

products of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than [5] years.
SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, MetaL
and Flexible for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.
ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment, Volume, Chapter 1 "Duct
Construction", for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.
NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems" and NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and
Air Conditioning Systems".
INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE version 2018.
1.6 SUBMITTALS:
A. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed metal ductwork and
ductwork products, in accordance with requirements of Division-1 and 23.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased

products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and seal ends
of ductwork to prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.
B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to
store outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECTANGULAR AND ROUND DUCTWORK MATERIALS:
A. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide
paint grip type materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks,
roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would
impair painting.
B. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel
complying with ASTM A 527, lock forming quality; with G [90] zinc coating in accordance with
ASTM A 525; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations.

SECTION 233113
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS:
A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and, where
not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system
requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment.
B. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum [15] degrees
change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use [45] degree laterals
and [45] degree elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where [90] degree branches are indicated,
provide conical type tees.
C. Duct Liner: Fibrous glass conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 1071, with an NRC not less
than [.75] as tested per ASTM C423 using Type [A] mounting, and a thermal conductivity no
higher than [.28] at [75] F mean temperature. The liner shall meet the life safety standards as
established by NFPA 90A and 90B. Duct liner shall be a flexible, high performance duct liner
insulation with acrylic surface treatment and factory applied edge coating which assures coverage
of the leading edges per SMACNA. Liner shall have a biocidal matt face that prevents bacterial
and fungi growth per ASTM C665, ASTM G21 and ASTM G22. Duct liner shall be Manville
Permacote Linacoustic HP or equal.
D. Duct Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916 "Specifications for Adhesives for Duct Thermal
Insulation".
E. Duct Liner Fasteners: Comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Article
S2.11.
F. Duct Sealant: Water-borne, non-toxic, cellulose fiber-reinforced, adhesive-sealant for

permanently sealing fabricated joints and longitudinal seams of thermal insulation, and all air duct
types including UL 181 Listed air ducts. UL listed 181A-Mand UL 181B-M:28F; SMACNA
Pressure Class rated for [0.5] to [8] inches water gauge; VOC=s less than [10] grams/liter. Sealant
shall be manufactured by RCD Corporation sealant #[6] or approved substitute. Install and store
per manufacturer=s instructions.
G. Duct Tape Sealant for Systems [2] inch water gauge and under: Two Mil aluminum alloy foil tape
with pressure sensitive adhesive and paper liner, silver color. Tape shall be manufactured by
Scotch Foil Tape and be product #3311 or approved substitute. Install and store per
manufacturer=s instructions.
H. Duct Tape Sealant for Systems over [2] inch water gauge: Mineral impregnated woven fiber tape
and an activator/adhesive, manufacturer shall be HardCast, Inc. Model DT tape with FTA-20 or
FTA-50 adhesive or approved substitute.
I. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel
fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. For exposed stainless
steel ductwork, provide matching stainless steel support materials.
J. Flexible Ducts: Either spiral-wound spring steel with flameproof vinyl sheathing, or corrugated
aluminum; complying with UL 181.

SECTION 233113
1. Where installed in unconditioned spaces other than return air plenums, provide [1] inch
thick continuous flexible fiberglass sheath with vinyl vapor barrier jacket.
2.3 RECTANGULAR AND ROUND DUCT FABRICATION: (TWO-INCH PRESSURE CLASS

FABRICATION)
A. Shop fabricate ductwork in [4], [8], [10], or [12] foot length, unless otherwise indicated or
required to complete runs. Preassemble work in shop to greatest extent possible, so as to minimize
field assembly of systems. Disassemble systems only to extent necessary for shipping and
handling. Match-mark sections for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Shop fabricate ductwork of gauges and reinforcement complying with the latest issue of the
SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards". Round snaplock ductwork shall be a
minimum of [28] gage.
C. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as
applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line radius
equal to associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where shorter
radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to [30] degrees for contracting tapers and [20] degrees
expanding tapers.
D. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent possible.
Refer to Division-23 section "Ductwork Accessories" for accessory requirements.
E. Fabricate ductwork with duct liner in each section of duct where specified. Laminate liner to
internal surfaces of duct in accordance with instructions by manufacturers of lining and adhesive
and fasten with mechanical fasteners. Duct sizes shown on plans are clear inside dimensions.
Increase ductwork to accommodate lining.
F. Individual takeoffs from the main ductwork to serve an individual diffuser shall be made with high
efficiency side take off fittings. The fitting shall be constructed from [26] gauge galvanized steel
with [20] gauge blade damper, heavy duty control quadrant on [2] inch standoff, and [1] inch
flange around the rectangular opening with [1/8] inch double stick neoprene gasket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK:
A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which
will achieve air-tight ([3]% leakage for systems rated [3] inch and under; [1]% for systems rated
over [3] inch) and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each
indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at
connections, within [1/8] inch misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support

SECTION 233113
ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts tru-to-
shape and to prevent buckling. Do not install ductwork on ceiling grid systems. Support vertical
ducts at every floor.
B. Seal all ducts according to the following tables:
MINIMUM DUCT SEALING LEVELS AND LEAKAGE CLASSES
DUCT TYPE
DUCT SUPPLY EXHAUST RETURN

LOCATION
PRESSURE CLASS
2" and Less Greater than 2"
Outdoors A A C A
Unconditioned B A C B
Spaces
Conditioned C B B C
Spaces
DUCT SEALING LEVEL REQUIREMENTS
SEAL LEVEL SEALING REQUIREMENTS
A All transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct

wall penetrations. If Pressure-sensitive tape is
used as the primary sealant, it shall be certified to
comply with UL-181A or UL-181B by an
independent testing lab. and the tape shall be
used in accordance with that certification
B All transverse joints and longitudinal seams. If

Pressure-sensitive tape is used as the primary
sealant, it shall be certified to comply with UL-
181A or UL-181B by an independent testing lab.
and the tape shall be used in accordance with that
certification
C Transverse joints only
NOTE: Longitudinal seams are joints oriented in the direction of airflow. Transverse joints are
connections of two duct sections oriented perpendicular to airflow. Duct wall penetrations are
openings made by any screw fastener, pipe, rod, or wire. All other connections are considered

SECTION 233113
transverse joints, including but not limited to spin-ins, taps, and other branch connections, access
door frames and jambs, duct connections to equipment, etc.
C. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop-fabricated

work and accommodate installation requirements.
D. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and
avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated, by diagrams, details and
notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct
usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls,
overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of
building. Limit clearance to [1/2] inch where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of
ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for [1]
inch clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal
ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above
suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown.
Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.
E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not route ductwork through transformer vaults and their
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
F. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to
view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal
flanges of same gauge as duct. Overlap opening on [4] sides by at least [1-1/2] inch. Fasten to
duct and substrate. Where ducts pass through fire-rated floors, walls, or partitions, provide
firestopping between duct and substrate, in accordance with requirements of Division-7 Section
"Firestopping".
G. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames,
equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.
H. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF DUCT LINER:
A. General: Install duct liner in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards at
the following locations:
1. Line all supply and return rectangular ductwork as shown on the plans.
2. If indicated on the drawings, Line all rectangular ductwork downstream of all
variable/constant air volume boxes
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS:
A. Maximum Length: For any duct run using flexible ductwork, do not exceed [5] feet [0] inch
extended length. Flexible Ductwork to be used in concealed locations only.
B. Installation: Install in accordance with Section III of SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards, Metal and Flexible".

SECTION 233113
3.5 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
A. General: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated, provide flexible connection for each
ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or equipment containing
rotating machinery. Provide access doors as indicated.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external
surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where
ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration.
B. Strip protective paper from stainless ductwork surfaces, and repair finish wherever it has been
damaged.
C. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment of air distribution
devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other
covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be
completed.
D. Balancing: Refer to Division-23 section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for air
distribution balancing of metal ductwork; not work of this section. Seal any leaks in ductwork
that become apparent in balancing process.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 233113
SECTION 233300 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of ductwork accessories work is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by

requirements of this section.
B. Types of ductwork accessories required for project include the following:

1. Dampers.
2. Low pressure manual dampers.
3. Control dampers.
4. Fire dampers.
5. Turning vanes.
6. Duct hardware.
7. Duct access doors.
8. Flexible connections.
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork accessories,

of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 3 years.

1. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".
2. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to
construction of ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated.
3. UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with UL
Standard 555 "Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers".
4. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork
accessories.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork
accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation
instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of ductwork
accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, method of fastening or support, and
methods of assembly of components.
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PAGE 1 OF 4

SECTION 233300
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DAMPERS:
A. Low Pressure Manual Dampers: Provide and install dampers of single blade type or multi-blade
type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards" wherever
dictated by good engineering practice whether or not specifically shown on drawings.
B. Control Dampers: Provide dampers with parallel blades for [2] position control, or opposed blades
for modulating control. Construct blades of [16] ga steel, provide heavy-duty molded self-
lubricating nylon bearings, [1/2 inch diameter steel axles spaces on [9] inch centers. Construct
frame of [2] inch X [1/2] inch X [1/8] inch steel channel for face areas [25] sq. ft. and under; [4]
inch X [1-1/2] inch X [16] ga channel for face areas over [25] sq. ft. Blades shall have seals and
be insulated. Provide galvanized steel finish with aluminum touch-up.
C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dampers of one of the following:
1. Air Balance, Inc.
2. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.
3. Ruskin Mfg. Co.
2.2 FIRE DAMPERS (IF REQUIRED BY PROJECT WALL RATINGS):
A. Fire Dampers: Provide U .L. Listed 555 dynamic rated fire dampers, of types and sizes indicated.
Construct casings of [16] ga galvanized steel finish. Provide fusible link rated at [160] to [165]
degrees F unless otherwise indicated. Provide damper with positive lock in closed position, and
with the following additional features:
1. Damper Blade Assembly: Curtain type.
2. Blade Material: Galvanized Steel, match casing.
3. Type [301] stainless steel constant force coiled negator closure spring
4. Maximum pressure drop of [0.1] in. w.g. at free area velocity of [2000] fpm
B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire dampers of one of the
following:
1. Air Balance, Inc.
2. Phillips-Aire.
3. Ruskin Mfg. Co.
2.3 TURNING VANES:
A. Fabricated Turning Vanes: Provide fabricated turning vanes and vane runners, constructed in
accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".
2.4 DUCT HARDWARE:
A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project, for
the following:
1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated, duct
test holes, consisting of slot and cover, for instrument tests.
2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft; and
end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over [12] inch. Provide extended
quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork.

SECTION 233300
B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct hardware of one of the
following:
1. Ventfabrics, Inc.
2. Young Regulator Co.
2.5 DUCT ACCESS DOORS:
A. General: Provide where indicated, duct access doors of size indicated.
B. Construction: Construct of same or greater gauge as ductwork served, provide insulated doors for
insulated ductwork. Provide flush frames for uninsulated ductwork, extended frames for
externally insulated duct. Provide one side hinged, other side with one handle-type latch for doors
[12] inch high and smaller, [2] handle-type latches for larger doors.
C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct access doors of one of the
following:
1. Air Balance Inc.
2. Register Mfg. Co.
3. Ruskin Mfg. Co.
2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS:
A. General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated
equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into
duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint
flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of
absorbing vibrations of connected equipment.
B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible connections of one of

the following:
1. American/Elgen Co.; Energy Div.
2. Duro Dyne Corp.
3. Flexaust (The) Co.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not proceed
with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES:
A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with

applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance
with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.
B. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular [90] degree elbows in supply and exhaust air
systems, and elsewhere as indicated.

SECTION 233300
C. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side,
except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter.
D. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of

ductwork accessories properly with other work.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air
leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain
proper operation and leakproof performance.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire dampers
where shown on drawings and adjust for proper action.
B. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 233300
SECTION 233700 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of air outlets and inlets work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by requirements
of this section.
B. Types of air outlets and inlets required for project include the following:
1. Ceiling air diffusers.
2. Wall registers and grilles.
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and inlets of
types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than [5] years.

1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650
"Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets".
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE
70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets".
3. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 "Test Method
for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters".
4. AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
5. NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A "Standard
for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets including the
following:
1. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating
construction, finish, and mounting details.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of air outlet
and inlet, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, and
spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in
accordance with requirements of Division-1.
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PAGE 1 OF 4

SECTION 233700
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify
on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or
bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.
B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work
traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and
enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard ceiling air diffusers
where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and
components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.
B. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity
traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's
current data.
C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent
ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit
and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of
ceiling systems which will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser.
D. Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as listed on
diffuser schedule.
E. Diffuser Faces:
1. Round, square, or rectangular housing louver faced in frame. Conceal air pattern devices
above panel.
F. Diffuser Mountings:
1. Flush: Diffuser housing above ceiling surface with flush perimeter flange and gasket to
seal against ceiling.
2. Lay-In: Diffuser housing sized to fit between ceiling exposed suspension tee bars and rest
on top surface of tee bar.
G. Diffuser Patterns:
1. [4] Way: Fixed or adjustable louver for [4] direction air flow, directions indicated on
drawings.
H. Diffuser Dampers:
1. Opposed Blade: Adjustable opposed blade damper assembly, key operated from face of
diffuser.
I Diffuser Accessories:
1. Operating Keys: Tools designed to fit through diffuser face and operate volume control
device and/or pattern adjustment.

SECTION 233700
J. Diffuser Finishes:
1. White Enamel: Semi-gloss white enamel prime finish.
K. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide diffusers of one of the following:
1. Price Industries
2. Krueger Mfg. Co.
3. Approved substitute
2.2 WALL REGISTERS AND GRILLES:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard wall registers and grilles
where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and
components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.
B. Performance: Provide wall registers and grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity
traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's
current data.
C. Wall Compatibility: Provide registers and grilles with border styles that are compatible with
adjacent wall systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into wall construction with
accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for
types of wall construction which will contain each type of wall register and grille.
D. Types: Provide wall registers and grilles of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as
listed on register and grille schedule. The following requirements shall apply to nomenclature
indicated on schedule:
1. Register and Grille Materials:
a. Aluminum Construction (AL): Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum
frame and adjustable blades.
2. Register and Grille Faces:
a. Horizontal Straight Blades (H-S): Horizontal blades, individually adjustable, at
manufacturer's standard spacing.
3. Register and Grille Patterns:
a. Double Deflection: [2] sets of blades in face, rear set at 90 degrees to face set.
4. Register and Grille Dampers:
a. Opposed Blade: Adjustable opposed blade damper assembly, key operated from
face of register.
5. Register and Grille Accessories:
a. Operating Keys: Tools designed to fit through register or grille face and operate
volume control device and/or pattern adjustment.
6. Register and Grille Finishes:
a. Brushed Aluminum Finish.
E. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide registers and grilles of one of the
following:
1. Price Industries
2. Krueger Mfg. Co.
3. Approved substitute

SECTION 233700
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended functions.
B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to interface
installation of air outlets and inlets with other work.
C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction "Reflected
Ceiling Plans". Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling modules.
3.3 SPARE PARTS:
A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 3 operating keys for each type of air outlet and inlet that require
them.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 233700
SECTION 233723 - GRAVITY VENTILATOR
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Gravity Ventilators.
2. Section 07 3010 – Roof Underlayment.
6. Division 23 – HVAC.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA):

1. 99 - Standards Handbook.
2. 200 - Publication, Air Systems.
3. 201-90 - Publication, Fans and Systems.
4. 202-88 - Publication, Troubleshooting.
5. 203-90 - Publication, Field Performance Measurement of Fan Systems.
6. 211-05 - Publication, Certified Ratings Program – Product Rating Manual for Fan Air
Performance.
7. 300-96 - Standard Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.
8. 311-05 - Publication Certified Ratings Program – Product Rating Manual for Fan Sound
Performance.
9. 99-0401-86 - Classification for Spark Resistant Construction.
10. 99-2408-69 - Operating Limits for Centrifugal Fans.
B. Air Movement and Control Association Inc. (AMCA), American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. 204-05 - Standard Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans.
2. 210-99 - Standard Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating.
C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. 11-r1999 - Method of Evaluating Load Ratings of Bearings.
D. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):

1. 7-02 - Minimum Design Loads for Building and Other Structures.
E. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (AHRAE):
1. Chapter 45 - 2003 Handbook, HVAC Applications.
2. Chapter 7 - 2001 Fundamentals handbook, Sound-Vibration.
3. Chapter 32 - 2001 Fundamentals handbook, Duct Design.
4. Chapter 18 - 1992 HVAC System and Equipment handbook, Fans.
F. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM):

1. E330-02 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skylight and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
GRAVITY VENTILATOR PAGE 1 OF 5

SECTION 233723
G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. 70 - National Electrical Code.
2. 90A-02 - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
3. 92A-06 - Recommend Practice for Smoke-Control System.
4. 92B-05 - Standard for Smoke Management System in Malls, Atria, and Large Areas.
5. 96-04 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations.
H. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):

1. 1910.212 - General requirements for Machine Guarding.
2. 1910.219 - General requirements for guarding safe use of mechanical power transmission
apparatus.
3. 1926.300 - General requirements for safe operation and maintenance of hand and power tools.
I. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. 507 - Electric Fans.
2. 555 - Fire Dampers.
3. 555S - Smoke Dampers.
4. 705 - Standard Power Ventilators.
5. 762 - Standard Power Roof Ventilators for Restaurant Exhaust Appliances.
6. 793 - Snow Load.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit dimensional drawings for each product used.
C. Provide fan curves for each fan at the specified operation point, with the flow, static pressure and
horsepower clearly plotted.
D. Provide outlet velocity and fan's inlet sound power readings for the eight octave bands, decibels, and
sones.
E. Provide manufacturer's certification that exhaust fans are licensed to bear Air Movement and Control
Association (AMCA), Certified Rating Seal for sound and air performance.
F. Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual (IOM): Provide manufacturer's installation,

operations, and maintenance manual, including instructions on installation, operations, maintenance,
pulley adjustment, receiving, handling, storage, safety information and cleaning. A troubleshooting
guide, parts list, warranty and electrical wiring diagrams.
G. Warranty:
1. Sample of Warranty.

SECTION 233723
A. Performance ratings: Conform to AMCA standard 211 and 311. Fans must be tested in accordance
with ANSI/AMCA Standard 210-99 and AMCA Standard 300-96 in an AMCA accredited laboratory.
Fans shall be certified to bear the AMCA label for air and sound performance seal.
B. Classification for Spark Resistant Construction Conform to AMCA 99.
C. Each fan shall be given a balancing analysis which is applied to wheels at the outside radius. The
maximum allowable static and dynamic imbalance is 0.05 ounces (Balance grade of G6.3).
D. Comply with the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), standards for motors and
electrical accessories.
E. The High Wind models shall be analyzed and stamped by a state license P.E. to the ASCE 7-02
Standard which meets the IBC, Florida and Miami-Dade codes.
F. Each High Wind model is subject to be certified by a third party to the ASTM E330 Static Pressure
Difference Standard.
G. All High Wind models shall be analyzed using Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD). The CFD
simulates the flow of high speed (150MPH) winds over the surface of objects.
H. The Finite Element Analysis (FEA) is the results from the CFD and it can accurately predict the stress,
strain, and deflection resulting form high wind loads.
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging,
with labels clearly indicating manufacturer, material, products included, and location of installation.
B. Storage: Store materials in a dry area indoor, protected from damage, and in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions. For long term storage follow manufacturer's Installation, Operations, and
Maintenance Manual.
C. Handling: Handle and lift fans in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Protect materials
and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage. Follow all safety warnings posted by
the manufacturer.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty.
B. Warranty Period: One [1] years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project.

SECTION 233723
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis – Gravity Ventilator: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. Greenheck
P O Box 410
Schofield, Wisconsin 54476
Telephone: (715) 359-6171
Website: (www.greenheck.com)
2.2 GRAVITY VENTILATOR
A. Model: GSR-16.
1. Low silhouette for relief applications with natural gravity or negative pressure system.
2. Selection based on non-ducted applications.
3. Performance capability up to [18,200] cubic feet per minute (cfm).
4. Each unit shall bear a permanently affixed manufacture's nameplate containing the model
number and individual serial number.
B. Hood:
1. Constructed of aluminum.
2. Internal structure is constructed of galvanized steel.
C. Bird-screen:
1. Constructed of ½ inch Galvanized mesh.
2. Mounted horizontally across the intake area of the hood.
D. Housing:
1. Curb Cap type: No Hinged.
2. Constructed of aluminum, includes wind-band and curb cap.
3. Wind-band to be one piece spun aluminum construction and maintain original material
thickness throughout the housing.
4. Wind-band to include an integral rolled bead for strength.
5. Curb cap to have integral deep spun inlet venturi and pre-punched mounting holes to ensure
correct attachment to roof.
E. Accessories:
1. Curb Seal:
a. Rubber seal between fan and the roof curb.
2. Curbs:
a. Type: GPFP.
b. Material: Galvanized.
c. Insulation Thickness: [1] inch.
d. Coating Type: Baked enamel.
3. Dampers:
a. Type: Gravity.
b. Prevents outside air from entering back into the building when fan is off.
c. Balanced for minimal resistance to flow.
d. Galvanized frames with pre-punched mounting holes.

SECTION 233723
4. Finishes:
a. Type: Baked Enamel.
5. Flashing Flange:
a. Constructed of aluminum.
b. Pre-punched holes for installation without a roof curb.
6. Hood Insulation:
a. Lined with [1/2] inch fiberglass insulation to prevent condensation and sound levels.
7. Insect Screen:
a. Constructed of fine mesh aluminum.
b. Fitted to the top of the throat and prevents entry of insects.
8. Tie-Down Points:
a. Four aluminum brackets located on wind-band secures fan in heavy wind applications.
9. Reducer / Adaptor:
a. Type: Adapter.
a. Material type: Aluminum.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive fans. Notify the Engineer of conditions that would adversely affect
installation or subsequent utilization and maintenance of fans. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ensure roof openings are square, accurately aligned, correctly located, and in tolerance.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Ventilators shall be adjusted according to manufacturer's instructions.
3.5 FINAL CLEANING
A. Clean as recommended by manufacturer. Do not use material or methods which may damage finish
surface or surrounding construction.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed product and finished surfaces from damage during construction.
B. Protect installed ventilators to ensure that, except for normal weathering, fans will be without damage
or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 233723
SECTION 233813 - KITCHEN HOOD AND MAKE-UP AIR SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The ND2 series is a Type [I], wall canopy hood for use over [600]F cooking surface temperatures.
The aerodynamic design includes a mechanical baffle and performance enhancing lip for
exceptional capture and containment.
B. Hood, fans, electrical prewire, and fire suppression to be provided and installed by mechanical
installer. Installation to include (but not limited to) all necessary permits and inspections, duct
work, hanging of hood, mounting of fans, and duct enclosure panel. The installed system must
meet all state and local codes and comply with the latest edition of NFPA 96.
C. The components as shown on the system drawings shall be furnished by one manufacturer
regularly engaged in supplying this equipment. The major components shall include the canopy,
exhaust fan, and makeup air system.
A. The hood shall be ETL listed to standard UL710, ULC710, and ULC-S646 when installed in
accordance with these installation instructions and National Fire Protection Association Standard
NFPA 96, Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations.
B. The hood shall have built-in compliance with NSF/ANSI Standard [2].
C. The hood shall be ETL listed as:

1. Exhaust Hood Without Exhaust Damper
2. ETL Sanitation Listed and built-in accordance with NFPA 96.
3. The ETL label shall list the temperature ratings and minimum CFM/ft rating.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, installation, and start-up instruction. The
computer generated submittal drawings shall include hood section view, and hood plan view.
B. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed ductwork and duct
accessories in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
1.5 MANUFACTURER
A. The hood system shall be manufactured by Captive Aire. Greenheck hood systems will be
considered provided they can meet the above standards and requirements.
KITCHEN HOOD AND MAKE-UP AIR SYSTEMS PAGE 1 OF 4

SECTION 233813
1.6 WARRANTY
A. The equipment shall be provided with a [2] year warranty from the date of shipment. Any
defective part of the equipment within the [2] year period shall be repaired or replaced at no
charge to the owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Construction shall be dependent on the structural application to minimize distortion and other
defects. All seams, joints, and penetrations of the hood enclosure to the lower outermost
perimeter, which directs and captures grease-laden vapor and exhaust gases, shall have a liquid-
tight continuous external weld in accordance with NFPA 96.
B. Duct sizes, CFM, and static pressure requirements shall be as shown on the drawings.
2.2 HOOD CONSTRUCTION
A. The hood shall be constructed of Type [430] stainless steel.
B. The hood front shall be double wall insulated to eliminate condensation and increase rigidity. The
insulation shall have a flexural modulus of [475] E1, meet UL 181 requirements and be in
accordance with NFPA 90A and 90B.
C. The hood shall be equipped with a minimum of four connections for hanger rods. Hood lengths
greater than [12] feet will have added hangers. The exhaust duct collar shall be [4] inch high with
flange. The grease drain system shall be an enclosed integral part of the hood back and have
slopes with an exposed, removable grease cup to facilitate cleaning.
D. Provide an integral baffle to direct grease laden vapors toward the exhaust filter bank.
E. The hood shall be provided with UL. Classified filters, supplied in size and quantity as required
by the manufacturer. The filters shall be stainless steel Captrate Solo filter with hook and be ETL
Listed. The particulate capture efficiency shall be [85]% at [9] microns and [76]% at [5] microns.
F. All seams shall be welded and have stainless steel on exposed surfaces.
2.3 HOOD LIGHTING
A. The lighting shall be recessed round LED fixture with an LED light rated at [3500]K warm
output.
2.4 HOOD FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
A. Provide a fire suppression system to cover the hood, cooking equipment, ductwork and fans. The
system shall be a UL 300 fire suppression system.
B. Provide a utility cabinet to contain the listed fire suppression system, listed components, and pre-
wired electrical controls. The utility cabinet shall be remotely mounted. The manufacturer shall
work with the installing contractors to field connect the wiring and fire suppression piping to the
hood.
C. See the drawings for additional fire suppression requirements.

SECTION 233813
2.5 HOOD SUPPLY AIR SYSTEM
A. Provide a perforated supply plenum to supply makeup air discharging in front of the cooking
equipment. Perforated diffuser plates shall be included to provide even air distribution.
Unexposed surfaces shall be constructed of aluminized steel.
B. The supply plenum shall be insulated to prevent condensation.
2.6 HOOD ACCESSORIES
A. Provide a left end standoff.
B. Provide a stainless steel wrapper around the top of the hood to cover the space from the top of the
hood to the ceiling.
2.7 KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST FAN SYSTEM
A. Exhaust fan must be UL 762 listed for restaurant application, belt-driven, upblast type as
manufactured by Econ-Air or Greenheck. Fan to be roof mounted and have a discharge height of
a minimum of [42] inches. Fan not to be located within [10] feet of any other building intake. Fan
to contain a grease collection device, pre-wired disconnect switch, thermal overload protection
and motor starter (if necessary), with roof curb suitable for installation on a metal roof. Curb shall
be approved by the metal roof manufacturer.
2.8 KITCHEN HOOD MAKEUP AIR UNIT
A. The makeup air system shall be Econ-Air model E1-E.354 series consisting of a electric fan
blower and electric heater section suitable for installation indoors. The filter section shall be a
Honeywell filter cabinet with hinged access door and contain a [2] inch thick flat filter sized for
the makeup air cfm quantity with a maximum pressure drop of [0.2] inch water. Provide with a
motorized low leakage back draft damper with extended shaft. Damper to be constructed of
galvanized steel. See the drawings for the heater capacity and other requirements.
B. Provide a [50]F – [90]F discharge Temp controller. Set point to be mounted at the unit in the
heater section area.
2.9 HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK
A. Furnish double wall, factory built grease duct for use with Type [I] kitchen hoods, which
conforms to the requirements of NFPA-96. Products shall be ETL listed to UL-1978 and UL-2221
for venting air and grease vapors from commercial cooking operation. Models DW-2R, 3R and
3Z are used for grease duct applications when installed in accordance with these instructions and
National Fire Protection Association ANFPA 96@; Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire
Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations. Double wall grease ducts are listed for a
continuous internal temperature of [500] degrees F and intermittent temperatures of [2000]
degrees F.
B. The duct sections shall be constructed of an inner duct wall and an outer wall with insulation in
between. The inner duct wall shall be constructed of [.036] inch thick, [430] type stainless steel
and be available in diameters [5] inch through [36] inch. The outer wall shall be constructed of
stainless steel at a minimum of [.024] inch thickness. The duct, based on model number, shall
include layers of Super Wool [607] Plus, Insulfrax Elite Blanket insulation, or Unifrax S16 Bulk
Fiber insulation between the inner and outer wall. Grease duct joints shall be held together by

SECTION 233813
means of formed V clamps and sealed with 3M Fire Barrier [2000]+. The duct wall assembly
shall be tested and listed at [3/4] inch, [1] inch or zero-inch clearance, according to classifications.
C. The ductwork shall meet the following classifications: UL 2221: Standard for Fire Resistive
Grease Duct Enclosure Assemblies. Chapter 7 of this standard references a test labeled Internal
Fire Test. Section 7.1.1 references two installation conditions, Condition [A] and Condition [B].
D. Ductwork provided shall be Captive Aire Model DW-3Z classified under UL2221 (Test of Fire
Resistive Duct Enclosure Assemblies) as an alternate to [2] Hr. fire resistive shaft enclosures with
a minimum zero clearance to combustibles (sizes [5] inch to [36] inch diameter). Model 3Zis
listed in accordance with the requirements for duct enclosure Condition [A] and [B]. Provide floor
fire stop support assembly and fire stop assembly. Install in accordance with manufacturer=s
instructions and testing requirements.
2.10 ELECTRICAL
A. Hood supplier to provide a prewired electrical control package located in the utility cabinet to
operate the kitchen hood lights, and fans. Control panel shall include a stainless steel switch panel
consisting of one light switch and one red lighted fan switch for each set of interlocked fan(s), and
hinged covered junction box with relay for supply shutdown, a numbered input/output terminal
strip, and a wiring diagram. Additionally, the microswitch for fire system shutdown shall be wired
to j-box. A starter/overload assembly for each fan will be located in the utility cabinet. Conduit
between hood and fan package shall be supplied by the electrical installer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which the system is installed. Do not proceed with the work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install the hood system in accordance with the manufacturer=s instructions, drawings, written
specifications, manufacturer’s installation manual, and all applicable building codes.
B. Provide and perform all testing and materials necessary for meeting all state and local codes and
satisfy the local and state inspecting authorities.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 233813
SECTION 238143 - ELECTRIC HEAT PUMP SPLIT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work required under this section of the specifications consists of heating and air conditioning
equipment as shown on drawing.
B. The work of this section is subject to the requirements of the Mechanical General Provisions
1.2 CERTIFICATION
A. All electrical components shall be U.L. labeled.
B. Units shall be rated under the ARI certification program.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's warranty for one year for parts and labor.
B. Provide manufacturer’s compressor warranty for a total of five years from substantial completion
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRIC HEAT PUMP UNITS
A. The units shall be complete factory assembled heating and cooling units. The assemblies shall be
complete with U.L. listed electric heaters, compressor, crankcase heater, motors, air cooled
condenser, heating/cooling coil, standard size throwaway filters, receiver, refrigerant specialties,
internal wiring, all piping, insulation, refrigerant, [2] position motorized outside air damper and
hood, multi-speed or belt-drive motor, fan motor controls, insulated cabinets, time guard circuit,
automatic defrost, emergency heat control, outdoor thermostat, low voltage thermostat, and all
required specialties, accessories, and controls for a complete job.
B. The units shall have the capacity called for on the drawings and be suitable for operation on
electric power shown in the schedule.
C. The units shall be Trane or approved substitute.
2.2 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM
A. The refrigerant piping shall be ASTM-B-280 Type ACR copper with wrought copper fittings and
high temperature solder joints, sil-fos, or approved substitute. The piping system shall include but
not be limited to the following: Liquid line solenoid valves, hot gas by-pass and control where
noted, charging valves, sight glass with moisture indicator, liquid line filter drier, and flexible
connectors where required. The piping shall be installed according to the diagrams furnished by
the manufacturer's authorized agent. These diagrams shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval prior to installation. The piping system shall be tested at [200] pounds with dry nitrogen
and freon until all leaks have been made tight. After the pressure test use suitable vacuum pump
to evacuate the system to at least [1,000] microns, then charge the system with refrigerant and oil
as required. Prior to running the refrigerant equipment, all safety and operating devices and
ELECTRIC HEAT PUMP SPLIT SYSTEMS PAGE 1 OF 3

SECTION 238143
controls shall be properly adjusted and tested for proper operation and protection of the
equipment.
B. Refrigerant piping extending through the wall or roof shall be sleeved, waterproofed and be
flashed watertight.
C. Insulate all refrigerant suction lines with [1/2] inch Armstrong Armaflex [II].
D. Systems with [10] tons cooling capacity and above shall also include: TXV refrigerant control,
replaceable core filter drier with shut-off valves on both sides and liquid line solenoid valve(s).
2.3 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM
A. Condensing Unit Materials of Construction

1. Cabinet:
a. Fabricated of G[60] galvannealed steel
b. Finished with corrosion inhibiting, high-gloss, powder coated
2. Fan Guard:
a. Heavy-gauge, vinyl dipped wire
B. Compressor - Hermetically sealed, high efficiency rotary or reciprocating type, depending on unit
capacity. Motor shall be PSC type with internal overload protection. Compressor shall be installed
on resilient mountings.
C. Refrigeration Circuit - The unit shall be delivered with pre-charged refrigerant for the condenser
coil and evaporator. Charging of the field installed piping is required. Unit refrigeration valves
shall be Primore, solid brass, for sweat connection.
D. Condenser Coil - Condenser coil shall be seamless, copper tubing, arranged in staggered
configuration, with enhanced aluminum fins. The tubes shall be mechanically expanded for secure
bonding to fin shoulder.
E. Condenser Fan/Motor - The condenser fan shall be a large diameter, high efficiency, three blade
propeller type, directly connected to the totally enclosed, [8] pole, PSC motor. Internal, thermal
protection of the motor shall be supplied.
F. Controls/Components
1. Controls installed at the factory shall include:
a. Compressor and fan motor contactor
b. Capacitor
c. Low voltage transformer
d. Low voltage terminals for interconnection with evaporator
e. High pressure control
G. Indoor Unit Materials of Construction

1. Cabinet:
a. Fabricated of galvanneal steel, with structural stiffeners
b. Powder coated finish
2. Discharge Grille Assembly:
a. [4] way adjustable, white painted
b. Anodized aluminum, adjustable
3. Condensate Drain Pan:
a. Galvanized steel with anti-corrosion coating

SECTION 238143
4. Cabinet Color:
a. Designer White
H. Air Systems - Fan shall be tangential type, directly mounted to the motor shaft. Motor shall be
PSC type with overload protection. Air stream surfaces shall be insulated with [1/4] inch
fiberglass or [1/8] inch volara. Filter shall be permanent, washable, and user accessible.
I. Coil - Coil shall be seamless, copper tubing, arranged in staggered configuration, with enhanced
aluminum fins, tested to [460] psig. The tubes shall be mechanically expanded for secure bonding
to fin shoulder.
J Controls/Components - Controls and components installed at the factory or supplied shall include:
1. Relays and connections for condensing unit
2. Unit mounted operating controls shall include:

a. Thermostat
b. Fan speed control,
c. Heat/cool switch when applicable
d. Electric heat with automatic reset high temperature cutout
K. Furnish with internal condensate pump.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount units as shown on the drawings.
B. Provide competent factory-trained engineer for start-up testing and instructions to operating
personnel.
C. The manufacturer's authorized agent shall be responsible for all installation and control wiring
supervision, mounting instructions, sizing refrigerant piping, specialties, and all such details. His
agent shall be responsible for start-up and final checkout. He shall, upon job completion, notify
the Owner, Architect and Engineer that all units have been checked out, are operating properly
and are satisfactory in every respect.
D. Install wall thermostats and control wiring in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
state and local codes. All control wiring to be concealed.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 238143
SECTION 260000 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Applicable provisions of the General conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1, General
Requirements, apply to the Work under this Section.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work included under this specification consists of, but is not limited to, work as indicated on the
drawings and hereinafter specified in Division 26. Without limiting the generality implied by the
drawings and specifications, electrical consists of furnishing all materials, accessories, tools, and
labor required and incidental thereto, to provide:
1. Lighting fixtures and lamps.
2. A complete system of conduit and new conductors to supply electricity throughout the new
buildings.
3. Wiring devices.
4. Panels, safety switches, dry type transformers.
5. Temporary wiring to be used during construction.
6. Wiring in connection with heating, ventilating, plumbing, and air conditioning.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Fire protection, plumbing, and mechanical work is specified under Divisions 21, 22, and 23.
B. See drawings and other sections for equipment requiring electrical service.
C. Painting (except factory-applied finishes on equipment) is specified elsewhere.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Make entire electrical installation in strict accordance with the requirements of all city, county, state,
or federal codes of law having jurisdiction, the requirements and recommendations of the Board of
Fire Underwriters, including all amendments and/or additions to said codes, laws, requirements, and
recommendations and the requirements and recommendations of the Power Company.
B. Should any work shown on the drawings or herein specified be construed a being contrary to or not
conforming to the previously mentioned Codes, etc., bring it to the attention of the Architect before
executing the work in conformity with the various codes, etc., without additional cost to the Owner,
but not until the matter in question has been reviewed by the Architect.
C. Should any work shown on the drawings or herein specified be more rigid as to requirements than the
requirements of the various codes, the drawings and specifications in executing the work.
D. File with proper authorities all necessary drawings as required by various codes, laws, ordinances, or
other requirements.
E. Obtain and pay for all permits and for all required inspection certificates. Pay necessary fees.
GENERAL ELECTRICAL PAGE 1 OF 4

SECTION 260000
1.5 WARRANTY-GUARANTEE
A. Warrant and guarantee that all work executed under this section of the specifications will be free
from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance
of the building. The above parties further agree that they will, at their own expense, repair and
replace all such defective work and all other work damaged thereby which defective during the term
of the warranty-guarantee.
1.6 ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS
A. Refer to architectural drawings for details such as finishes, dimensions, materials, etc. Refer to
drawings for door locations, door swings, partitions location, cabinet and counters, making proper
allowances therefore. Refer to equipment plans for exact location of electrical connections which are
dimensioned.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications, descriptions, illustrations, and

installation instructions for each type of manufactured product to include: Lighting fixtures, lamps,
switchgear, exit signs, and wiring devices intended for use on this project. Submittals shall be neatly
organized in electronic “pdf” file format.
B. Include manufacturer's certification where required to show compliance with these specifications.
Indicate by transmittal form that a copy of each instruction has been distributed to the installer.
C. Furnish operating and maintenance instructions applying to equipment installed in conjunction with
this contract; include parts lists, wiring diagrams, catalog data, stamped approval submittal data, and
operational checkout data as called for in these specifications, bound in hardback binders.
Instructions shall be submitted to the Architect for approval at least one month in advance of initial
system start-up.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall not be ordered until architect's review of submittal material has been made. They
shall be new and unused and the manufacturers standard product and the latest designs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The electrical drawings which show the work included are diagrammatic only; the locations, routing,
etc., of the various fixtures, items of equipment, wiring, etc., are approximate only. The entire
installation is subject to such deviations, modifications, rerouting, etc., as may be necessary to meet
the requirements of the architectural, structural, and other drawings; and also as necessary to obtain a
proper coordination of the work with that of all other trades.
B. Carefully check and become familiar with the above-mentioned drawings, and frequently consult
with all other trades so that the work may proceed as a harmonious whole.

SECTION 260000
C. Install concealed all wiring except where the Architect grants specified permission to run same
exposed.
D. Installer shall defer the installation of all electrical fixtures liable to damage. After fixtures are
permanently installed, completely protect against breaking, damage, or the depositing of any waste
material therein until the system is accepted.
3.2 COORDINATION
A. Carefully check locations, layouts, and dimensions of all items to be installed under this section with
the above-mentioned drawings, and coordinate with all trades affected.
B. Any work installed without properly checking and coordinating same as above provided, which as a
result interferes with the proper installation of the work of other trades, is to be removed and properly
reinstalled without additional cost to the owner.
C. It is the installer's responsibility to notify well in advance, all trades affected, or any chases, recesses,
etc., which may be required for the installation of the electrical work. Should this be neglected, any
cutting and/or patching required for such chases, recesses, etc., to be done at this contractor's
expense.
D. Carefully examine all architectural, structural, plumbing, heating, electrical, and other drawings; and
all other sections of the specifications for items, equipment, etc., not a part of the electrical contract
which may require electrical connections. Unless explicitly indicated to the contrary, furnish and
install all necessary electrical lines, boxes, etc., and make final connections to all such items,
equipment, etc.
3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect work, fixtures, and materials at all times. Tightly cover and protect equipment against dirt,
water, chemical, or mechanical injury. At final completion of all work to be thoroughly cleaned and
delivered in a perfect unblemished condition.
B. Touch-up all damaged paint surfaces on equipment to match original paint.
3.4 TEMPORARY WIRING
A. As soon as practicable, install temporary wiring and lighting throughout the building addition. There
shall be one pigtail lamp holder for each [600] square feet of floor space or fraction thereof and in
addition install a plug receptacle for each room having at least [200] square feet of space. There shall
be one light in each room of [50] square feet or larger. Each pigtail outlet shall be equipped with a
[100] watt lamp and replacement made immediately upon burnout or theft. Locate lights, as per
above, on [25] feet center; install a temporary panelboard with not more than eight outlets, lights or
receptacles on a circuit. Temporary wire shall consist of plastic type non-metallic type sheathed
cable having a ground wire to which all the receptacle ground poles shall be connected. Receptacles
shall have "ground-fault" protection.
3.5 WORK IN CONNECTION WITH MOTORS
A. Check rotation and connect for proper rotation. Check overload heater element furnished with
starters against nameplate rating or motor and code, call attention to improper sizes to mechanical
contractor and architect. Connect all motors with short length of flexible conduit. Connect all pump
motors with "UA" type flexible conduit as manufactured by American Brass Co. Use proper type

SECTION 260000
connector with the type conduit. Connect all motors and controls completely, neatly, orderly, and
properly tagged to proper operation of system involved.
3.6 WORK IN CONNECTION WITH THE MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish and install all conduit and wiring necessary for the power supply of plumbing and heating,
ventilating and air conditioning equipment. All magnetic starters, control device, and multi-speed
switches will be furnished by Division 23 (Mechanical), and they shall be installed as a part of
Division 26, (Electrical). Furnish and install disconnect switches and [120] volt manual motor starters
for HVAC and plumbing equipment where indicated on drawings and as required by code. Refer to
the plumbing, heating, and air conditioning drawings and specifications.
3.7 SERVICE TO EQUIPMENT
A. Check service required by equipment prior to making final connections. Call differences to attention
of Architect. Check equipment for proper protective devices and safety devices to allow proper
operation of equipment and prevent burnout. Assist Owner in initial operation of equipment and
make necessary adjustment for proper operation.
3.8 INITIAL OPERATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Give all equipment furnished in the contract an operational test prior to final acceptance. Assist the
Owner in the initial operation when the owner operates the building and equipment. Instruct the
owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of all the equipment furnished under this
3.9 PROTECTION OF ROOF
A. Coordinate electrical work with roofing work in regard to any electrical items which may pierce or
otherwise affect the roof. Hold consultation well in advance of the installation of the final roofing
and allow sufficient time for the roofing work to be prepared for the electrical work.
B. Arrange for any cutting or repairing to roofing which might already be installed when an electrical
installation is made. See roofing specification for roofing with relation to work of other trades
piercing the roof. If necessary, consultation is not held, any roof repairs necessitated by the electrical
installation shall come under the scope of the work under this section.
3.10 FIRE-RATED PENETRATIONS
A. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls and floors, the space between the penetration item and the
fire barrier wall shall be properly protected. The space adjoining the conduit penetration shall be
filled with a material capable of maintaining the fire rating of the fire barrier, or it shall be protected
by an approved device designed for this specific purpose. Where penetrating sleeves are used, the
sleeves shall be solidly set in this fire barrier wall, and the space between the conduit and the sleeve
shall be filled with a material capable of maintaining the fire resistance of the fire-rated wall.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 260000
SECTION 260300 - SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide supports for raceway systems as described hereinafter.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Products shall be as set forth elsewhere in these specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Conduit shall be supported in a method and at a spacing as approved by the NEC, except as described
herein.
B. Conduit shall be supported by approved pipe straps or clamps.

1. Conduit installed on the interior of exterior building walls shall be spaced off the wall surface a
minimum of [1/4] inch using “clamp backs” or strut.
2. Pipe straps or clamps shall be secured by means of:
a. Toggle bolts on hollow masonry.
b. Metal expansion shields and machine screws, or standard preset inserts on concrete or
solid masonry.
c. Machine screws or bolts on metal surfaces.
d. Wood screws on wood construction.
END OF SECTION
SUPPORTING DEVICES PAGE 1 OF 1

SECTION 260300
SECTION 260519 - 600 VOLT CONDUCTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install a complete system of conductors for branch wiring and feeder wiring as shown on
drawings and as called for hereinafter.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. The minimum size of conductor for power, lighting, and other wiring shall be No. [12] AWG unless
specified otherwise. All conductors No. [10] and smaller shall be solid. All conductors No. [8] and
larger shall be stranded.
B. Conductors shall be copper. Conductor insulation shall be "THHN/THWN".
C. Metal clad (MC) cable shall be permitted for final connection to indoor lay-in lighting fixtures with
lengths not to exceed [6] feet [0] inch for each fixture connection. Otherwise, the use of MC cable
shall not be permitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Color coded conductors shall be used throughout in conformance with the National Electrical Code.
Use pressure-type connectors. For #[6] AWG and smaller use "Scotch-lock" connectors. For sizes
#[4] AWG and larger, use Burndy "Versi-taps" or Thomas & Betts "Lock-tite" connectors.
PHASE 208/120v. 480/277v.
A Black Brown
B Red Orange
C Blue Yellow
Neutral White Natural Gray
Ground Green Green
END OF SECTION
VOLT CONDUCTORS PAGE 1 OF 1

SECTION 260519
SECTION 260526 - ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical feeders to new building shall be taken underground at 480/277-volts, [3] phase, [4] wire,
wye, from overall site power distribution system. Refer to Civil drawings for tie-in requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall be as specified elsewhere in these specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. At each building, provide two [3/4] x [10] feet – [0] inch long driven copper weld grounds. From
these ground rods, extend a bare code sized copper grounding conductor and bond to ground bus in
respective building main panel. Neutral bar in main panel shall be isolated from ground bus/metal
panel enclosure. Bonding connections at ground rods shall be by “Cadweld” process. Locate ground
rods minimum [15] feet [0] inch apart from each other. Provide grounding bushings on all conduits
departing main panel. Ground by direction connection all interior piping systems. Ground “rebar” in
building footing in accordance with National Electrical Code. Ground main metallic cold water pipe
where it enters building to main electrical service ground. Ground main communications service
equipment to main electrical service ground in accordance with NEC requirements.
B. Provide a separate code-sized insulated grounding conductor in all feeder and branch circuit conduit
runs. Separate grounding conductor is generally not indicated on electrical drawings but shall be
required.
C. Ground equipment and lighting fixtures in accordance with the Code.
D. Ground dry-type transformers in accordance with NEC requirements. Refer to detail on drawings for
additional information.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND GROUNDING PAGE 1 OF 1

SECTION 260526
SECTION 260533 - CONDUIT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install conduit runs for the wiring as illustrated on the drawings and called for
hereinafter.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Conduit shall be electro-galvanized or sheradized steel. Stamp each length with name and trademark
of manufacturer and stamp of approval of National Board of Fire Underwriters.
B. Insulated bushings shall be used on rigid conduit one inch and larger. EMT to have "insulated throat"
connectors.
C. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for final connections for all motors, transformers, unit heaters,
and other permanently connected equipment. Maximum length of flexible conduit shall be [24] inch.
The flexible conduit shall be constructed of hot-dipped galvanized, interlocked spirally wound steel
strip. All connectors shall be galvanized and shall be listed for connection to the conduit and boxes.
Provide a ground conductor in each length of flexible conduit. Flexible conduit used in mechanical
rooms, kitchen areas, and damp or wet locations shall be liquid tight. Other than the uses listed
above, the use of flexible conduit will not be permitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Exterior underground conduit runs hall be run in Schedule [40] PVC conduit. Underground conduits
in or below concrete floor slab inside building shall also be permitted to be installed in Schedule [40]
PVC conduit in “slab on grade” applications. Utilize galvanized rigid steel elbows where conduits
turn up through concrete slab. No Schedule [40] PVC conduit shall be permitted above floor level
inside building.
B. Galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be utilized where exposed on the exterior of the building.
C. Electric-metallic tubing (EMT) shall be used elsewhere inside the building for all overhead runs.
D. Protect threads during storage. Take every precaution to prevent entry of water and foreign matter in
conduit during construction. Swab trapped runs prior to pulling wire. Install factory conduit caps on
conduit stubs during construction.
E. Cut conduit square, ream smooth, thread properly and full. Paint job cut male threads with
conductive paint prior to making up a joint.
F. Equip all conduit terminated in other than threaded hubs with double locknuts, "Bondnut" type,
drawn up tight. Install bushing.
CONDUIT PAGE 1 OF 2
SECTION 260533
G. Installation:
1. Conduit shall be installed concealed within the building. Exceptions shall be in mechanical and
electrical rooms, etc.
2. Embed all conduit in the walls where runs are required at those locations.
3. Where dropped ceilings occur conduit shall be concealed above the ceiling and well clear of the
ceiling framing so as to allow ceiling tile removal. Support conduit at suitable intervals by
hangers, ties, or U.L. listed clamps.
H. Where exposed:
1. Organize the runs into groups and coordinate with other trades to avoid interference.
2. Arrangement shall be neat and orderly with runs parallel to structural elements with [90] degree
bends and pullbox turns only. No diagonal runs will be allowed.
3. Supports shall be "Unistrut" No. P-1000 with suitable clamps with Unistrut supported from the
roof structures. Use more than one tier or level of Unistrut where more than [8] conduit is one
group. Collect conduit runs into as few groups as practical.
4. The routing of all runs shall be subject to the approval of the architect.
5. Supports shall be not more than; [6] feet [6] inch o.c.
END OF SECTION
CONDUIT PAGE 2 OF 2
SECTION 260533
SECTION 260534 - BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish outlet boxes for lighting fixtures, wall receptacles, switches, and other boxes as required.
Also, pull boxes and junction boxes shall be furnished as required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CEILING BOXES
A. Ceiling outlet boxes shall be [4] inch octagon and [2-1/8] inch deep. Provide extension rings where
additional volume is required. All ceiling outlet boxes shall have fixture stud of no-bolt, self-locking
type installed if required to hang fixture specified at that outlet.
B. Where ceiling outlets occur in reinforced concrete, provide rings with removable back plate and
fixture stud specifically designed for this purpose.
2.2 WALL BOXES
A. Light wall switch boxes shall be a minimum size of [4] inch high by [2-1/8] inch wide by [2-1/8] inch
deep. Where more than one gang occurs, [4] inch square boxes or additional larger boxes shall be
used with device ring attached. Boxes in masonry shall be [4] inch high and [2-1/2] inch deep with
the number of gangs necessary. An example of the masonry box shall be Raco Co. No. 692 for [3]
gang, No. 693 for [4] gang, etc.
B. Plug receptacle boxes and telephone boxes shall be [4] inch square by [2-1/8] inch deep with a [4]
inch square device cover, either one or two-gang as required. Covers shall be square cut, with a
depth to accommodate the wall finish material with a minimum raised cut of [1/2] inch.
C. Provide special sized boxes where called for on the drawings.
2.3 MANUFACTURER
A. Boxes and fittings shall be Appleton, Steel City, Raco, Efcor, Crouse-Hinds, or equal.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Pull and junction boxes shall be galvanized or sherardized sheet metal or code thickness with lapped
and welded joints and with [3/4] inch flange. They shall be rigidly supported on ceiling or wall.
Conduit runs entering a box shall not be considered as adequate support.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install pull and/or junction boxes in conduit lines wherever necessary to avoid excessive length of
runs or number of bends in run. No run shall exceed 100 feet without a pull box.
B. Pull and junction boxes shall be accessible and sized in accordance with provisions of Article No.
370-18 of latest edition of National Electrical Code.
BOXES PAGE 1 OF 2
SECTION 260534
C. Pull and junction boxes shall be installed so that cover shall be accessible at all times.
END OF SECTION
BOXES PAGE 2 OF 2
SECTION 260534
SECTION 260535 - COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL SPACES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide communications terminal spaces consisting of painted marine grade plywood bolted to wall
in Telecommunications Room.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Communications terminal spaces shall consist of [3/4] inch marine plywood bolted to all walls where
power is shown on perimeter walls of Server/Communications Room with plywood top [6] feet
above floor and the bottom [24] inch above floor. Provide Unistrut channel above and below the
plywood to secure inbound and outbound conduit. Conduit at that location shall be fitted with
bushings. Conduit shall be terminated in a horizontal position within [6] inch of the terminal
mounting board. Paint plywood with two coats of fire resistant paint, Benjamin Moore M59-220 or
equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. From each “CTS” location, provide a #[3] / [0] AWG copper grounding conductor extended to main
electrical service ground.
END OF SECTION
COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL SPACES PAGE 1 OF 1

SECTION 260535
SECTION 260553 - EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide identification for electrical equipment as set forth hereinafter.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Products shall be as set forth in other sections of specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and install engraved, laminated phenolic nameplates for all safety switches, panelboards, and
other electrical equipment supplied for the project for identification of equipment, controlled, served,
phase, voltage, etc. Nameplates shall be securely attached to equipment with self-tapping, stainless
steel screws and shall identify equipment controlled, attached, etc. Letters shall be approximately
[1/2] inch high, minimum. Embossed, self-adhesive plastic tape is not acceptable for marking
equipment. Nameplate material colors shall be:
B. All empty conduit runs in conduit with conductors for future use shall be identified for use and shall
indicate where they terminate. Identification shall be tags, string, or wire attached to conduit or
outlet.
C. All outlet boxes, junction boxes, and pull boxes shall have their covers and exterior visible surfaces
painted with colors painted to match the surface color scheme outlined above. This includes covers
on boxes above lift-out and other type accessible ceilings.
END OF SECTION
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PAGE 1 OF 1

SECTION 260553
SECTION 260923 - OCCUPANCY SENSORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install occupancy sensors and related equipment for control of lighting as indicated on
drawings and as called for hereinafter.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. See details on drawings for occupancy sensor requirements. All occupancy sensors shall be by
Lutron or equal substitute product by Sensor Switch, Watt Stopper, Hubbell, or Leviton. Proposed
equal products by other manufacturers will be acceptable for use, provided that they meet all
requirements of specified equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to wiring diagrams on drawings for wiring requirements of occupancy sensors. Occupancy
sensor installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations,
END OF SECTION
OCCUPANCY SENSORS PAGE 1 OF 1

SECTION 260923
SECTION 262213 - DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install dry-type transformers to convert from [480] volts to 120/208-volts as called for on
the drawings and specified hereinafter.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. The transformers will be similar and equal to Square D Company having two [2-1/2] percent full
capacity primary taps above rated voltage two below rated voltage. Transformers shall be rated in
KVA as called for on the drawings. Transformers shall be energy efficient, with maximum
temperature rise of [115] degrees C. above a [40] degree C. ambient.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Ground the secondary neutrals and the housings.
B. See detail on drawings.
END OF SECTION
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS PAGE 1 OF 1

SECTION 262213
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install panelboards with circuit breaker equipment as indicated on drawings and specified
hereinafter.
B. Shop drawings shall be submitted for approval. Shop drawings shall be specific indicating busing,
breaker dimensions, gutter dimension, number size, trip, and interrupting capacity of all circuits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Branch circuit panelboards shall be of the circuit breaker, dead-front safety type equal to Square D
types "NQ" or “NF” with contents as indicated on panel scheduled, shall bear approved device label
of UL, and shall meet all applicable requirements of National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
Panelboards shall be the product of either Square D Company, Siemens, General Electric, or Eaton.
B. Bus shall be copper.
C. Number of branch circuits, their rating, number of poles arrangements, etc., are indicated on
drawings.
D. Panelboards shall have lugs (both main lugs and branch circuit lugs) suitable and UL approved for
both aluminum and copper conductors. Such panelboards shall have their breakers labeled and
approved by UL.
E. Provide neutral bars for all [4] wire system feeders. Isolate such neutral bars from the panel box.
F. Panels shall have a separate "ground bar" installed with lugs or connectors on bar. Such bar shall be
grounded to panel box.
G. Bus bars shall be of sequence-phase type arranged for 120/208-volts or 480/277-volts, [3] phase, [4]
wire mains as indicated on drawings. All circuits shown as common neutral shall be installed in
accordance with National Electrical Code.
H. Balance all circuits in a panel to achieve not more than [10] percent unbalanced neutral current in
panel feeder. Panel circuit numbering shall be revised as necessary and arranged to facilitate above.
I. Multiple breakers shall have common trip. Trip indication shall be as indicated by breaker handle
moving to a position other than ON or OFF. Equip doors on panels with chrome-plated lock and a
catch with two keys supplied for each lock, concealed hinges and attachment means. Panelboards
shall be flush or surface mounted as required.
J. Furnish six handle "lock-on" devices for each panel for installation on circuits as directed by Owner
to prevent unauthorized personnel from turning off circuits to controls, unit heaters, clocks, night
lights, etc. Any spare lock-ons remaining shall be turned over to Owner.
PANELBOARDS PAGE 1 OF 2
SECTION 262416
K. Provide typed or printed directory cards under plastic on doors. Submit detailed drawings for
approval showing size of cabinets, trim, detail for busing, locks, method of numbering, voltage,
phase, etc., and obtain approval from Architect before manufacture is commenced.
L. Distribution or power panels shall be similar and equal to Square D I-line type or Siemens type CDP
circuit breaker distribution panelboard. Main distribution panel shall have molded case main circuit
breaker.
M. Circuit breakers shall be fully rated and temperature rated for a [40] degrees C. ambient. All
panelboards shall have lugs (both main lugs and branch circuit lugs) suitable and UL approved for
aluminum and copper conductors. Such panelboards shall have their breakers labeled and approved
by UL.
N. Breakers shall be of thermal magnetic type, sized and numbered as indicated on schedule on
drawings, and shall be quick-make, with trip indication shown by a handle position other than ON or
OFF with trip on all multipole breakers.
O. Minimum short circuit interrupting capacity shall be as indicated on panel schedule.
P. Panelboard fronts shall have concealed hinges and attachment bolts, be complete with door cylinder
lock and catch, all keyed alike. Fronts shall have adjusting indicating trim clamps and Bakelite
nameplates engraved to indicate device, panel, or motor being served. Spare breakers and spaces
only shall have nameplates with no engraving. Secure all nameplates to panelboard trim with two
round head sheet metal screws.
Q. Panelboards shall be UL approved. Panelboard main sizes, branch circuit rating, and mounting shall
be as indicated on plans. Shop drawings shall be submitted for approval. Shop drawings shall be
specific showing busing, breaker dimensions, gutter dimensions, spare space dimensions, number,
size, trip, and interrupting capacity on all circuits. Standard factory work sheets will not be
acceptable as shop drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Unless directed otherwise, panelboards shall be mounted to have the top [6] feet clear above finished
floor.
B. The directories within each panelboard shall be properly filled out, so as to have a comprehensive
understanding of the loads to which each circuit breaker is connected. They shall be filled out by use
of a typewriter.
C. Panelboards shall be painted to match adjacent walls and labeled inside with a suitable engraved,
laminated plastic plate to identify the panelboard designation and its voltage.
END OF SECTION
PANELBOARDS PAGE 2 OF 2
SECTION 262416
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install wall switches, plug receptacles, etc., as specified hereafter and shown on the
drawings. Devices offered as a substitute to those specified will be carefully checked to see that
quality such as grounding continuity, retention force for insertion devices, are equal to those
specified.
B. Special colors may be required by the architect and request for color variation must be made well in
advance of product procurement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Duplex plug receptacles shall be tamper resistant type unless not required by code, in which case
specification grade devices shall be utilized. All devices shall have a minimum rating of [20]
amperes for the voltage service applied. Provide ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) type devices
where indicated on drawings. Provide device leveler for each duplex receptacle, Erico No. RLC.
B. Wall switches shall be [20] amperes, minimum capacity and single pole, [3] way or [4] way as
required. Other variations of the devices shall be as called for on the drawings. Where pilot lights
are required, they shall be separately ganged.
C. Coverplates: Use stainless steel coverplates.
D. Other type devices as called for on the drawings shall be of similar grade, rating as noted on
drawings.
E. Approved manufacturers: Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, Leviton, G.E. Eagle, Bryant, Arrow Hart.
F. Device color shall be ivory, white, or gray as directed by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of devices shall be in accord with the manufacturer's recommendations. Grounding

devices such as jumper straps between the device grounding pole and the junction box, or the
connection of a grounding conductor will be required at each plug receptacle. Where metal conduit
serves the outlet box, a device using a "UL" listed grounding arrangement making use of the contact
between the yoke and the device box is approved for use.
END OF SECTION
WIRING DEVICES PAGE 1 OF 1

SECTION 262726
SECTION 262816 - SAFETY SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install fuse safety switches and/or disconnect switches as called for on the drawings, and
as may be otherwise required by the Codes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Safety switches shall be heavy-duty, horsepower rated, quick-make, quick-break with arc shields with
enclosed construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install where called for on the drawings and/or as required by the National Electrical Code.
B. Where disconnect or safety switches are called for away from walls, a suitable support shall be
provided to allow the switch to be in a position of approximately [4-1/2] feet above floor. Where
necessary, provide a steel frame attached to the floor or overhead structural system or both. Switches
may be mounted on equipment where specific approval is realized from the supplier of the
equipment, so as not to interfere with normal and ready maintenance of this equipment.
END OF SECTION
SAFETY SWITCHES PAGE 1 OF 1

SECTION 262816
SECTION 262913 - MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install manual motor starters for 120-volt fractional horsepower loads as shown on
drawings and called for hereinafter.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Manual motor starters shall be equipped with melting alloy type thermal overload relay. Manual
motor starters shall be provided with pilot lights. Unit shall be similar and equal to Square D
Company 2510 Series, catalog No. FF-1P.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Manual motor starters shall be installed at same height as regular wall switch. Install in accordance
with manufacturer’s recommendations.
END OF SECTION
MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS PAGE 1 OF 1

SECTION 262913
SECTION 264313 - SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section describes the materials and installation requirements for Surge Protection Devices
(SPD’s) formally known as Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors (TVSS) as shown on the drawings
and herein specified at main and branch circuit distribution panels.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 and C62.45-1992.
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association, NEMA LS-1, Revision 2007.
C. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 70.
D. Underwriters' Laboratories UL 1449 and 1283.
1.3 MANUFACTURER’S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturers shall be ISO9000 certified.
B. Manufacturers shall have been engaged in the design and manufacturing of surge protection devices
for at least ten [10] years.
C. The following manufacturers will be approved, provided they meet all specifications:
1. ERICO Products Inc. 34600 Solon Road, Solon OH 44139.
2. Equal products by Leviton, Innovations Technology, APT, and Wiremold Sentrex.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer shall provide a minimum of a five [5] year warranty from the date of shipment
against failure when installed in compliance with national and local electrical codes; and per the
manufacturer’s installation, operation and maintenance manuals. Products with warranties that
exclude temporary over voltage conditions, abnormally high number of surges, direct or indirect
lighting strikes shall not be used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Surge Protection Device shall be listed to UL 1449 Edition 3 as a SPD Type [1] or SPD Type [2]
Product.
B. The UL 1449 Edition 3 Nominal Discharge Current (In) for the Surge Protection Device shall be [20]
kA. A Surge Protection Device with a UL 1449 Edition 3 Nominal Discharge Current listing of
[3] kA, [5] kA, or [10] kA will not be accepted.
C. MCOV shall be greater than [115]% of the nominal operating voltage.
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES PAGE 1 OF 3

SECTION 264313
D. The Surge Protection Device shall have a stand-off voltage rating twice the nominal voltage. The
Surge Protection Device shall be able to withstand Temporary Over Voltage Conditions twice the
nominal voltage for an indefinite period of time, without damage, removing components from the
circuit, or interrupting panel.
E. The Surge Protection Device shall protect all modes via L-N, L-G and N-G modes of protection. For
Delta power systems L-L and L-G protection modes shall be provided, with the ability to configure L-
G to L-L for ungrounded systems.
F. Independent certification shall be provided proving that the Surge Protection Device meets the
required 8/20µs per phase single shot surge rating, without failure of any fusing, disconnects or surge
module. Bypassing of any fusing/disconnects for purpose of this test is not acceptable.
G. Each mode of the Surge Protection Device shall be rated to exceed the life cycle testing of ANSI/IEEE
C62.45 by withstand of at least [200] operations at 10kA 8/20µs and at least [100] operation at [20]
kA without failure.
H. The Surge Protection Device shall have a Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) of [200] kAIC, per UL
1449 Edition 3.
I. The Surge Protection Device shall be capable of withstanding multiple temporary over-voltage per UL
1449 Ed 2 Section 36 “Overvoltage Test”, & 37 “Abnormal Overvoltage Tests” without failure or
need to reset or replace modules/fuses.
J. Each MOV shall be protected with individual thermal disconnect devices bonded directly to the MOV
substrate for rapid and automatic disconnection of any MOV exhibiting excessive temperature. The
following are not acceptable:
1. Surge Protection Devices without thermal fuses/disconnects.
2. Surge Protection Devices with shared thermal devices that disconnect more than one MOV.
K. For safety, the Surge Protection Device shall have a maximum continuous operating voltage
(MCOV) of at least:
Power System MCOV (L-N)

Single phase (2W+G) 220-240V 310V
Three phase (4W+G) 120/208 WYE 170V
Three phase (4W+G) 277/480 WYE 310V
L. Enclosure shall:
1. Feature all metal NEMA 4 enclosure suitable for outdoor usage.

2. The Surge Protection Device depth shall be less than [3-1/2] inch to allow mounting within wall
cavity with optional flush mount kit.
3. The Surge Protection Device width shall be less than [5] inch to enable installation between
adjacent electrical enclosures.
2.2 Main Service Panels
A. Surge Protection Devices shall be installed at all AC service entrances of each building.
B. The Surge Protection Device shall incorporate 200kA 8/20µs MOV protection per phase.

SECTION 264313
C. The TVSS shall have the following status indications:
1. Each individual mode of protection shall be separately monitored and displayed via a
mechanical flag status indication for each mode.
2. A LED status indication per phase.
3. An overall status LED
4. Form-C alarm contacts for remote alarming of faults
5. Audible Alarm.
6. A five [5] digit surge counter that cannot be reset.
D. The Surge Protection Device shall have a built-in disconnect that allows fusing and surge
components to be removed without interrupting power, or disconnecting hard wire connections.
E. The following Voltage Protection Ratings (VPR) shall not be exceeded by the Surge Protection
Device.
Volt Protection Rating

Impulse standard 120/240V 277/480V
(no AC applied) 120/208V
ANSI/IEEE C62.41 600V 1000V
Cat B3 3kA
ANSI/UL 1449 Edition 1200V 1800V
3 20 kA Nominal
Discharge Current
Testing
F. At least -40dB @100 kHz EMI/RFI shall be provided L-N (L-L for Delta units). To avoid unsafe
ground leakage current, no filtering shall connect to ground.
G. ERICO, CRITEC TDX200 Modular Series or similar meeting these specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install Surge Protection Devices in full accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and
comply with all applicable codes.
B. Surge Protection Devices with a UL 1449 Edition 3, Listing as a SPD Type [2] shall have a [30] amp
circuit breaker or other size as recommended by the manufacturer’s installation manuals. This
independent circuit breaker will serve as a means of a disconnect for servicing the Surge Protection
Device with the protected panel remaining energized.
C. Surge Protection Devices with a UL 1449 Edition 3 Listing as a SPD Type [1], and an integrated
disconnect can be connected directly to the buss without a designated circuit breaker.
D. The Surge Protection Device shall be installed with the shortest possible leads, or conductor length,
minimum No. [8] AWG.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 264313
SECTION 265100 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.
2. Include data on features, accessories and finishes.
3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires.
4. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data.
5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.
a. Manufacturer’s Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer’s laboratory
with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation
Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.
2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components and location and size of each field
connection.
3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps, use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation and
maintenance manuals. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturer’s
codes.
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer’s

laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency,

with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by
OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products, and
complying with the applicable IES testing standards.
C. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.
A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before
shipping.
LED INTERIOR LIGHTING PAGE 1 OF 4

SECTION 265100
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Warranty Period: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7. The term “withstand” means “the luminaire will remain in place without
separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified.”
2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class
and division of hazard by an NRTL.
C. Recessed fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4.
D. CRI of 80 CCT of [3500] K.
E. Rated lamp life of [50,000] hours or more.
F. Where dimming is indicated, lamps dimmable from [100] percent to [0] percent of maximum light
output.
G. Internal driver.
H. Nominal Operating Voltage: As indicated.
I. Lens Thickness: At least [0.125] inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
J. Housings:
1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink.
2. Finish as indicated.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Metal Parts:
1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.
3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating
conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors,
frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when
secured in operating positions.

SECTION 265100
C. Diffusers and Globes:
1. Prismatic acrylic clear, UV-stabilized acrylic.
2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic with high resistance to yellowing
and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
3. Lens Thickness: At least [0.125] inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
D. Housings: Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink. Finish as indicated.
E. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels where
they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when
lamps are in place. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:
1. “USE ONLY” and include specific lamp type.
2. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating.
3. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.
2.4 METAL FINISHES
A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and
are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.5 LUMINAIRE FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPOENTS
A. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class [3], soft temper, zinc coated steel, [12] gage.
B. Rod Hangers: [3/16] inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections
before fixture installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install lamps in each luminaire.
D. Supports:
1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.
2. Able to maintain luminaire positions after cleaning and relamping.
3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall.
4. Luminaire mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of [100] percent
of luminaire weight and vertical force of [400] percent of luminaire weight.

SECTION 265100
E. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support:
1. Secured to outlet box.
2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around circumference of
luminaire.
3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.
F. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Attached to structural members in walls.
2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.
G. Ceiling-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Ceiling mount with two [5/32] inch diameter aircraft cable supports adjustable to [120] inches
in length.
2. Ceiling mount with two-point pendant mount with [5/32] inch diameter aircraft cable supports
adjustable to [120] inches in length.
H. Suspended Luminaire Support

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than [48] inches, brace to limit swinging. Stem-Mounted,
Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with approved outlet box
and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet
box vertically to building structure using approved devices.
2. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point (unless indicated
otherwise) and wire support for suspension for each unit length of luminaire classis, including
one at each end.
3. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendent luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to
building structure.
I. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:
1. Secure to any required outlet box.
2. Secure luminaire to the luminaire opening using approved fasteners in a minimum of four
locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.
3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and building
structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.
J. Comply with requirements in Sections 16301 and 16302 for wiring connections.
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical
circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.
2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify
transfer from normal power to emergency power and retransfer to normal.
B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 265100
SECTION 265400 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Exterior solid-state luminaires that are designed for and exclusively used LED
lamp technology. Luminaire supports.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.
2. Include data on features, accessories and finishes.
3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires.
4. Lamps, include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data.
5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.
a. Manufacturer’s Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer’s laboratory
with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation
Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
6. Wiring diagrams for power, control, and signal wiring.
7. Means of attaching luminaires to supports and indication that the attachments is suitable for
components involved.
B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.
2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components and location and size of each field
connection.
3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps, use same designations indicated on Drawings.
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer’s

laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency,

with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by
OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products, and
complying with the applicable IES testing standards.
A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before
shipping.
LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING PAGE 1 OF 5

SECTION 265400
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Structural failures, including luminaire support components.
2. Faulty operation of luminaires and accessories.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
B. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7. Luminaires and lamps shall be labeled vibration and shock resistant. The
term “withstand” means “the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when
subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully operational during and after
the seismic event.”
2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class
and division of hazard by an NRTL.
C. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598 and listed for wet location.
D. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61.
E. CRI of [80], CCT of [4100] K.
F. Rated lamp life of [50,000] hours or more.
G. Where indicated, lamps dimmable from [100] percent to [0] percent of maximum light output.
H. Internal driver.
I. Nominal Operating Voltage: As indicated on drawings.
J. In-line Fusing: Separate in-line fuse for each luminaire.
K. Lamp Rating: Lamp marked for outdoor use and in enclosed locations.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
B. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum. Form and support to prevent warping and
sagging.

SECTION 265400
C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating
conditions, and designed to permit re-lamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors,
frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during re-lamping and when
secured in operating positions. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses.
D. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Diffusers: [100] percent virgin acrylic plastic with high resistance to yellowing and
other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
2. Lens Thickness: At least [0.125] inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
E. Lens and Refractor Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses
and refractors in luminaire doors.
F. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: [85] percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: [83] percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: [75] percent.
G. Housings: Rigidly-formed, weather- and light-tight enclosure that will not warp, sag, or deform in
use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.
H. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels where
they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when
lamps are in place. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:
1. “USE ONLY” and include specific lamp type.
2. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating.
3. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Variations in Finishes: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in finishes
of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they
can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
B. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer’s standard paint applied to factory-assembled and tested luminaire
before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials.
C. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes
Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations for applying and designating
finishes.
1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying
with AA-M20 requirements; and seal aluminum surfaces with clean, hard-coat wax.
3. Class [I], Clear-Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: Medium satin; Chemical
Finish: Etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class [I], clear coating [0.018]
mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
4. Class [II], Color-Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: Medium satin;
Chemical Finish: Etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class [II], integrally
color or electrolytically deposited color coating [0.018] mm or thicker), complying with
AAMA 611.
D. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

SECTION 265400
1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, to remove dirt, oil, grease, and
other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth,
even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with
SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1 or SSPC-SP 8.
2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer’s standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and
two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.
a. Color: As selected by architect from manufacturer’s standard catalog of colors.
2.5 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 16102 “Supporting Devices” for channel and angle iron
supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections
before fixture installation.
C. Examine walls, roofs, and canopy ceilings and overhang ceilings for suitable conditions where
luminaires will be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and
approved by manufacturer.
C. Install lamps in each luminaire.
D. Fasten luminaire to structural support.
E. Supports:
1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.
2. Able to maintain luminaire positions after cleaning and re-lamping.
3. Support luminaires without causing deflection of finished surface.
4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of [100] percent
of luminaire weight and vertical force of [400] percent of luminaire weight.
F. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support: Attached to structural members in walls.
G. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways. Conceal raceways and cables.
H. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with finished grade unless otherwise indicated.
I. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires with other construction.

SECTION 265400
J. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric device
to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources favoring a north orientation.
A. Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components.
B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical
circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.
2. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.
C. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.
D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance
with standards.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 265400
SECTION 31 0519.13
GEOTEXTILES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the installation of separation/stabilization fabric as shown on the Drawings
and as specified herein.
A. The latest edition of the following standards, as referenced herein, shall be applicable.
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit Manufacturer's material specifications, product literature and installation
instructions.
A. Delivery:
1. Deliver sufficient materials to the site to prevent interruption of the work.
2. All materials shall be inspected by Contractor upon delivery. Contractor shall notify
Engineer of any damage. Products received at the site torn, with holes, deteriorated, or
otherwise damaged will not be approved and shall be returned and replaced at no expense
to the Owner.
B. Storage:
1. All material shall be stored in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
and as approved by the Engineer.
2. Do not store products directly on ground. Ship and store geotextile with suitable wrapping
for protection against moisture and ultraviolet exposure. Store geotextile in way that
protects it from elements, if stored outdoors, elevate, and protect geotextile with waterproof
cover.
C. Handling:
1. All material shall be handled in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
and as approved by the Engineer.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 WOVEN GEOTEXTILE
A. Stabilization Fabric: To be used beneath roadways and walks.
B. Composed of polymeric yarn interlaced to form a planar structure with uniform weave pattern.
C. Calendared or finished so yarns will retain their relative position with respect to each other.
TWA #019-007.1 31 0519.13-1 Geotextiles

D. Polymeric Yarn: Long-chain synthetic polymers (polyester or polypropylene) with stabilizer or
inhibitors added to make filament resistant to deterioration due to heat and ultraviolet light
exposure.
E. Sheet Edges: Selvaged or finished to prevent outer material from separating from sheet.
F. Unseamed Sheet Width: Minimum 12 feet.
G. Physical Properties: Conform to requirements noted below:
PROPERTY DESIGN VALUE TEST METHOD

Tensile Strength 315 pounds ASTM D4632
Elongation 12 percent ASTM D4632
Trapezoidal Tear 113 pounds ASTM D4533
CBR Puncture Strength 900 pounds ASTM D6241
A.O.S. 40 (US Sieve) ASTM D4751
Permittivity .05 sec-1 ASTM D4491
2.2 NONWOVEN GEOTEXTILE
A. Separation/Filtration Fabric: To be used in drainage ditches, haybale installation, culvert

outfall installations, rip-rap outfall installations, and cover material separation
B. Pervious sheet of polyester, polypropylene, or polyethylene fabricated into stable network of

fibers that retain their relative position with respect to each other. Nonwoven geotextile shall
be composed of continuous or discontinuous (staple) fibers held together through needle-
punching, spun-bonding, thermal-bonding, or resin-bonding.
C. Geotextile Edges; selvaged or otherwise finished to prevent outer material from pulling away
from geotextile.
D. Unseamed Sheet Width: Minimum 12 feet.
E. Physical Properties: Conform to the requirements noted below:
PROPERTY DESIGN VALUE TEST METHOD

Tensile Strength 160 pounds ASTM D4632
Elongation 50 percent ASTM D4632
Trapezoidal Tear 60 pounds ASTM D4533
CBR Puncture Strength 400 pounds ASTM D6241
A.O.S. 70 (US Sieve) ASTM D4751
Permittivity 1.4 sec-1 ASTM D4491
3.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation and seaming of geotextile fabric in
accordance with the specifications and the manufacturer's recommendations, as approved by
the Engineer.
TWA #019-007.1 31 0519.13-2 Geotextiles

3.2 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. Surfaces to be covered with geotextile fabric shall be smooth and free of rocks, sticks, roots,
sharp objects, and all debris that may damage the fabric. The surface to be covered shall be
firm and unyielding, with no sudden changes or breaks in grade. There shall be no standing
water or excessive moisture on the surface when the fabric is placed.
B. The compacted subgrade shall be maintained in a smooth, uniform, and compacted condition
during installation of the fabric.
3.3 GEOTEXTILE INSTALLATION
A. The fabric shall be cleaned of all debris or other materials that may negatively affect the fabric's
performance.
B. Mechanical equipment shall not be permitted to operate directly on the fabric unless authorized
to do so by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
C. Geotextile Placement:
1. Fabric shall be placed as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer on surfaces which have been prepared to conform with these Specifications and
found acceptable for fabric installation.
2. The fabric shall be placed as smooth and wrinkle-free as possible.
3. When installing geotextile in trenches, swales, ditches, etc., overlap geotextile in the
direction of flow.
4. All areas of fabric damaged during installation as determined by the Engineer shall be
repaired or replaced by the Contractor as specified at no additional cost to the Owner.
Should the fabric be damaged during any step of the installation, the damaged section
shall be repaired by covering it with a piece of fabric which extends at least 24 inches in all
directions beyond the damaged area. The fabric shall be secured by sewing or bonding as
approved by the Engineer.
5. At time of installation, fabric will be rejected if it has defects, ribs, holes, flaws,
deterioration, or damage incurred during manufacture, transportation, handling, or storage.
Damaged materials shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
6. Fabric shall be placed with long dimension down slope.
7. Fabric shall be protected at all times during construction from contamination by surface
run-off and any fabric so contaminated shall be removed and replaced with
uncontaminated fabric.
D. Seams and Overlaps of Geotextile:

1. All overlaps shall be a minimum of 18 inches (450 mm).
3.4 COVER MATERIALS OVER GEOTEXTILES
A. Granular materials shall be placed on geotextiles as shown on the Drawings. During

backdumping and spreading, a minimum depth of 6 inches of granular material shall be
maintained at all times between the fabric and wheels of trucks or spreading equipment. All
equipment used in spreading or traveling on the cover layer for any reason shall exert low
ground pressures and shall be approved by the manufacturer and Engineer. Dozer blades, etc.,
shall not make direct contact with the fabric; however, if tears occur in the fabric during the
spreading operation, the granular material shall be cleared from the fabric and the damaged
area repaired as previously described.
TWA #019-007.1 31 0519.13-3 Geotextiles

B. The granular material shall be spread in the direction of fabric overlap. Large fabric wrinkles
which may develop during the spreading operations shall be folded and flattened in the direction
of the spreading. Occasionally, large folds may reduce the fabric overlap width. Special care
shall be given to maintain proper overlap and fabric continuity.
C. All equipment spreading cover material or traveling on the cover layer shall avoid making sharp
turns, quick stops, or quick starts.
D. Fabric shall be covered as soon as possible after placement to minimize exposure to sunlight.
Fabric shall not be exposed for more than 5 days.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF SCRAP MATERIALS
A. On completion of installation, the Contractor shall legally dispose of all trash and scrap material
off-site or in a location approved by the Owner and Engineer, remove equipment used in
connection with the work herein, and shall leave the premises in a neat acceptable manner.
END OF SECTION
TWA #019-007.1 31 0519.13-4 Geotextiles

SECTION 31 2000
EARTH MOVING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the preparation of the site, protection, excavation, embankment, drainage,
dewatering, for site grading, as shown on the Drawings, and as herein specified.
B. The Contractor shall accept the site in the condition in which it exists at the time of the award of
the Contract.
C. All earthwork and excavation shall be considered unclassified.
D. The Engineer shall determine the suitability of materials that are to be used in the work and
should any materials encountered be unsatisfactory for the purpose intended, they shall be
removed from the site at the Contractor's expense.
A. Reference Standards:
1. The latest edition of the following standards, as referenced herein, shall be applicable.
a. TDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.
b. "Standard Specifications for Highway Materials and Methods of Sampling and
Testing, American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO)."
B. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements for soil erosion and sedimentation control,
and other requirements of governmental authorities having jurisdiction, including the State of
Tennessee.
C. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all costs in connection with an approved independent
testing facility to determine conformance of soils and aggregate with the specifications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples:
1. The Contractor shall furnish earth materials to the testing laboratory for analysis and
report, as directed by the Engineer, or as outlined in the specifications.
B. Test Results:
1. The testing laboratory shall submit written reports of all tests, investigations, and
recommendations to the Contractor and the Engineer.
1.4 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
A. Notify the Engineer of any unexpected subsurface condition.
B. Protection of Existing Utilities:

1. Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place,
provide adequate support and protection during earthwork operations, comply with OSHA
requirements.
TWA #019-007.1 31 2000-1 Earth Moving

2. Coordinate interruption and/or termination of utilities with the utility companies and the
Owner.
3. Provide a minimum of 48 hours’ notice to the Owner and receive written notice to proceed
before interrupting any utility.
4. Demolish and completely remove from the site any existing underground utilities
designated to be removed as shown on the Drawings.
5. Repair any damaged utilities as acceptable to the Engineer, at no additional cost to the
Owner.
C. Protection of Persons and Property:

1. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work, and post with warning lights.
2. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused
by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by
earthwork operations.
4. Perform excavation within drip-line of large trees to remain by hand, and protect the root
system from damage or dryout to the greatest extent possible. Maintain moist conditions
for root system and cover exposed roots with burlap. Paint root cuts of 1-inch diameter
and larger with emulsified asphalt tree paint.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Select Granular Material: Sound, durable, sand, gravel, stone or blends with these materials,
free from organic, frozen, or other deleterious materials, conforming to the requirements of
TDOT and meeting the following gradation requirements:
SIEVE PERCENT PASSING

2" 100
1/4" 30 - 65
No. 40 5 - 40
No. 200 0 - 10
B. Selected Fill: Sound, durable, sand, gravel, stone, or blends of these materials, free from
organic, frozen or other deleterious materials.
4" 100
No. 40 0 - 70
No. 200 0 - 10
1. Fines passing No. 200 shall be non-plastic (PI<35).

2. Particle size analysis shall show no gap grading.
3. Minimum Standard Proctor (ASTM D-698) dry unit weight of 90 pcf.
4. Each soil type should be submitted to engineer for evaluation.
3.1 PRECONSTRUCTION MATERIAL QUALIFICATION TESTING
A. A 100-pound minimum representative sample shall be obtained from each potential borrow
source. If different material gradations are known to exist in the pit, samples shall be obtained
TWA #019-007.1 31 2000-2 Earth Moving

for each material. Each sample shall be mixed thoroughly and reduced to test specimen size, in
accordance with AASHTO T87. The test shall be performed in the order shown. Failure to pass
any test is grounds for disqualification and shall lead to cessation of the test program for that
material.
1. Particle Size Analysis:
a. Method: ASTM D422.
b. Number of Tests: One (1) per potential source.
c. Acceptance Criteria: Gradation within specified limits.
2. Maximum Density Determination:
a. Method: ASTM D1557, Modified Proctor.
3. Re-establish gradation and maximum density of fill material if source is changed during
construction.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Establish required lines, levels, contours, and datum.
B. Maintain benchmarks and other elevation control points. Re-establish, if disturbed or destroyed,
at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Establish location and extent of utilities before commencement of grading operations.
3.3 EXCAVATION
A. Excavation shall consist, in general, of the excavation of whatever substance is encountered to

the lines, grades, and sections shown on the Drawings including excavation as necessary for
grading and other similar features. Excavation shall be considered unclassified.
B. All suitable materials removed in excavation shall be used in the construction of embankments,
subgrade, shoulders, slopes, and at such other places as directed. The Engineer shall be the
sole judge of what constitutes suitable material.
C. During construction, the grading operations shall be executed in such a manner that the
excavation will be well drained at all times. All grading shall be finished on neat, regular lines
conforming to the sections and contours shown on the Plans.
D. Removal of materials beyond the indicated subgrade elevations, without authorization by the
Engineer, shall be classified as unauthorized excavation and shall be performed at no additional
cost to the Owner.
E. Excavation shall be performed in proper sequence with all other associated operations.
F. Maintain the slopes of excavation in a safe condition until completion of the grading operation.
G. All excavation work shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer before proceeding with
construction.
H. Any excess excavation shall be removed from the site to disposal areas at the Contractor's
expense.
TWA #019-007.1 31 2000-3 Earth Moving

3.4 FILL
A. All site fill shall be “selected fill” unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or directed by the
Engineer. “Select granular fill” shall be placed in lieu of selected fill where directed by the
Engineer.
B. Before depositing fills, the surface of the ground shall be cleared of all refuse, brush, and large
stones.
C. Prior to placing fill over undistributed material, scarify to a minimum depth of 6 inches.
D. Where fills are made on hillsides or slopes, the slope of the original ground upon which the fill is
to be placed shall be plowed or scarified deeply or where the slope ratio of the original ground is
steeper than 2 horizontal to 1 vertical, the bank shall be stepped or benched.
E. The original ground shall be proof rolled until the underlying soil is thoroughly compacted to the
satisfaction of the Engineer before any filling is begun. A steel-wheel tandem roller weighing 8 to
10 tons or equipment capable of obtaining the same effort shall be used to obtain a thoroughly
compacted subgrade. Remove or recompact any soft or loose soils as determined by the
Engineer prior to filling.
F. A thoroughly and satisfactorily subgrade is defined as having a minimum dry density of 95

percent of the maximum density of the material used. The subgrade material shall be
compacted at a moisture content suitable for obtaining the required density.
G. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth unless shown
otherwise on the Drawings. Lift height shall be governed by the ability of the compaction
equipment to obtain the required compaction with 8 inches as a maximum lift height. Before
compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to facilitate compaction to the required
density. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost,
ice, ponded water, or extraneous debris.
H. When work is suspended during periods of freezing weather, measures shall be taken to prevent
fill already in place from freezing. Upon resumption of work after any inclement weather,
prepare the exposed surface by proof rolling to identify any zones of soft/loose soils. Soft/loose
materials or frozen soils shall be removed and replaced by compacted granular fill.
I. Moisture Control:
1. Where fill or backfill must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply
water to the surface and to each layer of fill or backfill. Prevent ponding or other free water
on surface subsequent to, or during, compaction operations.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil that is too wet to permit compaction to
specified density. Soil that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction
may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or
pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a value which will permit compaction to the
percentage of maximum density specified.
J. All fill shall be thoroughly and satisfactorily compacted to 95 percent of the maximum density of
material used.
3.5 GRADING
A. The present and finished grade lines are shown on the Drawings. Grade over the entire area, as
shown on the drawings, shall be to the finished subgrade levels. Upon completion of this work,
all debris shall be cleaned out and removed from the premises.
TWA #019-007.1 31 2000-4 Earth Moving

B. Final subgrade shall be established utilizing GPS-controlled grading equipment and shall mirror
the final finish elevations shown on the plans.
C. All cutting, filling, backfilling and grading necessary shall be done to bring the area to the
following grade or subgrade levels:
1. For roadway surface areas to the finished subgrade levels specified on the contract
drawings.
2. For areas to be topsoiled and seeded to within 6 inches of the finished grade.
3. For other surface treatments as detailed on the Drawings.
D. Sufficient grading must be done during the progress of the work so that the entire site shall be
well drained and free from water pockets.
E. Finish grading, including dressing swales, cleaning up excess footing excavation, dressing
terraces, disposing of excess material and all other work necessary to prepare the site for topsoil
and seeding shall be done after construction of structures and roadway surface areas is
substantially complete.
3.6 COMPACTION EQUIPMENT
A. Compaction equipment used for the Work is subject to approval by the Engineer. Any
equipment not originally manufactured for compaction purposes and equipment which is not in
proper working order will not be approved. Furnish manufacturer's specifications covering data
not obvious from a visual inspection of the equipment and necessary to determine its
classification and performance characteristics.
3.7 DRAINAGE AND DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface, subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavation and from flooding
project area, as well as surrounding areas.
B. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent soil changes
detrimental to the stability of subgrades.
C. Provide and maintain the pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other
dewatering components necessary to convey water away from excavations.
D. Provide and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits
to convey rain water and water removed from excavations by dewatering, to collection or run-off
areas.
E. Dewatering operations shall be as directed by the Engineer and performed in accordance with
Section 312319 "Dewatering."
A. Notify the Engineer at least one (1) working day in advance of all phases of filling and backfilling
operations.
B. Compaction testing shall be performed to ascertain the compacted density of the fill and backfill
materials in accordance with the following methods:
1. In-place relative density:
a. Method: AASHTO T310, Nuclear Method.
TWA #019-007.1 31 2000-5 Earth Moving

b. Number of Tests: One (1) per 8-inch vertical lift.
1) Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and
backfill layer, at least one (1) test for every 2,000 square feet or less of paved
area of building slab, but in no case fewer than three (3) tests.
2. Compaction Requirements:
a. Future Building Footprint Areas (plus 15 feet past perimeter): At least 98% of the
material’s Standard Proctor maximum dry density.
b. Future Drive/Parking Areas (in upper 2 feet from finish subgrade): At least 98% of the
c. Future Drive/Parking Areas (below 2 feet from finish subgrade): At least 95% of the
d. Embankment Slopes: At least 95% of the material’s Standard Proctor maximum dry
density.
e. Trench Lines: At least 95% of the material’s Standard Proctor maximum dry density.
C. The Engineer may direct additional tests to establish gradation, maximum density, and in-place
density as required by working conditions, at the Contractor's expense.
D. Acceptance Criteria: The sole criterion for acceptability of in-place fill shall be in situ dry density.
Minimum dry density for all fill or backfill shall be 95 percent of the maximum dry density. If a
test fails to qualify, the fill shall be further compacted and retested. Subsequent test failures
shall be followed by removal and replacement of the material.
3.9 CLEAN UP
A. Provide and maintain protections or newly filled areas against damage. Upon completion or
when directed, correct all damaged and deficient work by building up low spots and remove
temporary protections, fencing, shoring and bracing.
B. Remove all surplus excavated material not required for filling and backfilling and legally dispose
of same away from premises.
C. Leave the premises and work in clean, satisfactory condition, ready to receive subsequent
operations.
END OF SECTION
TWA #019-007.1 31 2000-6 Earth Moving

SECTION 31 2305
STRUCTURE EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for, and
incidental to, the excavation, backfilling, compaction, protection and dewatering for placement of
structures, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein, including, but not limited to the
following:
1. Excavation and placement of structural fill for foundations.
2. Placement of compacted fill, stone, or subbase courses under slabs on grade.
3. Installation of all sheeting, shoring, and bracing required to execute the work.
4. Disposal of all excavated material off site, unless satisfactory for site earthwork fill.
5. Testing and test reports.
B. The Contractor shall accept the site in the condition in which it exists at the time of the award of
the Contract.
C. All excavation shall be considered unclassified.
a. Applicable State DOT Standard Specifications.
(AASHTO)."
B. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all preconstruction costs in connection with an
approved independent testing facility to determine conformance of soils and aggregate with the
specifications.
C. The Engineer shall determine the suitability of materials that are to be used in the work and
should any materials encountered be unsatisfactory for the purpose intended, they shall be
removed from the site at the Contractor’s expense.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: The Testing Laboratory shall submit all written reports to the Contractor and Engineer
according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Test Reports: Prior to delivery or use of any fill material, the Testing Laboratory shall submit the
following reports of each material:
1. Description of material
2. Gradation analysis
3. Modified proctor laboratory compaction tests ASTM D1557.
C. Field Reports: In-place soil density tests, calibrated from the modified proctor laboratory
compaction test.
TWA #019-007.1 31 2305-1 Structure Excavation, Backfilling, and Compaction

A. Site Information: Data in subsurface investigation reports was used for the basis of the design
and may be available to the Contractor, but for information only. Conditions are not intended as
representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. The Owner will not
be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data by Contractor.
1. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be performed by Contractor at
the Contractor’s option. No change in the Contract Sum will be authorized for such
additional exploration.
B. Notify the Engineer of any unexpected subsurface condition.
C. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning, or by other methods as

required to ensure the stability of the excavation.
D. Underpin or otherwise support structures adjacent to the excavation which may be damaged by
the excavation. This includes service lines.
E. Protection of Existing Utilities:

provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations. Comply
with OSHA requirements.
Owner.
4. Demolish and completely remove from the site any existing underground utilities
designated to be removed, as shown on the Drawings or as specified.
5. Repair any damaged utilities as acceptable to the Engineer, at no additional cost to the
Owner.
F. Use of Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.
G. Protection of Persons and Property:

1. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights.
3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused
by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by
4. Provide planking at all walks, pavements, and curbs to be crossed by equipment.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Select Granular Material: Sound, durable, sand, gravel, stone or blends with these materials,
free from organic, frozen, or other deleterious materials, conforming to the requirements of
TDOT and meeting the following gradation requirements:
2" 100
1/4" 30 - 65
No. 40 5 - 40
No. 200 0 - 10

B. Structural Fill: Sound, durable, sand, gravel, stone, or blends of these materials, free from
organic, frozen or other deleterious materials.
1. Structural fill shall be used for backfilling footing excavations, undercuts, below slabs, and
backfilling basement walls. Material suitable for Structural Fill should consist of sound,
durable, non-plastic, widely graded sand and gravel, free of stumps, roots, other organics
and any frozen or deleterious materials.
2. Structural Fill shall be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 8.0 inches in thickness in open
areas when using a 10-ton roller or in 6 inch lifts in confined areas such as trench
excavations when using a narrow trench roller. Structural fill should be compacted to at
least 95 percent of the material’s maximum dry density as determined by the modified
Proctor test (ASTM D 1557). Actual lift thickness shall be based on the type of compaction
equipment used during construction.
4" 100
No. 40 0 - 70
No. 200 0 - 10
a. Fines passing No. 200 shall be non-plastic.

b. Particle size analysis shall show no gap grading.
C. Crushed Stone: Free from organic material, elongated particles or other deleterious materials,
conforming to the following gradation requirements:

2” 100
1” 85 – 94
3/8” 50 – 72
NO. 10 20 – 41
NO. 40 9 – 24
NO. 200 4 – 12
1. Crushed stone shall be used underneath footings and the slab-on-ground for the Batting
Cages Pre-Engineered Metal Building. Crushed stone shall be placed in loose lifts not
exceeding 6 inches and be compacted to at least 95 percent of the material’s maximum dry
density as determined by the modified Proctor test (ASTM D 1557). Actual lift thickness
shall be based on the type of compaction equipment used during construction.
D. Geotextile: 6 ounce per square or heavier, non-woven filter fabric with an apparent opening size
(AOS) equal to or smaller than the U.S. standard sieve size of 70.
1. Mirafi 160N by Tencate Geosynthetics.
2. Or approved equal.
A. A 100-pound minimum representative sample shall be obtained from each potential borrow
source. If different material gradations are known to exist in the pit, samples shall be obtained
for each material. Each sample shall be mixed thoroughly and reduced to test specimen size, in
accordance with AASHTO T87. The tests shall be performed in the order shown. Failure to
pass any test is grounds for disqualification and shall lead to cessation of the test program for
that material.
a. Method: AASHTO D422.

a. Method: ASTM D1557/AASHTO T180, Modified Proctor.
construction.
B. The Contractor shall furnish all earth materials to the testing laboratory for analysis and report as
directed by the Engineer or as outlined in the specifications.
3.2 PREPARATION
at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Establish location and extent of utilities before commencement of excavation.
3.3 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate subsoil in accordance with the lines and levels as shown on the Drawings and as
necessary for installation of the work. The excavation lines shall be such that sufficient
clearance exists for proper execution of the work, including space for formwork and bracing.
B. All excavation shall be considered unclassified.
C. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations.

Unauthorized excavation shall be at Contractor’s expense.
1. Under footings, fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of
footing or bases to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation.
2. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified by authorized
excavations of same classification.
3. Any excess excavation shall be removed from the site to disposal areas at the Contractor's
expense.
D. Additional Excavation:
1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations, carry
excavations deeper and replace excavated material with structural fill or other material as
approved by Geotechnical Engineer.
2. Removal of unsuitable material, and its replacement as directed, will be paid on basis of
Contract conditions relative to changes in work.
E. Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations to comply with OSHA requirements and
local codes. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or
stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition and in
accordance with OSHA requirements until completion of backfilling. Bracing will not be
permitted against pipes or structures in trenches.
F. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights,
stringers, and cross braces in good serviceable condition. Maintain shoring and bracing in
excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing
as excavation progresses. Bracing will not be permitted against pipes or structures in trenches.

G. Excavation for Structures:
1. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown on the drawings, within a tolerance of plus or
minus 0.10 feet, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to
permit placing and removing concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction,
and for inspection.
2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb the bottoms of the
excavation. Excavate by hand to a final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed.
Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave a solid base to receive concrete.
3. Sloping surfaces under footings and foundations, or other work where required, shall be
cut in steps as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
H. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric
temperature is less than 35 DegF (1 DegC).
3.4 REVIEW OF SUBGRADE
A. Notify Geotechnical Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. When Geotechnical Engineer determines that unforeseen unsatisfactory soil is present, continue
excavation and replace with compacted structural fill, select fill, or other approved material as
directed.
1. Unforeseen additional excavation and replacement material will be paid according to the
Contract provisions for changes in work.
C. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or

construction activities, as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer.
3.5 DRAINAGE AND DEWATERING
A. Perform dewatering operations in accordance with Section "Title".
B. Prevent surface, subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavation and from flooding
project area, as well as surrounding areas.
C. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent soil changes
detrimental to the stability of subgrades.
D. Provide and maintain the pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other
dewatering components necessary to convey water away from excavations.
E. Provide and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits
to convey rain water and water removed from excavations by dewatering, to collection or run-off
areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.
3.6 STRUCTURAL FILL, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION
A. Place fill materials in the types and thicknesses as detailed on the Drawings. All backfill shall be
Select Fill unless otherwise directed by the Engineer or shown on the Drawings.
B. After approval of the subgrade by the Geotechnical Engineer, the geotextile shall be placed,
where shown on the Drawings, upon the subgrade in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and the following:
1. After acceptance of the subgrade, the fabric shall be installed prior to placement of the first
course of compacted structural fill, stone or subbase.

2. Geotextile may be joined by either sewing or overlapping. Sewn seams shall be lapped a
minimum of 4 inches and double sewn with nylon or polypropylene. Overlapping seams
shall have a minimum overlap of 18 inches except where placed underwater where the
overlap shall be a minimum of 3 feet.
3. Fabric which is torn or damaged shall be replaced or patched. The patch shall extend 3
feet beyond the perimeter of the tear of damage.
4. Traffic or construction equipment shall not be permitted directly upon the fabric. Maintain a
minimum of 8 inches loose thickness of aggregate above the stabilization fabric subject to
traffic.
C. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 12 inches in loose depth. Lift height shall
be governed by the ability of the compaction equipment to obtain the required compaction with
12 inches as a maximum lift height. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as
necessary to facilitate compaction to the required density. Do not place backfill or fill material on
surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost, ice, ponded water, or extraneous debris.
D. When work is suspended during periods of freezing weather, measures shall be taken to prevent
fill already in place from freezing. Upon resumption of work after any inclement weather,
prepare the exposed surface by proof rolling to identify any zones of soft/loose soils. Soft/loose
materials or frozen soils shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
E. Moisture Control:
1. Where fill or backfill must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply
water to the surface and to each layer of fill or backfill. Prevent ponding or other free water
on surface subsequent to, or during, compaction operations.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil that is too wet to permit compaction to
specified density. Soil that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction
may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or
pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a value which will permit compaction to the
percentage of maximum density specified.
F. All fill shall be thoroughly and satisfactorily compacted to 95 percent of the maximum density of
material used.
G. If the surface of any layer becomes contaminated by mud or unsuitable materials, the
contaminated soil shall be removed.
H. Fill placement shall be suspended when wet weather prevents proper operation of compaction
equipment.
I. Adjacent to structures, fill shall be placed in a manner which will prevent damage to the
structures and will allow the structures to assume the loads from the fill gradually and uniformly.
The height of the fill adjacent to structure shall be increased at approximately the same rate on
all sides of the structure.
J. No backfilling or compaction shall take place against any cast-in- place concrete footings or
slabs prior to 7 days initial concrete set, or against any cast-in-place concrete walls prior to
achieving the desired design strength, f’c.
K. Heavy equipment shall not be operated within 4 feet of any structure. Heavy vibratory
compactors shall not be operated within 4 feet of any structure.
L. Excavated material meeting the requirements of Select Fill shall be spread and allowed to dry
until obtaining the required moisture content prior to re-use.

A. Notify the Engineer at least one (1) working day in advance of all phases of filling and backfilling
operations.
B. Compaction testing shall be performed to ascertain the compacted density of the fill and backfill
materials in accordance with the following methods:
a. Method:
1) AASHTO T191, Sand Cone Method.
2) AASHTO T238, Nuclear Method.
C. Foundation Subbase: Perform one (1) field density test in each compacted fill lift for the
following:
1. Each isolated spread footing.
2. Each 20 feet or less of continuous footing, but no fewer than two (2) tests along a wall.
3. Each 2,000 square feet of structural base slab and/or slabs on grade but in no case fewer
than three (3) tests.
D. Foundation Wall Backfill: In each compacted backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place
density test for each 50 feet or less of wall length but no fewer than two (2) tests along a wall
face.
E. The Engineer may direct additional tests to establish gradation, maximum density, and in-place
density as required by working conditions at the Contractor's expense.
F. Acceptance Criteria: The sole criterion for acceptability of in-place fill shall be in situ dry density.
Minimum dry density for all fill or backfill shall be 95 percent of the maximum dry density. If a
test fails to qualify, the fill shall be further compacted and re-tested. Subsequent test failures
shall be followed by removal and replacement of the material.
3.8 EROSION CONTROL
A. Provide erosion control methods in accordance with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction.
3.9 CLEAN UP
A. Provide and maintain protections or newly filled areas against damage. Upon completion or
when directed, correct all damaged and deficient work by building up low spots and remove
temporary protections, fencing, shoring and bracing.
B. Remove all surplus excavated material not required for filling and backfilling and legally dispose
of same away from premises.
C. Leave the premises and work in clean, satisfactory condition, ready to receive subsequent
operations.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 312316.26 – ROCK REMOVAL
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes drilling, blasting, excavation, removal and disposal of rock as necessary for the
installation of the Work, and as indicated and specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The latest edition of the following standards, as referenced herein, shall be applicable.
1. “Structure Response and Damage Produced by Ground Vibration from Surface Mine Blasting,”
U.S. Bureau of Mines Publication RI 8507.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Rock: Limestone, sandstone, shale, granite, quartz, and formations of other varying mineral or
aggregate composition in solid beds or masses in its original or stratified position that exceed 1 cubic
yard and that cannot be excavated with one of the following:
1. A crawler tractor having a minimum draw bar pull rated at not less than 71,000 pounds (Cater-
pillar D9N or equivalent) and occupying an original volume of at least 1 cubic yards or more.
2. A backhoe having a break out force rated at not less than 44,000 pounds (Caterpillar 235D or
equivalent) and occupying an original volume of at least 1 cubic yards.
B. Rock Excavation: Removal of rock by means of drilling, blasting, or use of pneumatic tools or
expansive chemical agents. Removal of materials which, in the opinion of the Engineer, can be
loosened and excavated by mechanical means (ripping, etc.) including frozen materials, soft
laminated shale or hardpan, pavements, curbs and similar materials shall be classified as earth
excavation with the exception of rock face scaling. Do not proceed with the excavation of this
material until the Engineer has classified the materials as common excavation or rock excavation and
has taken cross sections as required. Failure on the part of the Contractor to uncover such material,
notify the Engineer, and allow ample time for classification and cross sectioning of the undisturbed
surface of such material will cause the forfeiture of the Contractor's right of claim to any
classification or volume of material to be paid for other than that allowed by the Engineer for the
areas of work in which such deposits occur.
C. Unauthorized Excavation: Removal of any material beyond horizontal and vertical limits indicated on
the Drawings or as specified herein, without the prior approval of the Engineer.
D. Scaling: Scaling shall be considered the removal of loose and broken rock from the face of rock cuts
by mechanical means. Scaling shall be included in Rock Excavation item as defined above.
E. Blasting Specialty Contractor: A subcontractor approved by the Engineer retained by the Contractor
performing all work related to drilling and blasting for rock excavating.
F. Independent Specialty Condition Survey Contractor: A subcontractor approved by the Engineer

retained by the Contractor to perform pre and post blast condition surveys of nearby structures.
G. Independent Specialty Condition Seismic Survey Contractor: A subcontractor approved by the

Engineer retained by the Contractor to perform seismic vibration monitoring on-site and off-site at
locations specified or designated by the Engineer.
ROCK REMOVAL PAGE 1 OF 6

\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 31\312316.26 Rock Removal.docx SECTION 312316.26
H. Pre-splitting: A controlled blasting method in which a smooth excavation face is created by
simultaneously blasting a single row of closely spaced holes along the excavation line prior to
blasting the remainder of the holes in the blast pattern. Pre-splitting blast holes shall be a minimum of
3 inches diameter at a center-to-center spacing not exceeding 24 inches.
I. Line Drilling: A controlled blasting method in which a single row of closely spaced, unloaded holes
are drilled along the neat excavation line to create a plane of weakness which the primary blast can
break. Center-to-center spacing of line drilled holes shall be no more than twice the hole diameter.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Submit Specialty Contractors’ qualifications, to the Engineer for approval.
2. Submit work plans, site safety plans, proposed equipment, and a detailed outline of intended
rock removal procedures and any other information listed in this specification to the Engineer
for approval. This submittal shall not relieve the Contractor of complete responsibility for the
successful performance of the method(s) used.
B. Blast Plan:
1. The Blasting Specialty Contractor shall develop a detailed written blast design plan complying
with the applicable requirements in NFPA 496, “Explosive Materials Code.” A copy of the
blast design plan shall be furnished to the Engineer two weeks prior to blasting operations and
shall include the types of explosive and sizes of charge to be used in each area of rock removal,
types of blasting mats, sequence of blasting operations, and procedures that will prevent
damage to site improvements and structures on Project site and adjacent properties.
C. Pre and Post Blast Surveys:

1. Pre- and post-blast conditions surveys shall be completed for all nearby properties where
ground vibrations will be perceptible (peak particle velocity greater than 0.1 inch per second)
prior to blasting. This survey shall include, at a minimum, all properties within a 150-foot
radius surrounding the construction area and any critical structures of interest as determined by
the Engineer. Prior to execution of the survey, a plan noting structures to be surveyed and
survey methods shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
2. During these surveys, all structures and installations, buildings, bridges, water sources, storage
tanks, utilities and other significant features, etc., shall be examined and photographed as
necessary. Pre and post blast surveys shall include all accessible indoor areas and outdoor
sections of surveyed structures. Photographs accompanied by audio tape or written field
reports, or narrated video tape shall be included as part of the surveys. A written survey
summary shall also be included with all submittals. Within 30 days of completion of this survey
and prior to blasting, a pre-blasting conditions survey report shall be submitted to the Engineer
and Owner. Within 30 days after completion of blasting operations, the Independent Specialty
Condition Survey Contractor shall conduct a post-blasting survey of all the same properties.
The post-blast conditions survey report shall be submitted to the Engineer and Owner within 30
days.
D. Seismic Monitoring Plan:

1. The Seismic Specialty Contractor shall develop a written monitoring plan detailing equipment
to be used, monitoring locations, seismic event record format example, and schedule. A copy
of the seismic monitoring plan shall be furnished to the Engineer two weeks prior to blasting
operations.

E. Seismic Monitoring Records:
1. A written seismic monitoring record of each monitoring/blast event shall be submitted to the
Engineer the work day following each blast event. Monitoring shall be performed at the
nearest point of the nearest structure to the blast, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer.
The record shall include at least the following information:
a. Location of seismic vibration and sound level transducers;
b. Peak Particle Velocity (PPV), Vibration Frequency (Frq), Peak Displacement (PD) and
Peak Particle Acceleration (PPA) in the longitudinal, vertical, and transverse directions as
well as Resultant PPV and Peak Sound levels (dB) for each event;
c. Seismograph printout;
d. Date and time of blast event;
e. Distance from seismograph to the blast; and
f. Monitored time interval.
2. The Seismic Specialty Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer if vibration levels or
sound levels exceed specified values.
F. Blast Hole Records:

1. Written records of each blast shall be submitted to the Engineer the work day after each blast
event and shall include at least the following items:
a. Surface elevation.
b. Location.
c. Number of holes.
d. Depth of holes.
e. Water conditions in each hole (if any).
f. Quantity and type of explosives used.
g. Maximum quantity of explosives per delay and number of delays. A delay shall be
considered detonations separated by a minimum of 8 milliseconds.
h. Detonation delay pattern.
i. Stemmed length of hole.
j. Date and blast time.
G. Log of Complaints:
1. A log of all complaints and responses resulting from blasting operations shall be kept by the
Contractor’s designated contact person. The log should include as a minimum the following
information: name and address of person registering complaint/inquiry; time and date when
annoyance occurred; time and date when complaint/inquiry filed; nature of complaint/inquiry;
action taken by contact person; follow-up action. A copy of all complaints and responses shall
be submitted to the Owner and Engineer by the following work day.
H. Site Safety Plan:

1. Site safety shall be coordinated through the Contractor’s office. A written safety plan shall be
developed and distributed to all subcontractors, the Owner and the Engineer.
I. Certifications/Licenses:
1. One (1) copy of each certificate, license, permit, and proof of insurance required by this
specification shall be submitted to the Engineer after award of contract and prior to
commencement of work.

J. Quality Assurance:
1. The Contractor shall use the services of an experienced Specialty Contractor to perform all
blasting operations.
2. The Blasting Specialty Contractor and the blasting foreman shall be regularly engaged in
blasting work of similar magnitude and scope and shall be approved by the Engineer to perform
this project. A list of prior work experience for the Blasting Specialty Contractor and foreman
shall be submitted with the bid.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. The Blasting Specialty Contractor shall obtain all required permits, certificates, and licenses (city,
state, local, etc.) prior to the commencement of any blasting operations.
B. Blasting safety procedures and operations shall comply with Title 29 Code of Federal Regulations
Part 1910.109, and all other applicable state and local standards and regulations.
1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Existing Conditions: Existing physical conditions as defined for design purposes are noted on the
Drawings and are described in the Information Available to Bidders section of the Contract
Documents.
A. Work associated with blasting shall be performed in accordance with the following general sequence:
1. Complete and submit pre-blast survey.
2. Notify all appropriate authorities having jurisdiction of proposed activities.
3. Prepare site for blasting.
4. Notify affected utility owners, operators and nearby residents as required in Part 3 "Execution."
5. Complete test blast program simultaneously with seismic monitoring.
6. Complete production blasting work simultaneously with seismic monitoring.
7. Complete and submit post-blast survey.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Any and all damage caused by the Blasting operations shall be repaired or replaced to the property
Owner’s and Engineer’s satisfaction at the expense of the Blasting Specialty Contractor within
30 days of completion of the Post-Blast Survey.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
3.1 PREPARATION
A. All personnel working on-site shall be instructed as to the nature, times, duration, site safety, and
warning signals concerning blasting operations.
B. Local residents within the Pre-Blast Survey area shall be notified at least 48 hours prior to initial
blasting operations and provided with the name and phone number of one full-time, on-site contact

person designated by the Contractor for handling all complaints and inquiries. Residents shall be
notified of blast schedule and changes on at least a weekly basis throughout the duration of blasting
operations. Residents shall also be informed of warning signals identifying an upcoming blast and all-
clear signals following completion of a blast as outlined in Site Safety Plan.
C. Explosives and blasting caps shall not be brought onto the site or used without appropriate permits,
licenses, certificates, and/or prior written approval of authorities having jurisdiction. The Specialty
Contractor is solely responsible for handling, storage, and use of explosive materials in accordance
with regulatory and permit requirements.
3.2 ROCK REMOVAL
A. Remove rock as indicated by the Drawings and as necessary for the installation of the Work. Provide
sufficient clearance, within the limits specified, for the proper execution of the Work.
B. Remove rock to lines and subgrade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent
construction without exceeding the following dimensions:
1. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings.
2. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings.
3. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade.
4. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without forms or exterior
waterproofing treatments.
5. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade.
6. 6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe or 42 inches
wide.
C. Fill areas of over-excavated rock to the proposed subgrade elevations as required by Drawings with
selected fill in accordance with Section “Trenching and Backfilling” or Section “Earth Moving”
Over-excavation beneath foundations shall be filled with footing concrete (f'c = concrete compressive
= 3000 psi minimum).
D. A test blast shall be performed and monitored prior to commencement of production blasting. Test
blast records and seismic records shall be reported to the Engineer prior to continuation of blasting. If
test blast indicates that the blasting plan requires modification, such changes shall be reported to the
Engineer immediately. Reporting this information to the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor(s)
of complete responsibility for the successful performance of the method(s) used, nor shall the
reporting constitute approval by the Engineer for the proposed plans.
E. The Seismic Specialty Contractor shall monitor the vibrations and sound levels caused by Blasting.
F. Seismic monitoring shall be performed for each blast, unless specified otherwise. Monitoring shall be
performed at the nearest structure or at locations designated by the Engineer on each field day.
G. If the ground vibrations exceed specified tolerances the Blasting Specialty Contractor’s operations
shall cease immediately and remain stopped until the Blasting Specialty Contractor has taken all
necessary additional measures to protect adjacent property and personnel.
H. All finished rock faces as shown on the Plans shall be line drilled/presplit test sections shall be
exposed at the outset of drilling and blasting for the evaluation of the rock faces by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall to completely expose the rock face in the test section prior to production blasting
operations.

I. All rock slopes shall be thoroughly scaled to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Scaled rock slopes
shall be stable and free from possible hazards of falling rocks or rock slides that endanger public or
worker safety. If such conditions exist after proper scaling, remedial treatment shall be provided by
the Contractor or Blasting Specialty Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner. In the event
that natural conditions such as wedge instability are encountered, remedial treatment shall be
provided as necessary to stabilize the rock slope. Such treatment may include, but is not necessarily
limited to, rock bolting or grouting, shoring, or shotcreting. Large scale ripping shall not be permitted
within 10 feet of any final rock slope prior to presplitting or line drilling.
J. The Blasting Specialty Contractor shall use steel or rubber blasting mats as may be necessary to
control fly-rock.
3.3 EXCAVATION TOLERANCES
A. Blast hole drilling and overblast beyond the vertical limits indicated shall be less than 1.5 feet.
B. Rock removal limits shall include all materials defined as rock whether removal is accomplished by
mechanical means (e.g., ripping) or by drilling and blasting.
3.4 VIBRATION AND SOUND TOLERANCES
A. Blast vibrations shall be maintained within safe limits as defined by the Peak Particle Velocity (inch
per second) versus Blast Frequency (Hertz) as described in the United States Bureau of Mines
Publication RI-8507, Appendix B ("Siskind Curve").
B. Sound levels shall not exceed 130 dB at the nearest structure.
C. Vibrations levels at new concrete structures shall be limited to the following levels:
AGE OF CONCRETE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE

(DAYS) PPV
Less than 1/2 0.1 (in./sec.)
1/2 to 7 1.0 (in./sec.)
Greater than 7 2.0 (in./sec.)
END OF SECTION

SECTION 31 2333
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the excavation of trenching, backfilling, compacting, dewatering,

excavation support and disposal, as shown on the Contract Drawings, and as herein specified.
B. All excavation shall be considered unclassified.
C. The Engineer will determine the suitability of materials that are to be used in the work and should
any materials encountered be unsatisfactory for the purpose intended, they shall be removed
from the site at the Contractor's expense.
a. TDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction
(AASHTO)."
c. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
d. National Electric Code (NEC).
B. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements for soil erosion and sedimentation control and
other requirements of governmental authorities having jurisdiction, including the State.
testing facility to determine conformance of soils and aggregate.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples:
1. The Contractor shall furnish representative earth materials to the testing laboratory for
analysis and report, as directed by the Engineer, or as outlined in the specifications.
B. Test Results:
1. The testing laboratory shall submit written reports of all tests, investigations, findings, and
A. Notify the Engineer of any unexpected subsurface condition.
B. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, or by other methods, as required to ensure
the stability of the excavation. Comply with OSHA requirements.
C. Underpin or otherwise support structures adjacent to the excavation, which may be damaged by
the excavation. This includes service lines.
TWA #019-007.1 31 2333-1 Trenching and Backfilling

D. Protection of Existing Utilities:
provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations. Comply
with OSHA requirements.
Owner.
E. Demolish and completely remove from the site any existing underground utilities designated to
be removed, as shown on the Drawings or as specified.
F. Repair any damaged utilities as acceptable to the Owner, Engineer, and utility company at no
additional cost to the Owner.
G. Contractor shall comply with maintenance and protection requirements as approved by the
authority having jurisdiction.
H. Protection of Persons and Property:

1. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights, if
required.
3. Protect structures, utilities, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by
4. Perform excavation within drip-line of trees to remain by hand and protect the root system
from damage or dryout to the greatest extent possible. Maintain moist conditions for root
system and cover exposed roots with burlap. Paint cut roots of 1-inch diameter and larger
with emulsified asphalt tree paint.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Pipe Zone Bedding: Select mixture of graded crushed stone, free from organic, frozen or other
deleterious materials, conforming to the requirements of TDOT and meeting the following
gradation requirements:

1-1/2" 100
1" 90 – 100
1/2" 0 – 15
B. Pipe Zone Backfill: Sound, durable sand, gravel, stone or blends of these materials, free from
organic, frozen or other deleterious materials, conforming to the requirements of TDOT and
meeting the following gradation requirements:

2" 100
1/4" 30 – 65
No. 40 5 – 40
No. 200 0 – 10

C. Suitable Material: Sound, durable sand, gravel, stone or blends of these materials, free from
organic, frozen or other deleterious materials, conforming to the requirements of TDOT and
meeting the following gradation requirements:

4" 100
No. 40 0 – 70
No. 200 0 – 15
1. Run-of-trench material, meeting the above criteria, shall be considered suitable material
and shall be used for trench backfill only after tested in accordance with Section "Quality
Requirements" and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall pay for all additional
testing required to determine the conformance of run-of-trench material, if at any time
during the Work this material appears to be in non-conformance in the opinion of the
Engineer.
A. General:
1. Sufficient size samples shall be obtained from the potential borrow source to allow
completion of tests listed in paragraph B below. Samples may be obtained from test
borings, test pits, or from borrow pit faces provided that surficial dry or wet soil is removed
to expose undisturbed earth. Tests listed below shall be performed on each sample
obtained. A minimum of 3 representative samples from each potential borrow source shall
be furnished to the testing laboratory for prequalification testing. Test data shall be
provided to the Engineer a minimum of 2 weeks prior to construction for approval of borrow
source. Three test reports completed within three months prior to construction may be
submitted for commercial earth borrow sources or suppliers of stone products (crushed
stone or graded stone products) in lieu of prequalification tests as approved by the
Engineer.
B. Material Tests:
a. Method: ASTM D422.
b. Number of Tests: One (1) per sample; three (3) per potential source.
a. Method: ASTM D1557 - Modified Proctor.
b. Number of Tests: One (1) per sample; three (3) per potential source.
construction.
3.2 PREPARATION
B. Maintain benchmarks and other elevation control points; re-establish if disturbed or destroyed at
no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Establish location and extent of existing utilities prior to commencement of excavation.

3.3 EXCAVATION
A. All excavation shall be made to such depth as required and of the width shown on the Drawings
to provide suitable room for building the structures and laying the pipe(s) they are to contain and
for sheeting, shoring, pumping and draining as necessary, and for removing peat, silt, or any
other materials which the Engineer may deem unsuitable. Hand trench excavation may be
required to protect existing utilities and structures.
B. All excavation and trenching shall be considered unclassified.
C. Trench excavation for pipes shall be made by open cut to accommodate the pipe or structure at
the depths indicated on the Drawings. Excavation shall be made to such a depth and to the
width indicated on the Drawings so as to allow a minimum of 8 inches of pipe zone bedding to be
placed beneath the bottom of all structures and barrels, bells or couplings of all pipes installed
unless otherwise specified on the Drawings.
D. The bottom of the trench shall be accurately graded to provide a uniform layer of bedding
material as required for each section of pipe. Trim and shape trench bottoms and leave free of
irregularities, lumps, and projections.
E. Stockpile excavated subsoil for reuse where directed or approved.
F. Over excavation/undercut: If, in the opinion of the Engineer, existing material below the trench
grade is unsuitable for properly placing bedding material and laying pipe, the Contractor shall
excavate and remove the unsuitable material and replace the same with an approved pipe zone
bedding material properly compacted.
G. Stability of Excavation: Slope sides of excavations shall comply with local codes and ordinances
having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions
or stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavation in safe condition until
completion of backfilling.
H. Removal of materials beyond the indicated subgrade elevations, without authorization by the
Engineer, shall be classified as unauthorized excavation and shall be performed at no additional
cost to the Owner.
3.4 DEWATERING
A. The Contractor shall remove all water from the excavation promptly and continuously throughout
the progress of the work and shall keep the excavation dry at all times until the work is
completed and excavation is backfilled or have sufficient weight to resist uplift pressures.
Groundwater levels shall be depressed to a minimum of 2 feet below excavation subgrade. No
pipe or structure is to be laid in water and water shall not be allowed to rise on or flow over any
pipe or structure until such time as approved by the Engineer.
B. Provide a suitable point of discharge from dewatering operations shall be conveyed in a non-
erosive manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
C. Precautions shall be taken to protect uncompleted work from flooding during storms or from
other causes. All pipe lines or structures not stable against uplift during construction or prior to
completion shall be thoroughly braced or otherwise protected.
3.5 BEDDING AND BACKFILLING
A. All pipe trenches backfill (pipe zone bedding, pipe zone backfill and trench backfill) shall be
compacted by tamping or rolling to achieve a minimum dry density of 90 percent of the modified

Proctor maximum dry density of the material used (ASTM D1557). Backfill in pipe trenches to be
covered with pavement shall be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of modified Proctor
maximum dry density. Backfill materials shall be placed with water content within plus or minus
4 percent of optimum moisture content per the modified Proctor method (ASTM D1557). Any
water used for compaction shall be provided by the Contractor at his own expense. The
Contractor is responsible for the repair of any trench settlement at no expense to the owner.
B. Bedding and backfilling shall be accomplished in three stages unless otherwise specified on the
Contract Drawings. The first stage shall involve placement of "pipe zone bedding" as a layer(s)
of selected material required to support, or to stabilize unsound or unsatisfactory foundation
conditions. The second stage shall involve placement of "pipe zone backfill" from the top of the
bedding material up to 1 foot above the pipe. The third stage involves the placement of "trench
backfill" in the remainder of the trench up to the surface of the ground or the bottom of any
special surface treatment subgrade elevation.
C. The bedding material shall be placed in the trench after the trench has been excavated a
minimum of 8 inches below the bell of the pipe to permit the placing of not less than 8 inches of
bedding material unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. Where, in the opinion of the
Engineer, more than 8 inches of bedding material shall be required, the excavation shall be
performed and bedding placed to the depth ordered by the Engineer.
D. Provide uniform bearing and support for each section of pipe at every point along the entire
length except where necessary to excavate for bell holes, pipe joints, or other required
connections. Dig bell holes and depressions for joints after trench bottom has been graded. Dig
no deeper, longer, or wider than needed to make the joint connection properly.
E. The bedding material shall be placed to the full width of trench. The bedding material shall be
placed in loose lifts not exceeding 6 inches to the elevation shown on the Drawings or directed
by the Engineer. The bedding material shall be tamped and compacted to form a firm and even
bearing surface.
F. Pipe zone backfill shall be placed to the elevation shown on the Drawings in loose lifts not-to-
exceed 6 inches in thickness, before compaction. The backfill shall be placed on both sides of
the pipe at the same time and to approximately the same elevation. Any pipe that is damaged or
moved out of alignment, regardless of cause, shall be replaced or realigned at the Contractor's
expense. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted by hand-tamping or mechanical means
being careful not to damage the pipe. When the pipe zone backfill reaches 1 foot over the top of
the pipe, the entire surface shall be compacted by mechanical means.
G. The remainder, if any, of the trench above the pipe zone backfill shall be backfilled with suitable
material in loose lifts not exceeding 6 inches in thickness before compaction. Each layer shall
be thoroughly compacted by mechanical means.
3.6 BACKFILLING AROUND STRUCTURES
A. The Contractor shall not place backfill against any structure without obtaining the approval of the
Engineer. No dumping shall be allowed where materials would flow against or around such
structures. Backfill material shall be deposited in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches in
loose thickness or as shown on the Drawings and thoroughly compacted by hand or by
mechanical means to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.7 SUSPENSION OF WORK
A. Whenever the work is suspended, excavations shall be protected and the roadways, if any, left
unobstructed. Within or adjacent to private property, material shall be stored at such locations

as will not unduly interfere with traffic of any nature and in no case shall materials be stored in
locations which will cause damage to existing improvements.
3.8 DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL
A. Excess and unsuitable materials shall be disposed of by the Contractor on the site in an area
approved by the Engineer or legally disposed of off- site at the Contractor’s expense.
A. Notify the Engineer at least 3 working days in advance of all phases of filling and backfilling
operations.
B. In-place density testing shall be performed to ascertain the compacted density of the fill and
backfill materials in accordance with the following methods:
a. Method: AASHTO T310, Nuclear Method.
C. Perform initial density testing to verify that contractors proposed compaction effort will obtain the
minimum required densities.
D. In-place density tests on trench backfills shall be provided for every 500 cubic yards of fill or in
vertical lifts not exceeding 2 feet and at least once daily.
E. One particle size analysis (ASTM D422) and one modified Proctor compaction test (ASTM
D1557) shall be competed for every 5,000 cubic yards of material placed.
F. The Engineer may direct additional tests to establish gradation, maximum density, and in-place
density as required by working conditions, at the Contractor's expense.
G. Acceptance Criteria: The criteria for acceptability of in-place fill shall be in-situ dry density and
moisture content. If a test fails to qualify, the fill shall be further compacted and re-tested.
Subsequent test failures shall be followed by removal and replacement of the material.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Below grade soil treatment for termite control.
3. Section 31 2200 – Grading.
4. Section 31 2300 – Excavation and Fill.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products.
B. Qualification Data:
1. Submit Installer qualifications.
C. Product Certificates:
1. Submit Manufacturer certificates for termite control products.
D. Soil Treatment Application Report:

1. After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's records and include the
following:
a. Date and time of application.
b. Moisture content of soil before application.
c. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer.
d. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
e. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application.
f. Areas of application.
g. Water source for application.
E. Warranties:
1. Submit Manufacturer sample of special warranties
A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having

jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices according to the
EPA-Registered Label.
A. Protect containers from accidental opening and use.
TERMITE CONTROL PAGE 1 OF 4

SECTION 313116
A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen.
Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA-Registered
Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations.
Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs before construction.
1.6 SEQUENCING
A. Apply termiticide:
1. After completion of excavating, backfilling, and compaction.
2. Prior to placing vapor retarder.
1.7 WARRANTIES
A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor,
certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent
infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during
warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.
1. Warranty Period: [3] years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Design Basis – Termite Control: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. BASF Corporation
1609 Biddle Avenue
Wyandotte, Michigan 48192
Telephone: 734-324-6202
Website: (www.basf.com).
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Bayer Environmental Science; Premise 75.
2. FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group.
2.2 SOIL TREATMENT
A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-Registered termiticide, complying with requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity
required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration
allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label.
B. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than [3] years against
infestation of subterranean termites.

SECTION 313116
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other
conditions affecting performance of termite control.
B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with
manufacturer's written instructions for preparation before beginning application of termite control
treatment. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood
debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and
around foundations.
B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could
decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated
except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before
placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer.
1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3 APPLICATION - GENERAL
A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with
manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.
3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT
A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity
required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of
termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous
horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building
construction. Distribute treatment evenly.
1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Underground-supported slab construction, including
footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before
concrete footings and slabs are placed.
2. Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls;
along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit
penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along the
entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings.
3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously indicated. Treat adjacent
areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall
treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground.
4. Masonry: Treat voids.
5. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated.
B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.
C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground
supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions.

SECTION 313116
D. Post warning signs in areas of application.
E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or
other construction activities following application.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 313116
SECTION 32 1116
SUBBASE COURSES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes provisions for prepared subbase courses for under walks and pavements.
B. Proof rolling of subgrade for walks and pavements is included in this Section.
C. Replacement of unsuitable subgrade materials is included in another Section.
D. Final grading of pavement subbase is specified in this Section.
E. Stabilization fabric is included in another Section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Road and Bridge Specifications, Tennessee Department of Transportation (latest edition).
B. “Standard Specifications for Highway Materials and Methods of Sampling and Testing, American
Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).”
C. “American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).”
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Source Quality Control Test Reports: Submit test reports directly to Engineer from the testing
agency with copy to Contractor.
B. Field Testing Reports: Submit results of field testing directly to Engineer with copy to Contractor.
Reference testing location to plan, and cross-reference to all retesting required to accept
installed subbase material.
1. Note action taken next to all sub-standard test results.
A. Testing Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, the soil testing laboratory must
demonstrate to Engineer’s satisfaction, based on evaluation of laboratory-submitted criteria
conforming to ASTM E699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct the required
testing without delaying the progress of the Work.
B. Field Testing and Inspection Service: Owner shall retain the services of the same independent
soil testing laboratory used for source qualification testing to provide soil testing during pavement
subbase installation.
TWA #019-007.1 32 1116-1 Subbase Courses

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 SOURCE QUALIFICATION TESTING
A. TDOT Pre-Qualified Material Sources. Contractor may submit, in lieu of independent laboratory
test results, a copy of recent TDOT certification of proposed source.
B. Engineer may require additional testing by an independent testing laboratory when:

1. The latest test for the source is two (2) years old.
2. A change in the character of the material occurs.
3. The Engineer determines that additional testing is necessary due to the observed
properties of the supplied material.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Processed Gravel Subbase Course: Materials shall consist of sound, durable blast furnace slag,
stone, sand, gravel or blends of these materials.
B. Crushed Rock Subbase Course: Materials shall consist solely of approved blast furnace slag or
stone which is the product of crushing ledge rock.
C. All materials shall be well graded from course to fine and free from organic or other deleterious
materials, conforming to the requirements of TDOT, and meeting the following gradation
requirements:

2" 100
1” 85-95
3/8” 50-69
No. 10 20-36
No. 40 9-19
No. 200 4-7
1. Not more than 30 percent, by weight, of the particles retained on a ½ inch sieve shall
consist of flat or elongated particles. A flat or elongated particle is defined as one which
has its greatest dimension more than 3 times its least dimension.
2. All material shall meet the specified gradation prior to placement. All processing shall be
completed at the source.
3. Stabilization Fabric: Conform to Section “Geotextiles”.
3.1 PREPARATION
at no additional cost to Owner.
C. Proof-roll existing subgrade to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Should the subbase course
become unstable at any time prior to the placement of the overlying course(s), correct the

unstable condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Replace unstable or weak subgrade
materials with suitable material as provided in the Specifications.
D. Place stabilization fabric in locations as directed on the plans and in accordance with Section
"Geotextiles" after subgrade has been proof-rolled and accepted by the Engineer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Place subbase material in uniform horizontal layers, with a maximum compacted thickness of
12 inches.
B. Place subbase in a manner to avoid segregation. Uncontrolled spreading shall not be permitted.
3.3 COMPACTION
A. Where subbase courses must be moisture-conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water
to the surface. Prevent free water from appearing on the surface during or subsequent to
compaction operations.
B. Compact all portions of each layer to a density not less than 95 percent of the maximum density.
C. Final tolerances for the top surface of the subbase course requires that the surface does not
extend more than 1/4 inch above nor more than 1/4 inch below the specified grade at any
location.
3.4 TRAFFIC ON SUBBASE
A. The movement of vehicular traffic over the final surface of the subbase may be permitted at
locations designated by, and under such restrictions as ordered by the Engineer, provided such
movements take place prior to the final finishing of this course to the specified tolerance. The
movement of construction equipment on this course may be permitted, at locations designated
by and under such restrictions as ordered by the Engineer at locations where permission is
granted for such movement, the temporary surface of the course upon which the construction
traffic is running, shall be placed and maintained for at least 2 inches above the final surface of
this course. Just prior to paving, and after all construction traffic not required for the removal has
ceased, remove the 2-inch protective layer, prepare the exposed surface of the course, and
compact to the specified tolerance.
B. Should the subbase become mixed with the subgrade or any other material, through any cause
whatsoever, remove such mixture and replace it with the specified subbase material.
A. Notify the Engineer at least 1 working day in advance of all phases of subbase installation.
B. Comply with the requirements of this Section for in-place relative density testing.
Method: AASHTO T238, Nuclear Method
Number of Tests: One (1) per specified interval.
Acceptance Criteria: ± Two (2) percent of specified percent compactions.
2. Compaction tests shall be provided for every 1000 SY of subbase placement. A minimum
of three for each lift is required.
3. The Engineer may direct additional tests to establish gradation, maximum density, and in-
place density as required by working conditions.

4. If a test fails to qualify, the fill shall be further compacted and re-tested. Subsequent test
failures shall be followed by removal and replacement of the material.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 1216
ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes provisions for hot-mixed asphalt concrete paving over prepared subbase.
B. This section includes provisions for replacing pavement removed during the course of the Work,
or damaged resulting from Contractor’s operations.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Road & Bridge Specifications, Tennessee Department of Transportation (latest edition).
B. “Standard Specifications for Highway Materials and Methods of Sampling and Testing, American
Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).”
C. “American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).”
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates signed by material producer and Contractor, certifying that each material
item complies with or exceeds specified requirements.
B. Field Test Reports: Submit results of field testing directly to the Engineer.
1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Apply tack coats when ambient temperature is above 50F (10C) and
when temperature has not been below 35F (1C) for 12 hours immediately prior to application.
Do not apply when base is wet or contains an excess of moisture.
B. Construct hot-mixed asphalt concrete surface course when atmospheric temperature is above
40F (4C) and when base is dry. Base course may be placed when air temperature is above
30F (minus 1C) and rising.
C. Grade Control: Establish and maintain required lines and elevations.
D. In no instance shall the materials and thicknesses of pavement and subbase courses replaced
be less than that removed, unless approved by the Engineer.
A. Coordinate the placement of asphalt concrete pavement with the completion of underground
work by other trades.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Asphalt concrete and all related items shall meet the requirements of TDOT.
TWA #019-007.1 32 1216-1 Asphalt Paving

B. Subbase Course: Subbase course shall be in accordance with Section 321116 Subbase
Courses.
C. Binder Course: TDOT Type 307C.
D. Top Course: TDOT Type 411TLD.
E. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt, ASTM D977.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. General: Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before
commencing paving operations.
B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface with a ten-ton static, steel-wheel roller to check for unstable
areas and areas requiring additional compaction, witnessed by the Engineer at least forty-eight
(48) hours prior to scheduled paving operations.
C. Do not begin paving work until deficient subbase areas have been corrected and are ready to
receive paving.
D. Herbicide Treatment: Apply chemical weed control agent in strict compliance with
manufacturer’s recommended dosages and application instructions. Apply to compacted, dry
subbase.
E. Sawcut edges of existing pavement to achieve straight line transitions between old and new
pavement. Make a second sawcut through the top course of existing pavement, 18 inches from
the first cut to provide a staggered joint.
F. Tack Coat: Apply to contact surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or Portland cement
concrete and surfaces abutting or projecting into asphalt concrete pavement. Distribute at rate
of 0.03 to 0.07 gallons per square yard of surface.
G. Allow to dry until at proper condition to receive paving.
H. Exercise care in applying bituminous materials to avoid smearing of adjoining surfaces. Remove
and clean damaged surfaces.
I. Do not commence pavement replacement operations until all buried work beneath pavement
repair has been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
J. Where trench dimensions preclude the use of proof rolling equipment, demonstrate the stability
of the subgrade and subbase through other means, as acceptable to the Engineer.
3.2 PLACING AND COMPACTING MIX
A. General: Place and compact asphalt pavement courses in accordance with TDOT, unless
otherwise specified.
B. Place inaccessible and small areas by hand, and compact with hot hand tampers or vibrating
plate compactors.
C. Chamfer edges of walks at 45° angle where walks do not abut curb.

D. Joints: Make joints between old and new pavements, or between successive days' work, to
ensure continuous bond between adjoining work. Construct joints to have same texture, density,
and smoothness as other sections of asphalt concrete course. Clean contact surfaces and
apply tack coat.
E. Place tack coat between successive courses if more than forty-eight (48) hours have elapsed
after placing the preceding course. Apply tack coat at a rate of 0.03 to 0.07 gallons per square
yard of surface.
F. Compaction: Compact asphalt pavement courses with a static steel wheel roller only, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer, based upon work conditions.
G. Remove and patch areas of any asphalt concrete course deemed unsatisfactory by the
Engineer, at the Contractor’s expense. Remove hardened or set asphalt by saw cutting.
H. Adhere to TDOT compaction requirements. This, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility to provide a well densified pavement. It shall be the Contractor’s obligation to
recognize difficulties in compacting the mix, and to make appropriate corrections.
I. Roll and compact the asphalt concrete course until the finished surface is free from depressions,
waves or other defects that would prevent proper drainage. The finished surface shall be
uniform in texture and appearance.
J. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and
hardened.
K. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.
A. General: Testing in-place asphalt concrete courses for compliance with requirements for
thickness and surface smoothness will be done by Owner’s testing laboratory. Repair or remove
and replace unacceptable paving as directed by Engineer.
B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness tested in accordance with ASTM D 3549 will not be
acceptable if exceeding following allowable variations:
1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
2. Top Course: Plus or minus 1/4 inch.
3. Cumulative Thickness Tolerances: Plus or minus 1/4 inch for nominal cumulative
thicknesses less than or equal to 4 inches. Plus or minus 1/2 inch for nominal cumulative
thicknesses greater than 4 inches.
C. Surface Smoothness: Test finished surface of each asphalt concrete course for smoothness,
using 10-foot straightedge applied parallel with and at right angles to centerline of paved area.
Surfaces will not be acceptable if exceeding the following tolerances for smoothness:
1. Base Course Surfaces: 1/4 inch.
2. Top Course Surface: 3/16 inch.
3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.
Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch.
D. Check surface areas at intervals as directed by Engineer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Concrete sidewalks.
2. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
4. Section 31 2200 – Grading.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002).
2. 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
3. 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete
Institute International; 2000.
4. 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
5. 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
6. 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001 (Reapproved
2008).

1. A615 /A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2012.
2. C33 / C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011a.
3. C39 / C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 2012a.
4. C94 / C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2012.
5. C150 / C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012.
6. C173 / C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method; 2012.
7. C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a.
8. C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete;
2011.
9. C494 / C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2012.
10. C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use
in Concrete; 2012.
11. C685 / C685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and
Continuous Mixing; 2011.
12. C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures; 2012.
13. D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and
Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004 (Reapproved
2008).
14. D8139 – Standard Specification for Semi-Rigid, Closed Cell Polypropylene Foam, Preformed
Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.
CONCRETE PAVING PAGE 1 OF 6

SECTION 321313
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on joint filler, admixtures, and curing compound.
B. Samples: Submit two sample panels, [12] inch by [12] inch ([300] mm by [300] mm) in size
illustrating exposed aggregate finish.
C. Design Data: Indicate pavement thickness, designed concrete strength, reinforcement, and typical
details.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PAVING ASSEMBLIES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of ACI 301.
B. Design paving for parking and private drives.
C. Concrete Sidewalks: [4,000] psi ([27.6] MPa) [28] day concrete, [4] inches ([100] mm) thick
minimum, gray color Portland cement, wood float finish.
D. Parking Area Pavement: [4,000] psi ([27.6] MPa) [28] day concrete, [5] inches ([125] mm) thick
minimum, [6] by [6] - W2.9 by W2.9 mesh reinforcement, wood float finish.
2.2 FORM MATERIALS
A. Form Materials: As specified in Section 031000, comply with ACI 301.
B. Wood form material, profiled to suit conditions.
C. Joint Filler: Preformed; non-extruding bituminous type (ASTM D1751) or sponge rubber or cork
(ASTM D1752).
2. Manufacturers: W. R. Meadows; Fiber Expansion Joint (www.wrmeadows.com).
2.3 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel and Welded Wire Reinforcement: Types specified in Section 03 3000 – Cast In
Place Concrete.
B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade [60] ([60,000] psi) ([420] MPa) yield strength;
deformed billet steel bars; unfinished.
C. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: Plain type, ASTM A1064/A1064M; in flat sheets; unfinished.
D. Dowels: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade [40] – [40,000] psi ([280] MPa) yield strength; deformed billet
steel bars; unfinished finish.
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout.
B. Concrete Materials: As specified in Section 03 3000 - Cast In Place Concrete.

SECTION 321313
C. Concrete Materials: Provide in accordance with State of Tennessee Highways standards.
D. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Normal - Type [I] Portland cement, gray color.
E. Fine and Coarse Mix Aggregates: ASTM C33 / C33M.
F. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class [C] or [F].
G. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Class [N].
H. Silica Fume: ACI 211.1.
I. Water: Clean, and not detrimental to concrete.
J. Air-Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C260/C260M.
K. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A - Water Reducing, Type [C] - Accelerating, and
Type [G] - Water Reducing, High Range and Retarding.
1. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of [0.1] percent by
weight of cement.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type [1], Class [A].

1. Manufacturers: W. R. Meadows; VOCOMP 25 (www.wrmeadows.com).
B. Liquid Surface Sealer: VOC compliant Silane / Siloxane Water Repellent / Chloride Screen.
1. Manufacturers: Prosoco; Consolideck Saltguard WB (www.consolideck.com).
C. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top
section that will form 1/2 inch (13 mm) deep sealant pocket after removal.
1. Material: ASTM D8139, semi-rigid, closed-cell polypropylene foam.
2. Manufacturers: Nomaco, Inc; Nomaflex Expansion Joint Filler with Void Cap Option:
(www.nomaco.com/#sle).
2.6 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field
experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.
C. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing
and reporting proposed mix designs.
D. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by
manufacturer.
E. Concrete Properties:
1. Compressive strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at [28] days; [4,000]
psi ([27.6] MPa).
2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum [15] percent of cementitious materials by weight.
3. Calcined Pozzolan Content: Maximum [10] percent of cementitious materials by weight.

SECTION 321313
4. Silica Fume Content: Maximum [5] percent of cementitious materials by weight.
5. Cement Content: Minimum [143] lb per cubic foot ([2290] kg per cubic meter).
6. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum [40] percent by weight.
7. Total Air Content: [4] percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M.
8. Maximum Slump: [3] inches ([75] mm).
9. Maximum Aggregate Size: [1] inch ([25] mm).
2.7 MIXING
A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads.
B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.
3.2 SUBBASE
A. Prepare subbase in accordance with State of Tennessee Highways standards.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.
B. Coat surfaces of manhole frames with oil to prevent bond with concrete pavement.
C. Notify Architect minimum [24] hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.
3.4 FORMING
A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient.
B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.
C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement.
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Place reinforcement at top of slabs-on-grade.
B. Place reinforcement as indicated.
C. Interrupt reinforcement at contraction joints.
D. Place dowels to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed.
E. Provide doweled joints [16] inch ([406] mm) on center at transverse joints.

SECTION 321313
3.6 COLD AND HOT WEATHER CONCRETING
A. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
B. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
C. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than [40] degrees F ([4] degrees C), or
surface is wet or frozen.
3.7 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B. Place concrete in accordance with State of Tennessee Highways standards.
C. Do not place concrete when base surface is wet.
D. Place concrete using the slip form technique.
E. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete
placement.
F. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction
joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.
3.8 JOINTS
A. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints.
B. Place [3/8] inch ([10] mm) wide expansion joints at [20] foot ([6] m) intervals and to separate paving
from vertical surfaces and other components and in pattern indicated.
1. Form joints with joint filler extending from bottom of pavement to within [1/2] inch ([13] mm)
of finished surface.
2. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
C. Provide scored joints.

1. At [3] feet ([1] m) intervals.
2. Between sidewalks and curbs.
3. Between curbs and pavement.
D. Provide keyed joints as indicated.
E. Saw cut contraction joints [3/16] inch ([5] mm) wide at an optimum time after finishing. Cut [1/3] into
depth of slab.
3.9 FINISHING
A. Area Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to pavement direction.
B. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to direction of travel with troweled and radiused
edge [1/4] inch radius ([6] mm radius).
C. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom, texture parallel to pavement direction.

SECTION 321313
D. Inclined Vehicular Ramps: Broomed perpendicular to slope.
E. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.10 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: [1/4] inch ([6] mm) in [10] feet ([3] m).
B. Maximum Variation From True Position: [1/4] inch ([6] mm).
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 4000
- Quality Requirements.
1. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
2. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review
prior to commencement of concrete operations.
3. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure compliance
B. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M; for each test, mold and cure three concrete test
cylinders. Obtain test samples for every [100] cu yd ([76] cu m) or less of each class of concrete
placed.
1. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same
conditions as concrete it represents.
2. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken.
C. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature,
and test samples taken.
3.12 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold
temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Do not permit pedestrian traffic over pavement for [7] days minimum after finishing.
C. Do not permit pedestrian traffic over pavement until [75] percent design strength of concrete has been
achieved.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 321313
SECTION 32 1613.16
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CURBING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the installation of concrete curbing as shown on the Drawings, or as
specified herein.
B. The materials and methods specified herein are directly intended for placement of “new”
concrete curbing. Where existing curbing is removed and replaced during construction,
modifications to these specifications to match existing conditions shall be made as directed by
the Engineer.
a. “Standard Specifications, Construction and Materials, Tennessee Department of
Transportation, Office of Engineering.”
b. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).
c. American Concrete Institute. (ACI).
B. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all costs in connection with an approved independent
testing facility to determine conformance of materials with the specifications, if at any time during
the Work, materials appear unsuitable in the opinion of the Engineer.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Concrete:
1. The Contractor shall furnish the name and location of the concrete supplier.
2. Submit the design mix for each class of concrete prior to use in the Work.
B. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer’s catalog cuts, specifications, and installation instructions.
C. Test Results:
recommendations to the Contractor and Engineer.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Concrete:
1. All cast-in-place concrete shall be ready mixed concrete meeting the following criteria:
a. 28-Day Compressive Strength: 4500 psi (minimum).
b. Air entrainment - 4%-8%.
2. The approved mix design shall be used throughout this project unless changes are ordered
or approved by the Engineer.
TWA #019-007.1 32 1613.16-1 Cast-In-Place Concrete Curbing

B. Premoulded Expansion Joint Filler:
1. Concrete curbing shall be provided with a 1/2" premoulded expansion joint filler conforming
to ASTM D 1751.
2. The premoulded expansion joint filler shall be “pre-cut” to match the concrete curbing
cross-sectioned dimensions as detailed on the Drawings.
C. Reinforcement: Install #4 bars in the middle of the field curb for the full length of the installation
as shown in the Drawings. Overlap and tie at ends and starts of bars. Stop bar 3” clear on side
of fence posts where necessary.
D. Curing Materials:
1. Impervious Sheeting: ASTM C171.
2. Liquid Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C309, compound shall be free of paraffin or
petroleum.
3. “Kure-N-Seal 0800" by Sonneborn, “Cure & Seal” by Symons, or equal.
E. Sealants:
1. Joint Sealers: ASTM D 1850.
F. Forms:
1. Curb forms shall be of wood or steel, straight, and of sufficient strength to resist springing
during depositing and consolidating the concrete. The outside forms shall have a height
equal to the full depth of the curb. The inside form of curb shall have batter as indicated
and shall be securely fastened to and supported by the outside form.
2. Straight forms of wood shall be surfaced plank, 2-inch nominal thickness, straight and free
from warp, twist, loose knots, splits, or other defects. Wood forms shall have a nominal
length of 10 feet, with a minimum of three stakes per form, at maximum spacing of 4 feet.
Corners, deep sections, and radius bends shall have additional stakes and braces, as
required. Radius bends may be formed with 3/4-inch boards, laminated to the required
thickness.
3. Steel forms shall be channel-formed sections with a flat top surface and with welded
braces at each end and at not less than two intermediate points. Form ends shall be
interlocked and self- aligning. Forms shall include flexible forms for radius forming, corner
forms, form spreaders, and fillers. Forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet, with
minimum of two welded stake pockets per form. Stake pins shall be solid steel rods with
chamfered heads and pointed tips, designed for use with steel forms.
4. Rigid forms shall be provided for curb returns, except that benders of thin plank forms may
be used for curb or curb returns with a radius of 10 feet or more, where grade changes
occur in the return, or where the central angle is such that a rigid form with a central angle
of 90 degrees cannot be used. Back forms for curb returns may be made of 1-1/2 inch
benders, for the full height of the curb, cleated together.
5. Machine formed curb: Straight and radius curbing may be placed with self-propelling
machine approved by the engineer. Approval of machine shall depend on job
requirements and performance.
3.1 INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer 24 hours before placing concrete in order to give the
Engineer an opportunity to inspect the formwork and related items prior to placement of the
concrete.

B. Delivery tickets shall show the amount of cement, brand, and amount of all admixtures, in
addition to information required by ASTM C94, Section 14. Water added on the job shall be
approved and the amount noted on the delivery ticket and initialed by the Contractor.
3.2 SUBBASE PREPARATION
A. Concrete curbing shall be constructed on a compacted granular subbase as shown on the

Drawings.
B. The subbase shall be maintained in a smooth, compacted condition in conformity with the
required section and established grade, until the concrete is placed.
C. The subbase shall be in a moist condition when concrete is placed.
D. The subbase shall be prepared and protected so as to produce a subbase free from frost when
the concrete is deposited.
E. Subbase may need to be placed along path of slipformed curbing machine in order to ensure
proper placement.
3.3 FORMWORK
A. Earth cuts may not be used as forms for vertical surfaces.
B. All forms shall be built mortar tight and of materials sufficient in strength to hold concrete without
bulging between supports. Forms shall be maintained to eliminate the formation of joints due to
shrinkage of the forms. Concrete, mis-shapen by bulges or deformations caused by inadequate
forms, shall be removed or corrected as ordered by the Engineer. All replacements or
corrections shall be made at the Contractor’s expense.
C. All surfaces of wooden forms that will be in contact with exposed concrete shall be thoroughly
treated with an approved lacquer in the procedure recommended by the manufacturer. Forms
so treated shall be protected from being damaged or dirtied prior to placing of the concrete.
D. Metal forms shall be treated with an approved form lacquer or may be treated with an approved
form oil. The metal used for forms shall be of sufficient thickness to remain true to shape. All
bolt and rivet heads shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together and to allow removal,
without injury to the concrete. Metal forms which do not have smooth surfaces, correct
alignment and clean surfaces shall not be used.
E. The forms on the front of the curb shall be removed not less than 2 hours nor more than 6 hours
after the concrete has been placed. Forms back of curb shall remain in place until the face and
top of the curb have been finished as specified for concrete finishing.
3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING
A. Preparation:
1. Set approved forms true to line and grade. Cast curb in 20 foot long sections. If curbs abut
existing pavement, locate construction joints opposite existing pavement joints as directed.
2. Provide cut to size joint filler between 20 foot sections and where curb abuts existing
concrete paving and fixed structures or appurtenances. Protect the top edge of the joint
filler during concrete placement with a temporary cap and remove after concrete has been
placed.
3. Expansion joints shall be constructed at right angles to the line of the curb.

4. For slipform curbing, perform a “dry run” of the intended day’s placement using engineer
approved equipment or a “mock up” of matching dimensions. Movement of equipment
shall have the ability to be followed by a string or survey equipment to indicate correct
offset for placement. Remove all obstructions encountered along path and repair any
questionable subbase as determined by engineer.
B. Concrete Placement:
1. Concrete shall be placed in layers not to exceed 6 inches. For slipform concrete refer to
maximum placement depth as recommended by machine manufacturer,
2. Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by tamping and spading or with approved
mechanical vibrators, eliminating all air pockets, stone pockets and honeycombing.
3. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 unless otherwise specified herein.
4. Cold Weather Concreting: Comply with ACI 306 for placement at temperatures of, or
expected to be, below 40˚F.
5. Hot Weather Concreting: Comply with ACI 305 for placement at temperatures of, or
expected to be, above 90˚F.
6. For slipform concrete, any curb placed outside the tolerance of 1/2 in. of the established
line or 1/4 in. outside of the established grade shall be removed and replaced by the
contractor.
7. When machine forming, the Contractor may provide additional width of curb without any
other change in shape or dimension, if provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to
the owner. If the Contract Documents or the Engineer require no curb be placed across
the driveway entrances, the Contractor may continue placing curb across driveway
entrances but the curb placed across driveway entrances, excluding transitions, must be
cut out and the concrete legally disposed in a manner approved by the Engineer.
C. Concrete Finishing:
1. The top of the curb shall be rounded with an edging tool to a radius of 1/2-inch and the
surfaces shall be floated and finished with a smooth wood float until true to grade and
section and uniform in texture. Floated surfaces shall then be brushed with a fine-hair
brush with longitudinal strokes.
2. Immediately after removing the front curb form, the face of the curb shall be rubbed with a
wood or concrete rubbing block and water until blemishes, form marks, and tool marks
have been removed. The surface, while still wet, shall be brushed in the same manner as
the curb top. Except at grade changes or curbs, finished surfaces shall not vary, from the
testing edge of 10-foot straightedge, more than 1/8 inch for gutter and entrance and 1/4
inch from top and face of curb. Irregularities exceeding the above shall be satisfactorily
corrected.
3. Visible surfaces and edges of finished curb shall be free of blemishes and form and tool
marks, and shall be uniform in color, shape, and appearance.
4. No plastering shall be permitted.
5. Curbing forms shall be left in place at least twenty-four (24) hours, or until the concrete has
sufficiently set so that, in the opinion of the Engineer, the forms can be removed without
injury to the curbing.
D. Machine Formed Curbs:

1. For Machine formed curb, uniformly feed concrete to the machine so the concrete
maintains the shape of the section, without slumping after extrusion. Avoid stopping
machine during placement. If stopping is necessary, immediately cease tamping and
vibrating operations. Voids or honeycomb on the surface of the finished curb will not be
allowed. Immediately after extrusion, perform any additional surface finishing required.

3.5 CURING
A. Impervious Sheeting Method:

1. The entire exposed surface shall be wetted with a fine spray of water and then covered
with impervious sheeting material. Sheets shall be laid directly on the concrete surface
with the light-colored side up and overlapped 12 inches when a continuous sheet is not
used.
2. The curing medium shall not be less than 18 inches wider than the concrete surface to be
cured, and shall be securely weighted down by heavy wood planks, or by placing a bank of
moist earth along edges and laps in the sheets.
3. Sheets shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced if torn or otherwise damaged during
curing. The curing medium shall remain on the concrete surface to be cured for not less
than 7 days.
- or -
B. Membrane Curing Method:

1. The entire exposed surface shall be covered with a membrane forming curing compound.
2. Curing compound shall be applied in two (2) coats by hand operated pressure sprayers at
a coverage of approximately 200 square feet per gallon for both coats, unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer based upon manufacturer’s data.
3. The second coat shall be applied in a direction approximately at right angles to the
direction of application of the first coat. The compound shall form a uniform, continuous,
coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and shall be free from pinholes or other
imperfections. Apply an additional coat to all surfaces showing discontinuity, pinholes or
other defects.
4. Concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after curing compound
has been applied shall be resprayed by the above method and at the above coverage at no
additional cost to the Owner.
5. Expansion-joint openings shall be sealed at the top by inserting moistened paper or fiber
rope or covering with strips of waterproof paper prior to application of the curing
compound, in a manner to prevent the curing compound entering the joint.
6. Concrete surfaces to which membrane-curing compounds have been applied shall be
adequately protected for 7 days from pedestrian and vehicular traffic and from any other
action that might disrupt the continuity of the membrane. Any area covered with curing
compound and damaged by subsequent construction operations within the 7-day curing
period shall be resprayed as specified above at no additional expense to the Owner.
3.6 JOINTS
A. Saw cut or hand tool joints into the top of the field curb every 5 feet along the full length of the
installation, and at every fence post location.
B. Refer to Drawings for spacing of joints along entire length of field curb as coordinated with the
concrete walk. Where separate from sidewalk, install at same distance as shown on drawing for
sidewalks. Install expansion joint at curb when abutting a concrete sidewalk or vertical site
feature.
3.7 SEALING JOINTS
A. The approximately horizontal sections of expansion joints shall be sealed with joint sealer. The
joint opening shall be thoroughly cleaned before the sealing material is placed. Sealing shall be
done so that the material will not be spilled on exposed surfaces of the concrete.

B. Concrete at the joint shall be surface dry and atmospheric and concrete temperatures shall be
above 50ºF. at the time of application of joint-sealing materials. Excess material on exposed
surfaces of the concrete shall be removed immediately and exposed concrete surfaces cleaned.
C. For Machine Formed Curbs

1. Crack Control Joints. Crack control joints shall be formed or saw cut to a width of 1/8 inch
minimum, ¼ inch maximum and a depth of 1 ½ inch. The cut or formed joints shall extend
slightly below the surface of the adjacent pavement and shall be spaced at 1/8 inch
intervals. When the curb is constructed next to concrete pavement, the curb shall line up
with the pavement joints in additional joints shall be provided in the curb which line up with
the pavement joints. The saw cut or formed joints shall be left unfilled.
2. Expansion Joints. Expansion joints shall be 1 1/16 inches wide and contain Premoulded
Resilient Joint Filler. The filler shall be cut to conform to the cross section of the curb and
curb & gutter. The expansion joints shall be located at all immovable objects (bridge
structures, etc.), adjacent to expansion joints in the pavement, where shown in the contract
documents, or directed by the Engineer. Expansion joints shall not be required at regular
intervals unless otherwise shown in the contract documents.
3.8 BACKFILLING AND RESTORATION
A. After curing, debris shall be removed, and the area adjoining the concrete shall be backfilled,
graded, and compacted to conform to the surrounding area in accordance with lines and grades
indicated.
B. All lawns, pavements, driveways, shrubs, or other improvements affected by curbing placement
shall be restored to their original condition.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall protect the curbing and keep it in alignment and “first class” condition until
the completion of the Contract. Any curbing, which is damaged prior to final acceptance of the
Work, shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 1630
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the installation of concrete sidewalk as shown on the Drawings, or as
specified herein.
B. The materials and methods specified herein are directly intended for placement of “new” concrete
sidewalk. Where existing sidewalk is removed and replaced during construction, modifications to
these specifications to match existing conditions shall be made as directed by the Engineer.
a. Road & Bridge Specifications, Tennessee Department of Transportation.
b. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).
c. American Concrete Institute (ACI).
B. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all costs in connection with an approved independent
testing facility to determine conformance of materials with the specifications, if at any time during
the Work, materials appear unsuitable in the opinion of the Engineer.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Concrete:
1. The Contractor shall furnish the name and location of the concrete supplier.
2. Submit the design mix for each class of concrete prior to use in the Work.
B. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer’s catalog cuts, specifications, and installation instructions.
C. Test Results:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Concrete:
1. All cast-in-place concrete shall be ready mixed concrete meeting the following criteria:
a. 28 day compressive strength-4,000 psi.
b. Air entrainment-4% to 8%.
c. Slump-2" to 4".
B. Premoulded Expansion Joint Filler:

1. Concrete curbing shall be provided with a 1/2" premoulded expansion joint filler conforming to
ASTM D1751.
2. The premoulded expansion joint filler shall be “pre-cut” to match the concrete sidewalk cross-
sectioned dimensions as detailed on the Drawings.
TWA #019-007.1 32 1630-1 Concrete Sidewalks

C. Fabric Reinforcement:
1. 4” thick concrete Flat sheets of 6 x 6 - W 1.4 x W 1.4, ASTM A 185, welded wire fabric.
2. 5” or 6” thick concrete- Flat sheets of 6 x 6 - W 2.9 x W 2.9, ASTM A 185, welded wire fabric.
D. Sealants:
1. Joint Sealers: ASTM C 920.
E. Forms:
1. Sidewalk forms shall be of wood or steel, straight of sufficient strength to resist springing
during depositing and consolidating concrete, and of a height equal to the full depth of the
finished sidewalk.
2. Wood forms shall be surfaced plank, 2-inch nominal thickness, straight and free from warp,
twist, loose knots, splits or other defects. Wood forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet,
with a minimum of three stakes per form, at maximum spacing of 4 feet. Corners, deep
sections, and radius bends shall have additional stakes and braces, as required. Radius
bends may be formed with 3/4-inch boards, laminated to the required thickness.
3. Steel forms shall be channel-formed sections with a flat top surface and with welded braces
at each end and at not less than two intermediate points. Form ends shall be interlocked and
self- aligning. Forms shall include flexible forms for radius forming, corner forms, form
spreaders, and fillers. Forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet, with a minimum of two
welded stake pockets per form. Stake pins shall be solid steel rods with chamfered heads
and pointed tips, designed for use with steel forms.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer 24 hours before placing concrete in order to give the
Engineer an opportunity to inspect the formwork, reinforcing and related items prior to placement
of the concrete.
B. Delivery tickets shall show the amount of cement, brand, and amount of all admixtures, in addition
to information required by ASTM C94, Section 14. Water added on the job shall be approved and
the amount noted on the delivery ticket and initialed by the Contractor.
3.2 SUBBASE PREPARATION
A. Concrete sidewalk shall be constructed on a compacted granular subbase as shown on the

Drawings.
B. The completed subbase shall be tested for grade and cross section with a template extending the
full width of the sidewalk and supported between side forms.
C. The subbase shall be maintained in a smooth, compacted condition in conformity with the required
section and established grade, until the concrete is placed.
D. The subbase shall be in a moist condition when concrete is placed.
E. The subbase shall be prepared and protected so as to produce a subbase free from frost when the
concrete is deposited.
3.3 FORMWORK
A. Earth cuts may not be used as forms for vertical surfaces.

B. All forms shall be built mortar tight and of materials sufficient in strength to hold concrete without
bulging between supports. Forms shall be maintained to eliminate the formation of joints due to
shrinkage of the forms. Concrete, misshapen by bulges or deformations caused by inadequate
forms, shall be removed or corrected as ordered by the Engineer. All replacements or corrections
shall be made at the Contractor’s expense.
C. All surfaces of wooden forms that will be in contact with exposed concrete shall be thoroughly
treated with an approved lacquer in the procedure recommended by the manufacturer. Forms so
treated shall be protected from being damaged or dirtied prior to placing of the concrete.
D. Metal forms shall be treated with an approved form lacquer or may be treated with an approved
form oil. The metal used for forms shall be of sufficient thickness to remain true to shape. All bolt
and rivet heads shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together and to allow removal, without
injury to the concrete. Metal forms which do not have smooth surfaces, correct alignment and
clean surfaces shall not be used.
E. Side forms shall not be removed for less than 12 hours after finishing has been completed.
3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING
A. Preparation:
1. Set forms true to line and grade and anchor rigidly in position.
2. Transverse expansion joints shall be installed at sidewalk returns and opposite expansion
joints in adjoining curbs. Longitudinal expansion joints shall be installed between concrete
sidewalk and abutting concrete curb, continuously. Transverse expansion joints shall be
installed equally at not more than 25 feet on center, unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer, or as detailed on the Drawings.
3. Transverse expansion joints shall be filled with 1/2-inch joint filler strips. Joint filler shall be
placed with top edge 1/4 inch below the surface and shall be held in place with steel pins or
other devices to prevent warping of the filler during floating and finishing. Protect the top
edge of the joint filler during concrete placement with a temporary cap and remove after
concrete has been placed.
4. Expansion joints shall be formed about structures and features that project through or into the
sidewalk pavement, using joint filler of the type, thickness, and width indicated. The filler
shall be installed in such manner as to form a complete, uniform separation between the
structure and sidewalk pavement.
B. Placement of Fabric Reinforcement:

1. Prior to placement, clean reinforcement thoroughly of mill and rust scale and of coatings
which could destroy or reduce bond. Where there is a delay in depositing concrete after the
positioning of reinforcement, reclean reinforcement, if necessary.
2. Place reinforcement midway between top and bottom of the slab and secure against
displacement.
3. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets of fabric reinforcement at least half the mesh width.
Offset end laps in adjacent sheets to prevent continuous joints at ends. Interrupt
reinforcement at expansion joints, stopping 2 inches from edges.
C. Concrete Placement:
1. Concrete shall be placed in the forms in one layer of such thickness that when compacted
and finished the sidewalk will be of the thickness indicated. After concrete has been placed
in the forms, a strike-off guided by side forms shall be used to bring the surface to proper
section to be compacted.
2. The concrete shall be tamped and consolidated with a suitable wood or metal tamping bar,
and the surface shall be finished to grade with a wood float. Finished surface of the walk
shall not vary more than 3/16 inch from the testing edge of a 20-foot straightedge.

Irregularities exceeding the above shall be satisfactorily corrected. The surface shall be
divided into rectangular areas by means of contraction joints spaced at intervals shown on
the drawings.
3. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 unless otherwise specified herein.
4. Cold Weather Concreting: Comply with ACI 306 for placement at temperatures of, or
expected to be, below 40°F.
5. Hot Weather Concreting: Comply with ACI 305 for placement at temperature of, or expected
to be, above 90°F.
D. Concrete Finishing:
1. After straight edging, when most of the water sheen has disappeared, and just before the
concrete hardens, the surface shall be finished to a smooth and uniformly fine granular or
sandy texture free of waves, irregularities, or tool marks. A scored surface shall be produced
by brooming with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction transverse to that of the traffic, or as
otherwise shown on the drawings.
2. All slab edges, including those at formed joints, shall be finished carefully with an edger
having a radius of 1/8 inch. Corner and edges which have crumbled and areas which lack
sufficient mortar for proper finishing shall be cleaned and filled solidly with a properly
proportioned mortar mixture and then finished.
3. The completed surface shall be uniform in color and free of surface blemishes and tool
marks.
3.5 CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.
C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture retaining cover curing, or a
combination of these.as follows:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces
and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover,
placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm)
and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears occurring
during installation or curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3.6 SEALING JOINTS
A. At the end of the curing period, expansion joints shall be carefully cleaned and filled with joint
sealer. Concrete at the joint shall be surface dry, and the atmospheric and pavement
temperatures shall be above 50˚F, at the time of application of joint sealing materials.
B. Joints shall be filled flush with the concrete surface in such manner as to minimize spilling on the
walk surface. Spilled sealing material shall be removed immediately and the surface of the walk
cleaned. Dummy groove joints shall not be sealed.

3.7 BACKFILLING AND RESTORATION
A. After curing, debris shall be removed, and the area adjoining the concrete shall be backfilled,
graded, and compacted to conform to the surrounding area in accordance with lines and grades
indicated.
B. All lawns, pavements, driveways, shrubs, or other improvements affected by sidewalk placement
shall be restored to their original condition.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall protect the curbing and keep it in alignment and “first class” condition until the
completion of the Contract. Any curbing, which is damaged prior to final acceptance of the Work,
shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 321813 – SYNTHETIC TURF PLAYING FIELD SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, equipment, and materials, and do work necessary to construct a synthetic turf field as
indicated on the Drawings and as specified. Work shall include but shall not be limited to:
1. Synthetic surface including all inlays and/or painted lines/markings and related finish work.
A. Review Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this section. Specification Sections that
directly relate to work of this section include, but are not limited to:
1. Section 116833 - Outdoor Sports Equipment.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with
other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirement shall govern.
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
a. T 89 - Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils.
b. T 90 - Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils.
2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
3. Oklahoma Standard Specifications for Highway Construction.
4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. F1551 - 09(2017) - Standard Test Methods for Comprehensive Characterization of
Synthetic Turf Playing Surfaces and Materials.
b. D 1335 - Tuft Bind.
c. D 2256 - Breaking Load (Strength) and Elongation of Yarn by the Single-Strand Method.
d. F 355 - Shock Absorbing Properties of Playing Surface Systems and Materials.
5. Current USA Softball rules.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Topping Stone: Approved stone material with the sizing and performance characteristics described
herein. This stone material is installed immediately on top of the base stone to create a smooth surface
for the placement of the synthetic turf as well as to aid in achieving finish grade tolerances of the playing
field subsurface.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitutions: Other products are acceptable if in compliance with all requirements of these
specifications. Submit Product Substitution Request form and specified submittal materials Architect for
approval by specified deadline. No substitution request will be reviewed after the submittal deadline.
1. Provide substantiation that proposed system does not violate any other manufacturer's patents,
patents allowed or patents pending.
2. Provide a sample copy of insured, non-prorated warranty and insurance policy information.
SYNTHETIC TURF PLAYING FIELD SYSTEM PAGE 1 OF 11

C:\Users\4064\Desktop\Changed 070605 specs\321813 Synthetic Turf Playing Field System.docx SECTION 321813
B. Manufacturer’s Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions, catalog cuts, material safety
data sheets, storage, handling requirements and recommendations.
2. Submit fiber manufacturer’s name, type of fiber and composition of fiber
3. Submit data in detail to indicated compliance with contract documents
4. Submit manufacturer’s instructions for maintenance of turf system, including painting and
markings
C. Material Certifications: Manufacturer's or vendor's certified analysis for rubber and sand infill
amendments.
D. Synthetic Turf Material Samples and Test Reports:

1. Synthetic Turf – Three samples, approximately 8" x 11" of each color.
2. Rubber/Sand Mix with proper ratio or Rubber - three samples, approximately 8-ounces each.
3. Submit to Owner for approval - quality assurance information as delineated in paragraphs 1.6
Quality Assurance below.
4. Certified list of successful existing installations, including Owner representative and telephone
number, attesting compliance with quality assurance information.
5. Certified copies of independent (third-party) laboratory reports on ASTM tests as follows:
a. ASTM D5823, D5848 - Pile Height, Face Weight & Total Fabric Weight.
b. ASTM D5848 - Primary & Secondary Backing Weights.
c. ASTM D1335 - Tuft Bind.
d. ASTM D5034 - Grab Tear Strength.
e. ASTM D4491 – Water Permeability.
f. ASTM D355, Procedure A (system) Dynamic Cushion Test (G-max).
6. Seam – Sewn or glued per manufacturers’ recommendation:
a. 24 inches in length.
7. Color: Submit sample of line markings for approval by Owner.
E. Supplier List: Submit list of procured and contracted suppliers of all materials required for the Playing
Field System.
F. Schedule: Work schedule for all work described in these documents. This schedule shall be regularly
updated and submitted as progress continues throughout ultimate completion.
G. Shop Drawings:
1. Seam layout of the field.
2. Striping plan: Submit one for each field.
3. Layout for Owner designated sports, showing any field lines, markings, boundaries and logos.
4. Construction detail sketches, especially those that may deviate from the plans and specifications.
H. Manufacturer’s Review: submit written statement, signed by Contractor and synthetic field surfacing
installer stating that the Drawings and Specifications have been reviewed by qualified representatives of
the materials manufacturer, and that they are in agreement that the materials and system to be used for
synthetic field surfacing are proper and adequate for the applications shown.
I. Warranty: Provide a copy of the Turf Vendor’s standard Warranty noting any exceptions to the Warranty
information included in this Specification Section.

J. Turf Product System Hold Harmless: The Turf Vendor shall submit a document holding the Owner and
its representatives harmless as to any liability and or costs of any type, including but not limited to legal
costs, royalties, replacement costs, etc. associated with any claim by the Turf Vendor or others
associated and with any patents or infringements of any current or future patent issued for the synthetic
turf product, infill materials, installation methods or drainage characteristics. It is not the intent of these
documents to promote or induce the use of intellectual property belonging to others or promote
infringement of any known or currently not known patents, licenses or rights of others.
K. Statement of Supervision: Upon completion of the Work, Contractor to submit a written statement
signed by the synthetic turf manufacturer stating that the field supervision by the manufacturer’s
representative was sufficient to ensure proper application of the complete system and materials, that the
Work was installed in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the installation is acceptable to
the manufacturer.
L. The synthetic field surfacing manufacturer shall provide evidence indicating that the specified materials
have been successfully utilized on work of similar scope to that shown and specified for this Project.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: The synthetic turf manufacturer must have a specialized product for
Baseball
1. Synthetic Turf Manufacturer shall have installed a minimum of 20 Baseball/Softball fields with
their proposed Baseball/Softball product.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in the installation of synthetic turf.

1. If the installer is not an employee of the turf manufacturer, the turf manufacturer shall provide
written approval of the installer. The Superintendent shall provide a list of (5) projects for which
he/she was responsible.
1.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. After Bid award and prior to construction: Submit samples of each of the following materials to establish
Baseline specification and ratios for the remainder of the testing process.
1. Materials: Provide a one-gallon sample of each infill material to be used for testing. This shall
include but is not limited to:
a. Ambient or SBR rubber.
b. Sand or gravels.
B. During Construction: Submit samples of each of the following materials for performance testing:
1. Infill Materials:
a. Random samples shall be pulled from bulk packages or piles on-site. Number of samples at
the Owners direction. The samples shall be tagged and marked from the packages for
future reference after testing is complete. Sieve analysis testing results shall be compared
to Vendor's previously submitted analysis for the infill materials for approval. Packages
that do not meet approval shall be removed from the site. Initial testing shall be paid for by
the Owner. Retesting shall be at the Contractor's expense. Additional screening of rubber
materials by Contractor to remove fines may be required at Owner's sole discretion at no
additional cost to Owner.
2. Synthetic Turf Material Testing: Prior to shipment to the project site, one 7” x 11” sample from a
random roll shall be taken and tested by an independent laboratory with experience testing these
materials. The Engineer should be made aware of the production process so that this random roll
can be requested and selected for testing. Test results shall be submitted simultaneously to the

Owner, Engineer and Contractor. Samples/Rolls not meeting approval shall not be shipped.
Testing shall be paid for by the Contractor. Samples used for testing shall be tagged and marked
and submitted to the Engineer after testing is complete. The following shall be tested/reported:
a. ASTM D5848, D5823 - Pile Height, Face Weight & Total Fabric Weight.
b. ASTM D5848 - Primary & Secondary Backing Weights.
c. ASTM D5848 - Backing and Perforation Diameter and Spacing.
d. ASTM D1335 - Tuft Bind.
e. ASTM D5034 - Grab Tear Strength.
3. Synthetic Turf Product Safety Statement:
a. The Contractor shall submit a signed statement with documents from the turf manufacturer
that provide information on the safety of their product regarding lead, heavy metals and
other chemicals used in their product.
C. Testing Agents
1. The Owner shall contract with, and pay for, an independent testing agent to certify and make
recommendations regarding the Work. The Playing Field Contractor shall notify the Owner
regarding timing, scheduling and use of these agents.
2. Playing Field Testing Agent:
a. The Owner shall hire an independent Testing Agent to perform testing of the field system
material components.
A. All materials shall be delivered and stored within the Contractor’s work limits or in an area approved by
the Owner. Materials shall be inspected for damage immediately upon delivery.
B. All material shall be stored in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Special care shall be exercised during delivery and storage to avoid damage to the products.
D. Products that are damaged will be removed and replaced, unless the product can be repaired in an
acceptable manner by the Contractor, at his expense.
E. Packaged Materials:
1. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer.
Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site.
1.9 COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. General: Field completion shall be separated into 2 phases, “Preliminary Completion” and “Substantial
Completion.”
B. Preliminary Completion: Scheduled date for preliminary completion shall be at least 10 calendar days
before Substantial Completion. Notify the Playing Field Designer/Engineer and Owner in writing, 3 days
prior to scheduled date for observation for “Preliminary Completion.” To be considered “Preliminarily
Complete” the following items shall be provided:
1. Synthetic turf installed inclusive of infill materials, field markings.
2. In-ground boxes installed.
3. Foul post sleeves installed (Refer to 116833 Outdoor Sports Equipment).
4. Quick Coupler system installed and tested.

C. Substantial Completion: After “Preliminary Completion” observation, the Playing Field
Designer/Engineer and Owner shall prepare and submit to the Contractor, a punch list of items to be
completed to achieve “Substantial Completion”. Contractor shall notify the Playing Field
Designer/Engineer and Owner in writing, 5 days prior to a requested date for a site observation to meet
“Substantial Completion.” To be considered “Substantially Complete” or “Playable” the following items
shall be provided:
1. All “Preliminary Completion” punch list items are complete.
2. Submit five (5) copies of written operating and maintenance instructions. Provide format and
contents as directed by the Engineer.
3. Submit (5) copies of all certified surveys performed during construction for Quality Control.
4. Instruct the Team or Owner’s personnel in the operation of the irrigation and other systems.
5. Smooth, level playing surface level to grading tolerances.
6. Written warranties/guarantees.
7. Stockpiling or storage of required “attic stock” materials.
8. Upon completion of the synthetic field surface, the contractor shall provide the owner with 2
hours of maintenance training that shall be recorded on a video tape and supplied to the Owner.
9. Upon completion, Contractor shall provide Owner with project as-built/record drawings.
1.10 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE
A. General: Warranties / Guarantees specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and are in addition to and run
concurrent with other warranties/guarantees made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B. The following are inclusive of the term “Playing Field System” for provisions of the guarantee:
1. Final grade tolerances to one-quarter inch in the length of 25' of finish grade in any direction.
2. Synthetic turf product as specified and represented by the Turf manufacturer/vendor.
3. All materials and products specified.
4. Drainage through the turf shall be guaranteed to have a percolation rate of 6" per hour.
C. Playing Field System Installer Guarantee: The President/Principal(s) of both the Playing Field System
installer and the Synthetic Turf Vendor (if different) shall sign this document and it shall include the
following:
1. The turf product and its infill materials (defined as the turf system) shall be free from defects of
material and workmanship for a period of eight (8) years from date of Substantial
Completion/Acceptance of the Owner. Home plate area, pitching area, and base path areas shall
come with a 2 year Warranty.
2. Any defects will be remedied on written notice at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. The 8 year and 2 year warranties shall not be prorated.
4. The synthetic turf materials shall not fade, (significant loss of color) fail, wrinkle or show
excessive wear.
5. The exposed turf surface shall not decrease more than 10% per year according to ASTM D418,
nor exceed 50% during the warranty period. Portions of the field that fail to meet these standards
shall be replaced in both materials and labor by the Contractor.
6. Turf product shall be adaptable to painted lines.
7. Seams shall not separate, become unglued or detached.
8. The entire turf system shall be resistant to weather, insects, rot, mildew and fungus growth and be
non-allergenic and non-toxic.

9. The entire turf system shall maximize dimensional stability, resist damage and normal wear from
its designated use.
10. Adhesives used shall be resistant to moisture, bacteria, fungus and resist ultraviolet rays.
11. Guarantee shall include removal and replacement of materials (parts and labor) not performing to
the standards described to repair synthetic field surfacing at no cost to the Owner.
12. At no time in the life of the Guarantee shall the G-Max exceed 185G’s at any one point on the
field.
D. Statement of Supervision: Upon completion of the Work, Contractor to submit a written statement
signed by the synthetic turf manufacturer stating that the field supervision by the manufacturer’s
representative was sufficient to ensure proper application of the complete system and materials, that the
Work was installed in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the installation is acceptable to
the manufacturer.
E. G-Max Testing: The synthetic surface manufacturer shall retain a third party certified testing laboratory
and shall perform G-Max testing during the first year of the life of the Guarantee.
1. Testing shall be performed at 10 locations across the field. The testing shall be performed
between 90 and 120 days after substantial completion. (These tests are paid for by the Contractor).
2. Testing shall consist of shock attenuation per ASTM F-355 procedure A.
a. G-Max shall not change more than 5% (five percent) at any one location per year over the
life of the Guarantee.
1) In cases where the results of the above testing exceed the specified values, the
condition shall be corrected by the synthetic surface manufacturer. The synthetic
surface manufacturer shall provide adequate information to confirm that the
mitigation measures were effective.
b. At no time in the life of the Guarantee shall the G-Max exceed 185 at any one point on the
field. Results of this testing shall be provided to the Owner, Engineer and other assigns
each year after testing.
3. The depth of the infill material shall be measured at the point of each test location.
4. The testing shall be performed by a certified independent lab and paid for by the Contractor.
5. If the Contractor does not perform the tests within 30 days of the dates noted, the Owner shall at
its discretion order this work performed and the Contractor shall bear this cost.
6. Future testing shall be performed by a certified independent lab and paid for by the Owner.
F. Contractor shall not be held liable for incidental or consequential damages. The Synthetic Turf
Warranties described shall be conditioned upon:
1. Owner shall make all minor repairs to the synthetic turf system as discovered.
2. Owner shall maintain field as described in the Owner’s Manual submitted by the Contractor to the
Owner.
G. The Warranty does not cover any defect, failure, damage caused by or connected with abuse, neglect,
deliberate acts, acts of God, casualty or loads exceeding the Contractor’s recommendations.
1.11 SPARE PARTS/ATTIC STOCK
A. Stockpile Materials: Provide the following additional materials stored as directed by the Owner.
MATERIAL QUANTITY
Rubber Infill 1 ton

B. Turf: Material may be end of rolls or cutoffs. Minimum size of turf shall be 10 x 10. Provide the
following minimum materials and store as directed by the Owner.
1. Green Turf for field: 200 square feet.
a. If more than one color lot is used, each color lot shall be represented proportionately in the
total.
2. Turf for Lines
a. 50 Linear feet of 4 inch width for each color in use.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 SYNTHETIC INFILL TURF PRODUCT
A. Outfield Synthetic Turf:

1. Shall be a UV stable fiber
a. FieldTurf Triple Threat Speed (with Thatch)
b. Astroturf Diamond Blend (with Root Zone)
c. Shaw Truhop 50 (with Spike Zone)
d. Hellas Fusion 52 (with Thatch)
2. Systems shall meet the following:
a. Minimum Pile Height: 1.875”, ASTM D 5823
b. Tuft Bind: >10 lbs., ASTM D 1335
B. Infield and Warning Track Turf

1. Shall be a UV stable fiber
a. FieldTurf Triple Threat Speed (with Thatch)
b. Astroturf Rootzone Diamond-I (with Root Zone)
c. Shaw Truhop 46 (with Spike Zone)
d. Hellas Fusion 52 (with Thatch)
2. Systems shall meet the following:
a. Minimum Pile Height: 1.625” ASTM D 5823
b. Tuft Bind: >10 lbs., ASTM D 1335
C. Appearance/Feel:
1. The finished playing surface shall appear as mowed grass with no irregularities and shall afford
excellent traction for conventional athletic shoes of all types.
2. The finished surface shall resist abrasion and cutting from normal use.
D. Infill Materials:
1. The system shall utilize their layered SBR rubber and silicon sand system.
2. Rubber shall be dust toxics & metal free. Particle sizes shall be consistent in size and shape,
between .25 and 3 mm.
3. Sand shall meet the following gradation:
SIEVE SIZE % RETAINED

2 mm 0
.5 mm 20-30
.25 mm 40-50
.15 mm 30-40

SIEVE SIZE % RETAINED
.05 mm 5-10
4. Infill material shall be as recommended by the turf system MFR. The sand component shall be as
recommended by the turf system MFR.
5. The Warning Track shall receive additional sand infill to make the warning track at least 10 points
of G-Max above the adjacent field turf.
E. The infill depth shall be a minimum of 67% of the total fiber height at completion of field. Infill depth
vs. fiber height shall be tested by the Turf Vendor as follows:
a. Infill Testing Procedure.
b. Upon completion of the installation of the infill (including anti-static applications), a Turf
Vendor representative/Certified Installer Supervisor must measure and record 30
measurements on the attached field.
c. A depth tester for Turf and Tracks with analog or digital readout must be used in
measuring the depth of the infill.
d. At each location, 3 data points should be measured in a triangular pattern approximately
12"-18" apart. An average of the 3 data points should be recorded on the attached form.
e. Any location that measures below the minimum infill depth must be corrected to ensure the
area meets minimum requirements.
F. Tufted and inlaid lines

1. All products shall use tufted lines to the maximum extent. Inlaid lines shall be installed by cutting
and gluing or sewing all lines and markings such that the inlays are completely flush with the
surrounding turf fibers. Shaving the turf down to the backing and gluing the inlays in place is not
permitted.
G. Glued seams
1. Adhesives for bonding tufted synthetic turf shall be as recommended by the synthetic turf
manufacturer. Adhesives shall be one-part moisture cured polyurethane.
H. Sewn Seams
1. Cord for sewing seam turf shall be as recommended by the synthetic turf manufacturer.
2.2 SYNTHETIC INFILL TURF MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT
A. Provide (one) turf grooming unit including all necessary tools and equipment to properly maintain the
synthetic turf system
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PROTECTION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which all work of this Section is being
performed. Do not proceed with any work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions.
B. Protection of Work: Protect all on-going work, so as not to delay work due to weather or project related
construction. This includes but is not limited to the use of tarps, geotextile, plywood and other protective
measures.

C. Protection of Persons and Property: Provide all necessary measures to protect workmen and passersby.
Barricade open excavations occurring as part of the work, as required by municipal or other authorities
1. Protect adjacent construction throughout the entire operation. Protect newly graded areas from
destruction by weather or runoff. Protect structures, utilities, pavements, and other improvements
from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining and washout.
D. Unanticipated Conditions: Notify the Engineer immediately upon finding evidence of previous
structures, filled materials that penetrate below designated excavation levels, or other conditions which
are not shown or which cannot be reasonably assumed from existing surveys and geotechnical reports.
Secure the Owner’s instruction before proceeding with further work in such areas.
E. Installation of synthetic field surfacing shall be done only after excavation and construction work which
might injure it has been completed. Damage caused during construction shall be repaired before
acceptance.
F. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of the synthetic field surface and the surrounding
surfaces for optimum interface at all edges.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF SYNTHETIC TURF
A. Prior to beginning turf installation on any field, the Turf Installer shall submit a written statement
accepting the playing field area conditions as described earlier in this Specification.
B. Synthetic turf shall be installed by crews approved by the Synthetic Turf manufacturer and employed by
the General Contractor, (if different) in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and
instructions including but not limited to fabric, adhesives, seaming and abutting or attaching to adjacent
materials.
C. Field Markings and layout:

1. Field shall be temporarily secured at the edges with ballast or other similar means as reasonably
possible to prevent wind from misaligning or moving the turf installation prior to and throughout
the installation of the infill materials.
2. The field lines shall be tufted or inlaid for field sports as shown on the drawings.
3. All lines and markings shall be tufted in or installed as inlays. Wherever possible, lines shall be
tufted into turf panels in lieu of inlays. All markings shall have distinct edges and shall not vary
more than 1/4 inch in width and location.
4. No head or cross seams shall be allowed within the line markings of the field area.
5. Any painted lines shall be by Owner.
6. Final field markings and lining of synthetic field surfacing shall be laid out as shown on the
drawings, shop drawings and as approved by the Engineer and Owner.
7. Owner to make final determination of colors, markings, etc.
D. Seams and inlays:

1. All sewn seams (if used) shall be sewn with high strength polyester or nylon cord using a double
loop stitch or glued with an adhesive as recommended by the synthetic turf manufacturer and
installed per manufacturer’s instructions.
2. All seams shall be flat, tight and permanent with no separation or fraying.
3. The width between fiber rows at seams shall be equal to that of the tufting gauge of the turf
product.
4. All seams shall be brushed and fibers trimmed as necessary so as to appear “seamless”.

5. All sewn seams shall be “butt seamed” to eliminate overlap so as to appear seamless.
6. All glued seams shall be brushed to eliminate adhesive materials from turf fibers.
7. Supplemental backing used at glued seams.
a. Inlays shall bridge the seam or edges a minimum of 4 inches.
8. All inlaid lines shall be backed using seaming tape with a width of 12 inches.
E. Application of adhesive materials or infill materials shall not be applied when:

1. Air or material temperatures are below 50º F (10º C).
2. Rain is falling or conditions exist or are pending that will be unsuitable to the installation.
F. Infill materials:
1. Do not begin installation of the infill materials until the field has been observed in the presence of
the Engineer/Owner. Debris from turf installation shall be removed, seams and inlays shall be
observed. Inlays using glue shall be properly set up before infill is added.
2. Apply dry materials when the turf is dry.
3. The path from the stored on-site infill materials shall be kept clean and clear to eliminate
contamination onto the playing field area.
4. For installations utilizing 100% rubber infill, the infill shall be applied in numerous uniform
layers over the entire surface with industry standard broadcasting equipment.
5. For installations utilizing sand and rubber infill, the infill shall be applied in numerous uniform
layers over the entire surface with industry standard broadcasting equipment.
6. The Contractor shall utilize a combination of rolling and watering the surface after infill materials
have been installed to settle the materials into the turf. After this process, the Engineer/Owner
shall inspect the surface for footing and stability and possible settlement or unevenness of infill
depth. Additional treatments may be required to achieve approval by the Owner and Engineer to
achieve footing, stability and uniformity of infill depth.
7. Infill materials shall be applied at a uniform depth and at an ultimate finish grade tolerance of 1/4
inch at any point over the entire playing field area. Fill to a depth in accordance with Part 2.3 C 6.
8. Fiber shall not be buried or trapped below infill material when complete.
G. Anchor turf edges at field perimeter attaching to concrete or wood nailers. Glue and nails shall be used
for entire installed perimeter to attach turf to these edges.
H. The finish turf surface shall have a permeability test performed on 5 locations on the field. The
permeability test shall utilize a dual ring infiltrometer in accordance with ASTM test method. All test
results must be greater than 6 inches per hour.
3.3 FIELD MARKINGS
A. The field lines shall be tufted or inlaid per Owner designated sports. The final field markings shall meet
the USA Softball standards as shown on the striping plan drawings.
1. General:
a. Owner to make final determination of colors.
b. Refer to Drawings for layout of sports and line color associated with each sport.
3.4 CLEAN UP
A. At the end of each day, remove all scraps and other debris created by the synthetic turf installation from
the playing field area.

B. At end of turf installation for each field and just prior to punch list, contractor to use magnetic
device/equipment to remove all metallic materials on field caused by construction.
C. Remove all surplus excavated material not required for filling and backfilling, trash, and debris and
dispose of it properly off of the Owner’s property at Contractor’s expense.
D. Leave the premises and work in clean, satisfactory condition.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protection of materials and work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor during installation and thru
acceptance/substantial completion. All material damaged prior to acceptance shall be replaced at no cost
to the Owner.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 1823.20
INFIELD MIX
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes installation of infield mix for the baseball/softball infield and warning track,
as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all costs associated with the qualified Testing Engineer
and Testing Laboratory to determine the conformance of the products described herein with the
plans and specifications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a 2-pound sample of each of the clay/sand mixture
taken from the source of supply they propose to use, together with a report from an approved
soil testing laboratory giving a physical analysis of the proportions of sand, clay and silt
contained therein. Sample shall be labeled with Contract Name, and name of supplier. All
clay/sand mixture used in the work shall conform to approved sample.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Baseball Infield Mix: “Dura Edge Classic Infield Mix,” by Dura Edge or approved equal. Infield
mix shall conform to the following specifications:
ASTM D 698
STANDARD PROCTOR ANALYSIS
Optimum Moisture Content 7.8%
Maximum Dry Density (Loose):

LB/Cu. Ft. 133.40
TN/Cu.Yd. 1.80
Maximum Wet Density (Compacted):
LB/Cu. Ft. 143.80
TN/Cu. Yd. 1.94
ASTM PARTICLE SIZE ANALYSIS
SIEVE ANALYSIS SOIL CLASSIFICATION
Sand 70%-75%
Combined Medium and Coarse Sand >50%
Gravel (#10 sieve) < or = to 3%
Combined Silt and Clay 25%-30%
Clay > or = to 13%
Silt:Clay Ratio < or = to 1
TWA #019-007.1 32 1823.20-1 Infield Mix

B. Warning Track Mix: “Warning Track Mix” by: Dura Edge or approved equal. Warning track mix
shall conform to the following specifications:
ASTM D 698
STANDARD PROCTOR ANALYSIS
Optimum Moisture Content 10.7%
Maximum Dry Density (Loose):

LB/Cu. Ft. 120.10
TN/Cu.Yd. 1.62
Maximum Wet Density (Compacted):

LB/Cu. Ft. 133.00
TN/Cu. Yd. 1.80
ASTM PARTICLE SIZE ANALYSIS

SIEVE ANALYSIS SOIL CLASSIFICATION
Sand 91%
Silt 4%
Clay 2%
C. Coarse and Medium Sand: The sand shall be clean and sharp and free from lumps and foreign
matter. Sand shall conform to grading requirements as follows:
PASSING PERCENTAGE
l/4" screen 100%
#4 screen 98 – 100%
#10 screen 90 – 98%
#18 screen 80 – 95%
#35 screen 65 – 85%
#16 screen 20 – 40%
#140 screen 0 – 10%
#270 screen 0 – 2%
D. Clay Bricks: Diamond Pro Mound/Home Plate Clay Bricks to construct pitcher’s mound and
catcher’s and batter’s box areas, by Dura Edge or approved equal.
E. Mound and Home Plate Mix: Diamond Pro mound/home plate clay, 3-inch depth, by Dura Edge
or approved equal.
2.2 ADDITIONAL MATERIALS
A. Contractor shall provide the 3 cubic yards of additional materials to the Owner to be stockpiled at
a location approved by the Owner.
TWA #019-007.1 32 1823.20-2 Infield Mix

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate Infield mix installation with the installation of irrigation, fencing, and other related
items. Prior to installation of infield surfacing system, install forms to clearly delineate and limit
edges of infield mixture and adjacent topsoil.
3.2 INSPECTION
A. Verify that the baseball infield and warning track subbase materials have been installed in
accordance with the plans and specifications, and to the grades and lines indicated.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. The sand layer shall be spread to the depths indicated on the details and hand rolled to the
required depth. The infield mix material shall be spread over the sand layer and hand rolled to
the depths indicated on the details.
B. Laser grade infield mix to lines and grades indicated on the Drawings. Ensure infield mixture is
flush with adjacent sodded lawn areas.
3.4 ACCEPTANCE
A. Basis of Acceptance shall be the complete installation of all skinned and warning track materials
to the lines, levels, and depths indicated by the plans and specifications, demonstrated to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.5 CLEAN UP
A. Remove all surplus materials from the Project Site.
B. Leave the Project Site in a neat, clean condition.
END OF SECTION
TWA #019-007.1 32 1823.20-3 Infield Mix

SECTION 32 3113
CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for, and
incidental to, the installation of chain link fence and gates, as shown on the Drawings and as
specified herein.
B. All chain link fence shall have a thermally-bonded and fused polymer color coating.
C. All gates and gate hardware shall be powder coated.
A. Comply with standards of the Chain Link Fence Manufacturer’s Institute.
B. Provide steel fence and related gates as a complete system produced by a single manufacturer,
including necessary erection accessories, fittings and fastenings.
C. Comply with ASTM A53 for requirements of Schedule 40 piping.
D. Comply with ASTM F668 Specification for Polymer Coated Chain Link Fence Fabric.
E. Comply with ASTM F1043 Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings of Metal Industrial
Fence Framework.
F. Height of fence shall be measured from the top of concrete footing to the top of post.
G. Manufacturer: Company shall be headquartered in the US having US manufacturing

facility/facilities specializing in manufacturing chain link fence products with at least 5 years of
experience.
H. Fence contractor: Company with demonstrated successful experience installing similar projects
and products in accordance with ASTM F567.
I. Tolerances: Current published edition of ASTM specifications tolerances apply. ASTM

specification tolerance supersede any conflicting tolerance.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for chain-link fences and gates.
1. Fence and gate posts, rails and fittings.
2. Chain link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments.
3. Gates and hardware.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of fences, gates, posts, rails, tension wires, details of extended
posts, extension arms, gate swing, or other operation, hardware, and accessories. Indicate
materials, dimensions, sizes, weights, and finishes of components. Include plans, gate
TWA #019-007.1 32 3113-1 Chain Link Fence and Gates

elevations, sections details of post anchorages, attachment, bracing, and other required
installation and operational clearances.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of chain-link fence and gate indicated:
1. Polymer coated steel wire (for fabric) in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths on shapes for posts, rails,
wires and gate framing.
2. Two-stage powder coat finish, in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths on shapes for gate framing.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of chain-link fence and gate, signed by product
manufacturer:
1. Strength test results for framing according to ASTM F1043.
2. Material certifications, made in USA, Buy America Act or Buy America when required.
E. Qualification Data: For installer.
F. Field quality-control test reports.
G. Maintenance Data: For the following to include in maintenance manuals:

1. Polymer finishes.
2. Powder coat finishes.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed chain-link fences and gates
similar in material, design and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
A. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on
Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field
measurements.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL FRAME WORK

A. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, minimum Nominal Framework Sizes shall be the
following:
CONCRETE
FOUNDATION DIA.
Diameters Corner/End
END, PULL &
FENCE LINE CORNER & RAILS & GATE *GATE LINE GATE
HEIGHT POSTS PULL POSTS BRACES FRAMES POSTS POSTS POSTS DEPTH
3' 1-1/2" 2" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 3" 12" 12" 4'
3'-6" 2" 3" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 4" 12" 12" 4'
4' 2” 3" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 4" 12" 12" 4'
4'-6" 2” 3" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 4" 12" 12" 4'
5' 2” 3" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 4" 12" 12" 4'
6' 2” 3" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 4" 12" 18" 4'
8' 2” 3" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 4" 12" 18" 4'

CONCRETE
FOUNDATION DIA.
Diameters Corner/End
END, PULL &
FENCE LINE CORNER & RAILS & GATE *GATE LINE GATE
HEIGHT POSTS PULL POSTS BRACES FRAMES POSTS POSTS POSTS DEPTH
10' 3" 4" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 4" 12" 18" 4'
12' 3" 4" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 4" 12" 18" 5'
16' 3-1/2" 4" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 4" 12" 18" 5'
20’ 4” 4” 1-5/8” N/A N/A 18” 18” 5’
50,000 PSI
SCHEDULE 40 STEEL PIPE TABLE HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED STEEL TUBING
ACTUAL
NOMINAL OUTSIDE ACTUAL
SIZE DIAMETER WEIGHT NOMINAL SIZE OUTSIDE WEIGHT
(IN.) (IN.) *(LB/FT) (IN.) DIAMETER (IN.) *(LB/FT)
1 1.315 1.67 1 1.315
1-1/4 1.660 2.27 1-1/4 1.660 1.83
1-1/2 1.900 2.71 1-1/2 1.900 2.28
2 2.375 3.65 2 2.375 3.12
2-1/2 2.875 5.79 2-1/2 2.875 4.64
3 3.500 7.58 3 3.500 5.71
3-1/2 4.000 9.11 3-1/2 4.000 6.56
B. Pipe must comply with ASTM F1043 Group 1A or 1C.
C. Round Steel Pipe and Rail: Schedule 40 standard weight pipe, in accordance with ASTM F1043,
materials design Group 1A minimum steel yield strength 30,000 psi. Type A, 1.8 oz/ft2 hot
dipped galvanized zinc exterior and 1.8 oz/ft2 hot dipped galvanized zinc interior coating.
OR
D. Round Steel Pipe and Rail: Round steel pipe and rail to be cold-rolled electric resistance welded
pipe in accordance with ASTM 1043 materials group 1C, minimum steel yield strength 50,000
psi. Type B external coating, hot dip galvanized zinc 1.0 oz/ft2 with a clear polymeric overcoat,
Type D interior 90% by weight zinc-rich coating having a minimum thickness of 0.30 mils.
E. Polymer Color Coated Pipe: Polymer coated pipe shall have a polyester or polyolefin coating
fused and adhered to the exterior zinc coating of the galvanized pipe in accordance with ASTM
F1043. The minimum thickness of the polymer coating shall be 3 mils.
1. Color: Black, per ASTM F934.
F. Polymer Coated Color Fittings: In compliance with ASTM F626. Polymer coating minimum
thickness to be 0.006 in. fused and adhered to the zinc coated fittings. Color to match fence
system.
2.2 CHAIN LINK FABRIC
A. General: Height indicated on Drawings. Provide fabric in one-piece heights for fence heights up
to 10 feet measured between top and bottom of outer edge of selvage knuckle or twist. Comply
with ASTM A392, CLFMI CLF 2445, and requirements indicated below:

1. Steel Chain Link Wire Fabric:
a. Zinc-coated steel fabric: ASTM A392 hot dipped galvanized before or after weaving.
1) Class 2 – 2.0 oz/ft2.
a) 9-gauge core diameter for fences and gates.
b) 6-gauge core diameter for backstops.
b. Polymer Coated Steel Fabric: ASTM F668, the wire gauge specified for polymer
coated wire is that of the metallic coated steel core wire.
1) Class 2b fused and adhered.
2) Color: Black, In compliance with ASTM F934.
B. Mesh Size:
1. 2 inches for fences.
C. Selvages: Knuckled top and bottom.
2.3 SWING GATES
A. Assemble gate frames with fully coped welds as shown on the Drawings or on Shop Drawings
1. All ferrous metal components shall be blast cleaned to and SSPC-6 commercial blast
clean.
B. Galvanized steel welded fabrication in compliance with ASTM F900. Frame members spaced no
greater than 8 ft. apart vertically and horizontally. Welded joints protected by applying zinc-rich
paint in accordance with ASTM Practice A780. Positive locking gate latch, pressed steel
galvanized after fabrication. Galvanized malleable iron or heavy gauge press steel post and
frame hinges. Match gate fabric to that of the fence system.
C. Powder Coated Framework for Gates:

1. Colored Powder Coated Framework:
a. Powder for coating shall be a polyester-based thermal setting resin.
b. Powder coat system shall meet or exceed the following test requirements:
1) Direct Impact Resistance: ASTM D2794-93, up to 160 inches per pound.
2) Flexibility: ASTM D522-93, Method B, equal to or less than a 1/4-inch mandrel.
3) Pencil Hardness: ASTM D3363-93a, HB-2H.
4) Crosshatch Adhesion: ASTM D3359-97, Method B, 5B.
5) Salt Spray Resistance: ASTM B117 plus 1,000 hours.
6) Humidity Resistance: ASTM D2247 plus 1,000 hours.
c. Moveable parts such as hinges, latches and drop rods may be field coated using a
liquid polymer touch up.
d. Chain link fabric on gate same as finish same for fencing.
e. Color: To match that of the fencing system.
2.4 GATE HARDWARE
A. Hinges: Non-lift-off type, offset to permit 180-degree swing, and of suitable size and weight to
support gate. Provide 1-1/2 pair of hinges for each leaf over 6 feet high.
B. Latch: Provide plunger bar type complete with flush plate set in concrete for all double gates
and single gates over 10 feet. Padlock eye shall be an integral part of latch construction.
1. Provide plunger bar complete with flush plate set in concrete on each gate leaf
2. Provide flush plate set in concrete for both the fully open position and full closed position

C. Keeper for Vehicle Gates: Provide keeper which automatically engages the gate leaf and holds
it in open position until manually released.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Post Tops: Steel, wrought iron, or malleable iron.
B. Stretcher Bars: One piece equal to full height of fabric, minimum cross-section 3/16 inch by
3/4 inch.
C. Metal Bands (for stretcher bars): Steel, wrought iron, or malleable iron, to secure stretcher bars
to end, corner, pull and gate posts.
D. Wire Ties:
1. For tying fabric to line posts, rails and braces: 9-gauge steel wire.
E. Truss Rods: 3/8-inch diameter.
F. Angle Beams, I Beams and Steel Shapes: ASTM A36.
G. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307, Grade A.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for a
verified survey of property lines and legal boundaries, site clearing, earthwork, pavement work
and other conditions affecting performance:
1. Begin installation in general site areas or those not directly adjacent to the playing field
only after final grading including topsoiling and paving is completed in that area or as
otherwise permitted by Engineer.
2. For installation directly adjacent to the playing field, coordinate footing installation timing
with final installation of playing field materials so as not to contaminate, destroy or displace
these playing field materials.
3. If unsatisfactory conditions are present, proceed with installation only after they have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate fence and gate installation with completion of finished grading and installation of
adjacent finish field materials.
B. Stake locations of fence lines, gates and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet or
line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, irrigation system, underground
structures, benchmarks and property monuments.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Space posts equidistant in the fence line with a maximum of 10 feet on center or as shown on
Drawings.

B. Footings: Excavate holes as indicated for fence and gate posts. Excavate footings to depths and
widths as noted in Specifications or on drawings. Install gravel drainage material in bottom of
hole as shown on the drawings.
C. Setting Posts and Footings at Concrete Areas: Set posts in center of hole. Embed post so that
bottom of post is flush with the bottom of concrete footing and in gravel drainage layer. Fill hole
with concrete. Plumb and align posts. Vibrate or tamp concrete for consolidation. Finish
elevation on top of footing to be coordinated with construction of concrete adjacent to posts or as
shown on drawings. Do not attach fabric to posts until concrete has cured a minimum of 7 days.
D. Setting Posts and Footings at Warning Track Areas: Set posts in center of hole. Embed post so
that bottom of post is flush with the bottom of concrete footing and in gravel drainage layer. Fill
hole with concrete. Plumb and align posts. Vibrate or tamp concrete for consolidation. Finish
elevation on top of footing to be set below finish grade. Do not attach fabric to posts until
concrete has cured a minimum of 7 days.
E. Setting Posts and Footings in Grass Areas: Set posts in center of hole. Embed post so that
bottom of post is flush the bottom of concrete footing and in gravel drainage layer. Fill hole with
concrete. Plumb and align posts. Vibrate or tamp concrete for consolidation. Finish concrete in
a dome shape above ground to shed water. Do not attach fabric to posts until concrete has
cured a minimum of 7 days.
F. Locate corner posts at corners and at changes in direction. Use pull posts at all abrupt changes
in grade and at intervals no greater than 500 feet. On runs over 500 feet, space pull posts
evenly between corner or end posts. On long curves, space pull posts so that the strain of the
fence will not bend the line posts.
G. Install top rail continuously through post caps or extension arms, bending to radius for curved
runs. Install expansion couplings as recommended by fencing manufacturers.
H. Install intermediate rails in one piece between posts and flush with post on fabric side using
special offset fittings where necessary.
I. Diagonally brace corner posts, pull posts, and terminal posts to adjacent line posts with truss
rods and turnbuckles.
J. Attach fabric to playing field side of fence. Bottom of fabric to be set on finished grade of curb,
track, or playing field except when indicated otherwise. Thread stretcher bars through fabric
using one bar for each gate and end post and two for each corner and pull post. Pull fabric tight
so that the maximum deflection of fabric is 2 inches when a 30-pound pull is exerted
perpendicular to the center of a panel. Maintain tension by securing stretcher bars to posts with
metal bands spaced 15 inches on center. Fasten fabric to steel framework with wire ties spaced
12 inches on center for line posts and 24 inches on center for rails and braces. Bend back wire
ends to prevent injury. Tighten stretcher bar bands, wire ties, and other fasteners securely.
K. Attach fabric to security side of fence for lawn areas. Maintain a maximum 1 inch clearance
above finished grade except when indicated otherwise. Thread stretcher bars through fabric
using one bar for each gate and end post and two for each corner and pull post. Pull fabric tight
so that the maximum deflection of fabric is 2 inches when a 30-pound pull is exerted
perpendicular to the center of a panel. Maintain tension by securing stretcher bars to posts with
metal bands spaced 15 inches on center. Fasten fabric to steel framework with wire ties spaced
12 inches on center for line posts and 24 inches on center for rails and braces. Bend back wire
ends to prevent injury. Tighten stretcher bar bands, wire ties, and other fasteners securely.

L. Position bolts for securing metal bands and hardware so nuts are located opposite the fabric
side of fence. Tighten nuts and score excess threads.
1. Secure post tops, extension arms, and caps with one-way cadmium plated steel screws.
M. Install gates plumb and level and adjust for full opening without interference. Install ground-set
items in concrete for anchorage, as recommended by fence manufacturer. Adjust hardware for
smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. Attach fabric as for fencing. Install ground-set
items in concrete as shown on the drawings.
N. Touch Up: Small nicks or other blemishes shall be touched up with paint materials suitable for
and matching the finish of the damaged material. Severely damaged fencing/gates deemed as
unacceptable at the sole discretion of the Owner or its representatives shall be replaced at the
contractor’s expense.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 323223 - MODULAR BLOCK RETAINING WALLS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work includes furnishing and installing modular concrete block retaining wall units to the lines and
grades designated on the construction drawings and as specified herein.
B. Reference Standards
1. ASTM C1372 Standard Specification for Segmental Retaining Wall Units.
2. ASTM C1262 Evaluating the Freeze thaw Durability of Manufactured CMU’s and Related
concrete Units
3. ASTM D698 Moisture Density Relationship for Soils, Standard Method
4. ASTM D422 Gradation of Soils
5. ASTM C140 Sample and Testing concrete Masonry Units
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at 400 High School Drive, Boone, NC.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For each color and texture of concrete unit specified. Submit full-size unit.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For modular concrete block retaining walls.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Contractor shall submit stamped and signed shop drawings by a licensed professional engineer for all
project related retaining walls.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of modular concrete block retaining wall unit and soil
reinforcement from manufacturer.
1. Include test data for shear strength between modular concrete block retaining wall units
according to ASTM D6916.
2. Include test data for connection strength between modular concrete block retaining wall units
and soil reinforcement according to ASTM D6638.
D. Product Test Reports: For each type of modular concrete block retaining wall unit and soil
reinforcement, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
1. Include test data for freeze-thaw durability of modular concrete block retaining wall units.
2. Include test data for shear strength between modular concrete block retaining wall units
according to ASTM D6916.
3. Include test data for connection strength between modular concrete block retaining wall units
and soil reinforcement according to ASTM D6638.
MODULAR BLOCK RETAINING WALLS PAGE 1 OF 8

V:\ProjectSpecs\055725.000\Final\CD Submission - Current, due Apr 21, 2020\323223 Modular Block Retaining Walls.docx SECTION 323223
E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For modular concrete block retaining wall units and soil reinforcement,
from ICC-ES.
F. Preconstruction test reports.
G. Source quality-control reports.
H. Field quality-control reports.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E329 for testing indicated.
1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following
preconstruction testing:
1. Test soil reinforcement and backfill materials for pullout resistance according to ASTM D6706.
2. Test soil reinforcement and backfill materials for coefficient of friction according to
ASTM D5321.
A. Check the materials upon delivery to assure proper material has been received.
B. Prevent excessive mud, cementitious material, and like construction debris from coming in contact
with the materials.
C. Protect the materials from damage. Damaged material shall not be incorporated in the project (ASTM
C1372).
D. Store and handle concrete units and accessories to prevent deterioration or damage due to
contaminants, breaking, chipping, or other causes.
E. Store geosynthetics in manufacturer's original packaging with labels intact. Store and handle
geosynthetics to prevent deterioration or damage due to sunlight, chemicals, flames, temperatures
above 160 deg F (71 deg C) or below 32 deg F (0 deg C), and other conditions that might damage
them. Verify identification of geosynthetics before use, and examine them for defects as material is
placed.
1.8 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractors shall be trained and certified by local manufacturer or equivalent accredited organization.
1. Allan Block and NCMA have certification programs that are accredited. Identify when
advanced certification levels are appropriate based on complexity and criticality of project
application.
2. Contractors shall provide a list of projects they have completed.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A. Basis of Design: Design of modular concrete block retaining walls is based on products indicated. If
comparable products of another manufacturer are proposed, engage a qualified professional engineer,
as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design modular concrete block retaining
walls.
B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality
Requirements," to design modular concrete block retaining walls.
C. Compliance Review: Qualified professional engineer responsible for modular concrete block
retaining wall design shall review and approve submittals and source and field quality-control reports
for compliance of materials and construction with design.
D. Structural Performance: Engineering design shall be based on the following loads and be according to
NCMA's "Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls."
1. Gravity loads due to soil pressures resulting from grades and sloped backfill indicated.
2. Superimposed loads (surcharge) indicated on Drawings.
2.2 MODULAR CONCRETE BLOCK RETAINING WALL UNITS
A. The basis of design for the wall units shall be Allan Block Retaining Wall units as produced by a
licensed manufacturer or approved equal.
B. Wall units shall have minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) in accordance
with ASTM C1372. The concrete units shall have adequate freeze-thaw protection with an average
absorption rate in accordance with ASTM C1372 or an average absorption rate of 7.5 lb./ft³ (120
kg/m³) for northern climates and 10 lb./ft³ (160 kg/m³) for southern climates.
C. Exterior dimensions shall be uniform and consistent. Maximum dimensional deviations on the height
of any two units shall be 0.125 in. (3 mm).
D. Wall units shall provide a minimum of 110 lbs total weight per square foot of wall face area (555
kg/m²). Hollow cores to be filled with wall rock and compacted by using plate compactor on top of
wall units (see section 3.4). Unit weight of wall rock in cores may be less than 100% depending on
compacted base.
E. Exterior face shall be textured. Color as specified by owner.
F. Freeze Thaw Durability: Like all concrete products, dry-cast concrete SRW units are susceptible to
freeze-thaw degradation with exposure to de-icing salts and cold temperature. This is a concern in
northern tier states that use deicing salts. Based on good performance experience by several agencies,
ASTM C1372, Standard Specification for Segmental Retaining Wall Units should be used as a
model, except that the compressive strength for the units should be increased to a minimum of 4,000
– 5,800 psi (28 - 40 MPa) unless local requirements dictate higher levels. Also, maximum water
absorption should be reduced and requirements for freeze-thaw testing increased.
1. Require a current passing ASTM C1262 or equivalent governing standard or public authority,
test report from material supplier in northern or cold weather climates.
2. See the Best Practices for SRW Design document for detailed information on freeze thaw
durability testing criteria and regional temperature and exposure severity figures and tables to
define the appropriate zone and requirements for the project.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Wall Rock
1. Material must be well-graded compactable aggregate, 0.25 in. to 1.5 in., (6 mm - 38 mm) with
no more than 10% passing the #200 sieve. (ASTM D422)
2. Material behind and within the blocks may be the same material.
B. Infill Soil
1. Infill material shall be site excavated soils when approved by the on-site soils engineer unless
otherwise specified in the drawings. Unsuitable soils for backfill (heavy clays or organic soils)
shall not be used in the reinforced soil mass. Fine grained cohesive soils with friction angle (ф)
less than 31 degrees with a PI ranging between 6 and 20 and LL from 30 to 40, may be used in
wall construction, but additional backfilling, compaction and water management efforts are
required. Poorly graded sands, expansive clays and/or soils with a plasticity index (PI) greater
than 20 or a liquid limit (LL) greater than 40 should not be used in wall construction.
Sieve Size Percent Passing

1 inch (25 mm) 100 – 75
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 100 – 20
No. 40 (0.425 mm) 0 - 60
No. 200 (0.075 mm) 0-35
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test and inspect each roll of soil reinforcement for minimum average roll values for
geosynthetic index property tests, including the following:
1. Weight.
2. Grab or single-rib strength.
3. Aperture opening.
4. Rib or yarn size.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
excavation tolerances, condition of subgrades, and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
3.2 EXCAVATION
A. Contractor shall excavate to the lines and grades shown on the construction drawings. Contractor
shall use caution not to over-excavate beyond the lines shown, or to disturb the base elevations
beyond those shown.
B. Contractor shall verify locations of existing structures and utilities prior to excavation. Contractor
shall ensure all surrounding structures are protected from the effects of wall excavation.

3.3 FOUNDATION SOIL PREPARATION
A. Foundation soil shall be defined as any soils located beneath a wall.
B. Foundation soil shall be excavated as dimensioned on the plans and compacted to a minimum of 95%
of Standard Proctor (ASTM D698) prior to placement of the base material.
C. Foundation soil shall be examined by the on-site soils engineer to ensure that the actual foundation
soil strength meets or exceeds assumed design strength. Soil not meeting the required strength shall
be removed and replaced with acceptable material.
3.4 BASE
A. The base material shall be the same as the Wall Rock material (Section 2.3) or a low permeable
granular material.
B. Base material shall be placed as shown on the construction drawing. Top of base shall be located to
allow bottom wall units to be buried to proper depths as per wall heights and specifications.
C. Base material shall be installed on undisturbed native soils or suitable replacement fills compacted to
a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor (ASTM D698).
D. Base shall be compacted at 95% Standard Proctor (ASTM D698) to provide a level hard surface on
which to place the first course of blocks. The base shall be constructed to ensure proper wall
embedment and the final elevation shown on the plans. Well-graded sand can be used to smooth the
top 1/2 in. (13 mm) on the base material.
E. Base material shall be a 4 in. (100 mm) minimum depth for walls under 4 ft. (1.2 m) and a 6 in. (150
mm) minimum depth for walls over 4 ft. (1.2 m).
3.5 RETAINING WALL INSTALLATION
A. General: Place units according to NCMA's "Segmental Retaining Wall Installation Guide" and
modular concrete block retaining wall unit manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install units in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for the
specific concrete retaining wall unit, and as specified herein.
2. Form corners and ends by using special units.
B. Ensure that units are in full contact with base. Proper care shall be taken to develop straight lines and
smooth curves on base course as per wall layout.
C. Do not use units with chips, cracks, or other defects that are visible at a distance of 20 feet (6 m)
where such defects are exposed in the completed Work.
D. Leveling Base: Place and compact base material to thickness indicated and with not less than 95
percent maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D698.
E. Fill all cores and cavities and a minimum of 12 in. (300 mm) behind the base course with wall rock.
Use infill soils behind the wall rock and approved soils in front of the base course to firmly lock in
place. Check again for level and alignment. Use a plate compactor to consolidate the area behind the
base course. All excess material shall be swept from top of units.

F. Install next course of wall units on top of base course. Position blocks to be offset from seams of
blocks below. Perfect "running bond" is not essential, but a 3 in. (75 mm) minimum offset is
recommended. Check each block for proper alignment and level. Fill all cavities in and around wall
units and to a minimum of 12 in. (300 mm) depth behind block with wall rock. Wall rock and infill
soil placed in uniform lifts not exceeding 8 in. (200 mm). Compaction requirements for all soils in
areas in, around and behind the reinforced mass shall be compacted to 95% of maximum Standard
Proctor dry density (ASTM D698) with a moisture content control of +1% to -3% of optimum.
G. For taller wall applications, structural fill should be specified for a minimum bottom 1/3 to 1/2 of the
reinforced fill. If structural fill is not utilized in the reinforced mass, the depth of wall rock behind
the block should be increased. See the Best Practices for SRW Design document.
H. The consolidation zone shall be defined as 3 ft (0.9 m) behind the wall. Compaction within the
consolidation zone shall be accomplished by using a hand operated plate compactor and shall begin
by running the plate compactor directly on the block and then compacting in parallel paths from the
wall face until the entire consolidation zone has been compacted. A minimum of two passes of the
plate compactor are required with maximum lifts of 8 in. (200 mm). Expansive or fine-grained soils
may require additional compaction passes and/or specific compaction equipment such as a sheepsfoot
roller. Maximum lifts of 4 in. (100 mm) may be required to achieve adequate compaction within the
consolidation zone. Employ methods using lightweight compaction equipment that will not disrupt
the stability or batter of the wall. Final compaction requirements in the consolidation zone shall be
established by the engineer of record.
I. Install each subsequent course in like manner. Repeat procedure to the extent of wall height.
J. As with any construction work, some deviation from construction drawing alignments will occur.
Variability in construction of SRWs is approximately equal to that of cast-in-place concrete retaining
walls. As opposed to cast-in-place concrete walls, alignment of SRWs can be simply corrected or
modified during construction. Based upon examination of numerous completed SRWs, the following
recommended minimum tolerances can be achieved with good construction techniques.
Vertical Control - ±1.25 in. (32 mm) max over 10 ft. (3 m) distance
Horizontal Location Control - straight lines ±1.25 in. (32 mm) over a 10 ft. (3 m) distance
Rotation - from established plan wall batter: ±2.0°
K. Geogrid Installation
1. Install Allan Block wall to designated height of first geogrid layer. Backfill and compact the
wall rock and infill soil in layers not to exceed 8 in. (200 mm) lifts behind wall to depth equal
to designed grid length before grid is installed.
2. Cut geogrid to designed embedment length and place on top of the Allan Block units to back
edge of the raised front lip or within 1 in. (25 mm) of the concrete retaining wall face when
using AB Fieldstone. Extend away from wall approximately 3% above horizontal on
compacted infill soils.
3. Lay geogrid at the proper elevation and orientations shown on the construction drawings or as
directed by the wall design engineer.
4. Correct orientation of the geogrid shall be verified by the contractor and on-site soils engineer.
Strength direction is typically perpendicular to wall face.
5. Follow manufacturer’s guidelines for overlap requirements. In curves and corners, layout shall
be as specified in Design Detail 9-12: Using Grid with Corners and Curves, see page 14 of the
AB Spec Book.
6. Place next course of Allan Block on top of grid and fill block cores with wall rock to lock in
place. Remove slack and folds in grid and stake to hold in place.

7. Adjacent sheets of geogrid shall be butted against each other at the wall face to achieve 100
percent coverage.
8. Geogrid lengths shall be continuous. Splicing parallel to the wall face is not allowed.
3.6 FILL PLACEMENT
A. Infill soil shall be placed in lifts and compacted as specified under Section 1, Part 3.4, Unit
Installation.
B. Infill soil shall be placed, spread and compacted in such a manner that minimizes the development of
slack or movement of the geogrid.
C. Only hand-operated compaction equipment shall be allowed within 3 ft. (0.9 m) behind the wall. This
area shall be defined as the consolidation zone. Compaction in this zone shall begin by running the
plate compactor directly on the block and then compacting in parallel paths from the wall face back,
until the entire consolidation zone has been compacted. A minimum of two passes of the plate
compactor are required with maximum lifts of 8 in. (200 mm). Section 1, Part 3.4 E, Page 3.
D. When fill is placed and compaction cannot be defined in terms of Standard Proctor Density, then
compaction shall be performed using ordinary compaction process and compacted so that no
deformation is observed from the compaction equipment or to the satisfaction of the engineer of
record or the site soils engineer.
E. Tracked construction equipment shall not be operated directly on the geogrid. A minimum fill
thickness of 6 in. (150 mm) is required prior to operation of tracked vehicles over the geogrid.
Turning of tracked vehicles should be kept to a minimum to prevent tracks from displacing the fill
and damaging the geogrid.
F. Rubber-tired equipment may pass over the geogrid reinforcement at slow speeds, less than 10 mph
(16 Km/h). Sudden braking and sharp turning shall be avoided.
G. The infill soil shall be compacted to achieve 95% Standard Proctor (ASTM D698). Soil tests of the
infill soil shall be submitted to the on-site soils engineer for review and approval prior to the
placement of any material. The contractor is responsible for achieving the specified compaction
requirements. The on-site soils engineer may direct the contractor to remove, correct or amend any
soil found not in compliance with these written specifications.
H. An independent testing firm should be hired by the owner to provide services.
I. Independent firm to keep inspection log and provide written reports at predetermined intervals to the
owner.
J. Testing frequency should be set to establish a proper compaction protocol to consistently achieve the
minimum compaction requirements set by the design requirements. If full time inspection and testing
at 8 inch (20 cm) lifts is not provided, then the following testing frequency should be followed:
1. One test for every 8 inches (20 cm) of vertical fill placed and compacted, for every 25 lineal
feet (7.6 m) of retaining wall length, starting on the first course of block.
2. Vary compaction test locations to cover the entire area of reinforced zone; including the area
compacted by the hand-operated compaction equipment.
3. Once protocol is deemed acceptable, testing can be conducted randomly at locations and
frequencies determined by the on-site soils engineer.
K. Slopes above the wall must be compacted and checked in a similar manner.

3.7 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Level: For bed-joint lines along walls, do not exceed 1-1/4 inches in 10 feet (32 mm
in 3 m), 3 inches (75 mm) maximum.
B. Variation from Indicated Batter: For slope of wall face, do not vary from indicated slope by more
than 1-1/4 inches in 10 feet (32 mm in 3 m).
C. Variation from Indicated Wall Line: For walls indicated as straight, do not vary from straight line by
more than 1-1/4 inches in 10 feet (32 mm in 3 m).
D. Maximum Gap between Units: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for field quality control.
1. In each compacted backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place compaction test for each
300 feet or less of modular concrete block retaining wall length.
3.9 ADJUSTING
A. Remove and replace modular concrete block retaining wall construction of the following
descriptions:
1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged units. Units may be repaired if Architect
approves methods and results.
2. Modular concrete block retaining walls that do not match approved Samples.
3. Modular concrete block retaining walls that do not comply with other requirements indicated.
B. Replace units so modular concrete block retaining wall matches approved Samples, complies with
other requirements, and shows no evidence of replacement.
END OF SECTION 323223

SECTION 328425 – AUTOMATIC SPORTS FIELD IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work of this Section consists of providing and installing an underground irrigation system main
lines as shown and specified. The work includes:
1. Automatic irrigation system main including piping, valves, fittings, thrust blocks, and
accessories to be installed.
2. Control wire and sleeving.
3. Testing.
4. Excavating and backfilling irrigation work.
5. Install tracer wire along with all non-metallic piping for tracking purposes.
A. Materials, equipment, and methods of installation shall comply with the following codes and
standards:
1. All local and State codes.
2. National Fire Protection Association, (NFPA): National Electrical code.
3. American Society For Testing And Materials, (ASTM).
4. National Sanitation Foundation, (NSF).
5. The Irrigation Association, (IA).
B. Installer's qualifications: minimum of five (5) years experience installing irrigation systems of
comparable size. The irrigation system contractor shall have an installation crew consisting of a
minimum of three (3) persons who each have a minimum of three years experience installing
irrigation systems.
1. The contractor shall be able to demonstrate his ability to perform emergency or warranty repair
work within a minimum of 24 hours notice from the city. The contractor shall have a dedicated
service department independent from his installation crews.
2. The contractor must provide a list of the last 3 projects completed within the last 2 years that
are of similar size and complexity. Name, address and phone numbers shall be included.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall he made in accordance with Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."
B. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each of the system components
including but not limited to Included but not limited to the following: irrigation system heads,
manual, remote control and quick coupling valves, valve boxes, fittings, wire, wire connectors, pipe
and appurtenances, etc.
C. Upon irrigation system acceptance, submit five (5) copies of written operating and maintenance
instructions, including winterization procedure. Provide format and contents as directed by the
Engineer.
D. Record Drawings:
1. The Contractor shall provide and keep up to date a complete set of "AS Built" record set of
prints which shall be corrected as the work progresses, and show every change from the
AUTOMATIC SPORTS FIELD IRRIGATION SYSTEM PAGE 1 OF 13

\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 32\328425 Automatic Sports Field Irrigation System.docx SECTION 328425
original drawings and specifications and the actual "As Built" dimensions and kinds of
equipment. This set of drawings shall be kept on site and shall be used only as a record set.
2. These drawings shall also serve as progress sheets, and the Contractor shall make neat and
legible annotations thereon as the work proceeds, showing the work as actually installed.
These drawings shall be available at all times for inspection and shall be kept in the Contrac-
tor's mobile office on location at all times for inspection.
3. Record drawings shall show the location of all sprinklers, valve boxes, valve markers, control-
lers, pipe, wire trenches, multiple wire splice boxes, sensors and all pertinent material buried
and not visible to the eye. Record drawings shall indicate dimensions from two permanent
points of easily identifiable nature, if possible, such as sprinkler heads, permanent markers,
concrete pads, corner of buildings, large caliper trees, etc.
a. Contractor shall submit to the Owner a laminated half-size copy of the as-built irrigation
plan suitable for mounting.
4. The contractor shall GPS the record drawings and shall submit the electronic file and record
drawings for final approval.
A. Deliver irrigation system components in manufacturer's original undamaged and unopened containers
with labels intact and legible.
B. Deliver plastic piping in bundles, packaged to provide adequate protection of pipe ends.
C. Store and handle materials to prevent damage and deterioration.
D. Provide secure, locked storage for valves, and similar components that cannot be immediately
replaced, to prevent installation delays.
A. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated on other drawings. Unknown utilities may
exist. It is the contractor’s responsibility to have all utilities located before the commencement of
construction activity.
B. Protect existing trees, plants, lawns, and other features designated to remain as part of the final land-
scape work.
C. Promptly repair damage to adjacent facilities caused by irrigation system work operations. The cost
of repairs shall be at the Contractor's expense.
D. Minor adjustments in system layout may be necessary to clear existing and proposed fixed
obstructions. Final system layout shall be acceptable to the Landscape Architect.
E. Cutting And Patching:

1. Cut through concrete and masonry for conduits with core drills. Jack hammers are not
permitted.
2. Materials and finishes for patching shall match existing cut surface materials and finish.
Exercise special care to provide patching at openings in exterior walls water tight.
3. Methods and materials used for cutting and patching shall be acceptable to the Landscape
Architect.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. For a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the irrigation system, the contractor
shall promptly furnish and install any parts which prove defective due to faulty product or faulty
installation by the contractor.
B. During the warranty period, the contractor shall extend to the Owner, any and all warranties that
apply to equipment found to be defective in either materials or workmanship, as extended by the
manufacturer and/or distributor to the contractor. The limits of this equipment warranty shall be
expressly stated by the appropriate manufacturer/distributor in writing.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work of this Section with that of other trades, under this and other Contracts with the
Owner, affecting or affected by this work, and cooperate with the other trades as is necessary to
assure the steady progress of work.
B. Before proceeding with installation work, inspect all project conditions and all work of other trades to
assure that all such conditions and work are suitable to satisfactorily receive the work of this Section
and notify the Landscape Architect in writing of any which are not. Do not proceed further until
corrective work has been completed or waived.
C. Do not interrupt existing services without Owner’s approval. Schedule interruptions in advance,
according to Owner’s instructions. Interruptions shall be scheduled at such times of day and work so
that they have minimal impact on Owner’s operations.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A. Sprinkler Manufacturers: As specified or approved equal.
B. Manufacturers’ products shall conform to the specifications and shall be deemed acceptable by
the Landscape Architect.
C. Approval: Wherever the terms “approval,” “approved” or “or equal” are used in the
specifications, they shall be the approval of the Owner in writing. No substitution of material
from those specified on the plans and in the specifications shall be permitted without the written
approval of the Owner. Any request for substitutions of specified materials must be submitted in
writing by the Contractor to the Owner no less than 5 business days prior to the bid date. The
Owner will notify the Contractor of approved substitutions in writing. The alternate product
submittal shall include catalog cut sheets, performance specifications and written notification
indicating purpose of the submittal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Contractor/bidder shall submit and install a single manufacturer for the following components:
1. Irrigation sprinkler heads, automatic controller system (controller, remote control valves, radio
system, flow sensors, rain sensors).
2. Provide only new materials, without flaws or defects and of the highest quality of their
specified class and kind.

3. Comply with pipe sizes indicated. No substitution of smaller pipes will be permitted. Larger
sizes may be used subject to acceptance of the Landscape Architect.
4. Provide pipe continuously and permanently marked with manufacturer's name or trademark,
size schedule and type of pipe, working pressure at 73 degrees F. and National Sanitation
Foundation (NSF) approval.
B. Pipe, Fittings, And Connections

1. Polyvinyl chloride pipe: ASTM D2241, Type 1, Grade 1 rigid, unplasticized PVC, extruded
from virgin parent material, conforming to CS256-63. Provide pipe homogeneous throughout
and free from visible cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, wrinkles, and dents.
a. All piping for sleeves under roadways, sidewalks, etc., shall be PVC, Schedule 40, unless
otherwise stated on the plans.
b. All main line piping shall be polyvinyl chloride pipe and shall be SDR 21, Class 200,
integrated bell and spigot type rubber gasket joint.
c. All lateral pipe shall be polyvinyl chloride pipe and shall be SDR 21, Class 200, solvent
weld bell end.
2. Fittings:
a. Fittings for PVC main line piping shall be ductile iron gasket fittings. The ductile iron
fittings shall have deep bell push on joints with gaskets meeting ASTM F-477. These
fittings shall be for change of direction and or tapped service tees. These fittings shall be
manufactured by Harco Manufacturing or approved equal.
b. Fittings for PVC lateral piping shall be schedule 40 PVC fittings, suitable for solvent
weld and threaded connections.
C. Nipples:
1. Plastic: Factory-threaded Schedule 80, Type 1, Grade 1 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe,
threaded both ends. Pipe shall be in conformance with ASTM D1784 and D1785, gray color.
2. Metallic: Schedule 40 red brass (35% copper, 15% zinc) pipe, threaded both ends. Pipe shall be
in accordance with ASTM B43. Fittings shall be of U.S. manufacture.
D. Solvents and Sealants:

1. Solvent Cement: Compatible with PVC pipe and of proper consistency conforming to ASTM D2564.
2. Threaded connections: All threaded pipe, fittings, and valve connections excepting the
sprinkler body inlet, shall use thread sealant.
E. Triple Swing Joints

1. General:
a. Shall be molded of rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC), Schedule 80, pressure rated at 315
psi. Type 1, Cell classification 12454-B per ASTM specification D 1784, with NPT
threads and pipe sockets per ASTM D 2464 and D2466, respectively. Each rotating joint
shall be sealed with an EPDM rubber 0-ring, installed pre-compressed in a sealing groove
free of parting lines to prevent leakage. Modified stub ACME threads shall have special
engineered (S.E.) diameters and clearances to allow full circle (360º) movement and to
reduce stress concentrations and joint fracture at thread roots.
b. Factory Assembled.
2. Products: For Irrigation Head
a. Lasco Unitized Triple Swing.
1) G-172-212 for Hunter I-25 sprinklers.
2) T712-212 for Hunter I-20 sprinklers.
3) T512-208 for Multi stream rotor sprinklers.

b. Spears.
c. Dura Plastic Products.
d. Approved equal.
3. Products: For Quick Coupler.
a. Lasco Unitized Triple Swing.
1) G-172S-218.
2) 1 inch unitized with brass nipple.
b. Spears.
c. Dura Plastic Products.
d. Approved equal.
F. Valves and Associated Equipment:

1. Manual Gate Valves:
a. Manual gate valve shall be installed where indicated on the plans. Non-Rising Stem:
Valves shall be Class 125 and 200 psi CWP, non-rising stem, screw-in bonnet, solid
wedge and USA manufactured in accordance with MSS-SP 80. Body, bonnet, external
stuffing box and wedge are to be of bronze ASTM B-62. Stems shall be of
dezincification-resistant silicon bronze ASTM B-371 or low-zinc alloy B-99, non-
asbestos packing and malleable or ductile iron hand wheel. For buried service - Bronze
Cross is required. Valve ends shall be threaded-type. Valves shall be of U.S.
manufacture.
2. Electric Valve:
a. The valve shall be a normally closed, electronically-actuated, diaphragm-operated,
remote-control valve.
b. The valve shall be available in a globe configuration with 1, 1-1/2 or 2-inch Female
National Pipe Thread (FNPT) inlet and outlet. The valve shall be equipped with a flow
control mechanism with removable handle that will regulate flow from full on to
completely off.
c. The body and bonnet shall be constructed of solid brass rated to 220 PSI (15 bars, 1500
kPa). The bonnet bolts shall be serviceable with a slotted screwdriver, Phillips
screwdriver, or a hex wrench, and shall be held captive in the bonnet when the bonnet is
removed from the valve body. The diaphragm assembly shall be of molded construction,
reinforced with nylon fabric and have a thermoplastic elastomer seating material. The
valve shall be equipped with an internal filter as well as a self-cleaning metering rod, so
only clean water can enter the solenoid chamber. A filter cleaning system that cleans a
stainless steel filter each time the valve opens and closes, shall be standard. All metal
parts internal to the valve shall be manufactured from corrosion-resistant stainless steel.
d. The valve shall have an adjustable pressure regulating device with a calibrated dial for
setting of the outlet pressure. (The regulator shall be capable of adjusting the outlet
pressure from between 20 and 100 PSI (1.4 to 7.0 bars; 138 to 689 kPa) when inlet
pressure is 15 PSI (1.0 bars; 103 kPa) or greater than regulated outlet pressure.) The
regulated downstream pressure shall remain constant regardless of variations in upstream
pressure. The regulation shall be maintained when valve is manually operated with use of
internal bleed valve. The regulator should be capable of regulating upstream pressures
from 35 psi to 220 psi.
e. The standard solenoid shall be a 24 VAC unit with a 350mA inrush current and 190mA
holding current at 60 cycles. The solenoid shall be an encapsulated, one-piece unit with
captive plunger. It shall be equipped with manual internal bleed capability to release the
upper chamber water to the downstream piping, allowing the valve to open.

f. The valve shall be manufactured, qualified and released in the USA. The valve, model
number IBV series, shall be manufactured by The Hunter Industries.
3. Gate Valves:
a. Non-rising Stem Gate Valves 3 inches and larger: AWWA C500, cast- iron double disc,
bronze disc and seat rings or AWWA C509, resilient seated stem, cast-iron body and
bonnet, stem nut, 200 pig working pressure, and ends that fit NPS dimension, PVC pipe.
Include elastomeric gaskets.
b. American Made
4. Quick Coupler Valve:
a. General:
1) One inch with Acme thread.
2) Vinyl Cap Cover.
3) American Made.
b. Products:
1) Hunter HQ-44LRC-AW.
2) Approved equal.
G. Thrust Blocks: Use 3,000 PSI concrete and 2-mil plastic to wrap fittings and pipe.
H. Valve Access Boxes:

1. Valve access boxes shall be tapered enclosures of rigid plastic material comprised of fibrous
components, chemically inert and unaffected by moisture corrosion and temperature changes.
Provide lid of same material, green in color.
2. Valve access boxes for electric valve assemblies shall be 18" deep with 10" X 15” rectangular
cover.
3. Valve boxes shall be of sufficient size to still allow room for maintenance without having to
excavate or perform similar operations conforming to ASTM D368 for tensile strength of 18
inch deep and furnished with a non-hinged cover.
4. Valve boxes for quick coupling valves shall be 10” diameter valve boxes.
5. Products:
a. Carson.
b. Ametek.
c. Brooks Industries.
d. Approved equal.
I. Irrigation Sprinklers
1. General: All heads shall be as specified on the drawings or approved equal. Nozzle patterns are
indicated and shown; however, specific site conditions may require that different nozzle
patterns be used. Contractor shall adjust patterns to provide adequate coverage for misting or
cooling of field area. All heads shown on the drawings shall be installed and have the following
minimum characteristics:
2. Rotary Sprinklers:
a. Rotary gear driven.
b. Stainless Steel riser.
c. Sprinklers with a radius over 45’ shall have available twelve (12) nozzles discharging
from 5.1 to 26.9 GPM at 70 psi. Sprinklers with a radius of 45’ or less shall have
available eight (8) nozzles discharging from 1.5 to 8.0 GPM at 45 psi.
d. The nozzles shall have the primary and secondary orifices together in an integral unit and
shall be color-coded to identify nozzle size.

e. The sprinkler shall have radius adjustment capabilities by means of a stainless steel
nozzle retainer/radius adjustment screw.
f. The sprinkler shall be equipped with a drain check valve to prevent low head drainage,
and be capable of checking up to 10 feet in elevation change.
g. The sprinkler shall be serviceable after installation by unscrewing the body cap,
removing the riser assembly, and extracting the inlet filter screen.
3. Multi-Stream Rotary Sprinklers:
a. Multi-stream, multi-trajectory rotary nozzle with a viscous drive for rotation.
b. Nozzles have female threads for installation on male-threaded pop-up sprinklers.
c. Each nozzle shall have a filter screen to prevent internal system debris from entering the
nozzle and the patented double-pop feature to prevent external debris from falling into
the nozzle. Each nozzle shall be color-coded for easy field identification.
d. Sprinkler body shall be pop-up type with pressure-regulation, with 4” pop-up height.
Pressure shall be regulated to 40 psi. Sprinkler shall have a factory drain check valve.
Pressure-regulated models shall have FloGuardTM technology to reduce the flow through
the riser in the event of a missing nozzle.
4. Products:
a. Hunter Model # I-25-04-SS.
b. Hunter Model # I-20-04-SS.
c. Hunter Model #MP Rotator nozzles with Model #PROS-04-PRS40-CV.
J. Automatic Control System

1. The controllers shall be of a modular design with a standard 6-station model. There shall be 6-
station modules that enable the controllers to be customized from 6 stations up to 42 stations in
the metal cabinet and plastic pedestal. The removable station modules shall allow servicing of,
and removing of the module(s) without removing field wires from the controller.
2. The controllers shall have four independent programs (A, B, C, and D) with 8 start times per
program for programs A, B, and C; and 16 start times for program D for a total of up to 40
daily start times. Any two programs shall have the capability of running concurrently.
Watering times shall be available from 1 minute to 12 hours in 1-minute increments per station.
There shall be a programmable delay between stations available of up to 9 hours. The controller
shall have 4 weekly schedule options to choose from: 7-day calendar, 31-day calendar, odd day
programming and even day programming. It shall also have a 365-day calendar clock to
accommodate true odd-even watering. Operation shall be available in automatic, semi-
automatic and manual modes. All programming shall be accomplished by use of a
programming dial and selection buttons with user feedback provided by a backlit LCD display.
The front panel of the controller shall be removable and capable of being programmed when
not attached to the controller cabinet.
3. The controllers shall be equipped with a rain sensor on-off switch that allows the user to
override a sensor that has suspended watering. The controller shall have a programmable rain
delay that turns off the controller for a predetermined period of time, from 1 to 180 days.
4. The controllers shall have a cycle and soak scheduling capability by station that allows a cycle
to be programmed for up to 60 minutes and a soak period to be programmed for up to 120
minutes.
5. The controllers shall have a seasonal adjustment feature with 3 different modes that allows
station run times to be altered from 0% to 300% by program to compensate for weather
changes. The modes shall include a Global Adjust, Monthly Adjust, and a Solar Sync Adjust.
The Global Adjust shall increase the station run times in a given program by a fixed
percentage. The Monthly Adjust shall allow all the seasonal adjustment values for the full year
to be programmed into the controller, for each program. The Solar Sync Adjust shall allow the

seasonal adjustment values to occur on a daily basis when a Hunter Solar sync is connected to
the controller.
6. The controllers shall be capable of monitoring up to two Clik-type sensors or flow sensors in
the plastic configuration, and up to 3 Clik-type sensors or flow sensors in the metal
configuration.
7. The controllers shall permit connection of a flow meter which is calibrated by the operator for
the pipe diameter in which it is installed. The flow meter shall measure actual flow in gallons or
liters. The controller shall have a learning mode in which the controller operates each single
station for a short period, learns the actual flow for each station, and stores the information
internally by station.
8. When the learned flow is exceeded during normal operations the controller shall record a flow
alarm event, cease irrigating the station or stations contributing to the high or low flow
readings, and resume irrigation with any stations which do not cause alarms. The controller
shall have the ability to determine high or low flow conditions when multiple stations are
operating, and shall perform diagnostics to identify stations which contribute to the problem
flow. Allowable limits and duration of incorrect flow shall be preset, but reprogrammable by
the operator for unique local conditions. The flow meter shall be a Hunter Industries HFS in an
appropriately sized FCT fitting. . It shall also be possible to except certain stations from flow
monitoring devices. The controller shall also be equipped with a flow-totalizing function that
will provide a running total of all the gallons or liters of water used between two reference
dates.
9. Automatic programs shall have user-programmed Non-Water windows to except certain time
windows from watering, regardless of the water day schedule.
10. Automatic programs shall also permit the designation of non-water days, even when Odd/Even
or Interval Day patterns have been set. Non-water window violations shall be detected and the
operator shall be alerted when an irrigation program would have run during a non-water
window.
11. The controllers shall have a Quick Check test program, permitting all stations to run
sequentially for a user-entered period of time, programmable in one-second increments up to 10
minutes each, for system startup and diagnostics.
12. The controllers shall also save an Easy Retrieve Program which stores all original
programming settings. The installing contractor shall be able to restore the system to this saved
state at any time after initial installation. The stored Easy Retrieve settings may also be updated
at any time by the operator.
13. The controllers shall have a one-button manual station advance in Test mode for quick
diagnostics checks.
14. The controllers shall be equipped with a programmable pump start/master valve circuit that can
activate the pump start relay by zone. It shall also have a programmable delay between valve
stations. Delays between stations shall be programmable up to a maximum of 10 hours.
15. Transformer input shall be 120/240 VAC, 50/60Hz. Transformer output shall be 24 VAC,
1.5A (40VA). All AC power wiring connections shall be made in an internal junction box.
Maximum output per station shall be 24 VAC, 0.56A. Program backup shall be provided by a
non-volatile memory circuit that will hold the program information indefinitely. The controller
shall have Metal Oxide Varistors (MOVs) on the AC power input portion and the secondary
output portion to help protect the micro-circuitry from power surges. The secondary MOVs
shall be enclosed in the station modules for easy servicing. There shall be self-diagnostic,
electronic short circuit protection that detects a faulty circuit, continues watering the remainder
of the program, and reports the faulty station on the display. The diagnostic procedure shall
also be capable of being initiated by the user manually. The controller shall provide backup
timekeeping in the event of a power outage with the use of an internal long-life lithium battery.

16. The controllers shall have a diagnostic feature that provides a visual indication via LED lights
that show the current status of sensor activity, station activity and flow activity. Any station or
flow alarms shall be report on the LCD display.
17. The controllers shall have the option of 3 different enclosures; wall-mounted plastic cabinet,
powder coated steel wall-mounted cabinet, and a full plastic pedestal. The steel cabinet shall
also be available with a matching pedestal. The pedestal versions shall have the option of a
Pedestal Wiring Board (PWB) that allows connection of the field wiring in the pedestal.
Additionally, the PWB shall be equipped with MOVs that help protect the secondary output
portion of the controller.
18. The controllers shall have as an option, the ROAM or ICR remote control package that enables
remote operation of the controller. Connection of remotes to the controller shall be provided
through factory-installed SmartPort® outlet.
19. The controllers shall have a multi-language capability that allows programming of the display
in 6 different languages: English, French, Spanish, German, Italian, and Portuguese. It shall
also be capable of setting the units of measure to either English (GPM) or Metric (LPM)
20. The controllers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s published instructions.
The controller shall carry a conditional five year exchange warranty. The automatic
controller(s) shall be the I-CORE series controller as manufactured for Hunter Industries
Incorporated, San Marcos, California.
K. Rain Switch
1. Solar Sync:
a. The Solar Sync shall automatically adjust run times for controller stations based on a
local evapo-transpiration sensor, connected to a compatible automatic irrigation
controller via SmartPort interface.
b. The Solar Sync shall include only local evapo-transpiration data, “local data” being
defined as sensed climatological conditions within the immediate coverage area of the
irrigation system, from a sensor dedicated to that purpose. The Solar Sync shall not
require broadcast, subscription, or other generalized weather data, and shall function as a
standalone ET-based irrigation system when directly connected to a compatible automatic
irrigation controller of up to 48 stations.
c. The Solar Sync shall consist of two physical components, including a Solar Sync Sensor
mounted in an optimum location for measurement of climatological data, and a module,
containing database information which shall be connected to the irrigation controller’s
SmartPort.
d. The Solar Sync Sensor shall be mounted within 200 ft./60m of the irrigation controller.
The Solar Sync Sensor shall include individual sensors for solar radiation, and air
temperature, and shall also include a rain sensor. The rain sensor shall be capable of
interrupting the power from the irrigation controller to the valves when rainfall exceeds a
pre-selected amount.
e. The rain sensor circuitry shall utilize 2 sets of hygroscopic disks to activate switches in
the unit. One switch will be for the total rainfall compensation unit and the other for the
Quick Response unit. The Quick Response unit will turn off the irrigation system
within 5 minutes of the onset of precipitation, depending on the intensity.
f. The sensor shall be adjustable by turning a plastic collar on the device that regulates an
opening, thus varying the rate of evaporation from the disks.
g. In addition, the built-in temperature sensor shall be capable of interrupting the power
from the irrigation controller to the valves when ambient air temperature falls below 37
degrees Fahrenheit (3 degrees Centigrade).
h. All sensors shall be integrated into a single array, and shall be housed in an UV and
corrosion resistant plastic casing.

i. The sensor shall have an integral, adjustable, aluminum, mounting bracket that allows
installation on angled, as well as perpendicular surfaces. The sensor shall have a
mounting option that allows for installation on a rain gutter.
j. The Solar Sync shall permit the user to designate a no water window that prevents any
irrigation from occurring during a specific period of the day.
k. The Solar Sync shall be fully functional with 24VAC input or less, with a max current
draw of 25ma, and shall not require a dedicated high-voltage transformer or connection.
The Solar Sync system shall be CE [C-tick] approved.
l. The Solar Sync shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s published
instructions. The Solar Sync shall be manufactured for Hunter Industries Incorporated,
San Marcos, California.
L. Grounding
1. The controller shall be grounded to 10 OHMS or less to insure proper surge and lightning
protection.
2. Grounding system shall include U.L. listed 5/8" x '10 copper clad ground rod; 4"x 96"
grounding plate with '25 of #4 bare copper wire and 100 pounds of grounding enhancing
material and Cadweld GT1161G igniter.
M. Control Wire:
1. Electrical control and common wire from the controller to the electric valves shall be type UF,
600 volt, PE coated direct burial single strand solid copper wire, sized at 14 gauge for zone
wire and 12 gauge for the common wire Provide one color wire for each of the following:
a. Zone control valves.
b. Common wire.
c. Spare wire.
2. Power wire shall be sized 10/2-grd. The power wire shall be multi conductor with ground UL
approved, type UF for direct bury. The wire shall be by Paige Electric Corporation or approved
equal.
3. All wire within building enclosures shall be installed in electrical conduit. Conduit shall be of
steel construction. Grounding wire shall have a separate conduit out to grounding grid.
4. Wire connectors for 24 volt control wiring shall be as manufactured by 3M, Model No. DBY/R-6.
5. Utility Warning Tape: 5 mil, 2” (min.) detectable warning tape. Color code for utility marking
tape – irrigation blue with white stripe.
N. Accessories:
1. Drainage fill shall be 1/2" to 3/4" crushed stone.
a. Fill shall be clean soil free of stones larger than 2" diameter, foreign matter, organic
material and debris.
b. Provide imported fill material as required to complete the work. Obtain rights and pay all
costs for imported materials.
c. Suitable excavated materials removed to accommodate the irrigation system work may be
used as fill material subject to the Engineer's review and acceptance.
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine final grades and installation conditions. Do not start irrigation system work until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Layout and stake the location of each pipe run and all valves. Obtain Landscape Architect’s
acceptance of layout prior to excavating.
B. All sleeves required for the installation of the irrigation system are to be installed by the general
contractor. Wires are to be installed in separate sleeves.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Excavation And Backfill:

1. Excavation shall include all materials encountered.
2. Excavate trenches of sufficient depth and width to permit proper handling and installation of
pipe and fittings.
3. Excavate to depths required to provide 2" depth of earth fill or sand bedding for piping when
rock or other unsuitable bearing material is encountered.
4. Fill to match adjacent grade elevations with approved earth fill material. Backfilling will be
done by hand placing soil under, around and above pipe so that it is hand tamped to a point 6"
above the pipe. Special care shall be taken to ensure that this layer is completely free of stones
and other deleterious material. The remainder of the trench may be machine filled with
appropriate available soil. Machine placed backfill shall be compacted to a suitable density by
machine tamping and approved rolling to prevent settlement in trench.
a. If within one (1) year from the date of final acceptance, settlement due to improper com-
paction occurs and an adjustment in pipes, valves and sprinkler heads, turf or paving is
necessary to bring the system, turf or paving to the proper level of the permanent grades,
the Contractor, as part of the work under this contract, shall make said adjustments
without extra cost to the Owner.
5. Except as indicated, install irrigation mains with a minimum cover of 24" based on finish
grades, unless otherwise noted. Install irrigation laterals with a minimum cover of 18" based
on finish grades.
6. Excavate trenches and install piping and fill during the same working day. Do not leave open
trenches or partially filled trenches open overnight.
7. Where it is necessary to cross existing sidewalks, pipe shall be installed by boring under the
walkways. Proper boring equipment shall be used so that undermining of the walkways does
not occur.
8. Pipe shall be installed strictly in accordance with the printed recommendations of the
manufacturer, including bedding of pipe in the bottom of trench and securely thrusting of any
main line fittings at changes in direction of the pipe.
9. All main line piping shall be located outside the primary playing areas. All valve boxes shall
be located no closer than 10 feet outside of the playing surfaces.
10. Where pipe is to be installed through walls, core drill wall of sufficient diameter to install pipe
and conduit. Once pipe and conduit are installed, seal opening around pipe with non-shrinking
grout. Openings shall be watertight.
11. Existing plant material and turf shall be protected during installation. If excavation is
necessary in turf areas, remove and replace sod. Any existing planting material and turf
damaged during the installation shall be repaired and or replaced at Contractor’s expense.
B. Plastic Pipe:
1. Pipelines shall be installed of the size shown on the drawings and/or specifications and of the
materials and workmanship herein specified.

2. All main line piping outside of buildings to be installed in trenches as per the provisions of
Section 1.13.A. Lateral piping will be installed in trenches as above.
3. Pipe shall be installed strictly in accordance with the printed recommendations of the
manufacturer, including bedding of pipe in the bottom of trench.
C. Fittings, Valves And Accessories:

1. Install fittings, valves and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except as
otherwise indicated.
2. All control wiring shall be supplied and installed by the irrigation contractor. All wiring shall
be performed in accordance with all applicable codes.
3. Install valve access boxes on a suitable base of gravel to provide a level foundation at proper
grade and to provide drainage of the access box. Gravel shall extend from the bottom of the
valve to 3" below the bottom of the valve box. Valve boxes to be installed flush with finish
grade, with one valve installed in each box only. Valve boxes shall be installed with a
minimum 10’ (min.) separation. Valve box locations to be located on “As Built” drawing with
measurements from two permanent markers to each valve box.
4. Seal all threaded connections with approved joint compound. Teflon tape shall not be used.
Do not over tighten threaded connections.
D. Wire:
1. All wiring located outside buildings is to be installed in the piping trenches wherever possible.
Approved wire ties shall be utilized approximately every 20' on wire runs installed in main line
trenches or wire trenches.
2. All wires to be spliced to requirements of local and minimum regulations, or to the following
specification. All splices shall be made by baring a minimum of 3/4" of copper conductor
twisted together, connected and sealed with an approved splice kit. Procedures recommended
by manufacturer shall be strictly followed. At splice location, slack shall allow the splice to be
raised a minimum of 24" for inspection. Any underground splices not located at control valve
sites shall be housed in a 10” diameter valve box for access.
3. Wire shall be installed with at least 1% slack and have expansion loops at end of 250' runs.
Wire shall not be yanked, stretched, or excessively pulled during installation. Wire shall be
laid on a firm, even bed in the trench, which shall support the entire length. The Contractor
shall take strict precautions to ensure that wires are not cut, scraped, or nicked during
installation. Wire shall be laid above and to one side of the main line pipe, never directly over
the pipe. Wherever possible, wire shall be laid on the same side of the trench throughout the
entire job. All wiring shall be installed with a minimum depth of cover of 12".
4. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with all local, State and National codes.
E. Sleeves:
1. All sleeves for installation of the irrigation system are to be installed by the general contractor.
All wire shall be installed in separate sleeves.
F. Testing:
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for all hydraulic pressure testing of main lines and lateral
lines. The testing shall be on a continuous basis commencing when the first section of the
installation is complete and available for testing and prior to the installation of the pipe
insulation. Final testing of the whole system under full operating conditions to be done
following complete installation of all main and lateral piping, valves and sprinklers.
2. Prior to testing of the main line pipe, pipe shall be backfilled. Testing for all main line pipe and
interior lateral pipe shall consist of a continuous application of water at a pressure of 100 PSI to
the piping for a one hour period without visual evidence of leaks. If a leak is discovered within
this period, the Contractor shall immediately repair the break and the system then retested for

the period described above in this section. Testing of lateral lines located outside of building
shall be done on a zone by zone operating basis with any leaks or breaks repaired when
evidenced.
3. Operational Test: Activate each remote control valve in sequence from the controller. The
Owner’s representative shall visually observe the operation, coverage and leakage. Replace,
adjust, or move heads, couplers or other parts of the system as necessary to correct operational,
coverage deficiencies or leakage. Repeat testing until each zone passes all tests.
4. Control System Grounding Test: Test for proper grounding of control system per
manufacturer’s recommendations. Test results must meet or exceed manufacturer’s guidelines
for acceptance. Replace defective wire, grounding rod or other equipment. Repeat test until the
guidelines are met.
G. Adjusting The System:

1. Adjustment of the sprinklers, remote control valves, and automatic equipment will be done by
the Contractor upon completion of the installation to provide optimum performance and
balance throughout the irrigation system.
H. Service:
1. The contractor shall be responsible for the winterization of the system and the spring activation
of the system during the one year warranty period.
3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL
A. Transport unsuitable excavated material, including rock, to designated disposal areas. Stockpile or
spread as directed. Remove from site and legally dispose of trash and debris.
3.5 ACCEPTANCE
A. Upon acceptance, the Owner will assume operation of the system.
B. Prior to the final acceptance of the irrigation system, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner, three
(3) copies of written operating and maintenance instructions. The manuals shall include an index
sheet stating the Contractor's name, address, telephone number and person to contact, duration of
warranty period and an equipment list providing the manufacturer' name, make and model number,
the name and address of local manufacturer's representative, spare parts list in detail, and detailed
operating and maintenance instructions for the major equipment. The manual also shall include a
detailed description of the winter blowout and spring start-up procedures.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work. Remove from site
all excess materials, soil, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from irrigation system
installation.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 329000 – PLANTING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Trees.
2. Shrubs.
3. Ground covers.
4. Plants including ferns and perennials.
5. Planting accessories.
6. Planting soil mixes.
7. Mulch.
8. Maintenance and warranty of exterior plants.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI Z60: American Standard for Nursery Stock.
B. ASTM B221: ASTM International Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Exterior plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are
grown, with ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size
of tree or shrub required; wrapped, tied, rigidly supported, and drum-laced as recommended by ANSI
Z60.
B. Balled and Potted Stock: Exterior plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown
and placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than diameter and depth recommended by
ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of exterior plant required.
C. Bare-Root Stock: Exterior plants with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by

transplanting or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than
minimum root spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for kind and size of exterior plant required.
D. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted exterior plants grown in a container with
well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed
from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during
shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for kind, type, and size of exterior plant required.
E. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted exterior plants established and grown in-
ground in a porous fabric bag with well-established root system reaching sides of fabric bag. Fabric
bag size is not less than diameter, depth, and volume required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of
exterior plant.
F. Root collar (root crown, root flare, trunk flare, flare): The region at the base of the trunk where the
majority of the structural roots join the plant stem, usually at or near ground level.
PLANTING PAGE 1 OF 13
\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 32\329000 Planting.docx SECTION 329000
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Before plant material is shipped to the project site, submit the following:
1. A complete itemized list of all plants including the source of supply and nursery certificates.
2. Photographs of plant material.
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. Peat moss (including certification).
2. Fertilizer (including certification).
3. Top mulch.
4. Wrapping.
5. Guying and staking material.
6. Weed control barriers.
7. Antidesiccant (including certification).
8. Tree grates.
C. Photographs: Submit photographs of plants and mulches prior to Observation, as listed in Quality
Assurance below. Photographs shall include a person holding a clearly marked measuring rod next to
plants and mulches. Photographs shall exhibit the size, growth habit, and general visual quality of
plants. Photographs of dense clusters of plants, in which one plant is not distinguishable from
another, are not acceptable. Digital photographs submitted via email are acceptable.
1. At the request of the Owner, the Landscape Architect/Engineer may observe the plant and
mulch material at place of growth in lieu of photographs.
D. Material Test Reports: For existing surface soil and/or imported topsoil as required by Section “Soil
Preparation”
E. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, signed by product manufacturer, and
complying with the following:
1. Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products.
2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established
by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.
F. Qualification Data: For Landscape Installer.
G. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for exterior plants.
H. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of

exterior plants during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.
I. Maintenance bond: Contractor shall provide list of items, quantities, and cost to be performed during
the maintenance period. Once approved by the owner, the contract shall submit a formal performance
bond.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful
establishment of exterior plants on similar projects:
1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time, English-
speaking, supervisor on Project site when exterior planting and regular maintenance is in progress.
2. Installer must have a minimum of three (3) years’ experience in this type of landscaping.
3. Installer must have installed previous projects in similar size and scope as this project and
provide a listing of projects including name and contact person with phone number or email
address.
B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of exterior plants indicated on the plans, complying
with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock."
1. Substitutions of plants will not be permitted unless authorized in writing by the Landscape
Architect/Engineer prior to purchase for this Project.
C. Tree and Shrub Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1 with branches and trunks or canes
in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6 inches
above ground for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above ground for larger sizes.
D. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip-to-tip.
E. Observation: Landscape Architect/Engineer may observe trees and shrubs at site before planting for
compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and quality. Landscape
Architect/Engineer retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and
root systems, insects, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at
any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site.
Notify Landscape Architect/Engineer of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of
delivery to site.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
G. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for exterior plants.
H. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by owner for maintenance of

exterior plants during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.
I. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis as required in Section “Soil Preparation”.
J. Report suitability of topsoil for plant growth. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus,
and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to product a satisfactory topsoil.
A. Store, irrigate, maintain, and otherwise protect balled and burlapped trees in a manner that prevents
mechanical injury and physiological stress between the time of digging and delivery. The trees and
shrubs shall be balled with firm, natural balls of soil and wrapped with burlap and tied in accordance
with ANSI Z60.1.
B. All container grown shrubs shall be healthy, vigorous, well rooted, and established in the container in
which they are growing. They shall have tops of good quality and be in a healthy growing condition.
A container shrub shall be in that container a sufficient time that fibrous roots are formed so the
shape will remain and the medium will hold together when removed from the container. All shrubs
sold in containers shall meet Contract Documents for both plant size and container size. The plant
size shall agree with sizes specified in the American Standard for Nursery Stock.
C. Groundcovers/perennials shall be supplied in pots or flats; plants shall be 1-year old cuttings
(minimum) with well-established root systems.
D. Deliver exterior plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in
wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting.
E. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery, except as approved by Landscape Architect/Engineer.
Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other
handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy
their natural shape. Irrigate balled and burlapped plants thoroughly immediately prior to transport.
Provide protective covering of exterior plants during delivery. Do not drop exterior plants during
delivery.
F. Handle planting stock by root ball. Planting stock with cracked or broken root balls will not be
accepted.
G. Furnish the following with each planting material delivery:

1. An invoice indicating sizes, quantity, genus, species and variety of exterior plant material.
2. All certificates of inspection required by State and Federal agencies.
3. Labels for each plant or bundles of plants indicating name and size.
H. Deliver exterior plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. If
planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set exterior plants trees in shade, protect from
weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.
1. Heel-in bare-root stock. Soak roots in water for two hours if dried out.
2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with woodchip mulch or other acceptable material.
3. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.
4. Water root systems of exterior plants stored on-site with a fine-mist spray. Water as often as
necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition.
I. Deliver fertilizer in manufacturer’s standard sized bags showing weight, analysis, and manufacturer’s
name. Store under a waterproof cover or in a dry place as approved by the Landscape
Architect/Engineer.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Contractor is responsible for verifying plant quantities shown on the planting plan. Contractor is
responsible for filling all areas on plans shown to be planted on planting plan. Contractor shall
prepare his or her own quantity list from the plan(s). All ground cover, perennial, and annual beds are
to be filled at the specified spacing.
B. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with
maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion:
Spring: Deciduous April 15 to June 15
Evergreen April 15 to June 15
Deciduous September 1 to October 31

Fall:
Only on approval of the
Evergreen
Landscape Architect/Engineer
C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions
permit.
D. Coordination with Other Work: Coordinate planting with all other work of the project, including site
utilities and flatwork.
E. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after finish grades are established and before
planting lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to Landscape Architect/Engineer. When planting trees
and shrubs after lawns, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Warrant all exterior plants covered by this Section, for the warranty period indicated,
against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse by
Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control.
1. Warranty Period for Exterior Plants:
a. From date of Installation to Substantial Completion.
b. One (1) year from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Remove dead exterior plants immediately. Replace immediately unless required to plant in the
succeeding planting season.
3. Replace without cost to Owner, as soon as weather and soil conditions permit, exterior plants
that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition as determined by the
Landscape Architect/Engineer at end of warranty period.
1.9 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Period for all exterior plants covered by this Section: Concurrent with Warranty Period
and same duration as Warranty Period. Maintenance requirements are itemized in Part 3 of this
Section. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until plantings are
acceptably healthy and well established, but for not less than maintenance period below.
B. Owner will assume maintenance following completion of Maintenance Period.
C. Maintenance Period: 1 year (12 months) from the date of planting completion and acceptance and
approval by the Owner.
D. The contractor shall provide a performance bond for the value of the labor and materials provided
during the maintenance period.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL
A. General: Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs in accordance with good horticultural practices
under climatic conditions similar to those of the Project for at least two years, unless specifically
noted otherwise. Trees and shrubs shall comply with ANSI Z60.1, with healthy root systems
developed by transplanting or root pruning. Trees and shrubs shall exceed American Association of
Nurseryman standards for quality by being exceptionally heavy, uniform, so trained or favored in
development and appearance as to be superior in form, density and spread of branches, compactness,
and symmetry. Determination of quality shall be made by the Landscape Architect/Engineer.
B. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and
defects such as knots, sun scald, leaf spotting, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.
C. Trees shall be planted such that the root flare is 1 inch above adjacent grade unless the Drawings
indicate otherwise. Tree planting height shall be dictated by the actual root flare rather than the top of
rootball as received from growers or nurseries:
1. Tops of tree rootballs shall be no higher than 2 inches above the tops of main order tree roots.
2. If main order roots are buried greater than 2 inches but less than 4 inches below the top of tree
rootballs, Contractor must trim rootballs by carefully removing soil from the top of the
rootballs so that main order roots are within 2 inches of the top of rootball.
3. If main order roots are buried greater than 4 inches below the top of rootball, the tree will be
rejected, and the Contractor must remove the tree from the job site.
4. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that trees received on site and planted on site meet
the aforementioned specifications regarding tree root flare and rootball. The Contractor is
responsible for ensuring that the Landscape Architect/Engineer has an opportunity to review
the tree root flares of trees in the grower’s field or nursery yard. If tree root flares are obscured
(due to trunk wrap or burlap or other obstructions), Landscape Architect/Engineer's acceptance
of trees in the grower's yard or nursery shall constitute acceptance of trees WITH THE
EXCEPTION of trees whose root flare is buried greater than 4 inches below top of rootball. In
the event that Contractor does not allow Landscape Architect/Engineer to visually observe tree
root flares during tree selection at grower's yard or nursery, Landscape Architect/Engineer
reserves the right to reject any tree delivered to the site if tree's root flare is buried greater than
4 inches below top of rootball, even if Landscape Architect/Engineer previously accepted said
trees at the grower's yard or nursery.
D. Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees and
shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Landscape
Architect/Engineer with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.
E. Label each tree and shrub with securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of
botanical and common name.
F. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof
tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.
G. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs is shown, select stock for uniform
height, branching height, and spread, and number label to assure symmetry in planting.
H. Comply with the “PLANTING SCHEDULE” as shown on the Drawings.
2.2 SHADE AND FLOWERING TREES
A. Shade Trees: Single-stem trees with straight trunk, well-balanced crown, and intact leader of height
and caliper indicated complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees required. Provide balled and
burlapped, balled and potted, or container-grown trees. Branching Height: One-third to one-half of
tree height. For street trees, branching height shall be one half of tree height.
B. Small Upright or Spreading Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to species and type with
relationship of caliper, height, and branching according to ANSI Z60.1. Stem form as follows: Stem
Form: Multistem, clump, with two or more main stems. Provide balled and burlapped trees.
C. Multistem Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to species and type with relationship of
caliper, height, and branching according to ANSI Z60.1. Stem form as follows: Stem Form: Clump.
Provide balled and burlapped trees.
D. Comply with the “PLANTING SCHEDULE” as shown on the Drawings.
2.3 DECIDUOUS SHRUBS
A. Form and Size: Deciduous shrubs with not less than the minimum number of canes required by and
measured according to ANSI Z60.1 for type, shape, and height of shrub. Provide balled and
burlapped, balled and potted, or container-grown shrubs.
B. Comply with the “PLANTING SCHEDULE” as shown on the Drawings.
2.4 CONIFEROUS EVERGREENS
A. Form and Size: Specimen-quality, exceptionally heavy, densely branched, symmetrically-shaped

coniferous evergreens and the following grade: Heavy Grade. Provide balled and burlapped trees.
2.5 BROADLEAF EVERGREENS
A. Form and Size: Normal-quality, well-balanced, broadleaf evergreens of type, height, spread, and
shape required, complying with ANSI Z60.1. Provide balled and burlapped, balled and potted,
container-grown, or fabric bag-grown trees.
2.6 GROUND COVER PLANTS
A. Ground Cover: Provide ground cover of species indicated, established and well rooted in pots or
similar containers, and complying with ANSI Z60.1.
B. Herbs/Ferns: Provide herbs and ferns of species indicated, established and well rooted in pots or
similar containers, and complying with ANSI Z60.1.
C. Comply with the “PLANTING SCHEDULE” as shown on the Drawings.
2.7 OTHER PLANTS
A. Annuals: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety shown or listed. Provide only
plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery and that are in bud but not yet in
bloom.
B. Perennials: Provide healthy, field-grown plants from a commercial nursery of species and variety
shown or listed.
C. Woody Vines: Provide vines of species indicated, and size indicated, complying with requirements of
ANSI 13.6
D. Fast-Growing Vines: Provide vines of species indicated complying with requirements in ANSI Z60.1
as follows:
1. Two-year plants with heavy, well-branched tops with not less than three (3) runners 18 inches
or more in length and with a vigorous well-developed root system.
2. Provide field-grown vines. Vines grown in pots or other containers of adequate size and
acclimated to outside conditions will also be acceptable.
E. Bulbs: Top Size, including corresponding designation of “Jumbo”, “Giant” or “Extra Large” per
ANSI 12.
F. Comply with the “PLANTING SCHEDULE” as shown on the Drawings.
2.8 PLANTING SOIL MIX
A. Planting Soil Mix: Mix three (3) parts acceptable topsoil with one (1) part peat moss.
2.9 MULCHES
A. Shredded hardwood mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and
shrubs]
1. Color: Brown.
2. Size: Range between 3/8 inch to 8”. Fine particles (3/8 inch or less) shall make up to 25% of
total volume. Large particles (1 to 1 ½ inch in diameter and 4 to 8 inches in length) shall make
up to 20% of total volume. Pieces larger than 8 inches long that are visible on the surface of the
mulch after installation shall be removed.
2.10 STAKES AND GUYS
A. Install Stakes and Guys per methods and locations as shown on the Drawings.
B. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood, redwood, or pressure-preservative-
treated softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2 by 2 inches by length
indicated, pointed at one end.
C. Guy Ties and Guards:

1. Guy and Tie Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, 2-strand, twisted,
2. 0.106 inch in diameter.
3. Guy Cable: For large trees: 5-strand, 3/16-inch diameter, galvanized-steel cable, with zinc-
coated turnbuckles, a minimum of 3 inches long, with two 3/8-inch galvanized eyebolts.
4. Hose Chafing Guard: Reinforced rubber or plastic hose at least 1/2 inch in diameter, black, cut
to lengths required to protect tree trunks from damage.
5. Woven Fabric Guy Ties: Flat, woven, non-fraying, polypropylene material, 3/4-inch wide,
white. Arbor Tie or approved equivalent.
D. Solid wall tree guard:

1. 3.5" diameter, 47" height, white.
2. Plantra: Product number TBCS0W-4800-0010, or approved equal
E. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches long.
2.11 WEED CONTROL BARRIERS
A. Non-woven Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. minimum.
B. Composite Fabric: Woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a non-woven

polypropylene fabric, 4.8 oz./sq. yd.
2.12 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
A. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and
shrubs, designed to permit transpiration but retard excessive loss of moisture from plants. Deliver in
original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Topsoil: Refer to Section “Soil Preparation”.
C. Peat: Finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, containing partially decomposed
moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000
percent.
D. Fertilizer:
1. Bonemeal: Commercial, steamed finely ground material with a minimum of 1.0 percent
nitrogen and a minimum of 11 percent phosphoric acid.
2. Commercial Fertilizer (10-6-4): Containing not less than 10 percent nitrogen, 6 percent
available phosphoric acid, and 4 percent water soluble potash.
E. Water: Clean, potable.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify final grades have been established prior to beginning planting operations.
B. Inspect trees and ground covers for injury, insect infestation, or improper pruning. Do not begin
planting until deficiencies have been corrected, or plants replaced.
C. Examine areas to receive exterior plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting
installation and performance. Notify Landscape Architect/Engineer, in writing, of any conditions that
might prevent satisfactory completion. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
D. Test drainage of pits and planting beds. Notify Landscape Architect/Engineer of potential poor
drainage of tree and shrub pits and planting beds. Recommend a program for correction of poor
drainage conditions and submit proposal to Landscape Architect/Engineer. Do not proceed with
planting operations in areas of poor drainage until conditions are corrected, or direction is given by
the Landscape Architect/Engineer.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, and lawns and existing exterior
plants from damage caused by planting operations.
B. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple exterior plantings. Stake locations,
outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Landscape Architect/Engineer's acceptance
of layout before planting. Make minor adjustments as required.
C. Lay out exterior plants at locations directed by Landscape Architect/Engineer. Stake locations of
individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings.
D. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks,
branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation. If
deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery before moving
and again two weeks after planting.
3.3 PLANTING BED ESTABLISHMENT
A. General: Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to Section “Soil
Preparation” and Part 2 above.
B. Place planting Soil: Blend planting soil in place.
C. Finish Grading: Grade planting beds to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine
texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.
D. Restore planting beds if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting.
3.4 TREE AND SHRUB PIT/TRENCH EXCAVATION
A. Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular pits with sides sloped inward, so that top of pit is larger than
bottom of pit. Trim base leaving center area raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage.
Do not further disturb base. Scarify sides of plant pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.
1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for planting stock.
2. Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical
roots for bare-root stock.
3. If drain tile is shown or required under planted areas, excavate to top of porous backfill over
tile.
B. Subsoil removed from excavations may be used as backfill.
C. Obstructions: Notify Landscape Architect/Engineer if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to

trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch-diameter holes into
D. free-draining strata or to a depth of 10 feet, whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining
material.
E. Drainage: Notify Landscape Architect/Engineer if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water

seepage or retention in tree or shrub pits.
F. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs.
3.5 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING
A. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with root flare 1 inch above
adjacent finish grades:
1. Cut burlap and wire baskets from top half of root balls, but do not remove from under root
balls. Discard removed burlap and wire baskets; do not turn down baskets and leave in tree or
shrub pits. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is
cracked or broken before or during planting operation.
2. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate voids and
air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, install transplant inoculants per
manufacturer’s directions and water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat
watering until no more water is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of
planting soil mix.
3. Prepare surface of planting bed as shown on the Drawings.
B. Set balled and potted or container-grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with root flare 1
inch above adjacent finish grades:
1. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.
2. Make four (4) evenly spaced vertical cuts in the sides of the root ball with a clean, sharp utility
knife. Cuts are to be 1-inch deep and are to extend the full height of the rootball.
planting soil mix.
4. Prepare surface of planting bed as shown on the Drawings.
C. Set fabric bag-grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with root flare 1 inch above adjacent
finish grades:
1. Carefully remove root ball from fabric bag without damaging root ball or plant. Do not use
planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.
planting soil mix.
3. Prepare surface of planting bed as shown on drawings.
D. Mulching: Mulch per planting detail.
3.6 TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING
A. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs as directed by Landscape Architect/Engineer.
B. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs according to standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to
retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise indicated by Landscape Architect/Engineer, do
not cut tree leaders; remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees. Prune shrubs to
retain natural character. Shrub sizes indicated are sizes after pruning.
3.7 GUYING AND STAKING
A. Guy and Stake trees as indicated on the drawings. Installation of tree support systems and tree guards
shall be completed within 48 hours of planting, utilizing applicable methods as indicated.
B. Remove tree Guys, Stakes, and tree guards at end of warranty period.
3.8 GROUNDCOVER AND PERENNIAL PLANTING
A. Set out and space ground cover and plants as indicated.
B. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots and backfill with planting soil.
C. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to
hold water.
D. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.
E. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from
transplanting shock.
3.9 PLANTING BED MULCHING
A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting beds and other areas indicated. Apply 3-inch average thickness
of mulch, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch against plant stems.
3.10 INITIAL ACCEPTANCE
A. When all work except maintenance and guarantee program of this contract has been completed,
Landscape Architect/Engineer will perform a Substantial Completion inspection. Provide notification
at least ten (10) working days before inspection date. If required a “punch list” of items to be
completed by an agreed upon date will be issued by the Landscape Architect/Engineer after the
Substantial Completion inspection.
B. Work will be considered Substantially Complete after all “punch list” items are complete. Notify the
Landscape Architect/Engineer at least five (5) working days before re-inspection date, to verify
completion of the “punch list” items.
C. Substantial Completion certificate will be issued and dated by the Landscape Architect/Engineer
following the “punch list” verification inspection.
3.11 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain all exterior plants covered by this Section, as required to establish healthy, viable plantings,
including the following maintenance requirements during the maintenance period indicated in Part 1
of this Section:
1. Mowing.
2. Pruning.
3. Cultivating.
4. Watering including filling tree water bags if used; do not allow plants to wilt at any time.
5. Weeding.
6. Fertilizing.
7. Mulching.
8. Restoring plant saucers for trees.
9. Maintaining trees support systems at correct tension.
10. Resetting plants to proper grade and vertical position.
11. Insect and pest control as required to keep plants free of insects and disease.
12. Removal of trash and debris.
13. Removal of dead or dying plants.
3.12 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Inspection to determine Final Acceptance of planted areas will be made by the Landscape
Architect/Engineer upon Contractor’s request at completion of the two (2) year Warranty Period.
B. Provide notification at least fifteen (15) working days before requested inspection date.
1. Planted areas will be acceptable provided all requirements, including plant replacements and
maintenance, have been complied with and healthy, thriving, and growing plants are
established.
2. Remove all Tree Staking and Guying materials prior to Final Acceptance inspection.
3. Knock down, regrade, and remulch all tree pit saucers prior to Final Acceptance inspection.
3.13 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. During exterior planting, keep adjacent pavings and construction clean and work area in an orderly
condition.
B. Protect exterior plants from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and
trades, and others. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or
replace damaged exterior planting.
3.14 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash,
and debris, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 329110 – SAND CAPPED ROOTZONE MIX FOR ATHLETIC FIELDS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes establishing sand capped rootzone mix for the athletic fields as indicated on the
drawings.
B. Minimum thickness shall be as noted on the Drawings, for all proposed athletic field areas.
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with
other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirement shall govern, unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer.
1. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. C 136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
b. D 422 Particle-Size Analysis of Soils.
c. E 11 Wire-Cloth Sieve for Testing Purposes.
d. F 2396-4 Guideline for High Performance Sand Based Sport Fields.
2. “Standard Specifications for Highway Materials and Methods of Sampling and Testing,
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Supplier List: Submit list of procured and contracted suppliers of all materials required for the
construction of the athletic field.
B. Material Certifications: Manufacturer's or vendor's certified analysis for:

1. Processed sand.
2. Organic amendments.
3. Fertilizer and chemical amendments.
4. Lime.
C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and samples as noted for the following:
1. Fertilizer and chemical amendments.
D. Samples: Submit samples of each of the following materials for review and approval prior to delivery
to site:
1. Sand – 1-gallon (1 per 500 CY).
2. Organic Amendment – 1 gallon (1 per 500 CY).
3. Prepared Root Zone Mix – 1 gallon (1 per 500 CY).
E. Preliminary Fertility/Chemical Schedule:

1. Submit during construction and prior to grow-in. Schedule should include complete grow-in
period up to the anticipated Substantial Completion date. This schedule as well as specific
applications may be adjusted during the maintenance period as based on Fertility testing results,
recommendations from the Owner's Testing Laboratory, climatic conditions, etc. Changes to
the schedule shall be reviewed by the Engineer and Owner.
SAND CAPPED ROOTZONE MIX FOR ATHLETIC FIELDS PAGE 1 OF 7

SECTION 329110
F. Provide Engineer with a complete list of equipment proposed to be used during rootzone placement.
No heavy machinery or rubber-tired loaders will be permitted on the established subgrade. Utilize
low pressure track machines only to move soil.
A. All work shall be performed by one (1) Contractor with proven experience in sand capped athletic
field construction.
B. Field & Fertility Testing Agent(s):

1. The Contractor shall utilize an independent Testing Agent, specializing in Natural Turf
Pathology and Soil testing for Athletic Fields for all prequalification testing. The Testing
Agent shall be A2LA accredited and be insured.
2. All costs associated with pre-qualification testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
3. All costs associated with in-field testing shall be the responsibility of the Owner.
4. See 1.6 Quality Control for specific Field Testing requirements.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Submit samples of each of the following materials for performance testing prior to shipping.
1. Rootzone Mix:
a. Submit a one-gallon sample for every 300 cubic yards of rootzone mix to the Owner's
Testing Laboratory for compliance with the specification.
2. Processed Sand:
a. Submit a one-gallon sample for every 500 tons of sand amendment to the Owner's
Testing Laboratory for compliance with the specification.
3. Organic Amendment:
a. Submit a one-gallon sample for every 200 cubic yards of organic amendment to the
Owner's Testing Laboratory for compliance with the specification.
B. Pre-bid Materials Inspection and Testing:

1. Bidders are encouraged to:
a. Pre-test sand materials with an independent Testing Agent prior to submitting a bid. This
does not guarantee that the materials or source will be approved for construction.
2. All costs associated with pre-bid testing shall be borne by the bidder.
A. All materials shall be delivered and stored within the Contractor’s work limits or in an area approved
by the Owner.
B. All material shall be stored in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of
manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site.
D. Amendments:
1. Deliver tested and approved lots in clean, washed and covered trucks to eliminate
contamination during transportation. Place directly on playing field. Do not stockpile on site.

SECTION 329110
A. Coordinate the placement of rootzone mix with the completion of all underground work including
that of the other trades. The subgrade elevations shall be left within plus/minus .10 feet of the
proposed subgrade elevations.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOTZONE MIX COMPONENTS AND PROTOCOL REPORTING
A. Components: For bidding purposes, the blend shall generally possess the ratios of 95% processed
sand: 5% organic materials. The Testing Agent will have latitude during the mix design process to
reasonably modify these ratios and to ultimately approve a final baseline specification mix as
described earlier in this specification section. The materials used are as follows;
1. Processed Sand:
a. The sand shall be uniform coarse sand screened and washed meeting the following
Particle Size Distribution (ASTM C136 and F1632 sand fractions % retained):
Fraction U.S. Standard Diameter of Allowable Range
Size/Name Sieve Sieve (mm) % Retained on Sieve
Gravel 10 2.00 3% maximum
Very Coarse Sand 18 1.00 less than, equal to 3 – 20%
Coarse Sand 35 0.50 At least 60%
Medium Sand 60 0.25 Particles in this range
Fine Sand 100 0.15 10% maximum
Very Fine Sand 270 0.05 5% maximum
Silt 0.002 5% maximum
Clay <0.002 3% maximum
1) No more than 30% combined for No. 10 and No. 18 sieve.

2) 100% passing the No. 5 (4 mm) sieve, and no more than 15% combined very fine
sand, silt, and clay.
2. Organic Amendments:
a. General:
1) The following components may be blended with the approved processed sand to
make the final approved rootzone mixture.
b. Processed Peat:
1) Performance Criteria: If selected shall have a minimum organic matter content of
85% by weight as determined by loss on ignition (ASTM D 2974-87 Method D)
and shall be free of sticks, stones, hay, or any other deleterious matter.
2) Peat Analysis:
Parameter Specification
Total Ash 15% or less
pH 6.5 to 7.5
% Moisture 40% to 70%
Sieve Criteria
2.0 mm sieve 0 to 5% retained
1.0 mm sieve Less than 20% retained

SECTION 329110
3) Peat Suppliers:
a) Fafard Peat, www.fafard.com.
b) Peat Inc., Steve Young, (763)-441-8387.
c) Oglebay Norton Industrial Sands, Inc. (619) 277-1670.
d) Pioneer Peat, Inc. (701) 746-4300.
B. Rootzone Mix Requirements: The processed sand shall be uniform coarse sand screened and washed
and when blended with the organic material by the Testing Agent shall be reported and meet the
following requirements:
1. Particle Size Analysis meeting previous distribution chart.
2. Physical Analysis (determined at 25 cm tension – 10 inches by USGA testing protocol ASTM
F1815) – multiple mixes may be shown to determine the final selection
a. Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity – 10 to 16 in/hr.
b. Total Porosity – 35 to 55% (Non capillary and Capillary).
c. Bulk Density – 1.2 to 1.6 (ASTM F2396).
d. Report Water Retention Percent at Field Capacity.
e. pH range of 6.0 to 6.5 (ASTM D4972 Method A water only).
f. Organic Matter Percent by weight for the mix shall be 0.4 to 0.6% (ASTM F1647
Method 1).
g. Uniformity Coefficient (Cu): 2.0 – 5.0.
h. Gradation Index (D90/D10): Less than 10.
C. Protocol and Reporting: The Testing Agent shall test the individual rootzone components and the
blended mix(es) and report results using Full or Partial Protocol as follows:
1. Full Protocol Reporting: This full reporting shall be performed to verify/establish Baseline spec
after the bid and prior to construction and for the first 3 batches of the mix during Construction
Quality Control batch testing. Items to be reported are as follows:
a. Particle Size Analysis / Distribution.
b. Physical Analysis:
1) Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity.
2) Total Porosity (Non capillary and Capillary).
3) Bulk Density.
4) Report Water Retention Percent at Field Capacity.
5) pH range.
6) Organic Matter Percent by weight for the mix.
7) Uniformity Coefficient (Cu):
8) Gradation Index (D90/D10).
2. Partial Protocol Reporting: The remaining batches after the initial three during Construction
Quality Control batch testing shall be tested and reported for the following unless it is
determined at the sole discretion of the Owner or the Testing Agent to use the full protocol:
a. Particle Size Distribution / Analysis.
b. Uniformity Coefficient.
c. Infiltration Rate.
3. Mix Adjustments and Recommendations: The Testing Agent shall make recommendations
from the material reporting if necessary.
4. PH Recommendations
a. Testing Agent shall make appropriate recommendations to modify the pH rating of the
rootzone mx to establish an optimum range of 6.0 to 6.5 for sports turfgrass.

SECTION 329110
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PROTECTION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which all work of this Section is
being performed. Do not proceed with any work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions.
B. Protection of Work: Protect all on-going work, so as not to delay work due to weather or project
related construction. This includes but is not limited to the use of tarps, geotextile, plywood and other
protective measures.
C. Protection of Persons and Property: Provide all necessary measures to protect workmen and
passersby. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of the work, as required by municipal or
other authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Protect adjacent construction throughout the entire operation. Protect newly graded areas from
destruction by weather or runoff. Protect structures, utilities, pavements, and other
improvements from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining and
washout.
D. Unanticipated Conditions: Notify the Engineer immediately upon finding evidence of previous
structures, filled materials that penetrate below designated excavation levels, or other conditions
which are not shown or which cannot be reasonably assumed from existing surveys and geotechnical
reports.
3.2 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE
A. Existing subgrade shall be scarified a minimum depth of 4 inches and cleared of stones greater than 2
inches, sticks, roots and other extraneous material prior to spreading rootzone.
B. The final elevation of the subgrade shall be within one-half inch on a 25 foot by 25 foot grid of the
finished grades indicated on the Contract Drawings. Laser controlled or indicated equipment shall be
used for this part of the work.
C. The final subgrade shall mirror the final finish elevation of the field surface regarding slope except
where noted on the drawings.
D. The subgrade shall be loosened to 80% of the maximum dry density as determined by the standard
proctor test.
3.3 ROOTZONE MIX INSTALLATION
A. All rootzone mix to be bulk mixed prior to installation to produce a consistent homogenous mixture
for placement in athletic field areas.
B. A sample of the rootzone mixture in the proper rations shall be tested for particle size, permeability
(Ksat), bulk density, aeration and capillary porosity, and organic matter content using ASTM F-1815-
97 standard method prior to bulk mixing for placement.
C. Once mixing commences, samples shall be taken from the first 20 cubic yards, and every subsequent
300 cubic yards to confirm compliance with specified performance requirements.

SECTION 329110
D. Rootzone Mix shall not be spread until it is possible to follow within 72 hours with sodding
operations.
E. Rootzone Mix shall not be placed when subgrade or rootzone mix are frozen, excessively wet or
excessively dry. The Landscape Architect or the Owner’s Representative may delay or reject
rootzone placement if deemed appropriate based on field conditions.
F. Begin placement of rootzone mix only after irrigation system layout and installation have been
approved and after verification that the finish grade of the subgrade conforms to the installation
tolerances.
1. Depressions in the subgrade shall be removed/re-graded to a smooth surface prior to and during
placement of rootzone material.
G. The approved rootzone mix shall be dumped at the edge of the field and systematically worked
outward onto the field. Equipment used for placement of rootzone mix/field shall utilize turf type
tires or low-pressure track equipment which will not damage or overly compact the field installation.
H. The rootzone mix shall be spread onto the field in an even depth as shown on the drawings within a
tolerance of one-quarter inch. The finish grade slope shall conform exactly to the subgrade slope,
(unless indicated otherwise on drawings) when the root zone mix has been spread uniformly over the
field and compacted to 75% minimum to 82% maximum dry density as determined by the standard
proctor test. The field shall be compacted, settled and firmed uniformly. Operate the irrigation
system as necessary to settle and compact the mix to a final uniform depth.
I. Rootzone mix shall be placed it two equal lifts to ensure a minimum specified depth.
J. Finish grades shall be achieved by using a combination of laser-operated equipment, string lines, drag
screens, rollers, and hand raking with a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 25 feet, non-cumulative.
A. Subgrade Ground Surface Requirements:

1. Perform density tests in accordance with ASTM A1556, ASTM D2167, or ASTM D2022.
Minimum one test per 5000 SF.
2. Perform moisture tests in accordance with ASTM D3017.
3. Where field-testing is performed using nuclear test methods, verify calibration of both density
and moisture gages at the beginning of work, on each different type of material encountered,
and additionally as directed by the Owner.
B. Contractor shall submit a complete maintenance schedule based on rootzone testing,

recommendations by the testing agent and as discussed with the Owner’s representative. This shall
occur throughout the grow-in period and up to Substantial Completion.
C. Grade Verification: A certified survey shall be made of the as-built condition at the subgrade,
rootzone mix for conformance to specified elevations.
D. Grade Verification: A certified survey shall be made of the as-built condition at subgrade, compacted
rootzone mix, established turf field. A survey of the finished spot grades is to be developed by a State
licensed surveyor over the entire surface in a 25-foot grid. The survey shall be certified (signed) and
submitted to the Owner and its representatives for approval prior to installation of the grass material.
In no event shall the Work contain depressions or other areas where water does not freely drain from
the field

SECTION 329110
3.5 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials, including materials not allowed for fill,
backfill or site grading as specified within, trash, and debris, and dispose of it properly off Owner's
property at Contractor's expense.
B. Leave the site in a clean, satisfactory condition ready to receive subsequent operations.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 329110
SECTION 32 9113
SOIL PREPARATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes provisions for the placement of topsoil in conformance with the lines,
grades and thicknesses as shown on the Drawings and as herein specified.
B. Minimum thickness is 6 inches, for all areas disturbed during construction and not receiving
other surface treatment.
C. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and perform all work in accordance with these
specifications, drawings, and instructions provided by the Owner.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Furnish earth materials to the testing laboratory for analysis and report, as directed by
the Engineer or as outlined in the specifications.
B. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Test Reports: The testing laboratory shall submit written reports of all tests, investigations,
and recommendations to the Contractor and the Engineer. Indicate quantities of materials
necessary to bring topsoil into compliance with textural/gradation requirements. Indicate
quantity of lime and quantity and analysis of fertilizer.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Comply with the latest edition of the following standards:

1. TDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction
2. “Standard Specifications for Highway Materials and Methods of Sampling and Testing,
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).”
3. ASTM International (ASTM)
a. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
b. C602, Standard Specification for Agricultural Liming Materials
4. U.S. Bureau of Reclamation (USBR)
a. 514.4.4, Reclamation Instructions, Series 510—Land Classification Techniques and
Standards, Part 514—Laboratory Procedures, Chapter 4—Particle-Size Analyses.
b. 14.8.7, Reclamation Instructions, Series 510—Land Classification Techniques and
Standards, Part 514—Laboratory Procedures, Chapter 8—Soil Chemical Tests
A. Provide and pay for all costs in connection with an approved independent testing facility to
determine conformance of soils and aggregate with the specifications.
A. Coordinate the placement of topsoil with the completion of all underground work including that of
the other trades.
TWA #019-007.1 32 9113-1 Soil Preparation

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Natural, friable, fertile, fine loamy soil possessing the characteristics of representative
topsoils in the vicinity which produces a heavy growth; free from subsoil, objectionable weeds,
litter, sods, stiff clay, stones larger than 1 inch in diameter, stumps, roots, trash, toxic
substances, or any other material which may be harmful to plant growth or hinder planting
operations. Contractor is to verify amount stockpiled and supply any additional as needed:
1. Topsoil shall contain not less than 6% nor more than 20% organic matter as determined by
the wet combustion method (chronic acid reduction); topsoil shall have a pH value of not
less than 5.5 nor more than 7.0.
2. Topsoil shall meet the following mechanical analysis:
SIZE OF SCREEN % OF SOIL RETAINED % OF SOIL PASSING

1” 0 100
1/4 3 97
No. 100 40-60 40-60
3. Imported topsoil in which more than 60% of the material passing a No. 100 sieve shall be
rejected. All percentages are to be based on the dry weight of the samples.
4. Laboratory tests of the topsoil shall be performed by a certified testing laboratory, and shall
perform tests for the following:
a. Sieve particle size analysis and gradient of mineral content
b. Chemical analysis of the following:
1) pH and buffer pH.
2) Percent of organic content.
3) Nutrient levels of phosphorus, potassium magnesium, manganese, iron, zinc
and calcium.
4) Soluble salt.
5) Cation exchange capacity (CEC).
c. Recommended fertilizer and rate of application for low and medium level nutrient
soils.
2.2 MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Topsoil may be acquired from approved sites that are designated on the Drawings. If no sites
are designated, material proposed for use as topsoil must be stockpiled, sampled, and tested
prior to use.
B. Topsoil containing foreign material may be rejected on the basis of visual examination by the
Engineer, prior to testing.
C. Acceptance of topsoil shall be based upon test results. Tested topsoil must be approved in
writing by the Engineer before any material is used.
2.3 SOIL AMENDMENT
A. Textural Amendments: Amend as necessary to conform to required composition by incorporating

sand, peat, manure, or sawdust.

B. Fertilizer: Shall be delivered to the site, mixed as specified, in the original unopened standard
size bags showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Store fertilizer in a weatherproof
place and in such a manner that it shall be kept dry and its effectiveness shall not be impaired.
1. Percentages of nitrogen, phosphorus and potash shall be based on laboratory test
recommendations. For the purpose of bidding, assume 10% nitrogen, 6% phosphorus and
4% potash by weight. At least 50% of the total nitrogen shall contain no less than 3%
water-insoluble nitrogen. At least 60% of the nitrogen content shall be derived from super-
phosphate containing not less than 18% phosphoric acid or bone meal containing 25% to
30% phosphoric acid and 2% to 3% nitrogen. Potash shall be derived from muriate of
potash containing 55% to 60% potash.
2. Grass or sodded areas shall have fertilizer applied according to soil text report or as
specified on the drawings.
C. Organic Matter: Leaf matter and yard waste composted sufficiently to break down all woody
fibers, seeds, and leaf structures, and free of toxic and non-organic matter. Organic matter shall
be commercially prepared compost. Coarse sand shall be clean, sharp, natural sands free of
limestone, shale and slate particles, ASTM C33 fine aggregate with a Fines Modulus Index of
2.75 or greater.
D. Lime: Shall be ground palletized, or pulverized lime manufactured to meet agricultural standards
and contain a maximum of 60% oxide.
3.1 STOCKPILING
A. Stockpile topsoil from on-site sources or provide from off-site sources and stockpile, if on-site
quantities are deficient.
B. Stockpiles are to contain not less than 200 cubic yards or the minimum required for the project.
C. Stockpiles are to have a maximum height of 10 feet and be trimmed to uniform surfaces and
slopes.
D. The sites of all stockpiles and adjacent areas, which have been disturbed are to be graded and
put into an acceptable condition by seeding, as directed by the Engineer.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Preparation - Disk, drag, harrow or hand rake subgrade to a depth of 3 inches to provide bond
for topsoil. Topsoil, which must be transported across finished walks, shall be delivered in such a
manner that no damage will be done to the walks. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
repair of such damage.
B. Before placing topsoil, rake subsoil surface clear of stones larger than 1.5 inches, debris, and
roots. Compact topsoil to form a layer with minimum depth of 4 inches in lawn areas and 12
inches in shrub beds. Topsoil shall be placed so that after final settlement there will be good
drainage (and conforming to elevations shown on drawings). Contractor is to maintain surfaces
and place any additional topsoil necessary to replace that which may have eroded before
acceptance.
C. Locations containing unsuitable subsoil shall be treated in one of the following manners:
1. Where unsuitability within the construction site is deemed by the Owner to be due to
excessive compaction caused by heavy equipment or by the presence of boards, mortar,

concrete or other construction materials in subgrade, and where the natural subsoil is other
than A.A.S.H.T.O. classification of A6 or 7, the Contractor shall loosen such areas with
spikes, discs, or other means to loosen the soil to a condition acceptable by the Owner.
The Contractor shall also remove all debris and objectionable material. Soil should be
loosened to a minimal depth of 12 inches with additional loosening as required to obtain
adequate drainage. Contractor may introduce peat moss, sand, or organic matter into the
subsoil to obtain adequate drainage should he so desire. All such remedial measures shall
be considered as incidental to the work and no extra payment shall be made for this part of
the work; and
2. Where subgrade is deemed by the Owner to be unsuitable because the natural subsoil
falls into an AASHTO classification of A6 or 7 and contains moisture in excess of 30%,
then such a condition shall be rendered suitable by installation of a subdrainage system or
by other means described elsewhere in these specifications. Where such conditions have
not been known or revealed prior to planting time and where they have not been
recognized in the preparation of drawings and specifications, then the Owner shall issue a
change order to install the proper remedial measures, all of which shall be in addition to the
contract sum.
3.3 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT
A. The final elevation of the subgrade shall be within one-half inch on a 25 foot by 25 foot grid of
the finished grades (minus depth of topsoil) indicated on the Contract Drawings. Laser controlled
or GPS-controlled equipment shall be used for this part of the work. Contractor shall submit a
survey with contours and spot elevations labeled for review and approval prior to placement of
topsoil.
B. The final subgrade shall mirror the final finish elevation of the field surface regarding slope
except where noted on the drawings.
C. Do not place topsoil when subsoil or topsoil is frozen, excessively wet, or otherwise detrimental
to the Work.
D. Mix soil amendments, lime, and fertilizer with topsoil before placement or spread on topsoil
surface and mix thoroughly into entire depth of topsoil before planting or seeding. Delay mixing
of fertilizer if planting or seeding will not occur within 3 days.
E. Place 1/2 of total depth of topsoil and work into subgrade soil to create a transition layer. Place
remainder of topsoil to depth after compacting to 75% where seeding and planting are
scheduled.
F. Uniformly distribute topsoil to within 1/2 inch of final grades on a 25’ x 25’ grid. Fine grade topsoil
eliminating rough or low areas and maintaining levels, profiles, and contours of subgrade to
ensure positive drainage. Contractor shall submit a survey with contours and spot elevations
labeled for review and approval prior to seeding.
G. Remove stones exceeding 1 inch, roots, sticks, debris, and foreign matter during and after
topsoil placement.
H. Remove surplus subsoil and topsoil from Site. Grade stockpile area as necessary and place in
condition acceptable for planting or seeding.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove all surplus subsoil and topsoil from project site.

B. Leave the site in clean, satisfactory condition ready to receive subsequent operations.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 32 9200
TURF AND GRASSES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the preparation of ground surfaces, fertilization of applicable areas,
seeding, mulching of applicable surface areas, and maintenance of turf areas until such time as
project is accepted by Engineer. Applicable areas shall include those identified on the Contract
Drawings.
B. Seed shall be sown from April 1 to June 15, or from August 15 to October 15 of given calendar
year, unless otherwise approved by Engineer.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Certification:
a. Submit manufacturer’s or vendor’s certified analysis for soil amendments and
fertilizer materials.
b. Submit vendor’s certified analysis for each grass seed mixture required, stating
botanical and common name, percentages by weight, percentages by purity,
germination, and weed seed.
B. Maintenance Instructions: Submit instructions recommending procedures to be implemented for

maintenance of landscaped work for one (1) full year. Submit prior to expiration of Contractor’s
maintenance period.
C. Submit description of planned mulching techniques and corresponding manufacturer’s

installation recommendations for approval by Owner.
A. All turf and grasses work shall be performed by one Contractor, with proven expertise in this type
of construction.
B. Package standard products with the manufacturer’s certified analysis. For other materials,
provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the
Association of Official Agriculture Chemists, wherever applicable.
testing facility to determine conformance of materials with the specifications.
A. Deliver packaged materials in containers, showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer.
Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored on site.
TWA #019-007.1 32 9200-1 Turf and Grasses

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Fertilizer:
1. Commercial fertilizer (5-10-5) inorganic, or organic, containing not less than five (5) percent
nitrogen, ten (10) percent available phosphoric acid, and five (5) percent water soluble
potash.
2. If, as an alternative, the Contractor wishes to substitute for commercial fertilizer 5-10-5,
another commercial fertilizer with a 1-2-1 ratio, such as 10-20-10 or 6-12-6, they may do so
with the approval of the Owner and the rate of fertilizer to be used shall be whatever
amount is required to furnish the same amount of nitrogen as would be supplied by the 5-
10-5.
B. Seed:
1. Seed shall be fresh, clean, new-crop seed mixed in the proportions specified for species
and variety, conforming to Federal and State Standards.
2. Athletic Seed Mix (Used within athletic field limits): Use the following standard mixture blue
seal classic, unless a special mixture is otherwise indicated or approved by the Owner.
% BY % BY % BY
SPECIES
WEIGHT PURITY GERMINATION
Kentucky Bluegrass* 50 85 80
Tall Fescue 50 95 85
*Kentucky Bluegrass must consist of a minimum of two varieties.
3. Site Seed Mix (Used outside athletic field limits): Use the following standard mixture blue
seal classic, unless a special mixture is otherwise indicated or approved by the Owner.
% BY % BY % BY
SPECIES
WEIGHT PURITY GERMINATION
Kentucky Bluegrass* 60 85 80
Creeping Red Fescue 20 95 85
Perennial Rye 20 95 85
*Kentucky Bluegrass must consist of a minimum of two varieties.
4. Weed seed content shall not exceed 0.25%.
C. Mulch:
1. Provide and install a mulch adequate to protect the seeding during its growing period. It
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the appropriate mulching
techniques for the particular site conditions and acquire approval of the same from the
Owner.
2. Clean straw for gentle slopes, consisting of stalks of oats, wheat, rye, or other approved
crops which are free of noxious weed seeds. Weight shall be based on a fifteen (15)
percent moisture content.
3. Mulching blanket for steep slopes and drainage swales: “Curlex Blanket” by American
Excelsior, “Ero-Mat” by Contech Construction Products, Inc, or approved equal.
4. Bonded fiber matrix for mulching in areas where slopes are 1.5H:1V or greater or cut or fill
slopes 20 feet (6m) or more in height. Product shall be EcoAegis as manufactured by
Canfor, or approved equal meeting U.S. DOT Standard Specification FP-96, Section
713.05(h)
a. Package Weight: 50 pound (18.6kg) bags.

b. Moisture Content: 12 +/- 3 percent by weight.
c. Minimum Water Holding Capacity: Approximately 10 times dry weight.
d. Composition:
1) Refined Softwood Fiber: (90% by weight).
2) Blended Hydrocolloid-based Binder: (9% by weight).
3) Mineral Activator: (1% by weight).
e. Color: Natural – No Dye Products.
D. Water: Clean and potable.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Soil Amendments: Soil amendments are not to be made without review and authorization by the
Owner.
1. Lime: Natural limestone containing not less than 85% of total carbonates, ground so that
not less than 90% passes a 10-mesh sieve and not less than 50% passes a 100-mesh
sieve.
2. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade.
3. Peat Humus: FS Q-P-166 and with texture and pH range suitable for intended use.
4. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw, finely ground; 4% nitrogen and 20% phosphoric acid.
5. Superphosphate: Soluble mixture of treated minerals; 20% available phosphoric acid.
6. Sand: Clean, washed sand, free of toxic materials.
7. Perlite: Conforming to National Bureau of Standards PS 23.
8. Vermiculite: Horticultural grade, free of toxic substances.
9. Sawdust: Rotted sawdust, free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic substances and with
7.5 pounds (2.8 kg) nitrogen uniformly mixed into each cubic yard of sawdust.
10. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25% by
volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials and containing no chemicals or
ingredients harmful to plants.
11. Commercial Fertilizer: Complete fertilizer of neutral character, with some elements derived
from organic sources and containing available plant nutrients.
12. Composted Organic Material: Shall have a minimum organic matter content of 60 percent,
as determined by ASTM D-2974, and screened to ¾-inch (1.9 cm).
3.1 PREPARATION OF TOPSOIL
A. Clean topsoil of roots, plants, stones, clay lumps and other extraneous materials harmful or toxic
to plant growth.
B. Mix fertilizer into top 2 inches (5 cm) of topsoil at a rate of 10 pounds (3.7 kg) per 1,000 square
feet. (92.9 m2)
C. Mix approved soil amendments into top 2 inches (5cm) of topsoil at necessary rates.
D. Water dry topsoil to depth of 4 inches (10cm) at least 48 hours prior to seeding to obtain a loose
friable seed bed.

3.2 PREPARATION OF UNCHANGED GRADES
A. Where lawns are to be planted in areas not altered or disturbed by excavating, grading, or
stripping, prepare soil for seeding as follows:
1. Till to a depth of not less than 6 inches (15cm).
2. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers as specified.
3. Remove high areas and fill in depressions.
4. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture, free of lumps, clods, stones, roots, and
other extraneous matter.
a. Prior to preparation of unchanged areas, remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf.
Dispose of such materials off the site; do not turn over into soil being prepared for
lawns.
b. Apply specified commercial fertilizer at rates specified and thoroughly mixed into
upper 2 inches (5 cm) of topsoil. Delay application of fertilizer if lawn planting will not
follow within one week.
3.3 SEEDING
A. Apply seed only when wind velocities are less than five (5) miles per hour (9km/hr).
B. Sow half the seed with mechanical seeder.
C. Sow remaining half of the seed at right angles to the direction of the first seeding pattern, using
the same method.
D. Apply seed at the rate of 4 pounds (1.5 kg) per 1,000 square feet (92.9 sq. meters) of disturbed
area.
E. Cover seed to a depth of ⅛-inch (3mm) by raking, harrowing, or cultipacking.
F. Roll seeded area with roller weighing no more than 150 pounds per foot of roller width.
G. Water seeded areas to a depth of four (4) inches (10cm) as required during the maintenance
period.
3.4 MULCHING
A. Spread straw uniformly over seeded area with 75% ground coverage and at least 1-½ inches
loose depth.
1. If, in the opinion of the Owner, wind will disrupt the mulching, apply asphalt emulsion at a
rate of 10 gallons (37.81) per 1,000 square feet (92.9 m2).
B. Place mulching blanket in accordance with submitted manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Place bonded fiber matrix mulch material, EcoAegis, at a rate of 3,500 to 4,100 pounds per acre,
based on manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.5 HYDROSEEDING
A. Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and pulverized mulch in water, using equipment specifically
designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous
slurry suitable for hydraulic application.
B. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded. Rate of application as required to obtain
specified seed sowing rate.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after seeding, erect barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly
planted areas from pedestrian and vehicular traffic. Maintain barricades throughout
maintenance period until grass and/or turf is established.
B. Repair or replace damaged landscape work as directed by Owner or Engineer.
3.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Begin maintenance immediately after seed placement.
B. Watering:
1. Keep soil moist during seed germination period.
2. Supplement rainfall to produce a total depth penetration of 2 inches per day after
germination.
3. Prevent erosion and displacement of seed.
C. Mowing:
1. When grass reaches 4 inches in height, mow to 2-½ inches in height.
2. Maintain grass between 1-½ inches and 2-½ inches in height.
3. Do not cut off more than 30% of grass leaf in a single mowing.
4. Remove grass clippings.
D. Reseed and mulch spots larger than 1 square foot not having uniform coverage.
E. Maintain lawns by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, and other operations such as
rolling, regardening, and replanting as required to establish a smooth, acceptable lawn, free of
eroded or bare areas.
F. Maintain and protect all seeded areas until final acceptance of the Contract. Final acceptance of
“Turf and Grasses” will not be made until an acceptable uniform stand of grass is obtained in all
new lawn areas, except that the Engineer at their discretion may accept a portion or portions of
the “Turf and Grasses” at various times. Upon acceptance by the Engineer of a seeded area,
the Owner will immediately assume responsibility for maintenance and protection of that portion
of the Contract Seeding.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 329223.10 – SODDED ATHLETIC FIELDS
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions
and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preparation of ground surfaces, fertilizing, sodding, mulching, and maintenance
of turf areas as shown on the Drawings or as specified herein.
B. Sodding shall occur from April 15 through November 15 unless otherwise approved by the
Landscape Architect.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Certification:
a. Submit manufacturer’s or vendor’s certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer
materials.
b. Submit vendor’s certified analysis for each grass required, stating botanical and common
name.
A. All work shall be performed by one (1) Contractor, with proven experience in this field.
B. Package standard products with the manufacturer’s certified analysis. For other materials, provide
analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of
Official Agriculture Chemists, wherever applicable.
A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer.
Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Fertilizer:
1. Commercial starter fertilizer (19-26-5) with fine particles, chemically homogeneous, having a
minimum 75% of total nitrogen (19%) derived from urea and methylene ureas and a minimum
of 26% monoammonium phosphate.
2. The POLY-S fertilizer shall be a 19-3-19* analysis, uniform particle size, have a minimum of
97% of the total nitrogen (19%) derived from polymer encapsulated coated urea, a minimum of
3% monoammonium phosphate and 19% from potassium sulfate.
3. The POLY-S product NPK Turf Fertilizer with Minors (19-3-19) shall be applied as specified.
SODDED ATHLETIC FIELDS PAGE 1 OF 4

\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 32\329223.10 Sodded Athletic Fields.docx SECTION 329223.10
B. Grass Materials:
1. Sod: Provide machine-cut, strongly rooted, certified turf grass sod, at least 9 months old and
free of weeds, non-organic contaminants and undesirable native grasses. Provide sod capable of
vigorous growth and development when planted and complying with the following
requirements:
a. Type: Sod shall consist of a mixture of 80-90% Tall Fescue and 10-20% Bluegrass.
b. Contractor shall submit mix for approval by Landscape Architect.
c. Sod Roll Size: Uniform thickness of 1 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch (.31cm), measured at
time of cutting and excluding top growth and thatch. Provide turf that measures a
minimum of 24 inches wide and 50 feet in length. Broken or torn rolls or rolls with
uneven ends are not acceptable.
d. Sod Strength: Provide sod pads capable of supporting their own weight and retaining
size and shape when supplier's standard size pad is suspended vertically from a firm
grasp on upper 10 percent of the pad.
e. Grown on a sand-based soil (Sandy Loamy Sand or Sandy Loam). Sod grown on a muck
soil bed is not allowed.
f. Any Mesh/Netting must be removed prior to installation.
C. Water: Clean, potable.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Soil Amendments:
1. Soil amendments are not to be made without review and authorization by the Architect.
2. Lime: Natural limestone containing not less than 85% of total carbonates, ground so that not
less than 90% passes a 10-mesh sieve and not less than 50% passes a 100-mesh sieve.
3. Herbicide: Apply a pre-emergent herbicide to the installed topsoil. Apply a post-emergent
herbicide when weed infestation exceeds 5% of any planted grass area. Reapply post-emergent
herbicide application until weeds are eradicated.
3.1 PREPARATION OF ROOT ZONE MATERIAL
A. Mix fertilizer into top 4 inches (10.16 cm) of root zone at a minimum rate of 6 lbs. (2.72 kg) per 1000
square feet for the starter fertilizer and at a minimum rate of 7 lbs. (3.17 kg) per 1000 square feet
(92.90 m2) for the POLY-S fertilizer.
B. Mix approved soil amendments into top 4 inches (10.16cm) of root zone at necessary rates.
C. Water dry root zone to depth of 4 inches at least 48 hours prior to sodding to obtain a loose friable
planting bed.
D. The final planting bed must be smooth and surface free from water holding depressions or pockets.
3.2 SODDING NEW TURF AREAS
A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay if ground is frozen.
B. Lay sod to form solid mass with tightly fitted joints in a direction parallel to the width of the field.
Butt ends and sides of sod strips; do not overlap. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses.

Work from boards to avoid damage to subgrade or sod. Tamp or roll lightly to ensure contact with
subgrade. Work sifted soil into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid
smothering adjacent grass.
C. Water sod with fine spray immediately after planting. During the first week, water daily or more
frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to depth of 4 inches (10.16cm).
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Erect barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from pedestrian and
vehicular traffic. Maintain barricades throughout maintenance period until turf is established.
3.4 MAINTENANCE
A. Begin maintenance of turf immediately after each area is planted and continue for the periods
required to establish acceptable turf, but no less than the following:
1. Sodded turf, at least 30 days after date of substantial completion of turf installation.
B. Maintain turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, and other operations such as
rolling, regarding, replanting as required to establish a smooth, acceptable turf, free of eroded or bare
areas.
C. Resod bare areas with same materials specified for turf.
D. Watering: Provide water to keep turf areas uniformly moist as required for proper growth. Apply a
minimum of 1.5 inches (3.81cm) of water per week to all turf grass or more if directed by Landscape
Architect during hot, dry and/or windy periods.
E. Mow turf as soon as there is enough top growth to cut with mower set at specified height for principal
species planted. Repeat mowing as required to maintain specified height. Remove no more than 30
percent of grass leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass
blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Time initial and subsequent
mowings to maintain following grass height:
1. Mow grass from 1 inch to 3/4 inch high.
F. Apply second fertilizer application after first mowing and when grass is dry.
1. Use fertilizer that will provide at least 1.0 lb. (.453 kg) of actual nitrogen per 1,000 sq. ft.
(92.90m2) of lawn area.
3.5 ACCEPTANCE
A. When work is substantially completed, including maintenance, Landscape Architect will, upon
request, make an inspection to determine acceptability.
1. Sodded fields will be inspected for acceptance in whole, agreeable to Landscape Architect,
provided work offered for inspection is complete, including maintenance.
B. Resod rejected work and continue specified maintenance until reinspected by Landscape Architect
and found to be acceptable.
C. Sodded turf will be acceptable provided requirements, including maintenance, have been met and
healthy, well-rooted (minimum 1” depth), even-colored, viable lawn is established, free of weeds,
open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities.

3.6 CLEANUP
A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles
before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto surface of roads, walks, or other paved areas.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 33 0500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the installation of buried piping.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The following references shall be applicable:American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
3. American Water Works Association (AWWA).
4. Uni-Bell Plastic Pipe Association.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for approval a schedule for all proposed testing. Include proposed testing procedures
indicating the sequence in which pipe sections will be tested and description of methods and
equipment to be used.
B. Field Test Reports: Submit results of field testing directly to Engineer with copy to Contractor
1.4 STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store materials within the Contract limits as approved by Engineer.
B. Handle materials carefully with approved handling devices in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations. Special care shall be exercised during delivery and storage to avoid damage
to the materials.
C. Do not drop or roll products off trucks. Products are not to be otherwise dragged, rolled, or
skidded.
D. Materials shall be stored on heavy wood blocking or platforms in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Materials shall not be in contact with the
ground and their interiors shall be maintained free from dirt and other foreign matter.
E. Products cracked, gouged, chipped, dented, or otherwise damaged will not be approved and are
to be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense, unless the product can be repaired in a
manner acceptable to the manufacturer and the Engineer. All repairs shall be at the Contractor’s
expense.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating site utility work with other trades to ensure
building service connection locations are verified and coordinated prior to commencing site
construction.
TWA #019-007.1 33 0500-1 Common Work Results for Utilities

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Conform to individual pipe specification(s).
B. Pipe transition fittings: Shall be as indicated on the drawings. If not specifically indicated
selection shall be based on pressure requirements of the system and types of materials being
joined. Product selection shall be approved by the engineer.
C. Grout:
1. Description: ASTM C1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement
grout.
a. Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
b. Design Mix: 5000 psi (34.5 MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
c. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
D. Flowable Fill:
1. Description: Low-strength-concrete, flowable-slurry mix.
a. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, Portland.
b. Density: 115 to 145 pounds/cubic foot.
c. Aggregates: ASTM C33, natural sand, fine and crushed gravel or stone, coarse.
d. Aggregates: ASTM C33, natural sand, fine.
e. Admixture: ASTM C618, fly-ash mineral.
f. Water: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.
g. Strength: Greater than 40 psig at 28 days and no more than 150 psig at one year.
3.1 UTILITY DEMOLITION
A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove piped utility systems, equipment, and components indicated
to be removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug
remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping. Fill abandoned piping with flowable fill,
and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.
3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational.
5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
3.2 BURIED PIPE INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Installation of all pipe, fittings, valves, specials, and appurtenances shall be subject to the
review and/or approval of the Engineer.
2. Install piping valves and fittings as shown, specified and as recommended by the
manufacturer and in conformance with referenced standards, and approved Shop
Drawings.

3. Request instructions from Engineer before proceeding if there is a conflict between the
manufacturer’s recommendations and the Drawings or Specifications.
4. All piping and appurtenances shall be inspected by the Engineer prior to installation.
Engineer’s inspection will not relieve Contractor or manufacturer from responsibility for
damaged products.
5. Present all conflicts between piping systems and equipment, structures or facilities to
Engineer for determination of corrective measures before proceeding.
6. Take field measurements prior to installation to ensure proper fitting of Work. Uncover the
existing pipelines sufficiently in advance of the proposed Work in order that the type and
location of the existing pipes and joints and other information required to fabricate the
proposed piping can be determined. Obtain whatever information is required to complete
the connections of the proposed pipelines to the existing pipelines.
7. Carefully examine all piping for cracks, damage, or other defects before installation.
Immediately remove defective materials from the site, unless the defective materials can
be repaired in a manner acceptable to the manufacturer and Engineer. Remove, replace,
or repair at the Contractor’s expense piping found to be broken or defective.
8. Inspect interior of all piping and mating surfaces and remove all dirt, gravel, sand, debris,
or other foreign material before installation. Maintain the interior of all piping clean until
acceptance of the completed Work. Prevent foreign matter from entering joint space.
9. Install buried piping accurately to line and grade shown, specified or directed, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer. Use accurate means of determining and checking
the alignment and grade subject to the approval of the Engineer. Remove and relay piping
that is incorrectly installed at Contractor’s expense.
10. Do not lay piping in water, unless approved by the Engineer. Ensure that the water level in
the trench is at least 6 inches below the bottom of piping. Maintain a dry trench until
jointing and backfilling are complete, unless otherwise specified in these Specifications or
11. Pipe laying work shall be conducted so that trenching operations are not advanced too far
ahead of the pipe laying operation resulting in excessive lengths of open trench. In
general, open trench ahead of pipe laying shall not exceed 50 feet.
12. Start laying piping at lowest point and proceed toward the higher elevations, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer. Slope piping uniformly between elevations shown on
the Drawings or as otherwise provided by the Engineer.
13. Where pipe crossings occur, the lower pipe shall be laid first and all backfill thoroughly
compacted to the level of the higher pipe before the higher pipe is installed. Backfill
material under such conditions may be earth, broken stone, or 2500 psi concrete.
14. Install piping so that the barrel of the piping and not the joints receives the bearing
pressure from the trench bottom, or other bedding condition.
15. No piping shall be brought into position until the preceding length, valve, fitting, or special
has been bedded and secured in place.
16. Whenever pipe laying is not actively in progress, the open ends of the piping shall be
closed by a temporary plug or cap to prevent soil, water and other foreign matter from
entering the piping.
17. Where required for inserting valves, fittings, special appurtenances, and closures, shall be
made with a machine specially designed for cutting piping and in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions for field cutting of pipe. Make cuts carefully, without damage to
piping, so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the piping. Taper cut
ends and file off sharp edges until smooth. Flame cutting will not be permitted. Replace
and repair damaged piping.
18. Blocking under piping will not be permitted unless specifically approved by Engineer for
special conditions.
19. Touch up protective and linings and coatings prior to installation.
20. Rotate piping to place outlets in proper position.

B. Bedding and Backfilling:
1. Bedded and installed piping in conformance with Section “Trenching and Backfilling” and
as shown except as otherwise specified.
2. No piping shall be laid until Engineer approves the bedding condition.
3. Excavation in excess of that required as shown on the Drawings or specified, which is not
authorized by the Engineer, shall be at the Contractor’s expense. Backfilling and
compaction of the over-excavated areas shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
4. Carefully and thoroughly compact all pipe bedding and fill up to the pipe centerline with
hand-held pneumatic compactors.
C. Restraints, Supports, and Thrust Blocks:

1. Install restrained joints as shown, specified, required, and as recommended by
manufacturer. Assembly of restrained joints shall be in strict accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Provide concrete and metal cradles, collars, and blocks as shown on the Drawings or
otherwise required by Engineer.
3. Thrust Blocks:
a. Provide concrete thrust blocking to resist test pressure on all plugs, caps, tees, bends
and other fittings in pressure piping systems unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings.
b. Conform to the details for concrete thrust blocks and tie rods.
c. Concrete: 3000 psi, placed around the fittings to completely fill the space between
the fittings and the undisturbed walls of the trench. Do not overlap any joint with
concrete and place concrete so as not to interfere with removing or installing any of
the jointing hardware.
4. Retainer Glands (for water distribution and sewer force main piping):
a. Provide retainer glands for joint restraint of all fittings and valves.
b. Retainer glands shall be Megalug Series 1100 as manufactured by EBAA or
approved equal.
D. Transitions from One Type of Pipe to Another:

1. Provide all necessary adapters, specials, and connection pieces required when connecting
different types and sizes of pipe or connecting pipe made by different manufacturers.
E. Work Affecting Existing Piping:

1. Location of Existing Piping:
a. Locations of existing piping shown shall be considered approximate. Contractor shall
perform all necessary subsurface investigation to verify actual locations in the field.
b. Determine exact location of existing piping to make connections, relocate, replace or
which may be disturbed during earth moving operations, or which may be affected by
work in any way.
c. Coordinate all excavations with utility companies, Owner and Engineer.
2. Taking Existing Pipelines Out of Service:
a. Do not take pipelines out of service unless specifically approved by Engineer.
b. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours prior to taking any pipeline out of service.
3.3 SPECIFIC PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC):

1. Gravity Sewers: Install all PVC piping in accordance with ASTM D234 “Standard Practice
for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity Flow
Applications.”

2. Water Distribution/Pressure Sewers: Install all PVC pipe in accordance with AWWA
Standard C605 “Underground Installation of PVC Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water.”
3. Lay pipe with bell and spigot joints with bells upstream.
4. Completely clean all jointing surfaces and adjacent areas prior to making joint.
5. Field cut pipe for shorter than standard pipe lengths. Cut ends square and perpendicular
to the pipe axis. Remove and smoothly bevel ends. Field spigots shall be stop marked
with a felt tip mark or wax crayon for proper length of assembly insertion. The angle and
depth of field bevels, and lengths to stop marks, shall be comparable in quality to factory
made spigots.
6. Assemble all joints in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer. If a lubricant
is required to facilitate assembly, it shall have no detrimental effect on the gasket or on the
pipe when subjected to prolonged exposure.
7. Rotate the spigot by hand or with a strap wrench to verify proper jointing. If unusual joining
resistance is encountered or if the insertion mark does not reach the flush position,
disassemble the joint, inspect for damage, reclean the joint components and repeat the
assembly steps.
8. Use a bar and wood blocking to properly seat pipe joints. DO NOT USE BACKHOE
BUCKET, OR SIMILAR MACHINERY, TO FORCE JOINT ASSEMBLY.
B. High Density Polyethylene Pressure Pipe (HDPE):

1. Install HDPE in accordance with ASTM D2774 “Standard Practice for Underground
Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Pipe.”
2. Install HDPE Water Piping in accordance with ASTM F645 “Standard Guide for Selection
Design and Installation of Thermoplastic Water – Pressure Piping Systems.”
3. All joints shall be butt fusion welded in accordance with ASTM F2620 “Practice for Heat
Fusion Joining of Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings,” and the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Guarantee the integrity of all fused joints for one year.
4. HDPE pipe can be jointed at ground level and lowered into the trench. Precautions shall
be taken not to drop the pipe or to “kink” the pipe due to exceeding the minimum
acceptable bending radius. Replace damaged pipe.
5. When pulling HDPE pipe is necessary, either a pulling head or a suitable wraparound
sleeve with rubber protective cover shall be used to prevent the pulling cables from
damaging the pipe.
6. Do not install HDPE piping above grade or within buildings.
C. High Density Polyethylene Gravity Piping (HDPE):

1. Install in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s specifications
2. Completely clean all jointing surfaces and adjacent areas prior to making joints.
3. Field cut pipe for shorter than standard pipe lengths. Cut ends square and perpendicular
to the pipe axis. Remove and smoothly bevel ends.
4. Assemble all joints in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer. If a lubricant
is required to facilitate assembly, it shall not have a detrimental effect on the gasket or on
the pipe when subjected to prolonged exposure.
A. General:
1. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of all testing.
2. Provide all testing apparatus including pumps, hoses, gauges, fittings, temporary
bulkheads, plugs, compressors and miscellaneous other required items.
3. Provide temporary blocking and bracing or approved thrust and joint restraint to prevent
joint separation and pipe movement during testing.

4. Unless otherwise approved, conduct all tests in the presence of the Engineer and in the
presence of local authorities having jurisdiction.
5. Water Source:
a. Provide all water for testing, flushing, and other water uses. The source of the water
shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
b. The point of introduction of water for conducting tests shall be subject to the approval
of the Engineer.
6. All costs for tests shall be included in the Contractor’s bid.
7. Locate, and repair or replace, section of piping which fail the test and retest until
acceptance.
B. Required Tests for Gravity Sanitary Sewers:

1. Perform the following tests after all the sewer pipe has been installed and prior to final
acceptance.
a. Deflection Test
b. Alignment Test
c. Low Pressure Air Test
d. Corroborative Infiltration/Exfiltration Test
e. Television Inspection, if required based on results of (c) and (d) above.
2. Perform tests prior to placement of pavement, or other construction which may, in the
opinion of the Engineer, be detrimentally affected by excavation required for repairs.
3. Perform the tests only after the backfill has been in place to its full depth for a minimum of
30 days.
4. Submit details prior to making tests of proposed testing procedures with a description of
methods and equipment to the Engineer for approval.
5. Deflection Test:
a. Deflection test all flexible sewer pipe with a “go/no-go” mandrel with a diameter equal
to 95% of the inside diameter of the pipe.
b. Maximum pipe deflection: 5 percent.
6. Alignment Test:
a. Alignment test all sewer pipe with the hand-lamp method.
b. The full diameter of the pipe shall be visible when viewed between consecutive
manholes.
7. Air Test:
a. Air test all sewer pipe, including laterals, in conformance with ASTM F1417. The
length of lateral piping shall not be considered in the calculation of acceptance times.
b. Commensurately increase test pressure for groundwater elevations above the pipe,
in accordance with UNI- B-6 by Uni-Bell Plastic Pipe Association.
c. Method:
1) Clean and wet thoroughly the inside of the pipe before test is performed.
2) Insert test plugs in ends of pipe to be tested.
3) Slowly fill the pipe with air to a pressure of 4 psig. Maintain pressure between
4 and 3.5 psig for at least 2 minutes for temperature stabilization.
4) Check all plugs for tightness.
5) With a pressure of approximately 4 psig in pipe, disconnect air supply.
6) Allow pressure to decrease to 3.5 psig.
7) Determine elapsed time for pressure drop from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig.
d. The line is considered acceptable if the time for the pressure to decrease from 3.5
psig to 2.5 psig is not less than the amount determined by the following table, except
that Reinforced Concrete Pipe shall be half this duration.

MINIMUM ACCEPTANCE TIMES
PIPE MINIMUM LENGTH FOR
DIAMETER TIME MINIMUM TIME TIME FOR LONGER
(IN.) (MIN:SEC) (FT.) LENGTH (SEC.)
4 3:46 597 0.380 L
6 5:40 398 0.854 L
8 7:34 298 1.520 L
10 9:26 239 2.374 L
12 11:20 194 3.418 L
15 14:10 159 5.342 L
18 17:00 133 7.692 L
21 19:50 114 10.470 L
24 22:40 99 13.674 L
27 25:30 88 17.306 L
30 28:20 80 21.366 L
33 21:10 72 25.852 L
36 34:00 66 30.768 L
Where L is the test length.
e. If the leakage in the section tested exceeds the specified amount, repair or replace
the section tested to reduce the leakage to within the specified limits and repeat the
test until the leakage requirements are met.
f. The Contractor may, at his option, infiltration/exfiltration test all sewer pipe in lieu of
the air test.
8. Corroborative Infiltration/Exfiltration Test:
a. Where air testing is used for leakage testing, corroborative infiltration/exfiltration
testing shall be performed.
b. Test the 3 sewer sections which indicate the greatest rate of air loss.
c. If the infiltration/exfiltration tests prove acceptable no additional testing is required;
however, if the air test is not verified by the corroborative testing, complete
infiltration/exfiltration testing shall be required as the basis for final acceptance.
9. Infiltration Test:
a. Use the infiltration test when groundwater levels are at least 2 feet above the top of
the pipe for the lengths of the section tested during the period of the tests.
b. Measure leakage by a watertight well, weir, or other approved means installed at the
lower end of each section under test.
c. Test for a period of at least 3 days.
d. Total leakage of any section tested shall not exceed the rate of 200 or 50 gallons per
mile of pipe per 24 hours per inch of nominal internal diameter for concrete and PVC
pipe, respectively.
e. If the leakage in the section tested exceeds the specified amount, repair or replace
the sections to reduce the leakage to within the specified limits and repeat until the
leakage requirements are met.
10. Exfiltration Test:
a. Use the exfiltration test if the groundwater levels are less than 2 feet above the top of
the pipe for the lengths of the section tested during the period of the test.
b. Fill the pipe and manhole with water to provide a positive differential head of at least
2 feet on the top of the pipe (or the top of the groundwater) at the highest point of the
pipeline under test.

c. During exfiltration testing the maximum internal pipe pressure at the lowest end shall
not exceed 25 feet of water.
d. The amount of water added to maintain this head shall be the leakage.
e. Test for a period of at least 4 hours.
f. Total leakage of any section tested shall not exceed the rate of 200 gallons or 50
gallons per mile of pipe per 24 hours per inch of nominal internal diameter for
concrete and PVC pipe, respectively.
g. If the leakage in the section tested exceeds the specified amount, repair or replace
sections to reduce the leakage to within the specified limits and repeat the test until
the leakage requirements is met.
h. On steep grades it may be necessary to place plugs in the pipe between manholes to
avoid excessive pressures in the sewer pipe and against the caps at the end of
house and building connections.
11. Television Inspection:
a. If a section of sewer has failed the air and exfiltration/infiltration tests, or is proven
poorly aligned by the lamp test, inspect the sewer by closed-circuit television to
locate and repair defective section of sewer.
b. The Engineer will notify the Contractor in writing which completed sewers shall be
inspected by closed-circuit television and commence the television inspection within
15 days of the Engineer’s written notification.
c. Notify the Engineer at least 5 days prior to commencement of television inspection.
d. No television inspection shall be performed without the Engineer or his representative
present to witness the inspection.
e. Provide the Engineer with 3 copies of a report of the televising inspection of each
section of completed sewer inspected. Show the exact location and extent of all
cracks, loose joints, holes, vertical and horizontal, misalignment, faulty service
connections, caved-in pipe, points of infiltration, obstructions, debris and all else
detrimental to the proper functioning and service of the completed sewer. Provide
the actual television inspection video with the report showing all the above conditions
found, at all wyes, tees, and laterals and as directed by the Engineer. The Engineer
will review the report and will instruct the Contractor, to repair any conditions which,
in the opinion of the Engineer, are detrimental to the proper function and service of
the sewer.
12. Visual Inspection: Prior to final acceptance, a visual inspection of all appurtenance
structures (i.e. manholes, chambers, etc.) will be required. Repair visual leaks, regardless
of their magnitude.
C. Required Tests for Waterlines and Force Mains:

1. Pressure and leakage test shall comply with the most current revision of AWWA C600.
2. Perform the following after the pipe has been installed and prior to final acceptance:
a. Pressure Test.
b. Leakage Test.
3. Presumptive hydrostatic tests may be performed when the system is partially backfilled to
“check” the work, but final acceptance shall be based on hydrostatic tests performed on the
finished system after it is completely backfilled.
4. Pressure Test:
a. Test piping to 1.5 times the pipe working pressure, or 150 psi, whichever is greater.
Measure test pressures at the lowest point in the pipe section and correct to the
elevation of the gauge.
b. Relieve trapped air at the section high points through hydrants, or taps installed for
this purpose, provided temporary installations are removed and plugged after
acceptance.

c. Maintain the test pressure for a period of 2 hours. At the end of the test period, if the
test pressure remains constant, the pipe section shall have passed the test. If the
pressure has dropped, it shall be brought back to the test pressure by pumping a
known volume of water (by pumping from a graduated container or by metering) back
into the pipe. The volume of water thus used, representing leakage from the pipe,
shall be recorded. If the leakage is less than the allowable leakage specified below,
the pipe shall have passed the test. If the leakage exceeds the allowable leakage
specified, the Contractor shall locate the leak, permanently repair the section of pipe
where the leak is occurring to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and retest the pipe as
specified above.
5. Leakage Test:
a. Conduct the leakage test concurrently with the pressure test.
b. Perform the leakage test in accordance with all applicable AWWA standards.
c. The maximum allowed leakage is determined by the following formula:
L = S x D x P1/2
148,000
where L = allowable leakage, in gph

where S = length of pipe tested, in feet
where D = nominal pipe diameter, in inches
where P = average test pressure, in psig
HYDROSTATIC ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE

PER 1,000 FEET OF PIPELINEA (gph)B
AVG. TEST NOMINAL PIPE DIAMETER (INCHES)
PRESSURE
(psi) 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30
450 0.43 0.57 0.86 1.15 1.43 1.72 2.01 2.29 2.58 2.87 3.44 4.30
400 0.41 0.54 0.81 1.08 1.35 1.62 1.89 2.16 2.43 2.70 3.24 4.05
350 0.38 0.51 0.76 1.01 1.26 1.52 1.77 2.02 2.28 2.53 3.03 3.79
300 0.35 0.47 0.70 0.94 1.17 1.40 1.64 1.87 2.11 2.34 2.81 3.51
275 0.34 0.45 0.67 0.90 1.12 1.34 1.57 1.79 2.02 2.24 2.69 3.36
250 0.32 0.43 0.64 0.85 1.07 1.28 1.50 1.71 1.92 2.14 2.56 3.21
225 0.30 0.41 0.61 0.81 1.01 1.22 1.42 1.62 1.82 2.03 2.43 3.04
200 0.29 0.38 0.57 0.76 0.96 1.15 1.34 1.53 1.72 1.91 2.29 2.87
175 0.27 0.36 0.54 0.72 0.89 1.07 1.25 1.43 1.61 1.79 2.15 2.68
150 0.25 0.33 0.50 0.66 0.83 0.99 1.16 1.32 1.49 1.66 1.99 2.48
125 0.23 0.30 0.45 0.60 0.76 0.91 1.06 1.21 1.36 1.51 1.81 2.27
100 0.20 0.27 0.41 0.54 0.68 0.81 0.95 1.08 1.22 1.35 1.62 2.03
A
If the pipeline under test contains sections of various diameters, the allowable leakage will be the
sum of the allowable leakage for each size.
B
Calculated on the basis of the formula above.
6. Acceptance shall be determined on the basis of allowable leakage. If any pipe section
discloses leakage greater than that specified, locate, repair, and retest until the leakage is
within the limits specified.
7. Make all visible leaks tight regardless of the amount of leakage; and if the lines do not
meet the above leakage test, repair and retest as necessary until the leakage requirement
is met. Repair or replace all defective work.

D. Disinfection of Potable Water Mains:
1. Disinfect all potable water mains in accordance with the latest version of AWWA C651
except that the placement of chlorine powder or tablets inside the pipe during installation
shall not be allowed. Disinfect water mains after the piping has passed the pressure and
leakage testing.
2. Flush the pipe with water at a minimum velocity of 3.0 feet per second (fps) per AWWA
C651 to clear all foreign material from the pipe.
3. Apply a chlorine solution with a concentration between 50 parts per million (ppm) and
100 ppm. The chlorine solution shall remain in the piping for a minimum of 24 hours. The
concentration at the end of this period shall be at least 25 ppm in all sections of the main.
Repeat the entire procedure if the residual is less than 25 ppm.
a. While the chlorinated water is being added, all appurtenances (valves, hydrants, etc.)
shall be operated so as to completely disinfect the new work.
b. Position valves so that the chlorine solution in the section being disinfected will not
flow into water mains in active service.
c. Chlorine residual samples shall be taken as directed by the Engineer.
4. After the 24-hour retention period, flush the main until residual testing indicates that the
chlorine concentration is approximately that of the neighboring service area.
a. Dispose of heavily chlorinated water into sanitary sewer or tank truck.
b. The Owner and the owner of the sanitary sewer system shall be notified a minimum
of 24 hours prior to the discharge of any water to the sanitary sewer. Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer written confirmation that the owner of sanitary sewer system
has approved the discharge of water to its sanitary sewer.
c. Under no circumstances will the emptying of water onto roadways, or into ditches,
culverts, streams, or wetlands be allowed.
5. After disinfection and final flushing, and prior to placing the lines in service, the Contractor
shall collect bacteriological samples (both coliform and heterotrophic plate count) and
submit samples to an approved testing laboratory. Two consecutive sets of samples shall
be taken at least 24 hours apart in accordance with AWWA C651. The collection points
shall be as directed by the Engineer and local authority having jurisdiction.
a. The testing laboratory performing the bacteriological analysis shall be acceptable to
the Engineer.
b. Submit 3 copies of the laboratory analysis to the Engineer.
c. Should safe results not occur after laboratory tests, the Contractor shall, at his
expense, repeat the disinfection procedure until safe results are obtained. This
includes a positive result for coliform or a measured heterotrophic plate count of
greater than 500 colony-forming units per ML.
d. Contractor shall pay for all testing required.
6. All precaution shall be taken to maintain dry and sanitary conditions and prevent
contamination of any piping. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, contamination has occurred,
the Contractor shall repeat the disinfection procedure and testing at his cost and expense.
E. Required Tests for Storm Sewers:

1. Perform the following tests after the storm drainage pipe has been installed and prior to
final acceptance:
a. Alignment Test for all pipe.
2. Based upon visual observations, the Engineer may order additional testing including the
following:
a. Television Inspection, if required by the Engineer.
b. Deflection Test, if required by the Engineer.
3. Perform tests prior to placement of pavement, or other construction which may, in the
opinion of the Engineer, be detrimentally affected by excavation required for repairs.

4. Submit details prior to making tests of proposed testing procedures with a description of
methods and equipment to the Engineer for approval.
5. Alignment Test:
a. All storm drainage pipe will be subject to a visual inspection in order to identify proper
alignment, grade, and excessive deflection.
b. The Engineer may choose to perform an alignment test using the hand-lamp method,
in which case the full diameter of the pipe shall be visible when viewed between
consecutive structures.
6. Television Inspection:
a. The Engineer will notify the Contractor in writing which completed sewers shall be
inspected by closed-circuit television.
b. The Contractor shall commence the television inspection within 15 days of the
Engineer’s written notification. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 5
days prior to commencement of television inspection.
c. No television inspection shall be performed without the Engineer or his representative
present to witness the inspection.
d. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with 3 copies of a report of the televising
inspection of each section of completed sewer inspected. Show the exact location
and extent of all cracks, loose joints, holes, vertical and horizontal, misalignment,
faulty service connections, caved-in pipe, points of infiltration, obstructions, debris
and all else detrimental to the proper functioning and service of the completed sewer.
The Contractor shall provide the actual television inspection video with the report
showing all the above conditions found, at all wyes, tees and laterals and as directed
by the Engineer.
e. The Engineer will review the report and will instruct the Contractor, to repair any
conditions which, in the opinion of the Engineer, are detrimental to the proper
function and service of the storm pipe.
7. Deflection Test:
a. The Engineer will notify the Contractor in writing which completed sewers shall be
tested by the deflection method.
b. The Contractor shall commence the deflection test within 15 days of the Engineer’s
written notification. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 5 days prior to
commencement of television inspection.
c. No Deflection testing shall be performed without the Engineer or his representative
present to witness the test.
d. The deflection test shall be performed on flexible drainage pipe with a “go/no-go”
mandrel with a diameter equal to 95 percent of the inside diameter of the pipe being
tested.
e. The maximum pipe deflection shall be 5 percent.
f. The Engineer will review the Deflection Test results and will instruct the Contractor, to
repair any conditions which, in the opinion of the Engineer, are detrimental to the
proper function and service of the storm pipe.
8. Visual Inspection: Prior to final acceptance, a visual inspection of all appurtenance
structures (i.e., manholes, chambers, etc.) will be required. Repair visual leaks, regardless
of their magnitude.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 330513 – MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:

1. Installation of manholes, catchbasins, precast concrete structures, frames, grates, covers, steps,
and piping connections as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
2. Alteration of existing structures as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following,
except as otherwise shown or specified:
1. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).
3. Occupational Health and Safety Administration (OSHA).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for approval:

1. Design and construction details of all precast concrete units.
2. Fabrication, assembly, and installation details for all castings and miscellaneous metal works.
3. Precast concrete structure design calculations verifying the structures have been designed to
withstand the burial, submergence and anticipated live and dead loads. Design calculations for
uplift forces shall incorporate a minimum factor of safety of 1.15.
B. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer’s catalog cuts, specifications, and installation instructions.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the site to prevent interruption of the Work.
B. All materials shall be inspected by the Contractor upon delivery to the site. The Contractor shall
notify the Engineer of any loss or damages. Replace loss or repair damage to new condition at the
Contractor’s expense.
C. Store materials to allow easy access for inspection and identification.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A. Design: In accordance with ASTM C890 – Minimal Structural Design Loading for Monolithic or
Sectional Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures.
B. Loading: AASHTO HS-20 with 30 percent impact and 130 pound/cubic foot equivalent soil pressure.
MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES PAGE 1 OF 6

\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 33\330513 Manholes and Structures.docx SECTION 330513
2.2 PRECAST CONCRETE DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
A. Drainage manholes shall conform to subpart “Precast Concrete Manholes.”
B. Catch basins with greater than 6 feet sidewall depth shall conform to subpart “Precast Concrete
Manholes.”
C. Catch basins with less than or equal 6 feet sidewall depth shall be 2-foot 6-inch by 2-foot 6-inch
square I.D. precast concrete catch basin units.
D. Precast catch basin units shall conform to the dimensions shown on the Drawings and as detailed in
Shop Drawings approved by the Engineer.
E. Unless otherwise specified precast concrete units shall conform to ASTM C478.
F. A precast concrete slab, as necessary for proper frame and grate placement, shall be provided at the
top of the catch basin unit. The slab shall be designed for an H-20.
2.3 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES
A. Precast manhole units shall conform to the dimensions shown on the Drawings and as detailed in
B. Unless otherwise specified, manhole sections shall conform to ASTM C478.
C. Precast structure bases shall be of the “base unit” type, with an integral base and barrel section. The
barrels shall be constructed in increments of 1 foot to provide the indicated height with the fewest
joints. Openings for pipe connections will not be permitted closer than 1 foot to the nearest joint.
Mark the date of manufacture and name or trademark of manufacturer in the inside of each section.
D. Manholes barrels, servicing pipes less than 27-inch diameter, shall be 48-inch diameter. Manholes
barrels, servicing pipes 27-inch diameter and larger shall be 60-inch diameter. Larger diameter
manholes barrels shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein.
E. Joints shall be rubber and concrete using O-ring gaskets (ASTM C443) or butyl rubber gaskets
(ASTM C443), or tongue and groove buttered with 1:2 cement mortar (ASTM C270, Type M).
A precast eccentric cone, or precast slab where shown, shall be provided at the top of the manhole
barrel to receive the frame and cover. The slab or cover shall be designed for an H-20 loading.
F. Precast manhole units shall be coated on the exterior with a two-coat application of polyamide-cured
epoxy-coal tar. Application shall meet manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not apply the
polyamide-cured epoxy-coal tar within 28 days of concrete manufacture. Epoxy-coal tar to be as
manufactured by Coopers Creek Chemical Corporation, Cooper Black #775 Epoxy Tar Coating or
approved equal.
2.4 MANHOLE STEPS
A. Manhole sections shall contain manhole steps at 12 inches on center for all structures over 3 feet 6
inches in height. The steps shall be embedded in the concrete and accurately positioned both
vertically and horizontally.
B. Steps shall be capable of withstanding a 300-pound concentrated live load without permanent
distortion, conforming to the requirements of ANSI A14.3, OSHA, and the details shown on the
Drawings.

C. Manhole rungs shall be steel reinforced copolymer polypropylene plastic. Rungs shall be 14 in.
wide, M.A. Industries type PS2-PF, or equal. Copolymer polypropylene shall be type II, grade 16906
meeting ASTM D4101. Steel reinforcing shall be 3/8-inch diameter, Grade 60 conforming to ASTM
A615 and shall be continuous throughout the rung. The portion of the legs to be embedded in the
precast section shall have fins and be tapered to insure a secure bond.
D. Frames and covers shall be as shown on the Drawings. Otherwise, conform to the standard detail of
the regulatory authorities having jurisdiction for the project (if applicable). Access clear width shall
be a minimum of 24-inches.
2.5 FRAMES AND COVERS/GRATES
A. Frames and covers/grate] shall be cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 30, free from flaws or unsightly
defects.
B. Frames and covers shall conform to the details on the Drawings and have “SANITARY SEWER” or
“STORM SEWER” cast on every cover.
C. Frames and covers/grates shall be designed for an H-20 loading and be machined to ensure correct fit
and even bearing.
D. Frames and covers/grates shall be as shown on the on the Drawings. Otherwise, conform to the
standard detail of the regulatory authorities having jurisdiction for the project (if applicable).
2.6 GRADE ADJUSTMENTS
A. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 3- to 12-inch total thickness, to match diameter of manhole
frame and cover.
2.7 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C1107, Grade B. nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and
recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000 psi (34.5 MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.8 DROP INLET
A. Drop inlets for manholes shall be constructed where shown on the Drawings and shall conform with
the details shown on the Drawings.
B. Pipe and fittings shall be the same type and class as the sewer pipe beings installed.
C. Concrete for pipe encasement shall be 3,000 psi.
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Earthwork shall be in accordance with Section “Trenching and Backfilling” or Section “Earth
Moving.”

3.2 PRECAST MANHOLE SECTIONS
A. Base units shall be placed on a minimum 12-inch foundation of pipe zone bedding material, and be
set at the proper elevation, carefully leveled, and aligned.
B. Barrel units shall be set vertical with steps and sections in proper alignment. All joints shall be sealed
with cement mortar inside and out, and troweled smooth to the contour of the wall surface. Joints
shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Lifting holes shall be sealed tight with a tapered solid rubber plug driven into the hole and the
remaining void filled with mortar on the outside only.
3.3 GRADE RINGS
A. Grade rings placed upon the eccentric cone or slab shall be used for all manholes to provide the
potential for future adjustment.
B. Grade rings shall be placed in a combined thickness of at least 4 inches but not more than 12 inches
in order to bring the manhole frame to proper grade.
C. Consecutive grade ring layers shall be laid on an even mortar bed.
3.4 PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. Pipe connections to manholes shall be installed true to line and grade as shown on the Drawings.
Wall fittings shall be watertight, compatible with the sewer pipe joint. Connections shall conform to
3.5 INVERT CHANNEL AND BENCH WALLS
A. An invert channel and bench walls shall be constructed as shown on the Drawings to provide a
smooth transition in flow through the manhole. The invert channel and bench wall shall be
constructed of 3,000 psi concrete. Benches shall be built-up to the height called for on the Drawings,
or as directed by the Engineer, and given a steel trowel finish. Care shall be taken to slope all
benches for proper drainage to the invert channel.
3.6 FRAMES
A. Frames shall be firmly set and bonded at the proper grade to conform with the finished grade shown
on the Drawings.
B. Frames for manholes in unpaved areas shall be set at an elevation higher than finished grade as
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
3.7 WATERTIGHTNESS
A. All manholes shall be free of visible leakage. Each manhole shall be inspected, and all leaks shall be
repaired in a manner approved by the Engineer.
B. Testing: Manhole Negative Air Pressure (Vacuum) Test shall be performed prior to backfilling and in
accordance with ASTM C1244.
1. Preparation of manhole
2. All lift holes shall be plugged.

3. All pipes entering the manhole shall be temporarily plugged, taking care to securely brace the
pipe and plugs to prevent them from being drawn into the manhole during testing.
4. Procedure
5. The test apparatus shall be placed at the top of the manhole in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
6. A vacuum of 10 inches (254 mm) of mercury shall be drawn on the manhole. The valve on the
vacuum line of the test apparatus shall be closed and the vacuum pump shut off.
7. The time shall be recorded for the vacuum to drop to 9 inches (229 mm).
8. If the time recorded exceeds the values in the following table, based on the manhole’s depth
and diameter, the manhole is acceptable.
DIAMETER (IN.)
48" 60" 72"
DEPTH (FT)
TIME (SEC.)
8 20 26 33
10 25 33 41
12 30 39 49
14 35 46 57
16 40 52 67
18 45 59 73
20 50 65 81
22 55 72 89
24 59 78 97
3.8 CONNECTION TO EXISTING STRUCTURES
A. The Contractor shall make connections to existing manholes as shown on the Drawings or as
specified herein.
B. For connections to precast or cast-in-place concrete manholes, the Contractor shall core drill a hole
1 inch larger than the O.D. of the sewer pipe into the existing manhole at the location and elevation
shown on the Drawings.
C. For connections to masonry manholes, the Contractor shall open the sidewall of the existing manhole
by removing masonry units no more than necessary to accommodate the sewer pipe.
D. Connection methods shall be in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings. Any open spaces
around the new pipe entry shall be sealed with non-shrink grout to prevent leakage.
E. The existing bench and channel shall be removed and reconstructed to permit flow through the
manhole as it now exists and also for the new sewer pipe. Bench and channel reconstruction shall
conform with the details on the Drawings, or as directed by the Engineer.
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for diverting flow through the manhole in order to allow bench
and channel construction.
3.9 CHANGING ELEVATIONS OF EXISTING STRUCTURES
A. Lower existing frames of manholes by the removal of appropriate masonry courses, to the elevations
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

B. Raise the existing frames of manholes by the addition appropriate grade rings to the elevations shown
on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
C. Where the manhole frames cannot be lowered by removal of masonry courses, such as may be the
case with precast concrete manholes, the upper barrel section shall be removed and/or replaced with a
section of less depth, to permit the necessary adjustment of the frame.
D. Frames and covers damaged during the Work shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 330514 – PRECAST SANITARY STRUCTURES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for, and
incidental to, the installation of precast concrete sanitary structures including but not limited to
manholes, covers, steps, and piping connections as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
B. All items shall conform in shape, size, dimensions, and materials to the details shown on the
Drawings, or as directed by the Engineer.
1.2 REFERENCES
2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
4. Occupational Health and Safety Administration (OSHA).
A. Design: In accordance with ASTM C890 – Minimal Structural Design Loading for Monolithic or
Sectional Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures.
B. Loading: AASHTO HS20 with 30 percent impact and 130-pound per cubic foot equivalent soil
pressure.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples:
1. Gaskets.
2. Manhole steps.
3. Miscellaneous accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for approval:

1. Design and construction details of all precast concrete units.
2. Fabrication, assembly and installation details for all castings and miscellaneous metal works.
3. Precast concrete structure design calculations verifying the structures have been designed to
withstand the burial, submergence and anticipated live and dead loads. Design calculations for
uplift forces shall incorporate a minimum safety factor of 1.15.
C. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer’s catalog cuts, specifications, and installation instructions.
A. Deliver materials to the site to prevent interruption of the Work.
PRECAST SANITARY STRUCTURES PAGE 1 OF 5

\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 33\330514 Precast Sanitary Structures.docx SECTION 330514
B. All materials shall be inspected by the Contractor upon delivery to the site. The Contractor shall
notify the Engineer of any loss or damages. Replace loss or repair damage to new condition at the
C. Store materials to allow easy access for inspection and identification.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES
A. Precast manhole units shall conform to the dimensions shown on the Drawings and as detailed in
B. Unless otherwise specified, manhole sections shall conform to ASTM C478.
C. Precast manhole bases shall be of the “base unit” type, with an integral base and barrel section. The
barrels shall be constructed in increments of 1 foot to provide the indicated height with the fewest
joints. Openings for pipe connections will not be permitted closer than 1 foot to the nearest joint.
Mark the date of manufacture and name or trademark of manufacturer in the inside of each section.
D. Manholes barrels, servicing pipes less than 27 inches in diameter shall be 48 inch diameter.
Manholes barrels, servicing pipes 27 inches in diameter and larger shall be 60 inch diameter. Larger
diameter manholes barrels shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein.
E. Joints shall be rubber and concrete using O-ring gaskets (ASTM C443), or butyl rubber gaskets
(ASTM C443), or tongue and groove buttered with 1:2 cement mortar (ASTM C270, Type M). All
joints shall be sealed with cement mortar inside and out, and troweled smooth to the contour of the
wall surface.
F. A precast eccentric cone, or precast slab where shown, shall be provided at the top of the manhole
barrel to receive the frame and cover. The slab or cover shall be designed for an H-20 loading.
2.2 MANHOLE STEPS
A. Manhole sections shall contain manhole steps at 12 inches on center. The steps shall be embedded in
the concrete and accurately positioned both vertically and horizontally.
B. Steps shall be capable of withstanding a 300-pound concentrated live load without permanent
distortion, conforming to the requirements of ANSI A14.3, OSHA, and the details shown on the
Drawings.
C. Manhole rungs shall be steel reinforced copolymer polypropylene plastic. Rungs shall be 14 inches
wide, M.A. Industries type PS2-PF or equal. Copolymer polypropylene shall be type II, grade 16906
meeting ASTM D4101. Steel reinforcing shall be 3/8 inch diameter, Grade 60 conforming to
ASTM A615 and shall be continuous throughout the rung. The portion of the legs to be embedded in
the precast section shall have fins and be tapered to insure a secure bond.
2.3 FRAMES AND COVERS
A. Frames and covers shall be cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 30, free from flaws or unsightly defects.
Design of each shall be the same throughout the project unless otherwise specified or indicated on the
drawings.

B. Frames and covers shall be designed for an H-20 loading and be machined to ensure correct fit and
even bearing. Manufacture, workmanship and certified proof-load tests shall conform to AASHTO
M306-89-Standard Specification for Drainage Structure Castings
C. Materials:
1. Cast iron: ASTM A48, Class 30B or 35B.
2. Delivered to Site free of any coatings, unless otherwise specified.
3. Frames: Round with a 30-inch clear opening.
4. Covers: Round, solid lid, top surface checkered and provided with suitable concealed lifting
notches, and lettering cast into cover to indicate type of structure. For sanitary structures,
“Sanitary Sewer” shall be cast onto cover.
D. Acceptable Manhole Frames and Covers: Pattern 1016A with platen cover by Syracuse Castings
Sales Corp or approved equal.
2.4 COATING
A. Precast units shall be coated with a two-coat application of polyamide-cured, epoxy-coal tar.
Application shall meet manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not apply the polyamide-cured epoxy-
coal tar within 28 days of concrete manufacture. Epoxy-coal tar to be as manufactured by Coopers
Creek Chemical Corporation, Cooper Black #775 Epoxy Tar Coating or approved equal
2.5 ALUMINUM FABRICATIONS
A. Access Hatches:
1. Manufacturer: Halliday Products or approved equal
2. Size: Clear opening size shall be as noted on the Drawings
3. Cover Leaf(s): 1/4 inch (7 mm) aluminum diamond plate with hold-open arm with vinyl-
covered hand grip.
4. Channel Frame: 1/4 inch (7 mm) aluminum with continuous anchor flange, fabricated to
facilitate access to equipment.
5. Load Rating: H-20 unless noted otherwise
6. Spring Assist: Stainless steel spring operators to be provided for lift assistance.
7. Locking System: Recessed slam lock, and threaded keyway cover plug. Key lock core to the
Facility’s system.
8. Lift Handles: Flush drop type.
9. Hardware: All 316 stainless steel throughout.
10. Coatings: A bituminous coating shall be applied to the areas of the aluminum frame that come
in contact with concrete.
B. Miscellaneous fabrications for support of equipment pump controls, grating, piping, etc.:
1. Aluminum alloy 6061-T6.
2. Sizes, shapes, thicknesses, and dimensions as detailed or indicated on the Drawings.
3. Structural members, bars and plates, rectangular box tubing, Schedule 40 piping.
A. Concrete for Precast Structures:

1. Air content 6 percent by volume with an allowable tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percent.
2. Minimum compressive strength, 4,000 psi after 28 days.

B. Reinforcing Steel:
1. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A497.
2. Steel Bars: ASTM A615
C. Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Riser Sections: ASTM C478.
D. Concrete Masonry for Manholes: ASTM C139.
E. Butyl Rope Sealant: SS-S-210A.
F. Mortar: ASTM C270, Type M.
G. Non-Shrink Grout: Water plug, Hallemite Manhole Pipe Cement or grout utilizing Sika Set.
H. Pipe and Fittings:

1. PVC pipe, ASTM D1785 Schedule 40.
I. Coal Tar Epoxy: Koppers Bitumastic No. 300M.
J. Cast-In-Place Concrete (for bench work): 5 percent air entrained, 3,000 psi minimum compressive
strength.
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Earthwork shall be in accordance with Section “Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction.”
3.2 PRECAST MANHOLE SECTIONS
A. Base units shall be placed on a minimum 12-inch foundation of pipe zone bedding material, and be
set at the proper elevation, carefully leveled, and aligned.
B. Barrel units shall be set vertical with steps and sections in proper alignment. Joints shall be installed
in accordance with 2.1(F) and manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Lifting holes shall be sealed tight with a tapered solid rubber plug driven into the hole and the
remaining void filled with mortar on the outside only.
3.3 GRADE RINGS
A. Grade rings placed upon the eccentric cone or slab shall be used for all manholes to provide the
potential for future adjustment.
B. Grade rings shall be placed in a combined thickness of at least 8 inches but not more than 20 inches
in order to bring the manhole frame to proper grade.
C. Consecutive grade ring layers shall be laid on an even mortar bed.

3.4 PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. Pipe connections to manholes shall be installed true to line and grade as shown on the Drawings.
Wall fittings shall be watertight, compatible with the sewer pipe joint. Connections shall conform to
3.5 INVERT CHANNEL AND BENCH WALLS
A. An invert channel and bench walls shall be constructed as shown on the Drawings to provide a
smooth transition in flow through the manhole. The invert channel and bench wall shall be
constructed of 3,000 psi concrete. Benches shall be built-up to the height called for on the Drawings,
or as directed by the Engineer, and given a steel trowel finish. Care shall be taken to slope all
benches for proper drainage to the invert channel.
3.6 FRAMES
A. Frames shall be firmly set and bonded at the proper grade to conform to the finished grade shown on
the Drawings.
B. Frames for manholes in unpaved areas shall be set at an elevation higher than finished grade as
shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the Engineer.
3.7 WATERTIGHTNESS
A. All structures shall be free of visible leakage. Each structure shall be inspected, and all leaks shall be
repaired in a manner approved by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 331112 – HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes but is not limited to high-density polyethylene (HDPE) (ductile iron pipe size)
pressure pipe primarily intended for the transportation of water and sewage either buried or above
grade.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. All published standards of the following associations/organizations, as mandated by specific state

standards, shall be followed and applied as a minimum:
1. AWWA C901, Polyethylene (PE) pressure Pipe and Tubing, 1/2 inch through 3 inch for water.
2. AWWA C906, Polyethylene (PE) pressure Pipe and Fittings, 4 inch through 63 inch for water.
3. ASTM D3035, Standard Spec for PE Pipe (DR-PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter.
4. ASTM D3261, Butt Heat Fusion PE Fittings for PE Pipe and Tubing.
5. ASTM D3350, Standard Specification for PE Pipe & Fittings Materials.
6. ASTM D1238, Melt Flow Index.
7. ASTM D1505, Density of Plastics.
8. ASTM D2837, Hydrostatic Design Basis.
9. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standard No. 14, Plastic Piping Components and
Related Materials.
10. TR-33/2005, Generic Butt Fusion Joining Procedure for Field Joining of PE Pipe.
1.3 GENERAL
A. Use:
1. HDPE pipe/fittings shall be allowed for use as water, wastewater and reclaimed water pressure
pipe where compatible with the specific conditions of the project. All material used in the
production of water main piping shall be approved by the NSF.
B. Documentation:
1. Documentation from the resin's manufacturer showing results of the following tests for resin
identification:
a. Melt Flow Index ASTM D1238.
2. Density ASTM D1505.
C. Manufacturer:
1. All HDPE pipe and fittings shall be from a single manufacturer, who is fully experienced,
reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the HDPE pipe to be furnished. The pipe shall be
designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall
comply with these Specifications. Qualified manufacturers shall be DRISCOPIPE as
manufactured by Phillips Products Co., Inc. or approved equal.
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE AND FITTINGS PAGE 1 OF 7

\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 33\331112 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe and Fittings.docx SECTION 331112
D. Finished Product Evaluation:
1. Production staff shall check each length of pipe produced for the items listed below. The results
of all measurements shall be recorded on production sheets, which become part of the
manufacturer's permanent records.
a. Pipe in process shall be checked visually, inside, and out for cosmetic defects (grooves,
pits, hollows, etc.).
b. Pipe outside diameter shall be measured using a suitable periphery tape to ensure
conformance with ASTM F714 or ASTM D3035, whichever is applicable.
c. Pipe wall thickness shall be measured at 12 equally spaced locations around the
circumference at both ends of the pipe to ensure conformance with ASTM F714 or
ASTM D3035, whichever is applicable.
d. Pipe length shall be measured.
e. Pipe marking shall be examined and checked for accuracy.
f. Pipe ends shall be checked to ensure they are cut square and clean.
g. Subject inside surface to a "reverse bend test" to ensure the pipe is
free of oxidation (brittleness).
E. Stress Regression Testing:

1. The polyethylene pipe manufacturer shall provide certification that stress regression testing has
been performed on the specific polyethylene resin being utilized in the manufacture of this
product. This stress regression testing shall have been done in accordance with ASTM D2837
and the manufacturer shall provide a product supplying a minimum Hydrostatic Design Basis
(HDB) of 1,600 psi as determined in accordance with ASTM D2837.
F. Compatibility:
1. Contractor is responsible for compatibility between pipe materials, fittings, and appurtenances.
G. Warranty:
1. The pipe manufacturer shall provide a warranty against manufacturing defects of material and
workmanship for a period of ten years after the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
The manufacturer shall replace at no expense to the Owner any defective pipe/fitting material
including labor within the warranty period.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE SIZES 4-INCH DIAMETER AND LARGER
A. Materials used for the manufacture of polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be made from a PE 4710
high density polyethylene resin compound meeting cell classification 445574C per ASTM D3350;
and meeting Type 111, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34 per ASTM D1238.
B. HDPE pipe shall comply with AWWA Specifications C906.
C. If rework compounds are required, only those generated in the Manufacturer's own plant from resin
compounds of the same class and type from the same raw material supplier shall be used.
D. Dimensions and workmanship shall be as specified by ASTM F714. HDPE fittings and transitions
shall meet ASTM D3261. HDPE pipe shall have a minimum density of 0.955 grams per cubic
centimeter. All HDPE pipe and fittings shall have a Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) of 1,600 psi.

E. HDPE pipe and accessories 4-inch diameter and larger shall have a minimum pressure rating of
200 psi meeting the requirements of Standard Dimension Ration (SDR) 11.
F. The pipe manufacturer must certify compliance with the above requirements.
2.2 PIPE SIZES 2-INCH DIAMETER AND LESS
A. Materials used for the manufacture of polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be made from a PE 4710
high density polyethylene resin compound meeting cell classification 445574C per ASTM D3350;
and meeting Type 111, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34 per ASTM D1238.
B. HDPE pipes shall comply with AWWA Specifications C901.
C. If rework compounds are required, only those generated in the Manufacturer's own plant from resin
compounds of the same class and type from the same raw material supplier shall be used.
D. Dimensions and workmanship shall be as specified by ASTM D3035. HDPE fittings and transitions
shall meet ASTM D3261. HDPE pipe shall have a minimum density of 0.955 grams per cubic
centimeter. All HDPE pipe and fittings shall have a Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) of 1,600 psi.
E. HDPE pipe and accessories 2 inches and less in diameter shall have a minimum pressure rating of
250 psi meeting the requirements of Standard Dimension Ration (SDR) 9.
F. The pipe Manufacturer must certify compliance with the above requirements.
2.3 FITTINGS
A. All molded fittings and fabricated fittings shall be fully pressure rated to match the pipe SDR
pressure rating to which they are made. All fittings shall be molded or fabricated by the
manufacturer. No Contractor fabricated fittings shall be used unless approved by the Engineer.
B. The manufacturer of the HDPE pipe shall supply all HDPE fittings and accessories as well as any
adapters and/or specials required to perform the work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
C. All fittings shall be installed using butt-fused fittings, thermo-fused fittings/couplings, or flanged
adapters and must be approved by the Engineer. NO size on size wet taps shall be permitted.
D. All transition from HDPE pipe to ductile iron or PVC shall be made per the HDPE pipe
manufacturer's recommendations and specifications. A molded flange connector adapter within a
carbon steel back-up ring assembly shall be used for pipe type transitions. Ductile iron back-up rings
shall mate with cast iron flanges per ANSI B16.1. A 316 stainless steel back-up ring shall mate with a
316 stainless steel flange per ANSI B16.1.
1. No solid sleeves shall be allowed between such material transitions.
2. All HDPE pipe and fittings shall be from a single manufacturer, who is fully experienced,
reputable, and qualified in the manufacture of the HDPE pipe.
E. The following shall be continuously indent printed on the pipe or spaced at intervals not exceeding 5-
feet:
1. Name and/or trademark of the pipe manufacturer.
2. Nominal pipe size.
3. Dimension ratio.
4. The letters PE followed by the polyethylene grade in accordance with ASTM D1248 followed
by the hydrostatic design basis in psi (e.g., PE 4710).

5. Manufacturing standard reference (e.g., ASTM F714 or D3035) as required.
6. A production code from which the date and place of manufacture can be determined.
7. Color Identification, either stripped by co-extruding longitudinal identifiable color markings or
shall be solid in color and as follows:
Color or Stripe Color Solid Wall Piping & Conduit Application
Red Electric power lines, cable, conduit, and
lighting cables
Orange Telecommunication, alarm or signal lines,
cables, or conduit
Yellow Fuel gas (methane or propane), oil, petroleum,
steam, or gaseous materials
Green Sewers and drain lines
Blue Potable water
Purple (Lavender) Reclaimed water, irrigation, and slurry lines
F. Tracing Wire:
1. Open trench HDPE applications shall be installed with tracer wire.
2. Directional Drilled HDPE shall have wire conforming to Copperhead Industries Reinforced
#1245 Extra-High Strength Tracer Wire and affixed to the drilling head/reamer per
Detail M-17.
G. Marking Tape: Marking tape shall be installed above the pipe.
3.1 JOINING METHOD
A. The pipe shall be joined with butt, heat fusion joints as outlined in ASTM D2657 and conform to the
Generic Butt Fusion Joining Procedure for Field Joining of Polyethylene Pipe, Technical Report
TR-33/2005, published by the Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI). All joints shall be made in strict
compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. A factory qualified joining technician as
designated by pipe manufacturer or experienced, trained technician shall perform all heat fusion
joints.
B. Lengths of pipe shall be assembled into suitable installation lengths by the butt-fusion process. All
pipes so joined shall be made from the same class and type of raw material made by the same raw
material supplier. Pipe shall be furnished in standard laying lengths not to exceed 50 feet and no
shorter than 20 feet.
C. On days butt fusions are to be made, the first fusion shall be a trial fusion in the presence of the
Engineer. The following shall apply:
1. Heating plate surfaces shall be inspected for cuts and scrapes and shall be free of dirt and
residue. Heater surfaces should be between 400 DegF (minimum) to 450 DegF (maximum).
Measure the temperature at 12:00, 3:00, 6:00 and 9:00 o'clock positions using a pyrometer of
infrared thermometer at locations where the heating plate will contact the pipe/fitting ends. The
maximum temperature difference between any two points on a single heating surface must not
exceed 24 DegF. If this temperature is exceeded, the heating plate shall be cleaned per the
manufacturer's recommendations.
2. The fusion or test section shall be cut out after cooling completely for inspection.

3. The test section shall be 12 inches or 30 times (minimum) the wall thickness in length and
1 inch or 1.5 times the wall thickness in width (minimum).
4. The joint shall be visually inspected as to continuity of "beads" from the melted material, and
for assurance of "cold joint" prevention (i.e., joint shall have visible molded material between
walls of pipe). Joint spacing between the walls of the two ends shall be a minimum of 1/16 inch
to a maximum 3/16 inch.
D. The polyethylene flange adapters at pipe material transitions shall be backed up by stainless steel
flanges conforming to ANSI B16.1 and shaped as necessary to suit the outside dimensions of the
pipe. The flange adapter assemblies shall be connected with corrosion resisting bolts and nuts of
Type 316 stainless steel as specified in ASTM A726 and ASTM A307. All bolts shall be tightened to
the manufacturer's specified torques. Bolts shall be tightened alternatively and evenly. After
installation, apply a bitumastic coating to bolts and nuts.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. HDPE pipe shall be installed in accordance with the instruction of the manufacturer, as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein. A factory qualified joining technician as designated by the pipe
manufacturer shall perform all heat fusion joints.
B. HDPE shall be installed by Open Trench Construction as outlined.
C. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting and unloading to prevent damage to the pipe. Pipe or
fitting shall not be dropped. All pipe or fitting shall be examined before installation, and no piece
shall be installed which is found to be defective. Any damage to the pipe shall be repaired as directed
by the Engineer. If any defective pipe is discovered after it has been installed, it shall be removed and
replaced with a sound pipe in a satisfactory manner by the Contractor at his own expense.
D. Under no circumstances shall the pipe or accessories be dropped into the trench or forced through a
directional bore upon "pull-back."
E. Care shall be taken during transportation of the pipe such that it will not be cut, kinked,, or otherwise
damaged.
F. Ropes, fabric or rubber protected slings and straps shall be used when handling pipes. Chains, cables
or hooks inserted into the pipe ends shall not be used. Two slings spread apart shall be used for lifting
each length of pipe.
G. Pipes shall be stored on level ground, preferably turf or sand, free of sharp objects, which could
damage the pipe. Stacking of the polyethylene pipe shall be limited to a height that will not cause
excessive deformation of the bottom layers of pipes under anticipated temperature conditions. Where
necessary due to ground conditions, the pipe shall be stored on wooden sleepers, spaced suitably and
of such width as not to allow deformation of the pipe at the point of contact with the sleeper or
between supports.
H. Pipe shall be stored on clean level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging. The handling of
the pipe shall be in such a manner that the pipe is not damaged by dragging it over sharp and cutting
objects. The maximum allowable depth of cuts, scratches or gouges on the exterior of the pipe is 5
percent of wall thickness. The interior pipe surface shall be free of cuts, gouges or scratches.
I. Pipe shall be laid to lines and grade shown on the Drawings with bedding and backfill as shown on
the Drawings.

J. When laying is not in progress, open ends of the pipe shall be closed by fabricated plugs, or by other
approved means.
K. Sections of pipe with cuts, scratches, or gouges exceeding 5 percent of the pipe wall thickness shall
be removed completely and the ends of the pipeline rejoined.
L. The pipe shall be joined by the method of thermal butt fusion, as outlined in Part 3 – Execution,
Section 3.1 Joining Method. All joints shall be made in strict compliance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
M. Mechanical connections of the polyethylene pipe to auxiliary equipment such as valves, pumps and
tanks shall be through flanged connections, which shall consist of the following:
1. A polyethylene flange shall be thermally butt-fused to the stub end of the pipe.
2. A 316 stainless steel back up ring shall mate with a 316 stainless steel flange.
3. 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts shall be used.
N. Flange connections shall be provided with a full-face neoprene gasket.
O. All HDPE pipe must be at the temperature of the surrounding soil at the time of backfilling and
compaction.
P. If a defective pipe is discovered after it has been installed, it shall be removed and replaced with a
sound pipe in a satisfactory manner at no additional cost to the Owner. All pipe and fittings shall be
thoroughly cleaned before installation, shall be kept clean until they are used in the work and when
laid, shall conform to the lines and grades required.
Q. Open Trench Installation:

1. The centerline of the pipe shall not deviate from a straight line drawn between the centers of
the openings at the ends of the pipe by more than 1/16 inch per foot of length. If a piece of
pipe fails to meet this requirement check for straightness, it shall be rejected and removed from
the site. Laying instructions of the manufacturer shall be explicitly followed.
2. Good alignment shall be preserved during installation. Deflection of the pipe shall occur only at
those places on design drawings and as approved by the Engineer. Fittings, in addition to those
shown on the Drawings, shall be used only if necessary or required by the Engineer.
3. Each length of the pipe shall have the assembly mark aligned with the pipe previously laid and
held securely until enough backfill has been placed to hold the pipe in place. Joints shall not be
"pulled" or "cramped."
4. Precautions shall be taken to prevent flotation of the pipe in the trench.
5. When moveable trench bracing such as trench boxes, moveable sheeting, shoring or plates are
used to support the sides of the trench, care shall be taken in placing and moving the boxes or
supporting bracing to prevent movement of the pipe, or disturbance of the pipe bedding and the
backfill. Trench boxes, moveable sheeting, shoring or plates shall not be allowed to extend
below top of the pipe. As trench boxes, moveable sheeting, shoring, or plates are moved, pipe
bedding shall be placed to fill any voids created and the backfill shall be recompacted to
provide uniform side support for the pipe.
6. Restrained joints shall be installed where shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
3.3 CLEANING
A. At the conclusion of the work, thoroughly clean all of the new pipe lines to remove all dirt, stones,
pieces of wood or other material which may have entered during the construction period by forcing a

cleaning swab through all mains 4 inches or greater. Flushing velocities shall be a minimum of
2.5 feet per second. All flushing shall be coordinated with the Owner. Debris cleaned from the lines
shall be removed from the job site.
3.4 TESTING
A. Conform to Section “Common Work Results for Utilities” for testing and disinfection of pipe.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 331216 – WATER DISTRIBUTION VALVES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the installation of gate valves and valve boxes of the sizes and types as shown
on the Drawings and as specified herein.
1. American Water Works Association (AWWA).
B. Regulatory Requirements: Valves shall conform to the specifications, regulations, requirements of

all Agencies (federal, state and local), Codes, and Associations having jurisdiction governing
construction, sizing, application, and location of same.
C. Certifications: Valves and Indicator posts for fireline service shall be UL or FM approved and shall
bear visible body markings indicating such approval.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions.
B. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Certificates:
a. Statement of compliance with ANSI/AWWA Specifications.
b. Gate valve shall be shop tested in accordance with AWWA C500 and 3 copies of the
certified shop tests shall be submitted.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
A. Resilient Wedge (R/W) Gate Valves (3 to 12 inches):

1. Provide resilient wedge gate valve as manufactured by the following:
a. Mueller Co., Model A-2360.
b. Clow Valve Company.
c. U.S. Pipe.
d. Or approved equal.
2. All gate valves, 3 through 12 inches shall be in accordance with the latest version of
AWWA C509. Valves shall also be UL listed and FM approved.
3. All gate valves shall have working pressure of 250 psi. Valves shall be tested and certified to
ANSI/NSF 61. Each valve seat shall be factory tested at 250 psi. Each valve shell shall be
tested at 500 psi.
WATER DISTRIBUTION VALVES PAGE 1 OF 4

\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 33\331216 Water Distribution Valves.docx SECTION 331216
4. All gate valves shall have a non-rising stem. Stem shall be bronze rolled bar stock with forged
thrust collar.
5. Non-rising stem gate valves shall have a 2-inch square operating nut. Operating nut shall be
attached to the stem with a bolt that is recessed into the operating nut to prevent interference
with the operation of the valve wrench. The valve shall have an arrow cast on the operating nut
showing the opening direction. Valves shall open left (counterclockwise), unless specified
otherwise.
6. All gate valves shall have an O-ring sealed stuffing box. Two O-rings shall be located above
and one O-ring located below the stem thrust collar. Stuffing box shall have Type 304 stainless
steel nuts and bolts.
7. The body and bonnet of all gate valves shall have a wall thickness confirming to the latest
version of C509. Valves with a reduced wall thickness are not acceptable. Bonnet shall have
Type 304 stainless steel nuts and bolts.
8. All gate valves shall have a disc and guide lugs fully encapsulated in rubber. Guide lugs shall
be equipped with bearing caps to prevent abrasion and reduce torque.
9. The interior and exterior ferrous surfaces of all gate valves shall be coated with a fusion bonded
thermosetting powder epoxy coating confirming to the latest version of C550. Coating shall a
thickness of 10 mils.
10. Each gate valve shall be furnished complete with necessary nuts, bolts, studs, and gaskets.
11. Furnish 2 tee wrenches suitable for operation for buried service gate valves. Length to be
determined by Engineer after valve has been installed underground.
B. Tapping Sleeve and Valve:

1. Tapping Sleeve:
a. Provide tapping sleeve as manufactured by the following:
1) PowerSeal Model 3490MJ.
b. All tapping sleeves shall be Type 304, stainless steel body with 3/4-inch NPT test plug.
c. For tapping sleeves 4 through 12 inches, the maximum working pressure should be
250 psi. For tapping sleeves 14 through 24 inches, the maximum working pressure
should be 150 psi.
d. All tapping sleeves shall have a maximum working pressure of 250 psi.
e. All tapping sleeves shall be certified to ANSI/NSF 61.
2. Tapping Valve:
a. Provide tapping valve as manufactured by the following:
1) Mueller Co., Model T-2360-16.
b. All tapping valves shall be in accordance with the latest version of AWWA C509.
Valves shall be UL listed and FM approved.
c. All tapping valves shall have a working pressure of 250 psi. Valves shall be tested and
certified to ANSI/NSF 61. Each valve seat shall be factory tested at 500 psi.
d. All tapping valves shall have a non-rising stem. Stem shall be bronze rolled bar stock
with forged thrust collar.
e. Non-rising stem tapping valves shall have a 2-inch square operating nut. Operating nut
shall be attached to the stem with a bolt that is recessed into the operating not to prevent
interference with the operation of the valve wrench.
f. All tapping valves shall have an O-ring sealed stuffing box. Two O-rings shall be located
above and one O-ring located below the stem thrust collar. Stuffing box shall have a
Type 304 stainless steel nuts and bolts.

g. The body and bonnet of all tapping valves shall have a wall thickness conforming to
AWWA C509. Valves with a reduced wall thickness are not acceptable. Bonnet shall
have Type 304 stainless steel nuts and bolts.
h. All tapping valves shall have a disc and guide lugs fully encapsulated in rubber. Guide
lugs shall be equipped with bearing caps to prevent abrasion and reduce torque.
i. The interior and exterior ferrous surfaces of all tapping valves shall be coated with a
fusion bonded thermosetting powder epoxy conforming to AWWA C550. Coating shall
have a thickness of 10 mils.
C. Valve Boxes:
1. All valve boxes shall be cast iron, sliding telescopic type, at least 5-1/4 inches in diameter.
2. All valve boxes shall be 2 pieces and shall be furnished to match the specific valve dimensions
and trench depth as shown on the Drawings.
3. All valve boxes shall be furnished with a cast iron cover, drop style, with both the word
“WATER” and an arrow indicating the direction of valve opening left (counterclockwise) cast
on the cover in raised characters.
4. All valve boxes shall be furnished with 1 steel socket key for each 5 valves of the same size or
less. The length shall be compatible with the valve with the greatest depth of bury.
5. Valve box shall be Tyler 6858 Series, Item 664-A, or approved equal.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Indicator Posts:
1. Valves shall be fitted with bonnet flange of the diameter required for bolting to the indicator
post.
2. Posts shall have a large plexiglass window with aluminum target plates and the words “OPEN”
and “CLOSED” cast in large letters directly behind the window in such a position that the
appropriate word appears as the valve is operated.
3. Posts shall be of the locking device wrench type with bronze lock and keys.
4. Stems, indicators, and all working parts shall be fully protected by a weatherproof enclosure.
5. UL/FM approved.
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with AWWA C600 “Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains
and Appurtenances.”
B. All materials shall be carefully inspected for defects in workmanship and materials; all debris and
foreign material cleaned out of valve openings, etc.; all operating mechanisms operated to check their
proper operation, and all nuts and bolts checked for tightness. Valves and other equipment which do
not operate easily, or are otherwise defective, shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the
Owner.
C. Buried valves shall be cleaned and manually operated before installation. All buried valves shall be
set vertically and the Contractor shall take careful measures to ensure that valves are kept in the
closed position.
D. Valve boxes shall be set carefully, truly vertical and accurately centered over the valve with top at
finished grade elevation; it shall be set so as not to transmit traffic loads to the valve.

E. Gate valve and valve box installation shall conform to the details shown on the Drawings. All
hydrant leads shall incorporate a gate valve which in general, shall be located as far from the hydrant
and as close to the main as possible. Gate valves at main line junctions shall be located 4 feet away
measured center of the valve to center of the junction or fitting. Gate valves on cast or ductile iron
water services shall generally be located on the street line or property line. All gate valve locations
shall be reviewed by the Engineer prior to valve installation. Tops of valve boxes shall be set flush
with grade in paved areas and set 1 inch above grade in grassed areas.
A. Tests: The various pipe lines in which the valves and appurtenances are to be installed are specified
to be field tested in accordance with Section “Common Work Results for Utilities.” During these
tests any defective valve or appurtenance shall be adjusted, removed and replaced, or otherwise made
acceptable to the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 333110 – SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the installation of polyvinyl chloride piping systems.
B. All piping, fittings, and appurtenances shall be new, clean and in accordance with material
specifications. In no instance will second-hand or damaged materials be acceptable.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Product Markings: Plainly and permanently mark each pipe length with the following information:
1. Nominal pipe size.
2. Plastic pipe material designation.
3. Standard thermoplastic pipe dimension ratio.
4. Pressure rating.
5. ASTM designation.
6. Manufacturers name or trademark and date of manufacture.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts, specifications, and installation instructions.
A. Delivery and Storage:

1. Deliver and store pipe, fittings, specials, appurtenances, and accessories and within the work
limits as shown on the Drawings.
2. Exercise special care during delivery and storage to avoid damage to the products.
3. Store products in locations where unnecessary handling is avoided and where they will not
interfere with the Owner's operations, construction operations, or public travel.
B. Handling:
1. Handle pipe, fittings, specials appurtenances, and accessories carefully with approved handling
devices in strict conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Do not drop or roll products off trucks, or otherwise drag, roll or skid products.
C. Products cracked, gouged, chipped, dented, or otherwise damaged will not be approved and are to be
removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING PAGE 1 OF 2

\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 33\333110 Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping.docx SECTION 333110
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Pipe and Fittings:

1. Pressure Rated Sewer Pipe: 4 inches through 15 inches conform to ASTM D2241 made from
Class 12454-B virgin compounds in accordance with ASTM D1784, SDR 26.
2. Gravity Sewer: 4 inches through 15 inches conforming to ASTM D3034 Type PSM, SDR 35.
3. Gravity Sewer: 18 inches through 27 inches conforming to ASTM F679, wall thickness T-1.
4. Laying Length: 20 feet
B. Joints:
1. Join pipe joints, including fittings, shall be joined with an integral bell and spigot type rubber
gasketed joint.
2. Conform to ASTM F477 for gaskets and mark to indicate nominal pipe size and proper
insertion direction.
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect all pipe and fittings prior to laying in the trench. Remove defective pipe and fittings from the
site.
B. Do not backfill until inspection by the Engineer unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to Section "Trenching and Backfilling."
B. Conform to Section "Common Work Results for Utilities."
3.3 TESTING
A. Conform to Section "Common Work Results for Utilities."
END OF SECTION
SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING PAGE 2 OF 2

\\cha-llp.com\proj\ProjectSpecs\070605.000\Markup\Division 33\333110 Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping.docx SECTION 333110
SECTION 33 4100.20
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the installation of polyethylene piping systems as shown on the Drawings
and as specified herein.
B. All piping, fittings, and appurtenances shall be new, clean, and in accordance with material
specifications. In no instance shall second- hand or damaged materials be acceptable.
1. The latest edition of the following standards, as referenced herein, shall be applicable:
a. TDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.
b. Standard Specifications for Highway Materials and Methods of Sampling and Testing,
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
c. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer’s catalog cuts, specifications, and installation instructions for both
pipe and coupling system.
2. Submit manufacturer’s certification that product was manufactured, tested, and supplied in
accordance with the standards specified herein.
A. Delivery and Storage:

1. Pipe, fittings, specials, appurtenances, and accessories shall be delivered to and stored
within the Contractor’s work limits as shown on the Drawings.
2. Special care shall be exercised during delivery and storage to avoid damage to the
products.
3. Products shall be stored so as to avoid unnecessary handling and in locations where they
will not interfere with the Owner’s operations or public travel.
B. Handling:
1. Pipe, fittings, special appurtenances, and accessories shall be handled carefully with
approved handling devices in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
2. Products shall not be dropped nor shall products be otherwise dragged, rolled, or skidded.
C. Products cracked, gouged, chipped, dented, or otherwise damaged will not be approved and
shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense, unless the product can be repaired
in a manner acceptable to the manufacturer and Engineer. All repairs shall be at the
TWA #019-007.1 33 4100.20-1 High Density Polyethylene Storm Utility Drainage Piping
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. HDPE Soil Tight Pipe:

1. Pipe shall be ADS N-12 ST IB (per AASHTO) smooth interior with annular exterior
corrugations and a Manning’s “n” value of 0.012 high-density polyethylene pipe (HDPE) as
manufactured by Advanced Drainage Systems (ADS) or approved equal. Pipe shall have
an integral soil tight gasketed bell and spigot.
a. 4 inches through 11 inches conforming to AASHTO M252 Type S.
b. 12 inches through 60 inches conforming to AASHTO M294 Type S or ASTM F2306.
2. Pipe shall be joined using a bell and spigot joint meeting AASHTO M252 and M294. The
joint shall be soil-tight and gasketed and shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477.
Gaskets shall be installed by the pipe manufacturer and covered with a removable wrap to
ensure the gasket is free from debris. A joint lubricant supplied by the manufacturer shall
be used on the gasket and bell during assembly.
3. Fittings shall conform to ASTM F2306. Bell and spigot connections shall utilize a spun-on
or welded bell and valley or saddle gasket meeting the soil-tight joint performance
requirements of ASTM F2306.
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect all pipe and fittings prior to laying in the trench. Remove defective pipe and fittings from
the site.
B. Do not backfill until inspection by the Engineer, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
3.2 INSTALLATION AND TESTING
A. Trenching, backfilling and compaction shall conform to Section “Trenching and Backfilling.”
B. Pipe installation and testing shall conform to Section “Common Work Results for Utilities.”
END OF SECTION
TWA #019-007.1 33 4100.20-2 High Density Polyethylene Storm Utility Drainage Piping
SECTION 334100 - SURFACE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Modular trench drain systems.
2. Section 03 3000 – Cast in Place Concrete.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. A536 – Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
B. European Standard (EN):

1. EN1433 – Drainage channels for vehicular and pedestrian areas; Classification, design and
testing requirements, marking and evaluation of conformity.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCIPTION
A. System Type:
1. Trench drain systems shall employ an angled grade on both sides of a linear trench to move
runoff into a point along the channel. Liquids shall be discharged by gravity flow at the end of
the drain into an underground pipe system or culvert.
B. System Design:
1. Modular trench drains shall be factory manufactured and engineered with compatible grates and
accessory components in sizes and capacities to provide a complete functioning trench drain
system.
2. Modular channels are aligned onsite via male / female interconnecting ends to form a
continuous sloped run. Systems shall provide a continuously sloped trench up to [130] feet ([40]
m) long. Neutral channels with no slope that can be inserted along runs shall be provided as
required to extend length.
C. System Requirements:
1. Loading:
2. Durability:
a. Liquid Type:
b. Grade Surface Adjacent to Trench Grate:
c. Grate and trench materials shall resist Liquid Type attack and corrosion of trench drain
components and grate.
3. User Requirements:
a. Grate Finish:
b. Grate Safety Requirements:
1) Grates shall comply with requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA).
SURFACE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS PAGE 1 OF 5

SECTION 334100
2) Grates shall include a ‘heel-safe’ pattern in compliance with American Society of
Mechanical Engineers (ASME) A112.6.3, Floor and Trench Drains. Section 7.12,
“Heel Resistant Strainers and Grates.
3) Grates shall prevent small stiletto-style heels from getting stuck, causing injury or
falls.
4) Grates shall be bicycle-safe grates to avoid slot openings that trap modern bicycle
wheels.
4. Hydraulic Performance:
a. Trench drain system shall provide drain performance without grate bypass occurring and
without uncontrolled ponding during maximum design flow rate and duration.
b. Trench drain system shall provide temporary ponding during hydraulic rates exceeding
the trench design capacity in areas and boundaries indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit product data and installation instructions including manufacturer’s product sheet, for
specified products.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including anchorage,
accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures.
C. Engineering Calculations:
1. Manufacturer shall provide Trench Hydraulic Service by modeling lateral intake into the trench
design based on Project environmental locale and drainage surfaces.
2. Calculations shall include Grate Hydraulic Service comparing the specified grate catchment
efficiency with the hydraulic modeling to determine the Bypass amount.
D. Quality Assurance Submittals:

1. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties.
2. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with
specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
E. Selection Samples:
1. Submit for each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing
manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
F. Verification Samples:
1. Submit for each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Minimum [5] year experience manufacturing similar products.
B. Installer’s Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing Work of this section who has
specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project.

SECTION 334100
A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with

identification labels intact.
B. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at
temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.

1.7 SEQUENCING
A. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of
construction progress.
B. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication;

show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty:
1. Warranty Period: [12] months commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design – Surface Drainage Systems: Contract Documents are based on products by:
1. ACO, Inc.
9470 Pinecone Drive
Mentor, Ohio 44060
Telephone (800) 543-4764
Website: (www.acousa.com)
2.2 SYSTEM DESIGN
A. Load Class: Provide trench drain system designed, engineered and installed to support the minimum
loads as defined by EN1433. Load Class shall be: Class [F].
B. Grate Design: Safety.

1. Grates that comply with requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) of1990 are
available.
2. Other safety-focused grates include a ‘heel-safe’ pattern in compliance with American Society
of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) A112.6.3, Floor and Trench Drains. Section7.12, “Heel
Resistant Strainers and Grates.

SECTION 334100
3. Grates are designed to prevent small stiletto-style heels from getting stuck, causing injury or
falls. In addition, bicycle-safe grates avoid slot openings that can trap modern bicycle wheels.
2.3 POWER DRAIN HEAVY DUTY TRENCH DRAIN SYSTEM
A. Product: PowerDrain Trench System:

1. Units: Polymer concrete with ductile iron edge protection rail, grate lugs and locks to prevent
dislodgement.
a. One meter (39.4 inches) long units shall provide [130] feet ([40]m) continuous slope
([0.5] %, [1/17] inch fall per linear foot). Five neutral slope channels extend run lengths.
Four half-meter neutral slope channels and accessories for a complete system.
2. Ductile Iron Edged, Single Lock, Modular Trench System.
a. [4] inch nominal ([100] mm) internal width Trench System: S100K Trench System.
B. Product: PowerDrain Grates:

1. S300K Grates ([12] inch nominal).
a. S300K Slotted ([0.5] m) Grate: Ductile iron, EN1433 load class [F].
C. Product: PowerDrain Catch Basin (CB):

1. Provide plastic riser and large trash bucket.
2. S300K Catch Basins:
a. SK3-903D Inline Catch Basin: Ductile iron edge rails, slotted grate.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Polymer Concrete: Durable material which is resistant to road salts and common chemicals, made
from polyester resin reinforced with mineral aggregates and fillers.
B. Ductile iron: 65-45-12, ASTM A536.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Install in proper
relationship with adjacent construction.

SECTION 334100
3.4 PROTECTION
END OF SECTION

SECTION 334100
Appendices
GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION
REPORT
WINGED DEER PARK

4137 BRISTOL HIGHWAY
JOHNSON CITY, TENNESSEE
CLIENT: CITY OF JOHNSON CITY
REPORT DATE: DECEMBER 22, 2021
FSE PROJECT NUMBER: 721336
December 22, 2021
Mr. Charlie Stahl
Assistant City Manager
601 E Market Street
Johnson City, TN 37601
RE: GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION REPORT

WINGED DEER PARK
JOHNSON CITY, TENNESSEE
FSE FILE NO: 721336
Dear Mr. Stahl:
Per your authorization we have completed a geotechnical exploration of the above-referenced

site. The purpose of the exploration was to gather site and subsurface information from which to
provide engineering recommendations concerning site preparation methods, foundation design,
and other construction considerations. The following report presents our findings and
recommendations.
We have appreciated the opportunity to provide our geotechnical engineering and testing
services. If you have any questions regarding the information within this report, please contact
us at your convenience.
Sincerely,
Foundation Systems Engineering
Pierce Anderson, BS, EIT Allen Browning, MS, PE

Engineering Associate Senior Geotechnical Engineer
TN State No: 117463
12/22/21
TABLE OF CONTENTS
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY .................................................................................... 1
SCOPE OF SERVICES ..................................................................................... 3
PROJECT/SITE INFORMATION ........................................................................ 4
Project Description ............................................................................................................. 4
Site Description ................................................................................................................... 4
SUBSURFACE DESCRIPTION .......................................................................... 6
LABORATORY TESTING .................................................................................. 8
Natural Moisture Content ................................................................................................... 8
Atterberg Limits .................................................................................................................. 9
Soil Gradation (Sieve Analysis) ......................................................................................... 9
Standard Proctor ............................................................................................................... 10
Testing Summary .............................................................................................................. 10
RECOMMENDATIONS .................................................................................... 11
Geotechnical Considerations .......................................................................................... 11
Site Subgrade Preparation ............................................................................................... 12
Structural Fill ..................................................................................................................... 13
Foundation Excavation - Observation/Testing ............................................................... 14
Shallow Foundation - Design Recommendations .......................................................... 15
Seismic Classification ...................................................................................................... 15
Flexible Pavement Recommendations ............................................................................ 16
Rigid Pavement Recommendations ................................................................................ 17
Karst (Sinkhole) Activity ................................................................................................... 18
Construction Considerations ........................................................................................... 19
GENERAL QUALIFICATIONS ......................................................................... 21
APPENDICIES ............................................................................................... 22
Test Pit Location Plan

Test Pit Records
Area Topographic Map
Area Geology Map
Aerial Photograph
General Notes
Rock Descriptions
Geotechnical Exploration Report
Winged Deer Park – Johnson City, Tennessee
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
The following is a geotechnical exploration report requested by the City of Johnson City related to
the design and construction of the planned Winged Deer Park Addition in Johnson City, Tennessee.
A summary of our findings and recommendations is listed below:
♦ The project will consist of a new sports complex development with asphalt paved access
roads and parking lots, excavated and filled soil embankments, and detention ponds.
♦ The subsurface conditions on the site were explored with the use of seventeen (17) soil test
pits. The approximate locations of the test pits are indicated on the Test Pit Location Plan
provided.
♦ The soil test locations encountered residual soil types. The soil types included low to high
plasticity clays and silts. The residual soils included clays and silts varying in consistency
from very soft to stiff and moist to wet.
♦ In general, the test pits encountered clays and silts with limestone fragments varying with
consistency from very soft to stiff, and moist to wet throughout the boring depths. Test pit
refusal was encountered at seven (7) of the test locations varying in depths from
approximately 0.5 to 5.5 feet. The interpreted refusal was limestone bedrock and/or
boulders.
FSE offers the following methods for consideration for site/foundation preparation:
♦ Based on our findings, it is the opinion of FSE that the proposed structures can be supported
on conventional shallow foundations bearing on suitable material.
♦ Select Foundation Undercutting - Dynamic Cone Penetrometer (DCP) testing and Probe
Rod Sounding Testing performed under the observation of a Geotechnical Engineer,
should be used to determine the soil strength at foundation subgrade locations. FSE
recommends an allowable soil bearing pressure of 2,000 psf be used for the design of
shallow foundations. Areas of soft consistency soil will be encountered during foundation
excavations. Localized undercutting and replacement of soil will be required at these
locations. Undercut depths are anticipated to vary from approximately 2 to 4 feet. Backfill
material in the undercut locations should be compacted, select, gravel aggregate;
approved soil fill; or flowable fill concrete.
♦ Utility Line Trenches - Utility trenches should not be backfilled with open graded gravel to
limit subsurface, lateral water movement on the site. We recommend the use of select,
crushed gravel, with fines, (TDOT 303) and/or fined grained soil for backfill material.
♦ Shallow Rock - Due to presence of shallow bedrock at depths ranging from approximately
0.5 to 5.5 feet, limestone bedrock could be encountered during grading and construction. We
anticipate that the rock will be required to be removed or chipped out.
♦ The completed project plans should be reviewed by FSE to allow final recommendations
on the general method of construction and site/foundation preparation methods.
♦ Concrete slabs-on-grade can be designed using a modulus of subgrade reaction (k) of
100 pounds per cubic inch (pci). An IBC 2012 Seismic Site Class “C” is recommended for
this site.
1
♦ The site grading and foundation construction should be performed under the observation
of a geotechnical engineer to assist with the continued evaluation of soil conditions during
the construction process.
♦ This summary should be used in conjunction with the entire report for design purposes.
Details were not included or fully developed in this section, and the report must be read in
its entirety for a comprehensive understanding of the items contained herein. The section
titled “General Qualifications” should be read for an understanding of the report limitations.
2
SCOPE OF SERVICES
Item Description
- USGS Topographic Mapping
Information - Geologic Mapping of Northeast Tennessee
Reviewed - 2012 International Building Code
- Preliminary Site Plan drawing
Walk-down of site to observe:

- topographic features
Site - drainage patterns
Reconnaissance - ground surface cover
- surface improvements
- existing development
- Seventeen (17) soil test pits advanced to 8.0’ or refusal with a Bobcat
E50 excavator.
Test Pit
- Observation of excavations and samples for soil type and moisture
Excavations
conditions was performed during the excavation operations.
(17)
- On-site and laboratory classification of soil samples.
- Backfilled test pits with soil cuttings.
- Test Pit Locations were located in the field by FSE using the site plan
dated 10/1/2021.
Test Location - Test locations may have been shifted to clear away from subsurface
Layout utility lines.
- Locations should be considered approximate, existing ground surface
elevation was not available
- Sixty-Seven (67) Natural Moisture Tests

Laboratory/Field
- Two (2) Soil Classification Tests
Soil Testing
- Two (2) Standard Proctor Tests
Groundwater
- Groundwater was not encountered during excavation
Measurement
3
PROJECT/SITE INFORMATION
P ROJECT D ESCRIPTION
Item Description
Winged Deer Park
Project
4137 Bristol Highway
Location
Johnson City, Tennessee
General - The project will consist of a new sports complex development with
asphalt paved access roads and parking lots, excavated and filled soil
embankments, and detention ponds
Project Foundation Loads - Not provided
Information Below Grade Walls – Not anticipated
Bearing Capacity - 2,000 psf
Excavation - Up to approximately 20 feet (Assumed)
Fill Placement – Up to approximately 20 feet (Assumed)
S ITE D ESCRIPTION
Item Description
Ground Cover
- Primarily dirt/grass
Drainage Patterns
- The area has previously been graded and generally slopes downward in a
northwest to southeast direction, toward Bristol Highway.
Current Karst Activity

Conditions - Sedimentary bedrock containing dolomite and limestone material is subject to
karst activity or the formation of closed ground depressions known as sinkholes
Improvements
- No improvements have been made on site
Exposed Rock
- Exposed bedrock was observed throughout the site.
USGS Mapping
Topography - The terrain slopes downward from northwest to southeast. Elevations vary from
approximately 1500 to 1440 feet above MSL. Nearby Knob Creek runs in a
southeast to northeast direction, to the east of the property.
4
Based on review of available geologic mapping, the project site is located in the
Valley and Ridge physiographic province of northeast Tennessee. The mapping
indicates that the site is located within the geology of the Knox Group.
The bedrock of this formation consists primarily of dolomite and limestone.
These carbonate rocks are prone to karst development (i.e. sinkholes, springs,
Regional
underground channels and caves). These rock types typically weather to near
Geology
surface residual soils consisting of primarily silts and clays.
The depth of the soil profile is continually altered over geologic time by gradual
weathering at the soil/rock interface, and more rapidly by erosion of surficial
soils. Weathering of the parent bedrock is generally more rapid near fracture
zones. Therefore, the bedrock surface will be irregular.
Our review of the topographic mapping of the area indicates that the sites
geology is located in the Knox Group, in which karst topography is present.
Karst terrain is characterized by the existence of sinkholes and closed
depressions at the ground surface.
Past experience has found that sites where grading/construction activities
remove all or a portion of the stiff upper crust of soil overburden are at a higher
risk of sinkhole activity (dropouts) than sites where no such excavation is made.
Karst
Activity Similarly, sinkholes may be induced by ponding water, porous utility line trench
backfill materials, or from leaking pipes, etc. Soil supported foundations
overlying rock units that are susceptible to solutioning and sinkhole development
are at risk of damage from sinkhole activity.
Structures supported on soil overlying soluble carbonate rock units are at risk of
damage resulting from sinkhole development. This risk can be minimized but
cannot be eliminated.
5
SUBSURFACE DESCRIPTION
The following is a brief summary of the soils encountered at the soil test locations. Additional
subsurface details may be seen on the attached Test Pit Records. Subsurface stratification
indicated on the records is approximate and represents FSE’s interpretation of the soils
encountered at the excavation/sampling locations.
Item Description
Topsoil/vegetation – Typically 0-6 inches, up to 4 feet
Ground Cover
Comments - Variation in thickness will occur over the site
Origin - Native, derived from weathering of the underlying limestone and
dolomite bedrock materials
Test Locations – All locations
Description – Generally brown, tan, and red silty clay and clayey silt with
varying amounts of rock fragments
Residual Soil
Consistency – Generally very soft to stiff
Moisture – Moist to wet
Depth - Encountered beneath topsoil layer in all locations, until boring
termination or refusal
Comments - The soil consistency varies with depth
Bedrock Locations - Bedrock was encountered at six (6) locations.
Bedrock/ Refusal – Test pit refusal at seven (7) locations.
Refusal Refusal Materials Interpreted to be on limestone bedrock (TP-6, 7, 10, 13,
14, and 16) or limestone boulders (TP-3).
Groundwater was not encountered at the test pit locations.

Groundwater Comments - Changes in groundwater elevations will occur during wet
weather periods
6
Soil Test Pit Summary Table

Depth to Test Interpreted
Test Pit Depth of Test
Pit Refusal Refusal
Number Pit (feet)
(feet) Material
B-1 8.0 N/A N/A
B-2 8.0 N/A N/A
B-3 1.0 1.0 Bedrock
B-4 8.0 N/A N/A
B-5 8.0 N/A N/A
B-6 5.5 5.5 Bedrock
B-7 2.0 2.0 Bedrock
B-8 8.0 N/A N/A
B-9 8.0 N/A N/A
B-10 5.0 5.0 Bedrock
B-11 8.0 N/A N/A
B-12 8.0 N/A N/A
B-15 8.0 N/A N/A
B-17 8.0 N/A N/A
Notes:
At any given time ground water depths can vary from location to location and at any given location,
ground water depths can change with time. Ground water depths will also vary with seasonal
rainfall and other climate/environmental events.
Subsurface conditions will vary at locations away from the test pit locations and in between test
pit locations. A detailed description of the soil and rock may not have been obtained due to the
small sample sizes and methods used to evaluate the subsurface.
Although a test pit log shows subsurface features and descriptions, it should not be assumed that
these descriptions are present between test pit locations.
7
LABORATORY TESTING
N ATURAL M OISTURE C ONTENT
The Natural Moisture Content tests provide data that assist in evaluating the on-site soil moisture
for engineering properties and the amount of moisture conditioning that may be required for their
reuse as on-site fill soil.
Natural Moisture Content Data Summary
Natural Moisture Natural Moisture

Test Pit Location Depth (Feet) Test Pit Location Depth (Feet)
Content (%) Content (%)
TP-1 1.0 31.2 TP-9 3.0 15.2

TP-1 2.0 23.3 TP-9 5.0 30.6
TP-1 3.0 35.8 TP-9 8.0 37.6
TP-1 5.0 31.2 TP-10 1.0 10.5
TP-1 8.0 35.1 TP-10 2.0 30.3
TP-2 1.0 37.9 TP-10 3.0 25.8
TP-2 2.0 36.9 TP-10 8.0 39.5
TP-2 3.0 42.0 TP-11 1.0 40.8
TP-2 5.0 40.8 TP-11 2.0 36.4
TP-2 8.0 25.7 TP-11 3.0 33.7
TP-3 1.0 23.4 TP-11 5.0 40.3
TP-4 1.0 43.3 TP-11 8.0 18.5
TP-4 2.0 41.8 TP-12 1.0 41.4
TP-4 3.0 42.1 TP-12 2.0 40.1
TP-4 5.0 33.0 TP-12 3.0 39.5
TP-4 8.0 36.6 TP-12 5.0 45.8
TP-5 1.0 29.5 TP-12 8.0 50.2
TP-5 2.0 22.1 TP-13 1.0 32.7
TP-5 3.0 39.3 TP-14 1.0 31.4
TP-5 5.0 15.7 TP-14 2.0 33.0
TP-5 8.0 16.0 TP-14 3.0 31.8
TP-6 1.0 44.1 TP-14 5.0 28.7
TP-6 2.0 42.2 TP-14 8.0 37.7
TP-6 3.0 36.2 TP-15 1.0 27.6
TP-6 5.5 40.7 TP-15 2.0 27.3
TP-7 1.0 35.8 TP-15 3.0 29.7
TP-7 2.0 3.6 TP-15 5.0 36.5
TP-8 1.0 14.8 TP-15 8.0 34.8
TP-8 2.0 10.5 TP-17 1.0 29.4
TP-8 3.0 31.3 TP-17 2.0 31.7
TP-8 5.0 14.9 TP-17 3.0 38.4
TP-8 8.0 14.8 TP-17 5.0 32.8
TP-9 1.0 16.4 TP-17 8.0 33.9
TP-9 2.0 16.2
8
A TTERBERG L IMITS
The Atterberg Limits Determination provides the Liquid and Plastic limits for soil classification
purposes and to assist in evaluating the soil for engineering properties.
The following table summarizes the Atterberg Limits Determination Testing:
Atterberg Limits Data Summary

Natural
Liquid Plastic
Test Pit Sample Moisture Plasticity USCS Soil
Limit Limit
Location Depth Content Index Classification
(%) (%)
(Feet) (%)
TP-2 2.0 36.9 47 26 21 SC
TP-10 2.0 30.3 52 35 17 MH
S OIL G RADATION (S IEVE A NALYSIS )
The Soil Gradation provides a classification of a soil that ranks the soil based on particle sizes
contained in the soil. The gradation of soil affects compressibility and ground permeability. The
gradation of a soil is determined by a distribution curve produced from the results of sieve
analysis.
The following table summarizes the Soil Gradation Testing:
Soil Gradation Data Summary

Test Pit Sample Depth Gravel Sand Fines USCS Soil
Location (Feet) (%) (%) (%) Classification
TP-2 2.0 0.8 25.7 73.5 SC

TP-10 2.0 0.7 14.2 85.1 MH
9
S TANDARD P ROCTOR
The Standard Proctor provides the maximum dry density and optimum moisture content of the
soil. These values are determined by plotting values on a curve that are obtained while performing
the Standard Proctor Test.
The following table summarizes the Standard Proctor Testing:
Standard Proctor Data Summary

Maximum Optimum Moisture
Boring Number Sample Depth (Feet) Density Content (% Dry
(lbs/ft3) Weight)
TP-4 3.0 - 5.0 86.4 32.0
TP-12 3.0 - 5.0 86.9 31.2
T ESTING S UMMARY
The soils present on the site are classified as low to high plasticity silts, sands, and clays based
on the USCS soil classification system. These soil types are given the soil symbol SC, SM, CL,
CH, ML and MH. The soils types have a generally low to high potential for volume change from
changing moisture contents and loading conditions.
Such soils have poor to fair compaction characteristics with compaction typically achieved using
a vibratory sheepsfoot roller. Moisture conditioning (drying) will be required to achieve specified
compaction density. We anticipate that the on-site soil will generally exist at a moisture content
that is 0% to 20% above the optimum moisture as determined by laboratory testing.
With proper moisture conditioning (drying), the on-site soil material may be suitable for reuse as
structural fill material.
10
RECOMMENDATIONS
We offer the following geotechnical engineering recommendations based on the project

information provided and the site and geotechnical data gathered during our subsurface
exploration.
G EOTECHNICAL C ONSIDERATIONS
FSE offers the following methods for consideration for site/foundation preparation:
♦ Based on our findings, it is the opinion of FSE that the proposed structures can be supported
on conventional shallow foundations bearing on suitable material.
♦ Select Foundation Undercutting - Dynamic Cone Penetrometer (DCP) testing and Probe
Rod Sounding Testing performed under the observation of a Geotechnical Engineer,
should be used to determine the soil strength at foundation subgrade locations. FSE
recommends an allowable soil bearing pressure of 2,000 psf be used for the design of
shallow foundations. Areas of soft consistency soil will be encountered during foundation
excavations. Localized undercutting and replacement of soil will be required at these
locations. Undercut depths are anticipated to vary from approximately 2 to 4 feet. Backfill
material in the undercut locations should be compacted, select, gravel aggregate;
approved soil fill; or flowable fill concrete.
♦ Utility Line Trenches - Utility trenches should not be backfilled with open graded gravel to
limit subsurface, lateral water movement on the site. We recommend the use of select,
crushed gravel, with fines, (TDOT 303) and/or fined grained soil for backfill material.
♦ Shallow Rock - Due to presence of shallow bedrock at depths ranging from approximately
0.5 to 5.5 feet, limestone bedrock could be encountered during grading and construction. We
anticipate that the rock will be required to be removed or chipped out.
♦ The completed project plans should be reviewed by FSE to allow final recommendations
on the general method of construction and site/foundation preparation methods.
♦ Concrete slabs-on-grade can be designed using a modulus of subgrade reaction (k) of
100 pounds per cubic inch (pci). An IBC 2012 Seismic Site Class “C” is recommended for
this site.
♦ The site grading and foundation construction should be performed under the observation
of a geotechnical engineer to assist with the continued evaluation of soil conditions during
the construction process.
11
S ITE S UBGRADE P REPARATION
The area to be developed should be stripped of organic soil, construction materials, and soft/wet
soils. After clearing and grubbing are complete, the site should be Proof Roll Tested to evaluate
the subgrade soil strength characteristics.
The soil subgrades should be Proof Roll Tested with a fully loaded dump truck (minimum load of
20 tons) in a slow crossing pattern across the site. A minimum of four passes should be used to
evaluate the soil subgrade. Proof Roll Testing should be performed under the observation of a
geotechnical engineer to evaluate the subgrade and provide recommendations for any unsuitable
areas encountered. The type and method of soil improvement may be determined at that time.
12
S TRUCTURAL F ILL
ENGINEERED FILL DESCRIPTION AND RECOMMENDED USES
Fill Type USCS Classification Acceptable Location for Placement
Soil1 Various (PI<30) All Locations and elevations
Stone2 GW2 All Locations and elevations
1. Controlled, compacted fill should consist of approved materials that are free of organic matter, debris,
particles greater than 4 inches. Frozen material should not be used, and fill should not be placed on a
frozen subgrade. Minimum Standard Proctor (ASTM D-698) dry unit weight 85 pcf. Each soil type should
be submitted to the geotechnical engineer for evaluation.
2. Similar to TDOT Section 903.05 Type-A, Grading D crushed limestone aggregate, limestone
screenings, or such as well-graded gravel or crushed stone.
Item Description
8 inches or less in loose thickness when heavy, self-
propelled compaction equipment is used.
Fill Lift Thickness
4 to 6 inches in loose thickness when hand-guided
equipment (i.e. jumping jack or plate compactor) is used.
Compaction Requirements (Building
Footprint Areas, At least 98% of the materials Standard Proctor maximum
dry density (ASTM D 698).
plus 15 feet past perimeter)
Compaction Requirements (Drive/Parking
Areas - At least 98% of the materials Standard Proctor maximum
in upper 2 feet from finish subgrade)
Compaction Requirements (Drive/Parking
Areas - At least 95% of the materials Standard Proctor maximum
below 2 feet from the finish subgrade)
Compaction Requirements (Embankment At least 95% of the materials Standard Proctor maximum
Slopes/Berms) dry density (ASTM D 698).
Compaction Requirements
Per the above depending upon location/elevation.
(Trench Lines)
Within the range of -2% to +2% within the optimum
Moisture Content,
moisture content value as determined by the Standard
Cohesive Soil
Proctor test at the time of placement and compaction.
1 soil density and moisture test per 2500 square feet or
Testing Frequency
less of fill area for each soil fill lift.
A qualified soil technician, under the direction of a
Testing Personnel geotechnical engineer, should perform the soil density
testing.
Prior to fill placement, the soil subgrade should be Proof
Soil Subgrade Approval Roll Tested under the observation of a geotechnical
engineer for approval to begin fill placement.
13
F OUNDATION E XCAVATION - O BSERVATION /T ESTING
Foundation construction should begin as soon as possible after foundation excavations are
performed. A geotechnical engineer should observe all foundation excavations at the time of
construction to confirm that the soil conditions are suitable for the recommended design
parameters. Dynamic Cone Penetrometer (DCP) or Probe Rod Sounding testing should be
performed in foundation excavations to verify that the specified bearing capacity exists in the
foundation excavations.
Soil that is encountered with less than a stiff or dense consistency as revealed by Dynamic Cone
Penetrometer (DCP) Testing or Probe Rod Sounding Testing should be undercut to a stiff soil or
to a depth determined in the field based on the local soil data obtained. Undercut depths are
related to the soil strength and foundation size.
In undercut locations, compacted, select, gravel aggregate; engineered compacted suitable fill
soil; or flowable fill concrete. Select backfill material should be placed in loose horizontal lifts not
to exceed 6 inches in thickness. Compaction of the stone should be performed until at least 98%
of its Standard Proctor Density is achieved.
Foundations and slabs should not bear directly on native rock. When encountered, native rock
should be removed to a minimum depth of 12 inches below the bottom of concrete. The undercut
volume should be backfilled with compacted, select crusher run basestone.
14
S HALLOW F OUNDATION - D ESIGN R ECOMMENDATIONS

Foundation design recommendations for the proposed structure are presented in the following table
and paragraphs.
Description Structure
Net allowable bearing pressure¹ 2000 psf
Minimum width 24 inches
Minimum embedment below finished grade for frost protection² 24 inches
Approximate total settlement³ < 1 inch
Approximate differential settlement³ < ¼ inch in 25 feet
1. The net allowable bearing pressure is the pressure in excess of the minimum overburden pressure at
the footing base elevation. Assumes foundation subgrade testing and preparation is performed per the
recommendations provided and under the direction of the geotechnical engineer. All foundations should
bear on very stiff native soil or approved fill materials. Undercuts for foundations to bear on suitable
material are anticipated to vary from approximately 2 to 4 feet.
2. For perimeter footing and footings beneath unheated areas; also, to reduce the effects of seasonal
moisture variations in the subgrade soils.
3. The foundation settlement will depend upon the variations in the subsurface soil profile, the structural
loading conditions, the embedment depth of the footings, the thickness of compacted fill, and the quality
of the earthwork operations. The foundations should be placed on prepared subgrade soil as
recommended in this report.
S EISMIC C LASSIFICATION
Code Used Site Classification
2012 International Code (IBC)1 C2
1. In general accordance with the 2012 International Building Code, Section 1613.3.2.
2. The 2012 International Building Code (IBC) requires a site soil profile determination extending a depth
of 100 feet for seismic site classification. This seismic class considers that bedrock depths are generally
within 20 feet in depth below the current ground elevations. The site soils are not susceptible to liquefaction.
15
F LEXIBLE P AVEMENT R ECOMMENDATIONS
It is common for site grading to be completed for some time prior to placing aggregate base. We
strongly recommend that just prior to placement of the aggregate base course that the subgrade
be Proof Roll Tested as outlined above. This will allow any softened and disturbed areas to be
identified and properly reworked and recompacted.
We recommend that the asphalt pavement section consist of the following minimum compacted
thickness of the aggregate base. A California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of less than 2% has been
assumed for the soil types present at the site, and a CBR of 4% has been assumed for engineered
fill.
Flexible Pavement Section

Thickness, inches
Pavement Course1a,1b
Heavy Duty Light Duty
Asphalt Surface Course - TDOT 411 D/E2 1.5 1.5
Asphalt Base Course - TDOT 307 B Modified3 2.5 2.5
Aggregate Base - TDOT 303D4 8.0 6.0
1a. All areas should be prepared following the recommendations in this report.
1b. The asphaltic surface and base courses should be compacted to a specified % of the maximum
theoretical density (MTD), ASTM D-2041 per TDOT Section 407, Bituminous Plant Mix Materials.
2. The asphalt surface course should meet the specifications of TDOT 411, Asphaltic Concrete Surface,
and the aggregates for the mixture meeting the requirements of Grading “D/E.”
3. The asphaltic base course should meet specifications of TDOT, Section 307, Bituminous Plant Mix
Base. The aggregates for the base courses should meet the gradation requirements of Grading “B”
Modified.
4. The aggregate base should consist of a crushed limestone meeting the requirements of the Tennessee
Department of Transportation (TDOT) specification for Mineral Aggregate Base, Section 303 for Type
“A” base, Class “A” aggregates, utilizing aggregate gradation “D.” The aggregate base should be
compacted to a minimum of 98% of its maximum dry density, as determined by Standard Proctor Test,
ASTM D-698.
16
R IGID P AVEMENT R ECOMMENDATIONS
It is common for site grading to be completed for some time prior to placing aggregate base. We
strongly recommend that just prior to placement of the aggregate base course that the subgrade
be Proof Roll Tested. This will allow any softened and disturbed areas to be identified and properly
reworked and recompacted.
We recommend that the rigid pavement section consist of the following minimum compacted
thickness of the aggregate base. A California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of less than 2% has been
assumed for the soil types present at the site and a CBR of 4% has been assumed for engineered
fill.
Rigid Pavement Section

Concrete Pavement Course1 Thickness, inches
4000 psi – Type I Air Entrained Concrete3 6.0

Aggregate Base - TDOT 303D2 8.0
1. All areas should be prepared following the recommendations in this report.
2. The aggregate base should consist of a crushed limestone aggregate meeting the requirements of the
Tennessee Department of Transportation (TDOT) specification for Mineral Aggregate Base, Section 303
for Type "A" base, Class "A" aggregates, utilizing aggregate gradation "D." The aggregate base should
be compacted to a minimum of 98% of its maximum dry density, as determined by Standard Proctor
Test, ASTM D-698.
3. Concrete should be reinforced with welded wire fabric or reinforcing bars to assist in controlling
cracking from drying shrinkage and thermal changes. Sawed or formed control joints should be included
for each 225 square feet of area or less (15 feet by 15 feet). Saw cuts should not cut through the welded
wire fabric or reinforcing steel and dowels should be utilized at formed and/or cold joints.
17
K ARST (S INKHOLE ) A CTIVITY

Karst geologic conditions include closed ground surface depressions shaped by the dissolution
of a layer or layers of soluble bedrock, usually carbonate rock such as limestone or dolomite.
Construction projects in karst are subject to some risk of encountering or developing sinkholes
and require an awareness of the site conditions that are unique to this geology. We recommend
the following measures be considered:
During grading activities the ground surface should be observed for indications of subsurface
sinkhole activity. These indications could include areas of excessively soft or wet soil or sudden
changes in coloration.
Care should be taken to avoid creating localized low areas where surface water could pond.
Provide positive drainage at all times. If rain is anticipated, use a smooth drum roller to seal the
exposed ground surface to prevent water infiltration.
Exposed bedrock conditions should be over excavated to allow the placement of a fine grained
soil cap over the rock area to prevent seepage of surface water and possible subsurface erosion.
Any changes to the ground surface such as depressions or dropouts should be immediately
brought to the attention of the geotechnical engineer. The site conditions can be evaluated and
an appropriate method of repair can be developed.
Utility trenches should not be backfilled with open graded gravel to limit subsurface, lateral water
movement on the site. We recommend the use of select, crushed gravel, with fines, (TDOT 303)
and/or fined grained soil for backfill material.
18
C ONSTRUCTION C ONSIDERATIONS
Moisture Sensitive Soil - Unstable subgrade conditions will develop during general construction
operations, particularly if the soils are wetted and/or subjected to repetitive construction traffic.
Should unstable subgrade conditions develop, stabilization measures will need to be employed.
Upon completion of filling and grading, care should be taken to maintain the subgrade moisture
content prior to construction of floor slabs and pavements. Construction traffic over the completed
subgrade should be avoided to the extent practical. The site should also be graded to prevent
ponding of surface water on the prepared subgrades or in excavations. If the subgrade should
become frozen, desiccated, saturated, or disturbed, the affected material should be removed, or
these materials should be scarified, moisture conditioned, and recompacted prior to floor slab
construction.
Site Drainage - Drainage should be controlled during construction and once the site is completed
to prevent ponding of surface water. If necessary, pumps, ditches, or other grading methods
should be used to prevent ponding surface water. Roof water should be collected into piping and
conducted away from the building areas to prevent moisture related soil movements.
Areas Excavated to Finish Subgrade - All areas of the site that are excavated to the finish
subgrade elevation should be evaluated for soil/rock strength and type. Areas should be Proof
Roll Tested under the observation of the geotechnical engineer to determine if additional
stabilization is recommended.
Excavations - Temporary excavations will probably be required during grading operations. The
grading contractor, by his contract, is usually responsible for designing and constructing stable,
temporary excavations and should shore, slope, or bench the sides of the excavations as
required, to maintain the stability of both the excavation sides and bottom. All excavations should
be sloped or braced to comply with applicable local, state, and federal safety regulations, including
the current OSHA Excavation and Trench Safety Standards.
All permanently excavated embankments less than 15 feet in height should be constructed with
a slope geometry of no steeper than 3H:1V. All excavated embankments greater than 15 feet in
height should be evaluated by the geotechnical engineer for stability. Embankments that will be
permanently maintained as grassed or lawn areas should not exceed a slope geometry of 3H:1V.
Drainage ditches or other methods of drainage control should exist above the embankment areas
to limit surface erosion and softening of embankment soil.
Fill Slopes - All fill embankments less than 10 feet in height should be constructed with a slope
geometry of no steeper than 3H:1V. All fill embankments greater than 10 feet in height should be
evaluated for stability. Embankments that will be permanently maintained as grassed or lawn
areas should not exceed a slope geometry of 3H:1V.
All new fill soil should be placed and compacted to the recommended density. Fill soil placed in
existing sloping areas should use a series of horizontal benches or terraces to tie the existing soil
and proposed new fill together. The benching operation should begin at the toe of the slope.
Benches should be placed as required to ensure that no fill is placed on sloping surfaces.
Benched areas should be stripped of organics and soft or wet soil conditions.
Organic topsoil and soft/wet soil deposits that are located under the proposed soil embankments
will require removal or stabilization prior to new soil fill placement in this area. All fill areas should
19
be Proof Roll Tested and evaluated under the observation of a geotechnical engineer prior to the
initial backfill soil placement.
Shallow Bedrock/Boulder Fill - During utility line and foundation excavation, there is potential that
boulder fill and shallow bedrock will be encountered. Excavation methods requiring a rock drill or
hammer should be anticipated.
Construction Observation - The site grading and foundation construction should be performed
under the observation of a geotechnical engineer and/or their representative to assist with
continued evaluation of soil conditions during the construction process.
Plan Review - The design civil/site preparation and foundation plans for the project should be
provided to the geotechnical engineer to assist with the review process.
20
GENERAL QUALIFICATIONS
This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of the City of Johnson City for the design and
construction of the planned Winged Der Park Addition in Johnson City, Tennessee. This report has
been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practice for
specific application to this project. The conclusions contained in this report are based upon
applicable standards of our practice in this geographic area at the time this report was prepared.
No other warranty, expressed or implied, is made.
Foundation Systems Engineering is not responsible for any claims, damages, or liability
associated with any other party’s interpretation of this report’s subsurface data or reuse of this
report’s subsurface data or engineering analysis without our express written authorization.
The analyses and professional opinions submitted herein are based, in part, upon the data
obtained from the subsurface evaluation. The nature and extent of subsurface variations between
the test borings will not become evident until construction.
We recommend that the services of a geotechnical engineer be obtained for the final design and
construction phases of the project to provide engineering evaluation and testing services.
21
APPENDICIES
Test Pit Location Plan

Test Pit Records Area
Topographic Map
Area Geology Map
Aerial Photograph
General Notes
Rock Descriptions
22
APPENDICIES
TEST PIT
OBSERVATION RECORD
TEST PIT NO: 1 PROJECT NAME: Winged Deer Park Addition
EXCAVATOR: Bobcat E50 PROJECT LOCATION: Johnson City, TN
OBSERVED BY: Allen Browning, MS, PE FSE PROJECT NO: 721336
DATE EXCAVATED: 12-15-2021
DEPTH (FEET) MATERIAL DESCRIPTION CONSISTENCY ESTIMATE

0.0 Vegetation
0.0 - 8.0 RESIDUAL, Tan Red Silty Clay Very Soft to Medium
Notes: Test Pit terminated at 8.0 feet. Groundwater not encountered
www.FSEPC.com
TEST PIT
OBSERVATION RECORD

0.0 Vegetation
0.0 - 8.0 RESIDUAL, Tan Red Silty Clay with rock fragments Very Soft to Medium
www.FSEPC.com
TEST PIT
OBSERVATION RECORD

0.0 Vegetation
0.0 - 1.0 RESIDUAL, Brown Tan Red Silty Clay with boulder size rock fragments
Notes: Test Pit refusal at 1.0 feet on boulder sized rock. Groundwater not encountered
www.FSEPC.com
TEST PIT
OBSERVATION RECORD

0.0 Vegetation
0.0 - 8.0 RESIDUAL, Tan Red Silty Clay Very Soft to Medium
www.FSEPC.com
TEST PIT
OBSERVATION RECORD

0.0 - 0.5 Vegetation/Rock Fragments
0.5 - 4.0 RESIDUAL, Tan Red Silty Clay Medium to Stiff
4.0 - 8.0 RESIDUAL, Brown Tan Clayey Silt Stiff
www.FSEPC.com
TEST PIT
OBSERVATION RECORD

0.0 Vegetation
0.0 - 5.5 RESIDUAL, Tan Red Silty Clay Very Soft to Soft
Notes: Test Pit refusal at 5.5’ on bedrock. Groundwater not encountered
www.FSEPC.com
TEST PIT
OBSERVATION RECORD

0.0 Vegetation/Rock Fragments
0.0 - 2.0 RESIDUAL, Tan Red Silty Clay Soft
www.FSEPC.com
TEST PIT
OBSERVATION RECORD

0.0 Vegetation
0.0 - 5.0 RESIDUAL, Tan Red Silty Clay Very Soft
5.0 - 8.0 RESIDUAL, Red Tan Brown Clayey Silt with sand seams Soft
www.FSEPC.com
TEST PIT
OBSERVATION RECORD

0.0 - 1.0 Vegetation/ RESIDUAL, Tan Red Silty Clay
1.0 - 4.0 Top Soil/Brown Tan Clayey Silt with loam Very Soft to Medium
4.0 - 8.0 RESIDUAL, Tan Red Silty Clay Medium
www.FSEPC.com
TEST PIT
OBSERVATION RECORD

0.0 Vegetation
0.0 - 5.0 RESIDUAL, Red Yellow Tan, Clayey Silt Very Soft to Medium
www.FSEPC.com
TEST PIT
OBSERVATION RECORD

0.0 Vegetation
0.0 - 7.5 RESIDUAL, Tan Red Silty Clay with Iron Staining Soft to Stiff
7.5 - 8.0 RESIDUAL, Red Tan Clayey Silty Stiff
www.FSEPC.com
TEST PIT
OBSERVATION RECORD

0.0 Vegetation
0.0 - 7.5 RESIDUAL, Tan Red Silty Clay Soft to Stiff
7.5 - 8.0 RESIDUAL, Red Tan Clayey Silty Stiff
www.FSEPC.com
TEST PIT
OBSERVATION RECORD

0.0 - 1.0 RESIDUAL, Tan Red Silty Clay with rock fragments Soft
www.FSEPC.com
TEST PIT
OBSERVATION RECORD

0.0 - 0.5 Vegetation/Top Soil
0.5 - 5.0 RESIDUAL, Tan Red Silty Clay Very Soft to Stiff
Notes: Test Pit refusal at 5.0 feet on bedrock. Groundwater not encountered
www.FSEPC.com
TEST PIT
OBSERVATION RECORD

0.0 Vegetation
0.0 - 8.0 RESIDUAL, Brown Tan Red Silty Clay Very Soft to Medium
www.FSEPC.com
TEST PIT
OBSERVATION RECORD

0.0 - 0.5 RESIDUAL, Brown Tan Red Silty Clay with rock fragments Soft
www.FSEPC.com
TEST PIT
OBSERVATION RECORD

0.0 Vegetation/Surface Rock
0.0 - 8.0 RESIDUAL, Tan Red Silty Clay Very Soft to Stiff
www.FSEPC.com
Client Foundation Systems Engineering, P.C. CML File #: 721336
Sample ID TP-2 Project: Winged Deer Park Addition
From: 2' Project
Sample Dates: December 15, 2021 Location: Johnson City, TN
Report Date: December 17, 2021 ASTM Specs D-4318 & D-422
Moisture Content
(%): 36.9
Total Sample
Weight (grams): 500
GRADATION
Cumlative Percent
Percent
Retained (%)
Retained (%) (%)
3" 0.0 0.0 100.0
3/4" 0.0 0.0 100.0
No. 4 0.8 0.8 99.2
No. 10 0.1 0.9 99.1
No. 40 1.7 2.6 97.4
No. 200 23.9 26.5 73.5
Pan 73.5 100.0 0.0

ATTERBERG LIMITS
Liquid Limit 47
Plastic Limit 26
Plasticity Index 21
USCS Classification SC2
Notes:
1. Testing Performed by Mr. Jeff Dorton and Mr. Garry Higgins of CML.
2. Classification based off soil gradation.
Reviewed By: Allen Browning, MS, PE
P.O. Box 5186 - Johnson City, TN 37602 - Phone: (423) 926-0762, Fax : (423) 926-0558
Client Foundation Systems Engineering, P.C. CML File #: 721336
Sample ID TP-10 Project: Winged Deer Park Addition
From: 2' Project
Sample Dates: December 15, 2021 Location: Johnson City, TN
Report Date: December 17, 2021 ASTM Specs D-4318 & D-422
Moisture Content
(%): 30.3
Total Sample
Weight (grams): 500
GRADATION
Cumlative Percent
Percent
Retained (%)
Retained (%) (%)
3" 0.0 0.0 100.0
3/4" 0.0 0.0 100.0
No. 4 0.7 0.7 99.3
No. 10 1.0 1.7 98.3
No. 40 6.0 7.7 92.3
No. 200 7.2 14.9 85.1
Pan 85.1 100.0 0.0

ATTERBERG LIMITS
Liquid Limit 52
Plastic Limit 35
Plasticity Index 17
USCS Classification MH2
Notes:
1. Testing Performed by Mr. Jeff Dorton and Mr. Garry Higgins of CML.
2. Classification based off atterberg limits.
Reviewed By: Allen Browning, MS, PE
P.O. Box 5186 - Johnson City, TN 37602 - Phone: (423) 926-0762, Fax : (423) 926-0558
CML PROJECT NO: 721336
PROJECT NAME: WINGDEER
PROJECT LOCATION: JOHNSON CITY, TENNESSEE
DATE: 12/10/2021 Page 1 of 2
SOIL DATA SUMMARY

Sample Moisture
Boring Liquid Plastic Plasticity Unified Soil
Depth Content
Number Limit Limit Index Classification
(feet) (%)
TP-1 1.0 31.2
TP-1 2.0 23.3
TP-1 3.0 35.8
TP-1 5.0 31.2
TP-1 8.0 35.1
TP-2 1.0 37.9
TP-2 2.0 36.9 47 26 21 SC
TP-2 3.0 42.0
TP-2 5.0 40.8
TP-2 8.0 25.7
TP-3 1.0 23.4
TP-4 1.0 43.3
TP-4 2.0 41.8
TP-4 3.0 42.1
TP-4 5.0 33.0
TP-4 8.0 36.6
TP-5 1.0 29.5
TP-5 2.0 22.1
TP-5 3.0 39.3
TP-5 5.0 15.7
TP-5 8.0 16.0
TP-6 1.0 44.1
TP-6 2.0 42.2
TP-6 3.0 36.2
TP-6 5.5 40.7
TP-7 1.0 35.8
TP-7 2.0 3.6
TP-8 1.0 14.8
TP-8 2.0 10.5
TP-8 3.0 31.3
TP-8 5.0 14.9
TP-8 8.0 14.8
TP-9 1.0 16.4
TP-9 2.0 16.2
TP-9 3.0 15.2
TP-9 5.0 30.6
TP-9 8.0 37.6
PO Box 5186 - Johnson City, Tennessee, 37602  www. http://constructionmaterialslaboratory.com
423-926-0762(p)/423-926-0558(f)
CML PROJECT NO: 721336
PROJECT NAME: WINGDEER
PROJECT LOCATION: JOHNSON CITY, TENNESSEE
DATE: 12/10/2021 Page 2 of 2
SOIL DATA SUMMARY

Sample Moisture
Boring Liquid Plastic Plasticity Unified Soil
Depth Content
Number Limit Limit Index Classification
(feet) (%)
TP-10 1.0 10.5
TP-10 2.0 30.3 52 35 17 MH
TP-10 3.0 25.8
TP-10 8.0 39.5
TP-11 1.0 40.8
TP-11 2.0 36.4
TP-11 3.0 33.7
TP-11 5.0 40.3
TP-11 8.0 18.5
TP-12 1.0 41.4
TP-12 2.0 40.1
TP-12 3.0 39.5
TP-12 5.0 45.8
TP-12 8.0 50.2
TP-13 1.0 32.7
TP-14 1.0 31.4
TP-14 2.0 33.0
TP-14 3.0 31.8 52 35 17 MH
TP-14 5.0 28.7
TP-14 8.0 37.7
TP-15 1.0 27.6
TP-15 2.0 27.3
TP-15 3.0 29.7
TP-15 5.0 36.5
TP-15 8.0 34.8
TP-17 1.0 29.4
TP-17 2.0 31.7
TP-17 3.0 38.4
TP-17 5.0 32.8
TP-17 8.0 33.9
PO Box 5186 - Johnson City, Tennessee, 37602  www. http://constructionmaterialslaboratory.com

423-926-0762(p)/423-926-0558(f)
COMPACTION TEST REPORT for Curve No. 2
88
87
32.0%, 86.4 pcf
86
Dry density, pcf
85
84
83
28.5 30 31.5 33 34.5 36 37.5
Water content, %
Test specification: ASTM D 698-91 Procedure A Standard
Elev/ Classification Nat. %> %<

Sp.G. LL PI
Depth USCS AASHTO Moist. #4 No.200
3' - 5' N/A N/A 38.3 N/A N/A
TEST RESULTS MATERIAL DESCRIPTION

Tan Red Silty Clay
Maximum dry density = 86.4 pcf
Optimum moisture = 32.0 %
Project No. 721336 Client: City of Johnson City Remarks:
Project: Winged Deer Park Addition
Date: 12/17/2021
Location: TP-4 Sample Number: 2
Construction Materials Laboratory
Johnson City, Tennessee Figure 2 of 2
Tested By: Gary Higgins Checked By: Allen Browning, MS, PE, MSI
COMPACTION TEST REPORT for Curve No. 1
88
87 31.2%, 86.9 pcf
86
Dry density, pcf
85
84
83
29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Water content, %
Test specification: ASTM D 698-91 Procedure A Standard
Elev/ Classification Nat. %> %<

Sp.G. LL PI
Depth USCS AASHTO Moist. #4 No.200
3' - 5' N/A N/A 39.9 N/A N/A
TEST RESULTS MATERIAL DESCRIPTION

Tan Red Silty Clay
Maximum dry density = 86.9 pcf
Optimum moisture = 31.2 %
Project No. 721336 Client: City of Johnson City Remarks:
Project: Winged Deer Park Addition
Date: 12/17/2021
Location: TP-12 Sample Number: 1
Construction Materials Laboratory
Johnson City, Tennessee Figure 1 of 1
Tested By: Gary Higgins Checked By: Allen Browning, MS, PE, MSI
GENERAL NOTES
WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENT:
Water levels indicated on the boring logs are the levels measured in the borings at the times indicated.
Groundwater levelsat other times and other locations across the site could vary. In pervious soils, the indicated
levels may reflect the location of groundwater. In low permeability soil, the accurate determination of
groundwater levels may not be suitable with only short-term observations.
DESCRIPTIVE SOIL CLASSIFICATION:
Soil classification is based on the Unified Soil Classification System. Coarse Grained Soils have more than
50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; their principal descriptors are: boulders, cobbles, gravel or
sand. Fine Grained Soils have less than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; they are principally
described as clays if they are plastic and silts if they are slightly plastic or non-plastic. Major constituents may
be added as modifiers and minor constituents may be added according to the relative proportions based on
grain size. In addition to gradation, coarse-grained soils are defined on the basis of their in-place relative
density and fine grained soils on the basis of their consistency.
GENERAL NOTES
Description of Rock Properties
WEATHERING
Fresh Rock fresh, crystals bright, few joints may show slight staining. Rock rings under hammer if crystalline.
Very slight Rock generally fresh, joints stained, some joints may show thin clay coatings, crystals in broken face
show bright. Rock rings under hammer if crystalline.
Slight Rock generally fresh, joints stained, and discoloration extends into rock up to 1 in. Joints may contain clay.
In granitoid rocks some occasional feldspar crystals are dull and discolored. Crystalline rocks ring under
hammer.
Moderate Significant portions of rock show discoloration and weathering effects. In granitoid rocks, most feldspars are
dull and discolored; some show clayey. Rock has dull sound under hammer and shows significant loss of
strength as compared with fresh rock.
Moderately severe All rock except quartz discolored or stained. In granitoid rocks, all feldspars dull and discolored and
majority show kaolinization. Rock shows severe loss of strength and can be excavated with geologist's pick.
Severe All rock except quartz discolored or stained. Rock "fabric" clear and evident, but reduced in strength to
strong soil. In granitoid rocks, all feldspars kaolinized to some extent. Some fragments of strong rock
usually left.
Very severe All rock except quartz discolored or stained. Rock "fabric" discernible, but mass effectively reduced to "soil"
with only fragments of strong rock remaining.
Complete Rock reduced to "soil". Rock "fabric" not discernible or discernible only in small, scattered locations. Quartz
may be present as dikes or stringers.
HARDNESS (for engineering description of rock- not to be confused with Moh's scale for minerals)
Very hard Cannot be scratched with knife or sharp pick. Breaking of hand specimens requires several hard
blows of geologist's pick.
Hard Can be scratched with knife or pick only with difficulty. Hard blow of hammer required to detach hand
specimen.
Moderately hard Can be scratched with knife or pick. Gouges or grooves to ¼ in. deep can be excavated by hard blow of
point of a geologist's pick. Hand specimens can be detached by moderate blow.
Medium Can be grooved or gouged 1/16 in. deep by firm pressure on knife or pick point. Can be excavated in
small chips to pieces about 1-in. maximum size by hard blows of the point of a geologist's pick.
Soft Can be gouged or grooved readily with knife or pick point. Can be excavated in chips to pieces several
inches in size by moderate blows of a pick point. Small thin pieces can be broken by finger pressure.
Can be carved with knife. Can be excavated readily with point of pick. Pieces 1-in. or more in thickness
Very soft
can be broken with finger pressure. Can be scratched readily by fingernail.
a
Joint, Bedding, and Foliation Spacing in Rock
Spacing Joints Bedding/Foliation
Less than 2 in. Very close Very thin
2 in. - 1 ft. Close Thin
1 ft. - 3 ft. Moderately close Medium
3ft. - 10 ft. Wide Thick
More than 10 ft. Very wide Very thick
a. Spacing refers to the distance normal to the planes, of the described feature, which are parallel to each other or nearly so.
a
Rock Quality Designator (RQD) Joint Openness Descriptors
RQD, as a percentage Diagnostic description Openness Descriptors
Exceeding 90 Excellent No Visible Separation Tight
90 - 75 Good Less than 1/32 in. Slightly open
75 - 50 Fair 1/32 to 1/8 in. Moderately open
50 -25 Poor 1/8 to 3/8 in. Open
Less than 25 Very poor 3/8 in. to 0.1 ft. Moderately wide
a. RQD (given as a percentage) = length of core in pieces Greater than 0.1 ft. Wide
4 in. and longer/length of run.
References: American Society of Civil Engineers. Manuals and Reports on Engineering Practice - No. 56. Subsurface Investigation for Design
and Construction of Foundations of Buildings. New York: American Society of Civil Engineers, 1976. U.S. Department of
the Interior, Bureau of Reclamation, Engineering Geology Field Manual.

Winged Deer 1Specs

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Winged Deer 1Specs

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PROJECT MANUAL

WINGED DEER PARK

City of Johnson City, TN

Proposal Due Date/Time

City of Johnson City

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

GENERAL CONTRACT FORM

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF FORMS WITH IRAN DIVESTMENT ACT

DRUG FREE WORKPLACE

BID ENVELOPE FORM

SUPPLEMENTAL BID PAGES:

CONSTRUCTION PAYMENT BOND

CONSTRUCTION PERFORMANCE BOND

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 1000 Summary ....................................................................................................................... 2

03 3000 Cast-in-Place Concrete ................................................................................................ 12

04 0511 Mortar and Masonry Grout ........................................................................................... 5

05 1200 Structural Steel Framing ............................................................................................... 7

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

06 1000 Rough Carpentry ........................................................................................................... 9

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 2113 Board Insulation ............................................................................................................ 6

08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames .................................................................................. 9

09 2216 Non-Structural Metal Framing ...................................................................................... 4

11 6833 Outdoor Sports Equipment............................................................................................ 4

12 3600 Countertops ................................................................................................................... 5

22 0500 Common Work for Plumbing........................................................................................ 7

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

23 0500 Common Work for HVAC ............................................................................................ 7

26 0000 General Electrical.......................................................................................................... 4

31 0519.3 Geotextiles .................................................................................................................... 4

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 1116 Subbase Courses ........................................................................................................... 4

33 0500 Common Work Results for Utilities.............................................................................. 11

Geotechnical Exploration Report – Bay View Village Apartments ....................................................... 78

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

4. OPTIONAL PRE-BID WEB MEETING

Join Zoom Meeting

Meeting ID: 819 3450 6578

5. LICENSES, FEES, PERMITS

10. DRUG FREE WORKPLACE

13. RETAINAGE ESCROW

15. RIGHTS AND OPTIONS OF THE CITY OF JOHNSON CITY

16. BID WITHDRAWAL DUE TO ERROR

REQUIRED COVERAGE (marked by “x”) MINIMUM LIMITS

INSURANCE AGENT'S/BROKER’S STATEMENT:

AGENCY NAME: ________________________________ AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE: ______________________________

CONTRACTOR’S NAME: ______________________________ AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE: ___________________________

1. General Insurance Requirements:

Insurance Guide-Builders Risk

2. Contractor’s Insurance – Occurrence Basis:

i. General aggregate limit is to apply per project;

iii. Action of Independent Contractors;

iv. Contractual Liability including protection for the Contractor from

v. Personal Injury Liability including coverage for offenses related

vi. Explosion, Collapse, or Underground (XCU) hazards.

 Professional Liability/Miscellaneous Errors and Omissions insurance which will

Insurance Guide-Builders Risk

 Builder’s Risk Insurance

3. Commercial General or other Liability Insurance – Claims-made Basis:

i. Agree to provide certificates of insurance evidencing the above

Insurance Guide-Builders Risk

4. Alternative Coverage (Self Insurance)

5. Limits of Liability Coverage

AGENCY NAME: __ AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE:

CONTRACTOR’S NAME: ____ AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE: _

ADDENDA ACKNOWLEDGEMENT: , , , , ,

Subscribed and sworn to before me this _ day of ________, _.